Machine Design Solution Manual

MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed.
1-1-1
PROBLEM 1-1
Statement: It is often said, "Build a better mousetrap and the world will beat a path to your door." Consider
this problem and write a goal statement and a set of at least 12 task specifications that you would
apply to its solution. Then suggest 3 possible concepts to achieve the goal. Make annotated,
freehand sketches of the concepts.
Solution:
Goal Statement: Create a mouse-free environment.
Task Specifications:
1. Cost less than $1.00 per use or application.

2. Allow disposal without human contact with mouse.
3. Be safe for other animals such as house pets.
4. Provide no threat to children or adults in normal use.
5. Be a humane method for the mouse.
6. Be environmentally friendly.
7. Have a shelf-life of at least 3 months.
8. Leave no residue.
9. Create minimum audible noise in use.
10. Create no detectable odors within 1 day of use.
11. Be biodegradable.
12. Be simple to use with minimal written instructions necessary.
Concepts and sketches are left to the student. There are an infinity of possibilities.
2011 Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and written permission should be
obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical,P0101.xmcd
photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write to: Rights and Permissions Department,
Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458.
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed. 1-2-1
PROBLEM 1-2
Statement: A bowling machine is desired to allow quadriplegic youths, who can only move a joystick, to
engage in the sport of bowling at a conventional bowling alley. Consider the factors involved,
write a goal statement, and develop a set of at least 12 task specifications that constrain this
problem. Then suggest 3 possible concepts to achieve the goal. Make annotated, freehand
sketches of the concepts.
Solution:
Goal Statement: Create a means to allow a quadriplegic to bowl.
1. Cost no more than $2 000.

2. Portable by no more than two able-bodied adults.
3. Fit through a standard doorway.
4. Provide no threat of injury to user in normal use.
5. Operate from a 110 V, 60 Hz, 20 amp circuit.
6. Be visually unthreatening.
7. Be easily positioned at bowling alley.
8. Have ball-aiming ability, controllable by user.
9. Automatically reload returned balls.
10. Require no more than 1 able-bodied adult for assistance in use.
11. Ball release requires no more than a mouth stick-switch closure.
PROBLEM 1-3
Statement: A quadriplegic needs an automated page turner to allow her to read books without assistance.
Consider the factors involved, write a goal statement, and develop a set of at least 12 task
specifications that constrain this problem. Then suggest 3 possible concepts to achieve the goal.
Make annotated, freehand sketches of the concepts.
Solution:
Goal Statement: Create a means to allow a quadriplegic to read standard books with minimum assistance.
1. Cost no more than $1 000.

2. Useable in bed or from a seated position
3. Accept standard books from 8.5 x 11 in to 4 x 6 in in planform and up to 1.5 in thick.
4. Book may be placed, and device set up, by able-bodied person.
5. Operate from a 110 V, 60 Hz, 15 amp circuit or by battery power.
6. Be visually unthreatening and safe to use.
7. Require no more than 1 able-bodied adult for assistance in use.
8. Useable in absence of assistant once set up.
9. Not damage books.
10. Timing controlled by user.
11. Page turning requires no more than a mouth stick-switch closure.
PROBLEM 1-4
Statement: Convert a mass of 1 000 lbm to (a) lbf, (b) slugs, (c) blobs, (d) kg.
2
lbf
sec
Units: blob :=
in
Given: Mass M := 1000

lb
Solution: See Mathcad file P0104.
1. To determine the weight of the given mass, multiply the mass value by the acceleration due to gravity, g.
W := M
g W = 1000 lbf
2. Convert mass units by assigning different units to the units place-holder when displaying the mass value.
Slugs M = 31.081 slug
Blobs M = 2.59 blob
Kilograms M = 453.592 kg
PROBLEM 1-5
Statement: A 250-lbm mass is accelerated at 40 in/sec2. Find the force in lb needed for this acceleration.
in
Given: Mass M := 250
lb Acceleration a := 40
2
sec
1. To determine the force required, multiply the mass value, in slugs, by the acceleration in feet per second squared.
Convert mass to slugs: M = 7.770 slug

-2
Convert acceleration to feet per second squared: a = 3.333s
ft
F := M
a F = 25.9 lbf
PROBLEM 1-6
Statement: Express a 100-kg mass in units of slugs, blobs, and lbm. How much does this mass weigh?
2
lbf sec
Units: blob
in
Given: M 100 kg
Assumptions: The mass is at sea-level and the gravitational acceleration is

ft in m
g 32.174 or g 386.089 or g 9.807
2 2 2
sec sec sec

1. Convert mass units by assigning different units to the units place-holder when displaying the mass value.
The mass, in slugs, is M 6.85 slug
The mass, in blobs, is M 0.571 blob
The mass, in lbm, is M 220.5 lb
Note: Mathcad uses lbf for pound-force, and lb for pound-mass.
2. To determine the weight of the given mass, multiply the mass value by the acceleration due to gravity, g.
The weight, in lbf, is W M g W 220.5 lbf
The weight, in N, is W M g W 980.7 N
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s), write to: Rights and Permissions Department,
PROBLEM 1-7
Statement: Prepare an interactive computer program (using, for example, Excell, Mathcad, or TKSolver) from
which the cross-sectional properties for the shapes shown in the inside front cover can be
calculated. Arrange the program to deal with both ips and SI unit systems and convert the results
between those systems.
Solution: See the inside front cover and Mathcad file P0107.
1. Rectangle, let:
b 3 in h 4 in
2
Area A b h A 12.000 in
2
A 7742 mm
3
b h 4
Moment about x-axis Ix Ix 16.000 in
12 6 4
Ix 6.660 10 mm
3
h b 4
Moment about y-axis Iy Iy 9.000 in
12
6 4
Iy 3.746 10 mm
Ix
Radius of gyration about x-axis kx kx 1.155 in
A
kx 29.329 mm
Iy
Radius of gyration about y-axis ky ky 0.866 in
A
ky 21.997 mm
4
Polar moment of inertia Jz Ix Iy Jz 25.000 in
7 4
Jz 1.041 10 mm
2. Solid circle, let:
D 3 in
2
D 2
Area A A 7.069 in
4 2
A 4560 mm
4
D 4
64 6 4
Ix 1.655 10 mm
4
D 4
64
6 4
Iy 1.655 10 mm
Ix
A
kx 19.05 mm
P0107.xmcd
Iy
A ky 19.05 mm
4
D 4
Polar moment of inertia Jz Jz 7.952 in
32 6 4
Jz 3.310 10 mm
3. Hollow circle, let:
D 3 in d 1 in
Area A

4
D d
2
2
A 6.283 in
2
2
A 4054 mm
Moment about x-axis Ix

64

D d
4 4 4
Ix 3.927 in
6 4
Ix 1.635 10 mm
Moment about y-axis Iy

64
D d
4 4 4
Iy 3.927 in
6 4
Iy 1.635 10 mm
Ix
A
kx 20.08 mm
Iy
A
ky 20.08 mm
Polar moment of inertia Jz

32
D d
4 4 Jz 7.854 in
4
6 4
Jz 3.269 10 mm
4. Solid semicircle, let:
D 3 in R 0.5 D R 1.5 in
2
D 2
Area A A 3.534 in
8
2
A 2280 mm
4 4
Moment about x-axis Ix 0.1098 R Ix 0.556 in
5 4
Ix 2.314 10 mm
4
R 4
8
5 4
Iy 8.275 10 mm
P0107.xmcd
Ix
A
kx 10.073 mm
Iy
A
ky 19.05 mm
4
6 4
Jz 1.059 10 mm
Distances to centroid a 0.4244 R a 0.637 in

a 16.17 mm
b 0.5756 R b 0.863 in
b 21.93 mm
5. Right triangle, let:

b 2 in h 1 in
b h 2
Area A A 1.000 in
2 2
A 645 mm
3
b h 4
36 4 4
Ix 2.312 10 mm
3
h b 4
36
4 4
Iy 9.250 10 mm
Ix
A
kx 5.987 mm
Iy
A
ky 11.974 mm
4
5 4
Jz 1.156 10 mm
P0107.xmcd
PROBLEM 1-8
Statement: Prepare an interactive computer program (using, for example, Excell, Mathcad, or TKSolver) from
which the mass properties for the solids shown in the page opposite the inside front cover can be
calculated. Arrange the program to deal with both ips and SI unit systems and convert the results
between those systems.
2
lbf sec
Units: blob
in
Solution: See the page opposite the inside front cover and Mathcad file P0108.
3
1. Rectangular prism, let: a 2 in b 3 in c 4 in 0.28 lbf in
3
Volume V a b c V 24.000 in
3
V 393290 mm
V
Mass M M 0.017 blob
g
M 3.048 kg

2
M a b
2 Ix 0.019 blob in
2
12
2
Ix 2130.4 kg mm

2
M a c
2 Iy 0.029 blob in
2
12
2
Iy 3277.6 kg mm
Moment about z-axis Iz

2
M b c
2 Iz 0.036 blob in
2
12
2
Iz 4097.0 kg mm
Ix
M
kx 26.437 mm
Iy
M
ky 32.791 mm
Iz
Radius of gyration about z-axis kz kz 1.443 in
M
kz 36.662 mm
3
2.Cylinder, let: r 2 in L 3 in 0.30 lbf in
2 3
Volume V r L V 37.699 in
3
V 617778 mm
V
Mass M M 0.029 blob
g
M 5.13 kg
2
M r 2
Moment about x-axis Ix Ix 0.059 blob in
2
2
Ix 6619.4 kg mm

M 3 r L
2 2 Iy 0.051 blob in
2
12
2
Iy 5791.9 kg mm

M 3 r L
2 2 Iz 0.051 blob in
2
12
2
Iz 5791.9 kg mm
Ix
M
kx 35.921 mm
Iy
M
ky 33.601 mm
Iz
M
kz 33.601 mm
3. Hollow cylinder, let:

3
a 2 in b 3 in L 4 in 0.28 lbf in
Volume 2
V b a L
2
V 62.832 in
3
3
V 1029630 mm
V
Mass M M 0.046 blob
g
M 7.98 kg

M
2
a b
2 Ix 0.296 blob in
2
2 4 2
Ix 3.3 10 kg mm

M
2
3 a 3 b L
2
2
Iy 0.209 blob in
2
12 4 2
Iy 2.4 10 kg mm

M
2
3 a 3 b L
2
2
Iz 0.209 blob in
2
12 4 2
Iz 2.4 10 kg mm
Ix
M
kx 64.758 mm
Iy
M
ky 54.378 mm
Iz
M
kz 54.378 mm
4. Right circular cone, let:
3
r 2 in h 5 in 0.28 lbf in
2
r h 3
Volume V V 20.944 in
3
3
V 343210 mm
V
Mass M M 0.015 blob
g
M 2.66 kg
3 2 2
Moment about x-axis Ix M r Ix 0.018 blob in
10
2
Ix 2059.4 kg mm
Moment about y-axis Iy M

12r2 3h2 Iy 0.023 blob in
2
80
2
Iy 2638.5 kg mm
Moment about z-axis Iz M

12r2 3h2 Iz 0.023 blob in
2
80
2
Iz 2638.5 kg mm
Ix
M
kx 27.824 mm
Iy
M
ky 31.495 mm
Iz
M
kz 31.495 mm
5. Sphere, let:
r 3 in
4 3 3
Volume V r V 113.097 in
3 3
V 1853333 mm
V
Mass M M 0.082 blob
g
M 14.364 kg
2 2 2
Moment about x-axis Ix M r Ix 0.295 blob in
5 2
Ix 33362 kg mm
2 2 2
Moment about y-axis Iy M r Iy 0.295 blob in
5
2
Iy 33362 kg mm
2 2 2
Moment about z-axis Iz M r Iz 0.295 blob in
5 2
Iz 33362 kg mm
Ix
M
kx 48.193 mm
Iy
M
ky 48.193 mm
Iz
M
kz 48.193 mm
PROBLEM 1-9
Statement: Convert the template in Problem 1-7 to have and use a set of functions or subroutines that can be
called from within any program in that language to solve for the cross-sectional properties of the
shapes shown on the inside front cover.
Solution: See inside front cover and Mathcad file P0109.
1. Rectangle: Area A ( b h ) b h
3
b h
Moment about x-axis Ix( b h )
12
3
h b
Moment about y-axis Iy( b h )
12
2
D
2. Solid circle: Area A ( D)
4
4
D
Moment about x-axis Ix( D)
64
4
D
Moment about y-axis Iy( D)
64
3. Hollow circle: Area A ( D d )

2
D d
2
4
Moment about x-axis Ix( D d )

4
D d
4
64
Moment about y-axis Iy( D d )

4
D d
4
64
4. Solid semicircle:
2
D
Area A ( D)
8
4
Moment about x-axis Ix( R) 0.1098 R
4
R
Moment about y-axis Iy( R)
8
5. Right triangle:
b h
Area A ( b h )
2
3
b h
Moment about x-axis Ix( b h )
36
3
h b
Moment about y-axis Iy( b h )
36
PROBLEM 1-10
Statement: Convert the template in Problem 1-8 to have and use a set of functions or subroutines that can be
called from within any program in that language to solve for the cross-sectional properties of the
shapes shown on the page opposite the inside front cover.
Solution: See the page opposite the inside front cover and Mathcad file P0110.
1 Rectangular prism:
Volume V ( a b c) a b c
V ( a b c)
Mass M ( a b c )
g
Moment about x-axis Ix( a b c )

M ( a b c ) a b 2 2
12
Moment about y-axis Iy( a b c )

M ( a b c ) a c 2
2
12
Moment about z-axis Iz( a b c )

M ( a b c ) b c 2
2
12
2. Cylinder:
2
Volume V ( r L) r L
V ( r L)
Mass M ( r L )
g
2
M ( r L ) r
Moment about x-axis Ix( r L )
2
Moment about y-axis Iy( r L )

M ( r L ) 3 r L
2
2
12
Moment about z-axis Iz( r L )

M ( r L ) 3 r L
2
2
12
3. Hollow cylinder:
Volume 2
V ( a b L) b a L
2
V ( a b L)
Mass M ( a b L )
g
Moment about x-axis Ix( a b L )

M ( a b L )
2
a b
2
2
Moment about y-axis Iy( a b L )

M ( a b L )
2
3 a 3 b L
2
2
12
Moment about z-axis Iz( a b L )

M ( a b L )
2
3 a 3 b L
2
2
12
4. Right circular cone:
2
r h
Volume V ( r h )
3
V ( r h )
Mass M ( r h )
g
3 2
Moment about x-axis Ix( r h ) M ( r h ) r
10
Moment about y-axis I ( r h ) M ( r h )

12 r 3 h
2 2
y
80
Moment about z-axis Iz( r h ) M ( r h )

12r2 3h2
80
5. Sphere:
4 3
Volume V ( r) r
3
V ( r)
Mass M ( r )
g
2 2
Moment about x-axis Ix( r ) M ( r ) r
5
2 2
Moment about y-axis Iy( r ) M ( r ) r
5
2 2
Moment about z-axis Iz( r ) M ( r ) r
5
PROBLEM 2-1
Statement: Figure P2-1 shows stress-strain curves for three failed tensile-test specimens. All are plotted on
the same scale.
(a) Characterize each material as brittle or ductile.
(b) Which is the stiffest?
(c) Which has the highest ultimate strength?
(d) Which has the largest modulus of resilience?
(e) Which has the largest modulus of toughness?
Solution: See Figure P2-1 and Mathcad file P0201.
1. The material in Figure P2-1(a) has a moderate amount of strain beyond the yield point, P2-1(b) has very little, and
P2-1(c) has considerably more than either of the other two. Based on this observation, the material in Figure
P2-1(a) is mildly ductile, that in P2-1(b)is brittle, and that in P2-1(c) is ductile.
2. The stiffest material is the one with the grearesr slope in the elastic range. Determine this by dividing the rise by
the run of the straight-line portion of each curve. The material in Figure P2-1(c) has a slope of 5 stress units per
strain unit, which is the greatest of the three. Therefore, P2-1(c) is the stiffest.
3. Ultimate strength corresponds to the highest stress that is achieved by a material under test. The material in
Figure P2-1(b) has a maximum stress of 10 units, which is considerably more than either of the other two.
Therefore, P2-1(b) has the highest ultimate strength.
4. The modulus of resilience is the area under the elastic portion of the stress-starin curve. From observation of the
three graphs, the stress and strain values at the yield points are:
P2-1(a) ya := 5 ya := 5
P2-1(b) yb := 9 yb := 2
P2-1(c) yc := 5 yc := 1
Using equation (2.7), the modulus of resiliency for each material is, approximately,
1
P21a := ya ya P21a = 12.5
2
1
P21b := yb yb P21b = 9
2
1
P21c := yc yc P21c = 2.5
2
P2-1 (a) has the largest modulus of resilience
5. The modulus of toughness is the area under the stress-starin curve up to the point of fracture. By inspection,
P2-1 (c) has the largest area under the stress-strain curve therefore, it has the largest modulus of toughness.
P0201.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-2
Statement: Determine an approximate ratio between the yield strength and ultimate strength for each material
shown in Figure P2-1.
1. The yield strength is the value of stress at which the stress-strain curve begins to be nonlinear. The ultimate
strength is the maximum value of stress attained during the test. From the figure, we have the following values
of yield strength and tensile strength:
Figure P2-1(a) S ya := 5 S ua := 6
Figure P2-1(b) S yb := 9 S ub := 10
Figure P2-1(c) S yc := 5 S uc := 8
2. The ratio of yield strength to ultimate strength for each material is:
S ya
Figure P2-1(a) ratioa := ratioa = 0.83
S ua
S yb
Figure P2-1(b) ratiob := ratiob = 0.90
S ub
S yc
Figure P2-1(c) ratioc := ratioc = 0.63
S uc
P0202.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-3
Statement: Which of the steel alloys shown in Figure 2-19 would you choose to obtain
(a) Maximum strength
(b) Maximum modulus of resilience
(c) Maximum modulus of toughness
(d) Maximum stiffness
Given: Young's modulus for steel E 207 GPa

Solution: See Figure 2-19 and Mathcad file P0203.
1. Determine from the graph: values for yield strength, ultimate strength and strain at fracture for each material.
Steel Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain

AISI 1020: Sy1020 300 MPa Sut 1020 400 MPa f 1020 0.365
Note: The 0.2% offset method was used to define a yield strength for the AISI 1095 and the 4142 steels.
2. From the values of Sut above it is clear that the AISI 4142 has maximum strength.
3. Using equation (2-7) and the data above, determine the modulus of resilience.
2
1 Sy1020 MN m
UR1020 UR1020 0.22
2 E 3
m
2
1 Sy1095 MN m
UR1095 UR1095 0.73
2 E 3
m
2
1 Sy4142 MN m
UR4142 UR4142 6.18
2 E 3
m
Even though the data is approximate, the AISI 4142 clearly has the largest modulus of resilience.
4. Using equation (2-8) and the data above, determine the modulus of toughness.
MN m
Sy1020 Sut 1020 f 1020
1
UT1020 UT1020 128
2 3
m
MN m
Sy1095 Sut 1095 f 1095
1
UT1095 UT1095 88
2 3
m
MN m
Sy4142 Sut 4142 f 4142
1
UT4142 UT4142 121
2 3
m
Since the data is approximate, there is no significant difference between the 1020 and 4142 steels. Because of
the wide difference in shape and character of the curves, one should also determine the area under the
curves by graphical means. When this is done, the area under the curve is about 62 square units for 1020
and 66 for 4142. Thus, they seem to have about equal toughness, which is about 50% greater than that for
the 1095 steel.
5. All three materials are steel therefore, the stiffnesses are the same.
PROBLEM 2-4
Statement: Which of the aluminum alloys shown in Figure 2-21 would you choose to obtain
Given: Young's modulus for aluminum E 71.7 GPa

1. Determine, from the graph, values for yield strength, ultimate strength and strain at fracture for each material.
Alum Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain

1100: Sy1100 120 MPa Sut 1100 130 MPa f 1100 0.170
2024-T351: Sy2024 330 MPa Sut 2024 480 MPa f 2024 0.195
7075-T6: Sy7075 510 MPa Sut 7075 560 MPa f 7075 0.165
Note: The 0.2% offset method was used to define a yield strength for all of the aluminums.
2. From the values of Sut above it is clear that the 7075-T6 has maximum strength.
2
1 Sy1100 MN m
UR1100 UR1100 0.10
2 E 3
m
2
1 Sy2024 MN m
UR2024 UR2024 0.76
2 E 3
m
2
1 Sy7075 MN m
UR7075 UR7075 1.81
2 E 3
m
Even though the data is approximate, the 7075-T6 clearly has the largest modulus of resilience.
MN m
Sy1100 Sut 1100 f 1100
1
UT1100 UT1100 21
2 3
m
MN m
Sy2024 Sut 2024 f 2024
1
UT2024 UT2024 79
2 3
m
MN m
Sy7075 Sut 7075 f 7075
1
UT7075 UT7075 88
2 3
m
Even though the data is approximate, the 7075-T6 has the largest modulus of toughness.
5. All three materials are aluminum therefore, the stiffnesses are the same.
PROBLEM 2-5
Statement: Which of the thermoplastic polymers shown in Figure 2-22 would you choose to obtain

1. Determine, from the graph, values for yield strength, ultimate strength, strain at fracture, and modulus of
elasticity for each material.
Plastic Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain Mod of Elasticity

Nylon 101: SyNylon 63 MPa Sut Nylon 80 MPa f Nylon 0.52 ENylon 1.1 GPa
HDPE: SyHDPE 15 MPa Sut HDPE 23 MPa f HDPE 3.0 EHDPE 0.7 GPa
PTFE: SyPTFE 8.3 MPa Sut PTFE 13 MPa f PTFE 0.51 EPTFE 0.8 GPa
2. From the values of Sut above it is clear that the Nylon 101 has maximum strength.
2
1 SyNylon MN m
URNylon URNylon 1.8
2 ENylon 3
m
2
1 SyHDPE MN m
URHDPE URHDPE 0.16
2 EHDPE 3
m
2
1 SyPTFE MN m
URPTFE URPTFE 0.04
2 EPTFE 3
m
Even though the data is approximate, the Nylon 101 clearly has the largest modulus of resilience.
MN m
SyNylon Sut Nylon f Nylon
1
UTNylon UTNylon 37
2 3
m
MN m
SyHDPE SutHDPE f HDPE
1
UTHDPE UTHDPE 57
2 3
m
MN m
SyPTFE SutPTFE f PTFE
1
UTPTFE UTPTFE 5
2 3
m
Even though the data is approximate, the HDPE has the largest modulus of toughness.
5. The Nylon 101 has the steepest slope in the (approximately) elastic range and is, therefore, the stiffest of the
three materials..
PROBLEM 2-6
Statement: A metal has a strength of 414 MPa at its elastic limit and the strain at that point is 0.002. What is
the modulus of elasticity? What is the strain energy at the elastic limit? Assume that the test
speimen is 12.8-mm dia and has a 50-mm gage length. Can you define the type of metal based on
the given data?
Given: Elastic limit: Strength S el 414 MPa Strain el 0.002
Test specimen: Diameter d o 12.8 mm Length Lo 50 mm

1. The modulus of elasticity is the slope of the stress-strain curve, which is a straight line, in the elastic region.
Since one end of this line is at the origin, the slope (modulus of elasticity) is
S el
E E 207 GPa
el
2. The strain energy per unit volume at the elastic limit is the area under the stress-strain curve up to the elastic
limit. Since the curve is a straight line up to this limit, the area is one-half the base times the height, or
1 kN m
U'el S el el U'el 414
2 3
m
The total strain energy in the specimen is the strain energy per unit volume times the volume,
2
d o
Uel U'el Lo Uel 2.7 N m
4
3. Based on the modulus of elasticity and using Table C-1, the material is steel.
PROBLEM 2-7
Statement: A metal has a strength of 41.2 kpsi (284 MPa) at its elastic limit and the strain at that point is
0.004. What is the modulus of elasticity? What is the strain energy at the elastic limit?
Assume that the test speimen is 0.505-in dia and has a 2-in gage length. Can you define the
type of metal based on the given data?
Given: Elastic limit: Strength S el 41.2 ksi Strain el 0.004 S el 284 MPa
Test specimen: Diameter d o 0.505 in Length Lo 2.00 in
S el 6
E E 10.3 10 psi E 71 GPa
el
1 lbf in kN m
U'el S el el U'el 82.4 U'el 568
2 3 3
in m
2
d o
Uel U'el Lo Uel 33.0 in lbf
4
3. Based on the modulus of elasticity and using Table C-1, the material is aluminum.
PROBLEM 2-8
Statement: A metal has a strength of 134 MPa at its elastic limit and the strain at that point is 0.006. What is
the modulus of elasticity? What is the strain energy at the elastic limit? Assume that the test
speimen is 12.8-mm dia and has a 50-mm gage length. Can you define the type of metal based on
the given data?
Given: Elastic limit: Strength S el 134 MPa Strain el 0.003
Test specimen: Diameter d o 12.8 mm Length Lo 50 mm
S el
E E 45 GPa
el
1 kN m
U'el S el el U'el 201
2 3
m
2
d o
Uel U'el Lo Uel 1.3 N m
4
3. Based on the modulus of elasticity and using Table C-1, the material is magnesium.
PROBLEM 2-9
Statement: A metal has a strength of 100 kpsi (689 MPa) at its elastic limit and the strain at that point is
0.006. What is the modulus of elasticity? What is the strain energy at the elastic limit?
Assume that the test speimen is 0.505-in dia and has a 2-in gage length. Can you define the
type of metal based on the given data?
Given: Elastic limit: Strength S el 100 ksi Strain el 0.006

S el 689 MPa
Test specimen: Diameter d o 0.505 in Length Lo 2.00 in

S el 6
E E 16.7 10 psi E 115 GPa
el
1 lbf in 3 kN m
U'el S el el U'el 300 U'el 2 10
2 3 3
in m
2
d o
Uel U'el Lo Uel 120.18 in lbf
4
3. Based on the modulus of elasticity and using Table C-1, the material is titanium.
PROBLEM 2-10
Statement: A material has a yield strength of 689 MPa at an offset of 0.6% strain. What is its modulus of
resilience?
6
Units: MJ 10 joule
Given: Yield strength S y 689 MPa
Yield strain y 0.006
1. The modulus of resilience (strain energy per unit volume) is given by Equation (2.7) and is approximately
1 MJ
UR S y y UR 2.067 UR 2.1 MPa
2 3
m
PROBLEM 2-11
Statement: A material has a yield strength of 60 ksi (414 MPa) at an offset of 0.2% strain. What is its
modulus of resilience?
6
Units: MJ 10 joule
Given: Yield strength S y 60 ksi S y 414 MPa
Yield strain y 0.002
1. The modulus of resilience (strain energy per unit volume) is given by Equation (2.7) and is approximately
1 in lbf MJ
UR S y y UR 60 UR 0.414 UR 0.414 MPa
2 3 3
in m
PROBLEM 2-12
Statement: A steel has a yield strength of 414 MPa, an ultimate tensile strength of 689 MPa, and an
elongation at fracture of 15%. What is its approximate modulus of toughness? What is the
approximate modulus of resilience?
Given: S y 414 MPa S ut 689 MPa f 0.15
1. Determine the modulus of toughness using Equation (2.8).
Sy S ut MN m
UT f UT 82.7 UT 82.7 MPa
2 m
3
2. Determine the modulus of resilience using Equation (2.7) and Young's modulus for steel: E 207 GPa
2
1 Sy kN m
UR UR 414 UR 0.41 MPa
2 E 3
m
PROBLEM 2-13
Statement: The Brinell hardness of a steel specimen was measured to be 250 HB. What is the material's
approximate tensile strength? What is the hardness on the Vickers scale? The Rockwell scale?
Given: Brinell hardness of specimen HB 250

1. Determine the approximate tensile strength of the material from equations (2.10), not Table 2-3.
S ut 0.5 HB ksi S ut 125 ksi S ut 862 MPa
2. From Table 2-3 (using linear interpolation) the hardness on the Vickers scale is
HB 241
HV ( 292 253 ) 253 HV 263
277 241
3. From Table 2-3 (using linear interpolation) the hardness on the Rockwell C scale is
HB 241
HRC ( 28.8 22.8) 22.8 HRC 24.3
277 241
PROBLEM 2-14
Statement: The Brinell hardness of a steel specimen was measured to be 340 HB. What is the material's
approximate tensile strength? What is the hardness on the Vickers scale? The Rockwell scale?
Given: Brinell hardness of specimen HB 340

1. Determine the approximate tensile strength of the material from equations (2.10), not Table 2-3.
S ut 0.5 HB ksi S ut 170 ksi S ut 1172 MPa
2. From Table 2-3 (using linear interpolation) the hardness on the Vickers scale is
HB 311
HV ( 360 328 ) 328 HV 359
341 311
3. From Table 2-3 (using linear interpolation) the hardness on the Rockwell C scale is
HB 311
HRC ( 36.6 33.1) 33.1 HRC 36.5
341 311
PROBLEM 2-15
Statement: What are the principal alloy elements of an AISI 4340 steel? How much carbon does it have? Is it
hardenable? By what techniques?
1. Determine the principal alloying elements from Table 2-5 for 43xx steel..
1.82% Nickel
0.50 or 0.80% Chromium
0.25% Molybdenum
2. From "Steel Numbering Systems" in Section 2.6, the carbon content is
From the last two digits, the carbon content is 0.40%.
3. Is it hardenable? Yes, all of the alloying elements increase the hardenability. By what techniques? It can be
through hardened by heating, quenching and tempering; and it can also be case hardened (See Section 2.4).
P0215.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-16
1. Determine the principal alloying elements from Table 2-5 for 10xx steel.
Carbon only, no alloying elements
3. Is it hardenable? Yes, as a high-carbon steel, it has sufficient carbon content for hardening. By what
techniques? It can be through hardened by heating, quenching and tempering; and it can also be case
hardened (See Section 2.4).
P0216.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-17
1. Determine the principal alloying elements from Table 2-5 for 61xx steel..
0.15% Vanadium
0.60 to 0.95% Chromium
3. Is it hardenable? Yes, all of the alloying elements increase the hardenability. By what techniques? It can be
through hardened by heating, quenching and tempering; and it can also be case hardened (See Section 2.4).
P0217.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-18
Statement: Which of the steels in Problems 2-15, 2-16, and 2-17 is the stiffest?

1. None. All steel alloys have the same Young's modulus, which determines stiffness.
P0218.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-19
Statement: Calculate the specific strength and specific stiffness of the following materials and pick one for
use in an aircraft wing spar.
Given: Material Code Ultimate Strength Young's Modulus Weight Density

6 lbf
Steel st 0 Sut 80 ksi E 30 10 psi 0.28
st st st 3
in
6 lbf
Aluminum al 1 Sut 60 ksi E 10.4 10 psi 0.10
al al al 3
in
6 lbf
Titanium ti 2 Sut 90 ksi E 16.5 10 psi 0.16
ti ti ti 3
in
Index i 0 1 2

1. Specific strength is the ultimate tensile strength divided by the weight density and specific stiffness is the
modulus of elasticity divided by the weight density. The text does not give a symbol to these quantities.
Sut E
i 1 i 1
Specific strength Specific stiffness
in in
i i
286103 Steel 107106
600103 Aluminum 104106
Titanium
563103 103106
2. Based on the results above, all three materials have the same specific stiffness but the aluminum has the largest
specific strength. Aluminum for the aircraft wing spar is recommended.
PROBLEM 2-20
Statement: If maximum impact resistance were desired in a part, which material properties would you look for?
1. Ductility and a large modulus of toughness (see "Impact Resistance" in Section 2.1).
P0220.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-21 _____
Statement: Refer to the tables of material data in Appendix A and determine the strength-to-weight ratios of
the following material alloys based on their tensile yield strengths: heat-treated 2024 aluminum,
SAE 1040 cold-rolled steel, Ti-75A titanium, type 302 cold-rolled stainless steel.
Given: Material Yield Strength Specific Weight

3 kN
Mat "2024 Aluminum, HT" Sy 290 MPa 0.10 lbf in 27.14
1 1 1 1 3
m
3 kN
Mat "1040 CR Steel" Sy 490 MPa 0.28 lbf in 76.01
2 2 2 2 3
m
3 kN
Mat "Ti-75A Titanium" Sy 517 MPa 0.16 lbf in 43.43
3 3 3 3 3
m
3 kN
Mat "Type 302 CR SS" Sy 1138 MPa 0.28 lbf in 76.01
4 4 4 4 3
m
i 1 2 4
1. Calculate the strength-to-weight ratio for each material as described in Section 2.1.
Sy SWR
i i
SWR
i 4
i 10 m
"2024 Aluminum, HT" 1.068
0.645
Mat
"1040 CR Steel"
i "Ti-75A Titanium" 1.190
"Type 302 CR SS" 1.497

PROBLEM 2-22 _____
Statement: Refer to the tables of material data in Appendix A and determine the strength-to-weight ratios of
the following material alloys based on their ultimate tensile strengths: heat-treated 2024 aluminum
SAE 1040 cold-rolled steel, unfilled acetal plastic, Ti-75A titanium, type 302 cold-rolled stainless
steel.
Given: Material Tensile Strength Specific Weight

3 3
Mat "2024 Aluminum, HT" Sut 441 MPa 0.10 lbf in 27.14 kN m
1 1 1 1
3 3
Mat "1040 CR Steel" Sut 586 MPa 0.28 lbf in 76.01 kN m
2 2 2 2
3 3
Mat "Acetal, unfilled" Sut 60.7 MPa 0.051 lbf in 13.84 kN m
3 3 3 3
3 3
Mat "Ti-75A Titanium" Sut 586 MPa 0.16 lbf in 43.43 kN m
4 4 4 4
3 3
Mat "Type 302 CR SS" Sut 1310 MPa 0.28 lbf in 76.01 kN m
5 5 5 5
i 1 2 5
1. Calculate the strength-to-weight ratio for each material as described in Section 2.1.
Sut SWR
i i
SWR
i 4
i 10 m
"2024 Aluminum, HT" 1.625
"1040 CR Steel" 0.771

Mat "Acetal, unfilled" 0.438
i
"Ti-75A Titanium" 1.349
1.724
"Type 302 CR SS"
PROBLEM 2-23 _____
Statement: Refer to the tables of material data in Appendix A and calculate the specific stiffness of
aluminum, titanium, gray cast iron, ductile iron, bronze, carbon steel, and stainless steel.
Rank them in increasing order of this property and discuss the engineering significance of
these data.
3
Units: Mg 10 kg
Given: Material Modulus of Elasticity Density

3
Mat "Aluminum" E 71.7 GPa 2.8 Mg m
1 1 1
3
Mat "Titanium" E 113.8 GPa 4.4 Mg m
2 2 2
3
Mat "Gray cast iron" E 103.4 GPa 7.2 Mg m
3 3 3
3
Mat "Ductile iron" E 168.9 GPa 6.9 Mg m
4 4 4
3
Mat "Bronze" E 110.3 GPa 8.6 Mg m
5 5 5
3
Mat "Carbon steel" E 206.8 GPa 7.8 Mg m
6 6 6
3
Mat "Stainless steel" E 189.6 GPa 7.8 Mg m
7 7 7
i 1 2 7

1. Calculate the specific stiffness for each material as described in Section 2.1.
E E' 2
i i s
E'
i 6 2
i 10 m
"Aluminum"
25.6
"Titanium" 25.9
"Gray cast iron" 14.4
Mat "Ductile iron" 24.5
i
"Bronze" 12.8
"Carbon steel" 26.5
"Stainless steel"
24.3
2. Rank them in increasing order of specific stiffness.

E' 2
5 s
Mat "Bronze" 12.8
5 6 2
10 m
E' 2
3 s
Mat "Gray cast iron" 14.4
3 6 2
10 m
E' 2
7 s
Mat "Stainless steel" 24.3
7 6 2
10 m
E' 2
4 s
Mat "Ductile iron" 24.5
4 6 2
10 m
E' 2
1 s
Mat "Aluminum" 25.6
1 6 2
10 m
E' 2
2 s
Mat "Titanium" 25.9
2 6 2
10 m
E' 2
6 s
Mat "Carbon steel" 26.5
6 6 2
10 m
3. Bending and axial deflection are inversely proportional to the modulus of elasticity. For the same shape and
dimensions, the material with the highest specific stiffness will give the smallest deflection. Or, put another
way, for a given deflection, using the material with the highest specific stiffness will result in the least
weight.
PROBLEM 2-24
Statement: Call your local steel and aluminum distributors (consult the Yellow Pages) and obtain current
costs per pound for round stock of consistent size in low-carbon (SAE 1020) steel, SAE 4340
steel, 2024-T4 aluminum, and 6061-T6 aluminum. Calculate a strength/dollar ratio and a
stiffness/dollar ratio for each alloy. Which would be your first choice on a cost-efficiency
basis for an axial-tension-loaded round rod
(a) If maximum strength were needed?
(b) If maximum stiffness were needed?
Solution: Left to the student as data will vary with time and location.
PROBLEM 2-25
Statement: Call your local plastic stock-shapes distributors (consult the Yellow Pages) and obtain current
costs per pound for round rod or tubing of consistent size in plexiglass, acetal, nylon 6/6, and
PVC. Calculate a strength/dollar ratio and a stiffness/dollar ratio for each alloy. Which would
be your first choice on a cost-efficiency basis for an axial-tension-loaded round rod or tube of
particular diameters.
(a) If maximum strength were needed?
(b) If maximum stiffness were needed?
Solution: Left to the student as data will vary with time and location.
PROBLEM 2-26
Statement: A part has been designed and its dimensions cannot be changed. To minimize its deflections
under the same loading in all directions irrespective of stress levels, which material woulod you
choose among the following: aluminum, titanium, steel, or stainless steel?
1. Choose the material with the highest modulus of elasticity because deflection is inversely proportional to
modulus of elasticity. Thus, choose steel unless there is a corrosive atmosphere, in which case, choose
stainless steel.
P0226.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-27
Statement: Assuming that the mechanical properties data given in Appendix Table A-9 for some carbon
steels represents mean values, what is the value of the tensile yield strength for 1050 steel
quenched and tempered at 400F if a reliability of 99.9% is required?
Given: Mean yield strength S y 117 ksi S y 807 MPa
1. From Table 2-2 the reliability factor for 99.9% is Re 0.753. Applying this to the mean tensile strength gives
S y99.9 S y Re S y99.9 88.1 ksi S y99.9 607 MPa
PROBLEM 2-28
steels represents mean values, what is the value of the ultimate tensile strength for 4340 steel
Given: Mean ultimate tensile strength S ut 213 ksi S ut 1469 MPa
1. From Table 2-2 the reliability factor for 99.99% is Re 0.702. Applying this to the mean ultimate tensile
strength gives
S ut99.99 S ut Re S ut99.99 150 ksi S ut99.99 1031 MPa
PROBLEM 2-29
steels represents mean values, what is the value of the ultimate tensile strength for 4130 steel
quenched and tempered at 400F if a reliability of 90% is required?
Given: Mean ultimate tensile strength S ut 236 ksi S ut 1627 MPa
1. From Table 2-2 the reliability factor for 90% is Re 0.897. Applying this to the mean ultimate
tensile strength gives
S ut99.99 S ut Re S ut99.99 212 ksi S ut99.99 1460 MPa
PROBLEM 2-30
steels represents mean values, what is the value of the tensile yield strength for 4140 steel
Given: Mean yield strength S y 165 ksi S y 1138 MPa
1. From Table 2-2 the reliability factor for 99.999% is Re 0.659. Applying this to the mean
tensile
strength gives
S y99.9 S y Re S y99.9 109 ksi S y99.9 750 MPa
PROBLEM 2-31
Statement: A steel part is to be plated to give it better corrosion resistance. Two materials are being
considered: cadmium and nickel. Considering only the problem of galvanic action, which would
you chose? Why?
1. From Table 2-4 we see that cadmium is closer to steel than nickel. Therefore, from the standpoint of reduced
galvanic action, cadmium is the better choice. Also, since cadmium is less noble than steel it will be the material
that is consumed by the galvanic action. If nickel were used the steel would be consumed by galvanic action.
P0231.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-32
Statement: A steel part with many holes and sharp corners is to be plated with nickel. Two processes are
being considered: electroplating and electroless plating. Which process would you chose? Why?
1. Electroless plating is the better choice since it will give a uniform coating thickness in the sharp corners and in
the holes. It also provides a relatively hard surface of about 43 HRC.
P0232.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-33
Statement: What is the common treatment used on aluminum to prevent oxidation? What other metals can
also be treated with this method? What options are available with this method?
1. Aluminum is commonly treated by anodizing, which creates a thin layer of aluminum oxide on the surface.
Titanium, magnesium, and zinc can also be anodized. Common options include tinting to give various colors to
the surface and the use of "hard anodizing" to create a thicker, harder surface.
P0233.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-34
Statement: Steel is often plated with a less nobel metal that acts as a sacrificial anode that will corrode instead
of the steel. What metal is commonly used for this purpose (when the finished product will not be
exposed to saltwater), what is the coating process called, and what are the common processes used
to obtain the finished product?
1. The most commonly used metal is zinc. The process is called "galvanizing" and it is accomplished by
electroplating or hot dipping.
P0234.xmcd
PROBLEM 2-35
Statement: A low-carbon steel part is to be heat-treated to increase its strength. If an ultimate tensile
strength of approximately 550 MPa is required, what mean Brinell hardness should the part
have after treatment? What is the equivalent hardness on the Rockwell scale?
Given: Approximate tensile strength S ut 550 MPa
1. Use equation (2.10), solving for the Brinell hardness, HB.
S ut
S ut = 3.45 HB HB HB 159
3.45 MPa
2. From Table 2-3, the equivalent hardness on the Rocwell scale is 83.9HRB.
PROBLEM 2-36
Statement: A low-carbon steel part has been tested for hardness using the Brinell method and is found to
have a hardness of 220 HB. What are the approximate lower and upper limits of the ultimate
tensile strength of this part in MPa?
Given: Hardness HB 220
1. Use equation (2.10), solving for ultimate tensile strength.
Minimum: S utmin ( 3.45 HB 0.2 HB) MPa S utmin 715 MPa
Maximum: S utmax ( 3.45 HB 0.2 HB) MPa S utmax 803 MPa
PROBLEM 2-37
Statement: Figure 2-24 shows "guide lines" for minimum weight design when failure is the criterion. The
guide line, or index, for minimizing the weight of a beam in bending is f2/3/, where f is the
yield strength of a material and is its mass density. For a given cross-section shape the
weight of a beam with given loading will be minimized when this index is maximized. The
following materials are being considered for a beam application: 5052 aluminum, cold rolled;
CA-170 beryllium copper, hard plus aged; and 4130 steel, Q & T @ 1200F. The use of which of
these three materials will result in the least-weight beam?
3
Units: Mg kg
3
Given: 5052 Aluminum S ya 255 MPa a 2.8 Mg m
3
CA-170 beryllium copper S yb 1172 MPa b 8.3 Mg m
3
4130 steel S ys 703 MPa s 7.8 Mg m

1. The values for the mass density are taken from Appendix Table A-1 and the values of yield strength come
from from Tables A-2, A-4, and A-9 for aluminum, beryllium copper, and steel, respectively.
2. Calculate the index value for each material.
0.667 3
Sy Mg m
Index S y
0.667
MPa
Aluminum Ia Index S ya a Ia 14.4
Beryllium copper Ib Index S yb b Ib 13.4
Steel Is Index S ys s Is 10.2
The 5052 aluminum has the highest value of the index and would be the best choice to minimize weight.
PROBLEM 2-38
Statement: Figure 2-24 shows "guide lines" for minimum weight design when failure is the criterion. The
guide line, or index, for minimizing the weight of a member in tension is f/, where f is the
yield strength of a material and is its mass density. The weight of a member with given
loading will be minimized when this index is maximized. For the three materials given in Problem
2-37, which will result in the least weight tension member?
3
Units: Mg kg
3
Given: 5052 Aluminum S ya 255 MPa a 2.8 Mg m
3
CA-170 beryllium copper S yb 1172 MPa b 8.3 Mg m
3
4130 steel S ys 703 MPa s 7.8 Mg m

1. The values for the mass density are taken from Appendix Table A-1 and the values of yield strength come
from from Tables A-2, A-4, and A-9 for aluminum, beryllium copper, and steel, respectively.
S y Mg m 3
Index S y
MPa
Aluminum Ia Index S ya a Ia 91.1
Beryllium copper Ib Index S yb b Ib 141.2
Steel Is Index S ys s Is 90.1
The beryllium copper has the highest value of the index and would be the best choice to minimize weight.
PROBLEM 2-39
Statement: Figure 2-23 shows "guide lines" for minimum weight design when stiffness is the criterion. The
guide line, or index, for minimizing the weight of a beam in bending is E1/2/, where E is the
modulus of elasticity of a material and is its mass density. For a given cross-section shape the
weight of a beam with given stiffness will be minimized when this index is maximized. The
following materials are being considered for a beam application: 5052 aluminum, cold rolled;
CA-170 beryllium copper, hard plus aged; and 4130 steel, Q & T @ 1200F. The use of which of
these three materials will result in the least-weight beam?
3
Units: Mg kg
3
Given: 5052 Aluminum Ea 71.7 GPa a 2.8 Mg m
3
CA-170 beryllium copper Eb 127.6 GPa b 8.3 Mg m
3
4130 steel Es 206.8 GPa s 7.8 Mg m

1. The values for the mass density and modulus are taken from Appendix Table A-1.
0.5 3
E Mg m
Index( E )
0.5
GPa
Aluminum Ia Index Ea a Ia 3.0
Beryllium copper Ib Index Eb b Ib 1.4
Steel Is Index Es s Is 1.8
The 5052 aluminum has the highest value of the index and would be the best choice to minimize weight.
PROBLEM 2-40
Statement: Figure 2-24 shows "guide lines" for minimum weight design when stiffness is the criterion. The
guide line, or index, for minimizing the weight of a member in tension is E/, where E is the
modulus of elasticity of a material and is its mass density. The weight of a member with given
stiffness will be minimized when this index is maximized. For the three materials given in Problem
2-39, which will result in the least weight tension member?
3
Units: Mg kg
3
Given: 5052 Aluminum Ea 71.7 GPa a 2.8 Mg m
3
CA-170 beryllium copper Eb 127.6 GPa b 8.3 Mg m
3
4130 steel Es 206.8 GPa s 7.8 Mg m

1. The values for the mass density and modulus are taken from Appendix Table A-1.
3
E Mg m
Index( E )
GPa
Aluminum Ia Index Ea a Ia 25.6
Beryllium copper Ib Index Eb b Ib 15.4
Steel Is Index Es s Is 26.5
The steel has the highest value of the index and would be the best choice to minimize weight.
PROBLEM 3-1
Statement: Which load class from Table 3-1 best suits these systems?
(a) Bicycle frame
(b) Flag pole
(c) Boat oar
(d) Diving board
(e) Pipe wrench
(f) Golf club.
1. Determine whether the system has stationary or moving elements, and whether the there are constant or
time-varying loads.
(a) Bicycle frame Class 4 (Moving element, time-varying loads)
(b) Flag pole Class 2 (Stationary element, time-varying loads)
(c) Boat oar Class 2 (Low acceleration element, time-varying loads)
(d) Diving board Class 2 (Stationary element, time-varying loads)
(e) Pipe wrench Class 2 (Low acceleration elements, time-varying loads)
(f) Golf club Class 4 (Moving element, time-varying loads)
P0301.xmcd
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed. 3-2a-1
PROBLEM 3-2a
Statement: Draw free-body diagrams for the system of Problem 3-1a (bicycle frame).
Assumptions: 1. A two-dimensional model is adequate.
2. The lower front-fork bearing at C takes all of the thrust load from the front forks.
3. There are no significant forces on the handle bars.
Solution: See Mathcad file P0302a.
1. A typical bicycle frame is shown in Figure 3-2a. There are five points on the frame where external forces and
moments are present. The rider's seat is mounted through a tube at A. This is a rigid connection, capable of
transmitting two force components and a moment. The handle bars and front-wheel forks are supported by the
frame through two bearings, located at B and C. These bearings are capable of transmitting radial and axial
loads. The pedal-arm assembly is supported by bearings at D. These bearings are capable of transmitting radial
loads. The rear wheel-sprocket assembly is supported by bearings mounted on an axle fixed to the frame at E.
Ma Ra Rb B
A
Fax Fbr Fct
Fcr
Rc
Fay C
Rd
Re
Fey
Fex
E
Fdx D
Fdy
FIGURE 3-2a
Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-2a
2. The loads at B and C can be determined by analyzing a FBD of the front wheel-front forks assembly. The loads
at D can be determined by analyzing a FBD of the pedal-arm and front sprocket (see Problem 3-3), and the loads at E
can be determined by analyzing a FBD of the rear wheel-sprocket assembly.
3. With the loads at B, C, D, and E known, we can apply equations 3.3b to the FBD of the frame and solve for Fax ,
Fay , and Ma.
Fx : Fax Fbr cos( ) + Fcr cos( ) Fct sin( ) Fdx + Fex = 0 (1)
Fy : Fay Fbr sin( ) + Fcr sin( ) + Fct cos( ) Fdy + Fey = 0 (2)
Mz: Ma + ( Rbx Fby Rby Fbx ) + ( Rcx Fcy Rcy Fcx) ... = 0 (3)
+ ( R F R F ) + ( R F R F )
dx dy dy dx ex ey ey ex
P0302a.xmcd
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed. 3-2e-1
PROBLEM 3-2e
Statement: Draw free-body diagrams for the system of Problem 3-1e (pipe wrench).
Assumptions: A two-dimensional model is adequate.
Solution: See Mathcad file P0302e.
1. A typical pipe wrench with a pipe clamped in its jaw is shown in Figure 3-2e(a). When a force Fhand is applied on
the wrench, the piping system provides an equal and opposite force and a resisting torque, Tpipe.
Fhand
Tpipe
Fhand
(a) FBD of pipe wrench and pipe
Fbt
Fbn
Fax A

Fay
d b
(b) FBD of pipe wrench only
FIGURE 3-2e
Free Body Diagrams for Problem 3-2e
2. The pipe reacts with the wrench at the points of contact A and B. The forces here will be directed along the
common normals and tangents. The jaws are slightly tapered and, as a result, the action of Fhand tends to drive the
wrench further into the taper, increasing the normal forces. This, in turn, allows for increasing tangential forces. It is
the tangential forces that produce the turning torque.
3. Applying equations 3.3b to the FBD of the pipe wrench,
Fx : Fax + Fbn cos( ) Fbt sin( ) = 0 (1)
Fy : Fay + Fbn sin( ) + Fbt cos( ) Fhand = 0 (2)
M A: d ( Fbt cos( ) + Fbn sin( ) ) ( d + a ) Fhand = 0 (3)
4. These equations can be solved for the vertical forces if we assume is small so that sin() = 0 and cos () = 1.
P0302e.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-3
Statement: Draw a free-body diagram of the pedal-arm assembly from a bicycle with the pedal arms in the
horizontal position and dimensions as shown in Figure P3-1. (Consider the two arms, pedals and
pivot as one piece). Assuming a rider-applied force of 1500 N at the pedal, determine the torque
applied to the chain sprocket and the maximum bending moment and torque in the pedal arm.
Given: a 170 mm b 60 mm Frider 1.5 kN
Assumptions: The pedal-arm assembly is supprted by bearings at A and at B.

1. The free-body diagram (FBD) of the pedal-arm assembly (including the sprocket) is shown in Figure 3-3a. The
rider-applied force is Frider and the force applied by the chain (not shown) is Fchain. The radial bearing
reactions are Fax, Faz, Fbx, and Fbz. Thus, there are five unknowns Fchain, Fax, Faz, Fbx, and Fbz. In general, we
can write six equilibrium equations for a three-dimensional force system, but in this system there are no forces
in the y-direction so five equations are available to solve for the unknowns.
z
Fchain
Sprocket
Faz
a Fbz
Frider
A
b Arm B Arm (sectioned)
Fax
Fbx y
Pedal
(a) FBD of complete pedal-arm assembly
a
Tc
Frider
Mc
b Arm
Fc y
Pedal
(b) FBD of pedal and arm with section through the origin
FIGURE 3-3
Dimensions and Free Body Diagram of the pedal-arm assembly for Problem 3-3
2. The torque available to turn the sprocket is found by summing moments about the sprocket axis. From Figure
3-3a, it is
Ty-axis: a Frider r Fchain = a Frider Tsprocket = 0
Tsprocket a Frider Tsprocket 255 N m
where r is the sprocket pitch radius.
3. In order to determine the bending moment and twisting torque in the pedal arm, we will cut the arm with a
section plane that goes through the origin and is parallel to the y-z plane, removing everything beyond that
plane and replacing it with the internal forces and moments in the pedal arm at the section. The resulting
FBD is shown in Figure 3-3b. The internal force at section C is Fc the internal bending moment is Mc, and
the internal twisting moment (torque) is Tc. We can write three equilibrium equations to solve for these
three unknowns:
Shear force in pedal arm at section C

Fz : Fc Frider = 0 Fc Frider Fc 1.5 kN
Bending moment in pedal arm at section C
My-axis: a Frider Mc = 0 Mc a Frider Mc 255 N m
Twisting moment in pedal arm at section C
Mx-axis: b Frider Tc = 0 Tc b Frider Tc 90 N m
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach,4th Ed. 3-4-1
PROBLEM 3-4
Statement: The trailer hitch from Figure 1-1 has loads applied as shown in Figure P3-2. The tongue weight
of 100 kg acts downward and the pull force of 4905 N acts horizontally. Using the dimensions
of the ball bracket in Figure 1-5 (p. 15), draw a free-body diagram of the ball bracket and find the
tensile and shear loads applied to the two bolts that attach the bracket to the channel in Figure
1-1.
Given: a 40 mm b 31 mm c 70 mm d 20 mm
Mtongue 100 kg Fpull 4.905 kN t 19 mm
Assumptions: 1. The nuts are just snug-tight (no pre-load), which is the worst case.
2. All reactions will be concentrated loads rather than distributed loads or pressures.
1. The weight on the tongue is
Wtongue Mtongue g Wtongue 0.981 kN
2. The FBD of the hitch and bracket assembly is shown in Figure 3-4. The known external forces that act on the
ball are Fpull and Wtongue . The reactions on the bracket are at points C and D. The bolts at C provide tensile
(Fc2x) and shear (Fc2y) forces, and the bracket resists rotation about point D where the reaction force Fd2 is
applied by the channel to which the bracket is bolted.
3. Solving for the reactions by summing the horizontal and vertical forces and the moments about D:
Fx : Fpull Fc2x Fd2 = 0 (1)
Fy : Fc2y Wtongue = 0 (2)
MD : Fc2x d Fpull ( a t b d ) Wtongue c = 0 (3)
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A 2
B 19 = t B
31 = b Fc2x
C C
20 = d
D
D Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 3-4
Dimensions and Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-4
4. Solving equation (3) for Fc2x

Fpull ( a t b d ) Wtongue c
Fc2x Fc2x 30.41 kN (4)
d
5. Substituting into (1) and solving for Fd2
Fd2 Fc2x Fpull Fd2 25.505 kN (5)
6. Solving (2) for Fc2y
Fc2y Wtongue Fc2y 0.981 kN (6)
7. The loads applied to the two bolts that attach the bracket to the channel are:
Axial force on two bolts Fc2x 30.4 kN
Shear force on two bolts Fc2y 0.98 kN
We assume that each bolt would carry one half of these loads.
PROBLEM 3-5
Statement: For the trailer hitch of Problem 3-4, determine the horizontal force that will result on the ball from
accelerating a 2000-kg trailer to 60 m/sec in 20 sec.
Given: Mass of trailer Mtrailer 2000 kg
m
Final velocity vf 60
sec
Time to reach velocity 20 sec
Assumptions: 1. Acceleration is constant.

2. The rolling resistance of the tires and the wheel bearings is negligible.
1. From elementary kinematics, the acceleration required is
vf m
a a 3.00 (1)
2
sec
2. Using Newton's second law to find the force required to accelerate the trailer,
Fhitch Mtrailer a Fhitch 6.00 kN (2)
PROBLEM 3-6
an impact between the ball and the tongue of the 2000-kg trailer if the hitch deflects 2.8 mm
dynamically on impact. The tractor weighs 1000 kg. The velocity at impact is 0.3 m/sec.
Given: Mass of trailer Mtrailer 2000 kg

Dynamic deflection i 2.8 mm
Mass of tractor Mtractor 1000 kg
m
Impact velocity vi 0.3
sec
Assumptions: 1. The tractor is the "struck member" because the hitch is on the tractor and it is the hitch that
deflects.
2. Equations (3.9) and (3.10) can be used to model the impact.
1. The weight of the trailer (the "striking member") is
Wtrailer Mtrailer g Wtrailer 19.613 kN
2. The correction factor, from equation (3-15), is

1
0.857
Mtractor
1
3 Mtrailer
3. Eliminating E from equations (3.9a) and (3.10) and solving for the horizontal force on the ball Fi yields
Fi i = Mtrailer vi
1 1 2
2 2
2
Mtrailer vi
Fi Fi 55.1 kN
i
PROBLEM 3-7
Statement: The piston of an internal-combustion engine is connected to its connecting rod with a "wrist
pin." Find the force on the wrist pin if the 0.5-kg piston has an acceleration of 2 500 g.
Given: Mass of piston Mpiston 0.5 kg

Acceleration of piston a piston 2500 g
Assumptions: The force on the wrist pin due to the weight of the piston is very small compared with the
acceleration force.

4 m
1. The acceleration in m/s is a piston 2.452 10
2
sec
2. Using Newton's Second Law expressed in equation (3.1a), the force on the wrist pin is
Fwristpin Mpiston a piston Fwristpin 12.258 kN
PROBLEM 3-8 _____
Statement: A cam-follower system similar to that shown in Figure 3-15 has a mass m = 1 kg, a spring
constant k = 1000 N/m, and a damping coefficient d = 19.4 N-s/m. Find the undamped and
damped natural frequencies of this system.
1
Units: cps := 2 rad sec
1
Given: Mass M := 1 kg, Spring constant k := 1000 N m
1
Damping coefficient d := 19.4 N s m
1. Calculate the undamped natural frequency using equation 3.4.
k rad
n := n = 31.6 n = 5.03 cps
M sec
2. Calculate the undamped natural frequency using equation 3.7.
2

k d rad
d :=
M 2 M
d = 30.1
sec
d = 4.79 cps
P0308.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-9
Statement: A ViseGrip plier-wrench is drawn to scale in Figure P3-3. Scale the drawing for dimensions. Find
the forces acting on each pin and member of the assembly for an assumed clamping force of P =
4000 N in the position shown. What force F is required to keep it in the clamped position shown?
Given: Clamping force P 4.00 kN

Dimensions a 50.0 mm e 28.0 mm 21.0 deg
b 55.0 mm f 26.9 mm 129.2 deg
c 39.5 mm g 2.8 mm
d 22.0 mm h 21.2 mm
Assumptions: Links 3 and 4 are in a toggle position, i.e., the pin that joins links 3 and 4 is in line with the pins
that join 1 with 4 and 2 with 3.
1. The FBDs of the assembly and each individual link are shown in Figure 3-9. The dimensions, as scaled from
Figure P3-3 in the text, are given above and are shown on the link FBDs.
F 4
P
1
3 2
P
55.0 = b 50.0 = a
F14
39.5 = c 22.0 = d
F
129.2 1
4
F41 F34
F21 P

28.0 = e

P 2.8 = g

F43

3 F12
21.2 = h
F23 2
F32
26.9 = f
FIGURE 3-9
Free Body Diagrams for Problem 3-9
2. Looking first at Part 3, we see that it is a three-force body. Therefore, the lines of action of the three forces
must intersect at a point. But, since Parts 3 and 4 are in a toggle position, F43 and F23 are colinear, which
means that their x- and y-components must be equal and opposite, leading to the conclussion that F = 0.
P0309.xmcd 3-9-1
3. Now, looking at Part 1, we see that (for F = 0) it is also a three-force body, as is Part 2. In fact, the forces on
Part 1 are identical to those on Part 2. Solving for the unknown reactions on Parts 1 and 2,
Fx: F41 cos( 180 deg ) F21 cos( 180 deg) = 0 (a)
Fy: F41 sin( 180 deg ) F21 sin( 180 deg) P = 0 (b)
Solving equation (a) for F21
F41 cos( 180 deg )

F21 = (c)
cos( 180 deg)
Substituting equation (c) into (b)
F41 cos( 180 deg )

F41 sin( 180 deg ) sin( 180 deg) P = 0 (d)
cos( 180 deg)
Solving equation (d) for F41
P
F41
cos( 180 deg )
sin( 180 deg ) sin( 180 deg)
cos( 180 deg)
F41 cos( 180 deg ) F41 5.1 kN

F21
cos( 180 deg)
F21 7.5 kN
Checking moment balance on Part 1,
F41 sin( ) c F21 sin( 90 deg) d P a 0 kN m
The result is, within the accuracy of the scaled dimensions, zero as it must be.
4. The x and y components of the pin forces on Part 1 are
F41x F41 cos( 180 deg ) F41x 4.749 kN
F41y F41 sin( 180 deg ) F41y 1.823 kN
F21x F21 cos( 180 deg) F21x 4.749 kN
F21y F21 sin( 180 deg) F21y 5.823 kN
5. The forces on the pins at the ends of Part 4 are
F14 F41 F14 5.1 kN
F34 F14 F34 5.1 kN

F43 F34 F43 5.1 kN
F23 F43 F23 5.1 kN

P0309.xmcd 3-9-2
F12 F21 F12 7.5 kN
F32 F23 F32 5.1 kN
Checking moment equilibrium on Part 2,

F12 ( e cos( 90 deg) g sin( 90 deg) ) 0 kN m
F32 ( h cos( ) f sin( ) )
which is zero, as it must be.
P0309.xmcd 3-9-3
PROBLEM 3-10
Statement: An overhung diving board is shown in Figure P3-4a. Find the reaction forces and construct the
shear and moment diagrams for this board with a 100 kg person standing at the free end.
Determine the maximum shear force, maximum moment and their locations.
Given: Beam length L 2000 mm 2000 = L

Distance to support a 700 mm R1 P
Mass at free end M 100 kg
Assumptions: The weight of the beam is negligible

compared to the applied load and so can R2
be ignored.
700 = a
FIGURE 3-10A
Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-10
1. From inspection of Figure 3-10, write the load function equation

q(x) = -R1<x - 0>-1 + R2<x - a>-1 - P<x - L >-1
2. Integrate this equation from - to x to obtain shear, V(x)

V(x) = -R1<x - 0>0 + R2<x - a>0 - P<x - L >0
3. Integrate this equation from - to x to obtain moment, M(x)

M(x) = -R1<x - 0>1 + R2<x - a>1 - P<x - L >1
4. Determine the magnitude of the force, P P M g P 980.7 N
5. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = L, where
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0 V = R1 R2 P = 0 M = R1 L R2 ( L a ) = 0
La
R1 P R1 1821 N
a
R2 P R1 R2 2802 N
6. Define the range for x x 0 in 0.005 L L
7. For a Mathcad solution, define a step function S. This function will have a value of zero when x is less than z,
and a value of one when it is greater than or equal to z.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
8. Write the shear and moment equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the
effect of the singularity functions.
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) R2 S ( x a ) P S ( x L)
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) x R2 S ( x a ) ( x a ) P S ( x L) ( x L)
9. Plot the shear and moment diagrams.
Shear 1000
Diagram
0
V ( x)
N
1000
2000
0 500 1000 1500 2000
x
mm
Moment 0
Diagram
375
M ( x)
750
Nm
1125
1500
0 500 1000 1500 2000
x
mm
FIGURE 3-10B
Shear and Moment Diagrams for Problem 3-10
10. The maximum value of the shear force ocuurs throughout the distance from x = 0 to x = a and is
R1 1821 N
11. Find the maximum value of the bending moment by determining the value of x where the shear is zero.
Inspection of the shear diagram shows that this occurs at x = a.
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 1275 N m
PROBLEM 3-11
Statement: Determine the impact force and dynamic deflection that will result when the 100-kg person in
Problem 3-10 jumps up 250 mm and lands back on the board. Assume that the board weighs
29 kg and deflects 131 mm statically when the person stands on it. Find the reaction forces
and construct the shear and moment diagrams for this dynamic loading. Determine the
maximum shear force, maximum moment and their locations along the length of the board.

Distance to support a 700 mm R1 Fi
Mass of person mpers 100 kg
Mass of board mboard 29 kg
R2
Static deflection st 131 mm
Height of jump h 250 mm 700 = a
Assumptions: Equation (3.15) can be used to approximate a FIGURE 3-11A

mass correction factor. Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-11
1. The person is the moving object and the board is the struck object. The mass ratio to be used in equation
(3.15) for the correction factor is
mpers
massratio massratio 3.448
mboard
2. From equation (3.15), the correction factor is

1
0.912
1
1
3 massratio
3. The weight of the moving mass is Wpers mpers g Wpers 0.981 kN
4. The dynamic force is found by solving equation (3.14) for Fi.
2 h
Fi Wpers 1 1 Fi 3.056 kN
st
Fi
From this we see that the dynamic force ratio is 3.12
Wpers
q(x) = -R1<x - 0>-1 + R2<x - a>-1 - Fi<x - L >-1

V(x) = -R1<x - 0>0 + R2<x - a>0 - Fi<x - L >0

M(x) = -R1<x - 0>1 + R2<x - a>1 - Fi<x - L >1
8. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = L,
where both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0 V = R1 R2 Fi = 0 M = R1 L R2 ( L a ) = 0
L a
R1 Fi R1 5676 N
a
R2 Fi R1 R2 8733 N
10. For a Mathcad solution, define a step function S. This function will have a value of zero when x is less than
z, and a value of one when it is greater than or equal to z.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
11. Write the shear and moment equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get
the effect of the singularity functions.
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) R2 S ( x a ) Fi S ( x L)
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) x R2 S ( x a ) ( x a ) Fi S ( x L) ( x L)

Shear Diagram Moment Diagram
4 0
2
1
0
V ( x) M ( x)
2
kN kN m
2
3
4
6 4
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x x
m m
FIGURE 3-11B
13. The maximum value of the shear force ocuurs throughout the distance from x = 0 to x = a and is
R1 5676 N
Inspection of the shear diagram shows that this occurs at x = a.
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 3973 N m
PROBLEM 3-12
Statement: An overhung diving board is shown in Figure P3-4b. Find the reaction forces and construct the
shear and moment diagrams for this board with a 100 kg person standing at the free end.
Determine the maximum shear force, maximum moment and their locations.
Given: Beam length L 1300 mm 2000
Mass at free end M 100 kg 1300 = L
P
Assumptions: 1. The weight of the beam is negligible
compared to the applied load and so can
be ignored.
M1
R1
700
1. From inspection of Figure 3-12, write the load function
equation FIGURE 3-12A
q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - a>-1 - P<x - L >-1

V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - a>0 - P<x - L >0

M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - a>1 - P<x - L >1
4. Determine the magnitude of the force, P P M g P 980.7 N
At x = L+, V = M = 0 V = R1 P = 0 M = M1 R1 L = 0
R1 P R1 981 N
M1 R1 L M1 1275 m N
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 mm) P S ( x L)
M ( x) M1 S ( x 0 mm) R1 S ( x 0 mm) ( x 0 mm) P S ( x L) ( x L)

Shear 1000
Diagram
800
600
V ( x)
N
400
200
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
m
Moment 0
Diagram
300
600
M ( x)
Nm
900
1200
1500
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
m
FIGURE 3-12B
10. The maximum value of the shear force ocuurs throughout the distance from x = 0 to x = L and is
R1 981 N
Inspection of the shear diagram shows that this occurs at x = 0.
Mmax M ( 0 mm) Mmax 1275 N m
PROBLEM 3-13
Statement: Determine the impact force and dynamic deflection that will result when a 100-kg person jumps
up 25 cm and lands back on the board. Assume the board weighs 19 kg and deflects 8.5 cm
statically when the person stands on it. Find the reaction forces and construct the shear and
moment diagrams for this dynamic loading. Determine the maximum shear force, maximum
moment, and their locations along the length of the board.
Given: Total board length b 2000 mm

Supported length a 700 mm 2000
Mass of board mboard 19 kg 1300 = L
Static board deflection stat 85 mm Fi

Mass of person mperson 100 kg
Height of jump h 250 mm M1
R1
Assumptions: 1. The board can be modelled as a cantilever

beam with maximum shear and moment at the 700
edge of the support.
FIGURE 3-13A
1. The person impacts the board upon landing. Thus, the board is the struck object and the person is the
striking object. To determine the force exerted by the person we will first need to know the impact correction
factor from equation (3.15).
1
0.94 (1)
mboard
1
3 mperson
2. We can now use equation (3.14) to determine the impact force, Fi,
2 h
Fi mperson g 1 1 Fi 3.487 kN (2)
stat
3. Write an equation for the load function in terms of equations 3.17 and integrate the resulting function twice
using equations 3.18 to obtain the shear and moment functions. Note use of the unit doublet function to
represent the moment at the wall. For the beam in Figure 3-13,
q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - Fi<x - l>-1 (3)
V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - Fi<x - l>0 + C1 (4)
M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - Fi<x - l>1 + C1x+ C2 (5)
The reaction moment M1 at the wall is in the z direction and the forces R1 and Fi are in the y direction in
equation (4). All moments in equation (5) are in the z direction.
4. Because the reactions have been included in the loading function, the shear and moment diagrams both
close to zero at each end of the beam, making C1 = C2 = 0.
5. The reaction force R1 and the reaction moment M1 can be calculated from equations (4) and (5) respectively
by substituting the boundary conditions x = l+, V = 0, M = 0. Note that we can substitute l for l+ since their
difference is vanishingly small.
Unsupported beam length l b a l 1300 mm
V(l) = -M1<l - 0>-1 + R1<l - 0>0 - Fi<l - l>0 = 0
V = R1 Fi = 0 (6)
R1 Fi R1 3.487 kN
M(l) = -M1<l - 0>0 + R1<l - 0>1 - Fi<l - l>1 = 0
M = M1 R1 l Fi ( l l) = 0 (7)
M1 R1 l M1 4533 N m
6. To generate the shear and moment functions over the length of the beam, equations (4) and (5) must be
evaluated for a range of values of x from 0 to l, after substituting the above values of C1, C2, R1, and M1 in them.
For a Mathcad solution, define a step function S. This function will have a value of zero when x is less than the
dummy variable z, and a value of one when it is greater than or equal to z. It will have the same effect as the
singularity function.
Range of x x 0 in 0.005 l l
Unit step function S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
Write the shear and moment equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get
0 0
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) ( x 0 ) Fi S ( x l) ( x l)
(8)
0 1 1
M ( x) M1 S ( x 0 in) ( x 0 ) R1 S ( x 0 in) ( x 0 ) Fi S ( x l ) ( x l)
Plot the shear and moment diagrams (see below).

1
3
2
V ( x) M ( x)
2
kN kN m
3
1
4
0 5
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1 1.5
x x
m m
7. The graphs show that the shear force and the moment are both largest at x = 0. The function values of
these points can be calculated from equations (4) and (5) respectively by substituting x = 0 and evaluating the
singularity functions:
Vmax = V(0) = R1<0 - 0>0 - Fi<0 - l>0 = R1 (9)
Vmax R1 Vmax 3.49 kN
M.max = M(0) = -M1<0 - 0>0 + R1<0 - 0>1 - Fi<0 - l>1 = -M1 (10)
Mmax M1 Mmax 4533 N m
PROBLEM 3-14
Statement: Figure P3-5 shows a child's toy called a pogo stick. The child stands on the pads, applying half
her weight on each side. She jumps off the ground, holding the pads up against her feet, and
bounces along with the spring cushioning the impact and storing energy to help each rebound.
Find the natural frequency of the system, the static deflection of the spring with the child
standing still, and the dynamic force and deflection when the child lands after jumping 2 in off
the ground.
2
lbf sec
Units: blob :=
in
Given: Child's weight Wc := 60 lbf
1
Spring constant k := 100 lbf in
Pogo stick weight Wp := 5 lbf
Height of drop h := 2 in
Assumptions: 1. An approximate energy method will be acceptable.

2. The correction factor for energy dissipation will be applied.
1. Find the natural frequency of the (child/spring) system. Fi /2 Fi /2
Wc
Mass of child (striker) m := m = 0.155 blob
g
Wp
Mass of stick (struck) mb := mb = 0.013 blob
g
k rad
Natural frequency := = 25.367
m sec
P
f := f = 4.037 Hz
2
FIGURE 3-14
2. The static deflection of the spring with the child standing still is
Wc
Static deflection of spring st := st = 0.6 in
k
3. Determine the mass ratio correction factor from equation (3.15):
1
Correction factor := = 0.973
mb
1+
3 m
4. Using equation (3.14), determine the dynamic force.
2 h
Fi := Wc 1 + 1+ Fi = 224 lbf
st
PROBLEM 3-15
Statement: A pen plotter imparts a constant acceleration of 2.5 m/sec2 to the pen assembly, which travels in
a straight line across the paper. The moving pen assembly weighs 0.5 kg. The plotter weighs 5
kg. What coefficient of friction is needed between the plotter feet and the table top on which it
sits to prevent the plotter from moving when the pen accelerates?
2
Given: Acceleration of pen ass'y a 2.5 m sec
Mass of pen ass'y mpen 0.5 kg
Mass of plotter mplot 5 kg
1. The force imparted to the pen assembly by the internal drive mechanism must be reacted at the table top by
the plotter feet. The horizontal force at the feet will be equal to the force on the pen assembly and must be
less than or equal to the maximum friction force, which is the product of the coefficient of friction and the
normal force, which is the weight of the plotter.
Horizontal driving
force on pen ass'y Fpen mpen a Fpen 1.25 N
Weight of plotter Wplot mplot g Wplot 49.033 N
Minimum coefficient Fpen

of friction 0.025
Wplot
PROBLEM 3-16
Statement: A track to guide bowling balls is designed with two round rods as shown in Figure P3-6. The
rods are not parallel to one another but have a small angle between them. The balls roll on the
rods until they fall between them and drop onto another track. The angle between the rods is
varied to cause the ball to drop at different locations. Each rod's unsupported length is 30 in
and the angle between them is 3.2 deg. The balls are 4.5 in dia and weigh 2.5 lb. The center
distance between the 1-in-dia rods is 4.2 in at the narrow end. Find the distance from the
narrow end at which the ball drops through and determine the worst-case shear and moment
maximum for the rods as the ball rolls a distance from the narrow end that is 98% of the distance
to drop. Assume that the rods are simply supported at each end and have zero deflection under
the applied loading. (Note that assuming zero deflection is unrealistic. This assumption will be
relaxed in the next chapter after deflection has been discussed.)
Given: Unsupported rod length L 30 in Bowling ball weight W 2.5 lbf

Half-angle between rods 1.6 deg Rod diameter d 1.0 in
Bowling ball diameter D 4.5 in Half width of rod gap c 2.1 in
1. Calculate the distance between the ball and rod

centers.
A A
D d
Distance between centers h h 2.75 in
2
c
TOP VIEW

u F

x
W/2
F
SECTION A-A
width(x)
(a) Distance between the roll axis and (b) Partial FBD of the bowling ball.
the rod axis.
FIGURE 3-16
Dimensions and Free Body Diagrams for Problem 3-16
2. Let x be the distance along the roll axis, and u be the corresponding distance to the point of contact between
the ball and rods, measured along the rods. Then the distance from the center plane of the ball to the center
of a rod as shown in Figure 3-16(a) is,
width( x) c cos( ) x sin( ) (1)
And the distance from the narrow end to the point at which the ball drops (assuming rigid rods) is
h c cos( )
xdrop xdrop 23.31 in
sin( )
The distance along the rod corresponding to xdrop is
xdrop h sin( )
u drop u drop 23.24 in
cos( )
3. The angle made by a line through the ball-rod centers and the horizontal plane (see Figure 3-16b) is
( x) acos
width( x)

h
When x = 0, this is 0 ( 0 in) 0 40.241 deg
When x = 0.98xdrop, this is 98% 0.98 xdrop 98% 5.577 deg
4. The loading on the ball is symmetric about its center plane along the x-axis. Figure 3-16(b) shows a FBD of
one half of the ball with the internal forces along the plane of symmetry due to the reaction at the other rod
omitted. With these forces omitted we may only sum forces in the vertical direction.
W
Fy : F sin( ) F cos( ) =0 (2)
2
W
F= (3)
2 ( sin( ) cos( ) )
5. The ball will drop through the rods when is zero. If there were no friction force present ( = 0) then F would
become very large as approached zero. The presence of the friction term in the denominator of equation (3)
limits F to finite values. However, with the assumption that the rods are rigid, there is no way for the rods to
provide a normal force when reaches zero. Thus, we will need to limit the range of for this analysis.
Let 0 and min 98%
h cos min c cos( )

Then xmax xmax 22.84 in
sin( )
xmax h sin( )
u max u max 22.77 in
cos( )
W
Fmax Fmax 12.86 lbf (4)
2 sin min
6. Determine the worst-case shear and moment maximum for the rods as the ball rolls along their length from
Figure B-2(a) in Appendix B where a in the figure is u max. Then,
u max
Mmax Fmax u max 1 Mmax 70.6 in lbf (5)
L
For the shear, we must find the reactions, which are
u max
R1 Fmax 1 R1 3.10 lbf
L
R2 Fmax R1 R2 9.76 lbf
The maximum absolute value of shear is the larger of these two. Thus
Vmax R2 Vmax 9.8 lbf (6)
PROBLEM 3-17
Statement: A pair of ice tongs is shown in Figure P3-7. The ice weighs 50 lb and is 10 in wide across the
tongs. The distance between the handles is 4 in, and the mean radius r of a tong is 6 in. Draw
free-body diagrams of the two tongs and find all forces acting on them. Determine the bending
moment at point A.
Given: Weight of ice W 50 lbf

Distances a x 11.0 in a y 6.0 in
b x 5.0 in b y 12.0 in
cx 2.0 in cy 3.5 in
Assumptions: Assume that the horizontal force at C (the handle) is zero, thus Fc 0 lbf (1)
F F F
C
FC
3.5 = cy
O
FO
11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
A
12.0 = by
5.0 = bx
FB
B
W/2
W
FIGURE 3-17A
1. Summing forces and moments on a single tong (see FBD above right).
Fx FO FB FC = 0 (2)
Fy W
F=0 (3)
2
MC FO cy FB b y cy b x cx = 0
W
(4)
2
2. From equations (1) and (2), FO = FB (5)
3. Eliminating FO from equations (4) and (5) and solving for FB
W b x cx
FB FB 14.58 lbf
2 by
F
4. From equation (3), the vertical force
on one handle is
C
W FC
F F 25 lbf
2 3.5 = cy
O
FO
5. From Figure 3-17B we see that, at any
section that we might take through the 11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
tong, there will be an internal moment,
shear force, and axial force present. The
A
bending moment will be a maximum at
point A because it is the fartherest point
from the centroid of the system.
Summing forces and moments:
D
FDs M D FDn
Fx -FDs cos + FDn sin
+ FO = 0 (6)
FIGURE 3-17B
Free Body Diagram with section at D for Problem 3-17
Fy -FDs sin - FDn cos
+F=0 (7)
MO F cx - M D - (FDs cos + FDn sin )(ay + rc sin )

+ (FDs sin + FDn cos )[ax - rc (1 - cos)] = 0
(8)
6. Solving equations (6) and (7) for FDs and FDn
FDn sin( ) FO
FDn = F cos( ) FO sin( ) FDs =
cos( )
7. The maximum value of MD will occur at = 0 deg. At = 0 deg,
FO FB
FDn F FDn 25 lbf
FDs FO FDs 14.58 lbf
MD F cx FDs a y FDn a x MD 237.5 lbf in
PROBLEM 3-18
Statement: A tractor-trailer tipped over while negotiating an on-ramp to the New York Thruway. The road
has a 50-ft radius at that point and tilts 3 deg toward the outside of the curve. The 45-ft-long by
8-ft-wide by 8.5-ft-high trailer box (13 ft from ground to top) was loaded 44 415 lb of paper rolls in
two rows by two high as shown in Figure P3-8. The rolls are 40-in-dia by 38-in-long and weigh
about 900 lb each. They are wedged against rolling backward but not against sliding sidewards.
The empty trailer weighed 14 000 lb. The driver claims that he was traveling at less than 15 mph
and that the load of paper shifted inside the trailer, struck the trailer sidewall, and tipped the
truck. The paper company that loaded the truck claims the load was properly stowed and would
not shift at that speed. Independent test of the coefficient of friction between similar paper rolls
and a similar trailer floor give a value of 0.43 +/- 0.08. The composite center of gravity of the
loaded trailer is estimated to be 7.5 ft above the road. Determine the truck speed that would
cause the truck to just begin to tip and the speed at which the rolls will just begin to slide
sidways. What do you think caused the accident?
Given: Weight of paper Wp := 44415 lbf
Weight of trailer Wt := 14000 lbf
Radius of curve r := 50 ft
Nominal coefficient of friction nom := 0.43
Coefficient of friction uncertainty u := 0.08
Trailer width w := 8 ft
Height of CG from pavement h := 7.5 ft
Assumptions: 1. The paper rolls act as a monolith since they are tightly strapped together with steel bands.
2. The tractor has about 15 deg of potential roll freedom versus the trailer due to their relative angle
in plan during the turn combined with the substantial pitch freedom in the fifth wheel. So the trailer
can tip independently of the tractor.
3. The outside track width of the trailer tires is equal to the width of the trailer.
1. First, calculate the location of the

trailer's CG with respect to the outside
wheel when it is on the reverse-banked
curve. From Figure 3-18A,
Tilt angle := 3 deg
a := h tan( ) a = 0.393 ft
3
w
b := a b = 3.607 ft
2 7.500'
ybar
xbar := b cos( ) xbar = 3.602 ft
h
ybar := b sin( ) +
cos( )
ybar = 7.699 ft a b
The coordinates of the CG of the xbar
loaded trailer with respect to the lower 4.000'
outside corner of the tires are:
FIGURE 3-18A
xbar = 3.602 ft ybar = 7.699 ft Location of CG for Problem 3-18
2. The trailer is on the verge of tipping over when the copule due to centrifugal force is equal to the couple formed
by the weight of the loaded trailer acting through its CG and the vertical reaction at the outside edge of the tires.
At this instant, it is assumed that the entire weight of the trailer is reacted at the outside tires with the inside tires
carrying none of the weight. Any increase in tangential velocity of the tractor and trailer will result in tipping.
Summing moments about the tire edge (see Figure 3-18B),
M Fw xbar Fc ybar = 0 (1)
where Fc is the centrifugal force due

to the normal acceleration as the tractor
and trailer go through the curve. The
normal acceleration is Fc
2
vtip
a tip = (2)
r Fw
and the force necessary to keep the
tractor trailer following a circular path ybar
is
Fc = mtot a tip (3)
Rx
where mtot is the total mass of the
trailer and its payload. Combining
equations (2) and (3) and solving for
Ry
vtip, we have
xbar
Fc r
vtip = (4)
mtot FIGURE 3-18B
FBD of Trailer on the Verge of Tipping
or,
Fc r g
vtip = (5)
Fw
3. Calculate the minimum tipping velocity of the tractor/trailer. From equations (1) and (5),
Total weight Fw := Wt + Wp Fw = 58415 lbf
xbar
Centrifugal force required Fc := Fw Fc = 27329 lbf
to tip the trailer ybar
Fc r g
Minimum tipping speed vtip := vtip = 18.7 mph
Fw
Thus, with the assumptions that we have made, the trailer would not begin to tip over until it reached a speed of
vtip = 18.7 mph
4. The load will slip when the friction force between the paper rolls and the trailer floor is no longer sufficient to
react the centrifugal force on the paper rolls. Looking at the FBD of the paper rolls in Figure 3-18C, we see that
Normal force between

Fn = Wp cos( ) Fcp sin( ) (6)
paper and floor
Tangential force tending to slide the paper
Ft = Wp sin( ) + Fcp cos( ) (7) Fcp
Centrifugal force on the paper

Wp
2
Wp W p vs
Fcp = as = (8) Ft
g g r
Fn
But, the maximum friction force is
FIGURE 3-18C
Ff = Fn = Ft (9)
FBD of Paper on the Verge of Sliding
Substituting equation (9) into (7), then combining (6) and (7) to eliminate Fn, and solving for Fcp yields
Wp ( cos( ) sin( ) )
Fcp = (10)
sin( ) + cos( )
Substituting equation (10) into (8), to eliminate Fcp , and solving for vs yields
( cos( ) sin( ) )
vs = sin( ) + cos( ) r g (11)

5. Use the upper and lower limit on the coefficient of friction to determine an upper and lower limit on the speed
necessary to cause sliding.
Maximium coefficient max := nom + u max = 0.51
Minimium coefficient min := nom u min = 0.35
Maximum velocity to cause sliding
( max cos( ) sin( ) )

vsmax := sin( ) + cos( ) r g vsmax = 18.3 mph
max
Minimum velocity to cause sliding
( min cos( ) sin( ) )

vsmin := sin( ) + cos( ) r g vsmin = 14.8 mph
min
6. This very rough analysis shows that , if the coefficient of friction was at or near the low end of its measured
value, the paper load could slide at a tractor/trailer speed of 15 mph, which would lead to the trailer tipping over.
In any case, it appears that the paper load would slide before the truck would tip with the load in place.
PROBLEM 3-19
Statement: Assume that the CG of the paper rolls in Problem 3-18 is 2.5 ft above the floor of the trailer. At what
speed on the same curve will the pile of rolls tip over (not slide) with respect to the trailer?
Paper roll length L := 38 in L = 3.167 ft
Height of CG from floor h := 2.5 ft
Assumptions: The paper rolls act as a single, lumped mass and tip about one corner where they are braced
against sliding. The brace provides no moment support.
1. First, calculate the location of the paper's CG with

respect to the outside corner when it is on the
reverse-banked curve. From Figure 3-19,
Fcp
Tilt angle := 3 deg
a := h tan ( ) a = 0.131 ft 2.500' ybar

Wp
b := L a b = 3.036 ft a Rx
b
xbar R y
xbar := b cos ( ) xbar = 3.031 ft
3.167'
h
ybar := b sin ( ) +
cos ( ) FIGURE 3-19
FBD of Paper on the Verge of Tipping
ybar = 2.662 ft
The coordinates of the CG of the paper with respect to the lower outside corner are:
xbar = 3.031 ft ybar = 2.662 ft
2. The paper is on the verge of tipping over when the couple due to centrifugal force is equal to the couple formed
by the weight of the paper acting through its CG and the vertical reaction at the outside edge of the rolls. At this
instant, it is assumed that the entire weight of the paper is reacted at the outside corner. Any increase in
tangential velocity of the tractor and trailer will result in tipping. Summing moments about the outside corner
nearest the floor (see Figure 3-19),
M Wp xbar Fcp ybar = 0 (1)
where Fcp is the centrifugal force due to the normal acceleration as the tractor and trailer go through the curve.
The normal acceleration is
2
vtip
a tip = (2)
r
and the force necessary to keep the tractor trailer following a circular path is
Fcp = mp a tip (3)
where mp is the mass of the paper. Combining equations (2) and (3) and solving for vtip, we have
Fcp r
vtip = (4)
mp
or,
Fcp r g
vtip = (5)
Wp
3. Calculate the minimum paper tipping velocity of the tractor/trailer. From equations (1) and (5),
xbar
Centrifugal force required Fcp := Wp Fcp = 50574 lbf
to tip the paper ybar
Fcp r g
Minimum tipping speed vtip := vtip = 29.2 mph
Wp
Thus, with the assumptions that we have made, the paper would not begin to tip over until the tractor/trailor
reached a speed of
vtip = 29.2 mph
PROBLEM 3-20
Statement: Assume that the load of paper rolls in Problem 3-18 will slide sideways at a truck speed of 20 mph
on the curve in question. Estimate the impact force of the cargo against the trailer wall. The
force-deflection characteristic of the trailer wall has been measured as approximately 400 lb/in.

Weight of trailer Wt := 14000 lbf
Speed of tractor/trailer vt := 20 mph
Trailer width w := 8 ft
Paper roll length L := 38 in L = 3.167 ft
lbf
Trailer wall stiffness k := 400
in
Assumptions: 1. The paper rolls act as a monolith since they are tightly strapped together with steel bands.
2. The worst case will result if friction between the floor and the paper is neglected.
1. Calculate the distance that the rolls will slide before impacting the wall.
1
s := ( w 2 L) s = 10 in
2
2. Determine the centripetal acceleration at 20 mph.
2
vt in
a p := a p = 206.507
r 2
sec
3. From elementary particle dynamics, estimate the velocity at impact due to the centripetal acceleration
in
vi := 2 a p s vi = 64.266
sec
4. With the paper as the moving mass and the trailer as the stationary or struck mass, calculate the correction factor
using equation (3.15)
1
:= = 0.905
Wt
1+
3 Wp
5. Calculate the static deflection caused by the paper against the trailer wall.
Wp
st := st = 111.037 in
k
6. Using equation (3.12), estimate the dynamic force of the paper rolls impacting the trailer wall.

Fi := Wp vi Fi = 13114 lbf
g st
PROBLEM 3-21
Statement: Figure P3-9 shows an automobile wheel with two common styles of lug wrench being used to
tighten the wheel nuts, a single-ended wrench in (a), and a double-ended wrench in (b). In each
case two hands are required to provide forces respectively at A and B as shown. The distance
between points A and B is 1 ft in both cases. The wheel nuts require a torque of 70 ft-lb. Draw
free body diagrams for both wrenches and determine the magnitudes of all forces and moments
on each wrench. Is there any difference between the way these two wrenches perform their
assigned task? Is one design better than the other? If so, why? Explain.
Given: Distance between A and B d AB := 1 ft
Tightening torque T := 70 ft lbf
Assumptions: 1. The forces exerted by the user's hands lie in a plane through the wrench that is also parallel to
the plane of the wheel.
2. The applied torque is perpendicular to the plane of the forces.
3. By virtue of 1 and 2 above, this is a planar problem that can be described in a 2D FBD.
1. Summing moments about the left end of the 12" = dAB

wrench (for either case) F
T F d AB = 0
2. Solving for F
T
T
F := F = 70 lbf F
d AB
(a) Single-ended Wrench
3. This result is the same for both wrenches.

12" = dAB
Is there any difference between the way these F
6"
two wrenches perform their assigned task?
No, they both require the same

two-handed exertion of 70 lb from each
hand. T
Is one design better than the other? If so, F

(b) Double-ended Wrench
why? Explain.
FIGURE 3-21
Design (b) has advantages over (a)
because it is balanced about the wheel
nut. This allows the user to spin the
wrench once the nut is loosened. It is
also slightly easier to apply the upward
and downward forces (F) in a plane with
design (b).
PROBLEM 3-22
Statement: A roller-blade skate is shown in Figure P3-10. The polyurethane wheels are 72 mm dia. The
skate-boot-foot combination weighs 2 kg. The effective "spring rate" of the person-skate
subsystem is 6000 N/m. Find the forces on the wheels' axles for a 100-kg person landing a 0.5-m
jump on one foot. (a) Assume all 4 wheels land simultaneously. (b) Assume that one wheel
absorbs all the landing force.
Given: Mass of struck member Msys 2 kg

N
Stiffness of struck member k 6000
m
Mass of striking member Mperson 100 kg
Height of drop h 0.5 m
Assumptions: Equation (3.14) applies in this case.
1. The weight of the striking mass is

Wperson Mperson g Wperson 980.7 N
2. The static deflection of the subsystem is
Wperson
st st 163.444 mm
k
3. The correction factor is
1
0.993
Msys
1
3 Mperson
4. From equation (3.14), the force of impact is
2 h
Fi 1 1 Wperson Fi 3.59 kN
st
(a) If this will be absorbed by 4 wheel axles, the force per axle is
Fi
Fa Fa 897 N
4
(b) If one wheel absorbs all force Fb Fi Fb 3.59 kN
PROBLEM 3-23a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-11a. Find the reactions, maximum shear,
and maximum moment for the data given in row a from Table P3-1.
Given: Beam length L 1 m L

Distance to distributed load a 0.4 m b
Distance to concentrated load b 0.6 m a
F
1 w
Distributed load magnitude w 200 N m
Concentrated load F 500 N
R1 R2
Solution: See Figures 3-23 and Mathcad file P0323a.
FIGURE 3-23A
1. From inspection of Figure P3-11a, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - 0>0 + w<x - a>0 - F<x - b>-1 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - 0>1 + w<x - a>1 - F<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - 0>2/2 + w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 w ( L) w ( L a ) F R2 = 0
w 2 w 2
M = R 1 L L ( L a) F ( L b) = 0
2 2
w F w 2
R1 L ( L b) ( L a) R1 264 N
2 L 2 L
R2 w a F R1 R2 316 N
5. Define the range for x x 0 m 0.005 L L
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) w S ( x 0 m) ( x) w S ( x a ) ( x a ) F S ( x b ) R2 S ( x L)
w 2 w 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) F S ( x b ) ( x b )
2 2
Shear 400
Diagram
200
V ( x)
0
N
200
400
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
Moment 150
Diagram
100
M ( x)
Nm
50
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
FIGURE 3-23aB
Shear and Moment Diagrams for Problem 3-23a
9. Determine the maximum shear and maximum moment from inspection of the diagrams.
Maximum shear: Vmax V ( b ) Vmax 316 N
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = b:
Mmax M ( b ) Mmax 126.4 N m
PROBLEM 3-24a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-11b. Find the reactions, maximum shear,
Distance to distributed load a 0.4 m a
1
Distributed load magnitude w 200 N m F
w
Solution: See Figures 3-24 and Mathcad file P0324a. M1

R1
1. From inspection of Figure P3-11b, write the load function
equation
FIGURE 3-24A
q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 - F<x - L>-1
V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 - F<x - L>0
M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 [ w ( L a ) F ] = 0
w 2
M = M1 R1 L ( L a) = 0
2
R1 w ( L a ) F R1 620 N
w 2
M1 ( L a ) R1 L M1 584 N m
2
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) w S ( x a ) ( x a ) F S ( x L)
w 2
M ( x) M1 R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) F S ( x L) ( x L)
2
Shear
Diagram
600
V ( x)
400
N
200
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
Moment 0
Diagram
150
M ( x)
300
Nm
450
600
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
FIGURE 3-24aB
Maximum shear: Vmax V ( 0 m) Vmax 620 N
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = 0:
Mmax M ( 0 m) Mmax 584 N m
PROBLEM 3-25a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-11d. Find the reactions, maximum shear,

Distance to concentrated load b 0.6 m a F
1 w
R1 R2
FIGURE 3-25A
1. From inspection of Figure P3-11c, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - F<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - F<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - F<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 w ( L a ) R2 F = 0
w 2
M = R 1 L ( L a ) R2 ( L b ) = 0
2
( L a ) F ( L b ) w ( L a ) ( L b )
1 w 2
R1 R1 353 N
b 2
R2 w ( L a ) F R1 R2 973 N
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) w S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) F S ( x L)
w 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) ( x b )
2
Shear 1
Diagram
0.5
V ( x)
0
kN
0.5
1
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
Moment
Diagram 0
75
M ( x)
150
Nm
225
300
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
FIGURE 3-25aB
Maximum shear: Vmax V ( b ) Vmax 580.0 N
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = a:
Mmax M ( b ) Mmax 216 N m
PROBLEM 3-26a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-11d. Find the reactions, maximum shear,
Given: Beam length L 1 m
L
Distance to distributed load a 0.4 m
b
Distance to reaction load b 0.6 m a F
1
Distributed load magnitude w 200 N m w

R1 R2
FIGURE 3-26A
1. From inspection of Figure 3-26aA, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - F<x - a>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - F<x - a>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - F<x - a>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 w ( L a ) R2 F = 0
w 2
M = R 1 L ( L a ) R2 ( L b ) F ( L a ) = 0
2
( L a ) F ( b a ) w ( L a ) ( L b )
1 w 2
R1 R1 147 N
b 2
R2 w ( L a ) F R1 R2 473 N
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) w S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) F S ( x a )
w 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) ( x b ) F S ( x a ) ( x a )
2
Shear 500
Diagram
250
V ( x)
0
N
250
500
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
Moment 60
Diagram
40
M ( x)
20
Nm
20
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
x
m
FIGURE 3-26aB
Maximum shear: Vmax V ( b 0.001 mm) Vmax 393 N
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 58.7 N m
PROBLEM 3-27
Statement: A storage rack is to be designed to hold the paper roll of Problem 3-8 as shown in Figure
P3-12. Determine the reactions and draw the shear and moment diagrams for the mandrel that
extends 50% into the roll.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 1.50 m

ID 0.22 m
Lroll 3.23 m
3
Roll density 984 kg m
Assumptions: 1. The paper roll's weight creates a concentrated load acting at the tip of the mandrel.
2. The mandrel's root in the stanchion experiences a distributed load over its length of engagemen
W
1. Determine the weight of the roll
and the length of the mandrel.
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g
W 53.9 kN
M1 Lm
R1
Lm 0.5 Lroll
FIGURE 3-27
Lm 1.615 m Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-27
q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - W<x - L>-1
V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - W<x - L>0
M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - W<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 W = 0 M = M1 R1 L = 0
R1 W R1 53.895 kN
M1 R1 Lm M1 87.040 kN m
6. Define the range for x x 0 m 0.005 Lm Lm
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) W S x Lm
M ( x) M1 R1 S ( x 0 m) x W S x Lm x Lm
Shear
Diagram
40
V ( x)
kN
20
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
m
Moment 20
Diagram 1.615
10
M ( x)
40
kN m
70
100
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
m
FIGURE 3-27B
PROBLEM 3-28
Statement: Figure P3-13 shows a forklift truck negotiating a 15 deg ramp to to drive onto a 4-ft-high loading
platform. The truck weighs 5 000 lb and has a 42-in wheelbase. Determine the reactions and draw
the shear and moment diagrams for the worst case of loading as the truck travels up the ramp.
Given: Ramp angle 15 deg

Platform height h 4 ft h 48 in
Truck weight W 5000 lbf
Truck wheelbase Lt 42 in
Assumptions: 1. The worst case is when the truck CG is located at the center of the beam's span.
2. Use a coordinate frame that has the x-axis along the long axis of the beam.
3. Ignore traction forces and the weight components along the x-axis of the beam.
4. There are two ramps, one for each side of the forklift.
5. The location of the CG in Figure P3-13 is 32 in from the front wheel and 10 in from the rear
wheel.
CGa 32 in CGb 10 in
L
b
a CG a
y
CG b
R1

Fa Fb x
Wa
Wb
R2
FIGURE 3-28A
1. Determine the length of the beam between supports and the distances a and b.
h
Length of beam L L 15.455 ft
sin( )
L L
With the CG at midspan, we have a CGa = a CGa a 5.061 ft
2 2
L
and b CGb b 8.561 ft
2
2. The weight distribution on the wheels is determined from the distance from the front wheel to the CG. Each
wheel weight is divided by 2 to get the weight on a single ramp.
CGb W
Weight on front wheel Wa Wa 595 lbf
Lt 2
W
Weight on rear wheel Wb Wa Wb 1905 lbf
2
3. The normal force on the ramp at each wheel is adjusted for the ramp angle.
Load at front wheel Fa Wa cos( ) Fa 575 lbf

Load at rear wheel Fb Wb cos( ) Fb 1840 lbf
4. From inspection of Figure 3-28A, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - Fa<x - a>-1 - Fb<x - b>-1 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - Fa<x - a>0 - Fb<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - Fa<x - a>1 - Fb<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 Fa Fb R2 = 0
M = R1 L Fa ( L a ) Fb ( L b ) = 0
1
R1 Fa ( L a ) Fb ( L b ) R1 1207 lbf
L
R2 Fa Fb R1 R2 1207 lbf
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) Fa S ( x a ) Fb S ( x b ) R2 S ( x L)
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x Fa S ( x a ) ( x a ) Fb S ( x b ) ( x b ) R2 S ( x L) ( x L)
Shear 2000
Diagram
1000
V ( x)
0
lbf
1000
2000
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
x
ft
Moment 10000
Diagram 15.455
8000
6000
M ( x)
ft lbf
4000
2000
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
x
ft
FIGURE 3-28B
PROBLEM 3-29 _____
Statement: Run the TKSolver or Mathcad model for Case Study 1A and move the point of application of the
hand force along the lever by changing the values of Rb2, recalculate and observe the changes to
the forces and moments.
Problem: Determine the forces on the elements of the bicycle brake lever assembly shown in Figure 3-1
during braking.
Given: The geometry of each element is known. The average human's hand can develop a grip force of
about 267 N (60 lb) in the lever position shown.
Magnitude of handle force Fb2 Fb2 := 267 N
Direction of handle force Fb2 b2 := 270 deg
Direction of cable force Fc2 c2 := 184 deg
Direction of cable force Fcable cable := 180 deg
Position vector components (Change the value of Rb2x and note the results)
Rb2x := 19 mm Rc2x := 25 mm R12x := 12 mm
Rb2y := 4 mm Rc2y := 0 mm R12y := 7 mm
R21x := 7 mm Rb1x := 47.5 mm R31x := 27 mm

R21y := 19 mm Rb1y := 14 mm R31y := 30 mm
Assumptions: The accelerations are negligible. All forces are coplanar and two-dimensional. A class 1 load
model is appropriate and a static analysis is acceptable. The higher applied load will be used as a
worst case, assuming that it can be reached before bottoming the tip of the handle on the handgrip.
If that occurs, it will change the beam's boundary conditions and the analysis.
Solution: See Figures 3-1, 3-2, and Mathcad file P0329.

1. Figure 3-1 shows the hand brake lever assembly, which consists of three subassemblies: the handlebar (1), the
lever (2), and the cable (3). The lever is pivoted to the handlebar and the cable is connected to the lever. The
cable runs within a plastic-lined sheath (for low friction) down to the brake caliper assembly at the bicycle's
wheel rim. The user's hand applies equal and opposite forces at some point on the lever and handgrip. These
forces are transformed to a larger force in the cable by reason of the lever ratio of part 2.
Figure 3-1 is a free-body diagram of the entire assembly since it shows all the forces and moments acting on it
except for its weight, which is small compared to the applied forces and is thus neglected for this analysis. The
"broken away" portion of the handlebar provides internal x and y force components and a moment. These are
arbitrarily shown as positive in sign. Their actual signs will "come out in the wash" in the calculations. The
known applied forces are shown in their actual directions and senses.
2. Figure 3-2 shows the three subassembly elements separated and drawn as free-body diagrams with all relevant
forces and moments applied to each element, again neglecting the weights of the parts. The lever (part 2) has
three forces on it, Fb2, Fc2, and F12. The two-character subscript notation used here should be read as, force of
element 1 on 2 (F12) or force at B on 2 (Fb2), etc. This defines the source of the forces (first subscript) and the
element on which it acts (second subscript).
This notation will be used consistently throughout this text for both forces and position vectors such as Rb2,
Rc2, and R12 in Figure 3-2, which serve to locate the above three forces in a local, non rotating coordinate system
whose origin is at the center of gravity (CG) of the element or subassembly being analyzed. (See foot note on
page 83 of the text).
On this brake lever, Fb2 is an applied force whose magnitude and direction are known. Fc2 is the force in the
cable. Its direction is known but not its magnitude. Force F12 is provided by part 1 on part 2 at the pivot pin.
Its magnitude and direction are both unknown. We can write equations 3.3b for this element to sum forces
in the x and y directions and sum moments about the CG. Note that all unknown reactive forces and moments are
initially assumed positive in the equations. Their true signs will come out in the calculation. (See foot note on
Fx = Fb2x + Fc2x + F12x = 0
Fy = Fb2y + Fc2y + F12y = 0 (a)
Mz = ( R12 F12) + ( Rb2 Fb2) + ( Rc2 Fc2 ) = 0
The cross products in the moment equation represent the "turning forces" or moments created by the
application of these forces at points remote from the CG of the element. Recall that these cross products can be
expanded to
Mz = ( R12x F12y R12y F12x) ... = 0

+ ( Rb2x Fb2y Rb2y Fb2x) ... (b)
+ ( R F R F )
c2x c2y c2y c2x
We have three equations and four unknowns (F12x, F12y, Fc2x, Fc2y) at this point, so we need another equation. It
is available from the fact that the direction of Fc2 is known. (The cable can pull only along its axis). We can
express one component of the cable force Fc2 in terms of its other component and the known angle c2 of the
cable.
Fc2y = Fc2x tan( c2 ) (c)
We will now use a Mathcad solve block to solve equations a through c.
Calculate components of Fb2
Fb2x := Fb2 cos( b2) Fb2x = 0 N
Fb2y := Fb2 sin( b2) Fb2y = 267 N
Guess F12x := 1000 N Fc2x := 1000 N F12y := 1000 N Fc2y := 1000 N
Given Fb2x + Fc2x + F12x = 0
Fb2y + Fc2y + F12y = 0
( R12x F12y R12y F12x) ... = 0

+ ( Rb2x Fb2y Rb2y Fb2x) ...
+ ( R F R F )
c2x c2y c2y c2x
Fc2y = Fc2x tan( c2 )
F12x
F
12y := Find ( F , F , F , F )
Fc2x 12x 12y c2x c2y

Fc2y
Components of the unknown forces F12, and Fc2
F12x = 1047 N Fc2x = 1047 N F12y = 340 N Fc2y = 73.2 N
3. Part 3 in Figure 3-2 is the cable that passes through a hole in part 1. This hole is lined with a low friction material,
which allows us to assume no friction at the joint between parts 1 and 3. We will further assume that the three
forces F13, Fc3, and Fcable form a concurrent system of forces acting through the CG and thus create no moment.
With this assumption, only a summation of forces is necessary for this element.
Fx = Fcablex + F13x + Fc3x = 0
(d)
Fy = Fcabley + F13y + Fc3y = 0
Using Newton's third law, we have Fc3x := Fc2x and Fc3y := Fc2y.
We also assume that the cable entering from the left is horizontal and that the reaction F13 is vertical, thus
Fcabley := 0 N and F13x := 0 N (e)
We can now solve for the forces on part 3 directly,

Fcablex := F13x Fc3x Fcablex = 1047 N
F13y := Fcabley Fc3y F13y = 73.2 N
The assembly of elements labeled part 1 in Figure 3-2 has both force and moments on it (i.e., it is not a concurrent
system), so the three equations 3.3b are needed.
Fx = F21x + Fb1x + F31x + Px + Fsheathx = 0
Fy = F21y + Fb1y + F31y + Py = 0 (f)
Mz = Mh + ( R21 F21) + ( Rb1 Fb1) + ( R31 F31) ... = 0

+ ( Rp Fp) + ( Rd Fsheath )
Expanding cross products in the moment equation gives the moment magnitude as
Mz = Mh + ( R21x F21y R21y F21x) ... = 0

+ ( R31x F31y R31y F31x) ... (g)
+ ( R F R F ) ...
Px Py Py Px
+ ( 0 Rdy Fsheathx)
Using Newton's third law, we have

F31x := F13x F21x := F12x Fb1x := Fb2x
(h)
F31y := F13y F21y := F12y Fb1y := Fb2y
Fsheathx := Fcablex
Given RPx := 27 mm RPy := 0 mm
Rdx := 41 mm Rdy := 27 mm
We will now use a Mathcad solve block to solve equations (f) through (h).
Guess Px := 1000 N Mh := 100 N m Py := 0 N
Given F21x + Fb1x + F31x + Px + Fsheathx = 0
F21y + Fb1y + F31y + Py = 0
Mh + ( R21x F21y R21y F21x) ... = 0

+ ( R31x F31y R31y F31x) ...
+ ( R P R P ) ...
Px y Py x
+ ( 0 N m Rdy Fsheathx)
Px

Py := Find( Px , Py , Mh)
M
h
Summarizing, the results obtained for a grip force Fb2 = 267 N are:
Handlebar (1) Fb1x = 0 N Fb1y = 267 N

F21x = 1047 N F21y = 340 N
F31x = 0 N F31y = 73.2 N
6
Px = 1 10 N Py = 0 N
Mh = 0.0 N m
Lever (2) Fc2x = 1047 N Fc2y = 73.2 N

F12x = 1047 N F12y = 340 N
Cable (3) Fc3x = 1047 N Fc3y = 73.2 N

F13x = 0 N F13y = 73.2 N
Fcablex = 1047 N Fcabley = 0 N
PROBLEM 3-30 _____

Statement: Run the TKSolver or Mathcad model for Case Study 2A and move the point of application of the
crimp force along the jaw by changing the values of Rhand, recalculate and observe the changes to
the forces and moments.
Problem: Determine the forces on the elements of the crimping tool shown in Figure 3-3 during a crimp
operation.
Given: The geometry is known and the tool develops a crimp force of 2000 lb (8896 N) at closure in the
position shown.
Applied crimp force Fc4x := 1956.30 lbf Fc4y := 415.82 lbf
Position vector components (Change the value of Rhand and note the results)
Rc4x := 0.454 in R12x := 1.399 in R32x := 2.199 in

Rc4y := 0.337 in R12y := 0.049 in R32y := 0.077 in
R23x := 0.602 in R43x := 0.602 in R14x := 0.161 in
R23y := 0.127 in R43y := 0.127 in R14y := 0.758 in
R34x := 0.161 in R34y := 0.758 in Rhand := 4.40 in
Assumptions: The accelerations are negligible. All forces are coplanar and two-dimensional. A class 1 load
model is appropriate and a static analysis is acceptable.
Solution: See Figures 3-3, 3-4, and Mathcad file P0330.
1. Figure 3-3 shows the tool in the closed position, in the process of crimping a metal connector onto a wire. The
user's hand provides the input forces between links 1 and 2, shown as the reaction pair Fhand. The user can grip
the handle anywhere along its length but we are assuming a nominal moment arm of Rhand for the application of
the resultant of the user's grip force (see Figure 3-4). The high mechanical advantage of the tool transforms the
grip force to a large force at the crimp.
Figure 3-3 is a free-body diagram of the entire assembly, neglecting the weight of the tool, which is small
compared to the crimp force. There are four elements, or links, in the assembly, all pinned together. Link 1 can
be considered to be the "ground" link, with the other links moving with respect to it as the jaw is closed. The
desired magnitude of the crimp force Fc is defined and its direction will be normal to the surfaces at the crimp.
2. Figure 3-4 shows the elements of the crimping tool assembly separated and drawn as free-body diagrams with all
forces applied to each element, again neglecting their weights as being insignificant compared to the applied
forces. The centers of gravity of the respective elements are used as the origins of the local, non rotating
coordinate systems in which the points of application of all forces on the element are located. (See footnote on
3. We will consider link 1 to be the ground plane and analyze the remaining moving links. Note that all unknown
forces and moments are initially assumed positive. Link 4 has three forces acting on it: Fc4 is the known (desired)
force at the crimp, and F14 and F34 are the reaction forces from links 1 and 3, respectively. The magnitudes of
these two forces are unknown as is the direction of F14. The direction of F34 will be the same as link 3, since it is
a two-force member. Writing equations 3.3b for this element:
Fx = F14x + F34x + Fc4x = 0
Fy = F14y + F34y + Fc4y = 0 (a)
Mz = ( R14x F14y R14y F14x) ... = 0

+ ( R34x F34y R34y F34x) ...
+ ( R F R F )
c4x c4y c4y c4x
We have three equations and four unknowns (F14x, F14y, F34x, F34y) at this point, so we need another equation.
It is available from the fact that the direction of F34 is known. We can express one component of the force F34 in
terms of its other component and the known angle 3 of link 3.
(b)
F34y = F34x tan( 3)
(c)
where 3 := 168 deg
Guess F14x := 500 lbf F34x := 1000 lbf F14y := 100 lbf F34y := 100 lbf
Given F14x + F34x + Fc4x = 0 F14y + F34y + Fc4y = 0
( Rc4x Fc4y Rc4y Fc4x) ... = 0

+ ( R14x F14y R14y F14x) ...
+ ( R F R F )
34x 34y 34y 34x
F34y = F34x tan( 3)
F14x
F
14y := Find ( F , F , F , F )
F34x 14x 14y 34x 34y

F34y
Components of the unknown forces F14, and F34
F14x = 442.9 lbf F14y = 94.1 lbf F34x = 1513.4 lbf F34y = 321.7 lbf
4. Link 3 has two forces on it, F23 and F43. Because this is a two-force link, these two forces are equal in magnitude
and opposite in direction. Also, from Newton's third law, F43 = - F34. Thus,
F43x := F34x F43y := F34y F23x := F43x F23y := F43y (d)
5. Link 2 has three forces acting on it: Fhand is the unknown force from the hand, and F12 and F32 are the reaction
forces from links 1 and 3, respectively. Force F12 is provided by part 1 on part 2 at the pivot pin and force F32 is
provided by part 3 acting on part 2 at their pivot pin. The magnitude and direction of F32 is known and the
direction of Fhand is known. Using equations 3.3b, we can solve for the magnitude of Fhand and the two
components of F12. From the third law,
F32x := F23x F32y := F23y F32x = 1513.4 lbf F32y = 321.7 lbf
Fx = F12x + F32x = 0
Fy = Fhand + F12y + F32y = 0 (e)
Mz = ( R12 F12) + ( R32 F32) ... = 0

+ ( Rhand Fhand )
Guess F12x := 1500 lbf F12y := 100 lbf Fhand := 100 lbf
Given F12x + F32x = 0
F12y + F32y + Fhand = 0
( R12x F12y R12y F12x) ... = 0

+ ( R32x F32y R32y F32x) ...
+ R F
hand hand
F12x

F12y := Find( F12x , F12y , Fhand )
F
hand
F12x = 1513.4 lbf F12y = 373.4 lbf Fhand = 51.7 lbf
6. The four forces on link 1 can now be determined using the third law.
F21x := F12x F21y := F12y F41x := F14x F41y := F14y
Fc1x := Fc4x Fc1y := Fc4y Fc1x = 1956.3 lbf Fc1y = 415.8 lbf
7. The solution to this problem for the scaled dimensions in Figure 3-3 assuming a 2000-lb (8896-N) force applied at
the crimp, normal to the crimp surface, is given above. The total forces at the pivot points are:
0.5
F12 := F12x + F12y
2 2
Pivot A
F12 = 1559 lbf
0.5
F32 := F32x + F32y
2 2
Pivot B
F32 = 1547 lbf
0.5
F43 := F43x + F43y
2 2
Pivot C
F43 = 1547 lbf
0.5
F14 := F14x + F14y
2 2
Pivot D
F14 = 453 lbf
The moment that must be applied to the handles to generate the crimp force of
0.5
Fc4 := Fc4x + Fc4y
2 2
Crimp force
Fc4 = 2000 lbf
Moment Mh := Rhand Fhand Mh = 227 lbf in
This moment can be obtained with a force of Fhand = 52 lbf applied at mid-handle. This force is within the
physiological grip-force capacity of the average human.
PROBLEM 3-31 _____

Statement: Run the TKSolver or Mathcad model for Case Study 2A and move the point of application of P
along the x direction by changing the values of Rpx, recalculate and observe the changes to the
forces and moments. What happens when the vertical force P is centered on link 3? Also, change
the angle of the applied force P to create an x component and observe the effects on the forces and
moments on the elements.
Problem: Determine the forces on the elements of the scissors-jack in the position shown in Figure 3-5.
Given: The geometry is known and the jack supports a force of 1000 lb (4448 N) in the position shown.
Support force Px := 0.0 lbf Py := 1000 lbf
Position vector components (Change the value of Rpx and note the results)
Rpx := 0.50 in R12x := 3.12 in R32x := 2.08 in

Rpy := 0.87 in R12y := 1.80 in R32y := 1.20 in
R42x := 2.71 in R23x := 0.78 in R43x := 0.78 in

R42y := 1.00 in R23y := 0.78 in R43y := 0.78 in
R14x := 3.12 in R24x := 2.58 in R34x := 2.08 in

R14y := 1.80 in R24y := 1.04 in R34y := 1.20 in
Angle of gear teeth common normal := 45.0 deg

Assumptions: The accelerations are negligible. The jack is on level ground. The angle of the elevated car chassis
does not impart an overturning moment to the jack. All forces are coplanar and two-dimensional.
A class 1 load model is appropriate and a static analysis is acceptable.
Solution: See Figures 3-5 through 3-8, and Mathcad file P0331.
1. Figure 3-5 shows a schematic of a simple scissors jack used to raise a car. It consists of six links that are
pivoted and/or geared together and a seventh link in the form of a lead screw that is turned to raise the jack.
While this is clearly a three-dimensional device, it can be analyzed as a two-dimensional one if we assume that
the applied load (from the car) and the jack are exactly vertical (in the z direction). If so, all forces will be in the xy
plane. This assumption is valid if the car is jacked from a level surface. If not, then there will be some forces in
the yz and xz planes as well. The jack designer needs to consider the more general case, but for our simple
example we will initially assume two-dimensional loading. For the overall assembly as shown in Figure 3-5, we
can solve for the reaction force Fg, given force P, by summing forces: Fg = -P.
2. Figure 3-6 shows a set of free-body diagrams for the entire jack. Each element or subassembly of interest has
been separated from the others and the forces and moments shown acting on it (except for its weight, which is
small compared to the applied forces and is thus neglected for this analysis). The forces and moments can be
either internal reactions at interconnections with other elements or external loads from the "outside world." The
centers of gravity of the respective elements are used as the origins of the local, non rotating coordinate systems
in which the points of application of all forces on the element are located. In this design, stability is achieved by
the mating of two pairs of crude (non involute) gear segments acting between links 2 and 4 and between links 5
and 7. These interactions are modeled as forces acting along a common normal shared by the two teeth. This
common normal is perpendicular to the common tangent at the contact point.
There are 3 second-law equations available for each of the seven elements allowing 21 unknowns. An additional
10 third-law equations will be needed for a total of 31. This is a cumbersome system to solve for such a simple
device, but we can use its symmetry to advantage in order to simplify the problem.
3. Figure 3-7 shows the upper half of the jack assembly. Because of the mirror symmetry between the upper
and lower portions, the lower half can be removed to simplify the analysis. The forces calculated for this half will
be duplicated in the other. If we wished, we could solve for the reaction forces at A and B using equations 3.3b
from this free-body diagram of the half-jack assembly.
4. Figure 3-8a shows the free-body diagrams for the upper half of the jack assembly, which are essentially the same
as those of Figure 3-6. We now have four elements but can consider the subassembly labeled 1 to be the
"ground," leaving three elements on which to apply equations 3.3. Note that all forces and moments are initially
assumed positive in the equations.
5. Link 2 has three forces acting on it: F42 is the unknown force at the gear tooth contact with link 4; F12 and F32 are
the unknown reaction forces from links 1 and 3, respectively. Force F12 is provided by part 1 on part 2 at the
pivot pin and force F32 is provided by part 3 acting on part 2 at their pivot pin. The magnitudes and the
directions of these pin forces and the magnitude of F42 are unknown. The direction of F42 is along the common
normal shown in Figure 3-8b. Write equations 3.3b for this element to sum the forces in the x and y directions
and sum moments about the CG (with the cross products expanded).
Fx = F12x + F32x + F42x = 0
Fy = F12y + F32y + F42y = 0 (a)
Mz = ( R12x F12y R12y F12x) ... = 0

+ ( R32x F32y R32y F32x) ...
+ ( R F R F )
42x 42y 42y 42x
6. Link 3 has three forces acting on it: P, F23 and F43. Only P is known. Writing equations 3.3b for this element
gives
Fx = F23x + F43x + Px = 0
Fy = F23y + F43y + Py = 0 (b)
Mz = ( R23x F23y R23y F23x) ... = 0

+ ( R43x F43y R43y F43x) ...
+ ( R P R P )
px y py x
7. Link 4 has three forces acting on it: F24 is the unknown force from link 2; F14 and F34 are the unknown reaction
forces from links 1 and 3, respectively.
Fx = F14x + F24x + F34x = 0
Fy = F14y + F24y + F34y = 0 (c)
Mz = ( R14x F14y R14y F14x) ... = 0

+ ( R24x F24y R24y F24x) ...
+ ( R F R F )
34x 34y 34y 34x
8. The nine equations in sets a through c have 16 unknowns in them, F12x, F12y, F32x, F32y, F23x, F23y, F43x, F43y,
F14x , F14y, F34x, F34y, F24x, F24y, F42x, F42y. We can write the third-law relationships between action-reaction pairs
at each of the joints to obtain six of the seven additional equations needed:
F32x = F23x F32y = F23y
F34x = F43x F34y = F43y (d)
F42x = F24x F42y = F24y
9. The last equation needed comes from the relationship between the x and y components of the force F24 (or
F42) at the tooth/tooth contact point. Such a contact (or half) joint can transmit force (excepting friction force)
only along the common normal , which is perpendicular to the joint's common tangent as shown in Figure 3-8b.
The common normal is also called the axis of transmission.
The tangent of the angle of this common normal relates the two components of the force at the joint:
F24y = F24x tan( ) (e)
10. Equations (d) and (e) will be substituted into equations (a) through (c) to create a set of nine simultaneous
equations for solution.
Guess F12x := 500 lbf F12y := 500 lbf F14x := 500 lbf F14y := 500 lbf
F23x := 500 lbf F23y := 500 lbf F24x := 500 lbf
F43x := 500 lbf F43y := 500 lbf
Given ( R12x F12y R12y F12x) ... =0 F12x F23x F24x = 0

+ ( R32x F23y + R32y F23x) ...
+ ( R F tan( ) + R F ) F12y F23y F24x tan( ) = 0
42x 24x 42y 24x
( R23x F23y R23y F23x) ... = 0 F23x + F43x + Px = 0

+ ( R43x F43y R43y F43x) ...
+ ( R P R P ) F23y + F43y + Py = 0
px y py x
( R14x F14y R14y F14x) ... =0 F14x + F24x F43x = 0

+ ( R24x F24x tan( ) R24y F24x) ...
+ ( R F + R F ) F14y + F24x tan( ) F43y = 0
34x 43y 34y 43x
F12x

F12y
F14x

F14y
F23x := Find ( F , F , F , F , F , F , F , F , F )
12x 12y 14x 14y 23x 23y 24x 43x 43y
F23y
F
24x
F43x

F43y
Results: F14x = 877.8 lbf F14y = 469.6 lbf

F24x = 290.1 lbf F24y := F24x tan( ) F24y = 290.1 lbf
F34x := F43x F34y := F43y
F12x = 877.8 lbf F12y = 530.4 lbf F32x := F23x F32y := F23y
F42x := F24x F42y := F24y
PROBLEM 3-32 _____
Statement: Figure P3-14 shows a cam-follower arm. If the load P = 200 lb, what spring force is needed at the
right end to maintain a minimum load between cam and follower of 25 lb? Find the maximum shear
force and bending moment in the follower arm. Plot the shear and moment diagrams.
Given: Load at left end of beam P := 200 lbf

Load at cam follower Pcam := 25 lbf
Distance from left end to: Pivot point a := 10 in
Cam follower b := 22 in
Spring c := 29 in
1. Draw a FBD of the cam-follower arm (beam).
c
b
R Pcam Fspring
2. From inspection of the FBD, write the load function equation

q(x) = -P<x - 0>-1 + R<x - a>-1 + Pcam<x - b >-1 - Fspring<x - 0>-1
V(x) = -P<x - 0>0 + R<x - a>0 + Pcam<x - b >0 - Fspring<x - 0>0

M(x) = -P<x - 0>1 + R<x - a>1 + Pcam<x - b >1 - Fspring<x - 0>1
5. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = c, where
both are zero.
At x = c+, V = M = 0 V = P + R + Pcam Fspring = 0
M = P c + R ( c a ) + Pcam ( c b ) = 0
P a + Pcam ( b a )
Fspring := Fspring = 121.05 lbf
ca
R := Fspring + P Pcam R = 296.05 lbf
6. Define the range for x x := 0 in , 0.002 c .. c

S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := P S ( x , 0 in) + R S ( x , a ) + Pcam S ( x , b ) Fspring S ( x , c)
M ( x) := P S ( x , 0 in) x + R S ( x , a ) ( x a) + Pcam S ( x , b ) ( x b ) Fspring S ( x , c) ( x c)
9. Plot the shear and moment diagrams and find the maximum shear force and bending moment.
SHEAR DIAGRAM
200
100
0
V ( x)
lbf
100
200
300
0 10 20 30
x
in
Vmax := V ( 0 in) Vmax = 200 lbf
MOMENT DIAGRAM
0
500
M ( x)
1000
in lbf
1500
2000
0 10 20 30
x
in
Mmax := M ( a ) Mmax = 2000 in lbf
PROBLEM 3-33 _____
Statement: Write a computer program or equation solver model to calculate all the singularity functions listed
in equations 3.17. Set them up as functions that can be called from within any other program or
model.
1. No solution is provided for this programming problem.
PROBLEM 3-34a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-15. Find the reactions, maximum shear, and
maximum moment for the data given in row a from Table P3-2.
Given: Beam length L := 20 in b

P
Distance to RH bearing a := 16 in
Distance to concentrated load b := 18 in
R1 R2
Concentrated load P := 1000 lbf a
FIGURE 3-34aA
Solution: See Figure 3-34 and Mathcad file P0334a. Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-34
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 + R2<x - b>-1 - P<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 + R2<x - b>0 - P<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 + R2<x - b>1 - P<x - L>1
4. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = b, where
both are zero.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 + R2 P = 0
M = R1 b + R2 ( b a ) = 0
P
R1 := (a b) R1 = 125 lbf
a
R2 := P R1 R2 = 1125 lbf
5. Define the range for x x := 0 m , 0.002 L .. L
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) + R2 S ( x , a ) P S ( x , b )
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) x + R2 S ( x , a ) ( x a ) P S ( x , b ) ( x b)
SHEAR DIAGRAM MOMENT DIAGRAM

1000 1000
0
500
V ( x) M ( x)
1000
lbf in lbf
0
2000
500 3000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-34aB
Maximum shear: Vmax := V ( a ) Vmax = 1000 lbf
PROBLEM 3-35a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P3-15. Write a computer program or equation
solver model to find the reactions and calculate and plot the loading, shear, and moment functions.
Test the program with the data given in row a from Table P3-2.
Input data: Enter data in highlighted areas b

F
Beam length L := 20 in
R1 R2
Distance to concentrated load b := 18 in a
Concentrated load F := 1000 lbf
FIGURE 3-34aA
Solution: See Figures 3-35 and Mathcad file P0335a. Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-34
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 + R2<x - b>-1 - F<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 + R2<x - b>0 - F<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 + R2<x - b>1 - F<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 + R2 F = 0
M = R1 b + R2 ( b a ) = 0
F
R1 := ( a b) R1 = 125 lbf
a
R2 := F R1 R2 = 1125 lbf
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) + R2 S ( x , a ) F S ( x , b )
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) x + R2 S ( x , a ) ( x a ) F S ( x , b ) ( x b )


1000 1000
0
500
V ( x) M ( x)
1000
lbf in lbf
0
2000
500 3000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-34aB
Maximum shear: Vmax := V ( a ) Vmax = 1000 lbf
PROBLEM 3-36a
Given: Beam length L := 20 in
Distance to RH bearing L := 20 in b
a
Distance to start of load a := 16 in p
Distance to end of load b := 18 in

lbf R1 L R2
Distributed load p := 1000
in
FIGURE 3-36aA
Solution: See Figures 3-36 and Mathcad file P0336a. Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-36
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) + p ( L b ) + R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R1 L (L a) + ( L b ) + R2 ( L b) = 0
2 2
2 ( b a ) L + a b
p 2 2
R1 := R1 = 300 lbf
2 L
R2 := p ( b a ) R1 R2 = 1700 lbf
5. Define the range for x x := 0 in , 0.002 L .. L
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) p S ( x , a ) ( x a) + p S ( x , b ) ( x b ) + R2 S ( x , L)
p 2 p 2
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) x S(x , a) ( x a) + S ( x , b ) ( x b ) + R2 S ( x , L) ( x L)
2 2

1000 5000
4000
0
3000
V ( x) M ( x)
lbf in lbf
2000
1000
1000
2000 0
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-36aB
Maximum shear: Vmax := V ( b ) Vmax = 1700 lbf
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = c, where:
R1 b + R2 a
c := c = 16.3 in
R1 + R2
Mmax := M ( c) Mmax = 4845 in lbf
PROBLEM 3-37a
Input data: Enter data in highlighted areas

Beam length L := 20 in b
a
Distance to RH bearing L := 20 in p
Distance to start of load a := 16 in

Distance to end of load R1 L R2
b := 18 in
lbf
Distributed load p := 1000 FIGURE 3-37aA
in Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-37

q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1

V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0

M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) + p ( L b ) + R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R1 L (L a) + ( L b ) + R2 ( L b) = 0
2 2
2 ( b a ) L + a b
p 2 2
R1 := R1 = 300 lbf
2 L
R2 := p ( b a ) R1 R2 = 1700 lbf
5. Define the range for x x := 0 in , 0.002 L .. L
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) p S ( x , a ) ( x a) + p S ( x , b ) ( x b ) + R2 S ( x , L)
p 2 p 2
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) x S(x , a) ( x a) + S ( x , b ) ( x b ) + R2 S ( x , L) ( x L)
2 2

1000 5000
4000
0
3000
V ( x) M ( x)
lbf in lbf
2000
1000
1000
2000 0
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-37aB
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = c, where:
R1 b + R2 a
c := c = 16.3 in
R1 + R2
PROBLEM 3-38a
Given: Beam length L := 20 in b

P
p
Distance to concentrated load b := 18 in
R1 R2
Concentrated load P := 1000 lbf a
1
Distributed load p := 1000 lbf in
FIGURE 3-38aA
1. Determine the distance from the origin to the left and right ends of the roller.
Distance to left end e := 0.1 a e = 1.600 in
Distance to right end f := 0.9 a f = 14.400in

q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - e>0 + p<x - f>0 + R2<x - a>-1 - P<x - b>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - e>1 + p<x - f>1 + R2<x - a>0 - P<x - b>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - e>2/2 + p<x - f>2/2 + R2<x - a>1 - P<x - b>1
both are zero.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( b e ) + p ( b f ) + R2 P = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R1 b ( b e) + ( b f ) + R2 ( b a) = 0
2 2
e2 f 2
+ f e p
b a
R1 := P R1 = 6275 lbf
2 a a
R2 := p ( f e) R1 + P R2 = 7525 lbf
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 m) p S ( x , e) ( x e) + p S ( x , f ) ( x f ) + R2 S ( x , a ) P S ( x , b )
p 2 p 2
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 m) x S ( x , e) ( x e) + S ( x , f ) ( x f ) ...
2 2
+ R2 S ( x , a ) ( x a) P S ( x , b ) ( x b )

10000 30000
5000 20000
V ( x) M ( x)
0 10000
lbf in lbf
5000 0
10000 10000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-38aB
Maximum shear: Vmax := V ( f ) Vmax = 6525 lbf
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = c:
ce f c f R1 + e R2 e P
= c := c = 7.875 in
R1 R2 P R1 + R2 P
PROBLEM 3-39a
Input data: Enter data in highlighted areas b

P
Beam length L := 20 in p
Distance to concentrated load b := 18 in R1 R2
a
Concentrated load P := 1000 lbf
FIGURE 3-39aA
1
Distributed load p := 1000 lbf in Free Body Diagram for Problem 3-39
Solution: See Figure 3-39 and Mathcad file P0339a.
Distance to left end e := 0.1 a e = 40.64 mm
Distance to right end f := 0.9 a f = 365.76mm

both are zero.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( b e ) + p ( b f ) + R2 P = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R1 b ( b e) + ( b f ) + R2 ( b a) = 0
2 2
e2 f 2
+ f e p
b a
R1 := P R1 = 6275 lbf
2 a a
R2 := p ( f e) R1 + P R2 = 7525 lbf
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 m) p S ( x , e) ( x e) + p S ( x , f ) ( x f ) + R2 S ( x , a ) P S ( x , b )
p 2 p 2
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 m) x S ( x , e) ( x e) + S ( x , f ) ( x f ) ...
2 2
+ R2 S ( x , a ) ( x a) P S ( x , b ) ( x b )

10000 30000
5000 20000
V ( x) M ( x)
0 10000
lbf in lbf
5000 0
10000 10000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-39aB
Maximum shear: Vmax := V ( f ) Vmax = 6525 lbf
Maximum moment occurs where V is zero, which is x = c:
ce f c f R1 + e R2 e P
= c := c = 7.875 in
R1 R2 P R1 + R2 P
PROBLEM 3-40a
a
P1 P2
Given: Distance to gear 2 L := 20 in
Distance to gear 1 a := 16 in
Distance to RH bearing b := 18 in R1 R2
b
Concentrated load at gear 2 P2 := 1000 lbf
L
Concentrated load at gear 1 P1 := 0.4 P2
FIGURE 3-40a
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - P1<x - a>-1 + R2<x - b>-1 - P2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - P1<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>0 - P2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - P1<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>1 - P<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 P1 + R2 P2 = 0
M = R1 L P1 ( L a ) + R2 ( b a ) = 0
R1 := P1 1
a L
+ P2 1 R1 = 67 lbf
b b
R2 := P1 + P2 R1 R2 = 1467 lbf
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 in) P1 S ( x , a ) + R2 S ( x , b ) P2 S ( x , L)
M ( x) := R1 S ( x , 0 mm) ( x 0 mm) P1 S ( x , a ) ( x a ) ...

+ R2 S ( x , b ) ( x b) P2 S ( x , L) ( x L)


1000 0
500 1000
V ( x) M ( x)
lbf in lbf
0 2000
500 3000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-40aB
Mmax := M ( b ) Mmax = 2000 in lbf
PROBLEM 3-41a
Input data: Enter data in highlighted areas a

P1 P2
Distance to gear 2 L := 20 in
Distance to gear 1 a := 16 in
Distance to RH bearing b := 18 in R1 R2
b
Concentrated load at gear 2 P2 := 1000 lbf
L
Concentrated load at gear 1 P1 := 0.4 P2
FIGURE 3-41aA
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - P1<x - a>-1 + R2<x - b>-1 - P2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - P1<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>0 - P2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - P1<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>1 - P<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 P1 + R2 P2 = 0
M = R1 L P1 ( L a ) + R2 ( b a ) = 0
R1 := P1 1
a L
+ P2 1 R1 = 67 lbf
b b
R2 := P1 + P2 R1 R2 = 1467 lbf
S ( x , z) := if ( x z , 1 , 0 )
V ( z) := R1 S ( z , 0 in) P1 S ( z , a) + R2 S ( z , b) P2 S ( z , L)
M ( z) := R1 S ( z , 0 mm) ( z 0 mm ) P1 S ( z , a) ( z a ) ...
+ R2 S ( z , b) ( z b ) P2 S ( z , L) ( z L)

1000 0
500 1000
V ( x) M ( x)
lbf in lbf
0 2000
500 3000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
in in
FIGURE 3-41aB
Mmax := M ( b ) Mmax = 2000 in lbf
PROBLEM 3-42 _____

Statement: A 1000 kg speedboat reaches a speed of 16 kph at the instant it takes up the slack in a 100 m-long
tow rope attached to a surfboard carrying a 100 kg passenger. If the rope has k = 5 N/m, what is
the dynamic force exerted on the surfboard?
Given: Mass of speedboat ms := 1000 kg

Speed of boat vi := 16 kph
Mass of passenger mp := 100 kg
1
Rope stiffness k := 5 N m
Assumptions: 1. The water does not influence the dynamic force.
2. An impact model can be used to estimate the dynamic force.
1. For the impact model, the passenger is the "struck" mass and the speedboat is the "striking mass". Thus, from
equation 3.15, the energy correction factor is:
1
:= = 0.97
mp
1+
3 ms
2. Use equation 3.11 to estimate the dynamic force on the surfboard/passenger.
Fi := vi ms k Fi = 309 N
PROBLEM 3-43
Statement: Figure P3-19 shows an oil-field pump jack. For the position shown, draw free-body diagrams of the
crank (2), connecting rod (3) and walking beam (4) using variable names similar to those used in
Case Studies 1A and 2A. Assume that the crank turns slowly enough that accelerations can be
ignored. Include the weight acting at the CG of the walking beam and the crank but not the
connecting rod.

2. Inertia forces may be ignored.
1. Isolate each of the elements to be analyzed, starting with the walking beam, since the external forces on it are
known. Place the known force, Fcable, at the point P and the known weight at the CG. Assume the forces at the
interfaces O4 and B to be positive. The position vectors R14, R34, and Rp will be known as will the angle, 3,that
the connecting rod makes with the horizontal axis.
F34
R34
y
R 14
3
RP B
head end F x
14y
P 4 counterweight
O4 F 14x
W4
F cable
F43
2. The connecting rod is a two-force member with

the forces acting at the interfaces A and B along y
the line joining points A and B. The assumption B
made in step 1 is that these are compressive
forces on link 3. R 43
3 3
R23
F 23
P0343.xmcd
3. The crank is acted on by forces at A and O2, its weight at its CG, and a torque which we will assume to be
positive (CCW). As in step 1, assume that the unknown reaction force at O2 is positive.
F32
y
F 3
12y A
x
2
O2 F 12x
T2
W2
P0343.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-44
Statement: For the pump jack of Problem 3-43 and the data of Table P3-3, determine the pin forces on the
walking beam, connecting rod, and crank and the reaction torque on the crank.
Given: R12 := 13.2 in 12 := 135 deg R14 := 79.22 in 14 := 196 deg
R32 := 0.80 in 32 := 45 deg R34 := 32.00 in 34 := 169 deg
Fcable := 2970 lbf W2 := 598 lbf W4 := 2706 lbf
3 := 98.5 deg RP := 124.44 in P := 185 deg
Solution: See Mathcad files P0343 and P0344.

1. Draw free-body diagrams of each element (see Problem 3-43).
F34
R34
y
R 14
3
RP B
head end F x
14y
P 4 counterweight
O4 F 14x
W4
F cable
F43
y
B
F32
y R 43
3 3 3
F 12y A
x x
2
O2 F 12x
R23
T2
W2
A
F 23
P0344.xmcd
2. Calculate the x- and y-components of the position vectors.
R12x := R12 cos( 12) R12x = 9.334 in R12y := R12 sin( 12) R12y = 9.334 in
RPx := RP cos( P) RPx = 123.966 in RPy := RP sin( P) RPy = 10.846 in
3. Write equations 3(b) for link 4, the walking beam.
Fx: F14x + F34x = 0 (1)
Fy: Fcable + F14y + F34y W4 = 0 (2)
Mz: Rpx Fcable + ( R14x F14y R14y F14x) + ( R34x F34y R34y F34x) = 0 (3)
4. The direction (but not the sense) of F34 is known so write the equation that relates the x- and y-components of
this force.
F34y F34x tan( 3) = 0 (4)
5. There are four unknowns in the four equations above. Solving for F14x, F14y, F34x, and F34y,
1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 cable
F + W 4 F14x
F
A := R14y R14x R34y R34x
B :=
lbf 14y := A 1 B lbf

in in F34x
in in RPx Fcable
in lbf
0 0 tan( 3) 1 F34y
0
F14x = 2446 lbf F14y = 10687 lbf F34x = 2446 lbf F34y = 16363 lbf
6. From Newton's thrid law and, since the connecting rod (3) is a two-force member
F43x := F34x F43x = 2446 lbf F43y := F34y F43y = 16363 lbf
7. Write equations 3(b) for link 2, the crank.

Fx: F12x + F32x = 0 (5)
Fy: F12y + F32y W2 = 0 (6)
Mz: T2 + ( R12x F12y R12y F12x) + ( R32x F32y R32y F32x) = 0 (7)
8. There are three unknowns in the three equations above. Solving for F12x, F12y, and T2, since
P0344.xmcd

F32x
1 0 0 lbf F12x

0 1 0 W2 F32y 1
A := B := F12y := A B
R12y R12x lbf
T
in 1
( R32x F32y R32y F32x) 2
in

in lbf
F12x = 2446 lbf F12y = 16961 lbf
T2 = 146128 in-lbf
P0344.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-45
Statement: Figure P3-20 shows an aircraft overhead bin mechanism in end view. For the position shown, draw
free-body diagrams of links 2 and 4 and the door (3) using variable names similar to those used in
Case Studies 1A and 2A. There are stops that prevent further clockwise motion of link 2 (and the
identical link behind it at the other end of the door) resulting in horizontal forces being applied to
the door at points A. Assume that the mechanism is symmetrical so that each set of links 2 and 4
carry one half of the door weight. Ignore the weight of links 2 and 4 as they are negligible.

2. Inertia forces may be ignored as the mechanism is at rest against stops.
1. Isolate each of the elements to be analyzed, starting with the door. Place the force, Fstop, at the point A and the
known weight at the CG. Assume the forces in links 2 and 4 to be positive (tensile). The position vectors R43
and R23 will be known as will the angles 2 and 4 that links 2 and 4 make with the horizontal axis.
F 23
4
F 43
2
y B
F stop R43
A R23
3
x
W3
2 F 12
2. Links 2 and 4 are two-force members with the 2

forces acting at the pinned ends along the line y
joining the pin centers. The assumption made in
step 1 is that these are tensile forces on links 2 O2
and 4.
R12
2
x
4 y
R32
F 14
A
O4 x
R14
4 R34
B F 34
F 32
P0345.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-46
Statement: For the overhead bin mechanism of Problem 3-45 and the data of Table P3-4, determine the pin
forces on the door (3), and links 2 & 4 and the reaction force on each of the two stops.
Given: R23 := 180.0 mm 23 := 160.345 deg R43 := 180.0 mm 43 := 27.862 deg
W3 := 45 N 2 := 85.879 deg 4 := 172.352 deg

1. Draw free-body diagrams of each element (see Problem 3-45).
F 12
y 2
O2
4 y
R12 F 14
2
O4 x
x R14
4 R34
B F 34
R32
F 23
4
F 43
F 32 2
y B
F stop R43
A R23
3
x
W3
2
2. Calculate the x- and y-components of the position vectors on the door (3).
R23x := R23 cos( 23) R23x = 169.512 mm R23y := R23 sin( 23) R23y = 60.544 mm
3. Write equations 3(b) for link 3, the door.
Fx: Fstop + F23x + F43x = 0 (1)

P0346.xmcd
Fy: F23y + F43y 0.5 W3 = 0 (2)
Mz: R23x Fstop + ( R23x F23y R23y F23x) + ( R43x F43y R43y F43x) = 0 (3)
4. The directions (but not the sense) of F 23 and F43 are known so write the equations that relates the x- and
y-components of these forces.
F23y F23x tan( 2) = 0 (4)
F43y F43x tan( 4) = 0 (5)
5. There are five unknowns in the five equations above. Solving for F23x, F23y, F43x, F43y, and Fstop:
1 0 1 0 1 0 F23x
0.5 W3
0 1 0 1 0
F23y
R23y R23x R43y R43x R23x
A := N F43x := A 1 B N
B :=
mm mm mm mm mm 0
0 F43y
tan( 2) 1 0 0 0
0 F
0 tan( 4) 1 0 0 stop
F23x = 1.49 N F23y = 20.63 N F43x = 13.96 N F43y = 1.87 N
The pin forces at A and B are:
2 2 2 2
F23 := F23x + F23y F23 = 20.68 N F43 := F43x + F43y F43 = 14.08 N
The force on each stop is: Fstop = 12.47 N
6. From Newton's thrid law and, since links 2 and 4 are two-force members
F34x := F43x F34x = 13.96 N F34y := F43y F34y = 1.87 N
F32x := F23x F32x = 1.49 N F32y := F23y F32y = 20.63 N
The pin forces at O2 and O4 are numerically equal to those at A and B, respectively.
P0346.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-47
Statement: A particular automobile front suspension consists of two A-arms , the wheel (with tire), a coil
spring, and a shock absorber (damper). The effective stiffness of the suspension (called the "ride
rate") is a function of the coil spring stiffness and the tire stiffness. The A-arms are designed to
give the wheel a nearly vertical displacement as the tire rides over bumps in the road. The entire
assembly can be modeled as a spring-mass-damper system as shown in Figure 3-15(b). If the
sprung mass (mass of the portion of the vehicle supported by the suspension system) weighs 675
lb, determine the ride rate that is required to achieve an undamped natural frequency of 1.4 Hz.
What is the static deflection of the suspension for the calculated ride rate?
1
Units: Hz := 2 rad sec
Given: Sprung mass Ws := 675 lbf Natural frequency n := 1.4 Hz
Solution: See Figure 3-15(b) and Mathcad file P0347.
Ws 2 1
1. Calculate the sprung mass Ms := Ms = 1.748 lbf sec in
g
2. Using equation 3.4, calculate the required ride rate
2 lbf
Ride rate k := n Ms k = 135.28
in
3. Calculate the static deflection using equation 3.5
Ws
Static deflection := = 4.99in
k
P0347.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-48
Statement: The independent suspension system of Problem 3-47 has an unsprung weight (the weight of the
axle, wheel, A-arms, etc.) of 106 lb. Calculate the natural frequency (hop resonance) of the
unsprung mass if the sum of the tire and coil spring stiffnesses is 1100 lb/in.
1
lbf
Given: Unsprung mass Wu := 106 lbf Stiffness k := 1100
in
Wu 2 1
1. Calculate the unsprung mass Mu := Mu = 0.275 lbf sec in
g
2. Using equation 3.4, calculate the natural frequency
k
Natural frequency n := n = 10.1 Hz
Mu
P0348.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-49
Statement: The independent suspension system of Problem 3-47 has a sprung weight of 675 lb and a ride rate
of 135 lb/in. Calculate the damped natural frequency of the sprung mass if the damping coefficient
of the shock absorber is a constant 12 lb-sec/in.
1
lbf
Given: Sprung mass Ws := 675 lbf Ride rate k := 135
in
lbf sec
Damping coefficient d := 12
in
Ws 2 1
1. Calculate the sprung mass Ms := Ms = 1.748lbf sec in
g
2. Using equation 3.7, calculate the damped natural frequency

2

k d
Damped natural frequency d := d = 1.29Hz
Ms 2 Ms
P0349.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-50_______________________________________________________
Statement: Figure P3-22 shows a powder compaction mechanism. For the position shown, draw free-body
diagrams of the input arm (2), connecting rod (3) and compacting ram (4) using variable names
similar to those used in Case Studies 1A and 2A. Assume that the input arm turns slowly
enough that accelerations can be ignored. Ignore the weights of the arm, connecting rod, and
compacting ram. Neglect friction.

3. The reactions at slider bearings E and F can be modeled as concentrated forces acting
horizontally at the center of each bearing.
Solution: See Mathcad file P0350. y

1. Isolate each of the elements to be analyzed, starting with the
compacting rod, since the external force on it is known. Place the
known force, Fcom , at the point P. The position vectors R14E, R14E
F14E E
R14F, and R p will be known as will the angle, q3,that the R34
compacting ram makes with the vertical axis.
D
2. The connecting rod is a two-force member with the forces x
acting at the interfaces B and D along the line joining points B
and D. The assumption made in step 1 is that these are tensile
forces on link 3. F34 R14F
F
3. The input arm is acted on by forces at A, B, and C. Assume that the F14F 3
unknown reaction force at A is positive.
RP
F43 P
Fcom
D
y Compacting Ram (4)
R43
x C
R23
y
B Fin
F32
x
Rin
F23
F12y
B
R32
Connecting Rod (3)
A
F12x
R12
Input Arm (2)

P0350.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-51______________________________________________________
Statement: For the compaction mechanism of Problem 3-50 and the data of Table P3-5, determine the pin forces
on the compacting ram, connecting rod, and input arm.
Given: R12 := 148.4 mm 12 := 45 deg R14E := 57.0 mm 14E := 90 deg
R14F := 62.9 mm 14F := 270 deg R34 := 32.00 in 34 := 105.64 deg
R23 := 87.6 mm 23 := 254.36 deg R43 := 87.6 mm 43 := 74.36 deg
R32 := 42.9 mm 32 := 74.36 deg R34 := 15.0 mm 34 := 90 deg
Rin := 152.6 mm in := 225 deg RP := 105.0 mm P := 270 deg
Fcom := 100 N 3 := 254.36 deg

1. Draw free-body diagrams of each element (see Problem
3-50).
y
R14E
F14E E
R34
F43
D
x
D F34 R14F
y F
F14F 3
R43 RP
P
x
R23 Fcom
Compacting Ram (4)

B
C
F23
y
Connecting Rod (3)
Fin
F32
x
Rin
F12y
B
R32
A
F12x
R12
Input Arm (2)
P0351.xmcd

R14Ex := R14E cos( 14E) R14Ex = 0 mm R14Ey := R14E sin( 14E) R14Ey = 57.000 mm
R14Fx := R14F cos( 14F ) R14Fx = 0.000 mm R14Fy := R14F sin( 14F ) R14Fy = 62.900 mm
RPx := RP cos( P) RPx = 0.000 mm RPy := RP sin( P) RPy = 105.000 mm
Rinx := Rin cos( in) Rinx = 107.904 mm Riny := Rin sin( in) Riny = 107.904 mm
3. Write equations 3(b) for link 4, the compacting ram.
Fx: F14E + F14F + F34x = 0 (1)
Fy: Fcom + F34y = 0 (2)
Mz: (R14Ey F14E) + (R14Fy F14F ) + (R34x F34y R34y F34x) = 0 (3)
this force.
F34y F34x tan( 3) = 0 (4)
1 1 1 0
0 0
0 0 1 F F14E
F
A := R14Ey R14Fy R34y R34x com
B := N 14F := A 1 B N
mm mm F34x
mm mm 0

0 0 tan( 3) 1 F34y
0
F14E = 18.2 N F14F = 9.8 N F34x = 28.0 N F34y = 100.0 N
F43x := F34x F43x = 28.0 N F43y := F34y F43y = 100.0 N
F23x := F43x F23x = 28.0 N F23y := F43y F23y = 100.0 N
7. Write equations 3(b) for link 2, the input arm.

Fx: F12x + F32x + Finx = 0 (5)
Fy: F12y + F32y + Finy = 0 (6)
Mz: (R12x F12y R12y F12x) + (R32x F32y R32y F32x) + (Rinx Finy Riny Finx) = 0 (7)
P0351.xmcd
8. The direction (but not the sense) of Fin is known so write the equation that relates the x- and
y-components of this force.
Finy Finx tan( in) = 0 (8)
9. There are four unknowns in the four equations above. Solving for F12x, F12y, Finx, and Finy, since
F32x := F23x F32x = 28 N F32y := F23y F32y = 100 N
F32x
1 0 1 0
0 N
1 0 1 F12x
F32y F
A := R12y R12x Riny Rinx 12y := A 1 B N
B := N
mm mm mm mm Finx
( R32x F32y R32y F32x)
0 0 tan( in) 1 Finy
N mm

0
F12x = 36.0 N F12y = 36.0 N Finx = 64.0 N Finx = 64.0 N
F12x2 + F12y2 Finx2 + Finy2

F12 := Fin :=
F12 = 51 N Fin = 91 N
P0351.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-52
Statement: Figure P3-23 shows a drag link slider crank mechanism. For the position shown, draw free-body
diagrams of links 2 through 6 using variable names similar to those used in Case Studies 1A and
2A. Assume that the crank turns slowly enough that accelerations can be ignored. Ignore the
weights of the links and any friction forces or torques.

3. Links 4 and 6 are three-force bodies.

1. Isolate each of the elements to be analyzed, y
starting with the slider, link 6, since the external
forces on it are known. Place the known force, F56
FP, at the point P. This is a three-force member 5 P
so the forces are coincident at point D and there x FP
is no turning moiment on the link. The angle, D
5,that link 5 makes with the horizontal axis is
known.
2. Link 5 is a two-force member with the forces F16
acting at the interfaces C and D along the line
joining points C and D. The assumption made in Slider block 6
step 1 is that these are compressive forces on link
5.
F45 C
y
x
5
R45
D
R65 F65
Link 5
3. Link 4 is a three-force body with the three forces meeting at a point. The position vectors R 14, R34, and
R54 will be known as will the angles, 3 and 5,that links 3 and 5, respectively, make with the horizontal
axis.
P0352.xmcd
C
y
R34 F54
E
x R54
F14y
B
O4
F14x
F34 R14
F43
Link 4
y
B R43
4. Link 3 is a two-force member with the forces acting at the

interfaces A and B along the line joining points A and B.
x
R23
5. The crank is acted on by forces at A and O2, and a torque A
which we will assume to be positive (CCW). As in step 1,
assume that the unknown reaction force at O2 is positive.
F23
Link 3
F
12y
y
T
R32 F12x
O2
x
R12
A
F32
Link 2
P0352.xmcd
PROBLEM 3-53
Statement: For the drag link slider crank mechanism of Problem 3-52 and the data of Table P3-6, determine the
pin forces on the slider, connecting rods, and crank and the reaction torque on the crank.
Given: R12 := 63.5 mm 12 := 45.38 deg R14 := 93.6 mm 14 := 55.89 deg
R23 := 63.5 mm 23 := 267.8 deg R32 := 63.5 mm 32 := 225.38 deg
R34 := 103.5 mm 34 := 202.68 deg
R43 := 63.5 mm 43 := 87.80 deg R45 := 190.5 mm 45 := 156.65 deg
R54 := 103.5 mm 54 := 45.34 deg R65 := 190.5 mm 65 := 23.35 deg
FP := 85 N 5 := 156.65deg 3 := 87.80 deg

1. Draw free-body diagrams of each element (see
Problem 3-52). y
F56
5 P
Slider block 6 FP
D x
F16
F45 C
y
x
5
R45
D
Link 5 F65
R65

P0353.xmcd
C
F43
y
y
R34 F54
E
B R43
x R54
F14y
B
x
O4
F14x
R23 F34 R14
A
Link 4
F23
Link 3 F
12y
y
T
R32 F12x
O2
x
R12
A
F32
Link 2
3. Write equations 3(b) for link 5, the slider.
Fx: F56x FP = 0 (1)
Fy: F16 + F56y = 0 (2)
this force.
F56y F56x tan( 5) = 0 (3)
5. There are three unknowns in the three equations above. Solving for F56x, F56y, and F16,
P0353.xmcd
1 0 0 FP
F56x
A := 1 1
B :=
0 N 1
0 F56y := A B N
tan( 5) 1 0 0 F
16
F56x = 85.0 N F56y = 36.7 N F16 = 36.7 N
F65x := F56x F65x = 85 N F65y := F56y F65y = 36.7 N
F45x := F65x F45x = 85 N F45y := F65y F45y = 36.7 N

and, for link 4
F54x := F45x F54x = 85 N F54y := F45y F54y = 36.7 N
7. Write equations 3(b) for link 4, the rocker.

Fx: F34x + F54x + F14x = 0 (4)
Fy: F34y + F54y + F14y = 0 (5)
Mz: (R14x F14y R14y F14x) + (R34x F34y R34y F34x) + (R54x F54y R54y F54x) = 0
this force.
F34y F34x tan( 3) = 0 (7)
F54x

1 0 1 0
N F34x
0 1 0 1 F54y F

A := R34y R34x R14y R14x B := N
34y := A 1 B N
F14x
mm mm
mm mm ( R54x F54y R54y F54x)
F14y
tan( 3) 1 0 0 N mm

0
F34x = 3.5 N F34y = 90.9 N F14x = 81.5 N F14y = 127.6 N
F43x := F34x F43x = 3.5 N F43y := F34y F43y = 90.9 N
F23x := F43x F23x = 3 N F23y := F43y F23y = 90.9 N

and, for link 2
F32x := F23x F32x = 3.5 N F32y := F23y F32y = 90.9 N
P0353.xmcd
11. Write equations 3(b) for link 2, the crank.
Fx: F12x + F32x = 0 (8)
Fy: F12y + F32y = 0 (9)
Mz: T2 + ( R12x F12y R12y F12x) + ( R32x F32y R32y F32x) = 0 (10)
12. There are three unknowns in the three equations above. Solving for F12x, F12y, and T2

F32x
1 0 0 N F12x

0 1 0 F32y 1
A := B := F12y := A B
R12y R12x N
T
mm mm 1 ( R32x F32y R32y F32x) 2

N mm
F12x = 3.5 N F12y = 90.9 N T2 = 7796 N*mm
P0353.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-1a
Statement: A differential stress element has a set of applied stresses on it as indicated in each row of Table
P4-1. For row a, draw the stress element showing the applied stresses, find the principal stresses
and maximum shear stress using Mohr's circle diagram, and draw the rotated stress element
showing the principal stresses.
Given: x := 1000 y := 0 z := 0
xy := 500 yz := 0 zx := 0
Solution: See Figure 4-1a and Mathcad file P0401a.
500
y
1. Draw the stress element, indicating the x and y axes.
2. Draw the Mohr's circle axes, indicating the and x 1000
axes with CW up and CCW down.
3. Plot the positive x-face point, which is (+1000, -500),
and label it with an "x."
FIGURE 4-1aA
4. Plot the positive y-face point, which is (0, +500), and Stress Element for Problem 4-1a
label it with a "y."
5. Draw a straight line from point x to point y. Using the point where this line intersects the -axis as the center of
the Mohr circle, draw a circle that goes through points x and y.
x + y
6. The center of the circle will be at c := c = 500
2
7. The circle will intersect the -axis at two of the principal stresses. In this case, we see that one is positive and
the other is negative so they will be 1 and 3. The third principal stress is 2 = 0.
2
x y 2
8. Calculate the radius of the circle R := + xy R = 707.1
2
CW CW
1-3
1-2
500 y 500
2-3
-500 500 1000 1500 -500 500 1000 1500

3 0 1 3 0 2 1
2
500 x 500
CCW CCW
FIGURE 4-1aB
2D and 3D Mohr's Circle Diagrams for Problem 4-1a
P0401a.xmcd
9. Calculate the principal stresses 1 := c + R 1 = 1207 2 := 0
3 := c R 3 = 207
10. Draw the three Mohr's circles to represent the complete 3D stress state.
11. Calculate the principal shear stresses y
12 := 0.5 ( 1 2) 12 = 603.6 207
23 := 0.5 ( 2 3) 23 = 103.6 1207
13 := 0.5 ( 1 3) 13 = 707.1 22.5
The maximum principal stress is always 13. x
12. Determine the orientation of the principal normal

stress (1) with respect to the x-axis. From the 2D
Mohr's circle diagram, we see that the angle 2 from x
to 1 is CCW and is given by
FIGURE 4-1aC
1 x c Rotated Stress Element for Problem 4-1a
:= acos = 22.5 deg
2 R
13. Draw the rotated 2D stress element showing the two nonzero principal stresses.
P0401a.xmcd
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed. 4-1h-1
PROBLEM 4-1h
P4-1. For row h, draw the stress element showing the applied stresses, find the principal stresses
and maximum shear stress and draw the Mohr's circle diagram.
Given: x := 750 y := 500 z := 250

xy := 500 yz := 0 zx := 0
Solution: See Figures 4-1h and Mathcad file P0401h. z
1. Calculate the coefficients (stress invariants) of equation (4.4c). 250
3
C2 := x + y + z C2 = 1.500 10
x xy x zx y yz
C1 := + +
xy y zx z yz z
750 500
500 500
5
C1 = 4.375 10 x y
x xy zx
7
C0 := xy y yz C0 = 3.125 10 FIGURE 4-1hA
Stress Element for Problem 4-1h
zx yz z
3 2
2. Find the roots of the triaxial stress equation: C2 + C 1 C0 = 0
C0
110
C1
v := r := polyroots ( v) r = 250

C2
1140
1 CW
3. Extract the principal stresses from

the vector r by inspection.
1 := r 1 = 1140
3 1-3
500 1-2
2 := r 2 = 250
2
3 := r 3 = 110
1 2-3
-500 500 1000 1500

0 3 2 1
4. Using equations (4.5), evaluate
the principal shear stresses.
1 3
13 := 13 = 515
2 500
1 2
12 := 12 = 445
2
2 3
23 := 23 = 70 CCW
2
FIGURE 4-1hB
5. Draw the three-circle Mohr diagram. The Three Mohr's Circles for Problem 4-1h
PROBLEM 4-2
Statement: A 400-lb chandelier is to be hung from two 10-ft-long solid steel cables in tension. Choose a
suitable diameter for the cable such that the stress will not exceed 5000 psi. What will be the
deflection of the cables? State all assumptions.
Given: Weight of chandelier W := 400 lbf

Length of cable L := 10 ft L = 120 in
Allowable stress allow := 5000 psi
Number of cables N := 2
6
Young's modulus E := 30 10 psi
Assumptions: The cables share the load equally.

W
1. Determine the load on each cable P := P = 200 lbf
N
2. The stress in each cable will be equal to the load on the cable divided by its cross-sectional area. Using
equation (4.7), and setting the stress equal to the allowable stress, we have
4 P
allow =
2
d
3. Solve this equation for the unknown cable diameter.
4 P
d := d = 0.226 in
allow
4. Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fractional size: d := 0.250 in
5. Using equation (4.8), determine the deflection in each cable.
2
d 2
Cross-section area A := A = 0.049 in
4
P L
Cable deflection s := s = 0.016 in
A E
P0402.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-3
Statement: For the bicycle pedal-arm assembly in Figure 4-1 with rider-applied force of 1500 N at the pedal,
determine the maximum principal stress in the pedal arm if its cross-section is 15 mm in dia. The
pedal attaches to the pedal arm with a 12-mm screw thread. What is the stress in the pedal screw?
Given: Distances (see figure) a 170 mm b 60 mm

Rider-applied force Frider 1.5 kN
Pedal arm diameter d pa 15 mm
Screw thread diameter d sc 12 mm
z

a
C Tc
1. From the FBD in Figure 4-3A (and on
Frider
the solution for Problem 3-3), we see that
the force from the rider is reacted in the Mc
b Arm
pedal arm internally by a moment, a
torque, and a vertical shear force. There
are two points at section C (Figure 4-3B) Fc y
that we should investigate, one at z = 0.5 Pedal
d pa (point A), and one at y = 0.5 d pa (point
B). x
2. Refering to the FBD resulting from FIGURE 4-3A

taking a section through the arm at C, the Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-3
maximum bending moment Mc is found by
summing moments about the y-axis, and
the maximum torque Tc is found by
z
summing moments about the x-axis.
M y: Frider a Mc = 0
M x: Frider b Tc = 0
Section C
A
Maximum bending moment:
Mc Frider a Mc 255 N m B
Arm
Maximum torque:
x
Tc Frider b Tc 90 N m
y
Vertical shear:
FIGURE 4-3B
Fc Frider Fc 1.500 kN Points A and B at Section C
3. Determine the stress components at point A where we have the effects of bending and torsion, but where the
transverse shear due to bending is zero because A is at the outer fiber. Looking down the z-axis at a stress
element on the surface at A,
Distance to neutral axis cpa 0.5 d pa cpa 7.5 mm
4
Moment of inertia of d pa 3 4
pedal-arm Ipa Ipa 2.485 10 mm
64
Mc cpa
Bending stress x x 769.6 MPa
(x-direction) Ipa
Stress in y-direction y 0 MPa
Torsional stress Tc cpa

due to Tc xy xy 135.8 MPa CW
2 Ipa
2
Principal stresses at A, x y x y 2
equation (4.6a) 1A xy
2 2
2
x y x y 2
3A xy
2 2
1A 793 MPa 2A 0 MPa 3A 23 MPa
4. Determine the stress components at point B where we have the effects of transverse shear and torsion, but
where the bending stress is zero because B is on the neutral plane. Looking down the y-axis at a stress
element at B,
2
Cross-section area d pa 2
of pedal-arm Apa Apa 176.7 mm
4
Torsional stress
4 Fc
due to Tc and shear zx xy zx 124.5 MPa CW
stress due to Fc 3 Apa
Normal stresses x 0 MPa z 0 MPa
2
x z x z 2
Principal stresses at B 1B zx
2 2
2
x z x z 2
3B zx
2 2
1B 124 MPa 2B 0 MPa 3B 124 MPa
5. The maximum principal stress is at point A and is 1A 793 MPa
6. Determine the stress in the pedal screw.
Bending moment Msc Frider b Msc 90 N m
Distance to neutral axis csc 0.5 d sc csc 6 mm
4
Moment of inertia of d sc 3 4
pedal screw Isc Isc 1.018 10 mm
64
Msc csc
Bending stress y y 530.5 MPa
(y-direction) Isc
Stress in z-direction z 0 MPa
Torsional stress xy 0 MPa
Since there is no shear stress present at the top of the screw where the bending stress is a maximum, the
maximum principal stress in the pedal screw is
1 y 1 530.5 MPa
PROBLEM 4-4
Statement: The trailer hitch shown in Figure P4-2 and Figure 1-1 (p. 12) has loads applied as defined in
Problem 3-4. The tongue weight of 100 kg acts downward and the pull force of 4905 N acts
horizontally. Using the dimensions of the ball bracket shown in Figure 1-5 (p. 15), determine:
(a) The principal stresses in the shank of the ball where it joins the ball bracket.
(b) The bearing stress in the ball bracket hole.
(c) The tearout stress in the ball bracket.
(d) The normal and shear stresses in the 19-mm diameter attachment holes.
(e) The principal stresses in the ball bracket as a cantilever.
Mtongue 100 kg Fpull 4.905 kN d sh 26 mm t 19 mm
1. The weight on the tongue is Wtongue Mtongue g Wtongue 0.981 kN
2. Solving first for the reactions on the ball by summing the horizontal and vertical forces and the moments
about A.
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 4-4A
Fx : Fpull Fa1x Fb1 = 0 (1)
Fy : Fa1y Wtongue = 0 (2)

MA: Fb1 t Fpull a = 0 (3)
Fpull a
3. Solving equation (3) for Fb1 Fb1 Fb1 10.326 kN
t
4. Substituting into (1) and solving for Fa1x Fa1x Fpull Fb1 Fa1x 15.231 kN
5. Solving (2) for Fa1y Fa1y Wtongue Fa1y 0.981 kN
6. Now, refering to the FBD of the bracket, we can apply the equations of equilibrium to determine the reactions
at C and D on the bracket.
Fx : Fa2x Fb2 Fc2x Fd2 = 0 (4)
Fy : Fc2y Fa2y = 0 (5)
MC: Fd2 d Fb2 b Fa2x ( b t) Fa2y c = 0 (6)
7. Note also that the interface forces between part 1 (ball) and part 2 (bracket) have been drawn on their
respective FBDs in opposite senses. Therefore,
Fa2x Fa1x Fa2y Fa1y Fb2 Fb1
Fa2x ( b t) Fa2y c Fb2 b

8. Solving equation (6) for Fd2 Fd2 Fd2 25.505 kN
d
9. Substituting into (4) and solving for Fc2x Fc2x Fa2x Fb2 Fd2 Fc2x 30.41 kN
10. Solving (5) for Fa1y Fc2y Fa2y Fc2y 0.981 kN
11. Determine the principal stresses in the shank of the ball where it joins the ball bracket.
The internal bending moment at A on the FBD of the ball is

M Fpull a M 196.2 N m
Distance to neutral axis csh 0.5 d sh csh 13 mm
d sh
4
4 4
Moment of inertia of shank Ish Ish 2.243 10 mm
64
M csh
Bending stress (x-direction) x x 113.7 MPa
Ish
Shear stress at A xy 0 MPa
Since the shear stress is zero, x is the maximum principal stress, thus
1 x 1 114 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
12. Determine the bearing stress in the ball bracket hole.

2
Bearing area Abearing d sh t Abearing 494 mm
Fpull
Bearing stress bearing bearing 9.93 MPa
Abearing
13. Determine the tearout stress in the ball bracket.

Tearout length
Shear area (see Figure 4-4B)
2 2
Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d )
Atear 2 t ( 32 mm) 0.5 d sh

2 2
2
Atear 1111 mm
Stress
d R
Fpull
tear
Atear FIGURE 4-4B
Tearout Diagram for Problem 4-4
tear 4.41 MPa
14. Determine the normal and shear stresses in the attachment bolts if they are 19-mm dia. d bolt 19 mm
Bolt cross-section area (2 bolts)
2
d bolt 2
Abolt 2 Abolt 567.1 mm
4
Fc2x
Normal stress (tension) bolt bolt 53.6 MPa
Abolt
Shear stress W tongue
Fc2y
bolt
Abolt bolt 1.7 MPa
F pull 1
15. Determine the principal stresses in the ball bracket as a

cantilever (see Figure 4-4C). a
Bending moment
2
M Fpull a Wtongue c M 264.8 N m
M
Width of bracket w 64 mm c
3 R
w t 4
Moment of inertia I I 36581 mm
12 FIGURE 4-4C
Cantilever FBD for Problem 4-4
M t Fpull
Total tensile stress
2 I w t 72.8 MPa
Since there are no shear stress at the top and bottom of the bracket where the bending stresses are maximum,
they are also the principal stresses, thus
1 1 72.8 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

max max 36.4 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-5
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-4 for the loading conditions of Problem 3-5, i.e., determine the stresses due to a
horizontal force that will result on the ball from accelerating a 2000-kg trailer to 60 m/sec in 20 se
Assume a constant acceleration. From Problem 3-5, the pull force is 6000 N. Determine:
Mtongue 100 kg Fpull 6 kN d sh 26 mm t 19 mm
2. Solving first for the reactions on the ball by summing the horizontal and vertical forces and the moments about
A.
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 4-5A

Fpull a
3. Solving equation (3) for Fb1 Fb1 Fb1 12.632 kN
t
Fy : Fc2y Fa2y = 0 (5)
7. Note also that the interface forces between part 1 (ball) and part 2 (bracket) have been drawn on their respective
FBDs in opposite senses. Therefore,

d

M Fpull a M 240 N m
d sh
4
4 4
64
M csh
Bending stress (x-direction) x x 139.1 MPa
Ish
1 x 1 139 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

2
Fpull
Abearing

Tearout length
2 2
Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d )

2 2
2
Atear 1111 mm
Stress
d R
Fpull
tear
Atear FIGURE 4-5B
tear 5.4 MPa Tearout Diagram for Problem 4-5
2
d bolt 2
4
Fc2x
Normal stress (tension) bolt bolt 64.2 MPa
Abolt
Fc2y
bolt
Abolt bolt 1.7 MPa
F pull 1

Bending moment
2
M Fpull a Wtongue c M 308.6 N m
M
3 R
w t 4
12 FIGURE 4-5C
M t Fpull
Total tensile stress 85.1 MPa
2 I w t
1 1 85.1 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

max max 42.5 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-6
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-4 for the loading conditions of Problem 3-6, i.e., determine the stresses due to a
horizontal force that will results from an impact between the ball and the tongue of the 2000-kg
trailer if the hitch deflects 2.8 mm dynamically on impact. The tractor weighs 1000 kg and the
velocity at impact is 0.3 m/sec. Determine:
2. Solving first for the reactions on the ball by summing the horizontal and vertical forces and the moments
about A.
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 4-6A

Fpull a
3. Solving equation (3) for Fb1 Fb1 Fb1 116 kN
t
Fy : Fc2y Fa2y = 0 (5)
7. Note also that the interface forces between part 1 (ball) and part 2 (bracket) have been drawn on their respective
FBDs in opposite senses. Therefore,

d

3
M Fpull a M 2.204 10 N m
d sh
4
4 4
64
M csh
Bending stress (x-direction) x x 1277 MPa
Ish
1 x 1 1277 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

2
Fpull
Abearing

Tearout length
2 2
Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d )

2 2
2
Atear 1111 mm
Stress
d R
Fpull
tear
Atear FIGURE 4-6B
tear 49.59 MPa
2
d bolt 2
4
Fc2x
Normal stress (tension) bolt bolt 540 MPa
Abolt
Fc2y
bolt
Abolt bolt 1.7 MPa
F pull 1

Bending moment
2
3
M Fpull a Wtongue c M 2.3 10 N m
M
3 R
w t 4
12 FIGURE 4-6C
M t Fpull
Total tensile stress 635.5 MPa
2 I w t
1 1 636 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

max max 318 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-7
Statement: Design the wrist pin of Problem 3-7 for a maximum allowable principal stress of 20 ksi if the pin is
hollow and loaded in double shear.
Given: Force on wrist pin Fwristpin 12.258 kN Fwristpin 2756 lbf

Allowable stress allow 20 ksi
Assumptions: Choose a suitable outside diameter, say od 0.375 in
Solution: See Figure 4-12 in the text and Mathcad file P0407.
Fwristpin
1. The force at each shear plane is F F 1378 lbf
2
2. With only the direct shear acting on the plane, the Mohr diagram will be a circle with center at the origin and
radius equal to the shear stress. Thus, the principal normal stress is numerically equal to the shear stress, which
in this case is also the principal shear stress, so we have = 1 = allow.
F 4 F
3. The shear stress at each shear plane is = = = allow
od id
A 2 2
2 4 F
4. Solving for the inside diameter, id od id 0.230 in
allow
PROBLEM 4-8
Statement: A paper mill processes rolls of paper having a density of 984 kg/m3. The paper roll is 1.50 m
outside dia (OD) by 0.22 m inside dia (ID) by 3.23 m long and is on a simply supported, hollow,
steel shaft. Find the shaft ID needed to obtain a maximum deflection at the center of 3 mm if the
shaft OD is 22 cm.
kg
Given: Paper density 984
3
m
Roll dimensions Shaft outside dia od 220 mm
Outside diameter OD 1.50 m Young's modulus E 207 GPa
Inside diameter ID 0.22 m Allowable deflection 3 mm
Lemgth L 3.23 m
Assumptions: The shaft (beam) supporting the paper roll is simply-supported at the ends and is the same
length as the paper roll. The paper acts as a distributed load over the length of the shaft.
1. The weight of the paper roll is equal to its volume times the paper density times g.
Wroll

4
2 2
OD ID L g Wroll 53.89 kN
Wroll N
2. The intensity of the distributed load is w w 16.686
L mm
3. Using Figure B-2(b) in Appendix B with a = 0, the maximum deflection is at the midspan and is
y =
w x
24 E I
2
2 L x x L
3 3
4
5 w L
For x = L/2, this reduces to y =
384 E I
4
5 w L 7 4
Letting = -y and solving for I, we have I I 3.808 10 mm
384 E
4. The area moment of inertia for a hollow circular cross-section is I =

4
od id
4
64
1
4
64 I
id od
4
Solving this for the id yields id 198.954 mm

Round this down (for slightly less deflection) to id 198 mm
PROBLEM 4-9
Statement: A ViseGrip plier-wrench is drawn to scale in Figure P4-3, and for which the forces were analyzed
in Problem 3-9, find the stresses in each pin for an assumed clamping force of P = 4000 N in the
position shown. The pins are 8-mm dia and are all in double shear.
Given: Pin forces as calculated in Problem 3-9:
Member 1 F21 7.5 kN F41 5.1 kN
Pin diameter d 8 mm
Assumptions: Links 3 and 4 are in a toggle position, i.e., the pin that joins links 3 and 4 is in line with the pins
Figure P4-3 in the text, are shown on the link FBDs.
F 4
P
1
3 2
P
55.0 = b 50.0 = a
F14
39.5 = c 22.0 = d
F
129.2 1
4
F41 F34
F21 P

28.0 = e

P 2.8 = g

F43

3 F12
21.2 = h
F23 2
F32
26.9 = f
FIGURE 4-9
2
d 2
2. The cross-sectional area for all pins is the same and is A A 50.265 mm
4
3. The pin that joins members 1 and 2 is the most highly stressed while the stress on each of the remaining pins
is the same. Since the pins are in double shear, we will divide the pin load by 2 in each case.
F12
Pin joining 1 and 2 12 12 74.6 MPa
2 A
F14
All other pins 14 14 50.7 MPa
2 A
PROBLEM 4-10
Statement: The over-hung diving board of problem 3-10 is shown in Figure P4-4a. Assume cross-section
dimensions of 305 mm x 32 mm. The material has E = 10.3 GPa. Find the largest principal stress
at any location in the board when a 100-kg person is standing at the free end.
Given: Weight of person W 100 kgf 2000 = L

Board dimensions
R1 P
Distance to support a 0.7 m
Length of board L 2 m
R2
Cross-section w 305 mm
t 32 mm 700 = a
FIGURE 4-10
Assumptions: The weight of the beam is negligible Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-10
be ignored.
1. From the FBD of the diving board and Figure B-3 (Appendix B), the reactions at the supports are
R1 W 1
L
R1 1821 N
a
R2 W
L
R2 2802 N
a
2. Also from Figure D-3, the maximum bending moment occurs at the right-hand support where, in the FBD
above, x = a.
Mmax R1 a Mmax 1275 N m
3. The maximum bending stress will occur on the top and bottom surfaces of the board at the section where the
maximum bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = a. The only stress present on the top or
bottom surface of the board is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the top surface where the stress is
tensile, x. is the principal stress 1 . Thus,
t
Distance to extreme fiber c c 16 mm
2
3
w t 5 4
Moment of inertia I I 8.329 10 mm
12
Mmax c
I
Maximum principal stress 1 x 1 24.5 MPa
PROBLEM 4-11
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-10 using the loading conditions of Problem 3-11. Assume the board weighs 29
kg and deflects 13.1 cm statically when the person stands on it. Find the largest principal stress
at any location in the board when the 100-kg person in Problem 4-10 jumps up 25 cm and lands
back on the board. Find the maximum deflection.

Distance to support a 700 mm R1 Fi
Mass of person mpers 100 kg
R2
Static deflection st 131 mm
Height of jump h 250 mm 700 = a
FIGURE 4-11
t 32 mm Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-11
Assumptions: The apparent Young's modulus for fiberglas is

4
E 1.03 10 MPa

1. From Problem 3-11, the dynamic load resulting from the impact of the person with the board isFi 3.056 kN
2. From the FBD of the diving board and Figure B-3(a) (Appendix B), the reactions at the supports are
R1 Fi 1
L
R1 5.675 kN
a
R2 Fi
L
R2 8.731 kN
a
3. Also from Figure D-3(a), the maximum bending moment occurs at the right-hand support where, in the
FBD above, x = a.
Mmax R1 a Mmax 3.973 kN m

maximum bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = a. The only stress present on the top or bottom
surface of the board is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the top surface where the stress is tensile, x is the
principal stress 1 . Thus,
t
2
3
w t 5 4
12
Mmax c
I
5. Calculate the maximum deflection from the equation given in Figure D-3(a) at x = L. Let b in the figure be a in
our problem and let a in the figure be equal to L, then
( a L) L L ( L a ) a ( L a ) L
Fi 3 3 2
ymax ymax 401.4 mm
6 a E I
PROBLEM 4-12
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-10 using the cantilevered diving board design in Figure P4-4b.
Given: Beam length L 1300 mm 2000
Weight at free end P 100 kgf 1300 = L

Cross-section w 305 mm P
t 32 mm
Assumptions: The apparent Young's modulus for
M1
fiberglas is R1
4
E 1.03 10 MPa
700
Solution: See Figure 4-12 and Mathcad file P0412. FIGURE 4-12
R1 P R1 981 N
M1 P L M1 1275 N m
2. Also from Figure D-1, the maximum bending moment occurs at the support where, in the FBD above, x = 0.
maximum bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = 0. The only stress present on the top or bottom
t
2
3
w t 5 4
12
Mmax c
I
PROBLEM 4-13
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-11 using the diving board design shown in Figure P4-4b. Assume the board
weighs 19 kg and deflects 8.5 cm statically when the person stands on it.
Given: Unsupported length L 1300 mm

2000
1300 = L
Static board deflection stat 85 mm
Fi
Mass of person mperson 100 kg
Height of jump h 250 mm
M1
Cross-section w 305 mm R1
t 32 mm
700
Assumptions: The apparent Young's modulus for fiberglas is
4 FIGURE 4-13
E 1.03 10 MPa
1. From Problem 3-13, the dynamic load resulting from the impact of the person with the board isFi 3.487 kN
R1 Fi R1 3487 N
M1 Fi L M1 4533 N m
3. Also from Figure D-1, the maximum bending moment occurs at the support where, in the FBD above, x = 0.
maximum bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = 0. The only stress present on the top or bottom
t
2
3
w t 5 4
12
Mmax c
I
5. Calculate the maximum deflection from the equation given in Figure D-3(a) at x = L. Let b in the figure be a in
our problem and let a in the figure be equal to L, then
3
Fi L
ymax ymax 297.7 mm
3 E I
PROBLEM 4-14
Statement: Figure P4-5 shows a child's toy called a pogo stick. The child stands on the pads, applying
half her weight on each side. She jumps off the ground, holding the pads up against her
feet, and bounces along with the spring cushioning the impact and storing energy to help
each rebound. Design the aluminum cantilever beam sections on which she stands to
survive jumping 2 in off the ground. Assume an allowable stress of 20 ksi. Define and size
the beam shape.
Given: Allowable stress allow 20 ksi

6
Young's modulus E 10.3 10 psi
Assumptions: The beam will have a rectangular

cross-section with the load applied at a
distance of 5 in from the central support.
L 5 in
1. From Problem 3-14, the total dynamic force on both

foot supports is
Fi 224 lbf
Therefore, the load on each support is Fi /2 Fi /2
Fi
P P 112 lbf
2
2. To give adequate support to the childs foot, let the

width of the support beam be
w 1.5 in
3. From Figure B-1(a) in Appendix B, the maximum
bending moment at x = 0 is
P
M P L M 560 in lbf
FIGURE 4-14
4. We can now calculate the minimum required section modulus, Z = I/c.
M
Bending stress = = allow
Z
M 3
Solving for Z, Z Z 458.8 mm
allow
3 2
w t t w t
5. For a rectangular cross-section, I = and c = so Z =
12 2 6
6 Z
Solving for t, t t 0.335 in
w
Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fraction, t 0.375 in
PROBLEM 4-15
Statement: Design a shear pin for the propeller shaft of an outboard motor if the shaft through which the
pin is placed is 25-mm diameter, the propeller is 20-cm diameter, and the pin must fail when a
force > 400 N is applied to the propeller tip. Assume an ultimate shear strength for the pin
material of 100 MPa.
Given: Propeller shaft dia d 25 mm Fpin

T Propeller Hub
Propeller dia D 200 mm
Max propeller tip force Fmax 400 N
Ultimate shear strength S us 100 MPa Shear Pin
Assumptions: A shear pin is in direct, double shear.

Fpin Propeller Shaft
d
1. Calculate the torque on the propeller shaft that will FIGURE 4-15
result from a tip force on the propeller of Fmax. Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-15
D
T Fmax T 40000 N mm
2
2. This will be reacted by the shear pin's couple on the shaft. Determine the magnitude of the direct shear force.
T
Fpin Fpin 1600 N
d
3. Determine the maximum pin diameter that will shear at this force.
Fpin 4 Fpin
Direct shear stress = = = S us
A 2
d pin
4 Fpin
Solving for the pin diameter d pin d pin 4.514 mm
S us
Round this to d pin 4.5 mm
PROBLEM 4-16
varied to cause the ball to drop at different locations. Find the maximum stress and deflection
in the rods assuming that they are
(a) simply supported at each end, and
(b) fixed at each end.
Given: Rod length L 30 in

a Fball
Rod diameter d 1.00 in
Distance to load a 23.15 in
6 R1 L R2
Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
Assumptions: The analysis of Problem 3-16 yielded

FIGURE 4-16A
the following for a simply supported
beam: Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-16(a), taken
on a plane through the rod axis and ball center
Max ball load Fball 13.89 lbf
Max moment Mmax 73.4 in lbf
Reactions R1 3.17 lbf
R2 10.72 lbf

1. The maximum bending stress will occur at the outer fibers of the rod at the section where the maximum
bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = a. The only stress present on the top or bottom surface of
the rod is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the bottom surface where the stress is tensile, x is the principal
stress 1 . Thus, for a simply supported rod,
d
Distance to extreme fiber c c 0.5 in
2
4
d 4
Moment of inertia I I 0.0491 in
64
Mmax c
Bending stress x x 748 psi
I
Maximum principal stress 1 x 1 748 psi
2. Calculate the maximum deflection for the simply supported case from the equation given in Figure D-2(a),
Fball a
4
2
2 a
3
ymax L a ymax 0.0013 in
6 E I L
a Fball
3. For the case where the rod is built in at each end,
the beam is statically indeterminate. As seen in
Figure 4-16B, there are four unknown reactions and M1
only two equilibrium equations can be written using R1 L R 2 M2
statics. We will find the reactions using Example 4-7
as a model. FIGURE 4-16B
Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-16(b), taken on a
plane through the rod axis and ball center
4. Write an equation for the load function in terms of equations 3.17 and integrate the resulting function four
times using equations 3.18 to obtain the shear and moment functions. Note use of the unit doublet function to
represent the moment at the wall. For the beam in Figure 4-16B,
q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - F<x - a>-1 + R2<x - L>-1 + M2<x - L>-2
V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - F<x - a>0 + R2<x - L>0 + M2<x - L>-1 + C1
M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - F<x - a>1 + R2<x - L>1 + M2<x - L>0 + C1x+ C2
(x) = ( -M1<x - 0>1 + R1<x - 0>2/2 - F<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - L>2/2 + M2<x - L>1 + C1x2/2 + C2x + C3) / EI
y(x) = ( -M1<x - 0>2/2 + R1<x - 0>3/6 - F<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - L>3/6 + M2<x - L>2 /2+ C1x3/6 + C2x2/2 + C3x + C4) / EI
5. Because the reactions have been included in the loading function, the shear and moment diagrams both
close to zero at each end of the beam, making C1 = C2 = 0. This leaves six unknowns; the four reactions and the
constants of integration, C3 and C4. There are four boundary conditions that we can use and two equilibrium
equations. The boundary conditions are: at x = 0, = 0 and y = 0; and at x = L, = 0 and y = 0. Applying the
boundary conditions at x = 0 results in C3 = C4 = 0. Applying the BCs at x = L results in the following two
equations, which are solved for R1 and M1.
R1 2 F 2
At x = L, =0 0= L M 1 L ( L a)
2 2
R1 3 M1 2 F 3
y =0 0= L L ( L a)
6 2 6
Solving these two equations simultaneously for R1 and M1,
Fball ( L a)
3
( L a )
2
M1 M1 16.765 in lbf
L L
2
M1 ( L a)
R1 2 Fball R1 1.842 lbf
L 2
L
6. The remaing two reactions can be found by using the equations of equilibrium.
Fy = 0: R1 Fball R2 = 0
M = 0: M1 Fball a R2 L M2 = 0
Solving these two equations simultaneously for R2 and M2,
R2 Fball R1 R2 12.048 lbf
M2 M1 Fball a R2 L M2 56.657 in lbf

7. Define the range for x, x 0 in 0.005 L L
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
9. Write the shear, moment, slope, and deflection equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying
factor to get the effect of the singularity functions.
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 mm) Fball S ( x a ) R2 S ( x L)
M ( x) M1 S ( x 0 mm) R1 S ( x 0 mm) ( x 0 mm) Fball S ( x a ) ( x a )

M2 S ( x L) R2 S ( x L) ( x L)
1 R1 2 Fball 2
( x) M1 S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x 0 mm) ( x 0 mm) S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 2
R
M2 S( x L) ( x L) 2 S( x L) ( x L) 2
2
1 M1 2 R1 3 Fball 3
y ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x 0 mm) ( x 0 mm) S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 6 6
M2 R
S ( x L) ( x L) 2 2 S ( x L) ( x L) 3
2 6
10. Plot the shear, moment, slope, and deflection diagrams.
(a) Shear Diagram (b) Moment Diagram
5 40
20
0
Moment, M - lb in
Shear, V - lb
0
5
20
10
40
15 60
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
Distance along beam, x - in Distance along beam, x - in
(c) Slope Diagram (d) Deflection Diagram
0.1 0
Deflection - thousandths of in
Slope - Thousands of Rad
0.2
0 0.4
0.6
0.1 0.8
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
Distance along beam, x - in Distance along beam, x - in
FIGURE 4-16C
Shear, Moment, Slope, and Deflection Diagrams for Problem 4-16(b)
11 The maximum moment occurs at x = L and is

Mmax M2 Mmax 56.7 in lbf
12 Calculate the maximum bending and principal stresses.
Mmax c
Bending stress x x 577 psi
I
Maximum principal stress 1 x 1 577 psi
13. To find the maximum deflection, first determine at what point on the beam the slope is zero. Let this be at x = e.
From the slope diagram, we see that e < a. Using the slope equation and setting it equal to zero, we have
R1 2
For = 0 0 = M1 e e
2
2 M1
Solving for e e e 18.204 in
R1
Maximum deflection ymax y ( e) ymax 0.00063 in
PROBLEM 4-17
tongs. The distance between the handles is 4 in, and the mean radius r of the tong is 6 in. The
rectangular cross-sectional dimensions are 0.75 x 0.312 in. Find the stress in the tongs.
Given: Mean radius of tong rc 6.00 in F

Tong width w 0.312 in
C
Tong depth h 0.75 in FC
3.5 = cy
O
Assumptions: The tong can be analyzed as a curved FO
beam.
11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
Solution: See Problem 3-17, Figure 4-17, A

12.0 = by
and Mathcad file P0417.
5.0 = bx
1. The maximum bending moment and axial force in the
tong were found in Problem 3-17 at point A. They are FB
B
Maximum moment MA 237.5 in lbf W/2
Axial force at D FAn 25 lbf
FIGURE 4-17
2. Calculate the section area, inside radius and outside radus.
2
Area of section A h w A 0.234 in
Inside and outside radii ri rc 0.5 h ri 5.625 in
of section
ro rc 0.5 h ro 6.375 in
3. Use the equation in the footnote on page 195 of the text to calculate the radius of the neutral axis.
ro ri
Radius of neutral axis rn rn 5.992 in
ro
ln
ri
4. Calculate the eccentricty and the distances from the neutral axis to the extreme fibers.
Eccentricity e rc rn e 0.007821 in
Distances from neutral ci rn ri ci 0.3672 in

axis to extreme fibers
co ro rn co 0.3828 in
MA c i FAn
Stresses at inner and i i 8.58 ksi
outer radii e A ri A
MA co FAn
o o 7.69 ksi
e A ro A
5. The shear stress is zero at the outer fibers. Therefore, these are the principal stresses. At the inner surface
1 i 1 8.58 ksi 2 0 ksi 3 0 ksi
PROBLEM 4-18
Statement: A set of steel reinforcing rods is to be stretched axially in tension to create a tensile stress of 30
ksi prior to being cast in concrete to form a beam. Determine how much force will be required to
stretch them the required amount and how much deflection is required. There are 10 rods; each
is 0.75-in diameter and 30 ft long.
Given: Desired stress 30 ksi Rod diameter d 0.75 in

6
Number of rods Nrods 10 Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
Rod length L 30 ft
Assumptions: The rods share the load equally.

2
d 2
1. Calculate the cross-sectional area of one rod. A A 0.442 in
4
2. Determine the force required to achieve the desired stress level in one rod.
F
= F A F 13.254 kip
A
3. Determine the total force required to achieve the desired stress level in all rods.
Ftotal Nrods F Ftotal 132.5 kip
4. Determine the amount the rods will deflect under the applied load.
F L
0.360 in
A E
PROBLEM 4-19
Statement: The clamping fixture used to pull the rods in Problem 4-18 is conected to the hydraulic ram by a
clevis like that shown in Figure P4-8. Determine the size of the clevis pin needed to withstand
the applied force. Assume an allowable shear stress of 20 000 psi and an allowable normal
stress of 40 000 psi. Determine the required outside radius of the clevis end to not exceed the
above allowable stresses in either tear out or bearing if the clevis flanges are each 0.8 in thick.
Given: Desired rod stress rod 30 ksi Rod diameter d 0.75 in

6
Number of rods Nrods 10 Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
Rod length L 30 ft Clevis flange thickness t 0.8 in
Clevis strength S sallow 20 ksi
S ballow 40 ksi
Assumptions: The rods share the load equally, and there is one clevis for all ten rods.
Solution: See Figures 4-12 and 4-13 in the text, Figure 4-19, and Mathcad file P0419.
2
d 2
1. Calculate the cross-sectional area of one rod. A A 0.442 in
4
F
rod = F rod A F 13.254 kip
A
Ftotal Nrods F Ftotal 132.5 kip
This force is transmitted through the clevis pin, which is in double shear.
4. Calculate the minimum required clevis pin diameter for the allowable shear stress. Divide the load by 2
because of the double shear loading.
Ftotal 2 Ftotal
pin = = = S sallow
2 Apin 2
d
2 Ftotal
Solving for the pin diameter d d 2.054 in
S sallow
Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fraction ( 2 1/8) d 2.125 in
5. Check the bearing stress in the clevis due to the pin on one side of the clevis.
2
Bearing stress area Ab d t Ab 1.700 in
Ftotal
Bearing force Fb Fb 66.268 kip
2
Fb
Bearing stress b b 39.0 ksi
Ab
Since this is less than S ballow, this pin diameter is acceptable.
6. Determine the tearout stress in the clevis.
Tearout length
2 2
Shear area (see Figure 4-19) Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d )
Shear force
Ftotal
Ftear Ftear 66.268 kip
2
Shear stress and strength

d R
Ftear Ftear FIGURE 4-19
= = = S sallow
Atear 2 2
2 t R ( 0.5 d )
2
Ftear 2
Solving for the clevis radius, R R ( 0.5 d) R 2.328 in
2 t S sallow
Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fraction ( 2 3/8) R 2.375 in
PROBLEM 4-20
Statement: Repeat Problem 4-19 for 12 rods, each 1 cm in diameter and 10 m long. The desired rod stress is 20
MPa. The allowable normal stress in the clevis and pin is 280 MPa and their allowable shear stress
is 140 MPa. Each clevis flange is 2 cm wide.
3 6 9
Units: kN 10 newton MPa 10 Pa GPa 10 Pa
Given: Desired rod stress rod 200 MPa Rod diameter d 10 mm
Number of rods Nrods 12 Young's modulus E 207 GPa
Rod length L 10 m Clevis flange thickness t 20 mm
Clevis strength S sallow 140 MPa
S ballow 280 MPa
Assumptions: The rods share the load equally, and there is one clevis for all twelve rods.
Solution: See Figures 4-12 and 4-13 in the text, Figure 4-20, and Mathcad file P0420.
2
d 2
1. Calculate the cross-sectional area of one rod. A A 78.54 mm
4
F
rod = F rod A F 15.708 kN
A
Ftotal Nrods F Ftotal 188.5 kN
This force is transmitted through the clevis pin, which is in double shear.
4. Calculate the minimum required clevis pin diameter for the allowable shear stress. Divide the load by 2 because
of the double shear loading.
Ftotal 2 Ftotal
pin = = = S sallow
2 Apin 2
d
2 Ftotal
Solving for the pin diameter d d 29.277 mm
S sallow
Round this up to the next higher even mm d 30 mm
2
Bearing stress area Ab d t Ab 600 mm
Ftotal
Bearing force Fb Fb 94.248 kN
2
Fb
Bearing stress b b 157.1 MPa
Ab
Since this is less than S ballow, this pin diameter is acceptable.
Tearout length
2 2
Shear force
Ftotal
Ftear Ftear 94.248 kN
2
Shear stress and strength

d R
Ftear Ftear
= = = S sallow
Atear 2 2 FIGURE 4-20
2 t R ( 0.5 d ) Tearout Diagram for Problem 4-20
2
Ftear 2
Solving for the clevis radius, R R ( 0.5 d) R 22.544 mm
2 t S sallow
Round this up to the next higher even mm R 24 mm
PROBLEM 4-21
tighten the wheel nuts, a single-ended wrench in (a), and a double-ended wrench in (b). In each
case two hands are required to provide forces respectively at A and B as shown. The distance
between points A and B is 1 ft in both cases and the handle diameter is 0.625 in. The wheel nuts
require a torque of 70 ft-lb. Find the maximum principle stress and maximum deflection in each
wrench design.
Given: Distance between A and B d AB 1 ft

Tightening torque T 70 ft lbf
Wrench diameter d 0.625 in
Assumptions: 1. The forces exerted by the user's hands lie in a plane through the wrench that is also parallel
to the plane of the wheel.

12" = dAB
1. In Problem 3-21 we found that for both cases F
F 70 lbf
2. From examination of the FBDs, we see that, in

both cases, the arms are in bending and the stub T
that holds the socket wrench is in pure torsion.
The maximum bending stress in the arm will occur F
near the point where the arm transitions to the (a) Single-ended Wrench
stub. The stress state at this transition is very
complicated, but we can find the nominal bending
stress there by treating the arm as a cantilever 12" = dAB
beam, fixed at the transition point. For both cases
F
the torque in the stub is the same. 6"
Case (a)
T
2. The bending moment at the transition is
F
Ma F d AB Ma 840 lbf in
FIGURE 4-21
3. The tensile stress at this point is found from Free Body Diagrams for Problem 4-21
4
d 4
64
Dist to extreme fibre c 0.5 d c 0.313 in
M a c
Stress x x 35.05 ksi
I
4. There are no other stress components present at this point, so x is the maximum principle stress here and
1 x 1 35.0 ksi 2 0 psi 3 0 psi
5. The torque in the stub is T 840 in lbf

6. The shear stress at any point on the outside surface of the stub is found from
4
Polar moment of inertia J 2 I J 0.0150 in
Tc
Shear stress xy xy 17.52 ksi
J
7. There are no other stress components present along the outside surface of the stub, so
1 xy 1 17.5 ksi 2 0 psi 3 1
8. Thus, the maximum principle stress for case (a) is on the upper surface of the handle (arm) near the point
where it transitions to the stub.
There will be two deflection components that we can calculate separately and then add (superposition).
One will come from the bending of the arm and one will come from the twisting of the stub, projected out
to the end of the arm.
9. Deflection of the arm due to bending only for a stub length of stub 3 in:
6 6
Assuming that the wrenches are made from steel E 30 10 psi G 11.7 10 psi
3
F d AB
From Figure B-1(a), Appendix B, yarm yarm 0.179 in
3 E I
From equation (4.24), the T stub

angular twist of the stub is stub stub 0.014 rad
J G
The deflection at the end of
the arm due to the stub twist ystub d AB stub ystub 0.173 in
is
So, the total deflection is ya yarm ystub ya 0.352 in
Case (b)
F d AB
10. The bending moment at the transition is Mb Mb 420 lbf in
2
11. The tensile stress at this point is found from
M b c
Stress x x 17.52 ksi
I
1 x 1 17.5 ksi 2 0 psi 3 0 psi
13. The torque in the stub is T 840 in lbf
Tc
J
1 xy 1 17.5 ksi 2 0 psi 3 1
16. Thus, the maximum principle stress for case (b) is the same on the upper surface of the handle (arm) near the
point where it transitions to the stub, and on the outside surface of the stub.
There will be two deflection components that we can calculate separately and then add (superposition).
One will come from the bending of the arm and one will come from the twisting of the stub, projected out to
the end of the arm.
F 0.5 d AB
Deflection of the arm due to bending only: 3
From Figure B-1(a), Appendix B, yarm yarm 0.022 in
3 E I
From equation (4.24), the T stub

angular twist of the stub is stub stub 0.014 rad
J G
The deflection at the end of d AB

the arm due to the stub twist ystub stub ystub 0.086 in
2
is
So, the total deflection is yb yarm ystub yb 0.109 in
PROBLEM 4-22
Statement: A roller-blade skate is shown in Figure P4-10. The polyurethane wheels are 72 mm dia. The
skate-boot-foot combination weighs 2 kg. The effective "spring rate" of the person-skate
subsystem is 6000 N/m. The axles are 10-mm-dia steel pins in double shear. Find the stress in
the pins for a 100-kg person landing a 0.5-m jump on one foot. (a) Assume all 4 wheels land
simultaneously. (b) Assume that one wheel absorbs all the landing force.
Given: Axle pin diameter d 10 mm

1. From Problem 3-22, we have the forces for cases (a) and (b): Fa 897 N Fb 3.59 kN
2. In both cases, this is the force on one axle. The shear force will be one half of these forces because the pins
are in double shear.
2
d 2
Shear area As As 78.54 mm
4
Shear stress
Fa
Case (a) all wheels landing a a 5.71 MPa
2 As
Fb
Case (b) one wheel landing b b 22.9 MPa
2 As
PROBLEM 4-23a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-11a. Find the reactions, maximum shear,
maximum moment, maximum slope, maximum bending stress, and maximum deflection for the
data given in row a from Table P4-2.

L
b
Distance to concentrated load b 0.6 m a
1 F

8 4
Moment of inertia I 2.85 10 m R1 R2
2
Distance to extreme fiber c 2.00 10 m FIGURE 4-23A
1. The reactions, maximum shear and maximum moment were all found in Problem 3-23a. Those results are
summarized here.
Load function q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - 0>0 + w<x - a>0 - F<x - b>-1 + R2<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - 0>1 + w<x - a>1 - F<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - 0>2/2 + w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>1
Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
Reactions R1 264.0 N R2 316.0 N
Maximum shear Vmax 316 N (negative, from x = b to x =L)
Maximum moment Mmax 126.4 N m (at x = b)
2. Integrate the moment function, multiplying by 1/EI, to get the slope.

(x) = [R1<x>2/2 - w<x>3/6 + w<x - a>3/6 - F<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
3. Integrate again to get the deflection.
y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - w<x>4/24 + w<x - a>4/24 - F<x - b>3/6 + R2<x-L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
4. Evaluate C3 and C4
At x = 0 and x = L, y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0.
R1 3 w 4 w 4 F 3
0= L L ( L a) ( L b ) C 3 L
6 24 24 6
1 R1 3 w 4 w 4 F 3 2
C3
L L ( L a) ( L b) C3 31.413 N m
L 6 24 24 6
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
7. Write the slope and deflection equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to
get the effect of the singularity functions. See Figure 4-23aB where these functions are plotted.
1 R1 2 w 3 w 3
( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 6 6
R
2 S ( x L) ( x L) 2 F S( x b) ( x b ) 2 C3
2 2
1 R1 3 w 4 w 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 24 24
R
2 S( x L) ( x L) 3 F S ( x b ) ( x b) 3 C3 x
6 6
8. Maximum slope occurs at x = L max ( L) max 0.335 deg
9. Maximum deflection occurs at x = c, where = 0 and c < b.
1 R1 2 w 3 w 3
0 = c c ( c a ) C3 = 0
E I 2 6 6
Solving for c,
R1 w w 2 w 3
A 3 a B 3 a C C3 a
2 6 6 6
2
A 92.000 N B 16.000 N m C 33.547 N m
2
B B 4 A C
c c 0.523 m
2 A
Substituting c into the deflection equation, ymax y ( c) ymax 1.82 mm
SLOPE, radians DEFECTION, mm

0.01 0
0.005 0.5
y ( x)
( x) 0 1
mm
0.005 1.5
0.01 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x x
m m
FIGURE 4-23aB
Slope and Deflection Diagrams for Problem 4-23a
10. The maximum bending stress occurs at x = b, where the moment is a maximum. For
2
c 2.00 10 m c 20 mm
Mmax c
max max 88.7 MPa
I
PROBLEM 4-24a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-11b. Find the reactions, maximum
shear, maximum moment, maximum slope, maximum bending stress, and maximum deflection for
the data given in row a from Table P4-2.

a
F
Distance to concentrated load b 0.6 m
w
1
Concentrated load F 500 N M1
8 4
Moment of inertia I 2.85 10 m R1
2
Distance to extreme fiber c 2.00 10 m
FIGURE 4-24A
summarized here.
Load function q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 - F<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 - F<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - L>1
Reactions R1 620.0 N M1 584.0 N m
Maximum shear Vmax 620 N (positive, at x = 0)
Maximum moment Mmax 584 N m (negative, at x = 0)

(x) = [-M1<x-0>1 + R1<x - 0>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 - F<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI

y(x) = [-M1<x-0>2/2 + R1<x - 0>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 - F<x - L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
4. Evaluate C3 and C4. At x = 0, = 0 and y = 0, therefore, C3 = 0 and C4 = 0.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
7. Write the slope and deflection equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get
the effect of the singularity functions. See Figure 4-24aB where these functions are plotted.
1 R1 2 w 3
( x) M1 S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 6
F
S( x L) ( x L) 2
2
1 M1 2 R1 3 w 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I
2F 6 24

3
S ( x L) ( x L)
6
9. Maximum deflection occurs at x = L ymax y ( L) ymax 32.2 mm
10. The maximum bending stress occurs at x = 0, where the moment is a maximum. For c 20 mm
M1 c
max max 410 MPa
I
SLOPE, radians DEFLECTION, mm
0 0
0.01
10
0.02
y ( x)
( x) 20
mm
0.03
30
0.04
0.05 40
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x x
m m
FIGURE 4-24aB
PROBLEM 4-25a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-11c. Find the reactions, maximum

Distance to reaction load b 0.6 m a F
1 w
8 4 R1 R2
Moment of inertia I 2.85 10 m
2
summarized here.
Load function q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - F<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - F<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - F<x - L>1
Reactions R1 353.3 N R2 973.3 N
Maximum shear Vmax 580 N (positive, at x = b)
Maximum moment Mmax 216 N m (negative, at x = b)

(x) = [R1<x - 0>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - b>2/2 - F<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI

y(x) = [R1<x - 0>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 + R2<x-b>3/6 - F<x - L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
At x = 0 and x = b, y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0.
R1 3 w 4
0= b ( b a ) C3 b
6 24
1 R1 3 w 4 2
C3 b ( b a) C3 21.22 N m
b 6 24

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
the effect of the singularity functions. See Figure 4-25aB where these functions are plotted.
1 R1 2 w 3
( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )

E I 2 6
R
2 S ( x b ) ( x b) 2 F S( x L) ( x L) 2 C3
2 2
1 R1 3 w 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 24
R
2 S( x b) ( x b ) 3 F S ( x L) ( x L) 3 C3 x
6 6
9. Maximum deflection occurs at x = L. ymax y ( L) ymax 4.81 mm
10. The maximum bending stress occurs at x = b, where the moment is a maximum. For c 20 mm
Mmax c
max max 152 MPa
I
SLOPE, radians DEFLECTION, mm

0.005 2
0 0
y ( x)
( x) 0.005 2
mm
0.01 4
0.015 6
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x x
m m
FIGURE 4-25aB
PROBLEM 4-26a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-11d. Find the reactions, maximum

L
b
Distance to R2 b 0.6 m a F
1

8 4
Moment of inertia I 2.85 10 m R1 R2 R3
2

1. From inspection of Figure P4-11d, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - R3<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x>0 - F<x - a>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - R3<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x>1 - F<x - a>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - R3<x - L>1
(x) = [R1<x>2/2 - F<x - a>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - b>2/2 + R3<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - F<x - a>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 + R2<x - b>3/6 + R3<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
6. Evaluate R1, R2, R3, C3 and C4

At x = 0, x = b, and x = L; y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
2
Guess R1 100 N R2 100 N R3 100 N C3 5 N m
Given
R1 3 F 3 w 4 3
b ( b a) ( b a ) C3 b = 0 N m
6 6 24
R1 3 F 3 w 4 R2 3 3
L ( L a) ( L a) ( L b ) C 3 L = 0 N m
6 6 24 6
R1 F w ( L a ) R2 R3 = 0 N
w 2
R 1 L F ( L a ) ( L a ) R 2 ( L b ) = 0 N m
2
R1
R
2 Find R R R C
R3 1 2 3 3

C3
2
R1 112.33 N R2 559.17 N R3 51.50 N C3 5.607 N m
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) F S ( x a ) w S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) R3 S ( x L)
w 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) x F S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x a ) ( x a )
2
R2 S ( x b ) ( x b )
SHEAR, N MOMENT, N-m

200 60
0 35
V ( x) M ( x)
200 10
N Nm
400 15
600 40
3 3
0 200 400 600 800 1 10 0 200 400 600 800 1 10
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 4-26aB
11. From the diagram, we see that maximum shear occurs at x = b -,

Vmax V ( b 0.001 mm) Vmax 428 N
12. The maximum moment occurs at x = a,

Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 44.9 N m
13. Write the slope and deflection equations in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get t
effect of the singularity functions. See Figure 4-26aB where these functions are plotted.
1 R1 2 F 2 w 3
( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 2 6
R R
2 S ( x b ) ( x b) 2 3 S ( x L) ( x L) 2 C3
2 2
1 R1 3 F 3 w 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 6 24
R R
2 S( x b) ( x b ) 3 3 S( x L) ( x L) 3 C3 x
6 6
14. Maximum slope occurs between x = a and x = b max 0.0576 deg
15. Maximum deflection occurs between x = 0 and x = a ymax 0.200 mm
16. The maximum bending stress occurs at x = a, where the moment is a maximum. For c 20 mm
Mmax c
max max 31.5 MPa
I
SLOPE, deg. DEFLECTION, mm

0.1 0.1
0.05 0
( x) y ( x)
0 0.1
deg mm
0.05 0.2
0.1 0.3
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x x
m m
FIGURE 4-26aC
PROBLEM 4-27
Statement: A storage rack is to be designed to hold the paper roll of Problem 4-8 as shown in Figure P4-12.
Determine suitable values for dimensions a and b in the figure. Consider bending, shear, and
bearing stresses. Assume an allowable tensile/compressive stress of 100 MPa and an allowable
shear stress of 50 MPa for both stanchion and mandrel, which are steel. The mandrel is solid
and inserts halfway into the paper roll. Balance the design to use all of the material strength.
Calculate the deflection at the end of the roll.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 1.50 m Material properties S y 100 MPa

ID 0.22 m S ys 50 MPa
Lroll 3.23 m E 207 GPa
3
2. The mandrel's root in the stanchion experiences a distributed load over its length of
engagement
Solution: See Figures 4-27 and Mathcad file P0427. y W

1. In Problem 3-27, we were concerned only with the
portion of the mandrel outside of the stanchion.
Therefore, we modeled it as a cantilever beam with a x
shear and moment reaction at the stanchion.
Unfortunately, this tells us nothing about the stress or
force distributions in the portion of the mandrel that is M1 Lm
inside the stanchion. To do this we need to modify the R1
model by replacing the concentrated moment (and
FIGURE 4-27A
possibly the concentrated shear force) with a force
system that will yield information about the stress
distribution in the mandrel on that portion that is inside y
the stanchion. Figure 4-27A shows the FBD used in
Problem 3-27. Figure 4-27B is a simple model, but is not R1 W
representative of a built-in condition. It would be
appropriate if the hole in the stanchion did not fit tightly
around the mandrel. Figure 4-27C is an improvement
that will do for our analysis. x
2. Determine the weight of the roll and the length of the Lm

mandrel. R2
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g W 53.9 kN FIGURE 4-27B
Simplified Free Body Diagram, not used
Lm 0.5 Lroll Lm 1.615 m
3. From inspection of Figure 4-27C, write the y W

load function equation
w
q(x) = -w<x>0 + w<x - b>0 + R<x - b>-1 - W<x - b -Lm>-1 a
x
4. Integrate this equation from - to x to obtain shear,
V(x)
b Lm
V(x) = -w<x>1 + w<x - b>1 + R<x - b>0 - W<x - b -Lm>0
R
5. Integrate this equation from - to x to obtain

FIGURE 4-27C
moment, M(x)
Free Body Diagram used in Problem 4-27
M(x) = -(w/2)<x>2 + (w/2)<x - b>2 + R<x - b>1 - W<x - b -Lm>1
6. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = b + Lm,
At x = (b + Lm)+ , V = M = 0
0 = w b Lm w Lm R W R = W w b
2 W Lm
0 = b Lm Lm R Lm = b Lm Lm ( W w b ) Lm
w 2 w 2 w 2 w 2
w=
2 2 2 2 2
b
Note that R is inversely proportional to b and w is inversly proportional to b 2.
7. To see the value of x at which the shear and moment are maximum, let
2 W Lm
b 400 mm then w and R W w b L b Lm
2
b
8. Define the range for x x 0 mm 0.002 L L
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) w S ( x 0 mm) x w S ( x b ) ( x b ) R S ( x b ) W S ( x L)
w 2 w 2
M ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x b ) ( x b ) R S ( x b ) ( x b ) W S ( x L) ( x L)
2 2

200 50
0
200
V ( x) M ( x)
kN kN m
400
50
600
800 100
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 4-27D
Shear and Moment Diagram Shapes for Problem 4-27
12. From Figure 4-27D, the maximum internal shear and moment occur at x = b and are
2 W Lm
Vmax = Mmax W Lm Mmax 87.04 kN m
b
13. The bending stress will be a maximum at the top or bottom of the mandrel at a section through x = b.
Mmax a 4 32 Mmax
a
max = where I= so, max = = Sy
2 I 64 3
1 a
3
32 W Lm
Solving for a, a S a 206.97 mm
y
Round this to a 210 mm
14. Using this value of a and equation 4.15c, solve for the shear stress on the neutral axis at x = b.
4 Vmax 8 W Lm
max = = = S ys
3 A a 2
3 b
4
8 W Lm
Solving for b b b 134.026 mm
a 2
3 Sys
4
Round this to b 134 mm
15. These are minimum values for a and b. Using them, check the bearing stress.
2 W Lm N
Magnitude of distributed load w w 9695
2 mm
b
w b
Bearing stress bear bear 46.2 MPa
a b
Since this is less than S y, the design is acceptable for a 210 mm and b 134 mm
16. Assume a cantilever beam loaded at the tip with load W and a mandrel diameter equal to a calculated above.
4
a 7 4
64
3
W Lm
Deflection at tip (Appendix B) ymax ymax 3.83 mm
3 E I
This can be accomodated by the 220-mm inside diameter of the paper roll.
PROBLEM 4-28
platform. The truck weighs 5 000 lb and has a 42-in wheelbase. Design two (one for each side)
1-ft-wide ramps of steel to have no more than 1-in deflection in the worst case of loading as the
truck travels up them. Minimize the weight of the ramps by using a sensible cross-sectional
geometry.
Given: Ramp angle 15 deg Ramp width w 12 in

Platform height h 4 ft Allowable deflection max 1.0 in
6
Truck weight W 5000 lbf Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
L
b
a CG a
y
CG b
R1

Fa Fb x
Wa
Wb
R2
FIGURE 4-28A
1. Determine the length of the beam between supports and the distances a and b for the worst-case loading.
h
Length of beam L L 15.455 ft
sin( )
From Problem 3-28, a 5.061 ft b 8.561 ft
2. The load distribution of the wheels on a single ramp is given in Problem 3-28 as
Fa 575.0 lbf Fb 1839.9 lbf

q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - Fa<x - a>-1 - Fb<x - b>-1 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - Fa<x - a>0 - Fb<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - Fa<x - a>1 - Fb<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>1
6. The reactions are given in Problem 3-28 as R1 1207.4 lbf R2 1207.4 lbf

(x) = [R1<x>2/2 - Fa<x - a>2/2 - Fb<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI

y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - Fa<x - a>3/6 - Fb<x - b>3/6 + R2<x-L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
At x = 0 and x = L, y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0.
3 3 3
0 = R1 L Fa ( L a ) Fb ( L b ) 6 C3 L
R1 L Fa ( L a ) Fb ( L b )
1 3 3 3 6 2
C3 C3 4.983 10 lbf in
6 L
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
the effect of the singularity functions. Use an assumed value of I so that the value of x that corresponds to ymax
4
can be found. Let I 10 in
1 R1 2 Fa 2 Fb 2
( x) S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b )
E I 2 2 2
R
2 S ( x L) ( x L) 2 C3
2
1 R1 3 Fa 3 Fb 3
y ( x) S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b )
E I 6 6 6
R
2 S( x L) ( x L) 3 C3 x
6
11. Plot the shear and moment diagrams using the assumed value of I.
SLOPE, radians DEFLECTION, in

0.02 0
0.01
0.5
y ( x)
( x) 0
in
1
0.01
0.02 1.5
0 4 8 12 16 0 4 8 12 16
x x
ft ft
FIGURE 4-28B
Slope and Deflection Diagrams for Problem 4-28, Using an Assumed Value for I
12. Maximum deflection occurs at x = c, where = 0 and c < b.
1 R1 2 Fa 2
0 =
c ( c a ) C3 = 0
E I 2 2
Solving for c,
2
R1 Fa a Fa
A B a Fa C C3
2 2 2
4 6 2
A 316.200 lbf B 3.492 10 lbf in C 6.043 10 in lbf
2
B B 4 A C
c c 7.804 ft
2 A
R 1 c 3 Fa
( c a ) C3 c = max
1 3
13. The maximum deflection occurs at x = c and is ymax =
E I 6 6
Solving for I
R 1 c 3
1 Fa
( c a ) C3 c
3 4
I I 10.159 in
E max 6 6
This is the minimum allowable value of the moment of inertia.
14. Assume a channel section such as that shown in Figure 4-28C. To keep it simple, let the thickness of
the flanges and web be the same. Choose 3/8-in thick plate, which is readily available. Then,
t 0.375 in
15. The cross-sectional area of the ramp is A ( h ) w t 2 t ( h t)
w t 2 2
16. The distance to the CG is cg( h )
1
2
t h t
A (h) 2
17. The moments of inertia of the web and a flange are

Flange
3 2
w t
w t cg( h )
t
Iweb( h ) Web
12 2
3 2 t
t ( h t) h t
Ifl ( h ) h t cg( h )
12 2
18. Using the known moment of inertia, solve

for the unknown flange height, h. Guess h 1 in h
Given
I = Iweb( h ) 2 Ifl ( h )
h Find ( h ) h 3.988 in w
Round this up to h 4.00 in
FIGURE 4-28C
Channel Section for Problem 4-28
19. Summarizing, the ramp design dimensions are:
Length L 185.5 in Flange height h 4.00 in Shape channel

Width w 12.00 in Thickness t 0.375 in Material steel
PROBLEM 4-29a
Statement: Find the spring rate of the beam in Problem 4-23 at the applied concentrated load for row a in
Table P4-2.

b
a
Distance to concentrated load b 0.6 m F
w
1
Concentrated load Fb 500 N R1 R2
8 4
FIGURE 4-29

1. The deflection equation was found in Problem 4-23. Those results are summarized here.
Load function q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - 0>0 + w<x - a>0 - F<x - b>-1 + R2<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - 0>1 + w<x - a>1 - F<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - 0>2/2 + w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>1
Slope function (x) = [R1<x>2/2 - w<x>3/6 + w<x - a>3/6 - F<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
Deflection function y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - w<x>4/24 + w<x - a>4/24 - F<x - b>3/6 + R2<x-L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
2. To determine the stiffness under the load F we will need to find the incremental beam deflection due to F
alone. The procedure will be to find the deflection at x = b when F = 0, and then find it when Fb 500 N . The
stiffness will then be the force divided by the incremental deflection.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
4. Write the reactions (from Problem 3-23), integration constant, and deflection (from problem 4-23) equations in
Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of the singularity functions.
w F w 2
R1( F ) L ( L b) ( L a)
2 L 2 L
R2( F ) w a F R1( F )
1 R1( F ) 3 w 4 w 4 F 3
C3( F ) L L ( L a) ( L b)
L 6 24 24 6
1 R1( F ) 3 w 4 w 4
y ( x F ) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 24 24
R (F )
2 S( x L) ( x L) 3 F S ( x b ) ( x b) 3 C3( F ) x
6 6
5. The deflection at x = b for F 0 N is y0 y ( b F ) y0 0.137 mm
6. The deflection at x = b for F Fb is yF y ( b F ) yF 1.765 mm
7. The deflection due to F alone is y yF y0 y 1.627 mm

F N
8. The stiffness of the beam under the load F at x = b is k k 307
y mm
PROBLEM 4-30a
Table P4-2.

Distance to distributed load a 0.4 m a
1
Distributed load magnitude w 200 N m F
w
Concentrated load FL 500 N
8 4
M1
R1
FIGURE 4-30
1. The deflection equation was found in Problem 4-24. Free Body Diagram for Problem 4-24
Those results are summarized here.
Load function q(x) = -M1<x - 0>-2 + R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 - F<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = -M1<x - 0>-1 + R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 - F<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = -M1<x - 0>0 + R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 - F<x - L>1
Slope function (x) = [-M1<x-0>1 + R1<x - 0>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 - F<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
Deflection function y(x) = [-M1<x-0>2/2 + R1<x - 0>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 - F<x - L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
2. To determine the stiffness under the load F we will need to find the incremental beam deflection due to
F alone. The procedure will be to find the deflection at x = L when F = 0, and then find it when FL 500 N
. The stiffness will then be the force divided by the incremental deflection.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
4. Write the reaction (from Problem 3-24) and deflection (from problem 4-24) equations in Mathcad form, using
the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of the singularity functions.
R1( F ) w ( L a ) F
w 2
M1( F ) ( L a ) R 1( F ) L
2
1 M1( F ) 2 R1( F ) 3 w 4
y ( x F ) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 2 6 24
F

S( x L) ( x L) 3
6
5. The deflection at x = L for F 0 N is y0 y ( L F ) y0 3.912 mm
6. The deflection at x = L for F FL is yF y ( L F ) yF 32.163 mm
F N
8. The stiffness of the beam under the load F at x = L is k k 17.7
y mm
PROBLEM 4-31a
Table P4-2.

b
a F
w
1
Concentrated load FL 500 N R1 R2
8 4
FIGURE 4-31
Load function q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - F<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - F<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - F<x - L>1
Slope function (x) = [R1<x - 0>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - b>2/2 - F<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
Deflection function y(x) = [R1<x - 0>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 + R2<x-b>3/6 - F<x - L>3/6 + C3x +C4]/EI
F alone. The procedure will be to find the deflection at x = L when F = 0, and then find it when
FL 500 N . The stiffness will then be the force divided by the incremental deflection.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
4. Write the reactions (from Problem 3-25), integration constant, and deflection (from problem 4-25) equations in
Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of the singularity functions.
( L a ) F ( L b ) w ( L a ) ( L b )
1 w 2
R1( F )
b 2
R2( F ) w ( L a ) F R1( F )
1 R1( F ) 3 w 4
C3( F ) b ( b a)
b 6 24
1 R1( F ) 3 w 4
y ( x F ) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 24
R (F )
2 S( x b) ( x b ) 3 F S ( x L) ( x L) 3 C3( F ) x
6 6
5. The deflection at x = L for F 0 N is y0 y ( L F ) y0 0.288 mm
6. The deflection at x = L for F FL is yF y ( L F ) yF 4.808 mm
F N
8. The stiffness of the beam under the load F at x = L is k k 111
y mm
PROBLEM 4-32a
Table P4-2.

b
a F
w
1
Concentrated load Fa 500 N R1 R2 R3
8 4
FIGURE 4-32
Load function q(x) = R1<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 - w<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>-1 - R3<x - L>-1
Shear function V(x) = R1<x>0 - F<x - a>0 - w<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>0 - R3<x - L>0
Moment function M(x) = R1<x>1 - F<x - a>1 - w<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>1 - R3<x - L>1
Slope function (x) = [R1<x>2/2 - F<x - a>2/2 - w<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - b>2/2 + R3<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
Deflection function y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - F<x - a>3/6 - w<x - a>4/24 + R2<x - b>3/6 + R3<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
F alone. The procedure will be to find the deflection at x = a when F = 0, and then find it when Fa 500 N
. The stiffness will then be the force divided by the incremental deflection.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
4. Write the reactions, integration constant, and deflection (from problem 4-26) equations in Mathcad form,
using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of the singularity functions.
F 3 w 4 F 3 w 4
Let f1 ( F ) ( b a) ( b a) f2 ( F ) ( L a) ( L a)
6 24 6 24
w 2
f3 ( F ) F ( L a ) ( L a)
2
then
L ( L b)
2
R1 Fa 112.333 N
3
R1( F ) f1 ( F ) f2 ( F ) f3 ( F )
L b ( L b ) b 6
f3 ( F ) L R1( F ) R2 Fa 559.167 N
1
R2( F )
( L b)
R3( F ) F w ( L a ) R1( F ) R2( F ) R3 Fa 51.500 N

2
1 b
C3( F ) f1 ( F ) R 1( F )
b 6
1 R1( F ) 3 F 3 w 4
y ( x F ) S ( x 0 in) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x a ) ( x a )
E I 6 6 24
R (F ) R (F )
2 S( x b) ( x b ) 3 3 S ( x L) ( x L) 3 C3( F ) x
6 6
5. The deflection at x = a for F 0 N is y0 y ( a F ) y0 0.00126 mm
6. The deflection at x = a for F Fa is yF y ( a F ) yF 0.177 mm
F N
8. The stiffness of the beam under the load F at x = a is k k 2844
y mm
PROBLEM 4-33a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P4-14 and the data in row a of Table P4-3, determine the
bending stress at point A and the shear stress due to transverse loading at point B. Also the
torsional shear stress at both points. Then determine the principal stresses at points A and B.
Given: Tube length L 100 mm F

y
Arm length a 400 mm
A
Arm thickness t 10 mm
B
Arm depth h 20 mm T T x
Applied force F 50 N M
Tube OD OD 20 mm L
R
Tube ID ID 14 mm
Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa FIGURE 4-33
Free Body Diagram of Tube for Problem 4-33

1. Determine the bending stress at point A. From the FBD of the tube in Figure 4-33 we see that
Reaction force R F R 50.0 N
Reaction moment M F L M 5.00 N m
Distance from NA
to outside of tube ct 0.5 OD ct 10.0 mm
Moment of inertia It

64
OD ID
4 4 It 5968 mm
4
Bending stress M ct
at point A xA xA 8.38 MPa
It
2. Determine the shear stress due to transverse loading at B.
Cross-section area A

4

OD ID
2 2 A 160.2 mm
2
Maximum shear V R
Maximum shear stress V
(Equation 4.15d) Vmax 2 Vmax 0.624 MPa
A
3. Determine the torsional shear stress at both points. Using equation 4.23b and the FBD above
Torque on tube T F a T 20.0 N m
Polar moment of
inertia J

32
OD ID
4 4 J 11936 mm
4
Maximum torsional T ct
stress at surface Tmax Tmax 16.76 MPa
J
4. Determine the principal stress at point A.

Stress components xA 8.378 MPa zA 0 MPa
xz Tmax xz 16.76 MPa
Principal stresses
2
xA zA xA zA 2
1 xz 1 21.46 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2
xA zA xA zA 2
3 xz 3 13.08 MPa
2 2
1 3
13 13 17.27 MPa
2
5. Determine the principal stress at point B.

Stress components xB 0 MPa yB 0 MPa
xy Tmax Vmax xy 16.13 MPa
Principal stresses
2
xB yB xB yB 2
1 xy 1 16.13 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2
xB yB xB yB 2
3 xy 3 16.13 MPa
2 2
1 3
13 13 16.13 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-34a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P4-14 and the data in row a of Table P4-3, determine the
deflection at load F.
Given: Tube length L 100 mm Applied force F 50 N
Arm length a 400 mm Tube OD OD 20 mm
Arm thickness t 10 mm Tube ID ID 14 mm
Arm depth h 20 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
Modulus of rigidity G 80.8 GPa
1. The deflection at load F can be determined by superimposing the rigid-body deflection of the arm due to the
twisting of the tube with the beam deflection of the tube and the arm alone.
2. Determine the rigid-body deflection due to twisting of the tube. Refering to Figure 4-34, the torque in the
tube is
Polar moment of inertia Jt

32
OD ID
4 4
Jt 11936 mm
4
TL 3
Tube angle of twist 2.07368 10 rad
J t G
0.119 deg
Deflection at F due to a 0.829 mm
3. Determine the rigid-body deflection due to bending of the tube.
Jt 4
Moment of inertia It It 5968 mm
2
Deflection of tube 3
F L
end and arm end tb tb 0.013 mm
(see Appendix B) 3 E It
F F
y y a
A
B x z
T T h
M T
L
R F
FIGURE 4-34
Free Body Diagrams of Tube and Arm for Problem 4-34
4. Determine the beam bending of arm alone.
3
t h 4
Moment of inertia Ia Ia 6667 mm
12
3
F a
Deflection at F a a 0.773 mm
3 E Ia
5. Determine the total deflection by superposition.

tot tb a tot 1.616 mm downward
PROBLEM 4-35a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P4-14 and the data in row a of Table P4-3, determine the spring
rate of the tube in bending, the spring rate of the arm in bending, and the spring rate of the tube
in torsion. Combine these into an overall spring rate in terms of the force F and the linear
deflection at F.

Arm length a 400 mm Tube OD OD 20 mm
Arm thickness t 10 mm Tube ID ID 14 mm
Arm depth h 20 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
1. Determine the spring rate due to bending of the tube.

64
OD ID
4 4 It 5968 mm
4
Deflection of tube 3
F L
end and arm end tb tb 0.013 mm
(see Appendix B) 3 E It
Spring rate due to F N

bending in tube ktb ktb 3706
tb mm
2. Determine the spring rate due to beam bending of arm alone.

3
t h 4
Moment of inertia Ia Ia 6667 mm
12
3
F a
Deflection at F a a 0.773 mm
3 E Ia

bending in arm ka ka 64.7
a mm
F F
y y a
A
B x z
T T h
M T
L
R F
FIGURE 4-35
Free Body Diagrams of Tube and Arm for Problem 4-35
3. Determine the spring rate of the tube in torsion. Refering to Figure 4-35, the torque in the tube is
Polar moment of inertia Jt

32
OD ID
4 4 Jt 11936 mm
4
TL 3
Tube angle of twist 2.07368 10 rad
J t G
0.119 deg
Deflection at F due to q a 0.829 mm

torsion in tube k k 60.28
mm
1 1 1 1
4. Determine the overall spring rate. The springs are in series, thus =
koa k ktb ka
k ktb ka N
koa koa 30.9
ktb ka k ka k ktb mm
F
Checking, tot tot 1.616 mm
koa
which is the same total deflection gotten in Problem 4-34.
PROBLEM 4-36a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P4-14 and the data in row a of Table P4-3, redo Problem 4-33
considering the stress concentration at points A and B. Assume a stress concentration factor
of 2.5 in both bending and torsion.
Given: Tube length L 100 mm

F
Arm length a 400 mm y
Arm thickness t 10 mm A
Arm depth h 20 mm B x
T T
Applied force F 50 N
M
Tube OD OD 20 mm
L
Tube ID ID 14 mm R
FIGURE 4-36
Stress-concentration Ktb 2.5 Free Body Diagram of Tube for Problem 4-36
factors
Kts 2.5
1. Determine the bending stress at point A. From the FBD of the tube in Figure 4-36 we see that
Reaction force R F R 50.0 N
Reaction moment M F L M 5.00 N m
Distance from NA
to outside of tube ct 0.5 OD ct 10.0 mm

64
4
OD ID
4 It 5968 mm
4
Bending stress M ct
at point A xA Ktb xA 20.94 MPa
It
2. Determine the shear stress due to transverse loading at B.

4
2
OD ID
2 A 160.2 mm
2
Maximum shear V R
Maximum shear stress V
(Equation 4.15d) Vmax 2 Vmax 0.624 MPa
A
3. Determine the torsional shear stress at both points. Using equation 4.23b and the FBD above
Polar moment of
inertia J

32
4
OD ID
4 J 11936 mm
4
Maximum torsional T ct
stress at surface Tmax Kts Tmax 41.89 MPa
J
4. Determine the principal stress at point A.

Stress components xA 20.944 MPa zA 0 MPa
xz Tmax xz 41.89 MPa

Principal stresses
2
xA zA xA zA 2
1 xz 1 53.6 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2
xA zA xA zA 2
3 xz 3 32.71 MPa
2 2
1 3
13 13 43.18 MPa
2
5. Determine the principal stress at point B.

Stress components xB 0 MPa yB 0 MPa
xy Tmax Vmax xy 41.26 MPa
Principal stresses
2
xB yB xB yB 2
1 xy 1 41.26 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2
xB yB xB yB 2
3 xy 3 41.26 MPa
2 2
1 3
13 13 41.26 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-37
Statement: A semicircular, curved beam as shown in Figure 4-37 has the dimensions given below. For the
load pair applied along the diameter and given below, find the eccentricity of the neutral axis
and the stress at the inner and outer fibers.
w
Given: Outside diameter od 150 mm
Inside diameter id 100 mm
Width of beam w 25 mm
Load F 14 kN F
od id
Solution: See Figure 4-37 and Mathcad file P0437. F
1. Calculate the section depth, area, inside radius and

outside radus.
od id (a) Entire Beam
Section depth h h 25 mm
2
2
Area of section A h w A 625 mm
od id
Centroid radius rc rc 62.5 mm F
4
M
Inside and outside ri rc 0.5 h ri 50 mm
F
radii of section rc
ro rc 0.5 h ro 75 mm
(b) Critical Section
2. The critical section is the one that is along the horizontal
FIGURE 4-37
centerline. There, the bending moment is
Bending moment M F rc M 0.875 kN m
3. Use the equation in the footnote of the text to calculate the radius of the neutral axis.
ro ri
Radius of neutral axis rn rn 61.658 mm
ro
ln
ri
4. Calculate the eccentricty and the distances from the neutral axis to the extreme fibers.
Eccentricity e rc rn e 0.8424 mm
Distances from neutral ci rn ri ci 11.66 mm

axis to extreme fibers
co ro rn co 13.34 mm
M ci F
Stresses at inner and i i 409.9 MPa
outer radii e A ri A
M co F
o o 273.2 MPa
e A ro A
PROBLEM 4-38
Statement: Design a solid, straight, steel torsion bar to have a spring rate of 10 000 in-lb per radian per foot
of length. Compare designs of solid round and solid square cross-sections. Which is more
efficient in terms of material use?
6
Given: Length of rod L 12 in Modulus of rigidity G 11.7 10 psi
in lbf
Spring rate k 10000
rad

1. Determine the rod diameter and volume for a round rod.
4
J G d
Spring rate k= J =
L 32
1
4
32 L k
Rod diameter d G d 0.569 in

2
d 3
Volume of rod V L V 3.046 in
4
2. Determine the rod width and volume for a square rod using equation 4.26b and Table 4-6.
K G 4
Spring rate k= K = 2.25 a
L
1
4
L k
Rod half-width a 2.25 G a 0.260 in 2 a 0.520 in

2 3
Volume of rod V ( 2 a ) L V 3.241 in
3. Even though the square rod width is less than the round rod diameter, it takes slightly more material when a
square rod is used than when a round rod is used. Thus, the round rod is more efficient.
PROBLEM 4-39
Statement: Design a 1-ft-long steel, end-loaded cantilever spring for a spring rate of 10 000 lb/in. Compare
designs of solid round and solid square cross-sections. Which is more efficient in terms of
material use?
6
Given: Length of rod L 12 in Modulus of rigidity E 30 10 psi
lbf
Spring rate k 10000
in
Solution: See Figure B-1(a) in Appendix B and Mathcad file P0439.
1. Determine the rod diameter and volume for a round rod.

4
3 E I d
Spring rate k= I=
3 64
L
1
4
64 L3 k
Rod diameter d d 1.406 in
3 E
2
d 3
Volume of rod V L V 18.64 in
4
2. Determine the rod width and volume for a square rod using equation 4.26b and Table 4-6.
4
3 E I a
Spring rate k= I=
3 12
L 1
4
4 L3 k
Rod width a a 1.232 in
E
2 3
Volume of rod V a L V 18.215 in
3. It takes slightly more material when a round rod is used than when a square rod is used. Thus, the square rod
is more efficient.
PROBLEM 4-40
Statement: Redesign the roll support of Problem 4-8 to be like that shown in Figure P4-16. The stub
mandrels insert to 10% of the roll length at each end. Choose appropriate dimensions a and
b to fully utilize the mandrel's strength, which is the same as in Problem 4-27. See Problem
4-8 for additional data.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 1.50 m Material properties S y 100 MPa

ID 0.22 m S ys 50 MPa
Lroll 3.23 m E 207 GPa
3
2. The mandrel's root in the stanchion experiences a distributed load over its length of
engagement
Solution: See Figures 4-40 and Mathcad file P0440.
1. Model the support in such a way that stresses in the
portion of the mandrel that is inside the stanchion can y F
be determined. There are several assumptions that can w
be made about the loads on this portion of the mandrel. a
Figure 4-40A shows the one that will be used for this x
design.
2. Determine the weight of the roll, the load on each b Lm

support, and the length of the mandrel.
R
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g W 53.9 kN FIGURE 4-40A
F 0.5 W F 26.95 kN
Lm 0.1 Lroll Lm 323 mm

q(x) = -w<x>0 + w<x - b>0 + R<x - b>-1 - F<x - b -Lm>-1

V(x) = -w<x>1 + w<x - b>1 + R<x - b>0 - F<x - b -Lm>0

M(x) = -(w/2)<x>2 + (w/2)<x - b>2 + R<x - b>1 - F<x - b -Lm>1
6. Solve for the reactions by evaluating the shear and moment equations at a point just to the right of x = b + Lm,
At x = (b + Lm)+ , V = M = 0
0 = w b Lm w Lm R F R = F w b
2 F Lm
0 = b Lm Lm R Lm = b Lm Lm ( F w b ) Lm
w 2 w 2 w 2 w 2
w=
2 2 2 2 2
b
Note that R is inversely proportional to b and w is inversly proportional to b 2.
7. To see the value of x at which the shear and moment are maximum, let
2 F Lm
b 200 mm then w and R F w b L b Lm
2
b
8. Define the range for x x 0 mm 0.002 L L
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) w S ( x 0 mm) x w S ( x b ) ( x b ) R S ( x b ) F S ( x L)
w 2 w 2
M ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x b ) ( x b ) R S ( x b ) ( x b ) F S ( x L) ( x L)
2 2

200 2
100 1
V ( x) M ( x)
0 4
kN kN m
100 7
200 10
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 4-40B
Shear and Moment Diagram Shapes for Problem 4-40
12. From Figure 4-40B, the maximum internal shear and moment occur at x = b and are
2 F Lm
Vmax = Mmax F Lm Mmax 8.704 kN m
b
13. The bending stress will be a maximum at the top or bottom of the mandrel at a section through x = b.
Mmax a 4 32 Mmax
a
max = where I= so, max = = Sy
2 I 64 3
1 a
3
32 W Lm
Solving for a, a S a 121.037 mm
y
14. Using this value of a and equation 4.15c, solve for the shear stress on the neutral axis at x = b.
4 Vmax 8 F Lm
max = = = S ys
3 A a 2
3 b
4
8 F Lm
a 2
3 Sys
4
Round this to b 38 mm
15. These are minimum values for a and b. Using them, check the bearing stress.
2 F Lm N
Magnitude of distributed load w w 12055
2 mm
b
w b
Bearing stress bear bear 96.4 MPa
a b
Since this is less than S y, the design is acceptable for a 125 mm and
b 38 mm
PROBLEM 4-41
Statement: A 10-mm ID steel tube carries liquid at 7 MPa. Determine the principal stresses in the wall if its
thickness is: a) 1 mm, b) 5 mm.
Given: Tubing ID ID 10 mm Inside pressure p i 7 MPa
Assumption: The tubing is long therefore the axial stress is zero.

(a) Wall thickness is t 1 mm
1. Check wall thickness to radius ratio to see if this is a thick or thin wall problem.
t
ratio ratio 0.2
0.5 ID
Since the ratio is greater than 0.1, this is a thick wall problem.
2. Using equations 4.48a and 4.48b, the stresses are maximum at the inside wall where
Inside radius ri 0.5 ID ri 5 mm
Outside radius ro ri t ro 6 mm
2
ri p i ro
2
Tangential stress t
1 t 38.82 MPa
2 2 2
ro ri ri
2
ri p i 2
1
ro
Radial stress r r 7.00 MPa
2 2 2
ro ri ri
3. Determine the principal stresses (since, for this choice of coordinates, the shear stress is zero),
1 t 1 38.82 MPa
2 0 MPa
3 r 3 7.00 MPa
The maximum shear stress is

1 3
max max 22.91 MPa
2
(b) Wall thickness is t 5 mm
t
ratio ratio 1
0.5 ID
Since the ratio is greater than 0.1, this is a thick wall problem.
2. Using equations 4.48a and 4.48b, the stresses are maximum at the inside wall where
Inside radius ri 0.5 ID ri 5 mm

Outside radius ro ri t ro 10 mm
2
ri p i ro
2
Tangential stress t
1 t 11.67 MPa
2 2 2
ro ri ri
2
ri p i ro
2
Radial stress r
1 r 7.00 MPa
2 2 2
ro ri ri
1 t 1 11.67 MPa
2 0 MPa
3 r 3 7.00 MPa

1 3
max max 9.33 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-42
Statement: A cylindrical tank with hemispherical ends is required to hold 150 psi of pressurized air at room
temperature. Find the principal stresses in the 1-mm-thick wall if the tank diameter is 0.5 m and
its length is 1 m.
Given: Tank ID ID 500 mm

Wall thickness t 1 mm
Inside pressure p i 150 psi p i 1034 kPa
t 3
ratio ratio 4 10
0.5 ID
Since the ratio is less than 0.1, this is a thin wall problem.
2. Using equations 4.49a, 4.49b and 4.49c, the stresses are

Radius r 0.5 ID r 250 mm
pi r
Tangential stress t t 258.55 MPa
t
Radial stress r 0 MPa r 0.00 MPa
pi r
Axial stress a a 129.28 MPa
2 t
1 t 1 259 MPa 1 37.5 ksi
2 a 2 129 MPa 2 18.75 ksi
3 0 MPa 3 0.00 MPa 3 0.00 MPa
1 3
max max 129 MPa
2
PROBLEM 4-43
Statement: Figure P4-17 shows an off-loading station at the end of a paper rolling machine. The finished
paper rolls are 0.9-m OD by 0.22-m ID by 3.23-m long and have a density of 984 kg/m3. The
rolls are transfered from the machine conveyor (not shown) to the forklift truck by the
V-linkage of the off-load station, which is rotated through 90 deg by an air cylinder. The paper
then rolls onto the waiting forks of the truck. The forks are 38-mm thick by 100-mm wide by
1.2-m long and are tipped at a 3-deg angle from the horizontal. Find the stresses in the two
forks on the truck when the paper rolls onto it under two different conditions (state all
assumptions):
(a) The two forks are unsupported at their free end.
(b) The two forks are contacting the table at point A.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 0.90 m Fork dimensions t 38 mm
ID 0.22 m w 100 mm
Lroll 3.23 m Lfork 1200 mm
3
Roll density 984 kg m fork 3 deg
Assumptions: 1. The greatest bending moment will occur when the paper roll is at the tip of the fork for case (a)
and when it is midway between supports for case (b).
2. Each fork carries 1/2 the weight of a paper roll.
3. For case (a), each fork acts as a cantilever beam (see Appendix B-1(a)).
4. For case (b), each fork acts as a beam that is built-in at one end and simply-supported at the
other.
F
L fork
1. Determine the weight of the roll and the load on each
t
fork.
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g W 18.64 kN
M1
R1
F 0.5 W F 9.32 kN
Case (a), Cantilever Beam
2. The moment of inertia and the distance to the extreme
fiber for a fork are
F
3 0.5 L fork
w t 5 4
I I 4.573 10 mm t
12
t
c c 19 mm
2 L fork
M2
R1 R2
Case (a)
Case (b), Fixed-Simply Supported Beam
3. From Figure D-1(a), the moment is a maximum at the
support and is FIGURE 4-43A
Free Body Diagrams used in Problem 4-43
Mmax F Lfork Mmax 11.186 kN m
Mmax c
4. The bending stress is maximum at the support and is a a 464.8 MPa
I
Case (b)
5. This beam is statically indeterminate. However, using singularity functions and the method shown in Example
4-7, we can determine the reactions and find the maximum moment.
6. Calculate the distance from the left support to the load and the distance between supports.
a 0.5 Lfork a 600 mm

L Lfork L 1200 mm

q(x) = R1<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 + R2<x - L>-1 + M2<x - L>-2
V(x) = R1<x>0 - F<x - a>0 + R2<x - L>0 + M2<x - L>-1
M(x) = R1<x>1 - F<x - a>1 + R2<x - L>1 + M2<x - L>0
(x) = [R1<x>2/2 - F<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - L>2/2 + M2<x - L>1 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - F<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - L>3/6 + M2<x - L>2/2 + C3x + C4]/EI
12. Evaluate R1, R2, M2, C3 and C4

At x = 0 and x = L; y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0. At x = L, = 0
At x = L+, V = M = 0
2
Guess R1 1 kN R2 1 kN M2 1 kN m C3 1 kN m
Given
3 3
R 1 L F ( L a) 3
C3 L = 0 kN m
6 6
2 2
R 1 L F ( L a) 2
C3 = 0 kN m
2 2
R1 R2 F = 0 kN
R1 L F ( L a ) M2 = 0 kN m
R1
R
2 Find R R M C
M2 1 2 2 3

C3
2
R1 2.913 kN R2 6.409 kN M2 2.097 kN m C3 0.419 kN m

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) F S ( x a ) R2 S ( x L)
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) x F S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x L) ( x L)

10 2
1
5
0
V ( x) M ( x)
0
kN kN m
1
5
2
10 3
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 4-43B
17. The maximum moment occurs at x = L, Mmax M ( L) Mmax 2.097 kN m
Mmax c
18. The bending stress is maximum at the support and is a a 87.2 MPa
I
PROBLEM 4-44
Statement: Determine a suitable thickness for the V-links of the off-loading station of Figure P4-17 to limit
their deflections at the tips to 10-mm in any position during their rotation. Two V-links support
the roll, at the 1/4 and 3/4 points along the roll's length, and each of the V arms is 10-cm wide by
1-m long. The V arms are welded to a steel tube that is rotated by the air cylinder. See Problem
4-43 for more information.
Given: Roll OD OD 0.90 m Arm width wa 100 mm
Roll ID ID 0.22 m Arm length La 1000 mm
Roll length Lroll 3.23 m Max tip deflection tip 10 mm
3
Roll density 984 kg m Mod of elasticity E 207 GPa
Assumptions: 1. The maximum deflection on an arm will occur just after it begins the transfer and just before it
completes it, i.e., when the angle is either zero or 90 deg., but after the tip is no longer
supported by the base unit.
2. At that time the roll is in contact with both arms ("seated" in the V) and will remain in that
state throughout the motion. When the roll is in any other position on an arm the tip will be
supported.
3. The arm can be treated as a cantilever beam with nonend load.
4. A single arm will never carry more than half the weight of a roll.
5. The pipe to which the arms are attached has OD = 160 mm.
1. Determine the weight of the roll and the load on each 450
V-arm.
W

4
2 2
F 0.5 W F 9.32 kN
2. From Appendix B, Figure B-1, the tip deflection of a

cantilever beam with a concentrated load located at a
distance a from the support is
2
F a
ymax = ( a 3 L) 1000 = L
6 E I
370 = a
F
where L is the beam length and I is the
cross-section moment of inertia. In this case
3 M
w a t a
I= F
12
FIGURE 4-44
3. Setting ymax = tip and a 370 mm Free Body Diagram used in Problem 4-44
substituting for I and solving for ta

1
3
2 F a2 3 La a
ta ta 31.889 mm
E tip wa

Let the arm thickness be ta 32 mm
PROBLEM 4-45
Statement: Determine the critical load on the air cylinder rod in Figure P4-17 if the crank arm that rotates it is
0.3 m long and the rod has a maximum extension of 0.5 m. The 25-mm-dia rod is solid steel with a
yield strength of 400 MPa. State all assumptions.
Given: Rod length L 500 mm Young's modulus E 207 GPa

Rod diameter d 25 mm Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Assumptions: 1. The rod is a fixed-pinned column.
2. Use a conservative value of 1 for the end factor (see Table 4-7 in text).
1. Calculate the slenderness ratio that divides the unit load vs slenderness ratio graph into Johnson and Euler
regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 101.07
Sy
2. Calculate the cross-section area and the moment of inertia.

2 2
Area A d A 490.87 mm
4
4 4 4
Moment of inertia I d I 1.92 10 mm
64
3. Using Table 4-7, calculate the effective column length.

Leff 1 L Leff 500 mm
4. Calculate the slenderness ratio for the column.
I
Radius of gyration k k 6.25 mm
A
Leff
Slenderness ratio S r S r 80.00
k
Since the Sr for this column is less than SrD, it is a Johnson column.
5. Calculate the critical load using the Johnson equation.
2
1 S y S r
Pcr A S y Pcr 134.8 kN
E 2
PROBLEM 4-46
Statement: The V-links of Figure P4-17 are rotated by the crank arm through a shaft that is 60 mm dia by
3.23 m long. Determine the maximum torque applied to this shaft during motion of the
V-linkage and find the maximum stress and deflection for the shaft. See Problem 4-43 for more
information.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 900 mm Shaft dims d 60 mm

ID 220 mm Lshaft 3230 mm
Lroll 3230 mm
3
Roll density 984 kg m Modulus of rigidity G 79 GPa
Assumptions: The greatest torque will occur when the link is horizontal and the paper roll is located as shown
in Figure P4-17 or Figure 4-46.
y
1. Determine the weight of the roll on the V-arms.
W

4
2 2

OD ID Lroll g
W 18.64 kN
2. Summing moments about the shaft center,

OD
T W T 8.390 kN m
2
3. Calculate the polar moment of inertia. W
4
d 6 4 T
J J 1.272 10 mm
32
4. The maximum torsional stress will be at the outside Ry
diameter of the shaft. The radius of the OD is, 60-mm-dia shaft
450.0
d
r r 30 mm FIGURE 4-46
2 Free Body Diagram used in Problem 4-46
5. Determine the maximum torsional stress using equation (4.23b).

Tr
max max 197.8 MPa
J
6. Use equation (4.24) to determine the angular shaft deflection.

T Lshaft
15.447 deg
J G
PROBLEM 4-47
Statement: Determine the maximum forces on the pins at each end of the air cylinder of Figure P4-17.
Determine the stress in these pins if they are 30-mm dia and in single shear.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 0.90 m Pin diameter d 30 mm
ID 0.22 m
Lroll 3.23 m
3
Assumptions: 1. The maximum force in the cylinder rod occurs when the transfer starts.
2. The cylinder and rod make an angle of 8 deg to the horizontal at the start of transfer.
3. The crank arm is 300 mm long and is 45 deg from vertical at the start of transfer.
4. The cylinder rod is fully retracted at the start of the transfer. At the end of the transfer it will
have extended 500 mm from its initial position.
1. Determine the weight of the roll on the y

forks.
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g
W 18.64 kN
2. From the assumptions and
Figure 4-47, the x and y
distances from the origin to
point A are,
Rax 300 cos( 45 deg) mm

W
Ray 300 sin( 45 deg) mm
Rx x
Rax 212.132 mm
Ry 212.1
A
Ray 212.132 mm
F 8
212.1
450.0
3. From Figure 4-47, the x
distance from the origin to
point where W is applied is, FIGURE 4-47
Free Body Diagram at Start of Transfer for V-link of Problem 4-47
OD
Rwx Rwx 450 mm
2
4. Sum moments about the pivot point and solve for the compressive force in the cylinder rod.
W Rwx F Rax sin( 8 deg) F Ray cos( 8 deg) = 0
W Rwx
F F 46.469 kN
Ray cos( 8 deg) Rax sin( 8 deg)
This is the shear force in the pins
5. Determine the cross-sectional area of the pins and the direct shear stress.
2
d 2
Shear area A A 706.858 mm
4
F
Shear stress 65.7 MPa
A
PROBLEM 4-48
Statement: A 100-kg wheelchair marathon racer wants an exerciser that will allow indoor practicing in any
weather. The design shown in Figure P4-18 is proposed. Two free-turning rollers on bearings
support the rear wheels. A platform supports the front wheels. Design the 1-m-long rollers as
hollow tubes of aluminum to minimize the height of the platform and also limit the roller
deflections to 1 mm in the worst case. The wheelchair has 650-mm-dia drive wheels separated
by a 700-mm track width. The flanges shown on the rollers limit the lateral movement of the
chair while exercising and thus the wheels can be anywhere between those flanges. Specify
suitable sized steel axles to support the tubes on bearings. Calculate all significant stresses.
Given: Mass of chair M 100 kg Maximum deflection 1 mm

Wheel diameter d w 650 mm Modulus elasticity
Track width T 700 mm Aluminum Ea 71.7 GPa
Roller length Lr 1000 mm Steel Es 207 GPa
Assumptions: 1. The CG of the chair with rider is

sufficiently close to the rear wheel that all of
the weight is taken by the two rear wheels.
2. The small camber angle of the rear wheels
does not significantly affect the magnitude W/2
of the forces on the rollers.
3. Both the aluminum roller and the steel axle
are simply supported. The steel axles that
support the aluminum tube are fixed in the
mounting block and do not rotate. The
aluminum tube is attached to them by two
bearings (one on each end of the tubes, one
for each axle). The bearings' inner race is
fixed, and the outer race rotates with the
aluminum tube. Each steel axle is considered
to be loaded as a simply supported beam. F F
Their diameter must be less than the inner
diameter of the tubes to fit the roller bearings
between them.
FIGURE 4-48A
Free Body Diagram of One Wheel
used in Problem 4-48
1. Calculate the weight of the chair with rider.
Weight of chair W M g W 980.7 N
2. Calculate the forces exerted by the wheels on the rollers (see Figure 4-48A). From the FBD of a wheel,
summing vertical forces
W
2 F cos( ) =0
2
W
Let 20 deg then F F 260.9 N
4 cos( )
3. The worst condition (highest moment at site of a stress concentration) will occur when the chair is all the
way to the left or right. Looking at the plane through the roller that includes the forces exerted by the wheels
(the FBD is shown in Figure 4-48B) the reactions R1 and R2 come from the bearings, which are inside the
hollow roller and are, themselves, supported by the steel axle.
4. Solving for the reactions. Let the distance from R1 to F be a 15 mm
M1 R2 Lr F ( a T ) F a = 0 F 700 F
Fy R1 2 F R2 = 0
F (2 a T )
R2 R2 190.5 N
Lr 15 R2
R1 1000
R1 2 F R2 R1 331.3 N
FIGURE 4-48B
Free Body Diagram of One Tube used in Problem 4-48
5. The maximum bending moment will be at the right-hand load and will be
Mrmax R2 Lr ( a T ) Mrmax 54.3 N m
Note, if the chair were centered on the roller the maximum moment would be
Lr T
Mc F Mc 39.1 N m
2
and this would be constant along the axle between the two loads, F.
6. Note that the bearing positions are fixed regardless of the position of the chair on the roller.
Because of symmetry,
65 1000
Ra1 R1 Ra1 331.3 N
R1 R2
Ra2 R2 Ra2 190.5 N
7. The maximum bending moment

R a1 R a2
occurs
at R1 and is for b 65 mm 1130
Mamax Ra1 b
FIGURE 4-48C
Free Body Diagram of One Axle used in Problem 4-48
Mamax 21.5 N m
8. Determine a suitable axle diameter. Let the factor of safety against yielding in the axle be
Nsa 3
9. Tentatively choose a low-carbon steel for the axle, say AISI 1020, cold rolled with
S y 393 MPa
10. At the top of the axle under the load R1 there is only a bending stress. Set this stress equal to the yield
strength divided by the factor of safety.
32 Mamax Sy
x = =
3 Nsa
d a
1
3
32 Nsa Mamax
Solving for the axle diameter, d a d a d a 11.875 mm
S y
Let the axle diameter be d a 15 mm made from cold-rolled AISI 1020 steel.
11. Suppose that bearing 6302 from Chapter
10, Figure 10-23. It has a bore of 15 mm and an
150 700
OD of 42 mm. Thus, the inside diameter of the F F
roller away from the bearings where the
moment is a maximum will be d i 40 mm.
This will provide a 1-mm shoulder for axial
location of the bearings. F
15
F
12. The maximum deflection of the roller will 1000
occur when the chair is in the center of the
roller. For this case the reactions are both equal
to the loads, F (see Figure 4-48D). The FIGURE 4-48D
maximum deflection is at the center of the roller. Free Body Diagram of Roller with Chair in the Center.
13. Write the load function and then integrate four times to get the deflection function.
q(x) = F<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 - F<x - b>-1 + F<x - L>-1
y(x) = F[<x>3 - <x - a>3 - <x - b>3 + <x - L>3 + C3x]/(6EI)
( L a ) a L
1 3 3 3
where C3 =
L
14. Write the deflection function at x = L/2 for

a 150 mm
L 3 L a 1 ( L a) 3 a3 L3
3
F
ymax = 2
6 Ea I 2 2
15. Set this equation equal to the allowed deflection and solve for the required moment of inertia, I.
Lr 3 3
F Lr 1 3
a Lr a a Lr
3 3 4 4
I I 6.618 10 mm
6 Ea 2 2 2
16. Knowing the inside diameter of the tube, solve for the outside diameter.
1
4
d o d i
4 64 I
d o d i
4 4
I= d o 44.463 mm
64
Round this up to d o 46 mm
DESIGN SUMMARY
Axles Rollers
Material AISI 1020 steel, cold-rolled Material 2024-T4 aluminum
Diameter d a 15 mm Outside diameter d o 46 mm
Length 1220 mm Inside diameter d i 40 mm
Length 1040 mm
Spacing c d w d o sin( )
c 238 mm
PROBLEM 4-49a
Statement: A hollow, square column has the dimensions and properties below. Determine if it is a Johnson
or an Euler column and find the critical load:
(a) If its boundary conditions are pinned-pinned.
(b) If its boundary conditions are fixed-pinned.
(c) If its boundary conditions are fixed-fixed.
(d) If its boundary conditions are fixed-free.
Given: Length of column L 100 mm Material Steel
Outside dimension so 4 mm Yield strength S y 300 MPa
Inside dimension si 3 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 116.7
Sy
2. Calculate the cross-section area and the moment of inertia.

2 2 2
Area A so si A 7.00 mm
Moment of inertia I
1
12
4
so si
4 I 14.58 mm
4
(a) pinned-pinned ends

I
A
Leff
k
Since the S r for this column is less than S rD, it is a Johnson column.
Sy S r
2
Pcr A S y
1
Pcr 1.73 kN
E 2
(b) fixed-pinned ends
Leff 0.8 L Leff 80 mm
I
A
Leff
k
2
1 S y S r
Pcr A S y Pcr 1.86 kN
E 2
(c) fixed-fixed ends
I
A
Leff
k
S y S r
2

Pcr A S y
1
Pcr 1.94 kN
E 2
(d) fixed-free ends
I
A
Leff
k
Since the S r for this column is greater than S rD, it is an Euler column.
14. Calculate the critical load using the Euler equation.
2
E
Pcr A Pcr 676 N
2
Sr
PROBLEM 4-50a
Statement: A hollow, round column has the dimensions and properties below. Determine if it is a Johnson
or an Euler column and find the critical load:

Outside diameter od 20 mm Yield strength S y 300 MPa
Inside diameter id 14 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 116.7
Sy
2. Calculate the cross-section area, moment of inertia, and the radius of gyration.
Area A

4
2
od id
2 A 160.22 mm
2
Moment of inertia I

64
4
od id
4 I 5968 mm
4
I
A
3. Define functions to determine column type and critical load.
Type type S r "Euler" if S r S rD

"Johnson" otherwise
2
E
Critical load Pcr S r return A if type S r = "Euler"
2
Sr
2
1 S y S r
A Sy otherwise
E 2

Leff
k
6. Determine the type and critical load using the functions defined above.
type S r "Euler" Pcr S r 5.42 kN

Leff
k
Leff
k
(d) fixed-free ends

Leff
k
PROBLEM 4-51a
Statement: A solid, rectangular column has the dimensions and properties below. Determine if it is a
Johnson or an Euler column and find the critical load:
Given: Length of col. L 100 mm Material Steel
Thickness t 10 mm Yield strength S y 300 MPa
Height h 20 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 116.7
Sy
2
Area A h t A 200.00 mm
3
h t 4
12
I
A

"Johnson" otherwise
2
E
2
Sr
S y Sr
2
A S y
1
otherwise
E 2

Leff
k
type S r "Johnson" Pcr S r 57.36 kN

Leff
k

Leff
k
(d) fixed-free ends

Leff
k
PROBLEM 4-52a
Statement: A solid, circular column, loaded eccentrically, has the dimensions and properties below. Find
the critical load:
Outside diameter od 20 mm Yield strength S y 300 MPa
Eccentricity (t) e 10 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
1. Calculate the cross-section area, distance to extreme fiber, and the moment of inertia.
2 2
Area A od A 314.16 mm
4
Distance to extreme fiber c 0.5 od c 10 mm
4 4
Moment of inertia I od I 7854 mm
64
4. Calculate the radius of gyration and eccentricity ratio for the column.
I
A
e c
Eccentricity ratio Er Er 4.0
2
k
Leff
k
5. Calculate the critical load using the Secant equation.
Guess P 1 kN
Given
S y A
P=

1 Er sec S r
P

4 E A
Pcr Find ( P) Pcr 18.63 kN


Leff
k

Guess P 1 kN
Given
S y A
P=

1 Er sec S r
P

4 E A


Leff
k
Guess P 1 kN
Given
S y A
P=

1 Er sec S r
P

4 E A
(d) fixed-free ends

Leff
Slenderness ratio S r S r 42
k
Guess P 1 kN
Given
S y A
P=

1 Er sec S r
P

4 E A
PROBLEM 4-53
Statement: Design an aluminum, hollow, circular column for the conditions given below for (a)
pinned-pinned ends and (b) fixed-free ends.
Given: Length of column L 3 m Factor of safety FS 3
Wall thickness t 5 mm Yield strength S yc 150 MPa
Load supported F 900 N Modulus of elasticity E 71.7 GPa
1. Start by calculating the slenderness ratio that divides the unit load vs slenderness ratio graph into Johnson
and Euler regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 97.136
S yc

3. To start the iterative process, assume that the final design will be an Euler column with the critical load equal
to FS*F. From equation 4.38b,
2 2
E A k 2 I
Pcr = and k =
2 A
L
2
E I
Substituting for k2 Pcr = = FS F
2
L
2
Leff FS F
Solving for I I
2
E
4
The required moment of inertia, assuming an Euler column is I 34339 mm
4. Using the relationships given on the inside cover, solve for the outside diameter of the tube.
Guess D 20 mm
4
D ( D 2 t)
4
Given I=
64
D Find ( D) D 30.64 mm
5. Using this diameter, calculate the slenderness ratio and compare to S rD. If it is greater than S rD the assumption o
an Euler column is correct, if not, recalculate using the Johnson equation.
Inside diameter d D 2 t d 20.64 mm
Area Ar

4
2
D d
2 Ar 402.7 mm
2
I
Radius of gyration kr kr 9.234 mm
Ar
Leff
kr
Since this is greater than S rD, the assumption of an Euler column is correct and the minimum outside diameter is
D 30.64 mm
(b) fixed-free ends
to FS*F. From equation 4.38b,
2 2
E A k 2 I
Pcr = and k =
2 A
L
2
E I
Substituting for k2 Pcr = = FS F
2
L
2
Leff FS F
Solving for I I
2
E
5 4
The required moment of inertia, assuming an Euler column is I 2 10 mm
8. Using the relationships given on the inside cover, solve for the outside diameter of the tube.
Guess D 20 mm
4
D ( D 2 t)
4
Given I=
64
D Find ( D) D 47.37 mm
9. Using this diameter, calculate the slenderness ratio and compare to S rD. If it is greater than S rD the
assumption of an Euler column is correct, if not, recalculate using the Johnson equation.
Inside diameter d D 2 t d 37.37 mm
Area Ar

4
2
D d
2 Ar 665.6 mm
2
I
Radius of gyration kr kr 15.084 mm
Ar
Leff
kr
Since this is greater than S rD, the assumption of an Euler column is correct and the minimum outside diameter
is
D 47.37 mm
PROBLEM 4-54
Statement: Three round, 1.25-in-dia bars are made of SAE 1030 hot-rolled steel but are of different lengths,
5 in, 30 in, and 60 in, respectively. They are loaded axially in compression. Compare the load
supporting capability of the three bars if the ends are assumed to be:
(a) Pinned-pinned.
(b) Fixed-pinned.
(c) Fixed-fixed.
(d) Fixed-free.
Given: Outside diameter d 1.25 in
Lengths L 5 in L 30 in L 60 in i 1 2 3
1 2 3
Material SAE 1030 Steel Yield strength S y 38 ksi
6
Modulus of elasticity E 30 10 psi
1. Calculate the slenderness ratio that divides the unit load vs. slenderness ratio graph into Johnson and Euler
regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 124.8
Sy
2 2
Area A d A 791.73 mm
4
4 4
Moment of inertia I d I 49882 mm
64
I
A

"Johnson" otherwise
2
E
2
Sr
S y S r
2

A S y otherwise
1
E 2
5
Leff 1 L Leff 30 in

60
16
S r 96
Leff
Slenderness ratio S r
k
192
"Johnson"
Pcr S r
i
Type type S r Type "Johnson"
i i i lbf
"Euler" 46250
32844
9857
4.0
Leff 0.8 L Leff 24.0 in

48.0
12.8
S r 76.8
Leff
k
153.6
"Johnson" Pcr S r i
i i i lbf
"Euler" 46388
37808
15401

3.3

39.0
10.4
S r 62.4
Leff
k
124.8
"Johnson"
Pcr S r
i
i i i lbf
"Johnson" 46471
40807
23329
(d) fixed-free ends

10.5

126.0
33.6
S r 201.6
Leff
k
403.2
"Johnson"
Pcr S r
i
Type type S r Type "Euler"
i i i lbf
"Euler" 44944
8940
2235
PROBLEM 4-55 _____

Statement: Figure P4-19 shows a 1.5-in-dia, 30-in-long steel rod subjected to tensile loads P = 10000 lb
applied at each end of the rod, acting along its longitudinal Y axis and through the centroid of
its circular cross section. Point A is 12 in below the upper end and point B is 8 in below A. For
this bar with its loading, find:
(a) All components of the stress tensor matrix (equation 4.1a) for a point midway between
A and B.
(b) The displacement of point B relative to point A.
(c) The elastic strain in the section between A and B.
(d) The total strain in the section between A and B.
Given: Tensile load P 10000 lbf
6
Diameter d 1.50 in Modulus of elasticity E 30 10 psi
Lengths L 30 in LA 12 in LAB 8 in

1. Calculate the cross-section area of the rod.
2
d 2
A A 1.767 in
4
2. (a) The loading is simple axial tension so all components of the stress tensor are zero except yy, which is
found using equation 4.7.
P
yy yy 5659 psi
A
This stress is uniform across the rod and has the same value at any cross section along the longitudinal axis
except close to the ends where the load is applied.
3. (b) The displacement of point B relative to A can be found using equation 4.8.
P LAB 3
sBA sBA 1.509 10 in
A E
4. (c) The elastic strain in the rod can be found using Hooke's law (equation 2.2)
yy 4
1.886 10
E
5. (d) Assuming that the yield strength of this steel is greater than yy, the strain calculated in step 4 is the total
strain.
PROBLEM 4-56 _____

Statement: The rod in Figure P4-19, with the loading of Problem 4-55, is subjected to a reduction of
temperature from 80F to 20F after the load is applied. The coefficient of thermal expansion for
steel is approximately 6 in/in/degF. Find:
(a) All components of the stress tensor matrix (equation 4.1a) for a point midway between
A and B.
(b) The displacement of point B relative to point A.
(c) The elastic strain in the section between A and B.
(d) The total strain in the section between A and B.
Units: Temperature scale F 1

Given: Tensile load P 10000 lbf
6
Diameter d 1.50 in Modulus of elasticity E 30 10 psi
Lengths L 30 in LA 12 in LAB 8 in
Temperatures T1 80 F T2 20 F
6 1
Coefficient of thermal expansion 6 10 F
1. Calculate the cross-section area of the rod.
2
d 2
A A 1.767 in
4
2. (a) The loading is simple axial tension so all components of the stress tensor are zero except yy, which is
found using equation 4.7.
P
yy yy 5659 psi
A
This stress is uniform across the rod and has the same value at any cross section along the longitudinal axis
except close to the ends where the load is applied. The change in temperature does not affect the stress
since the ends are free.
3. (b) The displacement of point B relative to A can be found by summing equation 4.8 for the elastic portion
and the thermal expansion equation from elementary mechanics of materials for the thermal portion.
P LAB 3
sBA T2 T1 LAB sBA 1.371 10 in
A E
4. (c) The elastic strain in the rod can be found using Hooke's law (equation 2.2)
yy 4
1.886 10
E
5. (d) Assuming that there is no plastic strain in the rod, the total strain is the sum of the elastic strain found
in step 4 plus the thermal strain.
4
tot T2 T1 tot 1.714 10
PROBLEM 4-57 _____

Statement: Figure P4-20 shows a steel bar fastened to a rigid ground plane with two 0.25-in-dia hardened
steel dowel pins. For P = 1500 lb, find:
(a) The shear stress in each pin.
(b) The direct bearing stress in each pin and hole.
(c) The minimum value of dimension h to prevent tearout failure if the steel bar has a
shear strength of 32500 psi.
Given: Pin diameter d 0.250 in Applied load P 1500 lbf
Distance between pins a 2.0 in Shear strength of bar S s 32.5 ksi
Thickness of bar t 0.25 in Distance from right pin to load b 4.0 in
1. Draw a free-body diagram and find the shear forces (reactions) on each pin.
a b
RL
RR
Write equations 3.3b for the bar and solve for the reactions.
F: RL RR P 0 M: RL a P b 0
b
RL P RL 3000 lbf RR P RL RR 4500 lbf
a
2. Calculate the cross-section area of a pin.

2
d 2
A A 0.0491 in
4
3. (a) Use equation 4.9 to determine the shear stress in each pin.
RL
Left pin L L 61.1 ksi
A
RR
Right pin R R 91.7 ksi
A
4. (b) Calculate the bearing area from equation 4.10 and use it to determine the bearing stress in each pin.
2
Bearing area Abear d t Abear 0.0625 in
RL
L L 48.0 ksi
Abear
RR
R R 72.0 ksi
Abear
h d
5. (c) The tearout area is Atear 2
t , where (h - d)/2 is the distance from the edge of the hole to
2
the outside of the bar. Substitute this area in equation 4.9 for the shear area and substitute the shear
strength for xy, solving then for the unknown distance h.
RL
Left pin h L d h L 0.619 in
S s t
RR
Right pin h R d h R 0.804 in
S s t
Minimum value of h h min h R h min 0.804 in
PROBLEM 4-58 _____

Statement: Figure P4-20 shows a steel bar fastened to a rigid ground plane with two 0.25-in-dia hardened
steel dowel pins. For P = 2200 lb, find:
(a) The shear stress in each pin.
(b) The direct bearing stress in each pin and hole.
(c) The minimum value of dimension h to prevent tearout failure if the steel bar has a shear
strength of 32500 psi.
Given: Pin diameter d 0.250 in Applied load P 2200 lbf
Distance between pins a 2.0 in Shear strength of bar S s 32.5 ksi
Thickness of bar t 0.25 in Distance from right pin to load b 4.0 in
a b
RL
RR
b
a

2
d 2
A A 0.0491 in
4
3. (a) Use equation 4.9 to determine the shear stress in each pin.
RL
A
RR
A
4. (b) Calculate the bearing area from equation 4.10 and use it to determine the bearing stress in each pin.
2
RL
L L 70.4 ksi
Abear
RR
R R 105.6 ksi
Abear
h d
5. (c) The tearout area is Atear 2
t , where (h - d)/2 is the distance from the edge of the hole to
2
the outside of the bar. Substitute this area in equation 4.9 for the shear area and substitute the shear
strength for xy, solving then for the unknown distance h.
RL
Left pin h L d h L 0.792 in
S s t
RR
Right pin h R d h R 1.062 in
S s t
Minimum value of h h min h R h min 1.062 in
PROBLEM 4-59 _____

Statement: Figure P4-21 shows a rectangular section aluminum bar subjected to off-center forces P = 4000
N applied as shown.
(a) Solve for the maximum normal stress in the mid-region of the bar well away from the
eyes where the loads are applied.
(b) Plot the normal stress distribution across the cross section at this mid-region.
(c) Sketch a "reasonable" plot of the normal stress distribution across the cross section at
the ends, close to the applied loads.
Given: Depth of bar h 40 mm Applied loads P 4000 N

Thickness of bar t 10 mm Location of eye d 35 mm (from bottom edge)
1. Draw a free-body diagram of the bar, cut at any section along the length of the bar.
FACE OF CUT
SURFACE
d h
P
M
0.5h
SECTION CENTROIDAL AXIS
Equilibrium requires that there be a force directed along the centroidal axis of the cross section that is equal
and opposite to the applied force and a bending moment to react the couple formed by the applied force and
the reaction force. Thus, since the reaction moment is clockwise,
M ( d 0.5 h ) P M 60.000 N m
2. Calculate the cross-section area, moment of inertia, and distance from the centroid to the outer surface.
2
A h t A 400.0 mm
3
t h 4 4
I I 5.333 10 mm
12
c 0.5 h c 20.000 mm
2. (a) The normal stress on a section well away from the ends is a combination of uniform tension, as given by
equation 4.7, and bending, as given by equation 4.11a.
M y P
( y )
I A
This will be a maximum at y = c. max ( c) max 32.5 MPa
3. (b) Plot the normal stress distribution across the cross section at the mid-region of the bar for
y c c 1 mm c
NORMAL STRESS ON SECTION

40
30
20
Stress, MPa
( y )
10
MPa
10
20
20 10 0 10 20 30
y
mm
Distance from neutral axis, mm
4. (c) Sketch a "reasonable" plot of the normal stress distribution across the cross section at the ends, close to
the applied loads. Use the "force flow" analogy show in Figures 4-37 and 4-38 as a guide to the stress
distribution. Near the applied load the stress will be highly concentrated. As the distance from the point of
load application increases the stress will become more evenly distributed.
PROBLEM 4-60 _____

Statement: Figure P4-22 shows a bracket machined from 0.5-in-thick steel flat stock. It is rigidly attached to
a support and loaded with P = 5000 lb at point D. Find:
(a) The magnitude, location, and the plane orientation of the maximum normal stress at
section A-A.
(b) The magnitude, location, and the plane orientation of the maximum shear stress at
section A-A.
(c) The magnitude, location, and the plane orientation of the maximum normal stress at
section B-B.
(d) The magnitude, location, and the plane orientation of the maximum shear stress at
section B-B.
Given: Distance from support to:
Point D d 8 in Section A-A a 10 in Centroid of B-B b 18.5 in
Depth of section h 3 in Thickness of section t 0.5 in
Applied load P 5000 lbf
Assumptions: The bracket remains flat and does not buckle (out-of-plane) under the applied load.
1. Calculate the cross-section area and moment of inertia at sections A-A and B-B, which are the same.
3
2 t h 4
A h t A 1.500 in I I 1.1250 in
12
2. For parts (a) and (b), draw a free-body diagram of the portion of the bracket that is to the right of section A-A.
a A
M h y
A
x
d D
3. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the shear force and bending moment on section A-A.
F: V P 0 M: P ( a d ) M 0
V P V 5000 lbf M P ( a d ) M 10000 in lbf

4. (a) The maximum normal stress in the bracket at section A-A is determined using equation 4.11b. It is located a
the bottom of the section and is oriented in the positive x direction, i.e., it is tensile.
Distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber c 0.5 h c 1.500 in

M c
Maximum normal stress max max 13.33 ksi
I
5. (b) The maximum shear stress in the bracket at section A-A is either at the neutral axis (due to the transverse
shear, which is a maximum at the NA) or it is at the top or bottom of the section (due to the bending stress at
those points, which is numerically the same).
3 V
At the neutral axis, using equation 4.14b max max 5.000 ksi
2 A
At the bottom edge the stress state is: x max, y 0 ksi, xy 0 ksi. Using equation 4.6a, the principal
stresses are
2
x y x y 2
1 xy 1 13.333 ksi
2 2
2
x y x y 2
2 xy 2 0.000 ksi
2 2
3 0 ksi
And, from equation 4.6b, the maximum shear stress is
1 3
max max 6.667 ksi
2
As seen from the Mohr's Circle in Figure 4-8, this stress is oriented 45 degrees from the positive x axis.
6. For parts (c) and (d), draw a free-body diagram of the portion of the bracket that is below section B-B.
F y
M
B B x
d D h
7. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the normal force and bending moment on section B-B.
F: F P 0 M: P ( b d ) M 0
F P F 5000 lbf M P ( b d ) M 52500 in lbf
8. (c) The maximum normal stress in the bracket at section B-B is a combination of uniform tension and bending
and is determined by summing equations 4.7 and 4.11b. It is located at the left edge of the section and is
oriented in the positive y direction, i.e., it is tensile.
M c F
Maximum normal stress max max 73.33 ksi
I A
9. (d) The maximum shear stress in the bracket at section B-B is at the left edge of the section (due to the
combined tensile and bending stresses). Since there is no transverse shear on this section, the shear stress
at the neutral axis is zero.
At the left edge the stress state is: x 0 ksi, y max, xy 0 ksi. Using equation 4.6a, the principal
stresses are
2
x y x y 2
1 xy 1 73.333 ksi
2 2
2
x y x y 2
2 xy 2 0.000 ksi
2 2
3 0 ksi
And, from equation 4.6b, the maximum shear stress is
1 3
max max 36.667 ksi
2
As seen from the Mohr's Circle in Figure 4-8, this stress is oriented 45 degrees from the positive x axis.
PROBLEM 4-61 _____

Statement: For the bracket of Problem 4-60, solve for the deflection of point C.
Point D d 8 in Point C a 18.5 in
6
Applied load P 5000 lbf Modulus of elasticity E 30 10 psi
Assumptions: 1. The bracket remains flat and does not buckle (out-of-plane) under the applied load.
2. The bracket can be modeled using its centroidal axis length dimensions.
1. Calculate the moment of inertia along the segment AC.

3
t h 4
I I 1.1250 in
12
2. Draw idealized free-body diagrams of the portions of the bracket from the support to point C and from point
C to point D.
MA MC
C x
A
P
d
C
MC
3. Calculate the magnitude of the moments on segment AC using equilibrium equation 3.3a.
MC P ( a d ) MC 52500 in lbf
MA P d MA 40000 in lbf

q(x) = -MA<x - 0>-2 + P<x - 0>-1 - P<x - a>-1 - MC<x - a>-2
V(x) = -MA<x - 0>-1 + P<x - 0>0 - P<x - a>0 - MC<x - a>-1
M(x) = -MA<x - 0>0 + P<x - 0>1 - P<x - a>1 - MC<x - a>0

(x) = [-MA<x-0>1 + P<x - 0>2/2 - P<x - a>2/2 - MC<x-a>1 + C3]/EI

y(x) = [-MA<x-0>2/2 + P<x - 0>3/6 - P<x - a>3/6 - MC<x-a>2/2 + C3x +C4]/EI
9. Evaluate C3 and C4. At x = 0, = 0 and y = 0, therefore, C3 = 0 and C4 = 0.
10. Evaluate and y at x = a using the equations in steps 7 and 8, respectively.
MA a
1 P 2
C a C 0.196 deg
E I 2
1 MA 2 P 3
yC a a yC 0.0465 in
E I 2 6
PROBLEM 4-62 _____

Statement: Figure P4-23 shows a 1-in-dia steel bar supported and subjected to the applied load P = 500 lb.
Solve for the deflection at the load and the slope at the roller support.
6
Given: Diameter d 1.00 in Modulus of elasticity E 30 10 psi
Applied load P 500 lbf Dimensions: a 20 in L 40 in
1. Draw a free-body diagram.
R2
M1
R1 P
2. This is a statically indeterminate beam because there are three unknown reactions, R1, M1, and R2. To solve
for these unknowns, follow the method presented in Example 4-7. First, calculate the moment of inertia for
the round section.
4
d 4
I I 0.0491 in
64
q(x) = -M1<x>-2 + R1<x>-1 - R2<x - a>-1 + P<x - L>-1

V(x) = -M1<x>-1 + R1<x>0 - R2<x - a>0 + P<x - L>0
M(x) = -M1<x>0 + R1<x>1 - R2<x - a>1 + P<x - L>1
(x) = [ -M1<x>1 + R1<x>2/2 - R2<x - a>2/2 + P<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [-M1<x>2/2 + R1<x>3/6 - R2<x - a>3/6 + P<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
8. Evaluate R1, M1, R2, C3 and C4

At x = 0, y = 0 and = 0, therefore, C3 = 0 and C4 = 0.
At x = a, y = 0
At x = L+, V = M = 0
Guess M1 1000 in lbf R1 500 lbf R2 1000 lbf
M1 2 R1 3 3
Given y(a) = 0: a a = 0 lbf in
2 6
V(L) = 0: R1 R2 P = 0 lbf
M(L) = 0: M1 R1 L R2 ( L a ) = 0 lbf in
M1

R1 Find M1 R1 R2 M1 5000 in lbf R1 750 lbf
R
2 R2 1250 lbf
9. Evaluate y at x = L to get the deflection at the load.
1 M1 2 R1 3 R2 3
yL L L ( L a) yL 1.584 in
E I 2 6 6
10. Evaluate at x = a to get the slope at the roller support.
1 R1 2
A M1 a a A 0.0340 rad
E I 2
PROBLEM 4-63 _____

Statement: Figure P4-24 shows a 1.25-in-dia solid steel shaft with several twisting couples applied in the
directions shown. For TA = 10000 lb-in, TB = 20000 lb-in, TC = 30000 lb-in, find:
(a) The magnitude and location of the maximum shear stress in the shaft.
(b) The corresponding principal stresses for the location determined in part (a).
(c) The magnitude and location of the maximum shear strain in the shaft.
6
Given: Shaft diameter d 1.25 in Modulus of rigidity G 11.7 10 psi
Torque magnitudes: TA 10 kip in TB 20 kip in TC 30 kip in
Segment lengths: LAB 18 in LBC 12 in LCD 10 in
1. Looking at the shaft from the left end (A), TA and TC are clockwise (negative) and TB is counterclockwise
(positive). For the shaft to be in equilibrium, the applied torques must sum to zero. Write the equilibrium
equation and solve for the unknown reaction TD.
TA TB TC TD 0
TD TA TB TC TD 20 kip in
2. The net torque on each shaft segment is now

TAB TA TAB 10 kip in
TBC TAB TB TBC 10 kip in
TCD TBC TC TCD 20 kip in
3. Calculate the outside radius and the polar moment of inertia of the shaft.
4
d d 4
r r 0.625 in J J 0.240 in
2 32
4. (a) Since the shaft is uniform in cross-section, the maximum shear stress will occur in that segment that has
the largest absolute value of torque applied to it. In this case, that is segment CD. Use equation 4.23b to
calculate the maximum shear stress in segment CD.
TCD r
max max 52.2 ksi
J
5. (b) Mohr's circle for pure shear is centered at 0,0 and has a radius equal to the shear stress on the stress
element. Thus, for this case, the two nonzero principal stresses are
1 max 1 52.2 ksi 3 max 3 52.2 ksi
The third principal stress is zero, 2 0 ksi
6. (c) The shear strain in any given segment is proportional to the shear stress so the maximum shear strain
will occur in segment CD, where the shear stress is a maximum. Hooke's law for shear is similar to that
given in equation 2.2.
max 3
max max 4.46 10 rad
G
PROBLEM 4-64 _____

Statement: If the shaft of Problem 4-63 were rigidly attached to fixed supports at each end (A and D) and
loaded only by the couples TB and TC, then find:
(a) The reactions TA and TD at each end of the shaft.
(b) The rotation of section B with respect to section C.
(c) The magnitude and location of the maximum shear strain.
6
Given: Shaft diameter d 1.25 in Modulus of rigidity G 11.7 10 psi
Torque magnitudes: TB 20 kip in TC 30 kip in
Segment lengths: LAB 18 in LBC 12 in LCD 10 in
1. Calculate the outside radius and the polar moment of inertia of the shaft.
4
d d 4
r r 0.625 in J J 0.240 in
2 32
2. (a) Looking at the shaft from the left end (A), TC is clockwise (negative) and TB is counterclockwise
(positive). For the shaft to be in equilibrium, the applied torques must sum to zero. Since there are two
unknown reactions in the equilibrium equation, we cannot solve for them without another equation. An
equation that expresses the fact that the total rotational deflection from A to D is zero is called the
compatibility equation. Write the equilibrium and compatibility equations and solve for the unknown
reactions TA and TD.
TA TB TC TD 0
TA LAB TA TB LBC TD LCD

AB BC CD 0 0
J G J G J G
Guess TA 10 kip in TD 30 kip in
Given TA TB TC TD = 0 kip in
TA LAB TA TB LBC TD LCD

= 0 rad
J G J G J G
TA
Find TA TD TA 3.50 kip in clockwise
TD
TD 13.50 kip in counterclockwise
3. The net torque on each shaft segment is now

TAB TA TAB 3.5 kip in
TBC TAB TB TBC 16.5 kip in
TCD TBC TC TCD 13.5 kip in
4. (b) Use equation 4.24 to calculate the rotation of section B with respect to C.
TBC LBC
BC BC 0.0706 rad BC 4.045 deg
J G
5. (c) Since the shaft is uniform in cross-section, the maximum shear stress will occur in that segment that has the
largest absolute value of torque applied to it. In this case, that is segment BC. Use equation 4.23b to calculate
the maximum shear stress in segment BC.
TBC r
max max 43.0 ksi
J
The shear strain in any given segment is proportional to the shear stress so the maximum shear strain will
occur in segment BC, where the shear stress is a maximum. Hooke's law for shear is similar to that given in
equation 2.2.
max 3
max max 3.68 10 rad
G
PROBLEM 4-65 _____

Statement: Figure P4-25 shows a pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F = 100 lb
and l = 1.50 in, what pin diameter is needed to limit the maximum stress in the pin to 50 kpsi?
Given: Applied force F 100 lbf Maximum stress 50 ksi
Total length, l l 1.50 in Beam length L 0.5 l
Assumptions: 1. Since there is a slip fit between the pin and part B, part B offers no resistance to bending of
the pin and, since the pin is press-fit into part A, it can be modeled as a cantilever beam of
length l/2.
2. Part B distributes the concentrated force F so that, at the pin, it is uniformly distributed over
the exposed length of the pin.
1. Calculate the intensity of the uniformly distributed load acting over the length of the pin.
F lbf
w w 133.3
L in
2. A cantilever beam with uniform loading is shown in Figure B-1(b) in Appendix B. In this case, the dimension
a in the figure is zero. As shown in the figure, when a = 0, the maximum bending moment occurs at the
support and is
2
w L
Mmax Mmax 37.50 lbf in
2
3. The bending stress in a beam is given in equation 4.11c, which can be solved for the required section
modulus, Z.
Mmax 4 3
Z Z 7.500 10 in

3
I d
where, for a round cross-section z= = Solving for d,
c 32
1
3
32 Z
d min d min 0.197 in

PROBLEM 4-66 _____

Statement: Figure P4-25 shows a pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F = 100 N
and l = 64 mm, what pin diameter is needed to limit the maximum stress in the pin to 250 MPa?
Given: Applied force F 100 N Maximum stress 250 MPa
Total length, l l 64 mm Beam length L 0.5 l
length l/2.
F N
w w 3.125
L mm
support and is
2
w L
Mmax Mmax 1600.0 N mm
2
3. The bending stress in a beam is given in equation 4.11c, which can be solved for the required section
modulus, Z.
Mmax 3
Z Z 6.400 mm

3
I d
where, for a round cross-section z= = Solving for d,
c 32
1
3
32 Z
d min d min 4.0 mm

PROBLEM 4-67
Statement: Figure P4-25 shows a pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. Determine
the l/d ratio that will make the pin equally strong in shear and bending if the shear strength is
equal to one-half the bending strength.
length l/2.
2. Part B distributes the concentrated force F so that, at the pin, it is uniformly distributed
over the exposed length of the pin.
1. The intensity of the uniformly distributed load acting over the exposed length of the pin is
2 F
w
l
2. A cantilever beam with uniform loading is shown in Figure B-1(b) in Appendix B. In this case, the
dimension a in the figure is zero. As shown in the figure, when a = 0, the maximum bending moment for
a beam of length L occurs at the support and is
2 2
w L 1 2 F l F l
Mmax = = =
2 2 l 2 4
3. From equation 4.11c, the bending stress is
M F l 32 = 8 F l
max = = 4 3
Z d d 3
4. Figure B-1(b) in Appendix B shows that the maximum shear occurs at the support and, for a = 0, is
2 F l = F
Vmax = w L = l 2

5. From equation 4.15c, the maximum shear stress due to the transverse loading is
4 V 4 4 16 F
max = = F =
3 A 3 2 2
d 3 d
6. For equal shear and bending strength, let the shear stress equal one half the bending stress.
16 F 1 8 F l
=
2 2 3
3 d d
l 4
Solving for l/d, =
d 3
P0467.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-69
Statement: Figure P4-26a shows a C-clamp with an elliptical body dimensioned as shown. The clamp has a
T-section with a uniform thickness of 3.2 mm at the throat as shown in Figure P4-26b. Find the
bending stress at the inner and outer fibers of the throat if the clamp force is 2.7 kN.
Given: Clamping force F 2.7 kN

Distance from center of screw to throat ri 63.5 mm
Section dimensions: Flange b 28.4 mm Web h 31.8 mm t 3.2 mm

1. Determine the location of the CG of the T-section and the distance from the centerline of the screw to the
centroid of the section at the throat.
0.5 t ( b t) 0.5 ( h t) ( h t) t
yCG yCG 9.58 mm
b t ( h t) t
rc ri yCG rc 73.08 mm
2. Using equation 4.12a and Figure 4-16, calculate the distance to the neutral axis, rn, and the distance from the
centroidal axis to the neutral axis, e.
Distance from the screw centerline to the outside fiber ro ri h ro 95.30 mm

2
Cross section area A b t ( h t) t A 182.4 mm
A
Distance to neutral axis rn rn 71.86 mm
ri t ro
b t
dr dr
r r
r r t
i i
Distance from centroidal to neutral axis e rc rn e 1.21 mm
3. Take a section through the throat area and draw a FBD. There will be a vertical axial force through the
section CG (at a distance rc from the screw centerline) which will form a couple of magnitude rc x F. This
couple will be balanced by an internal moment of equal magnitude.
5
Internal moment M rc F M 1.97 10 N mm
4. Calculate the distances from the neutral axis to the inner and outer fibers.
ci rn ri ci 8.364 mm co ro rn co 23.436 mm
5. Using equations 4.12d and 4.12e, calculate the stresses at the inner and outer fibers of the throat section.
M ci F
i i 132.2 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 204.3 MPa
e A ro A
P0469.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-70
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P4-26a has a rectangular cross section as in Figure P4-26c. Find
the bending stress at the inner and outer fibers of the throat if the clamping force is 1.6 kN.
Section dimensions: Width b 6.2 mm Depth h 31.8 mm
1. Determine the distance from the centerline of the screw to the centroid of the section at the throat.
h
rc ri rc 79.40 mm
2

2
Cross section area A b h A 197.160 mm
A
ro
b
dr
r
r
i
5
M ci F
i i 148.3 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 98.8 MPa
e A ro A
P0470.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-71
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P4-26a has an elliptical cross section as in Figure P4-26d.
Dimensions of the major and minor axes of the ellipse are given. Determine the bending stress
at the inner and outer fibers of the throat if the clamping force is 1.6 kN.
h
rc ri rc 79.40 mm
2

b h 2
Cross section area A A 239.766 mm
2 2
A
ro
0.5
2
2 b
1 r rc
4 2
h dr
r
r
i
5
M ci F
i i 163.2 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 108.7 MPa
e A ro A
P0471.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-72
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P4-26a has a trapezoidal cross section as in Figure P4-26e.
Determine the bending stress at the inner and outer fibers of the throat if the clamping force is
1.6 kN.
Section dimensions: Width b i 9.6 mm b o 3.2 mm Depth h 31.8 mm
h bi 2 bo
rc ri rc 76.75 mm
3 bi bo

bi bo 2
Cross section area A h A 203.520 mm
2
A
ro

bi bo
bi r ri
h
dr
r
r
i
5
M ci F
i i 126.9 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 118.4 MPa
e A ro A
P0472.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-73
Statement: We want to design a C-clamp with a T-section similar to the one shown in Figure P4-26. The
depth of the section will be 31.8 mm as shown but the width of the flange (shown as 28.4 mm)
is to be determined. Assuming a uniform thickness of 3.2 mm and a factor of safety against
static yielding of 2, determine a suitable value for the width of the flange if the C-clamp is to be
made from 60-40-18 ductile iron and the maximum design load is 1.6 kN.
Given: Maximum clamping force F 1.6 kN

Section dimensions: Web h 31.8 mm t 3.2 mm
Factor of safety N 2 Yield strength S y 324 MPa
centroid of the section at the throat as functions of the unknown flange width, b.
0.5 t ( b t) 0.5 ( h t) ( h t) t
yCG ( b )
b t ( h t) t
rc( b ) ri yCG ( b )
centroidal axis to the neutral axis, e,as functions of b.
Cross section area A ( b ) b t ( h t) t
A (b)
Distance to neutral axis rn( b )
r t r
i b o t
dr dr
r r
r r t
i i
Distance from centroidal to neutral axis e( b ) rc( b ) rn( b )
Internal moment M ( b ) rc( b ) F
ci( b ) rn( b ) ri co( b ) ro rn( b )
M (b) ci( b ) F
i( b )
e( b ) A ( b ) ri A ( b )
6. Set the tensile stress on the inner fiber equal to the yield strength divided by the factor of safety and solve
for the flange width, b.
P0473.xmcd
Guess b 12 mm
Sy
Given i( b ) = b Find ( b ) b 10.13 mm
N
7. Using the calculated value of b, check the stresses at the inner and outer fibers..
M (b) ci( b ) F
i( b ) i( b ) 162 MPa
e( b ) A ( b ) ri A ( b )
M ( b) c o( b ) F
o( b ) o( b ) 149.4 MPa
e( b ) A ( b ) ro A ( b )
A suitable minimum value for the flange width is

b 10.1 mm
P0473.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-74
Statement: A round steel bar is 10 in long and has a diameter of 1 in.
(a) Calculate the stress in the bar when it is subjected to a 1000-lb force in tension.
(b) Calculate the bending stress in the bar if it is fixed at one end (as a cantilever beam) and
has a 1000-lb transverse load at the other end.
(c) Calculate the transverse shear stress in the bar of part (b).
(d) Calculate the torsional shear stress when the 1000-lb force is displaced 10 inches radially
from the centerline (axis) of the cantilever beam.
(e) Calculate the maximum bending stress in the bar if it is formed into a semicircle with a
centroidal radius of 10/ in and 1000-lb opposing forces are applied at the ends in the plane of
the of the ends. Assume that there is no distortion of the cross section during bending.
(f) Calculate the direct bearing stress that would result on the bar of (a) if it were the pin in a
pin-and-clevis connection that is subjected to a 1000-lb pull if the center part (the eye or
tongue) is 1-in wide.
(g) Determine how short the bar must be when loaded as a cantilever beam for its maximum
flexural bending stress and its maximum transverse shear stress to provide equal tendency to
failure. Find the length as a fraction of the diameter if the failure stress in shear is half the
failure stress in bending.
(h) If the force on the cantilever beam in (f) is eccentric, inducing torsional as well as bending
stress, what fraction of the diameter would the eccentricity need to be in order to give a
torsional stress equal to the transverse shear stress?
Given: Length of bar L 10 in Diameter d 1.00 in

Force F 1000 lbf Load Radius R 10 in
(a) Use equation 4.7 to calculate the axial stress.

2
d 2
Cross sectional area A A 0.785 in
4
F
Axial stress 1.27 ksi
A
(b) The beam loading diagram is shown in Appendix Figure B-1a with the concentrated load at a = L. The
maximum bending stress occurs at x = 0 and is given by Equation 4.11b.
Bending moment M L F M 10000 in lbf

d
Radius of bar c c 0.5 in
2
4
d 4
64
M c
Maximum bending stress 101.9 ksi
I
(c) The maximum transverse shear stress occurs at y = 0 and is given by Equation 4.15c and in Figure 4-20b.
4 F
Maximum transverse shear stress in a solid, round bar max max 1.70 ksi
3 A
(d) The maximum torsional shear shear stress occurs at y = d/2 and is given by Equation 4.23b.
P0474.xmcd
Twisting torque T F R T 10000 in lbf

4
d 4
Polar moment of inertia J J 0.098 in
32
Td
Max torsional shear stress 50.93 ksi
2 J
(e) The maximum bending stress for a curved beam occurs at r = ri and is given by Equation 4.12d.
10
Centroidal radius rc in rc 3.183 in

Inside radius ri rc 0.5 d ri 2.683 in
Outside radius ro rc 0.5 d ro 3.683 in

2
d 2
Cross section area A A 0.785 in
4
A
Distance to neutral axis rn rn 3.163 in
r
o 2
d r r 2
2 c
2 dr
r
r
i
Distance from centroid to neutral axis e rc rn e 0.020 in
Internal moment M rc F M 3183 in lbf

Distances from the neutral axis to the inner and outer fibers
ci rn ri ci 0.480 in co ro rn co 0.520 in
Stress at the inner fibers of the throat section
M ci F
i i 37.9 ksi
e A ri A
(f) The direct bearing stress is given in Equations 4.7 and 4.10.
Given length of bearing contact l 1 in

2
Projected area of contact Abearing l d Abearing 1 in
F
Bearing stress bearing bearing 1.0 ksi
Abearing
(g) Determine how short the bar must be when loaded as a cantilever beam for its maximum flexural bending
stress and its maximum transverse shear stress to provide equal tendency to failure. Find the length as a
fraction of the diameter if the failure stress in shear is half the failure stress in bending.
P0474.xmcd
M c 32 F L
Bending stress = =
I 3
d
4 F 16 F
Transverse shear = =
3 A 2
3 d
32 F L 32 F
=
Equating = 2 3 3 2
d d
d
Solving for L L=
3
(h) If the force on the cantilever beam in (f) is eccentric, inducing torsional as well as bending stress, what
fraction of the diameter would the eccentricity need to be in order to give a torsional stress equal to the
transverse shear stress?
Tc 16 F e
Torsional shear stress tor = =
J 3
d
4 F 16 F
Transverse shear trans = =
3 A 2
3 d
16 F e 16 F
Equating tor = trans =
3 2
d 3 d
d
Solving for the eccentricity, e e=
3
P0474.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-75a
Statement: For a filleted flat bar in tension similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-9 and the data from
row a from Table P4-4, determine the nominal stress, the geometric stress concentration factor,
and the maximum axial stress in the bar.
Given: Widths D 40 mm d 20 mm
Thickness h 10 mm Radius r 4 mm
Force P 8000 N
Solution: See Appendix Figure C-9 and Mathcad file P0475a.
1. Determine the nominal stress in the bar using equation 4.7.
P
nom nom 40.0 MPa
h d
2. Determine the geometric stress concentration factor using Appendix Figure C-9.
D
Width ratio 2.00
d
From Figure E-9 A 1.0966 b 0.32077

b
Kt A
r
SCF Kt 1.838
d
3. Determine the maximum stress in the bar using equation 4.31.
max Kt nom max 73.5 MPa
P0475a.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-76a
Statement: For a filleted flat bar in bending similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-10 and the data from
row a from Table P4-4, determine the nominal stress, the geometric stress concentration factor,
and the maximum bending stress in the bar.
Moment M 80 N m
1. Determine the nominal stress in the bar using equation 4.11b.

3
d h d 3 4
c c 10 mm I I 6.667 10 mm
2 12
M c
nom nom 120.0 MPa
I
D
Width ratio 2.00
d
From Figure E-9 A 0.93232 b 0.30304

b
Kt A
r
SCF Kt 1.518
d
P0476a.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-77a
Statement: For a shaft, with a shoulder fillet, in tension similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-1 and
the data from row a from Table P4-4, determine the nominal stress, the geometric stress
concentration factor, and the maximum axial stress in the shaft.
Radius r 4 mm
Force P 8000 N
1. Determine the nominal stress in the bar using equation 4.7.
4 P
nom nom 25.5 MPa
2
d
D
Width ratio 2.00
d
From Figure E-1 A 1.01470 b 0.30035

b
Kt A
r
SCF Kt 1.645
d
P0477a.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-78a
Statement: For a shaft, with a shoulder fillet, in bending similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-2 and
the data from row a from Table P4-4, determine the nominal stress, the geometric stress
concentration factor, and the maximum bending stress in the shaft.
Radius r 4 mm
Moment M 80 N m
1. Determine the nominal stress in the bar using equation 4.11b.

4
d d 3 4
c c 10 mm I I 7.854 10 mm
2 64
M c
nom nom 101.9 MPa
I
D
Width ratio 2.00
d
From Figure E-2 A 0.90879 b 0.28598

b
Kt A
r
SCF Kt 1.44
d
P0478a.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-79
Statement: A differential stress element has a set of applied stresses on it as shown in Figure 4-1. For x =
850, y = -200, z = 300, xy = 450, yz = -300, and zx = 0; find the principal stresses and maximum
shear stress and draw the Mohr's circle diagram for this three-dimensional stress state.
Given: x 850 y 200 z 300

xy 450 yz 300 zx 0
1. Calculate the coefficients (stress invariants) of equation (4.4c).
C2 x y z C2 950.000
x xy x zx y yz 5
C1 C1 2.675 10
xy y zx z yz z
x xy zx
8
C0 xy y yz C0 1.882 10

zx yz z
3 2
2. Find the roots of the triaxial stress equation: C2 C1 C0 = 0
C0
470
v C1
r polyroots ( v) r 388
C2
1032
1
CW
3. Extract the principal stresses from
the vector r by inspection.
1-3
1 r 1 1032
3
2 r 2 388 500
2
2-3 1-2
3 r 3 470
1
-500 500 1000 1500
4. Using equations (4.5), evaluate
3 0 2 1
the principal shear stresses.
1 3
13 13 751
2
500
1 2
12 12 322
2
2 3
23 23 429
2 CCW
5. Draw the three-circle Mohr diagram. FIGURE 4-79

The Three Mohr's Circles for Problem 4-79
PROBLEM 4 - 80
Statement: Write expressions for the normalized (stress/pressure) tangential stress as a function of the
normalized wall thickness (wall thickness/outside radius) at the inside wall of a thick-wall
cylinder and for a thin-wall cylinder, both with internal pressure only. Plot the ratio of these two
expressions and determine the range of the wall thickness to outside radius-ratio for which the
stress predicted by the thin-wall expression is at least 5% greater than that predicted by the
thick-wall expression.

1. Let the t/p ratio be S' and the t/ro ratio be t', then
For the thick-wall cylinder at the inside wall, using equation 4.48a
2
2 2 t' t'
S'thick ( t')
2
2 t' t'
and, for the thin-wall cylinder, using equation 4.49a

1
S'thin ( t')
t'
2. Choose a range for the normalized thickness ratio, t' 0.01 0.02 0.99
S'thin( t') S'thick( t')

3. Plot the difference between the two functions. ( t')
S'thick ( t')
25
20
15
( t')
%
10
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
t'
P0480.xmcd
4. Determine the values of t' for which the difference is 5%.
( 0.10) 5.0 % ( 0.946 ) 5.1 %
5. The range of the normalized thickness for which the thin-wall stress is at least 5% greater than the thick-wall
stress is from 0.10 to 0.946.
P0480.xmcd
PROBLEM 4 - 81
Statement: A hollow square torsion bar such as that shown in Table 4-3 has dimensions a = 25 mm, t = 3
mm, and l = 300 mm. If it is made of steel with a modulus of rigidity of G = 80.8 GPa, determine
the maximum shear stress in the bar and the angular deflection under a torsional load of 500
N-m.
Given: Dimensions a 25 mm t 3 mm l 300 mm

Modulus G 80.8 GPa Load T 500 N m
Solution: See Table 4-3 Mathcad file P0481.
1. Calculate the factors K and Q for a hollow square from Table 4-3.
2 4
2 t ( a t) 4
K K 31944 mm
2
2 a t 2 t
2 3
Q 2 t ( a t) Q 2904 mm
2. Using equation 4.26a, calculate the maximum shear stress.
T
max max 172.2 MPa
Q
3. Using equation 4.26b, calculate the angular deflection.
Tl
0.058 radians
K G
3.33 deg
P0481.xmcd
PROBLEM 4 - 82
Statement: Design a hollow rectangular torsion bar such as that shown in Table 4-3 that has dimensions a
= 45 mm, b = 20 mm, and l = 500 mm. It is made of steel with a shear yield strength of 90 MPa
and has an applied torsional load of 135 N-m. Use a factor of safety against yielding of 2.
Given: Dimensions a 45 mm b 20 mm l 500 mm

Modulus G 80.8 GPa Load T 135 N m
Shear yield strength S sy 90 MPa Factor of safety N 2
Solution: See Table 4-3 Mathcad file P0482.
1. Calculate the Q-factor for a hollow rectangle from Table 4-3.
Q( t) 2 t ( a t) ( b t)
2. Calculate the maximum shear stress as a function of thickness, t, using equation 4.26a.
T
( t)
Q( t)
3. Define a function that relates the maximum shear stress to the shear strength divided by the factor of safety
and solve for the thickness, t.
Guess a value of t t 3 mm
S sy
Define the design function f ( t) ( t)
N
t root( f ( t) t) t 1.927 mm
Let t = 2 mm (note that this solution does not check for buckling under the applied load)
P0482.xmcd
PROBLEM 4 - 83
Statement: A pressure vessel with closed ends has the following dimensions: outside diameter, OD = 450
mm, and wall thickness, t = 6 mm. If the internal pressure is 690 kPa, find the principal stresses
on the inside surface away from the ends. What is the maximum shear stress at the point
analyzed?
Given: Dimensions OD 450 mm t 6 mm

Pressure p 690 kPa
1. Convert the given dimensions to inside and outside radii.

ro 0.5 OD ro 225 mm
ri ro t ri 219 mm
2. Determine whether to use thick-wall or thin-wall theory.

ro
22.5 mm
10
Since the wall thickness, t 6 mm, is much less than one tenth the outside radius, use thin wall theory.
3. Calculate the principal stresses using equations 4.49.

p ro
Tangential (y-direction) t t 25.9 MPa
t
Radial (x-direction) r 0 MPa r 0.0 MPa
p ro
Axial (z-direction) a a 12.9 MPa
2 t
The principal stresses are:
1 t 1 25.9 MPa
2 a 2 12.9 MPa
3 r 3 0.0 MPa
4. Using equation 4.6b, calculate the maximum shear stress.
1 3
max max 12.9 MPa
2
P0483.xmcd
PROBLEM 4-84
Statement: A simply supported steel beam of length, l, with a concentrated load, F, acting at midspan has a
rectangular cross-section with width, b, and depth, h. If the strain energy due to transverse
shear loading is Us and that due to bending loading is Ub, derive an expression for the ratio
Us/Ub and plot it as a function of h/l over the range 0 to 0.10.
l

3 V
2
1. From equation 4.22e, the strain energy in transverse loading is: Us = dx
5 G A

0
l

1 M
2
2. From equation 4.22d, the strain energy in bending loading is: Ub = dx
2 E I

0
l
2
V dx

Us 6 E I 0
3. Let U' = , then: U' =
Ub 5 G A l
2
M dx

0
3
b h
4. For a rectangular cross-section: A = b h and I=
12
l
2
V dx
2
E 5 h 0
5. And, for steel: = therefore U' =
G 2 4 l
2
M dx

0
6. For the given loading:
F F x
For x between 0 and l/2, V= and M=
2 2
F F x F l
For x between l/2 and l, V= and M=
2 2 2
7. Substituting these expressions into the equation for U' and integrating gives:
0.5 l
l
2 2
dx
F dx
F

h
2 2 2 12.0 12.0

2
2 2 2
h 0

0.5 l
l l

6.0 h
4 0.5 l l 4 2
l
dx
F x
2
F x F l
2
2 2 2 dx

0 0.5 l
h 2
8. Let h' = then U'( h') 6 h'
l
9. Plotting the strain energy ratio over the range: h' 0 0.001 0.10
STRAIN ENERGY RATIO vs DEPTH TO LENGTH RATIO

6
5
Strain Energy Ratio - Percent
U'( h' )
3
%
0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1
h'
Depth to Length Ratio
PROBLEM 4-85a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-27(a). Find the reactions for the data
given in row a from Table P4-2.
Distance to R2 a 0.4 m
1
a
w
R1 R2 R3
FIGURE 4-85A
Solution: See Figure P4-27(a) and Mathcad file P0485a.
1. Consider the reaction force R1 to be redundant and remove it temporarily. The beam will then be statically
determinant and will deflect at x = 0. Now consider the reaction force R1 to be an unkown applied load that
will force the deflection to be zero. Write an equation for the deflection at x = 0 in terms of the force R1 with
the deflection set to zero.
2. Write equation 4.21 for the deflection y1 at the unknown applied load R1 in terms of the strain energy in

the beam at that point: y1 = U
R1
L

M
3. Substitute equation 4.22d and differentiate: y1 = M dx (a)
E I

R1
0
4. Write an expression for the bending moment and its partial derivative with respect toR1 as a function of x.
2
w x
For x between 0 and a, M = R 1 x M =x (b)
2 R1
2
w x
For x between a and l, M = R 1 x R 2 ( x a ) M =x (c)
2 R1
5. Substitute equations (b) and (c) into (a), set equal to zero and integrate.
a L

2 2
R1 x w x x dx R1 x w x R2 ( x a) x dx = 0

2
2
0 a
6. Solving for R1 and R2 and summing forces and moments about x = 0:
L3 a L2 a 3 a3 4
R2 w L = 0
R1
From strain energy
3
m
3 3 2 3 2 8
Summing forces R1 R2 R3 w L = 0
2
w L
Summing moments R 2 a R 3 L =0
2
7. Use these three equations to solve for R1, R2, and R3. Guess R1 65 N R2 70 N R3 65 N
Given
L3 a L2 a 3 a3 4
R2 w L = 0
R1 3
m
3 3 2 3 2 8
R1 R2 R3 w L = 0
2
w L
R 2 a R 3 L =0
2
10.714
R Find R1 R2 R3 R 148.81 N

40.476
R 10.7 N R 148.8 N R 40.5 N

1 2 3
PROBLEM 4-86a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P4-27(b). Find the reactions for the data
given in row a from Table P4-2.
Given: Beam length L 1.0 m
Distance to R2 a 0.4 m
1
L
b
a
F
w
R1 R2 R3
FIGURE 4-86A
Solution: See Figure P4-27(b) and Mathcad file P0485a.
1. Consider the reaction force R1 to be redundant and remove it temporarily. The beam will then be statically
determinant and will deflect at x = 0. Now consider the reaction force R1 to be an unkown applied load that
will force the deflection to be zero. Write an equation for the deflection at x = 0 in terms of the force R1 with
the deflection set to zero.
2. Write equation 4.21 for the deflection y1 at the unknown applied load R1 in terms of the strain energy in

the beam at that point: y1 = U
R1
L

M
3. Substitute equation 4.22d and differentiate: y1 = M dx (a)
E I

R1
0
4. Write an expression for the bending moment and its partial derivative with respect toR1 as a function of x.
2
w x
For x between 0 and a, M = R 1 x M =x (b)
2 R1
M = R1 x w a x
a
For x between a and b, R 2 ( x a ) M =x (c)
2 R1
M = R1 x w a x
a
For x between b and L, R 2 ( x a ) F ( x b ) (d)
2

M =x
R1
5. Substitute equations (b), (c) and (d) into (a), set equal to zero and integrate.
a

2
b
R1 x w x x dx R x w a x
1
a
R2 ( x a ) x dx = 0

2
2
0 a
L

R x w a x a
1 R2 ( x a ) F ( x b ) x dx

2
b
6. Solving for R1 and R2 and summing forces and moments about x = 0:
L3 3 2 3
From strain energy R1 L a L a R2 =0
3 3 2 6
a2 L2 a L3 a4 3 2 3
w L b L b F
6 3 24 3 2 6
Summing forces R1 R2 R3 w a F = 0
2
w a
Summing moments R 2 a R 3 L F b = 0
2
7. Use these three equations to solve for R1, R2, and R3. Guess R1 100 N R2 400 N R3 200 N
Given
L3 3 2 3
R1 L a L a R2 =0
3 3 2 6
a2 L2 a L3 a4 L3 b L2 b 3
w F
6 3 24 3 2 6
R1 R2 R3 w a F = 0
2
w a
R 2 a R 3 L F b = 0
2
81.143
R Find R1 R2 R3 R 575.238 N

85.905
R 81.1 N R 575.2 N R 85.9 N

1 2 3
PROBLEM 5-1a
Statement: A differential stress element has a set of applied stresses on it as indicated in row a of Table P5-1.
For row a, draw the stress element showing the applied stresses. Find the principal stresses and
the von Mises stress.
Given: x 1000 y 0 z 0
xy 500 yz 0 zx 0
Solution: See Figure 5-1a and Mathcad file P0501a.
1. Draw the stress element, indicating the x and y axes.

500
2. From Problem 4-1a, the principal stresses are
y
1 1207 2 0 3 207 x 1000
3. Using equatoion 5.7c, the von Mises stress is
2 2 FIGURE 5-1aA
' 1 1 3 3 ' 1323 Stress Element for Problem 5-1a
mechanical,P0501a.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-1h
P5-1. For row h, draw the stress element showing the applied stresses, find the principal stresses
and the von Mises stress.
Given: x 750 y 500 z 250

xy 500 yz 0 zx 0
Solution: See Figure 5-1h and Mathcad file P0501h.
z
1. Draw the stress element (see Figure 5-1h).
250
2. From Problem 4-1h, the principal stresses are
1 1140 2 250 3 110
3. Using equation 5.7, the von Mises stress is
750
1 2 2 3 1 3
1 2 2 2 500 500 500
'
2 x y
' 968
FIGURE 5-1h
Stress Element for Problem 5-1h
mechanical,P0501h.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-2
Statement: A 400-lb chandelier is to be hung from two 10-ft-long solid, low- carbon steel cables in tension.
Size the cables for a safety factor of 4. State all assumptions.
Given: Weight of chandelier W 400 lbf
Length of cable L 10 ft L 120 in
Design Safety factor Nd 4
Number of cables N 2
6
Assumptions: The material is AISI 1010 hot-rolled steel with S y 26 ksi

W
1. Determine the load on each cable P P 200 lbf
N
Sy
2. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, Nd =
'
3. In this case, the only stress in the axial direction is the tensile stress. Therefore, this is the principal stress and
also the von Mises stress.
4 P
' = 1 = =
2
d
4. Substitute the equation in step 3 into the design equation in step 2 and solve for the minimum diameter, d.
1
2
4 P N d
d d 0.198 in
S y
5. Round up to an available size (see Table 13-2) and check the actual factor of safety against static failure.
2
d S y
d 0.207 in Ns Ns 4.4
4 P
PROBLEM 5-3
Statement: For the bicycle pedal-arm assembly in Figure P5-1 with rider-applied force of 1500 N at the pedal,
determine the von Mises stress in the 15-mm-dia pedal arm. The pedal attaches to the arm with a
12-mm thread. Find the von Mises stress in the screw. Find the safety factor against static failure
if the material has S y = 350 MPa.
Given: Distances (see figure) a 170 mm b 60 mm

Rider-applied force Frider 1.5 kN Screw thread diameter d sc 12 mm
Pedal arm diameter d pa 15 mm Material yield strength S y 350 MPa
Solution: See Figures 5-3 and Mathcad file P0503. z
1. From problem 4-3, the maximum principal

stresses in the pedal arm are at point A and
are a
C Tc
1 793 MPa 2 0 MPa Frider
Mc
b
3 23 MPa Arm
2. Using equation 5.7c, the von Mises Fc y

stress is Pedal
2 2
' 1 1 3 3 x
FIGURE 5-3A
' 805 MPa Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-3
3. The factor of safety for the pedal arm is

z
Sy
N N 0.43
'
4. From Problem 4-3 solution, the stresses Section C

at the top of the screw where it joins the A
pedal arm are
B
x 530.5 MPa z 0 MPa Arm
zx 0 MPa
5. From this, we see that the principal x

stresses are y
1 x 2 0 MPa
FIGURE 5-3B
3 0 MPa Points A and B at Section C
6. The von Mises stress is ' 1 ' 530.5 MPa
Sy
7. The factor of safety for the screw is N N 0.66
'
PROBLEM 5-4
Statement: The trailer hitch shown in Figure P4-2 and Figure 1-1 (p. 12) has loads applied as defined in
Problem 3-4. The tongue weight of 100 kg acts downward and the pull force of 4905 N acts
horizontally. Using the dimensions of the ball bracket shown in Figure 1-5 (p. 15) and S y = 300
MPa ductile steel, determine static safety factors for:
(a) The shank of the ball where it joins the ball bracket.
(b) Bearing failure in the ball bracket hole.
(c) Tearout failure in the ball bracket.
(d) Tensile failure in the 19-mm diameter attachment holes.
(e) Bending failure in the ball bracket as a cantilever.
S y 300 MPa
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 5-4A
1. From Problem 4-4, the principal stresses in the shank of the ball where it joins the ball bracket are:
1 114 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
2. Since 1 is the only nonzero principal stress, it is also the von Mises stress.The factor of safety against a static
failure at the shank of the ball is
Sy
' 1 Na Na 2.6
'
3. From Problem 4-4, the principal stresses at the bearing area in the ball bracket hole are:
1 9.93 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
bearing failure in the ball bracket hole is
Sy
' 1 Nb Nb 30.2
'
5. From Problem 4-4, the shear stress in the tearout area in Tearout length
the ball bracket is:
4.41 MPa
2
6. For pure shear, the von Mises stress is ' 3
and the factor of safety against a static tearout failure is
Sy
Nc Nc 39.3
'
7. From Problem 4-4, the principal stresses in the attachment

bolts if they are 19-mm diameter are: d R
x 53.6 MPa y 0 MPa FIGURE 5-4B

xy 1.7 MPa
8. The von Mises stress and the factor of safety against a static failure in the attachment bolts are:
2 2 2
' x y x y 3 xy
Sy
' 53.7 MPa Nd Nd 5.6
'
9. From Problem 4-4, the principal stresses in the bracket due to bending in the ball bracket as a cantilever are:
1 72.8 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Ne Ne 4.1
'
PROBLEM 5-5
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-4 for the loading conditions of Problem 3-5, i.e., determine the horizontal force
that will result on the ball from accelerating a 2000-kg trailer to 60 m/sec in 20 sec. Assume a
constant acceleration. From Problem 3-5, the pull force is 6000 N. Determine static safety factors
for:
Mtongue 100 kg Fpull 6 kN d sh 26 mm t 19 mm
S y 300 MPa
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 5-5A
1 139 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Na Na 2.2
'
1 12.15 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Nb Nb 24.7
'
5.4 MPa
2
Sy
Nc Nc 32.1
'


xy 1.7 MPa
2 2 2
' x y x y 3 xy
Sy
' 64.3 MPa Nd Nd 4.7
'
1 85.1 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Ne Ne 3.5
'
PROBLEM 5-6
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-4 for the loading conditions of Problem 3-6, i.e., determine the horizontal force
that will results from an impact between the ball and the tongue of the 2000-kg trailer if the hitch
deflects 2.8 mm dynamically on impact. The tractor weighs 1000 kg and the velocity at impact is
m/sec. Determine static safety factors for:
S y 300 MPa
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 5-6A
1 1277 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Na Na 0.23
'
1 111.5 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Nb Nb 2.7
'
49.6 MPa
2
Sy
Nc Nc 3.5
'


xy 1.7 MPa
2 2 2
' x y x y 3 xy
Sy
' 540.5 MPa Nd Nd 0.56
'
1 635.5 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
' 1 Ne Ne 0.47
'
PROBLEM 5-7
Statement: Design the wrist pin of Problem 3-7 for a safety factor of 3 and S y = 100 ksi if the pin is hollow and
loaded in double shear.

Yield strength S y 100 ksi
Design safety factor Nd 3
Fwristpin
2
radius equal to the shear stress. Thus, the principal normal stress is numerically equal to the shear stress, which in
this case is also the principal shear stress, so we have = 1 = '.
F 4 F
3. The shear stress at each shear plane is = = = '
A
od id
2
2
4. Using the distortion-energy failure theory,

Sy 2
od id S y
2
Nd = =
' 4 F
2 4 F Nd
5. Solving for the inside diameter, id od id 0.297 in
S y
6. Round this down to the decimal equivalent of a common fraction (9/32), id 0.281 in
2
od id S y
2
7. The realized factor of safety is, N N 3.5
4 F
PROBLEM 5-8
Statement: A paper mill processes rolls of paper having a density of 984 kg/m3. The paper roll is 1.50-m
outside diameter (OD) x 0.22-m inside diameter (ID) x 3.23-m long and is on a simple supported,
hollow, steel shaft with S y = 300 MPa. Find the shaft ID needed to obtain a static safety factor of 5
if the shaft OD is 22 cm.
Given: Paper roll:
kg
Density 984 y
3
m
Outside dia. OD 1500 mm w
Inside dia. ID 220 mm x

Length L 3230 mm
R L R
Shaft:
V
Strength S y 300 MPa
R
Outside dia. od 220 mm L/2 L
0 x
Factor of safety Ns 5
-R
Assumptions: 1. The shaft is stiffer than the paper roll so the
weight of the roll on the shaft can be modelled as
a uniformly distributed load. M
2
wL /8
2. The bearings that support the shaft are close to
the ends of the paper roll and are thin with
respect to the length of the roll so we can
consider the distance between the shaft supports
to be the same as the length of the roll. 0 x
L/2 L

FIGURE 5-8
Load, Shear, and Moment Diagrams
for Problem 5-8
1. The weight of the paper roll is,
Volume V

4
2
OD ID L
2 V 5.585 m
3
(1)
Weight W g V W 53.895 kN (2)
2. From Figure 5-8, we see that the bending moment in the shaft is a maximum at the center of the span. First,
determine the magnitude of the distributed load, then find the maximum bending moment using Figure D-2(b) in
Appendix B with a = 0 and x = L/2.
W newton
Distributed load w w 16.686 (3)
L mm
2
w L 7
Maximum moment Mmax Mmax 2.176 10 newton mm (4)
8
3. Using equation 4.11b, find the maximum bending stress as a function of the unkown shaft inside diameter, id.
Bending stress M c 32 Mmax od

max = = (5)
at midspan I
od id
4
4
4. This is the only stress element present at this point on the shaft and there is no shear stress at this point so max
= 1 and 2 = 3 = 0. Furthermore, since 2 and 3 are zero, max = '. Equation 5.8a can be used to find the
unknown id,
Sy
Factor of safety Ns = (6)
'
Substituting equation 5 into 6 and solving for id, we have
1
4
Sy od4 32 Ns Mmax od
Shaft id id id 198 mm (7)
S y

PROBLEM 5-9
Statement: A ViseGrip plier-wrench is drawn to scale in Figure P5-3, and for which the forces were analyzed in
Problem 3-9 and the stresses in Problem 4-9, find the safety factors for each pin for an assumed
clamping force of P = 4000 N in the position shown. The pins are 8-mm dia, S y = 400 MPa, and are
all in double shear.
Given: Pin stresses as calculated in Problem 4-9:
Pin 1-2 12 74.6 MPa
Pin 1-4 14 50.7 MPa
Pin 2-3 23 50.7 MPa
Pin 3-4 34 50.7 MPa
Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Assumptions: Links 3 and 4 are in a toggle position, i.e., the pin that joins links 3 and 4 is in line with the pins th
join 1 with 4 and 2 with 3.
F 4
P
1
3 2
P
55.0 = b 50.0 = a
F14
39.5 = c 22.0 = d
F
129.2 1
4
F41 F34
F21 P

28.0 = e

P 2.8 = g

F43

3 F12
21.2 = h
F23 2
F32
26.9 = f
FIGURE 5-9
2. The pins are in pure shear, so the principal stresses are

Pin joining 1 and 2 '12 3 12 '12 129.211 MPa
All other pins '14 3 14 '14 87.815 MPa
3. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, the factors of safety are
Sy
Pin joining 1 and 2 N12 N12 3.1
'12
Sy
All other pins N14 N14 4.6
'14
PROBLEM 5-10
Statement: An over-hung diving board is shown in Figure P5-4a. Assume cross-section dimensions of 305 mm
x 32 mm. Find the largest principal stress in the board when a 100-kg person is standing at the free
end. What is the static safety factor if the material is brittle fiberglass with S ut = 130 MPa in the
longitudinal direction?
Given: Maximum principal stresses due to 2000 = L

bending at R2 from Problem 4-10
R1 P
1 24.5 MPa
2 0 MPa
R2
3 0 MPa
700 = a
Ultimate strength S ut 130 MPa
FIGURE 5-10
1. The diving board will be in tension at the top of the board and compression along the bottom. At the top, over
the right-hand support, the nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line on the 1-3 diagram is along
the 1 axis. Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory, the static safety factor is
S ut
Ns Ns 5.3
1
PROBLEM 5-11
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-10 assuming the 100-kg person in Problem 5-10 jumps up 25 cm and lands back
on the board. Assume the board weighs 29 kg and deflects 13.1 cm statically when the person
stands on it. What is the static safety factor if the material is brittle fiberglass with S ut = 130 MPa i
the longitudinal direction?
2000 = L
Given: Maximum principal stresses due to
bending at R2 from Problem 4-11 R1 P
1 76.3 MPa
2 0 MPa R2
3 0 MPa 700 = a
FIGURE 5-11

1. The diving board will be in tension at the top of the board and compression along the bottom. At the top, ove
the right-hand support, the nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line on the 1-3 diagram is along
the 1 axis. Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory, the static safety factor is
S ut
Ns Ns 1.7
1
PROBLEM 5-12
2000
bending at support from Problem 4-12 1300 = L
1 24.5 MPa P
2 0 MPa
M1
3 0 MPa R1
700
FIGURE 5-12
1. The diving board will be in tension at the top of the board and compression along the bottom. At the top, at
the built-in support, the nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line on the 1-3 diagram is along the
1 axis. Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory, the static safety factor is
S ut
Ns Ns 5.3
1
PROBLEM 5-13
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-11 using the cantilevered diving board design in Figure P5-4b. Assume the
board weighs 19 kg and deflects 8.5 cm statically when the person stands on it.
2000
1 87.1 MPa P
2 0 MPa
M1
3 0 MPa R1
700
FIGURE 5-13
1. The diving board will be in tension at the top of the board and compression along the bottom. At the top, at the
built-in support, the nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line on the 1-3 diagram is along the 1
axis. Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory, the static safety factor is
S ut
Ns Ns 1.5
1
PROBLEM 5-14
Statement: Figure P4-5 shows a child's toy called a pogo stick. The child stands on the pads, applying half he
weight on each side. She jumps off the ground, holding the pads up against her feet, and bounces
along with the spring cushioning the impact and storing energy to help each rebound. Design the
aluminum cantilever beam sections on which she stands to survive jumping 2 in off the ground
with a safety factor of 2. Use 1100 series aluminum. Define and size the beam shape.
Given: Cold rolled 1100 aluminum:

Safety factor Ns 2
Assumptions: The beam will have a rectangular

cross-section with the load applied at a
distance of 5 in from the central support.
L 5 in

1. From Problem 3-14, the total dynamic force on both
foot supports is
Fi /2 Fi /2
Fi 224 lbf
Therefore, the load on each support is
Fi
P P 112 lbf
2
2. To give adequate support to the childs foot, let the
width of the support beam be
w 1.5 in
3. From Figure B-1(a) in Appendix B, the maximum P
FIGURE 5-14
M P L M 560 in lbf
4. We can now calculate the minimum required section modulus, Z = I/c. Using the distortion-energy failure theor
the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress, which will also be the von Mises stress.
Sy
Design equation Ns =
'
M Sy
Bending stress = = ' =
Z Ns
N s M 3
Solving for Z, Z Z 834.3 mm
Sy
3 2
w t t w t
5. For a rectangular cross-section, I= and c= so Z=
12 2 6
6 Z
Solving for t, t t 0.451 in
w
PROBLEM 5-15
Statement: What is the safety factor for the shear pin as defined in Problem 4-15?
Solution:
Any part whose stress equals its strength has a safety factor of 1 by definition.
PROBLEM 5-16
Statement: A track to guide bowling balls is designed with two round rods as shown in Figure P5-6. The rods
are not parallel to one another but have a small angle between them. The balls roll on the rods unt
they fall between them and drop onto another track. The angle between the rods is varied to cause
the ball to drop at different locations. Find the static safety factor for the 1-in dia SAE 1045
normalized steel rods.
(a) Assume rods are simply supported at each end.
(b) Assume rods are fixed at each end.
Given: Yield strength S y 58 ksi a Fball
1. The maximum bending stress will occur at the outer R1 L R2

fibers of the rod at the section where the maximum
bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = a.
The only stress present on the top or bottom surface of FIGURE 5-16A
the rod is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-16(a), taken
bottom surface where the stress is tensile, x is the on a plane through the rod axis and ball center
principal stress 1 . Thus, from Problem 4-16, for a simply
supported rod,
Maximum principal stress 1 748 psi 'a 1
2. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, the safety factor against a static failure is
Sy
Nsa Nsa 78
'a
a Fball
3. For the built-in case, the maximum bending stress
will occur at the outer fibers of the rod at the section
where the maximum bending moment occurs which, in M1
this case, is at x = L. The only stress present on the R1 L R 2 M2
top or bottom surface of the rod is the bending stress
x. Therefore, on the bottom surface where the stress FIGURE 5-16B
Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-16(b), taken on a
is tensile, x is the principal stress 1 . Thus, from
plane through the rod axis and ball center
Problem 4-16, for a simply supported rod,
Maximum principal stress 1 577 psi 'b 1
4. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, the safety factor against a static failure is
Sy
Nsb Nsb 101
'b
PROBLEM 5-17
rectangular cross-sectional dimensions are 0.75 x 0.312 in. Find the safety factor for the tongs if
their S y = 30 ksi.
F
C
Given: Yield strength S y 30 ksi FC
3.5 = cy
O
Solution: See Problem 4-17, Figure 5-17, and FO
Mathcad file P0517.
11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
1. The maximum bending stress in the tong was found
A
in Problem 4-17 at point A. 12.0 = by
Vertical direction i 8.58 ksi 5.0 = bx
All other components are zero FB

B
2. There are no other stress components present so
W/2
1 i 2 0 ksi 3 0 ksi
FIGURE 5-17
and ' 1 ' 8.58 ksi Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-17
Sy
3. The factor of safety is (using the distortion energy theory) N N 3.5
'
PROBLEM 5-18
rectangular cross-sectional dimensions are 0.75 x 0.312 in. Find the safety factor for the tongs if
they are made from Class 20 gray cast iron.
F
Given: Tensile strength S ut 22 ksi C
Compressive strength S uc 83 ksi FC
3.5 = cy
O
Solution: See Problem 4-18, Figure 5-18, and FO
Mathcad file P0518. 11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
1. The maximum bending stress in the tong was found A

12.0 = by
in Problem 4-17 at point A.
5.0 = bx
Vertical direction i 8.58 ksi
FB
All other components are zero
B
2. Therefore, the principal stresses are W/2
1 i 2 0 ksi 3 0 ksi
FIGURE 5-18
3. The load line on the 1-3 diagram is along the 1 axis.
Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory, the static safety
factor is
S ut
N N 2.6
1
PROBLEM 5-19
Statement: Determine the size of the clevis pin, shown in Figure P5-8, needed to withstand an applied force
of 130 000 lb. Also determine the required outside radius of the clevis end to not fail in either tear
out or bearing if the clevis flanges are each 2.5 in thick. Use a safety factor of 3 for all modes of
failure. Assume S y = 89.3 ksi for the pin and S y = 35.5 ksi for the clevis.
Given: Applied force P 130 kip Clevis flange thickness t 2.50 in

Clevis strength S yclevis 35.5 ksi Pin strength S ypin 89.3 ksi
Safety factor Ns 3
Solution: See Figures P5-8 in the text and Mathcad file P0519.
1. Determine the force carried by each of the two flanges of the clevis.
F 0.5 P F 65 kip
This force is transmitted through each end of the clevis pin, which is in double shear.
4 3 F
2. The pin is in direct (pure) shear. Therefore, the von Mises stress is 'pin = 3 pin =
2
d
3. Calculate the minimum required clevis pin diameter using the distortion-energy failure theory.
2
S ypin d S ypin
Ns = =
'pin 4 3 F
4 3 F Ns
Solving for the pin diameter d d 2.194 in
S ypin
Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fraction ( 2 1/4) d 2.250 in
2
Bearing stress area Ab d t Ab 5.625 in
Bearing force Fb F Fb 65 kip
Fb
Bearing stress b b 11.6 ksi
Ab
Tearout length
5. Determine the safety factor against a static bearing failure.
S yclevis
Nbear Nbear 3.1
b
Since this is greater than 3, the pin diameter is acceptable.
2 2 d R
FIGURE 5-19
Shear force Tearout Diagram for Problem 5-19
Ftear F Ftear 65 kip

Ftear Ftear
Shear stress and distortion-energy equation tear = =
Atear 2 2
2 t R ( 0.5 d )
2 2
S yclevis S yclevis 2 t S yclevis R ( 0.5 d )
Ns = = =
'tear 3 tear 3 Ftear
2
3 Ftear Ns 2
Solving for the clevis radius, R R ( 0.5 d ) R 2.211 in
2 t S yclevis
Round this up to the next higher decimal equivalent of a common fraction ( 2 1/4) R 2.250 in
2 2 2
The tearout area for each flange is Atear 2 t R ( 0.5 d ) Atear 9.743 in
7. Design summary:
Pin diameter d 2.250 in Clevis flange radius R 2.25 in
PROBLEM 5-20
Statement: A 100 N-m torque is applied to a 1-m-long, solid, round shaft. Design it to limit its angular
deflection to 2 deg and select a steel alloy to have a yielding safety factor of 2.
Given: Applied torque T 100 N m Shaft length L 1000 mm
Maximum deflection max 2 deg Modulus of rigidity G 79 GPa
Safety factor Ns 2
Assumptions: A ductile steel will be chosen.
1. Using the angular deflection requirement and equation (4.24), determine the required polar moment of inertia an
the minimum diameter.
TL TL 4 4
= J J 3.626 10 mm
J G max G
1
4 4
d 32 J
J = d d 24.653 mm
32
Round this up to d 25 mm
2. Determine the shear stress at the outside diameter of the shaft using equation (4.23b).
T
d

max
2 max 34.47 MPa
J
3. For this case of pure shear, use the distortion-energy theory and equations (5.8) and (5.9) to solve for the
minimum required yield strength.
Sy Sy
Ns = = S y 3 max Ns S y 119.4 MPa
' 3 max
4. Using this value of S y, choose a steel from Table A-9 in Appendix A.
Any of the steels listed in Table A-9 will be adequate. The least expensive is AISI 1010, hot rolled.
PROBLEM 5-21
tighten the wheel nuts, a single-ended wrench in (a), and a double-ended wrench in (b). The
distance between points A and B is 1 ft in both cases and the handle diameter is 0.625 in. What is
the maximum force possible before yielding the handle if the material S y = 45 ksi?
Given: Distance between A and B d AB 1 ft

Wrench diameter d 0.625 in

1. From examination of the FBDs, we see that, in 12" = dAB
both cases, the arms are in bending and the stub F
that holds the socket wrench is in pure torsion.
The maximum bending stress in the arm will occur
near the point where the arm transitions to the
stub. The stress state at this transition is very
complicated, but we can find the nominal bending T
stress there by treating the arm as a cantilever
beam, fixed at the transition point. For both cases F
the torque in the stub is the same. (a) Single-ended Wrench
12" = dAB
Case (a)
F
6"
Ma = Fa d AB
T
3. The tensile stress at this point is found from
F
Moment of inertia
4
d 4 FIGURE 5-21
I I 0.00749 in
64 Free Body Diagrams for Problem 5-21
Ma c
Stress x =
I
1 = x 2 0 psi 3 0 psi
Ma c Fa d AB c
5. Since there is only one nonzero principal stress, the von Mises stress is ' = 1 = x = =
I I
6. Using the distortion-energy theory, solve for the maximum applied force.
Sy I Sy I Sy
Ns = = =1 Fa Fa 89.882 lbf
' Fa d AB c d AB c
Fa d AB c
7. The von Mises stress in the handle at the transition point is ' ' 45 ksi
I
8. Determine the torque in the stub. T Fa d AB T 1079 in lbf
4
Tc
J
1 xy 1 22.5 ksi 2 0 psi 3 1
2 2
and ' 1 1 3 3 ' 39.0 ksi
11. Thus, the maximum von Mises stress for case (a) is on the upper surface of the handle (arm) near the point
where it transitions to the stub, and the maximum force that can be applied to the handle without yielding is
Fa 89.9 lbf
Case (b)
Fb d AB
12. The bending moment at the transition is Mb =
2
Mb c
11. The tensile stress at this point is found from x =
I
1 = x 2 0 psi 3 0 psi
Mb c Fb d AB c
13. Since there is only one nonzero principal stress, the von Mises stress is ' = 1 = x = =
I 2 I
14. Using the distortion-energy theory, solve for the maximum applied force.
Sy 2 I Sy 2 I Sy
Ns = = =1 Fb Fb 179.763 lbf
' Fb d AB c d AB c
Fb d AB c
15. The von Mises stress in the handle at the transition point is ' ' 45 ksi
2 I
16. The torque in the stub is T Fb d AB T 2157 in lbf
Tc
Shear stress xy xy 45 ksi
J
1 xy 1 45.0 ksi 2 0 psi 3 1
2 2
and ' 1 1 3 3 ' 77.9 ksi
16. Since the von Mises stress in the stub due to torsion is greater than the yield strength, the force in the
handle will be limited by the shear stress in the stib and by the bending stress in the handle.
Sy Sy J Sy J Sy
Ns = = = = =1
' 3 xy 3 T c 3 Fb d AB c
J Sy
Fb Fb 103.8 lbf
3 d AB c
17. Thus, the maximum von Mises stress for case (b) is on the stub, and the maximum force that can be
applied to the handles without yielding is
Fb 103.8 lbf
PROBLEM 5-22
Statement: A roller-blade skate is shown in Figure P5-10. The polyurethane wheels are 72 mm dia and
spaced on 104-mm centers. The skate-boot-foot combination weighs 2 kg. The effective "spring
rate" of the person-skate subsystem is 6000 N/m. The axles are 10-mm-dia steel pins in double
shear with S y = 400 MPa. Find the safety factor for the pins when a 100-kg person lands a 0.5-m
jump on one foot.
(a) Assume all 4 wheels land simultaneously.
(b) Assume that one wheel absorbs all the landing force.
Given: Axle pin diameter d 10 mm Yield strength S y 400 MPa
1. From Problem 4-22, we have the stresses for cases (a) and (b): a 5.71 MPa b 22.9 MPa
2. Using the distortion-energy failure theory,
Sy
Case (a) all wheels landing Nsa Nsa 40.4
3 a
Sy
Case (b) one wheel landing Nsb Nsb 10.1
3 b
PROBLEM 5-23a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P5-11a. For the data given in row a from
Table P5-2, find the static safety factor:
(a) If the beam is a ductile material with S y = 300 MPa,
(b) If the beam is a cast-brittle material with S ut = 150 MPa, S uc = 570 MPa.
L
Given: Ductile yield strength S y 300 MPa
b
Brittle ultimate tensile strength
a
S ut 150 MPa F
w
Solution: See Figure 5-23 and Mathcad file P0523a. R1 R2

FIGURE 5-23
1. The maximum bending stress occurs under the concentrated load F at x = b. It was determined in Problem 4-23a
as
x 88.7 MPa
2. Since this is the only stress component present in the given coordinate frame, x is equal to 1 and the other two
principal stresses are zero.
1 x 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
3. For case (a), use the distortion-energy failure theory. With only one nonzero principal stress, the von Mises
stress is the same as 1.
von Mises stress ' 1 ' 88.7 MPa
Sy
Safety factor, case (a) Nsa Nsa 3.4
'
4. For case (b), use the Modified Mohr failure theory. The nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line
on the s1-s3 diagram is along the 1 axis.
S ut
Safety factor, case (b) Nsb Nsb 1.7
1
PROBLEM 5-24a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P5-11b. For the data given in row a from Tabl
P5-2, find the static safety factor:
L
a
Given: Ductile yield strength S y 300 MPa
Brittle ultimate strength F
S ut 150 MPa w
M1
R1
FIGURE 5-24
1. The maximum bending stress occurs at the support where x = 0. It was determined in Problem 4-24a as
x 410 MPa
1 x 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
von Mises stress ' 1 ' 410 MPa
Sy
'
4. For case (b), use the Modified Mohr failure theory. The nonzero principal stress is positive and the load line on
the 1-3 diagram is along the 1 axis.
S ut
1
PROBLEM 5-25a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P5-11c. For the data given in row a from
Table P5-2, find the static safety factor:
L
Given: Ductile yield strength S y 300 MPa b
Brittle ultimate strength a F
S ut 150 MPa w
R1 R2
FIGURE 5-25
1. The maximum bending stress occurs at the right-hand support where x = b. It was determined in Problem 4-25a
as
x 151.6 MPa
2. Since this is the only stress component present in the given coordinate frame, x is equal to 1 and the other
two principal stresses are zero.
1 x 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
'
S ut
1
PROBLEM 5-26a
Statement: A beam is supported and loaded as shown in Figure P5-11d. For the data given in row a from Tabl
P5-2, find the static safety factor:
L
Given: Ductile yield strength S y 300 MPa b
Brittle ultimate strength a F
S ut 150 MPa w
Solution: See Figure 5-26 and Mathcad file P0526a. R1 R2 R3
1. The maximum bending stress occurs under the concen- FIGURE 5-26
trated load F, where x = a. It was determined in Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-26
Problem 4-26a as
x 31.5 MPa
1 x 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
Sy
'
S ut
1
PROBLEM 5-27
Determine suitable values for dimensions a and b in the figure. Make the static factor of safety at
least 1.5. The mandrel is solid and inserts halfway into the paper roll.
(a) The beam is a ductile material with Sy = 300 MPa
(b) The beam is a cast-brittle material with Sut = 150 MPa, S uc = 570 MPa.
3
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 1.50 m Roll density 984 kg m
ID 0.22 m
Lroll 3.23 m Factor of safety Ns 1.5
Ductile yield strength S y 300 MPa Brittle ultimate strength S ut 150 MPa
Assumptions: The paper roll's weight creates a

concentrated load acting at the tip of the y W
mandrel. The mandrel's root in the
stanchion experiences a distributed load w
over the length of engagement (see the a
solution to Problem 3-27 for further x
discussion of this point). The required
diameter a of the mandrel root section
(over the length b) will be sized to use b Lm
the allowable tensile strength in bending. R
The length b will be sized to use the
allowable transverse shear strength. FIGURE 5-27

1. Determine the weight of the roll and the length of the mandrel.
Weight W

4
2 2
Length Lm 0.5 Lroll Lm 1.615 m
2. The maximum internal shear and moment occur at a section where the mandrel root leaves the stanchion. and
are
2 W Lm
Vmax = Mmax W Lm Mmax 87.04 kN m
b
3. Part (a) - The bending stress will be a maximum at the top or bottom of the mandrel at a section where the
mandrel root leaves the stanchion.
Mmax a 4 32 Mmax
a
max = where I= so, max =
2 I 64 3
a
4. At this point the only nonzero stress component is max therefore
1 = max 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

5. All three of the ductile failure theories have the same fail/safe boundary for this condition (slope of load line is
zero)
Sy
Ns = or Ns 1 = S y
1
1
3
32 Ns W Lm
6. Solving for a, a a 164.272 mm
S y
7. Using this value of a and equation (4.15c), solve for the shear stress on the neutral axis at the same section.
4 Vmax 8 W Lm
max = =
3 A a 2
3 b
4
8. At this point, this is the only nonzero stress component therefore, the principal stresses are
1 = max 2 0 MPa 3 = max
9 Using the distortion energy theory, the von Mises stress is
Sy Sy
' = 3 max and Ns = or Ns max =
' 3
8 Ns W Lm
a 2 S y
3
4 3
Rounding to higher even values, let a 166 mm b 94 mm for case (a).
10. Part (b) - The bending stress will be a maximum at the top or bottom of the mandrel at a section where the
mandrel root leaves the stanchion.
Mmax a 4 32 Mmax
a
max = where I= so, max =
2 I 64 3
a
11. At this point the only nonzero stress component is max therefore
1 = max 2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa

12. All three of the brittle failure theories have the same fail/safe boundary for this condition (slope of load line is
zero)
3
S ut S ut 2 I S ut a S ut
Ns = = = =
1 max Mmax a 32 Mmax
1
3
32 Ns Mmax
13. Solving for a, a a 206.97 mm
Sut
14. Using this value of a and equation (4.15c), solve for the shear stress on the neutral axis at the same section.
4 Vmax 8 W Lm
max = =
3 A a 2
3 b
4
15. At this point, this is the only nonzero stress component therefore, the principal stresses are
1 = max 2 0 MPa 3 = max
16. Using the Modified Mohr theory,
a 2
3 b S ut
Ns =
S ut
=
S ut
=
4
1 max 8 W Lm
8 Ns W Lm
a 2
3 Sut
4
Rounding to higher even values, let a 208 mm b 70 mm for case (b).
PROBLEM 5-28
1-ft-wide ramps of steel to have a safety factor of 3 in the worst case of loading as the truck travels
up them. Minimize the weight of the ramps by using a sensible cross-sectional geometry. Choose
an appropriate steel or aluminum alloy.

Platform height h 4 ft Truck weight W 5000 lbf
L
b
a CG a
y
CG b
R1

Fa Fb x
Wa
Wb
R2
FIGURE 5-28A
1. From Problem 3-28 the maximum bending moment in the ramp occurs at the rear wheel of the truck and is
Mmax 8324 ft lbf Mmax 99888 in lbf
2. The bending stress is the only stress component present and is, therefore, also the only nonzero principal stress
and is also the von Mises stress. The governing design equations then are
Mmax Sy
' = and Ns =
Z '
3. The approach will be to 1) choose a suitable factor of safety, 2) choose a suitable material and determine its yiel
strength, 3) from the equations above determine the required value of the section modulus, 4) choose an
appropriate cross-section for the ramp, and 5) determine the dimensions of the cross-section.
4. The following design choices have been made for this problem:
Design factor of safety Nsd 3

Material 7075 Aluminum, heat treated
5. Solve the design equations for the minimum section modulus, Z.
Nsd Mmax 3
Z Z 4.105 in
Sy
This is the minimum allowable value of the section modulus.
6. Assume a channel section such as that shown in Figure 5-28B. To keep it simple, let the thickness of the
flanges and web be the same. Choose 1/2-in thick plate, which is readily available. Then, t 0.50 in
w t 2
1
2
t h t
2
A (h) 2

Flange
3 2
w t
w t cg( h )
t Web
Iweb( h )
12 2
3 2 t
t ( h t) h t
Ifl ( h ) h t cg( h )
12 2
I ( h ) Iweb( h ) 2 Ifl ( h )
h
11. The maximum stress will occur in the flange at the top
and is compressive. The distance from the centroid up to
the top of the flange is
c( h ) h cg( h ) w
12. Using the known section modulus, solve FIGURE 5-28B

for the unknown flange height, h. Guess h 1 in Channel Section for Problem 5-28
Given
I (h)
Z= h Find ( h ) h 3.843 in Round this up to h 4.00 in
c( h )
Width w 12.00 in Flange height h 4.00 in Shape channel

Thickness t 0.5 in Material 7075 aluminum
PROBLEM 5-29
Statement: A differential element is subected to the stresses given below and a ductile material has the
strengths given below. Calculate the safety factor and draw 1-3 diagrams of each theory
showing the stress state using:
(a) Maximum shear-stress theory, and
(b) Distortion-energy theory.
Given: Principal stresses 1 10 ksi 2 0 ksi 3 20 ksi

Material properties S ut 50 ksi S y 40 ksi S uc 50 ksi

1. Calculate the slope of load line. (The load line is the line from the origin through the stress point.)
3
m m 2
1
2. The safety factor equation for the distortion-enrgy theory is the same regardless of which quadrant the load line
falls in. However, the equation for the maximum shear-stress factor of safety is different for each of the three
quadrants that the load line (1st, 3rd, or 4th) can fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant. The
factors of safety are:
Sy
(a) Maximum shear-stress theory Na Na 1.3
1 3
(b) Distortion energy theory 3

40
(a) Maximum shear
stress boundary
2 2
' 1 1 3 3 30
(b) Distortion energy
boundary
' 26.5 ksi 20
MINIMUM NONZERO PRINCIPAL STRESS, KSI
10
Sy
Nb Nb 1.5
' 0 1
sy
3. Plot the 1-3 diagram showing the safe-fail -10
boundaries, the stress state point (10 ksi, -20 (10,-20)

ksi) and the load line. Note that if 1 > 3 , -20
then only that area on the graph that is to the -30 Stress states at
right of and below the diagonal line can which failure
will occur
contain valid stress points. The factor of -40 -sy
Load Line
safety is the distance along the load line from
the origin to the intersection of the load line -50
with the failure boundary, divided by the
distance from the origin to the stress point. -60
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Since the distance from the origin to the
MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL STRESS, KSI
distortion-energy boundary is greater than the
distance to the maximum shear-stress
baoundary, its factor of safety is greater. FIGURE 5-29
1 - 3 Diagram for Problem 5-29
PROBLEM 5-30
Statement: A differential element is subected to the stresses and strengths given below. Calculate the
safety factor and draw 1-3 diagrams of each theory showing the stress state using:
(a) Coulomb-Mohr theory, and
(b) Modified Mohr theory.
Given: Principal stresses 1 10 ksi 2 0 ksi 3 20 ksi


3
m m 2
1
2. The safety factor equation for both theories is different for each quadrant the load line falls in. The equation for
the modified Mohr factor of safety is different for each of the two regions in the 4th quadrant that the load line can
fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant, below the -1 slope line.. The factors of safety are:
S uc S ut
(a)Coulomb-Mohr theory Na Na 2.4
S uc 1 S ut 3
3
(b) Modified Mohr theory 50
40
S uc
Nb 30
S uc S ut
S 1 3
20
(a) Coulomb-Mohr

boundary
ut 10
0 1
Nb 3.2 -10
(10,-20)
-20
3. Plot the 1-3 diagram showing the safe-fail -30
-40
boundaries, the stress state point (10 ksi, -20
ksi) and the load line. Note that if 1 > 3 , -50 Stress states at
which failure
-S
ut
will occur
then only that area on the graph that is to the -60
right of and below the diagonal line can -70 (b) Modified Mohr
boundary
contain valid stress points. The factor of -80
Load Line
safety is the distance along the load line from
-90 -S
the origin to the intersection of the load line uc
with the failure boundary, divided by the -100
-100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
distance from the origin to the stress point.
Since the distance from the origin to the
modified Mohr boundary is greater than the
distance to the Coulomb-Mohr boundary, its FIGURE 5-30
factor of safety is greater. 1 - 3 Diagram for Problem 5-30
PROBLEM 5-31
Statement: Design a jack-stand in a tripod configuration that will support 2 tons of load with a safety factor of
3. Use SAE 1020 steel and minimize its weight.
Solution: This open-ended design problem has many valid solutions that are left to the student.
PROBLEM 5-32
Statement: A part has the combined stress state and strengths given below. Choose an appropriate failure
theory based on the given data, find the effective stress and factor of safety against static failure.
Given: Stresses: x 10 ksi y 5 ksi xy 4.5 ksi
Strengths: S y 18 ksi S ut 20 ksi S uc 80 ksi

1. Because S uc is greater than S ut, this is an uneven material, which is characteristic of a brittle material. Therefore,
use the modified Mohr theory.
2. Find the maximum shear stress and principal stresses that result from this combination of applied stresses using
equations 4.6.
2
x y 2
Maximum shear stress max xy max 5.148 ksi
2
x y
Principal stresses 1 max 1 12.648 ksi
2
x y
2 max 2 2.352 ksi
2
3 0 psi
3. Find the Dowling factors C1, C2, C3 using equations 5.12b:
S uc 2 S ut
1 2
1
C1 1 2 C1 8.898 ksi
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2 3
1
C2 2 3 C2 1.764 ksi
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3 1
1
C3 3 1 C3 9.486 ksi
2 S uc
4. Then find the largest of the six stresses C1, C2, C3 , 1, 2, 3:
1
C
C2
C
eff max
3
eff 12.6 ksi
1

2
3
which is the modified-Mohr effective stress.

S ut
5. The safety factor can now be found using equation 5.12d. N N 1.6
eff
PROBLEM 5-33a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P5-14 and the data in row a of Table P5-3, determine the von
Mises stresses at points A and B.
1. From Problem 4-33a the principal stresses at point A are
1 21.46 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 13.08 MPa
2. Use equation (5.7c) to find the von Mises stress at point A.
2 2
'A 1 1 3 3 'A 30.2 MPa
3. From Problem 4-33a the principal stresses at point B are
1 16.13 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 16.13 MPa
4. Use equation (5.7c) to find the von Mises stress at point B.
2 2
'B 1 1 3 3 'B 27.9 MPa
F
y
B x
T T
L
R
FIGURE 5-33
PROBLEM 5-34a
Statement: Calculate the safety factor for the bracket in Problem 5-33 using the distortion energy, the
maximum shear stress, and the maximum normal-stress theories. Comment on their
appropriateness. Assume a ductile material strength as given below.

1A 21.46 MPa 2A 0 MPa 3A 13.08 MPa
2. Using the two nonzero stresses, the slope of the load line on a 1-3 graph is
3A
m m 0.61
1A
This intersects the failure boundaries in the fourth quadrant.
3. Calculate the von Mises effective stress at point A using equation (5.7c).
2 2
'A 1A 1A 3A 3A 'A 30.205 MPa
4. Determine the factor of safety at point A
Sy
Distortion energy NADE NADE 13.2
'A
Sy
Maximum shear stress NAMS NAMS 11.6
1A 3A
Sy
Maximum normal stress NANS NANS 18.6
1A
5. From Problem 4-33a, the principal stresses at Point B are
1B 16.13 MPa 2B 0 MPa 3B 16.13 MPa
3B
m m 1
1B
This intersects the failure boundaries in the fourth quadrant.
7. Calculate the von Mises effective stress at point A using equation (5.7c).
2 2
'B 1B 1B 3B 3B 'B 27.938 MPa
8. Determine the factor of safety at point B

Sy
Distortion energy NBDE NBDE 14.3
'B
Sy
Maximum shear stress NBMS NBMS 12.4
1B 3B
Sy
Maximum normal stress NBNS NBNS 24.8
1B
9. Whichever theory is used, the critical point (lowest factor of safety) is point A. The distortion energy theory
should be used because experimental data follows its failure boundary more nearly than the maximum shear
stress in all quadrants. Using the maximum normal stress theory would give an overestimate of the actual safety
factor.
PROBLEM 5-35a
Statement: Calculate the safety factor for the bracket in Problem 5-33 using the Coulomb-Mohr and the
modified Mohr effective stress theories. Comment on their appropriateness. Assume a brittle
material strength as given below.
Given: Tensile strength S ut 350 MPa Compressive strength S uc 1000 MPa

1A 21.46 MPa 2A 0 MPa 3A 13.08 MPa
3A
m m 0.61
1A
This intersects the failure boundaries in the fourth quadrant. For the Coulomb-Mohr diagram (see Figure 5-9
in the text) there is a single, straight line in this quadrant. For the modified-Mohr theory, the load line will
intersect the boundary at a point similar to B' in Figure 5-11 in the text.
3. Determine the factor of safety at point A
S ut S uc
Coulomb-Mohr NACM NACM 13.4
S uc 1A S ut 3A
S ut
Modified-Mohr NAMM NAMM 16.3
1A
4. From Problem 4-33a, the principal stresses at Point B are
1B 16.13 MPa 2B 0 MPa 3B 16.13 MPa
3B
m m 1
1B
This intersects the failure boundaries in the fourth quadrant. For the Coulomb-Mohr diagram (see Figure 5-9
in the text) there is a single, straight line in this quadrant. For the modified-Mohr theory, the load line will
intersect the boundary at the point (S ut -S ut) Figure 5-11 in the text.
6. Determine the factor of safety at point B
S ut S uc
Coulomb-Mohr NBCM NBCM 16.1
S uc 1B S ut 3B
S ut
Modified-Mohr NBMM NBMM 21.7
1B
7. Whichever theory is used, the critical point (lowest factor of safety) is point A. The modified-Mohr theory
should be used because experimental data follows its failure boundary more nearly than the Coulomb-Mohr
when the slope of the load line is in the fourth quadrant. Using the Coulomb-Mohr would give an underestimat
of the actual safety factor.
8. Calculating factor of safety using Modified Mohr and equations (5.12c, d, and e)
Point A
S uc 2 S ut
1A 2A
1
C1 1A 2A C1 13.9 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2A 3A
1
C2 2A 3A C2 4.6 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3A 1A
1
C3 3A 1A C3 18.5 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
1 is maximum so N N 16.3
1A
Point B
S uc 2 S ut
1B 2B
1
C1 1B 2B C1 10.5 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2B 3B
1
C2 2B 3B C2 5.6 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3B 1B
1
C3 3B 1B C3 16.1 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
1 is maximum so N N 21.7
1B
PROBLEM 5-36a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P5-14 and the data in row a of Table P5-3, redo Problem 5-33
considering the stress concentration at points A and B. Assume a stress concentration factor of
2.5 in both bending and torsion.
Given: Factors of safety:
Bending Kf 2.5 Torsion Kfs 2.5

1 53.6 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 32.7 MPa
2. Use equation (5.7c) to find the von Mises stress at point A.
2 2
'A 1 1 3 3 'A 75.5 MPa
3. From Problem 4-36a the principal stresses at point B are

1 41.3 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 41.3 MPa
4. Use equation (5.7c) to find the von Mises stress at point B.

2 2
'B 1 1 3 3 'B 71.5 MPa
F
y
B x
T T
L
R
FIGURE 5-36
PROBLEM 5-37
Statement: A semicircular, curved beam as shown in Figure 5-37 has the dimensions given below. For a load
pair F = 14 kN applied along the diameter, find the safety factor at the inner and outer fibers:
(a) If the beam is a ductile material with Sy = 700 MPa,
(b) If the beam is a cast-brittle material with Sut = 420 MPa, Suc = 1200 MPa.
w
Given: (a) Yield strength
S y 700 MPa
(b) Tensile strength S ut 420 MPa
Compressive strength S uc 1200 MPa
1. From Problem 4-37, the stresses at the inside radius and od id

outside radius are: F
Inside i 409.9 MPa

Outside o 273.2 MPa
(a) Entire Beam
These are the only stress components present on their

respective surfaces so they are also principal stresses. Thus,
1i 409.9 MPa 2i 0 MPa 3i 0 MPa F

1o 0 MPa 2o 0 MPa 3o 273.2 MPa M
F
Part (a) rc
2. Use the distortion energy theory for the ductile material.
3. Since 1 is the only nonzero principal stress, it is also the
von Mises effective stress, FIGURE 5-37
'i 1i 'i 409.9 MPa
'o 3o 'o 273.2 MPa
4. The factor of safety against a static failure for this ductile material is
Sy
Inside surface Nai Nai 1.7
'i
Sy
Outside surface Nao Nao 2.6
'o
Part (b)
5. Use the modified-Mohr theory for the brittle material.
6. The load line on the 1-3 graph for the inside surface is along the positive 1 axis. In this case, the factor of
safety equation simplifies to
S ut
Inside surface Nbi Nbi 1.0
1i
7. The load line on the 1-3 graph for the outside surface is along the negative 3 axis. In this case, the factor of
safety equation simplifies to
S uc
Outside surface Nbo Nbo 4.4
3o
PROBLEM 5-38
Statement: Assume that the curved beam of Problem 5-37 has a crack on its inside surface of half-width a = 2
mm and a fracture toughness of 50 MPa-m0.5. What is its safety factor against sudden fracture?
Given: Outside diameter od 150 mm Inside diameter id 100 mm
Width of section t 25 mm Load F 14 kN
Half crack length a 2 mm Fracture toughness Kc 50 MPa m
1. From Problem 4-37, the nominal stress at the inside radius is:
Nominal inside stress i 409.9 MPa
2. Calculate the half-width of the beam. b 0.5 t b 12.5 mm

3. Calculate the geometry and stress intensity factors.
a
sec 1.016
2 b
K i a K 33.01 MPa m
Kc
4. Determine the factor of safety against sudden fracture failure NFM NFM 1.5
K
F
od id
F
(a) Entire Beam
M
F
rc

FIGURE 5-38
PROBLEM 5-39
Statement: Consider the failed 260-in dia by 0.73-in wall rocket case of Figure 5-14. The steel had S y = 240 k
and a fracture toughness Kc = 79.6 ksi-in 0.5. It was designed for an internal pressure of 960 psi but
failed at 542 psi. Failure was attributed to a small crack that precipitated a sudden, brittle,
fracture-mechanics failure. Find the nominal stress in the wall and the yielding safety factor at the
failure conditions and estimate the size of the crack that caused it to explode. Assume b = 1.0.
Given: Case diameter d 260 in Fracture toughness Kc 79.6 ksi in

Wall thickness t 0.73 in Design pressure p d 960 psi
Yield strength S y 240 ksi Failure pressure p f 542 psi

1. Find the nominal stress in the wall. The ratio of the wall thickness to the radius of the case is such that we can
use thin-wall theory. Thus
Case radius r 0.5 d r 130 in
pd r
Tangential stress t t 171.0 ksi
t
pd r
Axial stress a a 85.5 ksi
2 t
Radial stress r 0 psi
2. Find the yielding safety factor at the failure conditions. Since, for these directions, there are no shear stresses
present, these are the principal stresses. The von Mises stress is
2 2
Von Mises stress ' t t a a ' 148.1 ksi
Factor of safety Sy
against yielding Ns Ns 1.6
'
3. Estimate the size of the crack that caused it to explode.
pf r
Tangential stress t t 96.5 ksi
t
pf r
Axial stress a a 48.3 ksi
2 t
(a) Assume that the crack was longitudinal (growing in the axial direction)
Nominal stress nom t nom 96.5 ksi
Stress intensity
factor K = nom a
Setting the stress intensity factor equal to the fracture toughness of the material and solving for the crack length
Kc2
Half-length a a 0.216 in
2
nom
Crack length 2 a 0.433 in
(b) Assume that the crack was tangential (growing in the tangential direction)
Nominal stress nom a nom 48.3 ksi
Stress intensity
factor K = nom a
Setting the stress intensity factor equal to the fracture toughness of the material and solving for the crack length
Kc2
Half-length a a 0.866 in
2
nom
Crack length 2 a 1.732 in
PROBLEM 5-40
Statement: Redesign the roll support of Problem 5-8 to be like that shown in Figure P5-16. The stub mandrels
insert to 10% of the roll length at each end. Design dimension a for a factor of safety of 2. See
Problem 5-8 for additional data.
(a) The beam is a ductile material with S y = 300 MPa
(b) The beam is a cast-brittle material with S ut = 150 MPa, S uc = 570 MPa.
Given: Paper roll dimensions: OD 1.50 m Material properties:

ID 0.22 m Yield strength S y 300 MPa
Lroll 3.23 m Tensile strength S ut 150 MPa
Comp strength S uc 570 MPa
3
Roll density 984 kg m Factor of safety Ns 2
2. The base of the mandrel (the portion that inserts into the stanchion) is solid and fits tightly into
the stanchion. Therefore, the mandrel can be treated as a cantilever beam.
3. The length of ther mandrel base is b 100 mm.

1. For the assumptions made, it is not necessary to
F
determine the stress distribution on the mandrel base
inside the stanchion. From Figure 5-40, we see that we y
can determine the diameter a by applying the beam
stress equation at the section where the mandrel
transitions from the base to the full diameter. x
a
2. Determine the weight of the roll, the load on each
M1 Lm

b
2 2
W OD ID Lroll g W 53.9 kN
4 R
F 0.5 W F 26.95 kN FIGURE 5-40

Lm 0.1 Lroll Lm 323 mm
3. From Figure 5-40, the maximum internal bending moment occurs at x = 0 and is
Mmax F Lm Mmax 8.704 kN m
4. The bending stress will be a maximum at the top or bottom of the mandrel at a section through x = 0.
Mmax a 4
a
max = where I=
2 I 64
There are no other stress components at this point so max = 1 and
2 0 MPa 3 0 MPa
5. For the ductile material of part (a), the maximum principal stress is also the von Mises stress so
32 Mmax Sy
max = ' = =
3 Ns
a
1
3
32 Ns F Lm
Solving for a, a a 83.922 mm
S y
Round this to a 84 mm for the ductile material of part (a)
5. For the brittle material of part (b), the load line on the 1-3 diagram is along the positive 1 axis where both
brittle material failure theories have the same boundary, which is 1 = S ut. Thus, for the brittle case of part (b),
32 Mmax S ut
max = 1 = =
3 Ns
a
1
3
32 Ns F Lm
Solving for a, a a 105.735 mm
S ut
Round this to a 106 mm for the brittle material of part (b)
PROBLEM 5-41
Statement: A 10-mm ID steel tube carries liquid at 7 MPa. The steel has S y = 400 MPa Determine the safety
factor for the wall if its thickness is: a) 1 mm, b) 5 mm.

Assumption: The tubing is long therefore the axial stress is zero.

1. From Problem 4-41, this is a thick wall cylinder and the principal stresses are:
1a 38.82 MPa 2a 0 MPa 3a 7.00 MPa
2. Calculate the von Mises effective stress using equation (5.7c).
2 2
'a 1a 1a 3a 3a 'a 42.752 MPa
3. Using the distortion energy theory, the factor of safety is
Sy
Na Na 9.4
'a
1b 11.67 MPa 2b 0 MPa 3b 7.00 MPa
5. Calculate the von Mises effective stress using equation (5.7c).
2 2
'b 1b 1b 3a 3b 'b 16.336 MPa
6. Using the distortion energy theory, the factor of safety is
Sy
Nb Nb 24.5
'b
PROBLEM 5-42
temperature. The steel has S y = 400 MPa. Determine the safety factor if the tank diameter is 0.5 m
with 1 mm wall thickness, and its length is 1 m.

1. From Problem 4-42, the maximum principal stresses in the wall are
1 259 MPa 2 129 MPa 3 0 MPa
2 2
2. The von Mises stress is ' 1 1 2 2 ' 224.301 MPa
3. Using the distortion-energy theory, the factor of safety against a static failure is
Sy
Ns Ns 1.8
'
PROBLEM 5-43
Statement: The paper rolls in Figure P5-17 are 0.9-m OD by 0.22-m ID by 3.23-m long and have a density of
984 kg/m3. The rolls are transfered from the machine conveyor (not shown) to the forklift truck
by the V-linkage of the off-load station, which is rotated through 90 deg by an air cylinder. The
paper then rolls onto the waiting forks of the truck. The forks are 38-mm thick by 100-mm wide
by 1.2-m long and are tipped at a 3-deg angle from the horizontal and have Sy = 600MPa. Find
the safety factor for the two forks on the truck when the paper rolls onto it under two different
conditions (state all assumptions):
F
L fork
t
Assumptions: 1. The greatest bending moment will occur

when the paper roll is at the tip of the fork M1
for case (a) and when it is midway between R1
supports for case (b).
Case (a), Cantilever Beam
2. Each fork carries 1/2 the weight of a
paper roll.
3. For case (a), each fork acts as a cantilever F
beam (see Appendix B-1(a)). 0.5 L fork
4. For case (b), each fork acts as a beam t
that is built-in at one end and
simply-supported at the other.
L fork
Solution: See Figure 5-43 and Mathcad file P0543. M2
R1 R2
1. From Problem 4-43, the maximum stresses in the Case (b), Fixed-Simply Supported Beam
forks are:
FIGURE 5-43
Case (a) a 464.8 MPa Free Body Diagrams used in Problem 5-43
at the base of the fork.
Case (b) b 87.2 MPa also at the base of the fork.
Since there are no other stress components present, these are also the maximum principal stresses and the
von Mises stresses. Thus, 'a a and 'b b.
Case (a)
Sy
2. The factor of safety against a static failure is Nsa Nsa 1.3
'a
Case (b)
Sy
3. The factor of safety against a static failure is Nsb Nsb 6.9
'b
PROBLEM 5-44
Statement: Determine a suitable thickness for the V-links of the off-loading station of Figure P5-17 to limit
their deflections at the tips to 10-mm in any position during their rotation. Two V-links support
the roll, at the 1/4 and 3/4 points along the roll's length, and each of the V arms is 10-cm wide by
1-m long. What is their safety factor against yielding when designed to limit deflection as
above?

3
completes it, i.e., when the angle is either zero or 90 deg., but after the tip is no longer supported b
the base unit.
2. At that time the roll is in contact with both arms ("seated" in the V) and will remain in that state
throughout the motion. When the roll is in any other position on an arm the tip will be supported.
1. Determine the weight of the roll and the load on each 450
V-arm.
W

4
2 2
F 0.5 W F 9.32 kN
2. From Appendix B, Figure B-1, the tip deflection of a

cantilever beam with a concentrated load located at a
distance a from the support is
2
F a
ymax = ( a 3 L) 1000 = L
6 E I
370 = a
where L is the beam length and I is the F
3
w a t a
I= M
12 F
3. Setting ymax = tip and a 370 mm FIGURE 5-44

substituting for I and solving for ta
1
3
2 F a2 3 La a
ta ta 31.889 mm
E tip wa

4. The maximum bending stress in the arm will be at its base where it joins the 160-mm-dia pipe. The bending
moment, moment of inertia, and distance to the outside fiber at that point are:
Bending moment M a F M 3449 N m

3
wa ta 5 4
12
Distance to outer fiber c 0.5 t a c 16 mm
5. The bending stress, which is also the von Mises stress, is

M c
' ' 202.1 MPa
I
6. Using the distortion-energy theory, the factor of safety against a static failure is
Sy
Ns Ns 2.0
'
PROBLEM 5-45
Statement: Determine the safety factor based on critical load on the air cylinder rod in Figure P5-17 if the
crank arm that rotates it is 0.3 m long and the rod has a maximum extension of 0.5 m. The
25-mm-dia rod is solid steel with a yield strength of 400 MPa. State all assumptions.
Given: Rod length L 500 mm Young's modulus E 207 GPa

Rod diameter d 25 mm Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Assumptions: 1. The rod is a fixed-pinned column.
2. Use a conservative value of 1 for the end factor (see Table 4-7 in text).
Solution: See Problems 4-45, 4-47, and Mathcad file P0545.
1. From Problem 4-45, the critical load on the air cylinder rod is Pcr 134.8 kN
2. From Problem 4-47, the maximum load on the air cylinder rod is F 46.47 kN
Pcr
3. The factor of safety against a buckling failure is Nbuck Nbuck 2.9
F
PROBLEM 5-46
Statement: The V-links of Figure P5-17 are rotated by the crank arm through a shaft that is 60 mm dia by
3.23 m long. Determine the maximum torque applied to this shaft during motion of the V-linkage
and find the static safety factor against yielding for the shaft if its S y = 400 MPa. See Problem
5-43 for more information.
Assumptions: The greatest torque will occur

when the link is horizontal and the
paper roll is located as shown in
Figure P5-17 or Figure 5-46.
Solution: See Figure 5-46 and Mathcad file

P0546.
1. From Problem 4-46, the maximum torsional stress
in the shaft is W
max 197.88 MPa

T
2. Using the distortion-energy theory, the factor of

safety against static yielding is Ry
60-mm-dia shaft
450.0
Sy
Ns Ns 1.2
3 max FIGURE 5-46
PROBLEM 5-47
Determine the safety factor for these pins if they are 30-mm dia and in single shear. S y = 400 MPa.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 0.90 m Pin diameter d 30 mm

ID 0.22 m Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Lroll 3.23 m
3
2. The cylinder and rod make an angle of 8 deg to the horizontal at the start of transfer.
3. The crank arm is 300 mm long and is 45 deg from vertical at the start of transfer.
4. The cylinder rod is fully retracted at the start of the transfer. At the end of the transfer it will
have extended 500 mm from its initial position.

forks.
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g
W 18.64 kN
2. From the assumptions and
Figure 4-47, the x and y
distances from the origin to
point A are,

W
Ray 300 sin( 45 deg) mm
Rx x
Rax 212.132 mm
Ry 212.1
A
Ray 212.132 mm
F 8
212.1
450.0
3. From Figure 4-47, the x
distance from the origin to
point where W is applied is, FIGURE 4-47
OD
Rwx Rwx 450 mm
2
4. Sum moments about the pivot point and solve for the compressive force in the cylinder rod.
W Rwx F Rax sin( 8 deg) F Ray cos( 8 deg) = 0
W Rwx
F F 46.469 kN
This is the shear force in the pins

5. Determine the cross-sectional area of the pins and the direct shear stress.
2
d 2
Shear area A A 706.858 mm
4
F
Shear stress 65.7 MPa
A
6. Using the distortion-energy theory, the factor of safety against a static yielding failure is
Sy
Ns Ns 3.5
3
PROBLEM 5-48
Statement: Figure P5-18 shows an exerciser for a 100-kg wheelchair racer. The wheel chair has 65 cm dia
drive wheels separated by a 70-cm track width. Two free-turning rollers on bearings support the
rear wheels. The lateral movement of the chair is limited by the flanges. Design the 1-m-long
rollers as hollow tubes of aluminum (select alloy) to minimize the height of the platform and also
limit the roller deflections to 1 mm in the worst case. Specify suitable sized steel axles to support
the tubes on bearings. Calculate all significant stresses.

Wheel diameter d w 650 mm Modulus elasticity:

sufficiently close to the rear wheel that all of
the weight is taken by the two rear wheels.
2. The small camber angle of the rear wheels W/2
does not significantly affect the magnitude
of the forces on the rollers.
3. Both the aluminum roller and the steel axle
are simply supported. The steel axles that
support the aluminum tube are fixed in the
mounting block and do not rotate. The
aluminum tube is attached to them by two
bearings (one on each end of the tubes, one
for each axle). The bearings' inner race is
fixed, and the outer race rotates with the
F F
aluminum tube. Each steel axle is considered
to be loaded as a simply supported beam.
Their diameter must be less than the inner
diameter of the tubes to fit the roller
bearings between them.
FIGURE 5-48A
Free Body Diagram of One Wheel
used in Problem 5-48
1. Calculate the weight of the chair with rider.

Weight of chair W M g W 980.7 N
2. Calculate the forces exerted by the wheels on the rollers (see Figure 5-48A). From the FBD of a wheel, summing
vertical forces
W
2 F cos( ) =0
2
W
4 cos( )
3. The worst condition (highest moment at site of a stress concentration) will occur when the chair is all the way to
the left or right. Looking at the plane through the roller that includes the forces exerted by the wheels (the FBD is
shown in Figure 5-48B) the reactions R1 and R2 come from the bearings, which are inside the hollow roller and are,
themselves, supported by the steel axle.
700
M1 R2 Lr F ( a T ) F a = 0 F F
Fy R1 2 F R2 = 0
F (2 a T )
R2 R2 190.5 N 15 R2
Lr
R1 1000
R1 2 F R2 R1 331.3 N
FIGURE 5-48B
5. The maximum bending moment will be Free Body Diagram of One Tube used in Problem 5-48
at the right-hand load and will be
Lr T
Mc F Mc 39.1 N m
2
Because of symmetry,
65 1000
Ra1 R1 Ra1 331.3 N
R1 R2
Ra2 R2 Ra2 190.5 N
7. The maximum bending moment

R a1 R a2
occurs at R1 and is for b 65 mm
1130
Mamax Ra1 b
FIGURE 5-48C
Mamax 21.5 N m
8. Determine a suitable axle diameter. Let the factor of safety against yielding in the axle be Nsa 3
9. Tentatively choose a low-carbon steel for the axle, say AISI 1020, cold rolled with S y 393 MPa
10. At the top of the axle under the load R1 there is only a bending stress, which is also the von Mises stress. Set th
stress equal to the yield strength divided by the factor of safety.
32 Mamax Sy
' = =
3 Nsa
d a
1
3
32 Nsa Mamax
S y
11. Suppose that bearing 6302 from Chapter 10, Figure 10-23, page 684 is used. It has a bore of 15 mm and an
OD of 42 mm. Thus, the inside diameter of the roller away from the bearings where the moment is a maximum
will be d i 40 mm. This will provide a 1-mm shoulder for axial location of the bearings.
12. The maximum deflection of the roller will 150 700

occur when the chair is in the center of the F F
roller. For this case the reactions are both equal
to the loads, F (see Figure 4-48D). The
maximum deflection is at the center of the roller.
F
15
F
13. Write the load function and then 1000
integrate four times to get the deflection
function. FIGURE 5-48D
Free Body Diagram of Roller with Chair in the Center.
q(x) = F<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 - F<x - b>-1 + F<x - L>-1
y(x) = F[<x>3 - <x - a>3 - <x - b>3 + <x - L>3 + C3x]/(6EI)
( L a ) a L
1 3 3 3
where C3 =
L
14. Write the deflection function at x = L/2 for a 150 mm
L 3 L 1 ( L a) 3 a3 L3
3

F
ymax = 2
a
6 Ea I 2 2
15. Set this equation equal to the allowed deflection and solve for the required moment of inertia, I.
Lr 3 Lr 3
F
a Lr a a Lr
1 3 3 3 4 4
I I 6.618 10 mm
6 Ea 2 2 2
16. Knowing the inside diameter of the tube, solve for the outside diameter.
1
4
4
d o d i
4 64 I d 4
I= d o i d o 44.463 mm
64
Round this up to d o 46 mm
DESIGN SUMMARY
Axles Rollers
Length 1040 mm
Spacing c d w d o sin( )
c 238 mm
PROBLEM 5-49 _____

Statement: A part made of ductile steel with Sy = 40 ksi is subjected to a three-dimensional stress state of 1
= -80 ksi, 2 = -80 ksi, 3 = -80 ksi. What is the maximum shear stress? Will the part fail?
1. This is a case of hydrostatic stress. As explained in Section 5.1, the maximum shear stress is zero. Parts loaded
hydrostatically can withstand stresses well in excess of their yield strength. One example of this is that parts on
the ocean floor such as those retrieved from the Titanic are intact and undistorted even though they are
surrounded by water at great pressure.
PROBLEM 5-50 _____

Statement: A component in the shape of a large sheet is to be fabricated from 7075-T651 aluminum, which
has a fracture toughness Kc = 24.2 MPa-m0.5 and a tensile yield strength of 495 MPa. Determine
the largest edge crack that could be tolerated in the sheet if the nominal stress does not exceed
one half the yield strength.
0.5
Given: Fracture toughness Kc 24.2 MPa m
Solution: Mathcad file P0550.
1. Calculate the nominal stress based on the yield strength and the stress level given in the problem statement.
Sy
nom nom 247.5 MPa
2
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a plate with an edge crack.
1.12
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the critical crack length for this material under the given stress condition.
2
1 Kc
a a 2.4 mm
nom
PROBLEM 5-51 _____
Statement: A component in the shape of a large sheet is to be fabricated from 4340 steel, which has a fracture
toughness Kc = 98.9 MPa-m0.5 and a tensile yield strength of 860 MPa. The sheets are inspected
for crack flaws after fabrication, but the inspection device cannot detect flaws smaller than 5 mm.
The part is too heavy as designed. An engineer has suggested that the thickness be reduced and
the material be heat-treated to increase its tensile strength to 1515 MPa, which would result in
decreasing the fracture toughness to 60.4 MPa-m0.5. Assuming that the stress level does not
exceed one half the yield strength, is the suggestion feasible? If not, why not.
0.5 0.5
Given: Fracture toughness Kc1 98.9 MPa m Kc2 60.4 MPa m
Yield strength S y1 860 MPa S y2 1515 MPa
1. Calculate the nominal stress for the two material conditions based on the yield strength and the stress level
given in the problem statement.
S y1
nom1 nom1 430 MPa
2
S y2
nom2 nom2 757.5 MPa
2
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a large plate.
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the critical crack length for each material condition under the given stress
condition.
2
1 Kc1
a 1 a 1 16.8 mm 2 a 1 33.7 mm
nom1
2
Kc2
1
a 2 a 2 2.0 mm 2 a 2 4.0 mm
nom2
4. The suggestion to increase the strength of the material so that its thickness can be decreased to save weight is
not feasible because the critical crack size of the material in the second condition is less than that which can be
detected by the inspection equipment.
PROBLEM 5-52 _____
Statement: A large plate is subjected to a nominal tensile stress of 350 MPa. The plate has a central crack
that is 15.9 mm long. Calculate the stress intensity factor at the tip of the crack.
Given: Nominal stress nom 350 MPa

Crack length lcrack 15.9 mm
1. Calculate the half-width of the crack
a 0.5 l crack a 7.95 mm
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a plate with an edge crack.
1
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the stress intensity factor.
0.5
K nom a K 55.3 MPa m
PROBLEM 5-53 _____
Statement: A movie scene calls for a stuntman to hang from a rope that is suspended 3 m above a pit of
poisonous spiders. The rope is attached to a glass sheet that is 3000 mm long by 100 mm wide
and 1.27 mm thick. The stuntman knows that the glass sheet contains a central crack with total
length of 16.2 mm that is oriented parallel to the ground. The fracture toughness of the glass is
0.83 MPa-m0.5. Should he do the stunt? Show all assumptions and calculations in support of
your answer.
0.5
Glass dimensions L 3000 mm W 100 mm t 1.27 mm
Total crack length lcrack 16.2 mm
Assumptions: Weight of stuntman Weight 900 N

Desired safety factor NFMd 3
1. Calculate the nominal stress based on the assumed weight of the stuntman and the glass dimensions.
2
Cross-section area A W t A 127 mm
Weight
Nominal stress nom nom 7.087 MPa
A
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from equation 5.14c for a plate with a central crack.
Crack half-width a 0.5 l crack a 8.1 mm
Glass half-width b 0.5 W b 50 mm
a
sec 1.017
2 b
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the stress intensity factor for the given assumptions.
0.5
K nom a K 1.149 MPa m
4. Using equation 5.15, calculate the safety factor against sudden failure for the given assumptions.
Kc
NFM NFM 0.72
K
5. The stuntman should definitely not do the stunt since the factor of safety is not only less than the desired
value, but is less than one.
PROBLEM 5-54 _____

Statement: A material has a fracture toughness of 50 MPa-m0.5 and a yield strength of 1000 MPa and is to be
made into a large panel. If the panel is stressed to one-half the yield stress, what is the maximum
central crack size that can be tolerated without catastrophic failure?
0.5
Given: Fracture toughness Kc 50 MPa m
1. Calculate the nominal stress based on the yield strength and the stress level given in the problem statement.
Sy
nom nom 500 MPa
2
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a large plate with a central
crack.
2
Kc
1
a a 3.18 mm
nom
lcritical 2 a lcritical 6.4 mm
PROBLEM 5-55 _____
Statement: A material that has a fracture toughness of 33 MPa-m0.5 is to be made into a large panel that is
2000 mm long by 250 mm wide and 4 mm thick. If the minimum allowable total crack length is 4
mm, what is the maximum tensile load in the long direction that can be applied without
catastrophic failure with a safety factor of 2.5?
0.5
Panel dimensions L 2000 mm W 250 mm t 4 mm
Total allow. crack length lcrack 4 mm
Safety factor NFM 2.5
1. Calculate the allowable stress intensity factor using equation 5.15.
Kc 0.5
Kallow Kallow 13.2 MPa m
NFM
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from equation 5.14c for a plate with a central crack.
Crack half-width a 0.5 l crack a 2 mm
Panel half-width b 0.5 W b 125 mm
a
sec 1.00
2 b
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the allowable nominal stress in the panel.
Kallow
allow allow 166.5 MPa
a
4. Calculate the allowable load for the given conditions.
Fallow allow W t Fallow 167 kN
PROBLEM 5-56 _____

Statement: Figure P5-19 shows an SAE 1020 cold-rolled steel bar fastened to a rigid ground plane with two
0.25-in-dia A8 steel dowel pins, hardened to HRC52. For P = 1500 lb and t = 0.25 in, find:
(a) The safety factor for each pin.
(b) The safety factor for direct bearing stress in each hole.
(c) The safety factor for tearout failure if h = 1 in.
Given: Pin diameter d 0.250 in Depth of section h 1.0 in

Applied load P 1500 lbf Distance from right pin to load b 4.0 in
Distance between pins a 2.0 in Yield strength of bar S yb 57 ksi
Thickness of bar t 0.25 in Yield strength of pin S yp 225 ksi
a b
RL
RR
b
a

2
d 2
A A 0.0491 in
4
3. Use equation 4.9 to determine the shear stress in each pin.
RL
A
RR
A
4. (a) From equations 5.8c and 5.9b, the safety factor against failure in the pins is
0.577 S yp
Left pin NL NL 2.1
L
0.577 S yp
Right pin NR NR 1.4
R
5. Calculate the bearing area from equation 4.10 and use it to determine the bearing stress in each hole.
2
RL
L L 48.0 ksi
Abear
RR
R R 72.0 ksi
Abear
These are principal stresses 1.
6. (b) Calculate the safety factor for direct bearing from equation 5.8c where 2 and 3 are both zero.
S yb
Left hole NL NL 1.2
L
S yb
Right hole NR NR 0.8
R
Atear 2
h d
7. The tearout area is t , where (h - d)/2 is the distance from the edge of the hole to the
2
outside of the bar. Substitute this area in equation 4.9 for the shear area and solve for the shear strength xy.
h d
Atear 2 2
t Atear 0.187 in
2
RL
Left hole L L 16.00 ksi
Atear
RR
Right hole R R 24.00 ksi
Atear
8. (c) From equations 5.8c and 5.9b, the safety factor against tearout failure in the holes is
0.577 S yb
Left hole NL NL 2.1
L
0.577 S yb
R
PROBLEM 5-57 _____

Statement: Figure P5-19 shows a class 50 cast iron bar fastened to a rigid ground plane with two 0.25-in-dia
A8 steel dowel pins, hardened to HRC52. For P = 1500 lb and t = 0.25 in, find:
(a) The safety factor for each pin.
(b) The safety factor for direct bearing stress in each hole.
(c) The safety factor for tearout failure if h = 1 in.
Given: Pin diameter d 0.250 in Depth of section h 1.0 in

Applied load P 1500 lbf Distance from right pin to load b 4.0 in
Distance between pins a 2.0 in Tensile strength of bar S utb 52 ksi
Thickness of bar t 0.25 in Yield strength of pin S yp 225 ksi

a b
RL
RR
b
a

2
d 2
A A 0.0491 in
4
3. Use equation 4.9 to determine the shear stress in each pin.
RL
A
RR
A
4. (a) From equations 5.8c and 5.9b, the safety factor against failure in the pins is
0.577 S yp
Left pin NL NL 2.1
L
0.577 S yp
Right pin NR NR 1.4
R
5. Calculate the bearing area from equation 4.10 and use it to determine the bearing stress in each hole.
2
RL
L L 48.0 ksi
Abear
RR
R R 72.0 ksi
Abear
These are principal stresses 1.
6. (b) Calculate the safety factor for direct bearing from equation 5.12a where 2 and 3 are both zero.
S utb
Left hole NL NL 1.1
L
S utb
R
Atear 2
h d
7. The tearout area is t , where (h - d)/2 is the distance from the edge of the hole to the
2
outside of the bar. Substitute this area in equation 4.9 for the shear area and solve for the shear strength xy.
h d
Atear 2 2
t Atear 0.187 in
2
RL
Left hole L L 16.00 ksi
Atear
RR
Right hole R R 24.00 ksi
Atear
8. (c) For pure shear the Mohr circle is centered at 0,0 and has a radius equal to the shear stress. This results in 1
= . Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory and Figure 5-11, we see that we can use equation 5.12a for the
safety factor against tearout.
S utb S utb
NL NL 3.3 NR NR 2.2
L R
PROBLEM 5-58 _____

Statement: Figure P5-20 shows a bracket machined from 0.5-in-thick SAE 1045 cold-rolled steel flat stock. It
is rigidly attached to a support and loaded with P = 5000 lb at point D. Find:
(a) The safety factor against static failure at point A.
(b) The safety factor against static failure at point B.

Point D d 8 in Points B and C b 17 in
Applied load P 5000 lbf Tensile yield strength S y 77 ksi
1. Calculate the cross-section area and moment of inertia at A, B, and C, which are the same.
3
2 t h 4
A h t A 1.500 in I I 1.1250 in
12
2. For part (a), draw a free-body diagram of the entire bracket.
M h y
B
h x
C
d D h
3. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the shear force and bending moment at the support.
F: V P 0 M: P ( d ) M 0
V P V 5000 lbf MA P ( d ) MA 40000 in lbf
4. The normal stress in the bracket at point A is determined using equation 4.11b.
MA c
Normal stress at point A A A 53.33 ksi
I
5. (a) The transverse shear stress in the bracket at point A is zero, therefore A is a principal stress. There are no
stress components in the y or z directions so this is a case of uniaxial stress. Thus, equations 5.7 reduce to
2
' A ' 53.3 ksi
Use equation 5.8a to calculate the factor of safety against a static failure at point A.
Sy
NA NA 1.4
'
6. For part (b), draw a free-body diagram of the portion of the bracket that is below point B.
F
y
M
B
x
d D h
7. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the normal force and bending moment on the section shown.
F: F P 0 M: P ( b 0.5 h d ) M 0
F P F 5000 lbf MB1 P ( b 0.5 h d ) MB1 52500 in lbf
8. The normal stress in the bracket at point B in the y direction is a combination of uniform tension and bending
and is determined by summing equations 4.7 and 4.11b.
MB1 c F
Normal stress at B in y direction By By 73.33 ksi
I A
9. The normal stress in the bracket at point B in the x direction is bending and is determined from equation 4.11b,
using the FBD from part (a).
MB2 V b MA MB2 45000 in lbf
MB2 c
Normal stress at B in x direction Bx Bx 60.00 ksi
I
10. (b) The transverse shear at B due to the shear force V is zero so Bx and By are the only stress components at B.
Use equations 5.7d and 5.8a to determine the factor of safety against a static failure at B (ignoring the stress
concentration there).
2 2
' Bx By Bx By ' 67.66 ksi
Sy
NB NB 1.1
'
PROBLEM 5-59 _____

Statement: Figure P5-20 shows a bracket machined from 1-in-thick class 60 cast iron flat stock. It is rigidly
attached to a support and loaded with P = 5000 lb at point D. Find:
(a) The safety factor against static failure at point A.
(b) The safety factor against static failure at point B.

Point D d 8 in Points B and C b 17 in
Applied load P 5000 lbf Ultimate tensile strength S ut 62 ksi
Ultimate comp. strength S uc 187 ksi
1. Calculate the cross-section area and moment of inertia at A, B, and C, which are the same.
3
2 t h 4
A h t A 1.500 in I I 1.1250 in
12
2. For part (a), draw a free-body diagram of the entire bracket.
M h y
B
h x
C
d D h
3. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the shear force and bending moment at the support.
F: V P 0 M: P ( d ) M 0
V P V 5000 lbf MA P ( d ) MA 40000 in lbf
4. The normal stress in the bracket at point A is determined using equation 4.11b.
MA c
Normal stress at point A A A 53.33 ksi
I
5. (a) The transverse shear stress in the bracket at point A is zero, therefore A is a principal stress. There are no
stress components in the y or z directions so this is a case of uniaxial stress. Thus, use equation 5.12a (adapted
to a compressive stress state) to calculate the factor of safety against a static failure at point A.
S uc
NA NA 3.5
A
6. For part (b), draw a free-body diagram of the portion of the bracket that is below point B.
F
y
M
B
x
d D h
7. Use the equilibrium equations 3.3a to calculate the normal force and bending moment on the section shown.
F: F P 0 M: P ( b 0.5 h d ) M 0
F P F 5000 lbf MB1 P ( b 0.5 h d ) MB1 52500 in lbf
8. The normal stress in the bracket at point B in the y direction is a combination of uniform tension and bending
and is determined by summing equations 4.7 and 4.11b.
MB1 c F
Normal stress at B in y direction By By 73.33 ksi
I A
9. The normal stress in the bracket at point B in the x direction is bending and is determined from equation 4.11b,
using the FBD from part (a).
MB2 V b MA MB2 45000 in lbf
MB2 c
Normal stress at B in x direction Bx Bx 60.00 ksi
I
10. (b) The transverse shear at B due to the shear force V is zero so Bx and By are the only stress components at B.
Use equations 4.6 to determine the principal stresses and 5.12a to determine the factor of safety against a static
failure at B (ignoring the stress concentration there).
2
Bx By Bx By
1 1 73.333 ksi
2 2
2
Bx By Bx By
2 2 60.000 ksi
2 2
S ut
3 0 ksi NB NB 0.85
1
PROBLEM 5-60 _____

Statement: Figure P5-21 shows a 1-in-dia SAE 1040 hot-rolled, normalized steel bar supported and subjected
to the applied load P = 500 lb. Find the safety factor against static failure.
6
Applied load P 500 lbf Yield strength S y 54 ksi
Dimensions: a 20 in L 40 in
R2
M1
R1 P
for these unknowns, follow the method presented in Example 4-7. First, calculate the moment of inertia and
distance to the extreme fiber for the round section.
4
d 4
I I 0.0491 in c 0.5 d c 0.500 in
64
q(x) = -M1<x>-2 + R1<x>-1 - R2<x - a>-1 + P<x - L>-1
V(x) = -M1<x>-1 + R1<x>0 - R2<x - a>0 + P<x - L>0
M(x) = -M1<x>0 + R1<x>1 - R2<x - a>1 + P<x - L>1
(x) = [ -M1<x>1 + R1<x>2/2 - R2<x - a>2/2 + P<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI

At x = a, y = 0
At x = L+, V = M = 0
M1 2 R1 3 3
2 6
V(L) = 0: R1 R2 P = 0 lbf
M(L) = 0: M1 R1 L R2 ( L a ) = 0 lbf in
M1

R
2 R2 1250 lbf

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
10. Write the moment equation in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of the
singularity functions.
M ( x) M1 R1 S ( x 0 in) x R2 S ( x a ) ( x a ) P S ( x L) ( x L)
11. Plot the moment equation and determine the maximum bending moment.
As expected, the maximum bending MOMENT DIAGRAM

moment occurs under the support at 10
x = a.
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 10.0 kip in

5
M ( x)
kip in
0
5
0 10 20 30 40
x
in
12. Use equation 4.11b to calculate the maximum bending stress in the bar.
Mmax c
max max 101.9 ksi
I
13. There are no other stress components present (the transverse shear is zero at the extreme fiber) so this is a
principal stress and the other two principal stresses are zero. Thus, this is a case of uniaxial stress. Determine
the safety factor against static failure using equations 5.7c and 5.8a, which reduce to
Sy
N N 0.53
max
PROBLEM 5-61 _____

Statement: Figure P5-21 shows a 1.5-in-dia class 60 cast iron bar supported and subjected to the applied load
= 500 lb. Find the safety factor against static failure.
6
Applied load P 500 lbf Tensile strength S ut 54 ksi
Dimensions: a 20 in L 40 in
R2
M1
R1 P
for these unknowns, follow the method presented in Example 4-7. First, calculate the moment of inertia and
distance to the extreme fiber for the round section.
4
d 4
I I 0.2485 in c 0.5 d c 0.750 in
64
q(x) = -M1<x>-2 + R1<x>-1 - R2<x - a>-1 + P<x - L>-1
V(x) = -M1<x>-1 + R1<x>0 - R2<x - a>0 + P<x - L>0
M(x) = -M1<x>0 + R1<x>1 - R2<x - a>1 + P<x - L>1
(x) = [ -M1<x>1 + R1<x>2/2 - R2<x - a>2/2 + P<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI

At x = a, y = 0
At x = L+, V = M = 0
M1 2 R1 3 3
2 6
V(L) = 0: R1 R2 P = 0 lbf
M(L) = 0: M1 R1 L R2 ( L a ) = 0 lbf in
M1

R
2 R2 1250 lbf

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
M ( x) M1 R1 S ( x 0 in) x R2 S ( x a ) ( x a ) P S ( x L) ( x L)
11. Plot the moment equation and determine the maximum bending moment.
As expected, the maximum bending MOMENT DIAGRAM

moment occurs under the support at 10
x = a.
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 10.0 kip in

5
M ( x)
kip in
0
5
0 10 20 30 40
x
in
12. Use equation 4.11b to calculate the maximum bending stress in the bar.
Mmax c
max max 30.2 ksi
I
the safety factor against static failure using equation 5.12a.
S ut
N N 1.8
max
PROBLEM 5-62 _____

Statement: Figure P5-22 shows a pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F = 100 lb,
l = 2 in, and d = 0.5 in, what is the pin's safety factor against yielding when made of SAE 1020
cold-rolled steel?
Given: Applied force F 100 lbf Yield strength S y 57 ksi

Total length, l l 2.00 in Beam length L 0.5 l L 1.000 in
Pin dia d 0.5 in
length l/2.

F lbf
w w 100.0
L in
2. A cantilever beam with uniform loading is shown in Figure B-1(b) in Appendix B. In this case, the dimension a
the figure is zero. As shown in the figure, when a = 0, the maximum bending moment occurs at the support and
is
2
w L
2
3. Calculate the moment of inertia and distance to the extreme fiber of the pin. The bending stress in the beam is
then found using equation 4.11b.
4
d 3 4
I I 3.068 10 in
64
c 0.5 d c 0.250 in
Mmax c
4074 psi
I
the safety factor against static failure using equations 5.7c and 5.8a, which reduce to
Sy
N N 14

PROBLEM 5-63 _____

Statement: Figure P5-22 shows a pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F = 100 N, l =
50 mm, and d = 16 mm, what is the pin's safety factor against yielding when made of class 50 cast
iron?
Given: Applied force F 100 N Tensile strength S ut 359 MPa

Total length, l l 50 mm Beam length L 0.5 l L 25 mm
Pin dia d 16 mm
the pin and, since the pin is press-fit into part A, it can be modeled as a cantilever beam of length
l/2.

F N
w w 4.0
L mm
2. A cantilever beam with uniform loading is shown in Figure B-1(b) in Appendix B. In this case, the dimension a
the figure is zero. As shown in the figure, when a = 0, the maximum bending moment occurs at the support and
is
2
w L
Mmax Mmax 1250 N mm
2
3. Calculate the moment of inertia and distance to the extreme fiber of the pin. The bending stress in the beam is
then found using equation 4.11b.
4
d 3 4
I I 3.217 10 mm
64
c 0.5 d c 8.000 mm
Mmax c
3.108 MPa
I
the safety factor against static failure using equation 5.12a.
S ut
N N 115

PROBLEM 5-64
Statement: A differential element is subjected to the stresses (in ksi): x = 10, y = -20, xy = -20. The material
is uneven and has strengths (in ksi) of S ut = 50, S y = 40, and S uc = 90. Calculate the safety factor
and draw a a-b diagram showing the boundary for each theory with the stress state and load
line using:
Given: Stress components x 10 ksi y 20 ksi xy 20 ksi

1. Calculate the nonzero principal stresses using equation 4.6a.
2
x y x y 2
a xy a 20 ksi
2 2
2
x y x y 2
b xy b 30 ksi
2 2
b
m m 1.5
a
3. The safety factor equation for both theories is different for each quadrant the load line falls in. The equation
for the modified Mohr factor of safety is different for each of the two regions in the 4th quadrant that the load
line can fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant, below the -1 slope line.. The factors of
safety are:
S uc S ut
(a) Coulomb-Mohr theory Na Na 1.4
S uc a S ut b
S uc
(b) Modified Mohr theory Nb Nb 2
S uc S ut
S a b
ut
4. Plot the a-b diagram showing the safe-fail boundaries, the stress state point (20 ksi, -30 ksi) and the load line.
Note that if a > b , then only that area on the graph that is to the right of and below the diagonal line can
contain valid stress points. The factor of safety is the distance along the load line from the origin to the
intersection of the load line with the failure boundary, divided by the distance from the origin to the stress poin
Since the distance from the origin to the modified Mohr boundary is greater than the distance to the
Coulomb-Mohr boundary, its factor of safety is greater. See Figure 5-62 on the following page.
b
50
40
30
20

(a) Coulomb-Mohr
boundary
10
0 a
-10
-20
(20,-30)
-30
-40
-50 Stress states at -S

which failure ut
-60 will occur
-70 (b) Modified Mohr

boundary
Load Line
-80
-90 -S
uc
-100
-100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
FIGURE 5-64
a - b Diagram for Problem 5-64
PROBLEM 5-65
Statement: A differential element is subjected to the stresses (in ksi): x = 10, y = -5, xy = 15. The material is
uneven and has strengths (in ksi) of S ut = 50, S y = 40, and S uc = 90. Calculate the safety factor and
draw a a-b diagram showing the boundary for each theory with the stress state and load line
using:
2
x y x y 2
a xy a 19.3 ksi
2 2
2
x y x y 2
b xy b 14.3 ksi
2 2
b
m m 0.741
a
3. The safety factor equation for both theories is different for each quadrant the load line falls in. The equation
for the modified Mohr factor of safety is different for each of the two regions in the 4th quadrant that the load
line can fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant, above the -1 slope line.. The factors of
safety are:
S uc S ut
S uc a S ut b
S ut
(b) Modified Mohr theory Nb Nb 2.6
a
4. Plot the a-b diagram showing the safe-fail boundaries, the stress state point (19.3 ksi, -14.3 ksi) and the load
line. Note that if a > b , then only that area on the graph that is to the right of and below the diagonal line can
contain valid stress points. The factor of safety is the distance along the load line from the origin to the
intersection of the load line with the failure boundary, divided by the distance from the origin to the stress poin
Since the distance from the origin to the modified Mohr boundary is greater than the distance to the
Coulomb-Mohr boundary, its factor of safety is greater. See Figure 5-63 on the following page.
b
50
40
30
20 (a) Coulomb-Mohr

boundary
10
0 a
-10 (19.3,-14.3)
-20
-30
-40 Load Line
-50 Stress states at -S

which failure ut
-60 will occur

boundary
-80
-90 -S
uc
-100
-100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
FIGURE 5-65
PROBLEM 5-66
Statement: A differential element is subjected to the stresses (in ksi): x = -20, y = -15, xy = 15. The material
is uneven and has strengths (in ksi) of S ut = 50, S y = 40, and S uc = 90. Calculate the safety factor
and draw a a-b diagram showing the boundary for each theory with the stress state and load
line using:
2
x y x y 2
a xy a 2.29 ksi
2 2
2
x y x y 2
b xy b 32.7 ksi
2 2
b
m m 14.263 (third quadrant since both principal
a stresses are negative)
3. The safety factor equation for both theories is the same when the load line falls in the third quadrant. The
S uc
b
S uc
(b) Modified Mohr theory Nb Nb 2.8
b
4. Plot the a-b diagram showing the safe-fail boundaries, the stress state point (-2.29 ksi, -32.7 ksi) and the load
line. Note that if a > b , then only that area on the graph that is to the right of and below the diagonal line
can contain valid stress points. The factor of safety is the distance along the load line from the origin to the
intersection of the load line with the failure boundary, divided by the distance from the origin to the stress
point. Since the distance from the origin to the modified Mohr boundary is the same as the distance to the
Coulomb-Mohr boundary, its factor of safety is the same. See Figure 5-63 on the following page.
b
50
40
30
20

(a) Coulomb-Mohr
boundary
10
0 a
-10
-20
-30
(-2.29,-32.7)
-40
-50 Stress state at -S

which failure ut
-60 will occur for
both theories
-70
-80
(b) Modified Mohr
-90 -S boundary
uc
Load Line
-100
-100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
FIGURE 5-66
PROBLEM 5-67 _____
Statement: Derive the von Mises effective stress equation 5.7d for the two-dimensional case.
1. Start with equation 5.7c, which gives the von Mises stress in terms of the two nonzero principal stresses.
2 2
' 1 1 3 3 (a)
2. Define 1 and 3 in terms of x, y, and xy using equations 4.6a.
2
x y x y 2
1 xy (b)
2 2
2
x y x y 2
3 xy (c)
2 2
3. To make the manipulations easier, define:
2
x y x y 2
c and R xy (d)
2 2
4. Substitute equations d into b and c.
1 c R 3 c R (e)
5. Substitute equations e into a, expand, collect terms and simplify.
' c R 2 c R c R c R 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
' c 2 R c R c R c 2 R c R (f)
2 2
' c 3 R
6. Substitute equations d into f, expand, collect terms and simplify to obtain the derived equation.
2 2
x y x y 2
' 3 3 xy
2 2
2 2 2
' x y x y 3 xy (5.7d)
PROBLEM 5-68
Statement: Figure P5-23 shows an oil-field pump jack. The crank drive shaft at O2 is loaded in torsion and
bending with maximum values of 6500 in-lb and 9800 in-lb, respectively. The point on the shaft
with maximum stress is located away from the key that connects the shaft to the crank. Using a
factor of safety of 2 against static yielding, determine a suitable diameter for the shaft if it is to be
made of SAE 1040 cold-rolled steel.
Given: Yield strength S y 71 ksi Factor of safty Ns 2
Torque T 6500 in lbf Bending moment M 9800 in lbf
1. Express the torsional and bending stresses as a functions of the unknown shaft diameter, d
32 M
Bending stress x( d )
3
d
16 T
Torsional stress xy( d )
3
d
2. Use these two stresses in an expression for the von Mises effective stress, equation 5.7d withy = 0.
2 2
von Mises effective stress '( d ) x( d ) 3 xy( d )
3. Use equation 5.8a as a design relationship to solve for the diameter, d.
2 2 Sy
Design equation x( d ) 3 xy( d ) =
Ns
2 2 2
32 M 3 16 T = S y
3 3 Ns
d d
Solving for d
1
6
( 32 M ) 2 3 ( 16 T ) 2
d d 1.480 in
2 Sy
2

Ns
A suitable diameter for the given design requirements is d 1.500 in
P0568.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-69
Statement: Figure P5-24a shows a C-clamp with an elliptical body dimensioned as shown. The clamp has a
T-section with a uniform thickness of 3.2 mm at the throat as shown in Figure P5-24b. Find the
static factor of safety if the clamping force is 2.7 kN and the material is class 40 gray cast iron.

Section dimensions: Flange b 28.4 mm Web h 31.8 mm
t 3.2 mm
Material properties S ut 290 MPa S uc 965 MPa
centroid of the section at the throat.
0.5 t ( b t) 0.5 ( h t) ( h t) t
yCG yCG 9.578 mm
b t ( h t) t
rc ri yCG rc 73.078 mm
2
Cross section area A b t ( h t) t A 182.4 mm
A
ri t ro
b t
dr dr
r r
r r t
i i
3. Take a section through the throat area and draw a FBD. There will be a vertical axial force through the section
CG (at a distance rc from the screw centerline) which will form a couple of magnitude rc x F. This couple will be
balanced by an internal moment of equal magnitude.
Internal moment M rc F M 197 N m
M ci F
Inner radius i i 132.2 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
Outer radius o o 204.3 MPa
e A ro A
6. These are the principal stresses so,
P0569.xmcd
Inner radius 1i i 2i 0 MPa 3i 0 MPa
Outer radius 1o 0 MPa 2o 0 MPa 3o o
7. Calculate the factor of safety using equations 5.12c, 5.12d, and 5.12e.
Inner radius
S uc 2 S ut
1i 2i
1
C1i 1i 2i C1i 92.46 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2i 3i
1
C2i 2i 3i C2i 0.00 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3i 1i
1
C3i 3i 1i C3i 92.46 MPa
2 S uc
eff max C1i C2i C3i 1i 2i 3i eff 132.182 MPa
S ut
Ni Ni 2.2
eff
Outer radius
S uc 2 S ut
1o 2o
1
C1o 1o 2o C1o 0.00 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2o 3o
1
C2o 2o 3o C2o 61.41 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3o 1o
1
C3o 3o 1o C3o 61.41 MPa
2 S uc
eff max C1o C2o C3o 1o 2o 3o eff 61.41 MPa
S ut
No No 4.7
eff
P0569.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-70
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P5-24a has a rectangular cross section as in Figure P5-24c. Find the
static factor of safety if the clamping force is 1.6 kN and the material is class 50 gray cast iron.
h
rc ri rc 79.4 mm
2

2
Cross section area A b h A 203.520 mm
A
ro
b
dr
r
r
i
M ci F
i i 143.7 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 95.8 MPa
e A ro A

P0570.xmcd
Inner radius
S uc 2 S ut
1i 2i
1
C1i 1i 2i C1i 98.09 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2i 3i
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3i 1i
1
C3i 3i 1i C3i 98.09 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
Ni Ni 2.5
eff
Outer radius
S uc 2 S ut
1o 2o
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2o 3o
1
C2o 2o 3o C2o 30.39 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3o 1o
1
C3o 3o 1o C3o 30.39 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
No No 11.8
eff
P0570.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-71
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P5-24a has an elliptical cross section as in Figure P5-24d.
Dimensions of the major and minor axes of the ellipse are given. Find the static factor of safety if
the clamping force is 1.6 kN and the material is class 60 gray cast iron.

h
rc ri rc 79.4 mm
2

b h 2
Cross section area A A 239.766 mm
2 2
A
ro
0.5
2
2 b
1 r rc
4 2
h dr
r
r
i
M ci F
i i 163.2 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 108.7 MPa
e A ro A

P0571.xmcd
Inner radius
S uc 2 S ut
1i 2i
1
C1i 1i 2i C1i 109.12 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2i 3i
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3i 1i
1
C3i 3i 1i C3i 109.12 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
Ni Ni 2.6
eff
Outer radius
S uc 2 S ut
1o 2o
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2o 3o
1
C2o 2o 3o C2o 36.02 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3o 1o
1
C3o 3o 1o C3o 36.02 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
No No 11.9
eff
P0571.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-72
Statement: A C-clamp as shown in Figure P5-24a has a trapezoidal cross section as in Figure P5-24e. Find the
static factor of safety if the clamping force is 350 lb and the material is class 40 gray cast iron.
Section dimensions: Width b i 9.6 mm b o 3.2 mm Depth h 31.8 mm
h bi 2 bo
rc ri rc 76.75 mm
3 bi bo

bi bo 2
Cross section area A h A 203.520 mm
2
A
ro

bi bo
bi r ri
h
dr
r
r
i
M ci F
i i 126.9 MPa
e A ri A
M co F
o o 118.4 MPa
e A ro A

P0572.xmcd
Inner radius
S uc 2 S ut
1i 2i
1
C1i 1i 2i C1i 88.77 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2i 3i
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3i 1i
1
C3i 3i 1i C3i 88.77 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
Ni Ni 2.3
eff
Outer radius
S uc 2 S ut
1o 2o
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2o 3o
1
C2o 2o 3o C2o 35.58 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3o 1o
1
C3o 3o 1o C3o 35.58 MPa
2 S uc
S ut
No No 8.2
eff
P0572.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-73
Statement: The connecting rod (3) on the oil-field pump jack shown in Figure P5-23 is, in fact, made up of
two rods, one connecting on each side of the walking beam (4). Determine a suitable width of
1/2-inch-thick SAE 1020 cold-rolled bar stock to use if the maximum tensile load on the bars is
3500 lb each. Use a factor of safety of 4 against static yielding.
Given: Yield strength S y 57 ksi Factor of safty Ns 4
Thickness t 0.50 in Tensile force F 3500 lbf
1. Express the tensile stress as a functions of the unknown width, w.
F
Tensile stress x( w)
w t
2. The tensile stress is the only stress present so it is also the von Mises effective stress.
F
von Mises effective stress '( w)
w t
3. Use equation 5.8a as a design relationship to solve for the diameter, d.
F Sy
Design equation =
w t Ns
N s F
Solving for w w w 0.491 in
t Sy
A suitable size for the given design requirements is w 0.500 in
P0573.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-74
Statement: A work platform is elevated on the end of a boom that has the ability to extend its length and
vary its angle with respect to ground. The platform width is large compared to the boom
diameter so that it is possible to load the boom eccentrically resulting in a combination of
bending, torsion and direct compression in the base of the boom. At the base the boom is a
hollow tube with an outside diameter of 8 in and a wall thickness of 0.75 in. It is made from SAE
1030 CR steel. Determine the factor of safety against static failure if the loading at a point at the
base of the boom is: M = 600 kip-in, T = 76 kip-in, and an axial compression of 4800 lb.
Given: Yield strength SAE 1030 CR steel S y 64 ksi

Boom dimensions D 8.00 in twall 0.75 in
Loading M 600 kip in T 76 kip in F 4800 lbf
1. Calculate the bending stress at the point of interest.

Inside diameter d D 2 twall d 6.500 in
Moment of inertia I

64
D d
4
4
I 113.438 in
4
Distance to outer fiber c 0.5 D c 4.000 in
M c
Bending stress bend bend 21.157 ksi
I
2. Calculate the axial stress due to the compressive load at the point of interest.

4
D d
2
2
A 17.082 in
2
F
Axial stress axial axial 0.281 ksi
A
3. Combine the bending and axial stresses to get the maximum normal stress on the compressive side of the boom.
Max. normal stress x bend axial x 21.438 ksi
4. Calculate the torsional stress at the point of interest.

4
Polar moment J 2 I J 226.876 in
Tc
Torsional stress xy xy 1.34 ksi
J
5. Calculate the von Mises effective stress using equation 5.7d.
2 2
von Mises stress ' x 3 xy ' 21.563 ksi
6. Calculate the factor of safety using equation 5.8a.

Sy
Factor of safety N N 2.97
'
P0574.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-75
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-74 for a boom that is made from class 20 gray cast iron. At the base the boom is
hollow tube with an outside diameter of 10 in and a wall thickness of 1.00 in.
Given: Strength Class 20 gray cast iron S ut 22 ksi S uc 83 ksi
Boom dimensions D 10.00 in twall 1.00 in
Loading M 600 kip in T 76 kip in F 4800 lbf
1. Calculate the bending stress at the point of interest.

Inside diameter d D 2 twall d 8.000 in
Moment of inertia I

64
D d
4 4 I 289.812 in
4
Distance to outer fiber c 0.5 D c 5.000 in
M c
Bending stress bend bend 10.352 ksi
I
2. Calculate the axial stress due to the compressive load at the point of interest.

4
D d
2 2 A 28.274 in
2
F
Axial stress axial axial 0.17 ksi
A
3. Combine the bending and axial stresses to get the maximum normal stress on the tensile and compressive sides
of the boom.
Max compressive xc bend axial xc 10.521 ksi
Max tensile xt bend axial xt 10.182 ksi
4. Calculate the torsional stress at the point of interest.

4
Polar moment J 2 I J 579.624 in
Tc
Torsional stress xy xy 0.656 ksi
J
5. Calculate the principal stresses on the tensile and compressive sides of the boom.
2
xc 2
Compressive side maxc xy maxc 5.301 ksi
2
xc
1c maxc 1c 0.041 ksi
2
2c 0 ksi
xc
3c maxc 3c 10.562 ksi
2
P0575.xmcd
2
xt 2
Tensile side maxt xy maxt 5.133 ksi
2
xt
1t maxc 1t 10.392 ksi
2
2t 0 ksi
xt
3t maxc 3t 0.210 ksi
2
Compressive side
S uc 2 S ut
1c 2c
1
C1c 1c 2c C1c 0.03 ksi
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2c 3c
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3c 1c
1
2 S uc
eff max C1c C2c C3c 1c 2c 3c eff 2.829 ksi
S ut
Nc Nc 7.8
eff
Tensile side
S uc 2 S ut
1t 2t
1
C1t 1t 2t C1t 7.64 ksi
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2t 3t
1
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3t 1t
1
2 S uc
eff max C1t C2t C3t 1t 2t 3t eff 10.392 ksi
S ut
Nt Nt 2.1
eff
P0575.xmcd
PROBLEM 5-76
Statement: Assume that the curved beam of Problem 5-70 has a crack on its inside surface of half-width a =
1.5 mm and a fracture toughness of 35 MPa-m0.5. What is its safety factor against sudden
fracture?
Given: Width of section t 31.8 mm
Half crack length a 1.5 mm Fracture toughness Kc 35 MPa m
1. From Problem 5-70, the nominal stress at the inside radius is:
Nominal inside stress i 143.7 MPa
2. Calculate the half-width of the beam. b 0.5 t b 15.9 mm

3. Calculate the geometry and stress intensity factors.
sec
a
1.006
2 b
K i a K 9.92 MPa m
Kc
4. Determine the factor of safety against sudden fracture failure NFM NFM 3.5
K
PROBLEM 5-77 _____

Statement: A large aircraft panel is to be made from 7075-T651 aluminum bar. From test data it is found that
the nominal tensile stress in the panel is 200 MPa. What is the average maximum central crack
size that can be tolerated without catastrophic failure?
0.5 0.5
Given: Fracture toughness Kc 22 ksi in Kc 24.2 MPa m
Nominal stress nom 200 MPa
1. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a large plate with a central
crack.
2
Kc
1
a a 4.65 mm
nom
lcritical 2 a lcritical 9.3 mm
PROBLEM 5-78
Statement: Design the connecting rod (link 3) of Problem 3-50 for a safety factor of 4 if the link is made from
SAE 1010 hot-rolled steel sheet, the pin hole diameter at each end is 6 mm, and the maximum
applied tensile load is 2000 N. There are two links carrying the load.
Given: Force on links Ftotal 2000 N

Pin hole diameter d 6 mm
Assumptions: Choose a suitable width, say w 3 d w 18 mm
Ftotal
1. The force on each link is F F 1000 N
2
2. With only a tensile force acting on the link, the tensile stress will be the principal stress and it will also be the
von Mises effective stress, so we have x = 1 = '.
F F
3. The tensile stress on each link is x = = = '
A t w
Sy t w Sy
4. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, Nd = =
' F
F Nd
5. Solving for the thickness,t, t t 1.241 mm
w S y
6. Round this up to the next higher integer value, t 2 mm
t w S y
7. The realized factor of safety N N 6.4
against tensile failure is, F
8. Check the factor of safety against bearing failure in the pin holes.
2
Bearing area Abear w t Abear 36.0 mm
F
bear bear 27.8 MPa
Abear
This is the principal stresses 1.
9. Calculate the safety factor for direct bearing from equation 5.8c where 2 and 3 are both zero.
Sy
Pin hole Nbear Nbear 6.4
bear
2 2
10. The tearout area is Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d ) , where R 0.5 w (see figure below). Substitute this area in
equation 4.9 for the shear area and solve for the shear strength xy.
Tearout length
2 2
Shear area Atear 2 t R ( 0.5 d )
2
Atear 33.941 mm
F
Shear stress xy
Atear
xy 29.46 MPa
d R
8. From equations 5.8c and 5.9b, the safety factor against tearout failure in the holes is
0.577 S y
Ntear Ntear 3.5
xy
This is slightly less than the design FS of Nd 4 so, choose t = 2.5 mm or increase w to 4*d.
PROBLEM 5-79
Statement: Design the compacting ram (link 4) of Problem 3-50 for a safety factor of 4 if the ram is made
from SAE 1010 hot-rolled steel bar, the pin hole diameter at the joint where link 3 attaches is 6
mm, and the applied load Fcom = 2000 N. The piston has a diameter of 35 mm.
Given: Force at point P Fcom 2000 N

Assumptions: The points of maximum stress on a plane through point D are sufficiently removed from point D
that there is no stress concentration at those points.
1. From Problem 3-51 the forces and reactions on the ram

are:
42.5
F34x 553 N F34y 2000 N E
F14E
F14E 357 N F14F 196 N D
F34x
2. The maximum bending moment is at point D and is: 120.0
F34y 77.5
M 42.5 mm F14E M 15172.5 N mm
The section modulus and area for the ram are F14F
F
3 2
D D
Z ( D) A ( D)
32 4 P
3. Between points D and P there is a compressive force of
Fcom 2000 N. Thus, there is a compressive stress due Fcom
to this force in addition to the bending stress at point D.
Compacting Ram (4)
On the left side of the ram at the section through point D
M Fcom
bL ( D) a( D) L ( D) bL ( D) a( D)
Z ( D) A ( D)
On the right side of the ram at the section through point D
M 4 Fcom
bR( D) a( D) R( D) bR( D) a( D)
Z ( D) 2
D
The compressive stress on the right side will be numerically greater than that on the left side.
4. Since the shear stress due to bending is zero at these points, the axial stress will be the principal stress and it
will also be the von Mises effective stress, so we have x = 1 = '.
Sy Sy
5. Using the distortion-energy failure theory, Nd = =
' R( D)
6. Solving for the diameter, D,

Guess D 10 mm
f ( D) Nd R( D) S y D root( f ( D) D) D 16.368 mm
7. Round this up to the next higher even integer value, say D 18 mm
Sy
against axial yeilding is, R( D)
9. The axial stress on each side of the ram on a section through D is:
L ( D) 18.6 MPa R( D) 34.4 MPa
PROBLEM 5-80
Statement: A differential element is subected to the stresses given below and a ductile material has the
strengths given below. Calculate the safety factor and draw 1-3 diagrams of each theory
showing the stress state using:
(a) Maximum shear-stress theory, and
(b) Distortion-energy theory.
Given: Principal stresses 1 70 MPa 2 0 ksi 3 140 MPa

Material properties S ut 350 MPa S y 280 MPa S uc 350 MPa

3
m m 2
1
2. The safety factor equation for the distortion-enrgy theory is the same regardless of which quadrant the load line
falls in. However, the equation for the maximum shear-stress factor of safety is different for each of the three
quadrants that the load line (1st, 3rd, or 4th) can fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant. The
Sy
(a) Maximum shear-stress theory Na Na 1.3
1 3
(b) Distortion energy theory 3

280
(a) Maximum shear
2 2 stress boundary
' 1 1 3 3 210
(b) Distortion energy
' 26.9 ksi 140
boundary
MINIMUM NONZERO PRINCIPAL STRESS, MPa
Sy
Nb Nb 1.5 70
'
0 1
3. Plot the 1-3 diagram showing the sy
safe-fail boundaries, the stress state point -70

(70MPa, -140 MPa) and the load line.
Note that if 1 > 3 , then only that area -140
(70,-140)
on the graph that is to the right of and

below the diagonal line can contain valid -210 Stress states at
stress points. The factor of safety is the which failure
distance along the load line from the will occur
-280 -s y
origin to the intersection of the load line Load Line
with the failure boundary, divided by the
-350
distance from the origin to the stress
point. Since the distance from the origin
-420
to the distortion-energy boundary is
-280 -210 -140 -70 0 70 140 210 280 350
greater than the distance to the maximum
MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL STRESS, MPa
shear-stress baoundary, its factor of
safety is greater.
FIGURE 5-80
1 - 3 Diagram for Problem 5-80
PROBLEM 5-81
Statement: A part has the combined stress state and strengths given below. Using the Distortion-Energy
failure theory, find the von Mises effective stress and factor of safety against static failure.
Given: Stresses: x 70 MPa y 35 MPa xy 31.5 MPa
Strengths: S y 126 MPa S ut 140 MPa S uc 140 MPa

1. Find the maximum shear stress and principal stresses that result from this combination of applied stresses
using equations 4.6.
2
x y 2
Maximum shear stress max xy max 36.0 MPa
2
x y
Principal stresses 1 max 1 88.5 MPa
2
x y
2 max 2 16.5 MPa
2
3 0 psi
2. Find the von Mises effective stress using equation 5.7d:
2 2 2
' x x y y 3 xy ' 81.6 MPa
Sy
3. The safety factor can now be found using equation 5.8a. N N 1.5
'
PROBLEM 5-82
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-78 for the connecting rod made from class 20 cast iron.
Given: Force on links Ftotal 2000 N

Strength S ut 152 MPa S uc 572 MPa
Assumptions: Choose a suitable width, say w 4 d w 24 mm
Ftotal
1. The force on each link is F F 1000 N
2
2. With only a tensile force acting on the link, the tensile stress will be the principal stress so we have x = 1.
F F
3. The tensile stress on each link is x = = = 1
A t w
S ut t w S ut
4. Using the modified-Mohr failure theory, Nd = =
1 F
F Nd
5. Solving for the thickness,t, t t 1.096 mm
w S ut
6. Round this up to the next higher integer value, t 2 mm
t w S ut
against tensile failure is, F
8. Check the factor of safety against bearing failure in the pin holes.
2
Bearing area Abear w t Abear 48.0 mm
F
bear bear 20.8 MPa
Abear
This is the principal stresses 1.
9. Calculate the safety factor for direct bearing from equation 5.8c where 2 and 3 are both zero.
S uc
Pin hole Nbear Nbear 27.5
bear
2 2
10. The tearout area is Atear = 2 t R ( 0.5 d ) , where R 0.5 w (see figure below). Substitute this area in
equation 4.9 for the shear area and solve for the shear strength xy.
Tearout length
2 2
Shear area Atear 2 t R ( 0.5 d )
2
Atear 46.476 mm
F
Shear stress xy
Atear
xy 21.52 MPa
d R
Principal stress 1 xy
8. For pure shear the Mohr circle is centered at 0,0 and has a radius equal to the shear stress. This results in
1 = . Using the Modified-Mohr failure theory and Figure 5-11, we see that we can use equation 5.12a for
the safety factor against tearout.
S ut
Ntear Ntear 7.1
1
PROBLEM 5-83
Statement: Repeat Problem 5-79 for the part made from class 20 cast iron.
Given: Force at point P Fcom 2000 N

Tensile strength S ut 152 MPa
Assumptions: The points of maximum stress on a plane through point D are sufficiently removed from point D
that there is no stress concentration at those points.
Solution: See Figure P3-22 and Mathcad files P0579 and P0583.
1. From Problem 3-51 the forces and reactions on the ram

are:
42.5
F34x 553 N F34y 2000 N E
F14E
F14E 357 N F14F 196 N D
F34x
2. The maximum bending moment is at point D and is: 120.0
F34y 77.5
M 42.5 mm F14E M 15172.5 N mm
The section modulus and area for the ram are F14F
F
3 2
D D
Z ( D) A ( D)
32 4 P
3. Between points D and P there is a compressive force of
Fcom 2000 N. Thus, there is a compressive stress due Fcom
to this force in addition to the bending stress at point D.
Compacting Ram (4)
On the left side of the ram at the section through point D
M Fcom
bL ( D) a( D) L ( D) bL ( D) a( D)
Z ( D) A ( D)
On the right side of the ram at the section through point D
M 4 Fcom
bR( D) a( D) R( D) bR( D) a( D)
Z ( D) 2
D
The tensile stress on the left side will be critical for an uneven, brittle material.
4. With only a tensile stress acting on the ram at this point, it will be the principal stress so we have L = 1.
S ut S ut
5. Using the modified-Mohr failure theory, Nd = =
1 L
6. Solving for the diameter, D,

Guess D 10 mm
f ( D) Nd L ( D) S ut D root( f ( D) D) D 14.567 mm
7. Round this up so that D 3 d D 18 mm
S ut
against axial failure is, L ( D)
9. The axial stress on each side of the ram on a section through D is:
L ( D) 18.6 MPa R( D) 34.4 MPa
PROBLEM 5-84
Statement: A differential element is subected to the stresses and strengths given below. Calculate the
safety factor and draw 1-3 diagrams of each theory showing the stress state using:
Given: Principal stresses 1 70 MPa 2 0 MPa 3 140 MPa


3
m m 2
1
2. The safety factor equation for both theories is different for each quadrant the load line falls in. The equation for
the modified Mohr factor of safety is different for each of the two regions in the 4th quadrant that the load line can
fall in. In this case, the load line falls in the 4th quadrant, below the -1 slope line.. The factors of safety are:
S uc S ut
(a)Coulomb-Mohr theory Na Na 2.4
S uc 1 S ut 3
(b) Modified Mohr theory 3

350
280
S uc
Nb 210
S uc S ut
S 1 3 140 (a) Coulomb-Mohr

MINIMUM NONZERO PRINCIPAL STRESS, MPa
ut boundary
70
0 1
Nb 3.2
-70
(70,-140)
-140
3. Plot the 1-3 diagram showing the -210
safe-fail boundaries, the stress state point -280

(70 MPa,-140 MPa) and the load line. Note Stress states at -S
-350
that if 1 > 3 , then only that area on the which failure ut
-420 will occur
graph that is to the right of and below the
diagonal line can contain valid stress boundary
Load Line
points. The factor of safety is the distance -560
along the load line from the origin to the -630 -S
uc
intersection of the load line with the failure
-700
boundary, divided by the distance from -700 -630 -560 -490 -420 -350 -280 -210 -140 -70 0 70 140 210 280 350
the origin to the stress point. Since the MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL STRESS, MPa
distance from the origin to the modified
Mohr boundary is greater than the
distance to the Coulomb-Mohr boundary, FIGURE 5-84
its factor of safety is greater. 1 - 3 Diagram for Problem 5-84
PROBLEM 5-85
Statement: A part has the combined stress state and strengths given below. Using the Modified-Mohr failure
theory, find the effective stress and factor of safety against static failure.
Given: Stresses: x 70 MPa y 35 MPa xy 31.5 MPa
Strengths: S y 126 MPa S ut 140 MPa S uc 560 MPa

1. Because S uc is greater than S ut, this is an uneven material, which is characteristic of a brittle material.
2. Find the maximum shear stress and principal stresses that result from this combination of applied stresses using
equations 4.6.
2
x y 2
Maximum shear stress max xy max 36.0 MPa
2
x y
Principal stresses 1 max 1 88.5 MPa
2
x y
2 max 2 16.5 MPa
2
3 0 psi
3. Find the Dowling factors C1, C2, C3 using equations 5.12b:
S uc 2 S ut
1 2
1
C1 1 2 C1 62.3 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
2 3
1
C2 2 3 C2 12.3 MPa
2 S uc
S uc 2 S ut
3 1
1
C3 3 1 C3 66.4 MPa
2 S uc
4. Then find the largest of the six stresses C1, C2, C3 , 1, 2, 3:
1
C
C2
C
eff max
3
eff 88.5 MPa
1

2
3
which is the modified-Mohr effective stress.

S ut
5. The safety factor can now be found using equation 5.12d. N N 1.6
eff
PROBLEM 6-1a
Statement: For the data in row a in Table P6-1, find the stress range, alternating stress component, mean stress
component, stress ratio, and amplitude ratio.
Given: max 1000 min 0
1. Use equations (6.1) to calculate the required quantities.
Stress range max min 1000
max min
Alternating stress a a 500
2
max min
Mean stress m m 500
2
min
Stress ratio R R0
max
a
Amplitude ratio A A1
m
PROBLEM 6-2a
Statement: For the strength data in row a in Table P6-2, calculate the uncorrected endurance limit and draw th
strength-life (S-N) diagram for the material, assuming it to be steel.
Given: Tensile strength S ut 90 ksi
1. Using equation (6-5a), calculate the uncorrected endurance limit.

S'e return 0.5 S ut if S ut 200 ksi S'e 45.0 ksi
100 ksi otherwise
2. Using equation (6.9), calculate the fatigue strength at N = 10 3 cycles. S m 0.9 S ut S m 81.0 ksi
b
3. The equation for the S-N curve in the HCF region is given by equation (6.10a): S'f = a N
4. Determine the constants a and b from equations (6.10c) and (6.10a). From Table 6-5, for N = 10 6 , z 3.000
1 Sm
b log b 0.0851
z S'e
Sm
a a 145.8 ksi
103
b
5. To draw the S-N graph over the range 10 3 <= N <= 10 8, define a piecewise continuous function.
b 6
S'f ( N ) return a N if N 10
S'e otherwise
3 5 8
6. Plot the S-N curve over the range N 10 10 10
100
S' f ( N )
ksi
10
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10
N
FIGURE 6-2a
S-N Diagram for Steel for Problem 6-2a
PROBLEM 6-3
Statement: For the bicycle pedal-arm assembly in Figure P6-1 assume a rider-applied force that ranges from 0
1500 N at the pedal each cycle. Determine the fluctuating stresses in the 15-mm-dia pedal arm. Fi
the fatigue safety factor if S ut = 500 MPa.
Given: Material yield strength S y 350 MPa S ut 500 MPa

Applied load Fmax 1500 N Fmin 0 N
Pedal arm diameter d 15 mm
1. From problem 4-3, the maximum principal stresses in the pedal arm due to Fmax are at point A and are
1max 793 MPa 2max 0 MPa 3max 23 MPa

2. Using equation 5.7c, the maximum von Mises stress is
2 2
'max 1max 1max 3max 3max 'max 804.7 MPa
3. The minimum von Mises stress is zero. 'min 0 MPa
4. The alternating and mean components of the von Mises stress are:
'max 'min
'a 'a 402.4 MPa
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 402.4 MPa
2
5. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 250 MPa
z z
a Section C
C Tc A
Frider
Mc
b Arm
B
Arm
Fc y
Pedal
x
x
y
FIGURE 6-3A FIGURE 6-3B

Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-3 Points A and B at Section C
6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating round beam.
Load Cload 1
2 2
Size A95 0.010462 d A95 2.354 mm
A95
d equiv d equiv 5.544 mm
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
Csize 1.189 Csize 1.007 Csize 1
mm
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 (machined)
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
Reliability Creliab 0.753 (R = 99.9%)
7. Calculate the modified endurance limit.

S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S e 163.56 MPa
8. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the factor of safety.
S e S ut
Nf Nf 0.31
'a S ut 'm S e
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach 6-4a-1
PROBLEM 6-4a
Statement: For the strength data in row a in Table P6-2, calculate the uncorrected fatigue strength at 5E8
cycles and draw the strength-life (S-N) diagram for the material, assuming it to be an aluminum
alloy.

1. Using equation (6-5c), calculate the uncorrected fatigue strength at 5E8 cycles.
S'f5E8 return 0.4 S ut if S ut 48 ksi S'f5E8 19.0 ksi
19 ksi otherwise
b
3. The equation for the S-N curve in the HCF region is given by equation (6.10a): S'f = a N
4. Determine the constants a and b from equations (6.10c) and (6.10a). From Table 6-5, for N = 5E8 , z 5.699
1 Sm
b log b 0.1105
z S'f5E8
Sm
a a 173.772 ksi
103
b
b
5. To draw the S-N graph over the range 10 3 <= N <= 10 8, S'f ( N ) a N
3 5 8
6. Plot the S-N curve over the range N 10 1.01 10 10
100
S' f ( N )
ksi
10
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10
N
FIGURE 6-4a
S-N Diagram for Aluminum for Problem 6-4a
PROBLEM 6-5a
Statement: For the data in row a in Table P6-3, find the corrected endurance strength (or limit), create
equations for the S-N line, and draw the S-N diagram.
Given: Material steel Surface finish surface "ground"
Tensile strength S ut 110 ksi Loading load "torsion"
Shape round Temperature T 72
Size (diameter) d 2 in Reliability R 0.999

1. Using equation (6-5a), calculate the uncorrected endurance limit.
S'e return 0.5 S ut if S ut 200 ksi S'e 55.0 ksi
100 ksi otherwise
2. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating round rod.
Load Cload return 1 if load = "bending" Cload 1

return 1 if load = "torsion"
return 0.7 if load = "axial"
Size d equiv d
0.097
d equiv
Csize 0.869 Csize 0.812
in
Surface A return 1.34 if surface = "ground" A 1.34
return 2.70 if surface = "machined"
return 2.70 if surface = "cold_rolled"
return 14.4 if surface = "hot_rolled"
return 39.9 if surface = "forged"
b return 0.085 if surface = "ground" b 0.085

return 0.265 if surface = "machined"
return 0.265 if surface = "cold_rolled"
return 0.718 if surface = "hot_rolled"
return 0.995 if surface = "forged"
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.899
ksi
Temperature Ctemp return 1 if T 840 Ctemp 1
1 0.0032 ( T 840 ) otherwise
Reliability Creliab return 1.000 if R = 0.50 Creliab 0.753

return 0.897 if R = 0.90
return 0.814 if R = 0.99
return 0.753 if R = 0.999
return 0.702 if R = 0.9999
return 0.659 if R = 0.99999

S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S e 30.2 ksi
4. Using equation (6.9), calculate the fatigue strength at N = 10 3 cycles.
S m return 0.75 S ut if load = "axial" S m 99.0 ksi

0.9 S ut otherwise
b
5. The equation for the S-N curve in the HCF region is given by equation (6.10a): Sf = a N
1 Sm
b log b 0.1717
z Se
Sm
a a 324.120 ksi
10
b
3
7. To draw the S-N graph over the range 10 3 <= N <= 10 8, define a piecewise continuous function.
b 6
S f ( N ) return a N if N 10
S e otherwise
3 5 8
8. Plot the S-N curve over the range N 10 10 10
100
Sf ( N )
ksi
10
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10
N
FIGURE 6-5a
S-N Diagram for Problem 6-5a
PROBLEM 6-6
Statement: For the trailer hitch from Problem 3-6 on p. 169 (also see Figures P6-2 and 1-5), find the infinite-lif
fatigue safety factors for all modes of failure assuming that the horizontal impact force of the traile
on the ball is fully reversed. Use steel with S ut = 600 MPa and S y = 450 MPa. Determine safety
factors for:
S y 300 MPa S ut 600 MPa w 64 mm R 32 mm
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A A F a1x
B 19 = t
F b1 B
31 = b
C F a1y
20 = d F a2y
D
Fa2x
F b2
Fc2x
C
D
Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 6-6A
1. The dynamic loading in this problem is fully reversed so the mean stresses are zero and the alternating stresses
are the same as those calculated in Problem 4-6. From Problem 4-6, the alternating components of the principal
stresses in the shank of the ball where it joins the ball bracket are:
a1 1277 MPa a2 0 MPa a3 0 MPa
2. Since 1 is the only nonzero principal stress, it is also the von Mises stress.
'a a1 'a 1277 MPa
Load Cload 1 (bending load)

2 2
Size A95 0.010462 d sh A95 7.072 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

Se
6. Calculate the factor of safety for the ball shank. Na Na 0.14
'a
7. From Problem 4-6, the alternating components of the principal stresses at the bearing area in the ball bracket ho
are:
a1 111.5 MPa a2 0 MPa a3 0 MPa
'a a1 'a 111.5 MPa
9. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors that are different from those in step 4.
Load Cload 0.7 (axial load)
Size Csize 1 (axial load)

Se
11. Calculate the factor of safety for the bearing. Nb Nb 1.17
'a
12. From Problem 4-6, the alternating components of the von Mises stress at the tearout shear area in the ball
bracket hole is:
'a 85.91 MPa
Load Cload 1 (simulated bending load)
A95 2 t ( 32 mm) 0.5 d sh

2 2 2
Size A95 1111 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm

Se
15. Calculate the factor of safety against tearout. Nc Nc 1.6
'a
16. From Problem 4-6, the alternating components of the von Mises stress in the attachment bolts is:
'a 540.5 MPa
Load Cload 0.7 (axial load)
Size Csize 1 (axial load)

Se
19. Calculate the factor of safety against bolt tensile failure. Nd Nd 0.24
'a
20. From Problem 4-6, the alternating components of the principal stresses in the cantilever beam are:
a1 635.5 MPa a2 0 MPa a3 0 MPa
'a a1 'a 635.5 MPa
Load Cload 1 (bending load)
2
Size A95 0.05 w t A95 60.8 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm

Se
24. Calculate the factor of safety for the cantilever beam. Ne Ne 0.25
'a
PROBLEM 6-7
Statement: Design the wrist pin of Problem 3-7 for infinite life with a safety factor of 1.5 if the 2500-g
acceleration is fully reveresed and S ut = 130 ksi.
Tensile strength S ut 130 ksi
Design safety factor Nd 1.5

Fwristpin
2
radius equal to the shear stress. Thus, the principal normal stress is numerically equal to the shear stress,
which in this case is also the principal shear stress, so we have = 1 = '.
F 4 F
3. The shear stress at each shear plane is = = = '
A 2
od id
2
od id S
2 2
Se e
4. For fully reversed loading the factor of safety is, Nd = =
' 4 F
5. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 65 ksi

6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating round pin (uniformly stressed).
Load Cload 1
Size A95 ( id)

od id
2 2 d equiv( id)
A95 ( id)
4 0.0766
0.097
d equiv( id)
Csize( id) 0.869
in
Surface A 1.34 b 0.085 (ground)
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.886
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1
Reliability Creliab 1.000 (R = 50%)

S e( id) Cload Csize( id) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
8. Solving for the inside diameter, guess id 0.2 in
Given
2
2
od id S e( id)
Nd =
4 F
id Find ( id) id 0.299 in
9. Round this down to the decimal equivalent of a common fraction (9/32), id 0.281 in
10. The realized factor of safety is,
2
2
od id S e( id)
Nf Nf 1.8
4 F
PROBLEM 6-8
Statement: A paper machine processes rolls of paper having a density of 984 kg/m3. The paper roll is 1.50-m
OD x 0.22-m ID x 3.23 m long and is on a simply supported, hollow, steel shaft with S ut = 400 MPa
Find the shaft ID needed to obtain a dynamic safety factor of 2 for a 10-year life if the shaft OD is
22 cm and the roll turns at 50 rpm.
y
Given: Paper roll:
kg
Density 984 w
3
m
x
Outside dia. OD 1500 mm
Inside dia. ID 220 mm R L R
Length L 3230 mm
Shaft: V
Strength S ut 400 MPa R
Outside dia. od 220 mm L/2 L
0 x
Design safety factor Nfd 2
Design life Life 10 yr -R
Shaft speed 50 rpm
M
2
wL /8
Assumptions: 1. The shaft is stiffer than the paper roll so the
weight of the roll on the shaft can be modelled as a
uniformly distributed load.
2. The bearings that support the shaft are close to
0 x
the ends of the paper roll and are thin with respect L/2 L
to the length of the roll so we can consider the
distance between the shaft supports to be the FIGURE 6-8
same as the length of the roll.
Load, Shear, and Moment Diagrams
3. There are no stress concentrations near the
for Problem 6-8
point of maximum moment on the shaft.
4. The paper mill operates 3 shifts/day, 365 days/year.
5. The shaft is machined and the material reliabilty is 99.9%.
1. This is a case of fully reversed bending. The FBD for this loading case is shown in Appendix B, Figure B-2b,
with the dimension a equal to 0. That is, the distributed load starts at the left support and ends at the right
support.
2. Calculate the number of stress cycles to see if we will design for finite or infinite life.
9
Nlife Life Nlife 1.652 10 cycles
This is well beyond 10 6 cycles, so we will design for infinite life.
3. Determine the weight of the paper roll and the magnitude of the distributed load on the shaft.
Roll volume V

4
2
OD ID L
2 9
V 5.585 10 mm
3
Roll weight W V g W 53.895 kN
Distributed W N
load on shaft w w 16.686 (a
L mm
4. Figure D-2b shows that the maximum bending moment occurs at the center of the shaft and is
2
w L 7
Mmax Mmax 2.176 10 N mm
8
This is fully reversed bending so Ma Mmax and Mm 0 N mm
5. The stress in the shaft at the point of maximum bending moment will depend upon the, as yet, unknown id. Tha
is,
Area moment of inertia I ( id)

64
4
od id
4 (b)
Ma od
Alternating stress a( id) (c)
2 I ( id)
6. Calculate the modified endurance strength of the shaft.

Unmodified endurance limit S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 200 MPa
Modification factors:
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize 1.189
od
Size Csize 0.705
mm
0.265
Sut
Surface Csurf 4.51 Csurf 0.922
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
Reliability Creliab 0.753
Modified endurance limit

(d)
7. Use the factor of safety equation as a design equation to solve for the unknown id. For fully reversed bending,
the factor of safety is
Se
Nf = (e)
a
Substituting equations b and c into e and solving for id,

1
4
4 32 Nfd Ma od
id od id 191.526 mm
S e
Rounding this, let the shaft ID be id 190 mm
1
This gives a wall thickness of t ( od id) t 15 mm
2
PROBLEM 6-9
Statement: For the Vise Grip plier-wrench is drawn to scale in Figure P6-3, and for which the forces were
analyzed in Problem 3-9 and the stresses in Problem 4-9, find the safety factors for each pin for an
assumed clamping force of P = 4000 N in the position shown. The pins are 8-mm dia, S y = 400 MP
S ut = 520 MPa, and are all in double shear. Assume a desired finite life of 5E4 cycles.
Given: Pin stresses as calculated in Problem 4-9:
Pin 1-2 12 74.6 MPa Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Pin 1-4 14 50.7 MPa Tensile strength S ut 520 MPa
Pin 2-3 23 50.7 MPa Pin diameter d 8 mm
4
Pin 3-4 34 50.7 MPa Desired life Nlife 5 10
Assumptions: 1. Links 3 and 4 are in a toggle position, i.e., the pin that joins links 3 and 4 is in line with the pins
F 4
P
1
3 2
P
55.0 = b 50.0 = a
F14
39.5 = c 22.0 = d
F
129.2 1
4
F41 F34
F21 P

28.0 = e

P 2.8 = g

F43

3 F12
21.2 = h
F23 2
F32
26.9 = f
FIGURE 6-9
2. The pins are in pure shear, so the principal stresses are

Pin joining 1 and 2 '12 3 12 '12 129.211 MPa
All other pins '14 3 14 '14 87.815 MPa
3. This is a case of repeated fatigue loading. The alternating and mean von Mises stress components are:
Pin joining 1 and 2 '12a 0.5 '12 '12m '12a
All other pins '14a 0.5 '14 '14m '14a
5. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a non rotating round pin (uniformly stressed).
Load Cload 1
2
d 2
Size A95 A95 50.265 mm
4
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.86
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

7. Using equation (6.9), calculate the fatigue strength at N = 10 3 cycles. S m 0.9 S ut S m 468 MPa
b
1 Sm
b log b 0.0851
z S'e
Sm
a a 842.4 MPa
10
b
3
4 b
10. Calculate the corrected fatigue strength at Nlife 5 10 cycles. S f a Nlife S f 335.49 MPa
S f S ut
Pin joining 1 and 2 Nf Nf 3.2
'12a S ut '12m S f
S f S ut
All other pins Nf Nf 4.6
'14a S ut '14m S f
PROBLEM 6-10
Statement: An overhung diving board is shown in Figure P6-4a. A 100-kg person is standing on the free end.
Assume cross-sectional dimensions of 305 mm x 32 mm. What is the fatigue safety factor for
infinite life if the material is brittle fiberglass with S f = 39 MPa @ N = 5E8 cycles and S ut = 130 MP
in the longitudinal direction?
2000 = L
Given: Mass of person M 100 kg R1 P

Board dimensions w 305 mm
t 32 mm
Load dimensions b 700 mm
R2
L 2000 mm
Material properties S ut 130 MPa
S f5E8 39 MPa 700 = b
FIGURE 6-10
Assumptions: 1. The given fatigue strength is fully corrected.
2. There are no stress-concentrations near the point of maximum moment on the diving board.
1. This is a case of repeated bending. The FBD for this loading case is shown in Appendix B, Figure B-3a, with th
dimension a equal to L. That is, the concentrated force F is at the end of the overhung beam.
2. Determine the weight of the person on the end of the board.
Weight W M g W 980.7 N (a)
3. Figure B-3a in Appendix B shows that the maximum bending moment occurs at the right-hand support and is
6
Mmax W ( L b ) Mmax 1.275 10 N mm
This is repeated bending so
Mmax
Ma and Mm Ma
2
4. The stress in the board at the point of maximum bending moment is
3
w t 5 4
Area moment of inertia I I 8.329 10 mm (b)
12
Ma t
Alternating stress a a 12.2 MPa (c)
2 I
Mm t
Mean stress m m 12.2 MPa (d)
2 I
5. For repeated (fluctuating) bending, the factor of safety for Case 3 loading is
S f5E8 S ut
Nf Nf 2.4 (e)
a S ut m S f5E8
PROBLEM 6-11
stands on it. What is the fatigue safety factor for finite life if the material is brittle fiberglass with S
= 39 MPa @ N = 5E8 cycles and S ut = 130 MPa in the longitudinal direction?
Given: Maximum principal stresses due to 2000 = L

bending at R2 from Problem 4-11
1max 76.3 MPa R1 P
2max 0 MPa
3max 0 MPa
Ultimate strength S ut 130 MPa R2
Fatigue strength S f 39 MPa

8
Fatigue life Ncycle 5 10 700 = b
FIGURE 6-11
Solution: See Figure 6-11 and Mathcad file P0611. Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-11
1. The dynamic loading in this case is repeated, i.e., the stresses go from zero to the maximum values given above.
Thus, the minimum and maximum von Mises stresses are:
2 2
'max 1max 1max 3max 3max
'max 76.3 MPa 'min 0 MPa
'max 'min
'a 'a 38.1 MPa
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 38.1 MPa
2
3. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to calculate the factor of safety.
S f S ut
Nf Nf 0.79
'a S ut 'm S f
PROBLEM 6-12
2000
Given: Mass of person M 100 kg
1300 = L
Board dimensions w 305 mm
t 32 mm P
Load dimensions L 1300 mm
Material properties S ut 130 MPa
S f5E8 39 MPa M1
R1
Assumptions: 1. The given fatigue strength is fully corrected. 700

2. There are no stress-concentrations near the
point of maximum moment on the diving board. FIGURE 6-12
1. This is a case of repeated bending. The FBD for this loading case is shown in Appendix B, Figure B-1a, with
the dimension a equal to L. That is, the concentrated force F is at the end of the cantilever beam.
2. Determine the weight of the person on the end of the board.
Weight W M g W 980.7 N (a)
3. Figure B-1a in Appendix B shows that the maximum bending moment occurs at the support and is
6
Mmax W L Mmax 1.275 10 N mm
This is repeated bending so
Mmax
Ma and Mm Ma
2
4. The stress in the board at the point of maximum bending moment is
3
w t 5 4
Area moment of inertia I I 8.329 10 mm (b)
12
Ma t
Alternating stress a a 12.2 MPa (c)
2 I
Mm t
Mean stress m m 12.2 MPa (d)
2 I
5. For repeated (fluctuating) bending, the factor of safety for Case 3 loading is
S f5E8 S ut
Nf Nf 2.4 (e)
a S ut m S f5E8
PROBLEM 6-13
Statement: Repeat Problem 6-11 using the cantilevered diving board design in Figure P6-4b. Assume the
board weighs 19 kg and deflects 8.5 cm statically when the person stands on it.
2000
1max 87.1 MPa
P
2max 0 MPa
3max 0 MPa
Ultimate strength S ut 130 MPa M1
R1
Fatigue strength S f 39 MPa
8 700
Fatigue life Ncycle 5 10
FIGURE 6-13
Solution: See Figure 6-13 and Mathcad file P0613. Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-13
1. The dynamic loading in this case is repeated, i.e., the stresses go from zero to the maximum values given above.
Thus, the minimum and maximum von Mises stresses are:
2 2
'max 1max 1max 3max 3max
'max 87.1 MPa 'min 0 MPa
'max 'min
'a 'a 43.5 MPa
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 43.5 MPa
2
S f S ut
Nf Nf 0.69
'a S ut 'm S f
PROBLEM 6-14
Design the aluminum cantilever beam sections on which she stands to survive jumping 2 in off
the ground with a dynamic safety factor of 2 for a finite life of 5E4 cycles. Use 2000 series
aluminum. Define and size the beam shape.
Given: Heat treated 2024 aluminum:

4
Design life Nlife 5 10
Assumptions: The beam will have a rectangular cross-

section with the load applied at a distance
of 5 in from the central support.
L 5 in

1. From Problem 3-14, the total dynamic force on both Fi /2 Fi /2
foot supports is
Fimax 224 lbf Fimin 0 lbf

Therefore, the load on each support is
Fimax
Pmax Pmax 112 lbf
2
Fimin
Pmin Pmin 0 lbf
2
2. To give adequate support to the childs foot, let the P

width of the support beam be w 1.5 in
FIGURE 5-14
3. From Figure B-1(a) in Appendix B, the maximum Free Body Diagram for Problem 5-14
Mmax Pmax L Mmax 560 in lbf Mmin 0 in lbf
4. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the bending moment.

Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 280 in lbf
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 280 in lbf
2
5. Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 19 ksi @ 5E8 cycles
6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating rectangular beam.
Load Cload 1
A95 ( t)
Size A95 ( t) 0.05 w t d equiv( t)
0.0766
0.097
d equiv( t)
Csize( t) 0.869
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.897
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e( t) Cload Csize( t) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
b
10. Determine the constants a and b from equations (6.10c) and (6.10a). From Table 6-5, for N = 5E8 , z 5.699
1 Sm Sm
b ( t) log a ( t)
Se( t)
103
z b( t )
4 b( t )
11. Determine the corrected fatigue strength at Nlife 5 10 cycles. S f ( t) a ( t) Nlife
12. We can now determine the minimum required section depth, t. Using the distortion-energy failure theory
with the modified Goodman diagram, the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress,
which will also be the von Mises stress. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the
factor of safety. Guess t 10 mm.
M c t 12 6 M
Bending stress = = M =
I 2 3 2
w t w t
Given
2 S f ( t) S ut
w t
Nfd =
6 Ma S ut Mm S f ( t)
t Find ( t) t 0.304 in
Using this value of t, the values of the functions of t are:
Csize( t) 0.912 S e( t) 15.545 ksi S f ( t) 38.981 ksi
The realized safety factor is

2 S f ( t) S ut
w t
Nf Nf 3.0
6 Ma S ut Mm S f ( t)
PROBLEM 6-15a
Statement: For a notched part having a notch dimension r, geometric stress concentration factor Kt, and
material strength S ut as shown in row a of Table P6-4, find the Neuber factor a, the material's notch
sensitivity q, and the fatigue stress-concentration factor Kf.
Given: Ultimate tensile strength S ut 100 ksi Notch radius r 0.25 in

Geometric stress-concentration factor Kt 3.3 Material is steel
Loading "Bending"
1
2 2
1. From Table 6-6, the Neuber constant for S ut 100 ksi is a 0.062 in a 0.062 in
1
2. Using equation 6-13, the notch sensitivity is q q 0.890
a
1
r
3. The fatigue stress-concentration factor, from equation 6.11b, is

Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 3.05
PROBLEM 6-16
varied to cause the ball to drop at different locations. Find the infinite-life safety factor for the
1-in dia SAE 1010 cold-rolled steel rods.
(a) Assume rods are simply supported at each end.
(b) Assume rods are fixed at each end.

Rod diameter d 1.00 in a Fball

R1 L R2
1. The maximum bending stress will occur at the outer
fibers of the rod at the section where the maximum
bending moment occurs which, in this case, is at x = a. FIGURE 6-16A
The only stress present on the top or bottom surface Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-16(a), taken
of the rod is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the on a plane through the rod axis and ball center
bottom surface where the stress is tensile, sx is the

principal stress 1 . Thus, from Problem 4-16, for a
simply supported rod,
Maximum principal stress 1 748 psi
2. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to 1 for each ball that rolls down the track. The alternating and mean
components of the von Mises stress are:
Alternating von Mises stress 'a 0.5 1 'a 374 psi
Mean von Mises stress 'm 0.5 1 'm 374 psi
3. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 26.5 ksi
Load Cload 1
2 A95
Size A95 0.010462 d d equiv
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.943
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut
Case a Nfa Nfa 32
'a S ut 'm S e
7. For the built-in case, the maximum bending stress a Fball

will occur at the outer fibers of the rod at the
section where the maximum bending moment
occurs which, in this case, is at x = L. The only M1
R1 L R 2 M2
stress present on the top or bottom surface of the
rod is the bending stress x. Therefore, on the FIGURE 6-16B
bottom surface where the stress is tensile, sx is the Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-16(b), taken on a
principal stress 1 . Thus, from Problem 4-16, for a plane through the rod axis and ball center
simply supported rod,
Maximum principal stress 1 577 psi
8. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to 1 for each ball that rolls down the track. The alternating and mean
Alternating von Mises stress 'a 0.5 1 'a 288.5 psi
Mean von Mises stress 'm 0.5 1 'm 288.5 psi
S e S ut
Case b Nfb Nfb 42
'a S ut 'm S e
PROBLEM 6-17
rectangular cross-sectional dimensions are 0.75 x 0.312 in. Find the safety factor for the tongs for
5E5 cycles if their S ut = 50 ksi.
F
Given: Tensile strength S ut 50 ksi C
Cross-section: FC
Width w 0.312 in O 3.5 = cy
Depth h 0.75 in FO
5
Life Nf 5 10 11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
A
12.0 = by
Assumptions: The tongs are forged. Use 99.99% reliability.
Operating temperature is between 32F and 70F. 5.0 = bx
FB
Solution: See Problem 4-17, Figure 6-17, and
B
Mathcad file P0617.
1. The maximum bending stress in the tong was found W/2
in Problem 4-17 at point A.
FIGURE 6-17
Vertical direction i 8.58 ksi
All other components are zero.
1max i 1max 8.58 ksi 2max 0 ksi 3max 0 ksi
3. The dynamic loading in this case is repeated, thus

1min 0 ksi 2min 0 ksi 3min 0 ksi
4. Even though this is a brittle material, for HCF analysis, determine the von Mises effective stresses. Since there i
only one nonzero stress,
'max 1max 'max 8.58 ksi
'min 1min 'min 0 ksi
'max 'min
'a 'a 4.29 ksi
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 4.29 ksi
2

Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 7.548 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
Surface A 39.9 b 0.995 (forged)
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.814
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

8. Using equation (6.9), calculate the fatigue strength at N = 10 3 cycles. S m 0.9 S ut S m 45 ksi
b
1 Sm
b log b 0.1733
z Se
Sm
a a 148.991 ksi
10
b
3
b
11. Using equation (6.10a), determine the fatigue strength. S f5E5 a Nf S f5E5 15.326 ksi
S f5E5 S ut
Nf5E5 Nf5E5 2.7
'a S ut 'm S f5E5
PROBLEM 6-18
rectangular cross-sectional dimensions are 0.75 x 0.312 in. Find the safety factor for the tongs
for 5E5 cycles if they are made of Class 40 gray cast iron.
Given: Tensile strength S ut 42 ksi F

Cross-section:
Width w 0.312 in C
FC
Depth h 0.75 in 3.5 = cy
O
5 FO
Life Nf 5 10
11.0 = ax 2.0 = cx
Assumptions: The tongs are as-cast. Use 99.99%
A
reliability. Operating temperature is 12.0 = by
between 32F and 70F. Set Csurf to 1 for a
5.0 = bx
cast finish, which does not need a
surface factor. FB
Solution: See Problem 4-18, Figure 6-18, and B
Mathcad file P0618.
W/2
1. The maximum bending stress in the tong was found in
Problem 4-17 at point A.
FIGURE 6-18
Vertical direction i 8.58 ksi Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-18
All other components are zero.
1max i 1max 8.58 ksi 2max 0 ksi 3max 0 ksi
3. The dynamic loading in this case is repeated, thus

1min 0 ksi 2min 0 ksi 3min 0 ksi
4. Even though this is a brittle material, for HCF analysis, determine the von Mises effective stresses. Since
there is only one nonzero stress,
'max 1max 'max 8.58 ksi
'min 1min 'min 0 ksi
'max 'min
'a 'a 4.29 ksi
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 4.29 ksi
2
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 7.548 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
Surface Csurf 1
Temperature Ctemp 1

b
1 Sm
b log b 0.1758
z Se
Sm
a a 127.305 ksi
10
b
3
b
11. Using equation (6.10a), determine the fatigue strength. S f5E5 a Nf S f5E5 12.678 ksi
S f5E5 S ut
Nf5E5 Nf5E5 2.3
'a S ut 'm S f5E5
PROBLEM 6-19
Statement: Determine the size of the clevis pin shown in Figure P6-8 needed to withstand an applied repeated
force of 0 to 130000 lb for infinite life. Also determine the required outside radius of the clevis
end to not fail in either tearout or bearing if the clevis flanges are each 2.5 in thick. Use a safety
factor of 3. Assume S ut = 140 ksi for the pin and S ut = 80 ksi for the clevis.
Given: Minimum force Pmin 0 lbf Material strength:

Maximum force Pmax 130 kip Pin S utp 140 ksi
Flange thickness t 2.5 in Clevis S utc 80 ksi
Factor of safety against fatigue failure Nf 3
Assumptions: The parts are machined. Use 90% reliability and room temperature.

1. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the forces on the clevis and link.
Pmax Pmin
Pa Pa 65 kip
2
Pmax Pmin
Pm Pm 65 kip
2
Stress in Pin
2. The pin is in double shear and there is no stress-concentration. The alternating and mean loads at one section
on the pin are
1 Pa 1 Pm
a = m = (1)
2 Apin 2 Apin
2
d
3. The cross-section area of the pin is Apin ( d ) (2)
4
4. The alternating and mean shear stresses and von Mises stresses are
Pa Pm
a( d ) m( d ) (3)
2 Apin ( d ) 2 Apin ( d )
'a( d ) 3 a( d ) 'm( d ) 3 m( d )
(4)
Pin Strength
5. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'ep 0.5 S utp S'ep 70 ksi
6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating round pin in bending.
Load Cload 1
2 A95 ( d )
Size A95 ( d ) 0.010462 d d equiv( d )
0.0766
0.097
dequiv( d)
Csize( d ) 0.869
in
b
S utp
Csurf A Csurf 0.729
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

S ep( d ) Cload Csize( d ) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'ep (5)
Design Equation
8. Using the modified-Goodman failure criterion and a case 3 load line, the factor of safety is given by equation
6-18e as
S e S ut
Nf = (6)
'a S ut 'm S e
9. Substituting equations 4 and 5 into 6 and solving for d yields Guess d 2.0 in
Given
S ep( d ) S utp
Nf =
'a( d ) S utp 'm( d ) S ep( d )
d Find ( d ) d 2.632 in
Rounding to the next higher eighth of an inch, let d 2.750 in
With this value of d, we have
'a( d ) 9.5 ksi 'm( d ) 9.5 ksi S ep( d ) 39.71 ksi
and the realized factor of safety against fatigue failure in the pin is
S ep( d ) S utp
Nf Nf 3.3
'a( d ) S utp 'm( d ) S ep( d )
Tearout length
Clevis Tearout (See Figure 6-19)
10. Let the outside radius of the clevis be R. Then the tearout
area is
2 2
Atear ( R) 2 t R ( 0.5 d )
11. The alternating and mean shear stresses and von Mises
stresses are d R
Pa Pm
a( R) m( R) (7) FIGURE 6-19
2 Atear ( R) 2 Atear ( R) Tearout Diagram for Problem 6-19
'a( R) 3 a( R) 'm( R) 3 m( R) (8)
Clevis Strength
12. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'ec 0.5 S utc S'ec 40 ksi
13. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating rectangular shear area (uniformly stressed).
Load Cload 1
A95 ( R)
Size A95 ( R) Atear ( R) d equiv( R)
0.0766
0.097
d equiv( R)
Csize( R) 0.869
in
b
S utc
Csurf A Csurf 0.845
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

S ec( R) Cload Csize( R) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'ec (9)
Design Equation
15. Using the modified-Goodman failure criterion and a case 3 load line, the factor of safety is given by equation
6-18e as
S e S ut
Nf = (10)
'a S ut 'm S e
16. Substituting equations 8 and 9 into 10 and solving for R yields Guess R 2 in
Given
S ec( R) S utc
Nf =
'a( R) S utc 'm( R) S ec( R)
R Find ( R) R 2.624 in R 2.625 in
Bearing Stress
The maximum bearing stress in the hole in each flange is
Pa Pm
maxbear maxbear 9.5 ksi
2 d t
This is small compared to the ultimate strength of the clevis.

PROBLEM 6-20
Statement: A 100 N-m torque is applied to a 1-m-long, solid round steel shaft. Design it to limit its angular
deflection to 2 deg and select a steel alloy to have a fatigue safety factor of 2 for infinite life.
Given: Applied torque Ta 100 N m Tm 0 N m
Shaft length L 1000 mm
Max deflection max 2 deg
Assumptions: There are no stress-concentrations anywhere on the shaft. The shaft is machined, reliability is
99.9%, and the it is at room temperature.
1. This is a case of fully reversed torsion. We will use the von Mises effective stress so the load factor will be 1.
The maximum torque is Tmax Ta Tm Tmax 100 N m
2. The diameter of the shaft can be found from equations 4.24 and 4.25 with = max.
Tmax L 32 Tmax L
max = =
J G 4
d G
1
4
32 Tmax L
Solving for d, d d 24.514 mm
max G
Rounding, let d 24.5 mm
3. Now, we can solve for the stress in the shaft.
Polar moment 4 4 4
of inertia J d J 3.537 10 mm
32
Ta d
Torsional stress a a 34.632 MPa
2 J
The corresponding von Mises normal stress is
von Mises stress 'a 3 a 'a 59.984 MPa
4. Using the factor of safety equation for reversed loading, calculate the required endurance limit
Se
Nf = S e Nfd 'a S e 119.967 MPa
'a
5. This endurance limit is a function of the unknown ultimate tensile strength. Use the endurance limit modificati
equation to determine the required S ut.
S e = Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a solid, round steel shaft.
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize 1.189
d
Size Csize 0.872
mm
b
S ut
Csurf = A
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
Uncorrected
endurance strength S'e = 0.5 S ut
7. Substituting these into the equation above and solving for S ut,
1
b 1
Se
S ut MPa S ut 395 MPa
0.5 A Csize Creliab MPa
Based on this requirement, choose AISI 1020 cold-rolled steel that will be machined to size.
8. Check the actual factor of safety based on the material chosen. For this material, S ut 469 MPa
b
Sut
Surface factor Csurf A Csurf 0.884
MPa
Uncorrected
endurance strength S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 234.5 MPa
Corrected
endurance strength S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
S e 136.0 MPa
Se
Factor of safety Nf Nf 2.3
'a
PROBLEM 6-21
tighten the wheel nuts, a single-ended wrench in (a), and a double-ended wrench in (b). The
distance between points A and B is 1 ft in both cases and the handle diameter is 0.625 in. How
many cycles of tightening can be expected before a fatigue failure if the average tightening torque
is 100 ft-lb and the material S ut = 60 ksi?
Given: Distance between A and B d AB 1 ft Minimum torque Tmin 0 ft lbf

Wrench diameter d 0.625 in Maximum torque Tmax 100 ft lbf
4. The surface is as-forged, the reliability is 50%, and the wrench will not be used in extremely ho
or cold environments.

12" = dAB
1. From examination of the FBDs, we see that, in F
both cases, the arms are in bending and the
stub that holds the socket wrench is in pure
torsion. The maximum bending stress in the
arm will occur near the point where the arm
transitions to the stub. The stress state at
this transition is very complicated, but we can T
find the nominal bending stress there by F
treating the arm as a cantilever beam, fixed at (a) Single-ended Wrench
the transition point. For both cases the
torque in the stub is the same.
Case (a) 12" = dAB

F
6"
M = F d AB = T
Tmax Tmin T
Ma
2 F
Ma 600 in lbf
FIGURE 6-21
Mm Ma Free Body Diagrams for Problem 6-21
3. The alternating and mean components of the bending stress at this point are found from
4
Moment of inertia 4 I in
d
I
64
Ma c
Alternating stress xa xa 25.033 ksi
I
Mm c
Mean stress xm xm 25.033 ksi
I
1 = x 2 0 psi 3 0 psi
5. Since there is only one nonzero principal stress, the von Mises stress is ' = 1 = x and
'a xa 'm xm
6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to solve for the fatigue strength at which the wrench will fail
(safety factor of 1).
S f S ut 'a S ut
Nf = =1 S f S f 42.954 ksi
'a S ut 'm S f S ut 'm
7. Using equation (6-5a), calculate the uncorrected endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 30 ksi
Load Cload 1
2 A95
Size A95 0.010462 d d equiv
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
in
Surface A 39.9 b 0.995 (as forged)
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.679
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

10. Using equation (6.9), calculate the fatigue strength at N = 10 3 cycles. S m 0.9 S ut S m 54 ksi
b
1 Sm
b log b 0.1409
z Se
Sm
a a 142.955 ksi
10
b
3
1
b
Sf 3
13. Calculate the number of cycles to failure using equation (6.10a) Na Na 5.1 10
a
Case (b)
F d AB T
14. The bending moment at the transition is M= =
2 2
M c Tc
15. The tensile stress at this point is found from x = =
I 2 I
16. The bending stress in the handle for case (b) is one half that of case (a). However, the torque in the stub is the
same in both cases. The shear stress at any point on the outside surface of the stub is found from
4
Tmax c
Maximum shear stress xymax xymax 25.03 ksi
J
Tmin c
Minimum shear stress xymin xymin 0 ksi
J
xymax xymin
Alternating shear stress a a 12.52 ksi
2
xymax xymin
Mean shear stress m m 12.52 ksi
2
1a a 1a 12.5 ksi 2a 0 psi 3a 1a
2 2
and 'a 1a 1a 3a 3a 'a 21.7 ksi
'm 'a 'm 21.7 ksi
18. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to solve for the fatigue strength at which the wrench will fail
(safety factor of 1).
S f S ut 'a S ut
Nf = =1 S f S f 33.944 ksi
'a S ut 'm S f S ut 'm
1
b
Sf 4
19. Calculate the number of cycles to failure using equation (6.10a) Nb Nb 2.7 10
a
PROBLEM 6-22
Statement: A roller-blade skate is shown in Figure P6-10. The polyurethane wheels are 72 mm dia and spaced
on 104-mm centers. The skate-boot-foot combination weighs 2 kg. The effective "spring rate" of
the person-skate subsystem is 6000 N/m. The axles are 10-mm-dia steel pins in double shear with
S ut = 550 MPa. Find the fatigue safety factor for the pins when a 100-kg person lands a 0.5-m jump
on one foot assuming infinite life.
(a) Assume all 4 wheels land simultaneously.
Given: Axle pin diameter d 10 mm Tensile strength S ut 550 MPa

Assumptions: Pins are machined and reliability is 99.999%.
1. From Problem 4-22, we have the stresses for cases (a) and (b): a 5.71 MPa b 22.9 MPa
2. The dynamic loading in this case is repeated so the stresses given in step 1 are the maximum and the minimum
stresses are zero. Determine the minimum, maximum, alternating, and mean von Mises stresses.
Part (a) 'maxa 3 a 'maxa 9.89 MPa 'mina 0 MPa
'maxa 'mina
'aa 'aa 4.945 MPa
2
'maxa 'mina
'ma 'ma 4.945 MPa
2
Part (b) 'maxb 3 b 'maxb 39.664 MPa 'minb 0 MPa
'maxb 'minb
'ab 'ab 19.832 MPa
2
'maxb 'minb
'mb 'mb 19.832 MPa
2
4. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating round pin.
Load Cload 1
2
d 2
Size A95 A95 78.54 mm
4
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.847
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut
Part (a) Nfa Nfa 21.3
'aa S ut 'ma S e
S e S ut
Part (b) Nfb Nfb 5.3
'ab S ut 'mb S e
PROBLEM 6-23a
Statement: The beam in Figure P6-11a is subjected to a sinusoidal force-time function with Fmax = F and Fmin
= -F/2, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-5. Find the stress state in
the beam due to this loading and choose a material specification that will give a safety factor of 3
for N = 5E8 cycles.
L
b
Distance to concen. load b 0.6 m
Concentrated load F 500 N F
Moment of inertia
8 4
I 2.85 10 m
2 R1 R2
FIGURE 6-23
8 Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-23
Cycle life Nf 5 10
1. The minimum, maximum, alternating, and mean components of the loads are:
F
Fmax F Fmax 500 N Fmin Fmin 250 N
2
Fmax Fmin Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 375 N Fm Fm 125 N
2 2
2. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the maximum bending moment on the beam using the equati
in Figure B-2(a) in Appendix B.
Ma Fa b 1
b
Ma 90 N m
L
Mm Fm b 1
b
Mm 30 N m
L
3. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the maximum bending stress in the beam using equation
(4.11b). These are principal stresses and also von Mises stresses.
M a c
'a 'a 63.158 MPa
I
Mm c
'm 'm 21.053 MPa
I
4. Calculate the beam cross-section dimensions from I and c.
Beam depth h 2 c h 40 mm
12 I
Beam width w w 5.344 mm
3
h
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 10.688 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
Surface Csurf 1
Temperature Ctemp 1
Reliability Creliab 1 (R = 50%)
6. Determine the modified endurance limit as a function of the unknown endurance limit.
S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab 0.5 S ut
7. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) as the design equation.
S e S ut S ut
Nd =
'a S ut 'm S e S ut
8. Solve the equations in steps 6 and 7 simultaneously for the desired S ut.
Nd 2 'a Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab 'm

S ut
Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab
S ut 468 MPa
9. Choose AISI 1020, cold-rolled steel (see Appendix A, Table A-9).
PROBLEM 6-24a
Statement: The beam in Figure P6-11b is subjected to a sinusoidal force-time function with Fmax = F and
Fmin = F/2, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-5. Find the stress
state in the beam due to this loading and choose a material specification that will give a safety
factor of 1.5 for N = 5E8 cycles.
Concentrated load F 500 N L
Moment of inertia
8 4
I 2.85 10 m
F
2
8 M1
Cycle life Nf 5 10
R1
FIGURE 6-24
1. The minimum, maximum, alternating, and mean components Free Body Diagram for Problem 6-24
of the loads are:
F
Fmax F Fmax 500 N Fmin Fmin 250 N
2
Fmax Fmin Fmax Fmin
2 2
Ma Fa L Ma 125 N m
Mm Fm L Mm 375 N m
M a c
'a 'a 87.719 MPa
I
Mm c
'm 'm 263.158 MPa
I
12 I
3
h
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 10.688 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
Surface Csurf 1
Temperature Ctemp 1
6. Determine the modified endurance limit as a function of the unknown endurance limit assuming the material is
steel.
S e S ut S ut
Nd =
'a S ut 'm S e S ut

S ut
S ut 676 MPa
9. Choose AISI 1060 hot-rolled steel (see Appendix A, Table C-9).
PROBLEM 6-25a
Statement: The beam in Figure P6-11c is subjected to a sinusoidal force-time function with Fmax = F and
Fmin = 0, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-5. Find the stress
state in the beam due to this loading and choose a material specification that will give a safety
factor of 2.5 for N = 5E8 cycles.

Distance between supports b 0.6 m L
Concentrated load F 500 N b
Moment of inertia
F
8 4
I 2.85 10 m
2
Design safety factor Nd 2.5 R1 R2
8 FIGURE 6-25
Cycle life Nf 5 10
1. The minimum, maximum, alternating, and mean components of the loads are:
Fmax F Fmax 500 N Fmin 0 N Fmin 0 N
Fmax Fmin Fmax Fmin

2 2
Ma Fa ( b L) Ma 100 N m
Mm Fm ( b L) Mm 100 N m
M a c
'a 'a 70.175 MPa
I
Mm c
'm 'm 70.175 MPa
I
12 I
3
h
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 10.688 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
Surface Csurf 1
Temperature Ctemp 1
6. Determine the modified endurance limit as a function of the unknown endurance limit assuming the material is
steel.
S e S ut S ut
Nd =
'a S ut 'm S e S ut

S ut
S ut 550 MPa
9. Choose AISI 1035 cold-rolled steel (see Appendix A, Table A-9).
PROBLEM 6-26a
Statement: The beam in Figure P6-11d is subjected to a sinusoidal force-time function with Fmax = F and Fmin
= -F, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-5. Find the stress state in
the beam due to this loading and choose a material specification that will give a safety factor of 6
for N = 5E8 cycles.

Distance to concentrated load a 0.4 m b
Distance to 2nd support b 0.6 m a F
Moment of inertia
8 4
I 2.85 10 m R1 R2 R3
2
Design safety factor Nfd 6 FIGURE 6-26A
8
Cycle life Nlife 5 10

1. To determine the stresses, we must first get the maximum bending moment. From inspection of Figure P6-26,
write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x>-1 - F<x - a>-1 + R2<x - b>-1 - R3<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x>0 - F<x - a>0 + R2<x - b>0 - R3<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x>1 - F<x - a>1 + R2<x - b>1 - R3<x - L>1
(x) = [R1<x>2/2 - F<x - a>2/2 + R2<x - b>2/2 + R3<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x>3/6 - F<x - a>3/6 + R2<x - b>3/6 + R3<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
6. Evaluate R1, R2, R3, C3 and C4
At x = 0, x = b, and x = L; y = 0, therefore, C4 = 0.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
2
Guess R1 100 N R2 100 N R3 100 N C3 5 N m
Given
R1 3 F 3 3
b ( b a ) C 3 b = 0 N m
6 6
R1 3 F 3 R2 3 3
L ( L a) ( L b ) C3 L = 0 N m
6 6 6
R1 F R2 R3 = 0 N
R1 L F ( L a ) R2 ( L b ) = 0 N m
R1
R
2 Find R R R C
R3 1 2 3 3

C3
2
R1 111.11 N R2 472.22 N R3 83.33 N C3 5.556 N m

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) F S ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) R3 S ( x L)
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 in) x F S ( x a ) ( x a ) R2 S ( x b ) ( x b )

200 60
0 35
V ( x) M ( x)
200 10
N Nm
400 15
600 40
3 3
0 200 400 600 800 1 10 0 200 400 600 800 1 10
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 6-26aB
11. From Figure 6-26aB, the maximum moment occurs at x = a. The maximum, minimum, alternating and mean
bending moments at x = a are:
Mmax M ( a ) Mmax 44.4 N m Mmin Mmax
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 44.444 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 0 N m
2
M a c
'a 'a 31.189 MPa
I
Mm c
'm 'm 0 MPa
I
12 I
3
h
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 w h A95 10.688 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
S ut
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 Csurf S ut A
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
15. Determine the modified endurance limit as a function of the unknown endurance limit.
S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf S ut Ctemp Creliab 0.5 S ut
16. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) as the design equation and solve for S ut.
Guess S ut 100 MPa

Given
S e S ut S ut
Nfd = S ut Find S ut S ut 447 MPa
'a S ut 'm S e S ut
Csurf S ut 0.895
18. Choose AISI 1020, cold-rolled steel (see Appendix A, Table A-9).
PROBLEM 6-27
Determine a suitable value for dimension a in the figure for an infinite-life fatigue safety factor of
2. Assume dimension b = 100 mm and that the mandrel is solid and inserts halfway into the
paper roll.
(a) The beam is a ductile material with S ut = 600 MPa.
(b) The beam is a cast-brittle material with S ut = 300 MPa.
3
ID 0.22 m Design safety factor Nfd 2
Lroll 3.23 m Brittle tensile strength S utb 300 MPa
Ductile tensile strength S uta 600 MPa
Assumptions: The paper roll's weight creates a

concentrated load acting at the tip of
the mandrel. The mandrel's root fits a
tightly in the stanchion so it can be
modeled as a cantilever beam. The
M1 Lm
mandrel is machined, reliability is 90%,
R1
and it operates at room temperature.
FIGURE 6-27
1. Determine the weight of the roll and the length of the mandrel.
Weight W

2 2
4
Length Lm 0.5 Lroll Lm 1.615 m
2. The maximum moment occurs at a section where the mandrel root leaves the stanchion and is
Mmax W Lm Mmax 87.04 kN m
3. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to Mmax on each stress cycle, thus Mmin 0 kN m
4. Part (a) - Calculate the alternating and mean components of the bending moment.
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 43520 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 43520 N m
2
5. Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S uta S'e 300 MPa
Load Cload 1
2 A95 ( a )
Size A95 ( a ) 0.010462 a d equiv( a )
0.0766
0.097
dequiv( a)
Csize( a ) 1.189
mm
b
S uta
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e( a ) Cload Csize( a ) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
8. We can now determine the minimum required diameter, a. Using the distortion-energy failure theory with
the modified Goodman diagram, the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress, which will
also be the von Mises stress. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the factor of
safety. Guess a 100 mm.
M c a 64 32 M
I 2 4 3
a a
Given
3 S e( a ) S uta
a
Nfd =
32 Ma S uta Mm S e( a )
a Find ( a ) a 186.864 mm
Round this up to the next higher even value a 190 mm

Using this value of a, the values of the functions of a are:
Csize( a ) 0.787 S e( a ) 175.371 MPa

3 S e( a ) S uta
a
Nfa Nfa 2.1
9. Part (b) - Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.4 S utb S'e 120 MPa
10. Calculate the endurance limit size modification factor for a nonrotating rectangular beam.
2 A95 ( a )
Size A95 ( a ) 0.010462 a d equiv( a )
0.0766
0.097
dequiv( a)
Csize( a ) 1.189
mm
12. We can now determine the minimum required diameter, a. Using the distortion-energy failure theory with the
modified Goodman diagram, the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress, which will also
be the von Mises stress. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the factor of safety.
Guess a 100 mm.
M c a 64 32 M
I 2 4 3
a a
Given
3 S e( a ) S utb
a
Nfd =
32 Ma S utb Mm S e( a )
a Find ( a ) a 251.687 mm

Csize( a ) 0.766 S e( a ) 68.253 MPa

3 S e( a ) S utb
a
Nfb Nfb 2.0
PROBLEM 6-28
1-ft-wide ramps of steel to have a safety factor of 2 for infinite life in the worst case of loading as
the truck travels up them. Minimize the weight of the ramps by using a sensible cross-sectional
geometry. Choose an appropriate steel or aluminum alloy.

Platform height h 4 ft Truck weight W 5000 lbf
L
b
a CG a
y
CG b
R1

Fa Fb x
Wa
Wb
R2
FIGURE 6-28A
1. From Problem 3-28 the maximum bending moment in the ramp occurs at the rear wheel of the truck and is
Mmax 8324 ft lbf Mmax 99888 in lbf Mmin 0 in lbf
The alternating and mean components of the bending moment are:
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 49944 in lbf
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 49944 in lbf
2
2. The bending stress is the only stress component present and is, therefore, also the only nonzero principal
stress and is also the von Mises stress. The governing design equations then are
Ma Mm S e S ut
'a = 'm = Nfd =
Z Z 'a S ut 'm S e
Z S e S ut
Combining these into a single equation Nfd =
Ma S ut Mm S e
3. The approach will be to 1) choose a suitable factor of safety, 2) choose a suitable material and determine its
tensile strength and endurance limit, 3) from the equation above determine the required value of the section
modulus, 4) choose an appropriate cross-section for the ramp, and 5) determine the dimensions of the
cross-section.
4. The following design choices have been made for this problem:
Design factor of safety Nfd 2
Material AISI 1095 steel, hot-rolled
5. Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 60 ksi
Load Cload 1
Size Csize 0.732 (initially guessed, and then found by iteration)
Surface A 14.4 b 0.718 (hot-rolled)
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.463
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

8. Solve the design equation for the minimum section modulus, Z.
Ma Sut Mm Se 3
Z Nfd Z 6.309 in
S e S ut
This is the minimum allowable value of the section modulus.

9. Assume a channel section such as that shown in Figure 6-28B. To keep it simple, let the thickness of the
flanges and web be the same. Choose 5/8-in thick plate, which is readily available. Then, t 0.625 in
w t 2 2
1
2
t h t
A (h) 2

Flange
3 2
w t
w t cg( h )
t Web
Iweb( h )
12 2
3 2 t
t ( h t) h
h t cg( h )
t
Ifl ( h )
12 2
I ( h ) Iweb( h ) 2 Ifl ( h )
h
13. The maximum stress will occur in the flange at the
top and is compressive. The distance from the
centroid up to the top of the flange is
c( h ) h cg( h ) w
14. Using the known section modulus, solve for the FIGURE 6-28B
unknown flange height, h. Guess h 1 in Channel Section for Problem 6-28
I (h)
Given Z= h Find ( h ) h 4.304 in Round this to h 4.25 in
c( h )
15. Check the size modification factor.

2
A95 0.05 w cg( h ) t ( h cg( h ) ) A95 2.628 in
A95
d equiv d equiv 5.858 in
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
in
Width w 12.00 in Flange height h 4.25 in Shape channel

Thickness t 0.625 in Material 1095 steel
PROBLEM 6-29
Statement: A bar, 22 mm x 30 mm in cross-section, is loaded axially in tension with Fmin = -8 kN and Fmax =
+8 kN. A 10-mm hole passes through the center of the 30-mm side. Find the safety factor for
infinite life if the material has S ut = 500 MPa.
Given: Bar width w 30 mm Maximum load Fmax 8 kN

Bar thickness h 22 mm Minimum load Fmin 8 kN
Hole diameter d 10 mm Infinite life
Assumptions: Machined surfaces, temperature of 37C, and reliability F

of 99.999%.
1. For completely reversed loading, the factor of safety is
Se
N =
Kf 'athe uniform axial stress is the only stress component present,
Since 30
Se
'a = a and N =
Kf a
10
2. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit.
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 250 MPa
3. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for an axial bar.

Load Cload 0.7 (axial loading) 22
Size Csize 1 (axial loading)
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa F
Temperature Ctemp 1
FIGURE 6-29
Free Body Diagram used in
Reliability Creliab 0.659 (R = 99.999%) Problem 6-29

5. Determine the nominal (not increased by a stress concentration factor) alternating component of stress at the
hole.
2
Area A ( w d ) h A 440 mm
Fmax Fmin
Alternating load Fa Fa 8 kN
2
Fa
Alternating stress a a 18.182 MPa
A
6. Determine the geometric stress concentration factor from Appendix C, Figure C-13.
2 3
7.9735
d
9.2659
d d
Kt 3.0039 3.753
w w w
4 5
1.8145 2.9684
d d Kt 2.33
w w
7. Determine the notch sensitivity of the material. Note from Figure 6-35 that the Neuber constant for steel in
tension is slightly lower that for torsional loading. However, comparison of values of a 1/2 obtained from the
dashed red curve with those in Table 6-6 indicates that, for tension as well as torsion, a value of 20 ksi should be
added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6.
Lookup value of S ut S'ut S ut 20 ksi S'ut 93 ksi

2 0.5
Neuber constant a 0.068 in a 0.068 in
Notch radius r 0.5 d r 5 mm

1
Notch sensitivity q q 0.867
a
1
r
8. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factor from equation (6.11b).

Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 2.153
9. Determine the factor of safety against fatigue failure for the assumptions made.
Se
Nf Nf 2.6
Kf a
PROBLEM 6-30
Statement: A bar, 22 mm x 30 mm in cross-section, is loaded axially in tension with Fmin = 0 kN and Fmax =
16 kN. A 10-mm hole passes through the center of the 30-mm side. Find the safety factor for

Assumptions: Machined surfaces, temperature of 37C, and reliability

of 99.999%.
F
1. For fluctuating loading, the factor of safety is
S e S ut
N =
Kf 'a S ut Kfm 'm S e
30
Since the uniform axial stress is the only stress component present,
'a = a and 'm = m 10


Load Cload 0.7 (axial loading) 22
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa F
Temperature Ctemp 1
FIGURE 6-30

5. Determine the nominal (not increased by a stress concentration factor) alternating and mean components of
stress at the hole.
2
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
Mean load Fm Fm 8 kN
2
Fa
A
Fm
Mean stress m m 18.182 MPa
A
2 3
7.9735
d
9.2659
d d
Kt 3.0039 3.753 Kt 2.33
w w w
4 5
1.8145 2.9684
d d
w w
dashed red curve with those in Table 6-6 indicates that, for tension as well as torsion, a value of 20 ksi
should be added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6.

2 0.5

1
a
1
r
8. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factors from equations (6.11b) and (6.17).
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 2.153 Kf m a 78 MPa
Assuming the yield strength for this material is about 400 MPa, we can use the first of equations (6.17) and
Kfm Kf Kfm 2.153
S e S ut
Nf Nf 2.1
Kf a S ut Kfm m S e
PROBLEM 6-31
Statement: A bar, 22 mm x 30 mm in cross-section, is loaded axially in tension with Fmin = 8 kN and Fmax =


of 99.999%.
S e S ut
N =
30
10
'a = a and 'm = m


22
Load Cload 0.7 (axial loading)
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869 F
MPa
FIGURE 6-31
Temperature Ctemp 1
Problem 6-31

stress at the hole.
2
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2
Fa
A
Fm
A
2 3
7.9735
d
9.2659
d d
Kt 3.0039 3.753 Kt 2.33
w w w
4 5
1.8145 2.9684
d d
w w
dashed red curve with those in Table 6-6 indicates that, for tension as well as torsion, a value of 20 ksi should
be added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6.

2 0.5

1
a
1
r
Kfm Kf Kfm 2.153
S e S ut
Nf Nf 1.8
Kf a S ut Kfm m S e
PROBLEM 6-32
Statement: A bar, 22 mm x 30 mm in cross-section, is loaded axially in tension with Fmin = -4 kN and Fmax =

of 99.999%.
F
S e S ut
N =
30
10
'a = a and 'm = m


22
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa F
Temperature Ctemp 1
FIGURE 6-32

stress at the hole.
2
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2
Fa
A
Fm
A
2 3
7.9735
d
9.2659
d d
Kt 3.0039 3.753 Kt 2.33
w w w
4 5
1.8145 2.9684
d d
w w
dashed red curve with those in Table 6-6 indicates that, for tension as well as torsion, a value of 20 ksi should be
added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6.

2 0.5

1
a
1
r
Kfm Kf Kfm 2.153
S e S ut
Nf Nf 2.3
Kf a S ut Kfm m S e
PROBLEM 6-33a
Statement: For the bracket shown in Figure P6-14 subjected to a sinusoidal force-time function with Fmax = F
and Fmin = -F, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-6. Find the stress
states at points A and B due to this fully reversed loading and choose a ductile steel material
specification that will give a safety factor of 2 for infinite life. Assume a geometric
stress-concentration factor of 2.5 in bending and 2.8 in torsion.
Given: Outside diameter od 20 mm F

y
Geometric stress Kt 2.5
A
concentration factors Kts 2.8
Design safety factor Nd 2 T
B
T x
Assumptions: The finish is machined, reliability is 50%, M

and the bracket operates at room
temperature. The notch sensitivity q = 1 L
so that Kf = Kt. R
Solution: See Figure 6-33 and Mathcad file P0633a. FIGURE 6-33
1. From Problem 4-33a the stress components at point A are x 8.38 MPa zx 16.76 MPa
2. Calculate fatigue stresses and principal stresses.
Fatigue stresses b Kt x b 20.95 MPa
s Kts zx s 46.93 MPa
2
b
b 2
Principal stresses 1 s 1 58.56 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2
b b 2
3 s 3 37.61 MPa
2
2
3. Calculate the alternating von Mises effective stress (the mean component is zero).
2 2
'a 1 1 3 3 'a 83.94 MPa
4. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit S'e S ut 0.5 S ut
5. Determine the endurance limit modification factors

Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.010462 od (nonrotating round section)
A95
d eq d eq 7.391 mm
0.0766
0.097
deq
mm
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 (cold-drawn tubing)
b
S ut
Cs S ut A
MPa
Csurf S ut if Cs S ut 1 1 Cs S ut
Temperature Ctemp 1
6. Calculate the modified endurance limit
S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf S ut Ctemp Creliab S'e S ut
7. Use the equation for the factor of safety for fully reversed loading to solve for S ut. Guess S ut 100 MPa
S e S ut
Given Nd = S ut Find S ut S ut 362 MPa
'a
8. The varables that depend on S ut are: Csurf S ut 0.946 S e S ut 167.88 MPa
PROBLEM 6-34a
and Fmin = 0, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-6. Find the stress
states at points A and B due to this repeated loading and choose a ductile steel material

y
A
Design safety factor Nd 2 T
B
T x
Assumptions: The finish is machined, reliability is M

50%, and the bracket operates at room
temperature. The notch sensitivity q = L
1 so that Kf = Kt. R
Solution: See Figure 6-33 and Mathcad file P0633a. FIGURE 6-34
1. From Problem 4-33a the stress components at point A are
xmax 8.38 MPa zxmax 16.76 MPa
xmin 0 MPa zxmin 0 MPa
2. Calculate the alternating and mean stress components.

xmax xmin
xa xa 4.19 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xm xm 4.19 MPa
2
zxmax zxmin
zxa zxa 8.38 MPa
2
zxmax zxmin
zxm zxm 8.38 MPa
2
3. Calculate fatigue stresses and principal stresses.
Fatigue stresses ba Kt xa ba 11.73 MPa
sa Kts zxa sa 26.82 MPa
bm Kt xa bm 11.73 MPa
sm Kts zxa sm 26.82 MPa
Principal stresses
2
ba
ba 2
1a sa 1a 33.32 MPa
2 2
2a 0 MPa
2
ba
ba 2
3a sa 3a 21.58 MPa
2 2
2
bm
bm 2
1m sm 1m 33.32 MPa
2 2
2m 0 MPa
2
bm
bm 2
3m sm 3m 21.58 MPa
2 2
4. Calculate the alternating and mean von Mises effective stress components.
2 2
'a 1a 1a 3a 3a 'a 47.91 MPa
2 2
'm 1m 1m 3m 3m 'm 47.91 MPa

Load Cload 1
2
A95
d eq d eq 7.391 mm
0.0766
0.097
deq
mm
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 (machined tubing)
b
S ut
Cs S ut A
MPa
Csurf S ut if Cs S ut 1 1 Cs S ut
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf S ut Ctemp Creliab S'e S ut
8. Use the equation for the factor of safety for repeated loading assuming a Case 3 load line and using equation
(6.18e). Guess S ut 100 MPa
S e S ut S ut
Given Nd =
'a S ut 'm S e S ut
S ut Find S ut S ut 291 MPa
9. The varables that depend on S ut are: Csurf S ut 1 S e S ut 142.72 MPa
PROBLEM 6-35a
and Fmin = -F, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-6. Find the stress
states at points A and B due to this fully reversed loading and choose a cast iron material

Geometric stress Kt 2.5 y
concentration factors Kts 2.8 A

Design safety factor Nd 2 B
T T x
Assumptions: The finish is as-cast, reliability is 50%,
and the bracket operates at room M
temperature. There ia a fillet at the wall L
with radius r 2 mm. However, set the R
stress concentration factors and Csurf to 1
since cast iron's internal flaws mask these FIGURE 6-35
effects. Free Body Diagram of Tube for Problem 6-35

1 From Problem 4-33a the stress components at point A are x 8.38 MPa zx 16.76 MPa
2. Calculate fatigue stress concentration factors and principal stresses. Let Kf 1 Kfs 1
Fatigue stresses b Kf x b 8.38 MPa
s Kfs zx s 16.76 MPa
Principal stresses
2
b b 2
1 s 1 21.47 MPa
2 2
2
b
b 2
3 s 3 13.09 MPa
2 2
2 0 MPa
2 2
'a 1 1 3 3 'a 30.21 MPa

Load Cload 1
2
A95
d eq d eq 7.391 mm
0.0766
0.097
deq
mm
Surface Csurf 1 ( cast iron)
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S ut
7. Use the equation for the factor of safety for fully reversed loading to solve for S ut. Guess S ut 100 MPa
S e S ut
Given Nd = S ut Find S ut S ut 154 MPa
'a
8. The varables that depend on S ut are: S e S ut 60.43 MPa
PROBLEM 6-36a
and Fmin = 0, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a of Table P6-6. Find the stress
states at points A and B due to this repeated loading and choose a cast iron material specification
that will give a safety factor of 2 for infinite life. Assume a geometric stress-concentration factor o
2.8 in bending and 3.2 in torsion.
Given: Outside diameter od 20 mm

Assumptions: The finish is as-cast, reliability is 50%,

and the bracket operates at room
temperature. There ia a fillet at the
wall with radius r 2 mm. However,
set the stress concentration factors and
Csurf to 1 since cast iron's internal flaws FIGURE 6-36
mask these effects.
1. From Problem 4-33a the stress components at point A are
xmax 8.38 MPa zxmax 16.76 MPa
xmin 0 MPa zxmin 0 MPa
2. Calculate the alternating and mean stress components.

xmax xmin
xa xa 4.19 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xm xm 4.19 MPa
2
zxmax zxmin
zxa zxa 8.38 MPa
2
zxmax zxmin
zxm zxm 8.38 MPa
2
3. Calculate fatigue stress concentration factors (set 1 for cast iron) and principal stresses
Fatigue stress Kf 1 Kfs 1
concentration
factors Kfm 1 Kfsm 1
Fatigue stresses ba Kf xa ba 4.19 MPa
sa Kfs zxa sa 8.38 MPa
bm Kfm xa bm 4.19 MPa
sm Kfsm zxa sm 8.38 MPa
Principal stresses
2
ba
ba 2
1a sa 1a 10.73 MPa
2 2
2a 0 MPa
2
ba
ba 2
3a sa 3a 6.54 MPa
2 2
2
bm
bm 2
1m sm 1m 10.73 MPa
2 2
2m 0 MPa
2
bm
bm 2
3m sm 3m 6.54 MPa
2 2
2 2
'a 1a 1a 3a 3a 'a 15.11 MPa
2 2
'm 1m 1m 3m 3m 'm 15.11 MPa

Load Cload 1
2
A95
d eq d eq 7.391 mm
0.0766
0.097
deq
mm
Surface Csurf 1 (cast iron)
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S ut
8. Use the equation for the factor of safety for repeated loading assuming a Case 3 load line and using equation
(6.18e). Guess S ut 100 MPa
S e S ut S ut
Given Nd =
'a S ut 'm S e S ut

PROBLEM 6-37
Statement: A semicircular, curved beam as shown in Figure 5-37 has the dimensions given below. For a load
pair F = 3 kN applied along the diameter, find the safety factor at the inner and outer fibers:
(a) If the beam is steel with S ut = 700 MPa,
(b) If the beam is cast-iron with S ut = 420 MPa.
Given: (a) Tensile strength S uta 700 MPa

(b) Tensile strength S utb 420 MPa
Maximum load Fmax 3 kN
Minimum load Fmin 3 kN
1. From Problem 4-37, the stresses at the inside radius are:

Inside i 409.9 MPa
These are based on a load of 14 kN. Since the stress in
a curved beam is directly proportional to the applied
load, we can determine the stresses at the inside surface
for this problem by applying the ratio 3/14 to this stress.
Thus,
3
max i max 87.836 MPa
14
3
min i min 87.836 MPa
14
FIGURE 6-37
These are the only stress components present on their Free Body Diagrams for Problem 6-37
respective surfaces so they are also von Mises stresses.
2. The dynamic loading in this problem is fully reversed. Determine the alternating stress component.
max min
'a 'a 87.836 MPa
2
Part (a)
3. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'ea 0.5 S uta S'ea 350 MPa
Load Cload 0.7 (combined axial and bending loads)
Size Section dims w 25 mm h 25 mm

2
A95 0.05 w h A95 31.25 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
S uta
Csurf A Csurf 0.795
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S ea Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'ea S ea 155.15 MPa
6. Assuming no stress concentration, the fatigue factor of safety at the inner fiber for fully reversed loading is
S ea
Nfa Nfa 1.8
'a
Part (b)
7. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit using equation (6.5b). S'eb 160 MPa
Load Cload 0.7 (combined axial and bending loads)
Size Section dims w 25 mm h 25 mm

2
A95 0.05 w h A95 31.25 mm
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
S utb
Csurf A Csurf 0.910
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S eb Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'eb S eb 81.21 MPa
10. Assuming no stress concentration, the fatigue factor of safety at the inner fiber for fully reversed loading is
S eb
Nfb Nfb 0.92
'a
PROBLEM 6-38
Statement: A 42-mm-dia steel shaft with a 19-mm transverse hole is subjected to a sinusoidal combined
loading of = 100 MPa bending stress and steady torsion of 110 MPa. Find the safety factor
for infinite life if S ut = 1000 MPa.
Given: Shaft diameter D 42 mm Max bending stress max 100 MPa
Hole diameter d 19 mm Min bending stress min 100 MPa
Tensile strength S ut 1000 MPa Steady torsion m 110 MPa
Infinite life
Assumptions: Stresses given include stress concentration effects. Ground surfaces, temperature of 37C, and
reliability of 50%.
1. Calculate the alternating and mean von Mises stress components.
max min
'a 'a 100 MPa
2
'm 3 m 'm 190.526 MPa

3. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a rotating, round shaft.
Load Cload 1 (combined bending and torsion)
0.097
Csize 1.189
D
Size Csize 0.827
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.878
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

5. Assuming a Case 3 load line, determine the factor of safety against fatigue failure.
S e S ut
Nf Nf 2.1
'a S ut 'm S e
PROBLEM 6-39
Statement: A 42-mm-dia steel shaft with a 19-mm transverse hole is subjected to a combined loading of =
100 MPa bending stress and an alternating torsion of 110 MPa, which are 90 deg out of phase.
Find the safety factor for infinite life if S ut = 1000 MPa.
Given: Shaft diameter D 42 mm Max bending stress max 100 MPa

Hole diameter d 19 mm Min bending stress min 100 MPa
Tensile strength S ut 1000 MPa Max torsional stress max 110 MPa
Phase angle 90 deg Min torsional stress min 110 MPa
Assumptions: Stresses given include stress concentration effects. Ground surfaces, temperature of 37C, and
reliability of 50%.
1. The dynamic loading is fully reversed so both mean stresses are zero. Calculate the alternating SEQA stress
component using equation (6.23).
max
Stress ratio Q 2 Q 2.2
max
1
2
max 3 2 3 2 9 4
SEQAa 1 Q 1 Q cos( 2 ) Q SEQAa 190.526 MPa
2 4 2 16

0.097
Csize 1.189
D
Size Csize 0.827
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.878
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

Se
Nf Nf 1.9
SEQAa
PROBLEM 6-40
Statement: Redesign the roll support of Problem 6-8 to be like that shown in Figure P6-16. The stub mandrels
insert to 10% of the roll length at each end. Design dimension a for an infinite-life factor of safety
of 2. See Problem 6-8 for additional data.
(a) The beam is a ductile material with S y = 450 MPa, S ut = 600 MPa
(b) The beam is a cast-brittle material with S ut = 300 MPa
3
ID 0.22 m Design safety factor Nfd 2
Lroll 3.23 m
Ductile tensile strength S uta 600 MPa Brittle tensile strength S utb 300 MPa
Assumptions: The paper roll's weight creates a concen-

trated load acting at the tip of the mandrel.
The mandrel's root fits tightly in the
stanchion so it can be modeled as a
cantilever beam. The mandrel is machined,
reliability is 99.999%, and it operates at
room temperature.
1. Determine the weight of the roll, the load on each

Weight of paper
FIGURE 6-40
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g
W 53.9 kN
Load on one mandrel F 0.5 W F 26.95 kN
Length of mandrel Lm 0.1 Lroll Lm 0.323 m
2. The maximum moment occurs at a section where the mandrel root leaves the stanchion and is
Mmax F Lm Mmax 8.704 kN m
3. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to Mmax on each stress cycle, thus Mmin 0 kN m
4. Part (a) - Calculate the alternating and mean components of the bending moment.
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 4352 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 4352 N m
2
5. Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S uta S'e 300 MPa
Load Cload 1
2 A95 ( a )
Size A95 ( a ) 0.010462 a d equiv( a )
0.0766
0.097
dequiv( a)
Csize( a ) 1.189
mm
b
S uta
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

8. We can now determine the minimum required diameter, a. Using the distortion-energy failure theory with the
modified Goodman diagram, the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress, which will also
be the von Mises stress. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the factor of safety.
Guess a 100 mm.
M c a 64 32 M
I 2 4 3
a a
Given
3 S e( a ) S uta
a
Nfd =
a Find ( a ) a 92.421 mm

Csize( a ) 0.843 S e( a ) 137.942 MPa

3 S e( a ) S uta
a
Nfa Nfa 2.1
9. Part (b) - Determine the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.4 S utb S'e 120 MPa
10. Calculate the endurance limit size modification factor for a nonrotating rectangular beam.
2 A95 ( a )
Size A95 ( a ) 0.010462 a d equiv( a )
0.0766
0.097
dequiv( a)
Csize( a ) 1.189
mm
12. We can now determine the minimum required diameter, a. Using the distortion-energy failure theory with
the modified Goodman diagram, the bending stress will also be the only nonzero principal stress, which will
also be the von Mises stress. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.18e) to determine the factor of
safety. Guess a 100 mm.
M c a 64 32 M
I 2 4 3
a a
Given
3 S e( a ) S utb
a
Nfd =
a Find ( a ) a 124.874 mm

Csize( a ) 0.82 S e( a ) 53.672 MPa

3 S e( a ) S utb
a
Nfb Nfb 2.0
PROBLEM 6-41
Statement: A 10-mm ID steel tube carries liquid at 7 MPa. The pressure varies periodically from zero to
maximum. The steel has S ut = 400 MPa Determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor for the
wall if its thickness is: a) 1 mm, b) 5 mm.
Given: Tensile strength S ut 400 MPa
Assumption: The tubing is long therefore the axial stress is zero. The finish is machined, reliability is 99.999%
and the tubing is at room temperature.

1. From Problem 4-41, this is a thick wall cylinder and the maximum principal stresses are:
1maxa 38.82 MPa 2maxa 0 MPa 3maxa 7.00 MPa
2. Calculate the minimum, maximum, alternating, and mean von Mises effective stress using equation (5.7c).
'min 0 MPa
2 2
'maxa 1maxa 1maxa 3maxa 3maxa 'maxa 42.752 MPa
'maxa 'min
'aa 'aa 21.376 MPa
2
'maxa 'min
'ma 'ma 21.376 MPa
2
4. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for axial loading.

Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 ( machined )
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.922
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, the factor of safety from equation (6.18e) is
S e S ut
Na Na 3.3
'aa S ut 'ma S e
1maxb 11.67 MPa 2maxb 0 MPa 3maxb 7.00 MPa
2 2
'maxb 1maxb 1maxb 3maxb 3maxb 'maxb 16.336 MPa
'maxb 'min
'ab 'ab 8.168 MPa
2
'maxb 'min
'mb 'mb 8.168 MPa
2
9. The endurance limit does not change from part a to b. Assuming a Case 3 load line, the factor of safety from
equation (6.18e) is
S e S ut
Nb Nb 8.6
'ab S ut 'mb S e
PROBLEM 6-42
temperature. The pressure cycles from zero to maximum. The steel has S ut = 500 MPa. Determine
the infinite-life fatigue safety factor if the tank diameter is 0.5 m with 1 mm wall thickness, and its
length is 1 m.
Assumption: The finish is machined, reliability is 99.999% and the tank is at room temperature.
1. From Problem 4-42, this is a thin wall cylinder and the maximum principal stresses are:
1max 259 MPa 2max 129 MPa 3max 0 MPa
'min 0 MPa
2 2
'max 1max 1max 2max 2max 'max 224.301 MPa
'max 'min
'a 'a 112.151 MPa
2
'max 'min
'm 'm 112.151 MPa
2
Surface A 4.51 b 0.265 ( machined )
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, the factor of safety from equation (6.18e) is
S e S ut
Nf Nf 0.74
'a S ut 'm S e
PROBLEM 6-43
Statement: The paper rolls in Figure P6-17 are 0.9-m OD by 0.22-m ID by 3.23-m long and have a density of
984 kg/m3. The rolls are transfered from the machine conveyor (not shown) to the forklift truck
by the V-linkage of the off-load station, which is rotated through 90 deg by an air cylinder. The
paper then rolls onto the waiting forks of the truck. The forks are 38-mm thick by 100-mm wide
by 1.2-m long and are tipped at a 3-deg angle from the horizontal and have S ut = 600MPa. Find
the infinite-life safety factor for the two forks on the truck when the paper rolls onto it under two
different conditions (state all assumptions):
F
L fork
t
Fork width w 100 mm
Fork thickness t 38 mm
Assumptions: 1. The greatest bending moment will occur M1
when the paper roll is at the tip of the fork R1
for case (a) and when it is midway between Case (a), Cantilever Beam
supports for case (b).
2. Each fork carries 1/2 the weight of a
paper roll. F
3. For case (a), each fork acts as a cantilever 0.5 L fork
beam (see Appendix B-1(a)). t
4. For case (b), each fork acts as a beam
that is built-in at one end and
simply-supported at the other. L fork
5. The forks are machined, the reliability is M2
R1 R2
90%, and they operate at room temperature.
Case (b), Fixed-Simply Supported Beam
FIGURE 6-43
1. From Problem 4-43, the maximum stresses in the forks are: Free Body Diagrams used in Problem 6-43
Case (a) maxa 464.8 MPa at the base of the fork.
Case (b) maxb 87.2 MPa also at the base of the fork.
Both cases min 0 MPa

Since there are no other stress components present, these are also the maximum principal stresses and the von
Mises stresses. This is a repeated load problem.
Case (a)
2. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to 1 for each paper roll that is transfered. The alternating and mean
Alternating von Mises stress 'a 0.5 maxa min 'a 232.4 MPa
Mean von Mises stress 'm 0.5 maxa min 'm 232.4 MPa
Load Cload 1
A95
Size A95 0.05 w t d equiv
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
in
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut
Case a Nfa Nfa 0.60
'a S ut 'm S e
Case (b)
7. The dynamic loading is repeated from 0 to 1 for each paper roll that is transfered. The alternating and mean
Alternating von Mises stress 'a 0.5 maxb min 'a 43.6 MPa
Mean von Mises stress 'm 0.5 maxb min 'm 43.6 MPa
S e S ut
Case a Nfb Nfb 3.2
'a S ut 'm S e
PROBLEM 6-44
Statement: Determine a suitable thickness for the V-links of the off-loading station of Figure P6-17 to limit th
deflections at the tips to 10 mm in any position during their rotation. Two V-links support the roll
at the 1/4 and 3/4 points along the roll's length and that each of the V-links is 10 cm wide by 1 m
long. What is the infinite-life safety factor when designed to limit deflection as above? S ut = 600
MPa. See Problem 4-43 for more information.
3
completes it, i.e., when the angle is either zero or 90 deg., but after the tip is no longer supported b
the base unit.
2. At that time the roll is in contact with both arms ("seated" in the V) and will remain in that state
throughout the motion. When the roll is in any other position on an arm the tip will be supported.
6. The V-links are machined, reliability is 90%, and they operate at room temperature.

1. Determine the weight of the roll and the load on each
V-arm.
W

4
2 2
F 0.5 W F 9.32 kN
2. From Appendix B, Figure B-1, the tip deflection of

a cantilever beam with a concentrated load
located at a distance a from the support is
2
F a
ymax = ( a 3 L)
6 E I
where L is the beam length and I is the
3
w a t a
I=
12
3. Setting ymax = tip and a 370 mm, FIGURE 6-44

substituting for I and solving for ta Free Body Diagram used in Problem 6-44
1
3
2 F a2 3 La a
ta ta 31.889 mm
E tip wa

4. The maximum bending stress in the arm will be at its base where it joins the 160-mm-dia pipe. The bending
moment, moment of inertia, and distance to the outside fiber at that point are:
Bending moment Mmax F a Mmax 3.449 kN m
Mmin 0 kN m
Mmax Mmin
1
Ma Ma 1.725 kN m
2
Mmax Mmin
1
Mm Mm 1.725 kN m
2
Distance to n.a. c 0.5 t a c 16 mm
3
wa ta 5 4
12
M a c
Nom tensile stress anom anom 101 MPa
I
Mm c
mnom mnom 101 MPa
I
5. Determine the stress concentration factors. Figure E-10 comes the closest to our situation. Assuming that the
effective D/d-ratio is 2 and r/d is about 0.25, Kt 1.4. For a material with
3 2
ksi 10 psi S ut 87 ksi a 0.073 in
and, for the assumed value of r/d, r 0.25 ta r 8 mm
1
The notch sensitivity factor is q q 0.885
a
1
r
and the fatigue stress concentration factor is

Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.35
6. Assuming that Kfm Kf , the actual alternating and mean components of stress at the point where the V-link
meets the central hub are
a Kf anom a 136.8 MPa
m Kfm mnom m 136.8 MPa

7. Since there are no other nonzero stress components at this point on the top of the arm, the von Mises stresses
are
'a a and 'm m
8. Determine the modified material strength.

Unmodified endurance limit S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 300 MPa
Load Cload 1
2
Size A95 0.05 wa ta A95 160 mm
A95
d eq d eq 45.703 mm
0.0766
0.097
deq
mm
0.265
Sut
Surface Csurf 4.51 Csurf 0.828
MPa
Ctemp 1
Temperature
Creliab 0.897 (R = 90%)
Reliability
Endurance limit S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S e 182.8 MPa
9. Calculate the factor of safety. Using the distortion energy theory and the modified Goodman theory, the
fatigue factor of safety for a V-link thickness of ta 32 mm is
S ut S e
Nf Nf 1.0
'a S ut 'm S e
PROBLEM 6-45
Statement: Determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor based on the tension load on the air-cylinder rod
in Figure P6-17. The tension load cycles from zero to maximum (compression loads below the
critical buckling load will not affect the fatigue life). The crank arm that it rotates is 0.3 m long
and the rod has a maximum extension of 0.5 m. The 25-mm-dia rod is solid steel with S ut = 600
MPa. State all assumptions.
Given: Paper roll dimensions OD 0.90 m Rod diameter d 25 mm
ID 0.22 m Tensile strength S ut 600 MPa
Lroll 3.23 m
3
2. The cylinder and rod make an angle of 5.5 deg to the horizontal at the end of transfer.
3. The crank arm is 300 mm long and is 45 deg from vertical at the end of transfer.
4. The finish is machined, reliability is 90%, and the cylinder operates at room temperature.
5. The cylinder rod is fully retracted at the start of the transfer. At the end of the transfer
it will have extended 500 mm from its initial position.

forks.
W

4
2 2
OD ID Lroll g
W 18.64 kN
2. From the assumptions and Figure 6-45,
the x and y distances from the origin to
point A are,

450.0
Ray 300 sin( 45 deg) mm W

Rx
Rax 212.132 mm x
212.1 Ry
Ray 212.132 mm A
F 5.5
3. From Figure 6-45, the x distance from the
origin to point where W is applied is,
212.1
OD
Rwx Rwx 450 mm
2
FIGURE 6-45
4. Sum moments about the pivot point and
Free Body Diagram at End of Transfer for V-link of Problem 6-45
solve for the tensile force in the cylinder
rod.
W Rwx Fmax Rax sin( 5.5 deg) Fmax Ray cos( 5.5 deg) = 0
W Rwx
Fmax Fmax 35.017 kN tension
5. Assume that the dynamic load is repeated so Fmin 0 kN
6. Determine the alternating and mean components of axial stress in the rod.
2
d 2
Area A A 490.874 mm
4
Fmax Fmin
Alternating load Fa Fa 17.508 kN
2
Fmax Fmin
Mean load Fm Fm 17.508 kN
2
Fa
A
Fm
A
S e S ut
7. For fluctuating loading, the factor of safety is Nf =
'a S ut 'm S e
8. Since the uniform axial stress is the only stress component present,
'a = a and 'm = m
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut
Nf Nf 3.5
a S ut m S e
PROBLEM 6-46
Statement: The V-links of Figure P6-17 are rotated by the crank arm through a shaft that is 60 mm dia by 3.23
m long. Determine the maximum torque applied to this shaft during motion of the V-linkage and
find the infinite-life fatigue safety factor for the shaft if its S ut = 600 MPa. See Problem 6-43 for
more information.

Shaft diameter d 60 mm
Assumptions: 1. The greatest torque will occur

when the link is horizontal and the
paper roll is located as shown in
Figure P6-17 or Figure 6-46.
2. The V-links are machined, use a
reliability of 90%, and operate at
room temperature.
Solution: See Figure 6-46 and Mathcad file

P0646. W
1. From Problem 4-46, the maximum torsional

T
stress in the shaft is
max 197.88 MPa Ry

60-mm-dia shaft
2. Although not exactly true, assume that the 450.0
load is fully reversed, then the minimum
torque is FIGURE 6-46
min 197.88 MPa
3. Calculate the alternating component of the torsional stress in the shaft.
max min
2
4. Convert this to the corresponding component of the von Mises stress.
Alternating stress 'a 3 a 'a 342.738 MPa
5. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit using equation (6.5a). S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 300 MPa
6. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a solid, round steel shaft.
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize 1.189
d
Size Csize 0.799
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1


8. Calculate the factor of safety for the shaft.
Se
Nf Nf 0.52
'a
PROBLEM 6-47
Determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor in these pins if they are 30-mm dia and in single
shear. S ut = 600 MPa. See Problem 6-43 for more information.
Given: Pin diameter d 30 mm Tensile strength S ut 600 MPa

2. The dynamic loading is fully reversed.
3. The finish is machined, reliability is 90%, and the pins are at room temperature.
W
Rx x
Ry 212.1
A
F 8
212.1
450.0
FIGURE 6-47
1. From Problem 4-47 the maximum shear stress on the pins is max 65.7 MPa
2. This is the only stress component so the alternating von Mises stress is 'a 3 max 'a 113.796 MPa
4. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a nonrotating direct shear.
2
d 2
Size A95 A95 706.858 mm
4
Load Cload 1
A95
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.828
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, use equation (6.14) to determine the factor of safety.
Se
Nf Nf 1.5
'a
PROBLEM 6-48
Statement: Figure P6-18 shows an exerciser for a 100-kg wheelchair racer. The wheelchair has 65-cm-dia
drive wheels separated by a 70-cm track width. Two free-turning rollers on bearings support the
rear wheels. The lateral movement of the chair is limited by the flanges. Design the 1-m-lomg
rollers as hollow tubes of aluminum (select alloy) to minimize the height of the platform and also
limit the roller deflections to 1 mm in the worst case. Specify suitable sized steel axles to support
the tubes on bearings. Calculate the fatigue safety factors at a life of 5E8 cycles.

Wheel diameter d w 650 mm Modulus elasticity

sufficiently close to the rear wheel that all
of the weight is taken by the two rear
wheels.
2. The small camber angle of the rear W/2
wheels does not significantly affect the
magnitude of the forces on the rollers.
3. Both the aluminum roller and the steel
axle are simply supported. The steel axles
that support the aluminum tube are fixed
in the mounting block and do not rotate.
The aluminum tube is attached to them by
two bearings (one on each end of the
tubes, one for each axle). The bearings'
inner race is fixed, and the outer race F F
rotates with the aluminum tube. Each
steel axle is considered to be loaded as a
simply supported beam. Their diameter
must be less than the inner diameter of the
tubes to fit the roller bearings between FIGURE 6-48A
them. Free Body Diagram of One Wheel
4. All surfaces are machined, reliability is used in Problem 6-48
90%, and parts are at room temperature.

1. Calculate the weight of the chair with rider. Weight of chair W M g W 980.7 N
2. Calculate the forces exerted by the wheels on the rollers (see Figure 5-48A). From the FBD of a wheel,
summing vertical forces
W
2 F cos( ) =0
2
W
4 cos( )
3. The worst condition (highest moment at site of a stress concentration) will occur when the chair is all the way
to the left or right. Looking at the plane through the roller that includes the forces exerted by the wheels (the
FBD is shown in Figure 6-48B) the reactions R1 and R2 come from the bearings, which are inside the hollow
roller and are, themselves, supported by the steel axle.
M1 R2 Lr F ( a T ) F a = 0 700
F F
Fy R1 2 F R2 = 0
F (2 a T )
R2 R2 190.5 N
Lr
15 R2
R1 1000
R1 2 F R2 R1 331.3 N
5. The maximum bending moment will be at FIGURE 6-48B

the right-hand load and will be Free Body Diagram of One Tube used in Problem 6-48
Lr T
Mc F Mc 39.1 N m
2
Because of symmetry, 1000

65
Ra1 R1 Ra1 331.3 N R1 R2
Ra2 R2 Ra2 190.5 N
7. The maximum bending moment R a1 R a2

occurs at R1 and is for 1130
b 65 mm
FIGURE 6-48C
Mamax Ra1 b
Mamax 21.5 N m
8. Determine a suitable axle diameter. Let the factor of safety against yielding in the axle be Nsa 3
9. Tentatively choose a low-carbon steel for the axle, say AISI 1020, cold rolled with S y 393 MPa
10. At the top of the axle under the load R1 there is only a bending stress, which is also the von Mises stress. Set
this stress equal to the yield strength divided by the factor of safety.
32 Mamax Sy
' = =
3 Nsa
d a
1
3
32 Nsa Mamax
S y
11. Suppose that bearing 6302 from Chapter 10, Figure 10-23, page 684 is used. It has a bore of 15 mm and an OD
of 42 mm. Thus, the inside diameter of the roller away from the bearings where the moment is a maximum will
be d i 40 mm. This will provide a 1-mm shoulder for axial location of the bearings.
12. Design for a factor of safety of

Nra 3. Tentatively choose 150 700
F F
2024-T4 aluminum with
S ut 440 MPa
and F
S'e5E8 138 MPa 15
F
1000
13. A point on the outside diameter of the
roller will see completely reversed FIGURE 6-48D
bending, which will also be the only Free Body Diagram of Roller with Chair in the Center.
nonzero principal stress. Thus,
Kf Mrmax Se
x = = ' =
Z Nfr
where Kf is the fatigue stress concentration at the shoulder and S e is the modified endurance limit.
14. Tentatively choose (these values arrived at by iteration):
Outside diameter d o 45 mm
Shoulder diameter D 54 mm
Fillet radius r 5 mm
15. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factor. From Figure E-2 and Table 6-6 for
r D
0.111 1.2
do do
0.21796
Kt 0.97098 r
Kt 1.57
o
d
4
S ut 6.38 10 psi
1
q q 0.813
0.102
1
r
in
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.46
16. Calculate the alternating von Mises stress component.

4
d o d i
4 4 4
I I 7.563 10 mm
64
c 0.5 d o c 22.5 mm
Kf Mrmax c
'a 'a 23.6 MPa
I
17. Destermine the endurance limit at 5E8 cycles
Load factor Cload 1
0.097
do
Size factor Csize 1.189 Csize 0.822
mm
0.265
Surface factor Sut
as machined Csurf 4.51 Csurf 0.899
MPa
Reliability
at 90% Creliab 0.897
Modified endurance limit

S e5E8 Cload Csize Csurf Creliab S'e5E8 S e5E8 91.44 MPa
18. Determine the factor of safety for repeated loading.
S e5E8
Nfr Nfr 3.87
'a
19. The maximum deflection of the roller will occur when the chair is in the center of the roller. For this case the
reactions are both equal to the loads, F. Using Figure B-2(a) in Appendix B, the maximum deflection is at the
center of the roller and is for
a 150 mm x 0.5 Lr x 500 mm

E 71.7 GPa
1
F a 3 3
ymax 2 x ( x a ) ymax 0.875 mm
6 E I
a
L r

a 3 a Lr 2 Lr x
2 2

rL
This design meets the deflection requirement and has a reasonable factor of safety against fatigue failure while
allowing sufficient space for the bearings.
DESIGN SUMMARY
Axle Roller
Shoulder dia D 54 mm
Fillet radius r 5 mm
Length 1040 mm
Center line spacing c d w d o sin( )
c 238 mm
PROBLEM 6-49 _____

Statement: Figure P6-19 shows a machined pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F
= 100 lb, l = 2 in, and d = 0.5 in, what is the pin's safety factor against fatigue when made of SAE
1020 cold-rolled steel? The loading is fully reversed and a reliability of 90% is desired. There is
a bending stress concentration factor Kt = 1.8 at the section where the pin leaves part A on the
right-hand side.
Given: Applied force F 100 lbf Material strength S y 57 ksi S ut 68 ksi
Total length, l l 2.00 in Beam length L 0.5 l
Pin dia d 0.5 in
length l/2.
F lbf
w w 100.0
L in
support and is
2
w L
2
3. Calculate the moment of inertia and distance to the extreme fiber of the pin. The nominal alternating bending
stress in the beam is then found using equation 4.11b.
4
d 3 4
I I 3.068 10 in
64
c 0.5 d c 0.250 in
Mmax c
anom anom 4074 psi
I
4. From Table 6-6, the Neuber constant for S ut 68 ksi is

1
2 2
a 0.096 in a 0.096 in
5. Using equation 6-13, the notch sensitivity for r 0.5 d is
1
q q 0.839
a
1
r
6. The fatigue stress-concentration factor for Kt 1.8, from equation 6.11b, is
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.67
7. Because the stress state in the pin is simple, uniaxial stress, the alternating principal stress is equal to the
alternating tensile stress and is also equal to the alternating von Mises stress. Thus,
a Kf anom a 6.81 ksi
' a
9. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a non rotating round pin in bending.
Load Cload 1
2 3 2
Size A95 0.010462 d A95 2.615 10 in
A95
d equiv d equiv 0.185 in
0.0766
This is less than the lower limit in equation 6.7b, so use

Csize 1
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.883
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

11. Using equation 6.14, calculate the factor of safety against a fatigue failure for this case of fully reversed
bending.
Se
Nf Nf 4.0
'
PROBLEM 6-50 _____

Statement: Figure P6-19 shows a machined pivot pin that is press-fit into part A and is slip fit in part B. If F
= 100 N, l = 50 mm, and d = 16 mm, what is the pin's safety factor against fatigue when made of
class 50 cast iron? The loading is fully reversed and a reliability of 90% is desired. There is a
bending stress concentration factor Kt = 1.8 at the section where the pin leaves part A on the
right-hand side.
Given: Applied force F 100 N Tensile strength S ut 359 MPa

Total length, l l 50 mm Beam length L 0.5 l Pin dia d 16 mm
length l/2.

F N
w w 4.0
L mm
support and is
2
w L
Mmax Mmax 1250 N mm
2
3. Calculate the moment of inertia and distance to the extreme fiber of the pin. The nominal alternating bending
stress in the beam is then found using equation 4.11b.
4
d 3 4
I I 3.217 10 mm
64
c 0.5 d c 8.000 mm
Mmax c
anom anom 3.108 MPa
I
4. Since this is a brittle material, so the full value of the geometric stress concentration factor Kt 1.8 will be
applied to the nominal stress using equation 4.31.
5. Because the stress state in the pin is simple, uniaxial stress, the alternating principal stress is equal to the
alternating tensile stress and is also equal to the alternating von Mises stress. Thus,
a Kt anom a 5.60 MPa
' a
6. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit. S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 179.5 MPa
7. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a non rotating round pin in bending.
Load Cload 1
2 2
Size A95 0.010462 d A95 2.678 mm
A95
0.0766
This is less than the lower limit in equation 6.7b, so use

Csize 1
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.949
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

9. Using equation 6.14, calculate the factor of safety against a fatigue failure for this case of fully reversed bending
Se
Nf Nf 27
'
PROBLEM 6-51 _____

Statement: A component in the shape of a large sheet is to be fabricated from 7075-T651 aluminum, which
has a fracture toughness Kc = 24.2 MPa-m0.5 and a tensile yield strength of 495 MPa. Determine
the number of loading cycles that can be endured if the nominal stress varies from 0 to one half
the yield strength and the initial crack had a total length of 1.2 mm. The values of the coefficient
and exponent in equation 6.4 for this material are A = 5 x 10 -11 (mm/cyc) and n = 4.
Units: cycle 1
0.5
Initial crack length lo 1.2 mm
11 1
Coeff. and exponent A 5 10 mm cycle n 4
1. Calculate the minimum and maximum nominal stresses based on the yield strength and the stress level given in
the problem statement.
min 0 MPa
Sy
max max 247.5 MPa
2
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a plate with a central crack.
1
3. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the critical crack length for this material at the maximum stress condition.
2
1 Kc
a c a c 3.0 mm
max
4. Calculate the initial crack half-length.
a o 0.5 l o a o 0.60 mm
5. Using equations 6.3, write the stress intensity factor range as a function of crack half-length.
K ( a ) a max min
6. Integrate equation 6.4 to find the number of cycles to failure.
ac
1
Nc
1 5
da Nc 7.2 10 cycle
A 4
K ( a )
0.5
MPa m
ao
PROBLEM 6-52 _____

Statement: A component in the shape of a large sheet is to be fabricated from 4340 steel, which has a fracture
toughness Kc = 98.9 MPa-m0.5. The sheets are inspected for crack flaws after fabrication, but the
inspection device cannot detect flaws smaller than 5 mm. Determine the minimum thickness
required for the sheet to have a minimum cycle life of 10 6 cycles (using fracture-mechanics criteria
if its width is 400 mm and the load normal to the crack varies from 20 to 170 kN. The values of th
coefficient and exponent in equation 6.4 for this material are A = 4 x 10 -9 (mm/cyc) and n = 3.
Units: cycle 1
0.5
Width of sheet W 400 mm
Load Fmin 20 kN Fmax 170 kN
9 1
6
Cycles to failure Nf 10 cycle
Assumption: The initial total crack length is lo 5 mm

1. Write equations for the minimum and maximum nominal stresses as a function of the unknown thickness.
Fmin Fmax
min( t) max( t)
W t W t
2. Determine the value of the geometry factor from the discussion in Section 5.3 for a plate with a central crack.
1
3. Using equation 5.14b, write an equation for the critical crack length as a function of t for this material at the
maximum stress condition.
2
1 Kc
a c( t)
max( t)
4. Calculate the initial crack half-length.

a o 0.5 l o a o 2.50 mm
5. Using equations 6.3, write the stress intensity factor range as a function of crack half-length and sheet thickness
K ( a t) a max( t) min( t)
6. Use equation 6.4 to find the minimum sheet thickness. First, guess a value: t 4 mm
ac( t )

Nf A =
1
Given da t Find ( t) t 3.2 mm
n
K ( a t)
0.5
MPa m

ao
PROBLEM 6-53 _____
Statement: A closed, thin-wall cylinder is made from an aluminum alloy that has a fracture toughness of 38
MPa-m0.5 and has the following dimensions: length = 200 mm, OD = 84 mm, and ID = 70 mm. A
2.8-mm-deep semicircular crack is discovered on the inner diameter away from the ends, oriented
along a line parallel to the cylinder axis. If the cylinder is repeatedly pressurized from 0 to 75
MPa, how many pressure cycles can it withstand? The values of the coefficient and exponent in
equation 6.4 for this material are A = 5 x 10 -12 (mm/cyc) and n = 4. (Hint: the value of the
geometry factor for a semicircular surface flaw is = 2/and the crack grows in the radial
direction).
Units: cycle 1
0.5
Initial crack depth a o 2.8 mm
Cylinder dimensions L 200 mm OD 84 mm ID 70 mm
Internal pressure p min 0 MPa p max 75 MPa
12 1
Geometry factor 0.6367
1. Calculate the nominal hoop stress (tangential direction, normal to cylinder axis) using equation 4.49a based on
the pressure levels given in the problem statement.
r 0.5 ID r 35.0 mm t 0.5 ( OD ID) t 7.0 mm

r
min p min min 0.0 MPa
t
r
max p max max 375.0 MPa
t
2. Using equation 5.14b, calculate the critical crack length for this material at the maximum stress condition.
2
1 Kc
a c a c 8.1 mm
max
However, since this is larger than the wall thickness, failure will occur when the crack reaches the OD so
a c t a c 7.0 mm
3. Using equations 6.3, write the stress intensity factor range as a function of crack depth.
K ( a ) a max min
4. Integrate equation 6.4 to find the number of cycles to failure.
ac
1
Nc
1 6
da Nc 1.34 10 cycle
A 4
K ( a )
0.5
MPa m
ao
PROBLEM 6-54 _____
Statement: A non rotating, hot-rolled, steel beam has a channel section with h = 64 mm and b = 127 mm. It is
loaded in repeated bending with the neutral axis through the web. Determine its corrected fatigue
strength with 90% reliability if it is used in an environment that has a temperature that is below
450C and has an ultimate tensile strength of 320 MPa.
Given: Ultimate tensile strength S ut 320 MPa

Reliability R 0.90
Dimensions h 64 mm b 127 mm
1. Calculate the uncorrected endurance limit using equation 6.5a.

S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 160.0 MPa
2. Determine the loading factor from equation 6.7a.
Cload 1
3. Determine the size factor from equations 6.7b and 6.7d, and Figure 6-25.
2
Area stressed above 95% of max A95 0.05 b h A95 406.4 mm
A95
Equivalent diameter d equiv d equiv 72.8 mm
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
4. Determine the surface factor from equation 6.7e and Table 6-3.
From Table 6-3 A 57.7 b 0.718
b
Sut
MPa
5. Determine the temperature factor from equation 6.7f. Since T < 450C, Ctemp 1.
6. Determine the reliability factor from Table 6-4, Creliab 0.897.
7. Using equation 6.6, calculate the corrected endurance limit.

PROBLEM 6-55 _____
Statement: A non rotating, machined, steel rod has a round section with d = 50 mm. It is loaded with a
fluctuating axial force. Determine its corrected fatigue strength with 99% reliability if it is used in
an environment that has a temperature below 450C and has an ultimate tensile strength of 480
MPa.

Reliability R 0.99
Dimensions d 50 mm

S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 240.0 MPa
Cload 0.70
3. The size factor for an axially loaded member is Csize 1
From Table 6-3 A 4.51 b 0.265
b
Sut
MPa

PROBLEM 6-56 _____
Statement: A non rotating, cold-drawn, steel rod has a round section with d = 76 mm. It is loaded in
repeated torsion. Determine its corrected fatigue strength with 99% reliability if it is used in an
environment that has a temperature of 500C and has an ultimate tensile strength of 855 MPa.

Reliability R 0.99
Dimensions d 76 mm
Temperature T 500 C

S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 427.5 MPa
Cload 1
3. Determine the size factor from equation 6.7b.

0.097
Csize 1.189
d
Size factor Csize 0.781
mm
From Table 6-3 A 4.51 b 0.265
b
Sut
MPa
5. Determine the temperature factor from equation 6.7f.

T 450 C
Ctemp 1 0.0058 Ctemp 0.710
C

PROBLEM 6-57 _____
Statement: A non rotating, ground, steel rod has a rectangular section with h = 60 mm and b = 40 mm. It is
loaded in repeated bending. Determine its corrected fatigue strength with 99.9% reliability if it is
used in an environment that has a temperature that is below 450C and has an ultimate tensile
strength of 1550 MPa.

Reliability R 0.999
Dimensions h 60 mm b 40 mm
1. Calculate the uncorrected endurance limit using equation 6.5a (S ut exceeds 1400 MPa).
S'e 700 MPa
Cload 1
3. Determine the size factor from equations 6.7b and 6.7d, and Figure 6-25.
2
Area stressed above 95% of max A95 0.05 b h A95 120.0 mm
A95
Equivalent diameter d equiv d equiv 39.6 mm
0.0766
0.097
d equiv
mm
From Table 6-3 A 1.58 b 0.085
b
Sut
MPa

PROBLEM 6-58 _____

Statement: A steel, grooved shaft similar to that shown in Figure C-5 (Appendix C) is to be loaded in bending
Its dimensions are: D = 57 mm, d = 38 mm, r = 3 mm. Determine the fatigue stress- concentration
factor if the material S ut = 1130 MPa.
Given: Dimensions: D 57 mm d 38 mm r 3 mm
Solution: See Figure C-5 and Mathcad file P0658.
1. The geometric stress-concentration factor is found from the equation in Figure C-5.
D
For 1.500 A 0.93894 b 0.32380 and
d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 2.14
d
2. The Neuber constant is found by linear interpolation of the values in Table 6-6.
S ut 163.9 ksi
2 2
a 1 0.031 in S 1 160 ksi a 2 0.024 in S 2 180 ksi
S ut S 2
a 1 a 2 a 2
0.5
a a 0.030 in
S1 S2
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity using equation 6.13.
1
q q 0.920
a
1
r
4. The fatigue stress-concentration factor can now be found from equation 6.11b.
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 2.05
PROBLEM 6-59 _____

Statement: A steel shaft with a transverse hole similar to that shown in Figure C-8 (Appendix C) is to be
loaded in torsion. Its dimensions are: D = 32 mm, d = 3 mm. Determine the fatigue stress-
concentration factor if the material S ut = 808 MPa.
Given: Dimensions: D 32 mm d 3 mm
1. The geometric stress-concentration factor is found from an equation in Figure C-8. Although the maximum
torsional stress is on the surface, it will be almost a maximum just below the surface so it will be conservative
to use curve B.
2 3
27.159
d
30.231
d d
Kt 3.9702 9.292 Kt 3.34
D D D
4 5 6
393.19 650.39 15.451
d d d
D D D
2. The Neuber constant is found by linear interpolation of the values in Table 6-6. However, since the loading is
torsional, 20 ksi must be added to the value of S ut that is used in the table (see the text in Figure 6-36, Part 1).
S utt S ut 20 ksi S utt 137.2 ksi

2 2
a 1 0.044 in S 1 130 ksi a 2 0.039 in S 2 140 ksi
S utt S 2
a 1 a 2 a 2
0.5
a a 0.040 in
S1 S2
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity using equation 6.13. Let r 0.5 d
1
q q 0.857
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 3.00
PROBLEM 6-60 _____
Statement: A hardened aluminum filleted flat bar similar to that shown in Figure C-9 (Appendix C) is to be
loaded axially. Its dimensions are: D = 1.20 in, d = 1.00 in, r = 0.10 in. Determine the fatigue
stress-concentration factor if the material S ut = 76 ksi.
Given: Dimensions: D 1.20 in d 1.00 in r 0.100 in

1. The geometric stress-concentration factor is found from the equation in Figure C-9.
D
For 1.200 A 1.03510 b 0.25084 and
d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.84
d
2. The Neuber constant is found by linear interpolation of the values in Table 6-8.
2 2
a 1 0.144 in S 1 70 ksi a 2 0.131 in S 2 80 ksi
S ut S 2
a 1 a 2 a 2
0.5
a a 0.136 in
S1 S2
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity using equation 6.13.
1
q q 0.699
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.59
PROBLEM 6-61
Statement: A rotating shaft with a shoulder fillet seated in the inner race of a rolling contact bearing with the
shoulder against the edge of the bearing is shown in Figure P6-20. The bearing has a slight
eccentricity that induces a fully reversed bending moment in the shaft as it rotates.
Measurements indicate that the resulting alternating stress amplitude due to bending is a = 57
MPa. The torque on the shaft fluctuates from a high of 90 N-m to a low of 12 N-m and is in
phase with the bending stress. The shaft is ground and its dimensions are: D = 23 mm, d = 19
mm, and r = 1.6 mm. The shaft material is SAE 1040 cold-rolled steel. Determine the infinite-life
fatigue safety factor for the shaft for a reliability of 99%.
Given: Strength SAE 1040 CR S ut 586 MPa Alternating bending stress xa 57 MPa
Fluctuating torque Tmax 90 N m Tmin 12 N m
Shaft dimensions D 23 mm d 19 mm r 1.6 mm
1. Determine the mean and alternating components of the fluctuating torsional stress.
d
Distance to outside fiber c c 9.5 mm
2
4
d 4 4
Polar moment of inertia J J 1.279 10 mm
32
Tmax c
Torsional stress xymax xymax 66.827 MPa
J
Tmin c
xymin xymin 8.91 MPa
J
xymax xymin
xym xym 37.869 MPa
2
xymax xymin
xya xya 28.958 MPa
2
2. Using Appendix C, determine the geometric stress concentration factors for the bending and torsional stresses.
D r
Bending (Fig. C-2): For 1.211 0.084 A 0.97098 b 0.21796
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.665
d
D r
Torsion (Fig. C-3): For 1.211 0.084 A 0.83425 b 0.21649
d d
b
Kts A
r
Kts 1.425
d
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity of the material for bending and torsion using Table 6-6.
P0661.xmcd
Bending:
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 586.0 MPa) a 0.075 in
1
Notch sensitivity q b q b 0.77
a
1
r
Torsion:
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 20 MPa 606.0 MPa) a 0.0585 in
1
Notch sensitivity q s q s 0.811
a
1
r
4. Calculate the fatigue stress concentration factors for bending and torsion using equation 6.11b.
Bending Kf 1 q b Kt 1 Kf 1.512
Torsion Kfs 1 q s Kts 1 Kfs 1.345
5. Determine what, if any, fatigue stress concentration factor should be applied to the mean torsional stress.
Yield strength SAE 1040 CR S y 490 MPa
Evaluate Kfs 2 xymax 179.8 MPa which is less than S y so
Kfsm Kfs
6. Calculate the mean and alternating components of the stresses increased by the appropriate fatigue stress
concentration factors.
Bending m 0 MPa a Kf xa a 86.188 MPa
Torsion m Kfsm xym m 50.934 MPa
a Kfs xya a 38.949 MPa
7. Find the mean and alternating von Mises stresses using equations 6.22b (with y = 0).
2
Mean 'm 3 m 'm 88.22 MPa
2 2
Alternating 'a a 3 a 'a 109.451 MPa

P0661.xmcd
0.097
Csize 1.189 d
Size Csize 0.894

mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.919
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S e 196 MPa
Se 'm
Nf 1 Nf 1.5
'a S ut
P0661.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-62
Statement: A tension member in a machine is filleted as shown in Figure P6-21. The member has a
manufacturing defect that causes the fluctuating tension load to be applied eccentrically
resulting in a fluctuating bending load as well. Measurements indicate that the maximum
bending stress is 16.4 MPa and the minimum is 4.1 MPa. The tensile load fluctuates from a high
of 3.6 kN to a low of 0.90 kN and is in phase with the bending stress. The member is machined
and its dimensions are: D = 33 mm, d = 25 mm, h = 3 mm and r = 3 mm. The material is SAE 1020
cold-rolled steel. Determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor for the member for a reliability
of 90%.
Given: Strength SAE 1020 CR S ut 380 MPa xmax 16.4 MPa xmin 4.1 MPa
Fluctuating tension Fmax 3.6 kN Fmin 0.90 kN
Dimensions D 33 mm d 25 mm h 3 mm r 3 mm
1. Determine the mean and alternating components of the fluctuating stresses.
xmax xmin
Bending mb mb 10.250 MPa
2
xmax xmin
ab ab 6.150 MPa
2
Fmax
Tension xtmax xtmax 48.000 MPa
h d
Fmin
xtmin xtmin 12.000 MPa
h d
xtmax xtmin
mt mt 30.000 MPa
2
xtmax xtmin
at at 18.000 MPa
2
2. Using Appendix C, determine the geometric stress concentration factors for the bending and tensile stresses.
D r
Bending (Fig. C-10): For 1.32 0.12 A 0.95880 b 0.27269
d d
b
Ktb A
r
Ktb 1.709
d
D r
Tension (Fig. C-9): For 1.32 0.12 A 1.05440 b 0.27021
d d
b
Ktt A
r
Ktt 1.87
d
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity of the material for bending and tension using Table 6-6.
P0662.xmcd
Bending and tension:

2
Neuber constant (for S ut 55.1 ksi) a 0.118 in
1
a
1
r
4. Calculate the fatigue stress concentration factors for bending and tension using equation 6.11b.
Bending Kfb 1 q Ktb 1 Kfb 1.528
Tension Kft 1 q Ktt 1 Kft 1.648
5. Determine what, if any, fatigue stress concentration factor should be applied to the mean stresses.
Evaluate Kft xmax xtmax 106.1 MPa which is less than S y so
Kfbm Kfb Kftm Kft
Bending mb Kfb mb mb 15.662 MPa
ab Kfb ab ab 9.397 MPa
Tension mt Kftm mt mt 49.427 MPa
at Kft at at 29.656 MPa
Mean 'm mb mt 'm 65.089 MPa
Alternating 'a ab mb 'a 25.06 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.934
MPa
P0662.xmcd
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut
Nf Nf 2.5
'a S ut 'm S e
P0662.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-63a
Statement: For a filleted flat bar in tension similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-9 and the data from
row a from Table P6-7, determine the alternating and mean axial stresses as modified by the
appropriate stress concentration factors in the bar.
Given: Strength SAE 1020 CR S ut 469 MPa

Widths D 40 mm d 20 mm
Force Pmin 8000 N Pmax 32000 N
Solution: See Table P6-7 and Mathcad file P0663a.
1. Determine the nominal mean and alternating components of the fluctuating stresses.
Pmax
xmax xmax 160.0 MPa
h d
Pmin
xmin xmin 40.0 MPa
h d
xmax xmin
xm xm 100.0 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xa xa 60.0 MPa
2
2. Using Appendix C-9, determine the geometric stress concentration factor.
D r
For 2 0.2 A 1.09960 b 0.32077
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.843
d
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity of the material using Table 6-6.
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 68 ksi) a 0.096 in
1
a
1
r
4. Calculate the fatigue stress concentration factor using equation 6.11b.
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.679
5. Determine what, if any, fatigue stress concentration factor should be applied to the mean stress.
Evaluate
P0663a.xmcd
Kfm S 1 Kf xmax
S 2 Kf xmax xmin
return Kf if S 1 S y
S y Kf xa
return if S 1 S y S 2 2 S y
xm
0 otherwise
Kfm 1.679
m Kfm xm m 167.9 MPa
a Kf xa a 100.7 MPa
P0663a.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-64a
Statement: For a filleted flat bar in bending similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-10 and the data from
row a from Table P6-7, determine the alternating and mean bending stresses as modified by the
appropriate stress concentration factors in the bar.

Moment Mmin 80 N m Mmax 320 N m
3
d h d 3 4
c c 10 mm I I 6.667 10 mm
2 12
Mmin c
xmin xmin 120 MPa
I
Mmax c
xmax xmax 480 MPa
I
xmax xmin
xm xm 300.0 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xa xa 180.0 MPa
2
D r
For 2 0.2 A 0.93232 b 0.30304
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.518
d
2
1
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.417
5. Determine what, if any, fatigue stress concentration factor should be applied to the mean stresses.
P0664a.xmcd
Evaluate
Kfm S 1 Kf xmax
S 2 Kf xmax xmin
S y Kf xa
xm
0 otherwise
Kfm 0.460
a Kf xa a 255.1 MPa
P0664a.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-65a
Statement: For a shaft, with a shoulder fillet, in tension similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-1 and the
data from row a from Table P6-7, determine the alternating and mean axial stresses as modified by
the appropriate stress concentration factors in the shaft.

Force Pmin 8000 N Pmax 32000 N
4 Pmax
xmax xmax 101.9 MPa
2
d
4 Pmin
xmin xmin 25.5 MPa
2
d
xmax xmin
xm xm 63.7 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xa xa 38.2 MPa
2
D r
For 2 0.2 A 1.01470 b 0.30035
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.645
d
2
1
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.52
P0665a.xmcd
Evaluate Kfm S 1 Kf xmax

S 2 Kf xmax xmin
S y Kf xa
xm
0 otherwise
Kfm 1.520
m Kfm xm m 96.7 MPa
a Kf xa a 58.0 MPa
P0665a.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-66a
Statement: For a shaft, with a shoulder fillet, in bending similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-2 and
the data from row a from Table P6-7, determine the alternating and mean bending stresses as
modified by the appropriate stress concentration factors in the shaft.

Moment Mmin 80 N m Mmax 320 N m
4
d d 3 4
c c 10 mm I I 7.854 10 mm
2 64
Mmin c
xmin xmin 101.859 MPa
I
Mmax c
xmax xmax 407.437 MPa
I
xmax xmin
xm xm 254.6 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xa xa 152.8 MPa
2
D r
For 2 0.2 A 0.90879 b 0.28598
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.44
d
2
1
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.354
P0666a.xmcd

S 2 Kf xmax xmin
S y Kf xa
xm
0 otherwise
Kfm 0.731
a Kf xa a 206.9 MPa
P0666a.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-67
Statement: A machine part is subjected to fluctuating, simple, multiaxial stresses. The fully corrected
nonzero stress ranges are: xmin = 50 MPa, xmax = 200 MPa, ymin = 80 MPa, ymax = 320 MPa,
xymin = 120 MPa, xymax = 480 MPa. The material properties are: S e = 525 MPa and S ut = 1200
MPa. Using a Case 3 load line, calculate and compare the infinite-life safety factors given by the
Sines and von Mises Methods.
Given: Material properties: S ut 1200 MPa S e 525 MPa
Stresses: xmin 50 MPa xmax 200 MPa
ymin 80 MPa ymax 320 MPa
xymin 120 MPa xymax 480 MPa

1. Calculate the alternating, and mean components of the given stresses.
xmax xmin
xa xa 75 MPa
2
xmax xmin
xm xm 125 MPa
2
ymax ymin
ya ya 120 MPa
2
ymax ymin
ym ym 200 MPa
2
xymax xymin
xya xya 180 MPa
2
xymax xymin
xym xym 300 MPa
2
(a) Sines Method

2. Calculate the equivalent alternating and mean stresses using equations 6.21b.
2 2 2
'a xa ya xa ya 3 xya 'a 329.0 MPa
'm xm ym 'm 325.0 MPa
3. The factor of safety for the Sines Method, using equation (6.18e) is
S e S ut
Nfs Nfs 1.11
'a S ut 'm S e
(b) von Mises Method

4. Calculate the equivalent alternating and mean stresses using equations 6.22b.
2 2 2
'a xa ya xa ya 3 xya 'a 329.0 MPa
2 2 2
'm xm ym xm ym 3 xym 'm 548.3 MPa
5. The factor of safety for the von Mises Method, using equation (6.18e) is
S e S ut
Nfvm Nfvm 0.92
'a S ut 'm S e
6. This example shows that the von Mises method is more conservative when the endurance limit is modified by
such factors as surface finish and when there is a high mean shear stress.
PROBLEM 6-68
Statement: A cylindrical tank with hemispherical ends has been built. It was made from hot rolled steel that
has S ut = 380 MPa. The tank outside diameter is 300 mm with 20 mm wall thickness. The
pressure may fluctuate from 0 to an unknown maximum. For an infinite-life fatigue safety factor
of 4 with 99.99% reliability, what is the maximum pressure to which the tank may be subjected?
Given: Ultimate strength S ut 380 MPa
Tank dimensions OD 300 mm t 20 mm
Reliability & FS R 0.9999 Nf 4

1. Determine the maximum principal stresses as functions of the unkown pressure, which occur at the inside wall,
for this thick-wall cylinder:
Outside radius ro 0.5 OD ro 150 mm
Inside radius ri ro t ri 130 mm
2
ri p
2
Tangential t( p ) 1 ro
2 2 2
ro ri ri
2
ri p ro
2
Radial r( p ) 1
2 2 2
ro ri ri
2
ri p
Axial a( p )
2 2
ro ri
These are principal stresses so, using equation 5.7a:
2 2 2
'( p ) t( p ) r( p ) a( p ) t( p ) a( p ) a( p ) r( p ) t( p ) r( p )
'min 0 MPa
2. Determine the alternating, and mean von Mises effective stress using equations 6.1.
'( p ) 'min '( p ) 'min

'a( p ) 'm( p )
2 2
Surface A 57.7 b 0.718 (hot rolled)
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.811
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, solve equation (6.18e) for p max
Guess p 1 MPa
Given
S e S ut
Nf = Nf 4.00
'a( p ) S ut 'm( p ) S e
p max Find ( p ) p max 4.54 MPa
7. The principal stresses at p max are, respectively:
1 t p max 2 a p max 3 r p max
1 31.9 MPa 2 13.7 MPa 3 4.5 MPa
PROBLEM 6-69
Statement: A rotating shaft has been designed and fabricated from SAE 1040 HR steel. It is made from
tubing that has an outside diameter of 60 mm and a wall thickness of 5 mm. Strain gage
measurements indicate that there is a fully reversed axial stress of 68 MPa and a torsional stress
that fluctuates from 12 MPa to 52 MPa in phase with the axial stress at the critical point on the
shaft. Determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor for the shaft for a reliability of 99%.
Given: Strength SAE 1040 HR S ut 524 MPa Alternating bending stress xa 68 MPa
Torsional stress xymax 52 MPa xymin 12 MPa
Shaft dimensions OD 60 mm t 5 mm

1. Calculate the alternating, and mean components of the given stresses.
xm 0 MPa xa 68 MPa
xymax xymin
xya xya 20 MPa
2
xymax xymin
xym xym 32 MPa
2
2
Mean 'm 3 xym 'm 55.426 MPa
2 2
Alternating 'a xa 3 xya 'a 76.315 MPa

0.097
Csize 1.189
OD
Size Csize 0.799
mm
Surface A 57.7 b 0.718 (hot rolled)
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.644
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e S e 110 MPa
6. Assuming a Case 3 load line, determine the infinite-life fatigue safety factor.
S e S ut
Nf Nf 1.25
'a S ut 'm S e
P0669.xmcd
PROBLEM 6-70a
Statement: For the data in row a in Table P6-8, find the safety factor for each of the four loading cases based
on the Modified-Goodman diagram if S e = 100, S y = 150, and S ut = 200.
Given: S e 100 S y 150 S ut 200

'm 50 'a 30
Solution: See Table 6-8 and Mathcad file P0670a.
1. Calculate the coordinates of point D in Figure 6-46 using equations (6.16).
S ut S y S e
Dm Dm 100
S ut S e
Da S y Dm Da 50
1. Use equations (6.18) and (6.16) to calculate the required quantities.
Case 1:
Sy 'a
Nf1 1 if 'a Da Nf1 2.40
'm Sy
S ut 'a
1 otherwise
'm Se
Case 2:
Se 'm
Nf2 1 if 'm Dm Nf2 2.50
'a S ut
S y 'm
otherwise
'a
Case 3:
S e S ut Se
Nf3 if Dm Nf3 1.82
'a S ut 'm S e 'a Se

'm S ut
S y 'a
otherwise
'm
Case 4:
S ut S e S e 'a S ut 'm
2
'mSut
2 2
S e S ut
Se
'aSut S e 'mSut
S ut
2 2
OZ 'a 'm
Se
ZSut 'm 'mSut 2 'a 'aSut2 if 'm
'a Se

'm S ut
'm 'mSut2 'a 'aSut 2 otherwise
S y 'a 'm
'mSy
2
'aSy 'mSy 'a 'm
Sy
ZSy 'm 'mSy2 'a 'aSy 2 if 'm
'a
1
'm
'm 'mSy 2 'a 'aSy2 otherwise
OZ ZSut
Nf4 if 'mSut Dm Nf4 1.69
OZ
OZ ZSy
otherwise
OZ
PROBLEM 6-70h
Statement: For the data in row h in Table P6-8, find the safety factor for each of the four loading cases based
on the Modified-Goodman diagram if S e = 100, S y = 150, and S ut = 200.
Given: S e 100 S y 150 S ut 200

'm 80 'a 80
Solution: See Table 6-8 and Mathcad file P0670h.
1. Calculate the coordinates of point D in Figure 6-46 using equations (6.16).
S ut S y S e
Dm Dm 100
S ut S e
Da S y Dm Da 50
1. Use equations (6.18) and (6.16) to calculate the required quantities.
Case 1:
Sy 'a
Nf1 1 if 'a Da Nf1 0.50
'm Sy
S ut 'a
1 otherwise
'm Se
Case 2:
Se 'm
Nf2 1 if 'm Dm Nf2 0.75
'a S ut
S y 'm
otherwise
'a
Case 3:
S e S ut Se
Nf3 if Dm Nf3 0.83
'a S ut 'm S e 'a Se

'm S ut
S y 'a
otherwise
'm
Case 4:
S ut S e S e 'a S ut 'm
2
'mSut
2 2
S e S ut
Se
'aSut S e 'mSut
S ut
2 2
OZ 'a 'm
Se
ZSut 'm 'mSut 2 'a 'aSut2 if 'm
'a Se

'm S ut
'm 'mSut2 'a 'aSut 2 otherwise
S y 'a 'm
'mSy
2
'aSy 'mSy 'a 'm
Sy
ZSy 'm 'mSy2 'a 'aSy 2 if 'm
'a
1
'm
'm 'mSy 2 'a 'aSy2 otherwise
OZ ZSut
Nf4 if 'mSut Dm Nf4 0.84
OZ
OZ ZSy
otherwise
OZ
PROBLEM 6-71
Statement: A rotating shaft with a shoulder fillet, in torsion similar to that shown in Appendix Figure C-3 is
made from SAE 1020 CR steel and has dimensions D = 40 mm, d = 20 mm, and r = 4 mm. The
shaft is ground and is subjected to a fully reversed torque of +/- 80 N-m. Determine the infinite
life safety factor for the shaft for a reliability of 99.9%.

Dimensions D 40 mm d 20 mm r 4 mm
Torque Ta 80 N m Tm 0 N m
1. Determine the nominal mean and alternating components of the stresses.
xym 0 MPa
16 Ta
xya xya 50.9 MPa
3
d
D r
For 2 0.2 A 0.86331 b 0.23865
d d
b
Kt A
r
Kt 1.268
d
3. Calculate the notch sensitivity of the material using Table 6-6 adding 20 ksi to S ut because of the torsional load
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 20 ksi 88 ksi) a 0.072 in
1
a
1
r
Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.226
m xym m 0 MPa
a Kf xya a 62.46 MPa
6. Calculate the von Mises normal stress.
von Mises stress 'a 3 a 'a 108.19 MPa
7. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a rotating, solid, round steel shaft.
Load Cload 1 (pure torsion)

P0671.xmcd
0.097
Csize 1.189
d
Size Csize 0.889
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.937
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
Uncorrected endurance strength S'e 0.5 S ut
S'e 234.5 MPa
8. Calculate the endurance limit.
9. Using equation 6.14, calculate the infinite-life factor of safety.
Se
Nf Nf 1.4
'a
P0671.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-1
Statement: Two 3 x 5 cm blocks of steel with machined finish Ra = 0.6 mm are rubbed together with a normal
force of 400 N. Estimate the true area of contact between them if their S y = 400 MPa.
Given: Length of block L 5 cm Normal force F 400 N
Width of block w 3 cm Yield strength S y 400 MPa
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength is the same as the tensile yield strength. Then, S yc S y.
1. Using equation 7.1, the true area of contact is estimated as

F 3 2
Ar Ar 3.33333 10 cm
3 S yc
2
2. The apparent area of contact is Aa w L Aa 15 cm
Aa
3. The ratio of apparent area to true area is 4500
Ar
PROBLEM 7-2
Statement: Estimate the dry coefficient of friction between the two pieces in Problem 7-1 if their S ut = 600
MPa.
Given: Length of block L 5 cm Yield strength S y 400 MPa

Width of block w 3 cm Ultimate strength S ut 600 MPa
Normal force F 400 N
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength is the same as the tensile yield strength. Then, S yc S y.
Using equations 7.3 and 7.4, the coefficient of friction is estimated as
S us 0.80 S ut S us 480 MPa
S us
0.40
3 S yc
PROBLEM 7-3
Statement: For the bicycle pedal-arm assembly in Figure P7-1 assume a rider-applied force that ranges from
0 to 400 N at the pedal each cycle. Determine the maximum contact stresses at one sprocket
tooth-chain roller interface. Assume that the one tooth takes all the applied torque, that the
chain roller is 8-mm dia, the sprocket has a nominal (pitch) dia of 100 mm, and that the sprocket
tooth is essentially flat at the point of contact. The roller and sprocket are made of SAE X1340
steel, induction hardened to HRC 45-58. The roller and sprocket contact over a length of 8 mm.
Assuming rolling plus 9% sliding, estimate the number of cycles to failure for this particular
tooth-roller combination.
Given: Roller radius R1 4 mm The parts are steel. Therefore:

Sprocket radius R2 mm E 207 GPa
Sprocket width w 8 mm 0.28
Pedal force Frider 400 N Sprocket pitch dia d p 100 mm
Pedal arm length len 170 mm
Assumptions: The coefficient of friction is 0.33

1. Determine the maximum contact force.
Torque on sprocket Tmax Frider len Tmax 68 N m
2 Tmax
Contact force Fcmax Fcmax 1.36 kN
dp
2. Find the material constants from equation 7.9a.

2
1 6 1
Material constants m1 m1 4.452 10
E MPa
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 125 m
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 Fcmax
half-width a a 0.0878 mm
B w
3. The average and maximum contact pressure can now be found from equations 7.14b and c.
Fcmax
Average pressure p avg p avg 968.1 MPa
2 a w
2 Fcmax
Maximum pressure p max p max 1233 MPa
a w
Tangential fmax p max fmax 406.8 MPa
pressure
4. With m = 0.33, the principal stresses in the contact zone will be maximal on the surface (z = 0) at x = 0.3a from th
centerline as shown in Figures 7-20 and 7-22. The applied stress components are found from equation 7.23a for
the normal force and equation 7.23b for the tangential force.
For x 0.3 a
2
x
xn p max 1 xn 1176 MPa
2
a
x
xt 2 fmax xt 244.05 MPa
a
2
x
zn p max 1 zn 1176 MPa
2
a
zt 0 MPa xzn 0 MPa
2
x
xzt fmax 1 xzt 388.0 MPa
2
a
5. Equations 7.24a and 7.24b can now be solved for the total applied stresses along the x, y, and z axes.
x xn xt x 1420 MPa
z zn zt z 1176 MPa
xz xzn xzt xz 388.019 MPa
6. Assuming the rollers are short, we expect a plane stress condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is
then:
y 0 MPa also, xy 0 MPa yz 0 MPa
7. Unlike the pure-rolling case, these stresses are not principal because of the applied shear stress. The principal
stresses are found from equation 4.4 using a cubic root finding solution.
x y z 3
C2 C2 2.596 10
MPa
x xy x xz y yz

C1 MPa MPa
MPa MPa
MPa MPa
C1 1.519 10
6
xy y xz z yz z
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa

x xy xz
MPa MPa MPa
xy y yz
C0 C0 0
MPa MPa MPa
xz yz z
MPa MPa MPa

3 2
f ( ) C2 C1 C0
C0
1704.6
v C1
r polyroots ( v) MPa r 891.1 MPa
C2
0.0
1
Principal stresses: 1 r 1 0 MPa
3
2 r 2 891.1 MPa
2
3 r 3 1704.6 MPa
1
8. The maximum normal stress calculated in step 7 is 1705 MPa, compressive. Its K-factor can be calculated from
equation 7.25d.
K m1 m2 3
2
K-factor K 81.3 MPa
9. From Table 7-7, Part 1, Line 4 the slope and intercept factors of this cast iron for rolling with 9% sliding are
8.51 41.31
10. These are used in equation 7.26 along with the value of K from above to find the number of cycles that can be
expected at this load before pitting begins.
log Nlife
log ( K) =

log
K

Nlife 10 psi Nlife 4.6 10
6
cycles
PROBLEM 7-4
Statement: For the trailer hitch from Problem 3-4 on p. 169, determine the contact stresses in the ball and ball
cup. Assume that the ball is 2-in dia and the ill-fitting cup that surrounds the it is an internal
spherical surface 10% larger in diameter than the ball.
F
Given: Ball diameter d 2 in
Cup diameter D 2.2 in
Pull force Fpull 4.905 kN
Tongue weight Wtong 0.981 kN
Poisson's ratio 0.28
6
Modulus of elasticity E 30.0 10 psi
2 2
Total force F Fpull Wtong FIGURE 7-4
Diagram Showing Contact Force
F 1125 lbf for Problem 7-4
Ball radius R1 0.5 d R1 1.000 in

Cup radius R2 0.5 D R2 1.100 in

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 0.045 in
2 R1 R2
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
radius a F a 0.0829 in
8 B
2 2
Contact area A a A 0.022 in
F
Average pressure p avg p avg 52.1 ksi
A
3
Maximum pressure p max p avg p max 78.1 ksi
2
Stresses
Axial zmax p max zmax 78.1 ksi
1 2
In-plane xmax p max xmax 60.9 ksi
2
ymax xmax
1 2
( 1 ) 2 ( 1 )
p max 2
Max shear stress yzmax
2 2 9
yzmax 26.4 ksi
Depth at max 2 2
shear stress zmax a zmax 0.05228 in
7 2
PROBLEM 7-5
Given: Ball diameter d 2 in

Trailer mass mtrail 2000 kg
F
1
Terminal velocity v 60 m sec
Time to reach vel. t 20 sec
6
v m
Acceleration a a 3.00
t 2
sec
FIGURE 7-5
Pull force Fpull mtrail a
for Problem 7-5
Fpull 6.00 kN
2 2
Total force F Fpull Wtong F 1367 lbf

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
8 B
2 2
F
A
3
2
Stresses
1 2
2
ymax xmax
1 2
( 1 ) 2 ( 1 )
p max 2
2 2 9
yzmax 28.1 ksi
Depth at max 2 2
7 2
PROBLEM 7-6
Given: Ball diameter d 2 in F

Trailer mass mtrail 2000 kg
6

From Problem 3-6, the impact (pull) force is
Pull force Fpull 55.1 kN
2 2 FIGURE 7-6
Total force F Fpull Wtong
for Problem 7-6
F 12389 lbf

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
8 B
2 2
F
A
3
2
Stresses
1 2
2
ymax xmax
1 2
( 1 ) 2 ( 1 )
p max 2
2 2 9
yzmax 58.7 ksi
Depth at max 2 2
7 2
PROBLEM 7-7
Statement: For the 12-mm dia steel wrist pin of Problem 3-7, find the maximum contact stress if the 2500 g
acceleration is fully reversed. The aluminum piston has a hole for the wrist pin that is 2% larger
than the pin and an engagement length of 20 mm.
Given: Wrist pin dia d 12 mm Material properties:

Piston hole multiplier k 1.02 Steel wrist pin 1 0.28
Acceleration a 2500 g E1 206.8 GPa
Piston mass M 0.5 kg Aluminum piston 2 0.34
Length of contact L 2 cm E2 71.7 GPa
Contact force F M a F 12.26 kN

Pin radius R1 0.5 d R1 6 mm
Hole radius R2 k R1 R2 6.12 mm

1 1 1 3 1
Geometry constant B B 1.63399 10 mm
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 6 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 1.233 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B L
2
Contact area A 2 L a A 80.10 mm
F
A
2 F
Maximum pressure p max p max 194.9 MPa
a L
Wrist pin
1. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the contact patch at the surface of the steel wrist pin are found
using equations 7.17a.
Axial zmax p max zmax 194.9 MPa
In-plane y1max 2 1 p max y1max 109.1 MPa
2. The maximum shear stress and its location under the surface are found from equations 7.17b.
Max shear stress 13max 0.304 p max 13max 59.2 MPa
Depth at max
shear stress zmax 0.786 a zmax 1.57 mm
Piston hole
3. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the contact patch at the surface of the aluminum piston hole are
found using equations 7.17a.
4. The maximum shear stress and its location under the surface are found from equations 7.17b.
Depth at max
PROBLEM 7-8
outside dia (OD) by 0.22 m inside dia (ID) by 3.23 m long and has an effective modulus of
elasticity in compression of 14 MPa and n = 0.3. Determine the width of its contact patch when
it sits on a flat steel surface, loaded by its own weight.
3
Given: Paper properties 1 984 kg m Roll dimensions:
E1 14 MPa Outside diameter OD 1.50 m
1 0.3 Inside diameter ID 0.22 m
Steel properties E2 207 GPa Lemgth L 3.23 m
2 0.28
1. The weight of the paper roll is equal to its volume times the paper density times g.
Wroll

4
2 2
OD ID L 1 g Wroll 53.895 kN
2. Determine the radii of the contacting bodies.

Roll R1 0.5 OD R1 750 mm
Plate R2 mm
3. Determine the geometry and material constants.

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 0.667 m
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 1
Material constants m1 m1 0.065
E1 MPa
2
1 2 6 1
m2 m2 4.452 10
E2 MPa
4. Calculate the contact patch hakf-width and width.

1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 Wroll
B L
Contact patch
width width 2 a width 64.4 mm
PROBLEM 7-9
Statement: For the ViseGrip plier-wrench for which the forces were analyzed in Problem 3-9, find the force in
link 4 needed to create a 0.25-mm-wide flat on each side of a 2-mm dia aluminum pin squeezed in
its 5-mm-wide jaws.
Given: Pin radius R1 1 mm Material properties:

Anvil curvature R2 mm Steel anvil 2 0.28
Contact patch a 0.125 mm E2 206.8 GPa
Contact length L 5 mm Aluminum pin 1 0.34
E1 71.7 GPa

1. Determine the geometry and material constants.

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 500 m
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 5 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 6 1
m2 m2 4.456 10
E2 MPa
2
a B L
2. Calculate the contact force F F 3.654 kN
2 m1 m2
3. Get the geometry from Problem 3-9 and calculate the pin force.
21.0 deg 129.2 deg
F
F4
cos( 180 deg )
sin( 180 deg ) sin( 180 deg)
cos( 180 deg)
F4 4.65 kN
PROBLEM 7-10
Statement: An overhung diving board is shown in Figure P7-4a. A 100-kg person is standing on the free end.
The board sits on a fulcrum that has a cylindrical contact surface of 5-mm radius. What is the size
of the contact patch between the board and the fulcrum if the board material is fiberglass with E =
10.3 GPa and n = 0.3?
Given: Fulcrum radius R1 5 mm

Board curvature R2 mm 2000 = L
Mass of person M 100 kg R1 P
Material properties:
Aluminum fulcrum 1 0.34
E1 71.7 GPa
R2
Fiberglass board 2 0.30
E2 10.3 GPa 700 = a
Board dimensions:
Width (Prob 4-10) w 305 mm FIGURE 7-10
Distance to right support a' 0.7 m Free Body Diagram for Problem 7-10
Contact length L 2 m
Weight of person P M g P 0.981 kN

Summing moments about the support on the left end of the board, P L F b = 0
L
Fulcrum reaction F P F 2.802 kN
a'

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 0.100 mm
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 5 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 8.835 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B w
Contact patch
width a2 2 a a2 0.153 mm
PROBLEM 7-11
stands on it. What is the size of the contact patch between the board and the 5-mm-radius
aluminum fulcrum if the board material is fiberglass with E = 10.3 GPa and n = 0.3?
Given: Fulcrum radius R1 5 mm

Board curvature R2 mm 2000 = L
Mass of person M 100 kg R1 P
Aluminum fulcrum 1 0.34
E1 71.7 GPa
R2
Fiberglass board 2 0.30
E2 10.3 GPa 700 = a
Board dimensions:
Width (Prob 4-10) w 305 mm FIGURE 7-11
Distance to right support a' 0.7 m Free Body Diagram for Problem 7-11
Contact length L 2 m
1. From Problem 3-11, the dynamic load resulting from the impact of the person with the board is P 3.056 kN
Summing moments about the support on the left end of the board, P L F b = 0
L
Fulcrum reaction F P F 8.731 kN
a'

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 5 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 8.835 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B w
Contact patch
width a2 2 a a2 0.271 mm
PROBLEM 7-12
Statement: Estimate the volume of adhesive wear to expect from an HB270 steel shaft of 40-mm diameter
rotating at 250 rpm for 10 years in a plain bronze bushing if the transverse load is 1000 N.
(a) For conditions of poor lubrication.
(b) For conditions of good lubrication.
1
Units: rpm 2 rad min kilo kg g yr 260 day rev 2 rad
Given: Journal diameter d 40 mm Load F 1000 N

Journal speed n 250 rpm Life Life 10 yr
kilo
Journal hardness HB 270
2
mm
Assumptions: The bushing is softer than the journal (shaft) so the wear will take place predominately on the
bushing.
1. From Figure 7-6 in the text we see that iron (the principal ingredient of steel) is metalurgically compatible with
copper and tin, the principal ingredients of bronze. From Figure 7-7 we have the following values of adhesive
wear coefficient for metalurgically compatible and poor and good lubrication, respectively.
4
Adhesive wear Ka 10 poor lubrication
coefficients
5
Kb 10 good lubrication
The length of d 8
sliding is L n Life L 1.176 10 m
rev
2. Using equation 7.7a we can estimate the volume of wear for each lubrication condition
F L 6 3
(a) poor lubrication Va Ka Va 4.4 10 mm
HB
F L 5 3
(b) good lubrication Vb Kb Vb 4.4 10 mm
HB
3. These numbers are entirely too large. The bushing will fail long before the ten years have gone by.
PROBLEM 7-13
Statement: Estimate how long it will take to file 1 mm off a 2-cm cube of HB150 steel if the machinist applies
100 N over a 10-cm stroke at 60 strokes per minute.
(a) If done dry.
(b) If done lubricated.
Units: kilo kg g
1
Given: Cube dimension a 2 cm Stroke rate n 60 min
Depth of wear d 1 mm Stroke s 10 cm
kilo
Force on file F 100 N Steel hardness HB 150
2
mm
Assumptions: Only one face will be filed.

1. This is a two-body abrasion problem. From Table 7-2, the wear coefficients for dry and lubricated abrasion
using a file are
2
Wear coefficients Ka 5 10 dry
1
Kb 1 10 lubricated
2. The length of sliding is L = s n t where t is the time required.
2 F L
3. The area of a face is Aa = a , and the depth is d = K
HB Aa
4. Combining these three equations and solving for the time, t
2
d HB a
(a) dry ta ta 20 min
Ka F s n
strokesa ta n strokesa 1177
2
d HB a
(b) lubricated tb tb 10 min
Kb F s n
strokesb tb n strokesb 588
PROBLEM 7-14
Estimate the abrasivbe wear rate for the tip, which impacts the ground assuming a condition of
dry, loose abrasive grains (sand). Express the wear rate in number of jumps to remove 0.02 in
from the 1-in-dia aluminum tip if its S ut = 50 ksi.
Units: kilo kg g
Given: Tip diameter d 1.00 in

Wear depth a 0.02 in
Assumptions: The tip slides a distance of one tip diameter per

jump.
1. From Problem 3-14, the impact force for each jump is P 224 lbf
2. Use equation (2.10) to estimate the Brinell hardness of the steel tip. Fi /2 Fi /2
1 Sut kilo kilo
HB HB 94
530 psi 2 2
mm mm
3. This is a two-body abrasion problem. From Table 7-2, the wear
coefficient for dry abrasion using loose abrasive grains is
3
K 1 10
4. The length of sliding (see assumption) is L = d Njumps
where d is the tip diameter and Njumps is the number of jumps. P
2
d 2 FIGURE 7-14
5. The area of the tip is Aa Aa 0.785 in
4 Free Body Diagram for Problem 7-14
P L
and the wear depth is a = K
HB Aa
a HB Aa
6. Substituting for L and solving for the number of jumps, Njumps Njumps 9410
K d P
PROBLEM 7-15
Statement: Create a table of acceptable materials to run against a steel shaft based on their metallurical
compatibility. Rank them as to suitability.
Solution: See Figure 7-6 in text.
PROBLEM 7-16
Statement: Determine the size of the contact patch and the maximum contact stresses for a 20-mm-dia steel
ball rolled against a flat aluminum plate with 1 kN.
Given: Ball radius R1 10 mm Material properties

Plate curvature R2 mm Steel ball 1 0.28
Load F 1 kN E1 206.8 GPa
Aluminum plate 2 0.34
E2 71.7 GPa

1. Calculate geometry and material constants, contact patch dimension, and pressures.

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 6 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 1.233 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
radius a F a 0.501 mm
8 B
2 2
Contact area A a A 0.789 mm
F
Average pressure p avg p avg 1267 MPa
A
3
Maximum pressure p max p avg p max 1900 MPa
2
2. Determine the stresses in the ball at the surface

Axial zmax p max zmax 1900 MPa
1 2 1
In-plane xmax1 p max xmax1 1482 MPa
2
ymax1 xmax1
3. Determine the stresses in the ball below the surface
1 2 1 2
p max
Max shear yzmax1 1 1 2 1 1
stress 2 2 9
yzmax1 641.5 MPa
Depth at max 2 2 1
shear stress zmax1 a zmax1 0.316 mm
7 2 1
4. Determine the stresses in the plate at the surface

1 2 2
2
ymax2 xmax2
5. Determine the stresses in the plate below the surface
1 2 2 2
p max
stress 2 2 9
yzmax2 615.2 MPa
Depth at max 2 2 2
7 2 2
PROBLEM 7-17
ball rolled against a 30-mm diameter aluminum ball with 800 N.
Given: Steel ball radius R1 10 mm Material properties:

Aluminum ball radius R2 15 mm Steel ball 1 0.28
Load F 0.8 kN E1 206.8 GPa
Aluminum ball 2 0.34
E2 71.7 GPa


1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 6 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 1.233 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
8 B
2 2
F
A
3
2
2. Determine the stresses in the steel ball at the surface

1 2 1
2
ymax1 xmax1
3. Determine the stresses in the steel ball below the surface
1 2 1 2
p max
stress 2 2 9
yzmax1 837.1 MPa
Depth at max 2 2 1
7 2 1
4. Determine the stresses in the aluminum ball at the surface

1 2 2
2
ymax2 xmax2
5. Determine the stresses in the aluminum ball below the surface
1 2 2 2
p max
stress 2 2 9
yzmax2 802.9 MPa
Depth at max 2 2 2
7 2 2
PROBLEM 7-18
cylinder, 25-cm long, rolled against a flat aluminum plate with 4 kN.
Given: Cylinder radius R1 20 mm Material properties:
Plate curvature R2 mm Steel cylinder 1 0.28
Contact length L 250 mm Aluminum plate 2 0.34
E2 71.7 GPa


1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 6 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 5 1
m2 m2 1.233 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B L
2
F
A
2 F
a L
2. Determine the stresses in the cylinder at the surface. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the contact
patch at the surface of the steel cylinder are found using equations 7.17a.
3. Determine the stresses in the cylinder below the surface. The maximum shear stress and its location under the
surface are found from equations 7.17b.
Depth at max
4. Determine the stresses in the plate at the surface. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the contact
patch at the surface of the aluminum plate are found using equations 7.17a.

5. Determine the stresses in the plate below the surface. The maximum shear stress and its location under the
surface are found from equations 7.17b.

Depth at max
PROBLEM 7-19
cylinder, 25-cm long, rolled against a parallel 50-mm-dia steel cylinder with 10 kN.
Given: Cylinder radius R1 20 mm Material properties:
Cylinder radius R2 25 mm Steel cylinder 1 0.28
Contact length L 250 mm Steel cylinder 2 0.28
E2 206.8 GPa


1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 6 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 6 1
m2 m2 4.456 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B L
2
F
A
2 F
a L
2. Determine the stresses in either cylinder at the surface. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the
contact patch at the surface of the steel cylinder are found using equations 7.17a.
3. Determine the stresses in either cylinder below the surface. The maximum shear stress and its location
under the surface are found from equations 7.17b.
Depth at max
PROBLEM 7-20
ball rolled against a 40-mm-dia steel cylinder, 25-mm long with 10 kN force.
Given: Ball radii R1 10.00 mm The parts are steel. Therefore:
R'1 10.00 mm E 206.8 GPa 0.28
Cylinder radii R2 20.00 mm (radial)
R'2 mm (axial)
Radial load F 10 kN (normal to contact plane)
Angle between planes of R1 and R2 0 deg
Assumptions: The relative motion is rolling with < 1% sliding.

1. Find the material constants from equation 7.9b.
2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1
2. Two geometry constants are needed from equations 7.19a.

Geometry 1 1 1 1 1 1
constants A A 0.1250 mm
2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.0250 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 78.46
A
Factors from 0.86215
equations 7.19e ka 50.192 ka 1.167
2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.875
3. Determine the contact patch dimensions using the material and geometry constants in equations 7.19d.
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width a ka F a 0.947 mm
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width b kb F b 0.710 mm
4 A
2
Contact area A a b A 2.11354 mm
F
A
3
2
5. The maximum normal stresses in the center of the contact patch at the surface are then found using equations
7.21a.
x 2 ( 1 2 ) p
b
In-plane max x 5312 MPa
a b
y 2 ( 1 2 ) p
a
max y 5759 MPa
a b
Axial z p max z 7097 MPa
These stresses are principal:

1 x 2 y 3 z
The maximum shear stress associated with them at the surface is
1 3
13 13 892 MPa
2
6. The maximum shear stress under the surface on the z-axis is approximately
Max shear stress 13max 0.34 p max 13max 2413 MPa
7. All of the stresses found so far exist on the centerline of the patch. At the edge of the patch, at the surface,
there will also be a shear stress. Two constants are found from equation 7.21b for this calculation.
b
k3 k3 0.75
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.662
a
8. These constants are used in equations 7.21c and d to find the shear stresses on the surface at the ends of the
major and minor axes.
atanh k4 1 p max
k3 1
Major axis xy ( 1 2 ) xy 1084 MPa
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
Minor axis xy ( 1 2 ) 1 atan pmax xy 966 MPa
k4
2 k4 k3
PROBLEM 7-21
Statement: A cam-follower system has a dynamic load of 0 to 2 kN. The cam is cylindrical with a minimum
radius of curvature of 20 mm. The roller follower is crowned with radii of 15 mm in one direction
and 150 mm in the other. Find the contact stresses if the follower is steel and the cam is nodular
iron.
Given: Roller radius R1 15.00 mm

Crown radius R'1 150.00 mm(90 deg to roller rad)
Cam curvature R2 20.00 mm (radial)
Cam curvature R'2 mm (axial)
Radial load F 2 kN (normal to contact plane)
Material properties E1 206.8 GPa 1 0.28 steel
E2 172.4 GPa 2 0.30 cast iron

2
1 1 3 1
E1 GPa
2
1 2 3 1
m2 m2 5.278 10
E2 GPa

2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.0550 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 26.89
A

2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.477
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
2
F
A
3
2
5. The maximum normal stresses in the steel follower at the center of the contact patch at the surface are then found
x 2 1 1 2 1 p
b
a b
y 2 1 1 2 1 p
a
max y 1670 MPa
a b
1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 337 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.162
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.987
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3
xy 1 2 1
1
Major axis xy 201 MPa
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
Minor axis xy 1 2 1 1 atan p max xy 100 MPa
k4
2 k4 k3
9. The maximum normal stresses in the nodular iron cam at the center of the contact patch at the surface are then
found using equations 7.21a.
x 2 2 1 2 2 p
b
a b
y 2 2 1 2 2 p
a
max y 1680 MPa
a b
1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 306 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.162
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.987
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3
xy 1 2 2
1
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
k4
2 k4 k3
PROBLEM 7-22
Statement: An "inline" skate is shown in Figure P7-10. The polyurethane wheels are 72 mm dia. by 12-mm
thick with a 6-mm crown radius and are spaced on 104- mm centers. The skate-boot-foot
combination weighs 2 kg. The effective "spring rate" of the person-skate subsystem is 6000
N/m. Find the contact stresses in the wheels when a 100-kg person lands a 0.5-m jump on one
foot on concrete. Assume the urethane wheels and concrete have the properties below.
(a) Assume that all 4 wheels land simultaneously.
Given: Force per wheel (from Problem 3-22):

Case (a) Fa 897 N Case (b) Fb 3.59 kN
Urethane E1 600 MPa 1 0.4
Concrete E2 21 GPa 2 0.2
Wheel dimensions R1 36 mm R'1 6 mm
Concrete dimensions R2 mm R'2 mm
Contact angle 0 deg

2
1 1 1
Material constants m1 m1 1.400
E1 GPa
2
1 2 1
m2 m2 0.0457
E2 GPa

2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.0694 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 44.42
A

2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.593
Part (a)
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width a ka Fa a 4.108 mm
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width b kb Fa b 1.278 mm
4 A
2
Contact area Ac a b Ac 16.49024 mm
Fa
Ac
3
Maximum pressure p max p avg p max 81.6 MPa
2
7.21a.
x 2 1 1 2 1 p
b
In-plane max x 69.1 MPa
a b
y 2 1 1 2 1 p
a
max y 77.7 MPa
a b
Axial z p max z 81.6 MPa
1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 6.22 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.311
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.95
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3
xy 1 2 1
1
Major axis xy 5.24 MPa
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
Minor axis xy 1 2 1 1 atan p max xy 3.31 MPa
k4
2 k4 k3
Part (b)
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width a ka Fb a 6.522 mm
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
half-width b kb Fb b 2.029 mm
4 A
2
Contact area Ac a b Ac 41.56824 mm
Fb
Ac
3
Maximum pressure p max p avg p max 129.5 MPa
2
7.21a.
x 2 1 1 2 1 p
b
In-plane max x 109.8 MPa
a b
y 2 1 1 2 1 p
a
max y 123.4 MPa
a b
Axial z p max z 129.5 MPa

1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 9.88 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.311
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.95
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3
xy 1 2 1
1
Major axis xy 8.31 MPa
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
Minor axis xy 1 2 1 1 atan p max xy 5.26 MPa
k4
2 k4 k3
PROBLEM 7-23
Statement: A pair of 12-in dia cylindrical steel rolls run together with 9% slip. Find their contact stresses
for a radial contact forces of 1000 lb/in of length.
Given: Roller radii R1 6.00 in The parts are hardened steel. Therefore:
6
R2 6.00 in E 30 10 psi 0.28
1
Radial load/in F' 1000 lbf in
Assumptions: The coefficient of friction is 0.33.

2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2
half-width a F' a 0.0153 in
B
F'
2 a
2 F'
Maximum pressure p max p max 41.6 ksi
a
Tangential fmax p max fmax 13.7 ksi

pressure
3. With m = 0.33, the principal stresses in the contact zone will be maximal on the surface (z = 0) at x = 0.3a from
the centerline as shown in Figures 7-20 and 7-22. The applied stress components are found from equation
7.23a for the normal force and equation 7.23b for the tangential force.
For x 0.3 a
2
x
xn p max 1 xn 39.6 ksi
2
a
x
xt 2 fmax xt 8.23 ksi
a
2
x
zn p max 1 zn 39.6 ksi
2
a
zt 0 ksi xzn 0 ksi
2
x
xzt fmax 1 xzt 13.1 ksi
2
a
x xn xt x 47.871 ksi
z zn zt z 39.642 ksi
xz xzn xzt xz 13.082 ksi
5. Assuming the rollers are long, we expect a plane strain condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is
found from equation 7.23b:
y x z y 24.504 ksi
x y z
x y z
ksi ksi ksi
xz
xy 0 yz 0 xz
ksi
C2 x y z C2 112.017
x xy x xz y yz 3
C1 C1 3.871 10
xy y xz z yz z
x xy xz
4
C0 xy y yz C0 4.231 10

xz yz z
3 2
f ( ) C2 C1 C0
C0
57.5
v C1
s polyroots ( v) ksi s 30.0 ksi
C2
24.5
1
Principal stresses:
1 s 1 24.5 ksi
3
2 s 2 30.0 ksi
2
3 s 3 57.5 ksi
1
Maximum shear stress
1 3
13 13 16.5 ksi
2
7. The principal stresses are maximum at the surface as seen in Figures 7-20 and 7-22 in the text.
PROBLEM 7-24
Statement: Estimate the cycle life of the rolls in Problem 7-23 if they are made of class 30 gray cast iron,
austempered to HB270.
Given: Roller radii R1 6.00 in The parts are gray cast iron. Therefore:
6
R2 6.00 in E 15 10 psi 0.28
1
Radial load/in F' 1000 lbf in
Assumptions: The coefficient of friction is 0.33.
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2
B
F'
2 a
2 F'
a

pressure
3. With m = 0.33, the principal stresses in the contact zone will be maximal on the surface (z = 0) at x = 0.3a from
the centerline as shown in Figures 7-20 and 7-22. The applied stress components are found from equation
7.23a for the normal force and equation 7.23b for the tangential force.
For x 0.3 a
2
x
2
a
x
a
2
x
2
a
zt 0 ksi xzn 0 ksi
2
x
2
a
5. Assuming the rollers are long, we expect a plane strain condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is
found from equation 7.23b:
y x z y 17.327 ksi
x y z
x y z
ksi ksi ksi
xz
xy 0 yz 0 xz
ksi
C2 x y z C2 79.208
x xy x xz y yz 3
C1 C1 1.935 10
xy y xz z yz z
x xy xz
4
C0 xy y yz C0 1.496 10

xz yz z
3 2
f ( ) C2 C1 C0
C0
40.6
v C1
s polyroots ( v) ksi s 21.2 ksi
C2
17.3
1
Principal stresses:
1 s 1 17.3 ksi
3
2 s 2 21.2 ksi
2
3 s 3 40.6 ksi
1
7. The maximum normal stress calculated in step 6 is 40.9 ksi, compressive. Its K-factor can be calculated from
equation 7.25d.
K m1 m2 3
2
K-factor K 637.5 psi
8. From Table 7-7, Part 2, Line 33 the slope and intercept factors of this cast iron for rolling with 9% sliding are
7.87 35.90
log Nlife
log ( K) =

log
K

13
cycles
PROBLEM 7-25
Statement: A 12-mm-dia, class 30 gray cast iron pad is supported by a steel bar made from SAE 4340 steel,
quenched and tempered at 800F. The force on the pad is 3.8 kN. Estimate the real area of contact
and the ratio of the real area to the apparent area of contact.
Given: Pad diameter d 12 mm

Compressive yield strengths: Steel S ycs 1469 MPa
Cast iron S ycci 752 MPa
Contact force F 3.8 kN
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the cast iron is approximately the same as the compressive
strength.
1. Calculate the apparent area of contact.

2
d 2
Aa Aa 113.097 mm
4
2. Use equation 7.1 and the cast iron strength, which is the weaker of the two, to estimate the real area of contact.
F 2
Ar Ar 1.6844 mm
3 S ycci
3. The ratio of real to apparent area of contact is:
Ar
ratio ratio 1.5 %
Aa
P0725.xmcd
MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach 4th Ed. 7-26-1
PROBLEM 7-26
Statement: Estimate the dry coefficient of friction between the two materials in Problem 7-35 if the shear
strength of the cast iron is S us = 310 MPa. How does this compare to the value given in Table
7-1?

Shear strength: Cast iron S us 310 MPa
Compressive yield strength S yc 752 MPa
strength.
Solution: See Table 7-1 and Mathcad file P0726.
1. Using equation 7.3, the coefficient of friction is approximately:
S us
0.14
3 S yc
From Table 7-1, the coefficient of friction for mild steel on cast iron (lubricated) is 0.183.
P0726.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-27 _____
Statement: Two 0.5-in x 1-in 1040 hot-rolled steel pads are in contact with a force of 900 lb. Estimate the
real area of contact and the ratio of the real area to the apparent area of contact.
Given: Pad dimensions L 1.00 in w 0.5 in

Compressive yield strength: S yc 42 ksi
Contact force F 900 lbf
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the steel is approximately the same as the tensile yield
strength.
2
Aa L w Aa 0.500 in
2. Use equation 7.1 and the compressive yield strength to estimate the real area of contact.
F 2
Ar Ar 0.0071 in
3 S yc
Ar
ratio ratio 1.43 %
Aa
PROBLEM 7-28 _____
Statement: Estimate the dry coefficient of friction between the two materials in Problem 7-27. How does this
compare to the value given in Table 7-1?
Given: Pad dimensions L 1.0 in w 0.50 in

Ultimate tensile strength: S ut 76 ksi
Compressive yield strength: S yc 42 ksi
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the steel is approximately the same as the tensile yield
strength.
1. Estimate the ultimate shear strength using equation 7.4 for steel.
S us 0.8 S ut S us 60.8 ksi
S us
0.48
3 S yc
PROBLEM 7-29 _____
Statement: Two materials have been tested to determine the amount of adhesive wear that takes place when
they are run together. The average depth of wear results are given in Table P7-1 along with the
test parameters for a total of 350 tests. What is the average wear coefficient for the materials
tested if the Brinell hardness of the softer of the two is HB 277.
2
Given: Hardness HB 277 kgf mm
2
Data from Table P7-1: i 1 4 A 10 mm
i
F l NT d
i i i i
100 N 5000 m 100 0.180 mm

200 N 5000 m 75 0.372 mm
200 N 7500 m 75 0.550 mm
400 N 10000 m 100 1.47 mm
Solution: See Table P7-1 and Mathcad file P0729.
1. The total number of tests is:

Total
NT i Total 350
i
2. The average force, apparent contact area, length of sliding, and depth of wear are:
F iNT i
1
Favg Favg 228.571 N
Total
i
Total i
A NT
1 2
Aavg Aavg 10.000 mm
i
i
Total i
l NT
1 3
lavg lavg 6.964 10 m
i
i
diNT i
1
d avg d avg 0.669 mm
Total
i
3. Calculate the average adhesive wear coefficient using equation 7.7b and the values calculated above.
HB Aavg d avg 5
Kavg Kavg 1.14 10
Favg lavg
PROBLEM 7-30 _____
Statement: A piece of mild steel with HB = 280 has its thickness reduced in an abrasive grinder. Both the
grinding wheel and the steel part have the same width, which is 20 mm. On each pass through
the grinder 0.1 mm is removed. If the abrasive wear coefficient for this operation is 5E-1, what is
the approximate normal force on the grinding wheel?
2
Given: Hardness H 280 kgf mm
Depth of wear per stroke d 0.1 mm Width of wear w 20 mm
1
Wear coefficient K 5 10
1. From equation 7.7a, the volume of wear per stroke is

F l
V K
H
2. Solving for the normal force F,
V H
F where V d w l
K l
3. Substituting for V and canceling the l-terms,
d w H
F F 11.0 kN
K
PROBLEM 7-31 _____

Statement: Two steel gears with involute tooth profiles are in mesh. At the line of contact between the gears
they can be modeled as two cylinders in contact. When the contact is away from the pitch point
there is a combination of rolling and sliding. Determine and plot the dynamic contact principal
stresses on the surface of the teeth for the following gears if the contact force is 500 lb and the
coefficient of friction is 0.15:
R1 = 2.000 in, R2 = 6.000 in. The thickness (face width) of both gears is 0.5 in.
Also find the value of x/a for which the principal stresses have an extreme value.
6
Given: The parts are hardened steel. Therefore: E 30 10 psi 0.28
Radii of curvature R1 2.00 in R2 6.00 in
Contact force W 500 lbf
Gear tooth thickness F 0.5 in (face width)
Coefficient of friction 0.15

1. Calculate the force per unit of length along the line of contact.
W 1
F' F' 1000 lbf in
F
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2
B
F'
2 a
2 F'
a

pressure
4. The applied stress components are found from equation 7.23a for the normal force and equation 7.23b for the
tangential force.
2
xn( x) if x a p max 1 0 psi
x
zn( x) xn( x)
2
a
xzn 0 ksi
x 2
return 2 fmax 1 if x a
x
xt( x)
a 2
a
x 2
return 2 fmax 1 if x a
x zt 0 ksi
a 2
a
x
2 fmax otherwise
a
2
xzt( x) if x a fmax 1 0 ksi
x
2
a
5. Equations 7.24a can now be written for the total applied stresses along the x and z axes.
x( x) xn( x) xt( x)
z( x) zn( x) zt
xz( x) xzn xzt( x)
6. The face width of the gears is short with respect to the other dimensions, therefore we expect a plane stress
condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is
y 0 ksi
stresses are found from equation 4.6a for the plane stress case.
2
x( x) z( x) x( x) z( x) 2
1( x) xz( x)
2 2
2
x( x) z( x) x( x) z( x) 2
2( x) xz( x)
2 2
3 0 ksi
8. Plot the two nonzero principal stresses over the range x 3 a 2.999 a 3 a
PRINCIPAL CONTACT STRESSES

0.5
0.18
1( x)
Normalized stress
pmax
0.5
2( x)
pmax
1.5
2 1 0 1 2
x
a
Normalized width, x/a
9. Note that for = 0.15, the extreme values of the principal stresses occur at approximately x/a = 0.18.
PROBLEM 7-32 _____
Statement: Two steel gears with involute tooth profiles are in mesh. At the line of contact between the gears
they can be modeled as two cylinders in contact. When the contact is away from the pitch point
there is a combination of rolling and sliding. Determine the dynamic contact stresses on the
surface of the teeth for the following gears if the contact force is 1500 lb and the coefficient of
friction is 0.33:
R1 = 2.500 in, R2 = 5.000 in. The thickness (face width) of both gears is 0.625 in.
6
Given: The parts are hardened steel. Therefore E 30 10 psi 0.28
Radii of curvature R1 2.500 in R2 5.000 in
Contact force W 1500 lbf
Gear tooth thickness F 0.625 in (face width)
Coefficient of friction 0.33
W 1
F' F' 2400 lbf in
F
2
1 8 1
E psi
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2
B
F'
2 a
2 F'
a

pressure
4. With = 0.33, the principal stresses in the contact zone will be maximal on the surface (z = 0) at x = 0.3a from th
For x 0.3 a
2
x
2
a
x
a
2
x
2
a
zt 0 ksi xzn 0 ksi
2
x
2
a
6. The face width of the gears is short with respect to the other dimensions, therefore we expect a plane stress
y 0 ksi
1 0 ksi
2
x z x z 2
2 xz 2 62.443 ksi
2 2
2
x z x z 2
3 xz 3 119.449 ksi
2 2
1 3
13 13 59.7 ksi
2
PROBLEM 7-33 _____

Statement: Two contacting rollers are needed for a machine application. They run together with a
combination of rolling and 9% sliding. Both are to be made from 1144 CD steel. The radial
contact force is 1200 N and the coefficient of friction is 0.33. The rollers are to have the same
radii and are both 10 mm long. If the design life is 8E08 cycles, determine a suitable radius for the
rollers.
6
Given: The parts are hardened steel. Therefore E 30 10 psi 0.28
Contact force W 1200 N
Roller length w 10 mm
8
Coefficient of friction 0.33 Design life Nd 8 10
Material data from Table 7-7 4.10 21.79

W 1
F' F' 120.00 N mm
w
2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1

1 1 1
Geometry constant B( R)
2 R R
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2
half-width a ( R) F'
B( R)
F'
Average pressure p avg ( R)
2 a ( R)
2 F'
Maximum pressure p max ( R)
a ( R)
Tangential fmax ( R) p max ( R)

pressure
For x( R) 0.3 a ( R)
2 2
xn( R) p max ( R) 1 0.3 zn( R) p max ( R) 1 0.3
xzn 0 MPa
xt( R) 2 fmax ( R) 0.3 zt 0 MPa
2
xzt( R) fmax ( R) 1 0.3
x( R) xn( R) xt( R)
z( R) zn( R) zt
xz( R) xzn xzt( R)
6. The face width of the rollers is short with respect to the other dimensions, therefore we expect a plane stress
y 0 MPa
1 0 MPa
2
x( R) z( R) x( R) z( R) 2
2( R) xz( R)
2 2
2
x( R) z( R) x( R) z( R) 2
3( R) xz( R)
2 2
8. Calculate the K-factor for this material and the number of cycles before the onset of pitting for this design using
equation 7.26.
log Nd

K 10 psi K 1390 psi
9. Use equation 7.25e to solve for the roller radius. First, guess R 40 mm
K = m1 m2 3( R)
2
Given
R Find ( R) R 47.9 mm
PROBLEM 7-34 _____

Statement: Two contacting rollers are needed for a machine application. They run together with a
combination of rolling and 9% sliding. Both are to be made from Meehanite. The rollers have
the same radii (30 mm) and are both 45 mm long. If the design life is 1E08 cycles, determine the
allowable load that may be applied to these rollers.
Given: Material data from Table 7-7 K 1450 psi

Roller radii R1 30 mm R2 30 mm
Roller length L 45 mm
1. Find the geometry constant from equation 7.9a.

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 0.033
2 R1 R2 mm
2. Calculate the allowable force on the rollers using equation 7.25d.
K L
Allowable force F F 6.75 kN
2 B
PROBLEM 7-35
Statement: A 25-mm-dia, Class 20 gray cast iron pad is supported by a steel bar made from SAE 4130 steel,
quenched and tempered at 800F. The force on the pad is 2800 N. Estimate the real area of
contact and the ratio of the real area to the apparent area of contact.

Compressive yield strengths: Pad S ycp 572 MPa
Bar S ycb 1193 MPa
Contact force F 2800 N
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the cast iron is approximately the same as its compressive
strength.

2
d 2
Aa Aa 490.9 mm
4
2. Use equation 7.1 and the pad strength, which is the weaker of the two, to estimate the real area of contact.
F 2
Ar Ar 1.632 mm
3 S ycp
Ar
ratio ratio 0.3 %
Aa
P0735.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-36
Statement: Estimate the dry coefficient of friction between the two materials in Problem 7-35 if the shear
strength of the cast iron is S us = 310 Mpa. How does this compare to the value given in Table
7-1?
Shear strength: Cast iron S us 310 MPa
Compressive yield strength S yc 572 MPa
strength.
S us
0.18
3 S yc
From Table 7-1, the coefficient of friction for mild steel on cast iron (lubricated) is 0.183.
P0736.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-37
Statement: Two 25-mm x 40-mm SAE 1020 hot-rolled steel pads are in contact with a force of 9 kN. Estimate
the real area of contact and the ratio of the real area to the apparent area of contact.
Given: Pad dimensions w 25 mm L 40 mm
Compressive yield strength: S yc 379 MPa
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the steel is approximately the same as its tensile yield strength.

2
Aa L w Aa 1000.0 mm
2. Use equation 7.1 and the pad strength, which is the weaker of the two, to estimate the real area of contact.
F 2
Ar Ar 7.916 mm
3 S yc
Ar
ratio ratio 0.79 %
Aa
P0737.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-38
Statement: Estimate the dry coefficient of friction between the two materials in Problem 7-37. How does this
compare to the value given in Table 7-1?
Given: Pad dimensions w 25 mm L 40 mm
Ultimate tensile strength: S ut 379 MPa
Compressive yield strength: S yc 379 MPa
Assumptions: The compressive yield strength of the steel is approximately the same as the tensile yield strength.
1. Estimate the ultimate shear strength equation 7.4 for steel.

S us 0.8 S ut S us 303.2 MPa

S us
0.27
3 S yc
From Table 7-1, the coefficient of friction for mild steel on mild steel is 0.74.
P0738.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-39
Statement: A 25-mm-diameter steel shaft of hardness HB420 rotates at 700 rpm in a 40-mm-long plain bronze
bushing with an average radial load of 500 N. Estimate the time it would take to remove 0.05 mm
of bushing material by adhesive wear if the lubrication were suddenly lost assuming a uniform
wear rate around the bushing.
1
Units: kilo kg g rev 2 rad rpm rev min
Given: Journal diameter d 25 mm Load F 500 N

Journal speed n 700 rpm Bushing length lbush 40 mm
kilo
Journal hardness HB 420 Depth of wear d 0.05 mm
2
mm
1. From Figure 7-6 in the text we see that iron (the principal ingredient of steel) is metalurgically compatible with
copper and tin, the principal ingredients of bronze. From Figure 7-7 we have the following value of the
adhesive wear coefficient for metalurgically compatible materials with no lubrication.
4
Wear coefficient K 8 10
2. Using equation 7.7b, estimate the time for the bushing to wear d 0.05 mm
Apparent area of contact Aa d lbush
d
Length of contact in time t lcont( t) n t
rev
d HB Aa
Solving equation 7.7b for l lcont =
K F
d HB lbush rev
Substituting and solving for t t t 29.4 min
n K F
4
In a time of t 29.4 min the shaft will turn n t 2 10 rev
P0739.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-40
Statement: A machine has a tripod base that utilizes 15-mm-dia Nylon 11 balls as support pads at its feet.
The tripod rests on a flat steel plate. The 360N weight of the machine is distributed equally to
the three legs of the tripod. Determine the size of the contact patch and the contact stresses in
the nylon balls. Assume that Poisson's ratio for Nylon is 0.25.
Given: Ball radius R1 7.5 mm Material properties

Plate curvature R2 mm Nylon ball 1 0.25
Load F 120 N E1 1.3 GPa
Steel plate 2 0.28
E2 207 GPa


1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
2
1 1 4 1
E1 MPa
2
1 2 6 1
m2 m2 4.452 10
E2 MPa
1
Contact patch 3
3 m1 m2
8 B
2 2
F
A
3
2
2. Determine the stresses in the ball at the surface
1 2 1
2
ymax1 xmax1
3. Determine the stresses in the ball below the surface

1 2 1 2
p max
stress 2 2 9
yzmax1 31.8 MPa
Depth at max 2 2 1
7 2 1
P0740.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-41
Statement: A ball bearing consists of a number of balls (separated by a ball cage) and two rings with
raceways as shown in Figure P7-7. The raceways have compound curvature. In a plane
containing the axis of the bearing the curvature is concave and conforms closely to the ball
radius. In a plane perpendicular to the axis the curvature is convex for the inner raceway and is
related to the bore size of the bearing. Determine the size of the contact patch and the maximum
contact stresses between a ball and the inner raceway with a radial load of 5200 N in a steel
bearing with the following dimensions: ball dia = 8 mm, raceway radius for concave surface =
4.05 mm, raceway radius for convex surface = 13 mm.
Given: Ball radii R1 4.00 mm The parts are steel. Therefore
R'1 4.00 mm E 206.8 GPa 0.28
Raceway radii R2 13.0 mm (radial)
R'2 4.05 mm (axial)
Radial load F 5200 N (normal to contact plane)
Angle between planes of R1 & R2 0 deg

2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1

2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.1619 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 11.10
A

2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.321
P0741.xmcd
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
2
F
A
3
2
7.21a.
x 2 ( 1 2 ) p
b
a b
y 2 ( 1 2 ) p
a
max y 3394 MPa
a b
1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 726 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.051
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.999
a
P0741.xmcd
atanh k4 1 p max
k3 1
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
k4
2 k4 k3
P0741.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-42
Statement: A pair of steel rollers used in a manufacturing process roll together with a combination of rolling
and sliding. One roller has a diameter of 75 mm and the other has a diameter of 50 mm. They are
both 200-mm long. The contact force, which is normal to the contact plane, is 18500 N. Assuming
that the coefficient of friction between the rollers is 0.33, determine the maximum tensile,
compressive, and shear stresses in the rollers.
Given: Roller radii R1 25 mm The parts are hardened steel. Therefore

R2 37.5 mm E 206.8 GPa 0.28
Radial load F 18500 N Coefficient of friction 0.33

2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B L
F
2 a L
2 F
a L

unit force
For x 0.3 a
2
x
xn p max 1 xn 447.7 MPa
2
a
x
a
2
x
zn p max 1 zn 447.7 MPa
2
a
P0742.xmcd
zt 0 MPa xzn 0 MPa
2
x
2
a
x xn xt x 540.591 MPa
z zn zt z 447.672 MPa
5. Since the rollers are long, we expect a plane strain condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is found
from equation 7.23b:
y x z y 276.714 MPa
x y z
x y z
MPa MPa MPa
xz
xy 0 yz 0 xz
MPa
3
C2 x y z C2 1.265 10
x xy x xz y yz 5
C1 C1 4.936 10
xy y xz z yz z
x xy xz
7
C0 xy y yz C0 6.093 10

xz yz z
3 2
f ( ) C2 C1 C0
C0
649.0
v C1
s polyroots ( v) MPa s 339.3 MPa
C2
276.7
1
Principal stresses:
1 s 1 276.7 MPa
3
2 s 2 339.3 MPa
2
3 s 3 649.0 MPa
1
P0742.xmcd
1 3
13 13 186.1 MPa
2
P0742.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-43
Statement: Repeat Problem 7-41 for contact beween a ball and outer raceway. The outer raceway radius for
concave surface = 4.05 mm and the outer raceway radius for concave surface = 17.02 mm.
Given: Ball radii R1 4.00 mm The parts are steel. Therefore
R'1 4.00 mm E 206.8 GPa 0.28
Raceway radii R2 17.02 mm (radial)
R'2 4.05 mm (axial)
Radial load F 5200 N (normal to contact plane)
Angle between planes of R1 & R2 0 deg

2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1

2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.0941 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 14.48
A

2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.371
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
P0743.xmcd
2
F
A
3
2
7.21a.
x 2 ( 1 2 ) p
b
a b
y 2 ( 1 2 ) p
a
max y 2570 MPa
a b

1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 543 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.074
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.997
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3 1
k4
2 k4
k3 k3 k4
k4
2 k4 k3
P0743.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-44
Statement: A machine has two crowned, cylindrical rollers rolling against each other with a dynamic load of
0 to 3.5 kN. The first roller has a major radius of 14 mm with a crown radius of 80 mm. The
second roller has a major radius of 75 mm and a crown radius of 100 mm. The two axes of
rotation have a 30 degree angle between them. Find the contact stresses if both rollers are
steel.
Given: Roller 1 radius R1 14.00 mm

Crown radius R'1 80.0 mm (90 deg to roller rad)
Roller 2 radius R2 75.00 mm (radial)
Crown radius R'2 100.0 mm (axial)
Radial load F 3.5 kN (normal to contact plane)
Material properties E1 206.8 GPa 1 0.28 steel

2
1 1 3 1
E1 GPa
m2 m1

2 R1 R'1 R2 R'2
1
2
1 2 2
B
1 1 1 1 1
R B 0.0303 mm
2 R1 R'1 2 R'2
1 1 1 1
2 R R' R R' cos( 2 )
1 1 2 2
acos
B 180
Angle 55.56
A
2
kb 0.0045333 0.043581 0.0017292
5 3 7 4
3.7374 10 3.7418 10
9 5
1.4207 10
kb 0.685
1
Major axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
1
Minor axis 3
3 m1 m2
4 A
2
F
A
3
2
5. The maximum normal stresses in the steel follower at the center of the contact patch at the surface are then found
x 2 1 1 2 1 p
b
a b
y 2 1 1 2 1 p
a
max y 2340 MPa
a b
1 x 2 y 3 z
1 3
13 13 414 MPa
2
b
k3 k3 0.436
a
1 2 2
k4 a b k4 0.9
a
atanh k4 1 p max
k3
xy 1 2 1
1
2 k4
k4
k3 k3 k4
2
k4 k4 k3
PROBLEM 7-45
Statement: A cam-follower system has a motion with a combination of rolling and sliding. The cam is
cylindrical with a minimum radius of curvature of 80 mm. The roller follower is also cylindrical
with a radius of 14 mm. They are both 18-mm long. The maximum contact force, which is normal
to the contact plane, is 3200 N. Both the cam and roller are made from hardened steel. Assuming
that the coefficient of friction between the cam and roller follower is 0.33, determine the maximum
tensile, compressive, and shear stresses in the cam.
Given: Roller radius R1 14 mm The parts are hardened steel. Therefore

Cam radius R2 80 mm E 206.8 GPa 0.28
Radial load F 3200 N Coefficient of friction 0.33

2
1 6 1
E MPa
m2 m1

1 1 1 1
2 R1 R2
1
Contact patch 2
2 m1 m2 F
B L
F
2 a L
2 F
a L

unit force
For x 0.3 a
2
x
xn p max 1 xn 696.4 MPa
2
a
x
a
2
x
zn p max 1 zn 696.4 MPa
2
a
P0745.xmcd
zt 0 MPa xzn 0 MPa
2
x
2
a
x xn xt x 840.886 MPa
z zn zt z 696.351 MPa
5. Since the contact patch is short, we expect a plane stress condition to exist. The stress in the third dimension is:
y 0 MPa y 0.000 MPa
x y z
x y z
MPa MPa MPa
xz
xy 0 yz 0 xz
MPa
3
C2 x y z C2 1.537 10
x xy x xz y yz 5
C1 C1 5.327 10
xy y xz z yz z
x xy xz

C0 xy y yz C0 0

xz yz z
3 2
f ( ) C2 C1 C0
C0
1009.5
v C1
s polyroots ( v) MPa s 527.7 MPa
C2
0.0
1
Principal stresses:
1 s 1 0 MPa
3
2 s 2 527.7 MPa
2
3 s 3 1009.5 MPa
1
P0745.xmcd
1 3
13 13 504.8 MPa
2
P0745.xmcd
PROBLEM 7-46
Statement: Estimate how long it will take to remove 2 m of material from the 5000 mm2 surface of a block
of HB110 steel if a coarse polishing machine applies 80 N over a 400-mm stroke at 120 strokes
per minute.
(a) If done dry.
(b) If done lubricated.
Units: kilo kg g
2 1
Given: Block surface Aa 5000 mm Stroke rate n 120 min
Depth of wear d 2 m Stroke s 400 mm
kilo
Force on file F 80 N Steel hardness HB 110
2
mm
Assumptions: Only one face will be polished.
1. This is a two-body abrasion problem. From Table 7-2, the wear coefficients for dry and lubricated abrasion
in a coarse polishing operation are
4
Wear coefficients Ka 1 10 dry
4
Kb 2 10 lubricated
2. The length of sliding is L = s n t where t is the time required.
F L
3. The depth of material removed is d = K
HB Aa
4. Combining these two equations and solving for the time, t
d HB Aa
(a) dry ta ta 28 min
Ka F s n
strokesa ta n strokesa 3371
d HB Aa
(b) lubricated tb tb 14 min
Kb F s n
strokesb tb n strokesb 1686
PROBLEM 7-47 _____
Statement: Loose abrasive grains are introduced in error into the lubricating system of a flat bronze thrust
bearing that has a hardness of 60HB and a surface area of 500 mm2. If a hardened steel part
exerts a force of 50 N on the bearing while oscillating across it at 200 strokes/min with a stroke
of 30 mm, what depth of wear will occur in an 8-hour shift?
Units: stroke 1
2
Given: Hardness H 60 kgf mm
2
Shift time t 8 hr Area of wear Aa 500 mm
3
Wear coefficient K 2 10 Stroke s 30 mm
1
Stroke rate n 200 stroke min
1. From equation 7.7b, the depth of wear is
F l
d = K
H Aa
2. The length of wear is,
l = s n t where t is the elapsed time
3. Substituting for l ,
F s n t
d K d 1.0 mm
H Aa
PROBLEM 7-48
Statement: Two rollers are in contact with a 9% sliding combined with rolling and the resulting maximum
compressive principal stress in the contact zone is 15500 psi. Both rollers are made from 6061-T6
hard anodized aluminum. The design life of the rollers is 4 years of 2-shift operation at 260
days/year and they each turn at 200 rpm. What is the expected safety factor against pitting for
the roller pair?
6
Given: Roller material properties E 10.4 10 psi 0.34
1
Roller speed n 200 rpm shift 2 day hrspershift 8 hr
1
Max stress max 15500 psi daysperyr 260 day yr
Design life life d 4 yr
1. Calculate the required cycle life.

9
cycles n shift hrspershift daysperyr life d cycles 1.255 10
2. Calculate the material constants.
2
1 8 1
m1 m1 8.504 10 m2 m1
E psi
3. The maximum normal stress is max 15.5 ksi, compressive. Its K-factor can be calculated from equation 7.25d.
K m1 m2 max
2
K-factor K 128.4 psi
4. From Table 7-7, Part 2, Line 36 the slope and intercept factors of this aluminum for rolling with 9% sliding are
5.02 20.12
log Nlife
log ( K) =

log
K
9
cycles
6. Calculate the factor of safety against pitting.
Nlife
Nf Nf 2.7
cycles
PROBLEM 7-49 _____

Statement: Two contacting rollers run together in pure rolling. Both are made from Class 20 Gray iron, HB
130-180. One roller has a diameter of 2.75 in and the other has a diameter of 3.25 in. Both are 10
in long. The applied load is 5500 lbf. If the design life is 1E08 cycles, determine the factor of
safety against pitting failure.
Given: Material data from Table 7-7 K 960 psi

Roller radii R1 2.75 in R2 3.25 in
Roller length L 10.0 in
Applied force F 5500lbf
1. Find the geometry constant from equation 7.9a.

1 1 1 1
Geometry constant B B 0.336
2 R1 R2 in
2. Calculate the allowable force on the rollers using equation 7.25d.
K L
Allowable force Fallow Fallow 14300 lbf
2 B
3. Calculate the factor of safety using equation f in Example 7-5.
Fallow
Safety factor Nf Nf 2.6
F
PROBLEM 10-1a
Statement: A simply supported shaft is shown in Figure P10-1. A constant magnitude transverse load P is
applied as the shaft rotates subject to a time-varying torque that varies from Tmin to Tmax. For
the data in row a of Table P10-1, find the diameter of shaft required to obtain a safety factor of 2
in fatigue loading if the shaft is steel of S ut = 108 ksi and S y = 62 ksi. The dimensions are in
inches, the force in pounds, and the torque is in lb-in. Assume no stress concentrations are
present.
Given: Distance between bearings a 16 in Distance to P b 18 in

Minimum torque Tmin 0 lbf in Yield strength S y 62 ksi
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Design safety factor Nd 2
Assumptions: The finish is machined, reliability is 99%, and the shaft is at room temperature.
Solution: See Figure P10-1 and Mathcad file P1001a.
1. The maximum moment in the shaft occurs at the right bearing as seen in the moment diagram in Figure B-3(a)
in Appendix B (note that in the figure a is the distance to the load and b is the distance between bearings).
Using the equation given in the figure, calculate the alternate bending moment (the mean is zero).
Ma P ( a b ) Ma 2000 in lbf
2. Calculate the mean and alternating components of torque.
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 in lbf
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 in lbf
2
4. Determine the endurance limit modification factors for a rotating round shaft.
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 0.869
d
Size
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.781
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1
5. Determine the modified endurance limit as a function of the unknown diameter, d.

S e( d ) Cload Csize( d ) Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e
6. Use equation (10.8) with unity for all stress concentration factors as a design equation to find d.
Guess d 1 in
Given
1
3
2 3 2
32 Nd Ma 4 Ta 3 m
T
d=
S e( d ) 4 S ut
d Find ( d ) d 1.188 in
Using this value for d, the size modification factor and endurance limit are:
Size modification factor Csize( d ) 0.855
Endurance limit S e( d ) 29.3 ksi
PROBLEM 10-2a
Statement: A simply supported shaft is shown in Figure P10-2. A constant magnitude distributed load p is
applied as the shaft rotates subject to a time-varying torque that varies from Tmin to Tmax. For the
data in row a of Table P10-1, find the diameter of shaft required to obtain a safety factor of 2 in
fatigue loading if the shaft is steel of S ut = 745 MPa and Sy = 427 MPa. The dimensions are in cm,
the distributed force in N/cm, and the torque is in N-m. Assume no stress concentrations are
present.
Given: Dist. between bearings L 20 cm Distance to p a 16 cm

Distance to end of p b 18 cm Tensile strength S ut 745 MPa
1
Applied distributed load p 1000 N cm Yield strength S y 427 MPa
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m Design safety factor Nfd 2
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 N m
1. The maximum moment in the shaft occurs between a and b. See the appendix to this problem below for the
determination of Ma.
Ma 48.45 N m
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 N m
2
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189
d
Size
mm
Surface A 4.51 b' 0.265 (machined)
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.782
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
Guess d 1 in
Given
1
3
2 3 2
32 Nfd Ma 4 Ta 3 Tm
d=
S e( d ) 4 S ut
d Find ( d ) d 48.6 mm
Endurance limit S e( d ) 193.4 MPa
APPENDIX - Maximum bending moment

1. From inspection of Figure P10-2, write the load function equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 300 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 1700 N
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) p S ( x a ) ( x a ) p S ( x b ) ( x b ) R2 S ( x L)
p 2 p 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b )
2 2
Shear Diagram
500
V ( x) 500
N
1000
1500
2000
0 5 10 15 20
x
cm
Moment Diagram
50
35
M ( x)
20
Nm
10
0 5 10 15 20
x
cm
FIGURE 10-2a
9. Determine the maximum maximum moment from inspection of the diagrams. Maximum moment occurs where
zero, which is x = c. From the shear diagram,
ca bc a R2 b R1
= c c 16.300 cm
R1 R2 R1 R2
Mmax M ( c) Mmax 48.45 N m
PROBLEM 10-3
Statement: For the bicycle pedal-arm assembly in Figure P6-1 assume a rider-applied force that ranges from
0 to 1500 N at the pedal each cycle. Design a suitable shaft to connect the two pedal arms. Use
a fatigue safety factor of 2 and a material with S ut = 500 MPa. The shaft has a square extension
on each end where it inserts into the pedal arms.
Given: Material tensile strength S ut 500 MPa Design safety factor Nfd 2
Applied load by rider Fridermax 1500 N Fridermin 0 N
Assumptions: 1. The configuration is similar to that shown in Figure 10-3 with the dimensions a, b, and c below.
2. The moments in the shaft are greater when the right pedal is loaded.
3. The torque is transmitted from the sprocket to the shaft through the square shaft extension.
4. The shaft is machined, reliability is 50%, and the bicycle is not operated in extreme
temperatures.
Shaft dimensions: a 10 mm b 22 mm c 80 mm
1. From problems 3-3 and

Sprocket Frame
7-3, the moment, torque, Fchain Bearing (2 Places)
and chain force Fchain
R 1z
are: Pedal Arm (Both Ends)
Mmax 90 N m
T
Mmin 90 N m x
T
Tmax 255 N m
Tmin 0 N m R 2z
z
d sprocket 100 mm Horizontal Section (Top View)
y
2 Tmax
Fchainmax c
d sprocket a
R 2y
Frider
Fchainmax 5100 N
2. Note that in Problem 3-3 the d M x

pedal-arm torque becomes a
concentrated bending
moment on this shaft and
the pedal-arm bending R 1y
moment becomes the b
sprocket torque, which is
carried along the shaft from Vertical Section (Front View)
the y-axis to the centerplane
FIGURE 10-3A
of the sprocket, the distance
a (see Figure 10-3A). Free Body Diagram for Problem 10-3
3. Find the moment distribution along the shaft from x = 0 to x = c. This will be done by finding the moment paral
to the z-axis by looking at the forces and moments in the x-y plane, then finding the moment parrallel to the y-ax
by looking at the forces in the x-z plane. These two moment distributions will be added vectorially to get the
total moment distribution.
4. Determine the bearing reactions R1y and R2y in the x-y plane.
Fy: Frider R1y R2y = 0
Mz: M b Frider ( c b ) R2y = 0
Mmax b Fridermax
R2ymax R2ymax 2121 N
cb
R1ymax Fridermax R2ymax R1ymax 3621 N
5. Use singularity functions to determine the moment distribution of the forces in the x-y plane.
q xy = -M<x>-2 - Frider<x>-1 + R1y<x - b>-1 - R2y<x - c>-1
Vxy = -M<x>-1 - Frider<x>0 + R1y<x - b>0 - R2y<x - c>0
Mxy = -M<x>0 - Frider<x>1 + R1y<x - b>1 - R2y<x - c>1
6. Define the range for x x 0 mm 0.005 c c
S ( x u ) if ( x u 1 0 )
Mxy( x) Mmax Fridermax S ( x 0 mm) x R1ymax S ( x b ) ( x b ) R2ymax S ( x c) ( x c)
9. Plot the moment diagram (see Figure 10-3B).

0
10. Determine the bearing reactions R1z and
R2z in the x-z plane.
50
Fz : Fchain R1z R2z = 0
Mxy ( x)
Mz: b Fchain ( c b ) R2z = 0 Nm
100
b Fchainmax
R2zmax
cb
R2zmax 1934 N 150

0 20 40 60 80
x
R1zmax Fchainmax R2zmax
mm
FIGURE 10-3B
R1zmax 7034 N
Moment Diagram for x-y Plane for Problem 10-3
11. Use singularity functions to determine the moment distribution of the forces in the x-z plane.
q xz = - Fchain<x>-1 + R1z<x - b>-1 - R2z<x - c>-1
Vxz = - Fchain<x>0 + R1z<x - b>0 - R2z<x - c>0
Mxz = - Fchain<x>1 + R1z<x - b>1 - R2z<x - c>1
Mxz( x) Fchainmax S ( x 0 mm) x R1zmax S ( x b ) ( x b ) R2zmax S ( x c) ( x c)
13. Plot the moment diagram (see Figure 10-3C).
2 2
14. Determine the total moment distribution. Mtot ( x) Mxy( x) Mxz( x) This is plotted in Figure 10-3D.
0 200
150
50
Mxz( x) Mtot ( x)
100
Nm Nm
100
50
150 0
0 20 40 60 80 0 20 40 60 80
x x
mm mm
FIGURE 10-3C FIGURE 10-3D
Moment Diagram for x-z Plane for Problem 10-3 Total Moment Diagram for Problem 10-3
15. From Figure 10-3D, we see that the moment is a maximum at x = b. However, the torque is carried only from x =
to x = a so we will investigate the section just to the right of x = a where there is a stress concentration due to
the shoulder.
Moment at x = a Mamax Mtot ( a ) Mamax 116.73 N m
Moment at x = b Mbmax Mtot ( b ) Mbmax 166.487 N m

16. The bending moment is fully reversed while the torque is repeated from zero to Tmax. Therefore, we have the
following alternating and mean components of moment and torque at x = a.
Alternating moment Ma Mamax Ma 116.73 N m
Mean moment Mm 0 N m Mm 0 N m
Alternating torque Ta 0.5 Tmax Ta 127.5 N m
Mean torque Tm 0.5 Tmax Tm 127.5 N m
16. There will be a stress concentration due to the step just to the right of the sprocket and also because of the
transition from square to round at the shoulder. Estimate this to be Kf 2. Also, let
Kfm Kf Kfs Kf Kfsm Kfs
18. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a rotating round beam.
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189 d
Size
mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.869
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

20. Use equation (10.8) to solve for the diameter at x = a. Guess d 12 mm
Given
1
3
2
32 Nfd Kf Ma 4 Kfs Ta Kfm Mm Kfsm Tm
2 3 2 2 3

4
d=
S e( d ) S ut
d Find ( d ) d 35.526 mm
This is too big for a practical design. A stronger material should be chosen to bring this down to about 16 mm.
PROBLEM 10-4a
Statement: Determine the maximum deflections in torsion and in bending of the shaft shown in Figure P10-1
for the data in row a in Table P10-1 if the steel shaft diameter is 1.75 in.
Given: Shaft length L 20 in Distance between bearings a 16 in
Distance to P b 18 in Shaft diameter d 1.750 in
6
Applied load P 1000 lbf Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
6
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Modulus of rigidity G 11.5 10 psi
1. Calculate the area moment of inertia and the polar moment of inertia.
4
d 4
Area moment of inertia I I 0.460 in
64
4
d 4
Polar moment of inertia J J 0.921 in
32
2. Use the equation in Figure B-3(a) in Appendix B for this overhung beam with concentrated load to determine
the maximum deflection in bending. Note that in the figure a is the distance to the load and b is the distance
between bearings. This deflection occurs at the right end of the shaft, under the load P.
ab
( L a ) ( L b ) a ( b a ) L
P 3 b 3 3
ymax L ymax 0.00357 in
6 E I a a
3. Calculate the torsional deflection using equation (10.9a).
Tmax L
max max 0.216 deg
G J
PROBLEM 10-5a
Statement: Determine the maximum deflections in torsion and in bending of the shaft shown in Figure P10-2
for the data in row a in Table P10-1 if the steel shaft diameter is 40 mm.
Given: Distance between bearings L 20 cm Distance to p a 16 cm

Distance to end of p b 18 cm Shaft diameter d 40 mm
1
Applied distributed load p 1000 N cm Young's modulus E 206.8 GPa
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m Mod of rigidity G 80.8 GPa

1. Calculate the area moment of inertia and the polar moment of inertia.
4
d 4
Area moment of inertia I I 125664 mm
64
4
d 4
Polar moment of inertia J J 251327 mm
32
2. Calculate the torsional deflection using equation (10.9a).
Tmax L
max max 1.129 deg
G J
3. From inspection of Figure P10-2, write the load function equation and integrate it twice to get the shear and
moment equations.
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 300 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 1700 N
5. Integrate twice more to get the slope and deflection equations.

(x) = [R1<x - 0>2/2 - p<x - a>3/6 + p<x - b>3/6 + R2<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x - 0>3/6 - p<x - a>4/24 + p<x - b>4/24 + R2<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
6. Solve for the constants of integration with the boundary conditions y = 0 at x = 0 and x = L.
At x = 0 C4 = 0
R1 3 p 4 p 4
At x = L 0= L ( L a) ( L b ) C 3 L
6 24 24
1 p 4 p 4 R1 3 2
C3 ( L a) ( L b) L C3 1.950 N m
L 24 24 6
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
1 R1 2 p 3 p 3
( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b ) C3
E I 2 6 6
1 R1 3 p 4 p 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b ) C3 x
E I 6 24 24
10. Plot the slope and deflection diagrams (see Figure 10-5).
11. The maximum deflection occurs at the value of x for which is zero. Let this be x = c, then guess c 10 cm
Given ( c) = 0 c Find ( c) c 11.402 cm
12. The maximum deflection occurs at x = c and is ymax y ( c) ymax 0.00570 mm
SLOPE DEFLECTION
0.15 0
0.1
3
2 10
0.05
( x) y ( x)
3 mm
10
0
3
4 10
0.05
3
0.1 6 10
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
FIGURE 10-5 cm cm
PROBLEM 10-6a
Statement: Determine the size of key necessary to give a safety factor of at least 2 against both shear and
bearing failure for the design shown in Figure P10-3 using the data from row a in Table P10-1 and
the data given below. Assume a shaft diameter of 1.75 in.
Given: Shaft diameter d 1.750 in Shaft properties: S ut1 108 ksi

Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in S y1 62 ksi
Minimum torque Tmin 0 lbf in Key properties: S ut2 88 ksi
Design safety factor Nd 2 S y2 52 ksi
Assumptions: 1. The finish is machined, reliability is 90%, and the shaft is at room temperature.
2. Note that the given magnitudes of the radial forces shown acting on gear(s) in this problem
are not necessarily consistent with a load associated with the given torque for any real gear of
reasonable pressure angle. Since gears are taken up in a later chapter, these shaft design
problems ignore the real gear loadings and use an arbitrary value to provide a shaft design
exercise.
1. As recommended in Table 10-2, for a shaft diameter of d 1.75 in, use a square key of width
Key width w 0.375 in
2. Determine the alternating and mean key shear force components.
Mean and alternating 1 Tmax Tmin

force components Fa Fa 1143 lbf
2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 1143 lbf
2 0.5 d
3. Write the equations for the mean and alternating components of the shear stress and the effective von Mises
stress.
Key shear area as
function of length Ashear = w L
Mean and alternating Fa Fm

shear stresses a = m =
w L w L

von Mises stresses 'a = 3 a = 3 'm = 3 m = 3
w L w L
4. Using the modified Goodman failure criterion, the design equation is
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
S ut 'a S e 'm 3 S F S F
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e
5. Determine the key material endurance limit.
Uncorrected endurance
strength S'e 0.5 S ut2 S'e 44 ksi
Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
Size A95 = w L d eq =
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 0.869 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 0.869
w
Cs 0.805
0.0766 in
0.0485
Csize = 0.805 L
0.265
Sut2
Surface (machined) Csurf 2.7 Csurf 0.824
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
S e = Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e = 1 Cs L Csurf 1 Crelaib S'e = Ce L
where Ce Cs Csurf Creliab S'e

Ce 26.175 ksi
6. Substitute S e into the design equation.
3 Nd S ut Fa Ce L Fm
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
Solving by iteration, let
0.0485
L
3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce Fm
RHS( L)
in
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L
in
Guess L 0.5 in RHS( L) 0.510 in
L RHS( L) RHS( L) 0.510 in
Tentatively, let L 0.625 in (5/8 in)

7. Check the realised factor of safety against fatigue failure.
0.0485
S e Ce
L
Endurance limit S e 26.778 ksi
in
S e S ut2
Realised factor Nf Nf 2.4
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L
8. Check worst-case static bearing stress.
1 2
Bearing area Abear w L Abear 0.117 in
2
Maximum force Fmax Fa Fm Fmax 2286 lbf
Maximum bearing stress Fmax

on key max max 19.50 ksi
Abear
Factor of safety against S y2

static bearing yield Ns Ns 2.7
max
9. Design Summary
Key width w 0.375 in (3/8 x 3/8)

Key length L 0.625 in (5/8 in)
PROBLEM 10-7a
bearing failure for the design shown in Figure P10-4 using the data from row a in Table P10-1 and
the data given below. Assume a shaft diameter of 40 mm.
Given: Shaft diameter d 40 mm Shaft properties: S ut1 745 MPa

Maximum torque Tmax 2000 N m S y1 427 MPa
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m Key properties: S ut2 600 MPa
Design safety factor Nd 2 S y2 360 MPa
exercise.
1. As recommended in Table 10-2, for a shaft diameter of d 40 mm, use a square key of width
Key width w 10 mm

force components Fa Fa 50.0 kN
2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 50.0 kN
2 0.5 d
stress.
Key shear area as

w L w L

w L w L
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e

strength S'e 0.5 S ut2 S'e 300 MPa
Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 1.189 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 1.189
w
Cs 0.939
0.0766 mm
0.0485
Csize = Cs L
0.265
S ut2
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
S e = Cload Csize Csurf Ctemp Creliab S'e = 1 Cs L Csurf 1 Creliab S'e = Ce L
where Ce Cs Csurf Creliab S'e Ce 209.145 MPa
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
0.0485

3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce
L
Fm

RHS( L)
mm
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L

mm
Guess L 10 mm RHS( L) 121.468 mm
L RHS( L) RHS( L) 133.39 mm
L RHS( L) RHS( L) 133.866 mm
Tentatively, let L 134 mm (both keys, divide by 2 for one)
0.0485
S e Ce L
Endurance limit S e 164.923 MPa
mm
S e S ut2
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L
1 2
Bearing area Abear w L Abear 670 mm
2
Maximum force Fmax Fa Fm Fmax 100 kN

on key max max 149.25 MPa
Abear

max
9. Design Summary
Key width w 10 mm
Key length L1 0.5 L L1 67 mm
PROBLEM 10-8
hollow, steel shaft with S ut = 400 MPa. Find the shaft ID needed to obtain a dynamic safety
factor of 2 for a 10-yr life if the shaft OD is 22 cm and the roll turns at 50 rpm with 1.2 hp
absorbed.
Given: Paper roll: y
kg
Density 984
3
m w
Outside dia. OD 1500 mm x
Inside dia. ID 220 mm
Length L 3230 mm R L R
Shaft:
Strength S ut 400 MPa V
Outside dia. od 220 mm R
Factor of safety Nf 2 L/2 L
0 x
Power HP 1.2 hp
Speed 50 rpm -R
Assumptions: 1. The shaft is stiffer than the paper roll so M

2
the weight of the roll on the shaft can be wL /8
modelled as a uniformly distributed load.
2. The bearings that support the shaft are
close to the ends of the paper roll and are
thin with respect to the length of the roll so 0 x
we can consider the distance between the L/2 L
shaft supports to be the same as the length
of the roll. FIGURE 10-8
3. The shaft is machined, reliability is 99.9%, Load, Shear, and Moment Diagrams
and it is at room temperature. for Problem 10-8
4. The paper machine operates 3 shifts/day.

1. The weight of the paper roll is,
Volume V

4
2
OD ID L
2 V 5.585 m
3
Weight W g V W 53.895 kN
2. From Figure 10-8, we see that the bending moment in the shaft is a maximum at the center of the span. First,
determine the magnitude of the distributed load, then find the maximum bending moment using Figure B-2(b)
in Appendix B with a = 0 and x = L/2.
W newton
Distributed load w w 16.686
L mm
2
w L 7
Maximum moment Mmax Mmax 2.176 10 newton mm
8
3. Using equation 4.11b, find the maximum bending stress as a function of the unkown shaft inside diameter, id.
This is the only alternating stress element present at this point on the shaft and there is no alternating shear
stress at this point so max = 1 and 2 = 3 = 0. Furthermore, since 2 and 3 are zero, max = 'a.
Bending stress M c 32 Mmax od

max = = = 'a
at midspan I 4
od id
4
4. Calculate the steady shaft torque using equation (10.1a) and the mean von Mises stress using equation (5.7d).
HP
Mean torque Tm Tm 171 N m

Mean torsional 16 Tm od
m =
stress
4
od id
4
Mean von Mises

stress 'm = 3 m
2080 hr
5. Determine the number of stress cycles. Let Nshifts 3 shift_hours Lcycle 10 yr
yr
Stress cycles Ncycles shift_hours Nshifts Lcycle
9
Ncycles 1.176 10
Since this is greater than 10 6, design for infinite life.
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize 1.189
od
Size Csize 0.705

mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.922
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

9. Use equation (10.7b) with unity for all stress concentration factors as a design equation to find id.
S e S ut
Nf =
'a S ut 'm S e
Substituting the expressions for 'a and 'm found above,
S e S ut
Nf =
32 Mmax od 16 3 Tm od
S ut Se
4
od id
4
od id
4 4
Solving for the unknown inside diameter,
4 16 Nf od 2 Mmax Sut 3 Tm S e
4
id od id 191.467 mm
S e S ut
Round this down (for a thicker wall) to id 190 mm
The wall thickness will be t 0.5 ( od id) t 15 mm
PROBLEM 10-9a
Statement: Repeat Problem 10-1 taking the stress concentration at the keyway shown in Figure P10-3 into
account.
Minimum torque Tmin 0 lbf in Yield strength S y 62 ksi
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Design safety factor Nd 2
2. The notch radius in the keyway is r 0.015 in.
exercise.
Solution: See Figures P10-1 and P10-3, and Mathcad file P1009a.
1. There is no stress concentration at the point on the shaft where the bending moment is a maximum. On the
other hand, at the gear where there is a stress concentration, the bending moment is zero. The question is:
which point requires the larger diameter in order to meet the safety factor requirement? To answer this
question, find the diameter required at each point and choose the larger. Start with the point where the
bending moment is maximum.
Using the equation given in the figure, calculate the alternating bending moment (the mean is zero).
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 in lbf
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 in lbf
2
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 0.869
d
Size

in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.781
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

Guess d 1 in
Given
1
3
2 3 2
32 Nd Ma 4 Ta 3 m
T
d=
S e( d ) 4 S ut
Diameter required at point of maximum moment: d 1 Find ( d ) d 1 1.188 in
Size modification factor Csize d 1 0.855
Endurance limit S e d 1 29.3 ksi
8. At the gear the bending moment is zero but the alternating and mean torques are the same as above. Also, there
is a stress concentration due to the keyway that must be applied to the alternating and mean shear stresses
present at the gear. First, set the moment equal to zero: Ma 0 lbf in, then determine the values of the
alternating and mean fatigue stress concentration factors.
9. Determine the geometric stress concentration factor from the upper curve in Figure 10-16 using a curve-fit
equation.
0.230
Kts( d ) 1.251
r

d
10. Determine the notch sensitivity of the material. Note from Figure 6-36, part 1, that a value of 20 ksi should be
added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6. Using a curve-fit to Table 6-6,
3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
a ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10
3.94116 10
ksi ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
a a S ut 20 ksi
0.5
Neuber constant a 0.045 in
Notch radius r 0.015 in

1
a
1
r
Kfs( d ) 1 q Kts( d ) 1
Alternating factor
Mean factor Kfsm( d ) Kfs( d )
12. Repeat step 7 using these stress concentration factors with the torsional stresses.
Given
1
3
2 3 2
32 Nd Ma 4 Kfs( d ) Ta 3 T m

d= Kfsm( d )
S e( d ) 4 S ut
Diameter required at point of gear attachment: d 2 Find ( d ) d 2 1.129 in
d1
Putting the two calculated diameters into a vector trial_dia
d2
13. The larger of the two must be used as the minimum shaft diameter. Thus, d max( trial_dia ). d 1.188 in
14. The factor of safety at the point of maximum bending moment is Nd 2 . The factor of safety at the gear is
equal to the ratio of the two diameters cubed times Nd. Thus,
3
d1
Nfgear Nd Nfgear 2.3
d2
PROBLEM 10-10a
account.
Given: Distance between bearings L 20 cm Distance to p a 16 cm
1
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m Design safety factor Nfd 2
2. The ratio of notch radius to shaft diameter in the keyway is roverd 0.021.
3. The stress concentration factors for the mean stresses are Kfm 1 and Kfsm 1.
Solution: See Figures P10-2 and P10-4, and Mathcad file P1010a.
1. There is no stress concentration at the point on the shaft where the bending moment is a maximum, which is
at x = 16.3 cm (see the appendix to this problem, below). The keys are at a 16 cm and b 18 cm. On the
other hand, the key at a 16 cm looks as if it extends into the section where the moment is a maximum so,
use the maximum moment as the alternating bending moment.
Ma 48.45 N m
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 N m
2
4. Determine the geometric stress concentration factors from Figure 10-16 using curve-fit equations.
0.4115
Bending Kt 0.4521 ( roverd) Kt 2.2
0.230
Torsion Kts 1.251 ( roverd) Kts 3.0
5. Determine the notch sensitivity of the material for bending and torsion. Note from Figure 6-36, part 1, that a
value of 20 ksi should be added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6 for the torsional Neuber constant.
Bending Lookup value of S ut S ut 108 ksi

2 0.5
Neuber constant a N 0.056 in a N 0.056 in
1
Notch sensitivity q ( d )
aN
1
roverd d
Torsion Lookup value of S ut S'ut S ut 20 ksi S'ut 128 ksi
2 0.5
1
Notch sensitivity q s( d )
aN
1
roverd d
6. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factors from equation (6.11b).
Bending factor Kf ( d ) 1 q ( d ) Kt 1
Torsion factor Kfs( d ) 1 q s( d ) Kts 1
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189 d
Size

mm
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.782
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
10. Use equation (10.8) as a design equation to find d.
Guess d 25 mm
Given
1
3

32 Nfd Kf ( d) Ma 4 Kfs( d) Ta
2 3 2
3 fsm m
K T
d=
S e( d ) 4 S ut
d Find ( d ) d 65.3 mm
Using this value for d, the size modification factor, stress concentration factors, and endurance limit are:
Endurance limit S e( d ) 187.9 MPa
Stress concentration factors Kf ( d ) 2.0 Kfs( d ) 2.7

1. From inspection of Figure P10-2, write the load function
equation
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 300 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 1700 N
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
p 2 p 2
2 2
Shear 500
Diagram
0
V ( x) 500
N
1000
1500
2000
0 5 10 15 20
x
cm
Moment 50
Diagram
40
30
M ( x)
20
Nm
10
10
0 5 10 15 20
x
cm
FIGURE 10-10a
ca bc a R2 b R1
= c c 16.300 cm
R1 R2 R1 R2
Moment at x = b M ( b ) 34 N m
PROBLEM 10-11a
Statement: Determine the amount of diametral interference needed to provide a suitable interference fit for
the 6-in diameter by 1-in thick gear of Figure P10-3 using a shaft diameter of 1.75 in, such that the
stresses in the hub and shaft will be safe and the torque from row a in Table P10-1 can be
transmitted through the interference fit. Assume that both parts are steel with the properties
given below.
Given: Gear hub diameter d hub 6.00 in Shaft diameter: d shaft 1.75 in
6
Gear hub length L 1.00 in Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
Peak shaft torque Tp 2000 lbf in Poisson's ratio 0.28
Assumptions: 1. Material properties are: S ut 108 ksi, and S y 62 ksi.
exercise.
3. The coefficient of friction between the hub and shaft is 0.15.
1. As a design choice, let the design factor of safety on torque capacity and hub failure be Nd 2
2. Calculate hub and shaft radii.

Hub radius ro 0.5 d hub ro 3 in
Nominal interface radius r 0.5 d shaft r 0.875 in
Shaft inside diameter ri 0 in
3. The minimum interference is determine by the desired torque capacity. Use equation 10.14c to solve for the
minimum diametral interference.
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque capacity T=
Nd 2
2 ro
2
2 ro Nd Tp
Solving for min min min 0.00071 in
L r E ro r
2 2
Let the minimum diametral interference be min 0.0007 in
Note that it is not practical to specify a dimension in inches that has more than 4 decimal places.
4. Find the von Mises stress in the hub as a function of the unknown maximum diametral interference .
E ro r
2 2
Interference pressure p ( )
2
4 r ro
Stress in shaft
Tangential ti ( ) p ( )
Radial ri( ) p ( )
Stress in hub
2 2
ro r
Tangential to( ) p ( )
2 2
ro r
Radial ro( ) p ( )
These are principal stresses. The tangential stress is 1 and the radial is 3. Use equation (5.7c) to find the von
Mises stress.
0.5
E
3 ro r
4 4
von Mises 'o( )
2
4 r ro
5. There is no bending stress in the shaft at the gear, therefore Kt 1
6. The safety factors against failure (yielding in the shaft and hub) during press fit can now be used to find the
maximum diametral interference:
Guess min
S y
Shaft Given Nd =
Kt ti ( )
smax Find ( ) smax 0.0040 in
Sy
Hub Given Nd =
Kt 'o( )
hmax Find( ) hmax 0.0021 in
Using the smaller of the two, max hmax max 0.0021 in
7. The torque capacity of the joint (with an assumed coefficient of friction of 0.15 ) is about 2 times the
peak transmitted torque and the safety factors against failure of the shaft and hub exceed 2 therefore, the
minimum and maximum diametral interference below is acceptable.
Minimum diametral interference min 0.0007 in
Minimum diametral interference max 0.0021 in

8. If we divide the tolerance on the shaft and hub equally and use the basic hole system, the shaft and hub bore
specifications are:
Tolerance on shaft or hub t 0.5 max min t 0.0007 in
Hub bore diameter: Dmin d shaft Dmin 1.7500 in
Dmax Dmin t Dmax 1.7507 in
Shaft diameter: d max d shaft max d max 1.7521 in
d min d max t d min 1.7514 in
Maximum interference max d max Dmin max 0.0021 in

Minimum interference min d min Dmax min 0.0007 in
9. Check the safety factors against torque capacity and static failure of the hub.
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque Ntorque Ntorque 2.0
Tp 2
2 ro
Sy
Hub strength Nhub Nhub 2.0
Kt 'o max
PROBLEM 10-12a
Statement: Assume that the device shown keyed to the shaft of Figure P10-3 is a Class 50, cast iron flywheel
of 20-in outside diameter and 1-in thickness. The hub is 4-in dia and 3-in thick. Determine the
maximum speed at which it can safely be run using a safety factor of 2. Use dimensions and
other appropriate data from Problem 10-6 and row a in Table P10-1. Consider the transverse
force P to be zero in this case.
Given: Flywheel : odfw 20 in Safety factor Nos 2

thickfw 1 in Tensile strength S ut 52.5 ksi
3
Hub: odhub 4 in Specific weight 0.26 lbf in
thickhub 3 in Poisson's ratio 0.26
Shaft diameter d shaft 1.75 in
Assumptions: The hub is thicker (in the axial direction) than the flywheel disk. This has the effect of
strengthening the flywheel from the shaft out to the od of the hub. This effect will be ignored
and the flywheel analyzed as if the hub had the same thickness as the disk portion.
1. The stress is maximum at the inside radius of a flywheel, which in this case is at the shaft diameter. At this radiu
the radial stress is zero so that the tangential stress is the only nonzero stress and is 1. With the other principal
stresses equal to zero, the load line is along the s1 axis on the 1-3 diagram. For that case, the factor of safety
equation is the same for all brittle material failure theories and is
S ut
Ns =
1
2. Use equation (10.23a) with t replaced by S ut (Ns = 1) to determine the speed at which the flywheel will fail.
Inside radius ri 0.5 d shaft ri 0.875 in
Outside radius ro 0.5 odfw ro 10 in
Critical radius r ri r 0.875 in

1
2
g S ut
Failure speed fail
3 2
2 2
2 ri ro 1 3 2
8 ri ro 2
3
r

r
fail 9332 rpm

fail
3. The factor of safety on the operating speed (see Example 10-7) is defined as Nos =
os
fail
Maximum safe operating speed os os 4666 rpm
Nos
Using this definition results in the static strength factor of safety, Ns, being equal to the square of Nos.
PROBLEM 10-13a
Statement: Determine the critical frequency of shaft whirl for the assembly shown in Figure P10-3 using
dimensions from row a of Table P10-1 and a steel shaft diameter of 2 in. Use the flywheel
dimensions of Problem 10-12.
2
lbf sec
Units: blob
in
Given: Flywheel : odfw 20 in Shaft:
thickfw 1 in Distance between bearings a 16 in
Hub: odhub 4 in Distance to flywheel b 18 in
thickhub 3 in Shaft diameter d shaft 2.00 in
3 6
Specific weight 0.26 lbf in Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
1. Determine the shaft stiffness at the flywheel using Figure B-3(a) in Appendix B. Note that in Figure B-3(a)
the dimensions a and b are the dimensions b and a, respectively in Figure P10-3.
The deflection under the load (x=a in Figure B-3(a)) is

ba
( a b ) b ( a b ) a
F 3 a 3
y = a
6 E I b b
To use the symbols of Figure P10-3, change a to b and b to a.
ab
( b a ) a ( b a ) b
F 3 b 3
y = b
6 E I a a
F
The stiffness of the beam at the point of the applied load is k = . Solve the above equation for F/y = k
y
while substituting d 4/64 for I.
4
3 d shaft E 5 lbf
k k 9.817 10
ab
32 ( b a ) a ( b a ) b
3 b 3 in
b
a a
2. Calculate the mass of the flywheel and hub.

odhub d shaft thickhub
2 2 3
Volume of hub Vhub Vhub 28.274 in
4

odfw odhub thickfw
2 2 3
Volume of flywheel Vfw Vfw 301.593 in
4
Vhub Vfw

Total mass mtot mtot 0.222 blob
g
3. Calculate the critical frequency.

k rad
n n 2102
mtot sec
n 20075 rpm
n
fn fn 335 Hz
2
mtot g 5
4. Deflection at the flywheel due to its own weight. 8.736 10 in
k
PROBLEM 10-14a
Statement: Determine the critical frequency of shaft whirl for the assembly shown in Figure P10-4 using
dimensions from row a of Table P10-1 and a steel shaft diameter of 40 mm. The cast-iron roller
diameter is 3 times the shaft diameter.
Given: Distance between bearings L 20 cm Shaft Young's modulus E 206.8 GPa

3
Distance to start of roller a 16 cm Roller specific weight 70580 N m
Distance to end of roller b 18 cm Roller diameter d roller 3 d shaft
Shaft diameter d shaft 40 mm d roller 120 mm
1. Calculate the area moment of inertia of the shaft.

4
d shaft 5 4
Area moment of inertia I I 1.257 10 mm
64
2. Calculate the weight of the roller.

2 2
Vroller d d shaft ( b a)
4
Volume of roller roller
5 3
Vroller 2.011 10 mm
Weight of roller Wroller Vroller Wroller 14.191 N
Wroller
Mass of roller mroller mroller 1.447 kg
g
Wroller N
Distributed load on shaft due to weight of roller p p 709.548
ba m
moment equations.
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1
V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0
M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
both are zero.
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 2.129 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 12.06 N

(x) = [R1<x - 0>2/2 - p<x - a>3/6 + p<x - b>3/6 + R2<x - L>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x - 0>3/6 - p<x - a>4/24 + p<x - b>4/24 + R2<x - L>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
6. Solve for the constants of integration with the boundary conditions y = 0 at x = 0 and x = L.
At x = 0 C4 = 0
R1 3 p 4 p 4
At x = L 0= L ( L a) ( L b ) C 3 L
6 24 24
1 p 4 p 4 R1 3 2
C3 ( L a) ( L b) L C3 0.014 N m
L 24 24 6
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
8. Write the deflection equation in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of
the singularity functions.
1 R1 3 p 4 p 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x a ) ( x a ) S ( x b ) ( x b ) C3 x
E I 6 24 24
9. Determine the approximate stiffness of the shaft by dividing the weight of the roller by the deflection of the sha
due to the roller weight at the mid-point of the roller.
ab
Roller midpoint c c 170 mm
2
5
Deflection at x = c c y ( c) c 2.345 10 mm
Wroller 8 N
Stiffness k k 6.051 10
c m
10. Calculate the critical frequency.
k rad
n n 20449
mroller sec
n 195275 rpm
n
fn fn 3255 Hz
2
PROBLEM 10-15a
Statement: What are the maximum, minimum, and average power values for the shaft shown in Figure P10-1
for the data in row a of Table P10-1 if the shaft speed is 750 rpm?
rad
Given: Shaft speed 750 rpm 78.54
sec
Minimum torque Tmin 0 in lbf
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 in lbf
1. Use equations (10.1) to calculate the power values.
Tmax Tmin
Average torque Tavg Tavg 1000 in lbf
2
Maximum power Pmax Tmax Pmax 23.8 hp
Minimum power Pmin Tmin Pmin 0 hp
Average power Pavg Tavg Pavg 11.9 hp
2. Note, if doing these calculations by hand, that suitable unit conversion factors must be used.
PROBLEM 10-16a
Statement: What are the maximum, minimum, and average power values for the shaft shown in Figure P10-2
for the data in row a of Table P10-1 if the shaft speed is 50 rpm?
rad
sec
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m
Tmax Tmin
Average torque Tavg Tavg 1000 N m
2
Maximum power Pmax Tmax Pmax 10.5 kW
Minimum power Pmin Tmin Pmin 0 kW
Average power Pavg Tavg Pavg 5.24 kW
PROBLEM 10-17a
Statement: Figure P10-5 shows a roller assembly driven by a gear. The roller extends over 80% of the length a
and is centered in that dimension. The roller occupies 95% of the exposed shaft length between
the bearing faces. The shaft is steel of S ut = 745 MPa and S y = 427 MPa. For the data in row a of
Table P10-1, find:
(a) The safety factor against fatigue failure for a shaft diameter of 40 mm.
(b) The maximum torsional deflection between gear and roller.
(c) The torsional natural frequency of the shaft.
Given: Distance to end of shaft L 20 cm Distance between bearings a 16 cm

Distance to gear b 18 cm Tensile strength S ut 745 MPa
1
Minimum torque Tmin 0 N m Shaft diameter d 40 mm
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 N m Concentrated load P 1000 N
2. Use SI units with Table P10-1 consistent with Problem 10-2.
3. The ratio of notch radius to shaft diameter in the keyway is roverd 0.021.
4. The roller stiffens the shaft torsionally so that the torsional deflection will occur largely
between the right end of the roller (at the second or middle key) and the gear (right key).
exercise.

Part (a)
1. The maximum moment in the shaft occurs at approximately the middle of the roller. See the appendix to this
problem below for the determination of Mmax. The maximum moment is also the alternating moment. Thus,
Mmax 297.3 N m Ma Mmax Ma 297.3 N m

2. Calculate the mean and alternating components of torque, assuming that one half is taken out at the right-hand
key and the other half at the left-hand key. At the middle of the roller only one half of the torque is present.
1 Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 500 N m
2 2
1 Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 500 N m
2 2
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize 1.189 d
Size Csize 0.831

mm
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.782
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

6. Use equation (10.8) with unity for all stress concentration factors to find the factor of safety at the point in the
shaft where the bending moment is maximum.
1
2 3 2 3
3 Ma Ta Tm
d 4 4
Nfc Nfc 2.1
32 Se S ut
7. Although the bending moment is lower at the ends of the roller where the keys are, there is a stress
concentration there that is not present at the point where the bending moment is a maximum. Of the two key
locations, the one on the right is critical (even though the moment is lower there) because the full torque is
present in the shaft at this point. The bending moment and torque at the right keyway (x = f) are:
Mf 84.4 N m Ma Mf Ma 84.4 N m
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 N m
2
8. Determine the geometric stress concentration factors from Figure 10-16 using the assumed r/d.
For an r/d ratio of roverd 0.021 Kt 2.2 Kts 3.0
Notch radius r roverd d r 0.84 mm

2 0.5
1
aN
1
r

2 0.5
1
aN
1
r
Bending factor Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 1.917
Torsion factor Kfs 1 q s Kts 1 Kfs 2.603
Maximum and minimum nominal stress
16 Ta 16 Tm
anom anom 79.6 MPa mnom mnom 79.6 MPa
3 3
d d
maxnom mnom anom maxnom 159.155 MPa
minnom mnom anom minnom 0 MPa
Using equations 6.17, the mean-stress fatigue-concentration factors are
Kfm max min K S return K if K max S

S K anom
return if K max S
mnom
return 0 if K max min 2 S
Kfsm Kfm maxnom minnom Kfs 0.577 S y Kfsm 0.49
11. Use equation (10.8) with the stress concentration factors above to find the factor of safety at the point in the
shaft where the right-hand roller key is located.
1

3 Kf Ma K fs Ta
2 3 2 3
Kfsm Tm
d 4 4
Nff Nff 0.57
32 Se S ut
So, in this case, the critical section on the shaft is not at the point of maximum bending moment. This is for two
reasons, 1) there is no stress concentration at this point but there is elsewhere, and 2) the torque is maximum at
the point of a stress concentration.
Part (b)
12. For the assumptions made, the length of the shaft that will deflect torsionally is Lbf b f Lbf 36 mm
4
d
13. Calculate the polar moment of inertia of the shaft. J
32
14. 5 4
J Using
2.513 equation
10 mm(10.9a), calculate the angular deflection between the gear and the right-hand key for the maximu
applied torque.
Tmax Lbf
Angular deflection 0.203 deg
J G
Part (c)
15. Use equations (10.27) to determine the shaft spring constant, mass moment of inertia, and natural frequency.
kg
Density of steel 76500
3
m
2
d
Mass of shaft mshaft L mshaft 19.227 kg
4
2

Mass moment of inertia mshaft d 3 2
Im Im 3.845 10 m kg
2 2
G J N m
Spring constant kt kt 564090
Lbf rad
kt rad
Natural frequency n n 12112
Im sec
n
fn fn 1928 Hz
2

Distance to left end e 0.1 a e 16 mm
Distance to right end f 0.9 a f 144 mm
2. From inspection of Figure P10-5, write the load function
equation
both are zero.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( b e ) p ( b f ) R 2 P = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 b ( b e) ( b f ) R 2 ( b a ) = 0
2 2
e2 f 2
f e p
b a
R1 P R1 6275 N
2 a a
R2 p ( f e) R1 P R2 7525 N
5. Define the range for x x 0 m 0.005 b b
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
V ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) p S ( x e) ( x e) p S ( x f ) ( x f ) R2 S ( x a ) P S ( x b )
p 2 p 2
M ( x) R1 S ( x 0 m) x S ( x e) ( x e) S ( x f ) ( x f ) R2 S ( x a ) ( x a )
2 2
SHEAR MOMENT
10 300
5 200
V ( x) M ( x)
0 100
kN Nm
5 0
10 100
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
cm cm
FIGURE 10-17a
9. Determine the maximum maximum moment from inspection of the diagrams. Maximum moment occurs where V
ce f c f R1 e R2 e P
= c c 7.875 cm
R1 R2 P R1 R2 P
The moment at the left edge of the roller (at key) is Me M ( e) Me 100.4 N m
The moment at the right edge of the roller (at key) is Mf M ( f ) Mf 84.4 N m
The moment at the right-hand bearing is Ma M ( a ) Ma 20 N m
PROBLEM 10-18a
Statement: Figure P10-5 shows a roller assembly driven by a gear. The roller extends over 80% of the length a
and is centered in that dimension. The roller occupies 95% of the exposed shaft length between
the bearing faces. For the data in row a of Table P10-1, find the maximum bending deflection of th
40-mm-diameter shaft.
Given: Distance to end of shaft L 20 cm Distance between bearings a 16 cm

Distance to gear b 18 cm Shaft diameter d 40 mm
1
Applied distributed load p 1000 N cm Concentrated load P 1000 N
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 N m Young's modulus E 206.8 GPa
Assumptions: 1. The roller does not stiffen the shaft in bending but it does transmit the distributed load
directly to the shaft.
exercise.
1. Determine the distance from the origin to the left and right ends of the roller and the area moment of inertia.
Distance to left end e 0.1 a e 16 mm
Distance to right end f 0.9 a f 144 mm
4
d 5 4
64
moment equations.
At x = b +, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( b e ) p ( b f ) R 2 P = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 b ( b e) ( b f ) R 2 ( b a ) = 0
2 2
e2 f 2 b a
R1 f e p P R1 6275 N
2 a a
R2 p ( f e) R1 P R2 7525 N

(x) = [R1<x - 0>2/2 - p<x - e>3/6 + p<x - f>3/6 + R2<x - a>2/2 - P<x - b>2/2 + C3]/EI
y(x) = [R1<x - 0>3/6 - p<x - e>4/24 + p<x - f>4/24 + R2<x - a>3/6 - P<x - b>3/6 + C3x + C4]/EI
5. Solve for the constants of integration with the boundary conditions y = 0 at x = 0 and x = a.
At x = 0 C4 = 0
R1 3 p 4 p 4
At x = L 0= a ( a e) ( a f ) C 3 a
6 24 24
1 p 4 p 4 R1 3 2
C3 ( a e) (a f ) a C3 15.578 N m
a 24 24 6

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
1 R1 2 p 3 p 3
( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x e) ( x e) S ( x f ) ( x f )
E I 2 6 6
R
2 S ( x a ) ( x a) 2 P S( x b) ( x b ) 2 C3
2 2
1 R1 3 p 4 p 4
y ( x) S ( x 0 mm) x S ( x e) ( x e) S ( x f ) ( x f )
E I 6 24 24
R
2 S( x a) ( x a ) 3 P S ( x b ) ( x b) 3 C3 x
6 6
9. Plot the slope and deflection diagrams (see Figure 10-18).
SLOPE DEFLECTION
1 0.04
0.5 0.02
( x) y ( x)
3
0 0
10 mm
0.5 0.02
1 0.04
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
x x
FIGURE 10-18 cm cm
10. The maximum deflection occurs at the value of x for which is zero. Let this be x = c, then guess c 8 cm
Given ( c) = 0 c Find ( c) c 7.955 cm
11. The maximum deflection occurs at x = c and is
ymax y ( c) ymax 0.0300 mm
12. The deflection at the end of the shaft is
yL y ( L) yL 0.0229 mm
PROBLEM 10-19a
Statement: Figure P10-6 shows two gears on a common shaft. Assume that the constant radial force P1 is
40% of P2. For the data in row a from Table P10-1, find the diameter of the shaft required to
obtain a safety factor of 2 in fatigue loading if the shaft is steel with properties given below.
Given: Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Minimum torque Tmin 0 lbf in
Radial load P2 1000 lbf Load factor n 0.4
Shaft dimensions: a 16 in Tensile strength
S ut 108 ksi
b 18 in Yield strength S y 62 ksi
L 20 in Design safety factor Nd 2
Assumptions: There are no applied axial loads. Steel will be used for infinite life. The shaft is machined,
reliability is 90%, and the shaft is at room temperature. The ratio of the fillet radius in the
keyway to shaft diameter is roverd 0.02.

1. Calculate the radial load on gear 1:
P1 n P2 P1 400 lbf
2. Using Figures D-2(a) and D-3(a), the reaction and moment equations are
R1 P1 1
a L
P2 1 R1 67 lbf
b b
R2 P1 P2 R1
R2 1467 lbf
M(z) = R1<z>1 - P1<z - a>1 + R2<z-b>1 - P2<z - L>1
3. Define the range for z z 0 in 0.005 L L
4. For a Mathcad solution, define a step function S. This function will have a value of zero when z is less than u,
and a value of one when it is greater than or equal to u.
S ( z u ) if ( z u 1 0 )
5. Write the shear and moment in Mathcad form, using the function S as a multiplying factor to get the effect of
the singularity functions.
V ( z) R1 S ( z 0 in) P1 S ( z a ) R2 S ( z b ) P2 S ( z L)
M ( z) R1 S ( z 0 mm) ( z 0 mm) P1 S ( z a ) ( z a )
R2 S ( z b ) ( z b ) P2 S ( z L) ( z L)
6. Plot the shear and moment diagrams (see Figure 10-19a). The maximum moment occurs at the right-hand
bearing and is MB M ( b ) . The moment at the left-hand gear is MA M ( a ) . The moment at the
right-hand gear is zero so the two points of interest are A and B. At A the bending moment is lower than at B
but there is a stress concentration due to the key seat. At B the moment is a maximum but there is no stress
concentration. We will investigate both points.
MA 1067 in lbf MB 2000 in lbf

1000 0
500
500
V ( z) M ( z)
1000
lbf lbf in
0
1500
500 2000
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
z z
FIGURE 10-19a in in
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 1000 in lbf
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 1000 in lbf
2
Right-hand bearing (point B)

Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 0.869
d
Size
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.781
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1
Guess d 1 in
Given
1
3
2 3 2
32 Nd MB 4 Ta 3 m
T
d=
S e( d ) 4 S ut
d B Find ( d ) d B 1.153 in
Size modification factor Csize d B 0.857
Endurance limit S e d B 32.4 ksi

Left-hand gear (point A)
12. Determine the geometric stress concentration factors from Figure 10-16 using a curve-fit equation.
0.4115
0.230
13. Determine the notch sensitivity of the material in bending and torsion. Note from Figure 6-36, part 1, that a
value of 20 ksi should be added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6 when the loading is torsional.
Bending:
Lookup value of S ut S'ut S ut S'ut 108 ksi
2 0.5
Notch radius r( d ) roverd d

1
a
1
r( d )
Torsion:

2 0.5
Neuber constant a s 0.045 in a s 0.045 in
Notch radius r( d ) roverd d

1
as
1
r( d )
14. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factors from equation 6.11b and 6.17.
Kf ( d ) 1 q ( d ) Kt 1
Bending
Torsion Kfs( d ) 1 q s( d ) Kts 1
15. Repeat step 11 using these stress concentration factors with the mean and alternating stresses.
Given 1
3

32 Nd Kf ( d ) MA 4 Kfs( d) Ta
2 3 2
3 Tm
d= Kfsm( d )
S e( d ) 4 S ut
Diameter required at point A: d A Find ( d ) d A 1.337 in
16. Check the assumption that Kfsm = Kfs using equation 6.17.
Tm Ta
16
maxnom maxnom 10.2 ksi
3
d
Kfs( d ) maxnom 26.2 ksi 0.577 S y 35.774 ksi
Since Kfsmax is less than S sy, the assumption was valid.
17. Since d A is larger than d B, it must be used as the minimum shaft diameter. Thus, d d A. d 1.337 in
18. The factor of safety at A is Nd 2 . The safety factor at B is
1
2 3 2
3 MB Ta
d 4 3 m
T
NB NB 3.1
32 S e( d ) 4 S ut
PROBLEM 10-20
Statement: A 300-mm-long, solid, straight shaft is supported in self-aligning bearings at each end. A gear
is attached at the middle of the shaft with a 10-mm square, steel key in a slot. The geometric
stress-concentration factor in the keyslot is 2.5 and its corner radius is 0.5 mm. The gear drives
a fluctuating load that creates a bending moment that varies from +10 N-m to +100 N-m and a
torque that varies from -35 N-m to +170 N-m each cycle. The material chosen is cold-drawn 4140
steel, hardened and tempered to RC 45 (S ut = 1250 MPa). Design the shaft for infinite life and
determine the diameter needed for a safety factor of 1.5.
Given: Minimum moment Mmin 10 N m Stress conc. factor Kt 2.5

Maximum moment Mmax 100 N m Notch radius r 0.5 mm
Minimum torque Tmin 35 N m Tensile strength S ut 1250 MPa
Maximum torque Tmax 170 N m Design safety factor Nfd 1.5
2. The geometric stress concentration factors are the same for bending and torsion.
exercise.
1. Calculate the mean and alternating components of bending moment and torque.
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 55 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 45 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Tm Tm 68 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 103 N m
2

2 0.5
1
aN
1
r

2 0.5
1
aN
1
r
Bending factor Kf 1 q Kt 1 Kf 2.281
Torsion factor Kfs 1 q s Kt 1 Kfs 2.329
Assume Kfm Kf Kfsm Kfs
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189
d
Size
mm
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.682
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
7. Use equation (10.8) as a design equation to find d.
Guess d 20 mm
Given
1
3
2
32 Nfd Kf Ma 4 Kfs Ta Kfm Mm Kfsm Tm
2 3 2 2 3

4
d=
S e( d ) S ut
d Find ( d ) d 23.395 mm Round this to d 22 mm
Endurance limit S e( d ) 337 MPa
PROBLEM 10-21 _____

Statement: Figure P10-7 shows a dial assembly. The dial is 500-mm-dia by 16-mm-thick, solid steel and is
bolted to the top flange of the shaft. The shaft is 70 mm dia over length L1, 40 mm dia over
length L2, and is carried on tapered roller bearings. All shaft fillet radii are 0.5 mm. A 5 kW
motor drives the shaft through a 20:1 reduction gearbox and a commercial bellows coupling.
The maximum rated torque from the motor is 17.75 N-m and its stall torque is 3x its rated torque.
Find the maximum stress and angular deflection in the shaft under conditions of dial locked and
motor at stall.
Given: Rated motor torque TMR 17.75 N m Stall torque factor fstall 3
Gear reduction ratio mG 20 Modulus of rigidity G 80.8 GPa
Shaft dimensions d 1 70 mm L1 144 mm d 2 40 mm L2 24 mm
1. For a locked dial the motor will be stalled. The torque on the shaft at the gearbox output will be
Tss TMR fstall mG Tss 1065 N m
2. Calculate the polar moment of inertia and outside radius of each section of the shaft.
4
d 1 6 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm r1 0.5 d 1 r1 35 mm
32
4
d 2 5 4
J2 J2 2.513 10 mm r2 0.5 d 2 r2 20 mm
32
3. Calculate the stress in each section of the shaft when the dial is locked.
Tss r1 Tss r2
1 1 15.8 MPa 2 2 84.8 MPa
J1 J2
The maximum stress for a locked dial is in the smaller diameter shaft and is
max 2 max 84.8 MPa
4. Calculate the deflection of the shaft under the stall torque.
Tss L1 Tss L2
stall stall 0.118 deg
J 1 G J2 G
PROBLEM 10-22 _____
Statement: For the dial assembly of Problem 10-21 and Figure P10-7, find the first torsional natural frequency
the shaft-dial assembly as felt at the motor shaft. The gearbox has a torsional stiffness of 1.56E5
N-m/rad and the coupling has a torsional stiffness of 5.1E5 N-m/rad. Assume the dial is empty of
tooling and that ground support is infinitely stiff.
Given: Dial dimensions: D 500 mm t 16 mm

3
Gear reduction ratio mG 20 Density of steel 7800 kg m
5 5
Gearbox stiffness kG 1.56 10 N m Coupling stiffness kC 5.1 10 N m
1. Calculate the mass of the dial (the other masses will be neglected).
D2
mD t mD 24.504 kg
4
2. Calculate the mass moment of inertia of the dial.
2
mD
1 D 2.000
ID ID 0.766 m kg
2 2
3. Calculate the stiffness of the shaft using equations 10.27. For steel, G 80.8 GPa
4 4
d 1 6 4 d 2 5 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm J2 J2 2.513 10 mm
32 32
J 1 G 6 N m J 2 G 5 N m
k1 k1 1.323 10 k2 k2 8.461 10
L1 rad L2 rad
1
1 1 5 N m
kshaft k kshaft 5.160 10
1 k2 rad
4. Calculate the stiffness of the shaft-coupling-gearbox assembly.

1
1 1 1 4 N m
ktotal k ktotal 9.700 10
shaft kC kG rad
5. Using equation 10.27a, calculate the torsional natural frequency.
ktotal rad n
n n 356 fn fn 56.6 Hz
ID sec 2
PROBLEM 10-23 _____

the shaft-dial-tool assembly as felt at the motor shaft. The gearbox has a torsional stiffness of
1.56E5 N-m/rad and the coupling has a torsional stiffness of 5.1E5 N-m/rad. The dial is fitted with
20 sets of tooling bolted to its top surface, equispaced on a 416-mm bolt circle. Each tooling
assembly weighs 75.62 N. Assume all ground support is infinitely stiff.

3
5 5
Tooling: Bolt circle dia Dt 416 mm Weight Wt 75.62 N Nt 20

1. Calculate the mass of the dial and the tools.
D2 Wt
mD t mD 24.504 kg mt Nt mt 154.222 kg
4 g
2. Calculate the mass moment of inertia of the dial and the tools.
2 2
Dt
ID mD
1 D 2.000 2.000
ID 0.766 m kg It mt It 6.672 m kg
2 2 2
2.000
Itotal ID It Itotal 7.438 m kg
4 4
d 1 6 4 d 2 5 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm J2 J2 2.513 10 mm
32 32
J 1 G 6 N m J 2 G 5 N m
k1 k1 1.323 10 k2 k2 8.461 10
L1 rad L2 rad
1
5 N m
kshaft
1 1
kshaft 5.160 10
k1 k2 rad

1
1 1 1 4 N m
shaft kC kG rad
ktotal rad n
n n 114 fn fn 18.2 Hz
Itotal sec 2
PROBLEM 10-24 _____
the shaft-dial assembly as felt at the motor shaft. The gearbox has a torsional stiffness of 1.56E5
N-m/rad, the coupling has a torsional stiffness of 5.1E5 N-m/rad, and the motor mount has a
torsional stiffness of 2.44E5 N-m. Assume the dial is empty of tooling.

3
5 5
5
Motor mount stiffness km 2.44 10 N m
1. Calculate the mass of the dial (the other masses will be neglected).
D2
mD t mD 24.504 kg
4
2. Calculate the mass moment of inertia of the dial.
2
mD
1 D 2.000
ID ID 0.766 m kg
2 2
4 4
d 1 6 4 d 2 5 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm J2 J2 2.513 10 mm
32 32
J 1 G 6 N m J 2 G 5 N m
k1 k1 1.323 10 k2 k2 8.461 10
L1 rad L2 rad
1
1 1 5 N m
1 k2 rad
4. Calculate the stiffness of the shaft-coupling-gearbox-motor-mount assembly.

1
1 1 1 1 4 N m
shaft kC kG km rad
ktotal rad n
n n 301 fn fn 47.9 Hz
ID sec 2
PROBLEM 10-25 _____

Statement: The tooling on the dial assembly of Problem 10-21 and Figure P10-7 imparts a time varying torque
to the dial that ranges from a peak of 30% of the motor's rated torque (at the motor) to zero, 20 time
per dial revolution. If the motor speed is 600 rpm, find the worst-case stress-time and
deflection-time functions for the shaft. Choose a shaft material to give a safety factor of at least 3
against failure. Disregard the response of the system to the forced vibration.
Given: Rated motor torque TMR 17.75 N m Stall torque factor fstall 3
Motor speed n m 600 rpm Tool torque factor ftool 0.3
Design safety factor Nd 3 Number of tools Nt 20

1. Calculate the mean and alternating torque components on the dial shaft.
Maximum torque Tmax ftool TMR mG Tmax 106.5 N m
Tmax Tmin
Mean torque Tm Tm 53.25 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
Alternating torque Ta Ta 53.25 N m
2
4
d 1 6 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm r1 0.5 d 1 r1 35 mm
32
4
d 2 5 4
J2 J2 2.513 10 mm r2 0.5 d 2 r2 20 mm
32
3. Calculate the mean and alternating stress components in the smaller diameter shaft.
Tm r2 Ta r2
2m 2m 4.24 MPa 2a 2a 4.24 MPa
J2 J2
'm 3 2m 'm 7.34 MPa 'a 3 2a 'a 7.34 MPa
4. Calculate the mean and alternating deflection of the shaft.
Tm L1 Tm L2 3
m m 5.913 10 deg
J 1 G J 2 G
Ta L1 Ta L2 3
a a 5.913 10 deg
J1 G J2 G
5. Calculate the endurance limit correction factors using equations 6.7 and the modified endurance limit, as a
function of S ut, using equations 6.5a and 6.6.
0.097
d2
Cload 1 Csize 1.189 Csize 0.831
mm
0.265
S ut
Csurf S ut 4.51 Ctemp 1 Creliab 0.897 (R = 0.90)
MPa
6. Calculate the fatigue stress-concentration factors at the step where shafts 1 and 2 join for a fillet radius of
r 0.5 mm. Use Figure C-3 in appendix C to calculate the geometric stress-concentration factor and
equations 6.11 and 6.17 to calculate the fatigue factors.
d1
Doverd Doverd 1.750
d2
2 Doverd
A ( 0.84897 0.86331 ) 0.86331 A 0.8580
2 1.33
2 Doverd
b ( 0.23161 0.23865 ) 0.23865 b 0.2360
2 1.33
b
Kts A
r
Kts 2.41

d 2
Neuber constant function:

3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
a ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10
3.94116 10 ksi
ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
q S ut
1
Notch sensitivity
a S ut 20 ksi
1
r
Alternating factor Kfs S ut 1 q S ut Kts 1
Mean factor Kfsm S ut Kfs S ut
7. Using equation 10.8, solve for the minimum required ultimate tensile strength. Guess S ut 200 MPa
1
3
3
32 Nd 4 Kfs Sut Ta Kfsm S ut Tm
3
4
Given d2 =
S e S ut S ut
PROBLEM 10-26 _____

Statement: Combine the data from Problems 10-23 and 10-25 and
(a) Find the ratio between the torsional forcing frequency and the first torsional natural
frequency of the dial assembly.
(b) Using the frequency ratio calculated in part (a), repeat Problem 10-25 taking into account
the forced vibration response of the system if the damping ratio = 0.20.

3
5 5
Tooling: Bolt circle dia Dt 416 mm Weight Wt 75.62 N Nt 20
Motor speed n m 600 rpm Tool torque factor ftool 0.3
Rated motor torque TMR 17.75 N m Design safety factor Nd 3
1. Calculate the mass of the dial and the tools.
D2 Wt
mD t mD 24.504 kg mt Nt mt 154.222 kg
4 g
2. Calculate the mass moment of inertia of the dial and the tools.
2 2
Dt
ID mD
1 D 2.000 2.000
ID 0.766 m kg It mt It 6.672 m kg
2 2 2
2.000
Itotal ID It Itotal 7.438 m kg
4 4
d 1 6 4 d 2 5 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm J2 J2 2.513 10 mm
32 32
J 1 G 6 N m J 2 G 5 N m
k1 k1 1.323 10 k2 k2 8.461 10
L1 rad L2 rad
1
1 1 5 N m
1 k2 rad

1
1 1 1 4 N m
shaft kC kG rad
ktotal rad n
n n 114 fn fn 18.2 Hz
Itotal sec 2
6. Determine the forcing frequency.
nm
Dial speed n D n D 30.0 rpm
mG
rad f
f Nt n D f 62.8 ff ff 10.0 Hz
sec 2
7. (a) Calculate the ratio of forcing frequency to natural frequency.
f
Fratio Fratio 0.55
n
8. Determine the amplitude ratio of the dial-tooling-shaft-coupling-gearbox system, when subjected to the
externally forced vibration, using the graph in Figure 10-26(a). For the frequency ratio Fratio 0.55 , and
damping ratio = 0.20, the amplitude (and torque) magnification is Y 1.46 .
9. Calculate the mean and alternating torque response components on the dial shaft.
Maximum torque Tmax Y ftool TMR mG Tmax 155.5 N m
Tmax Tmin
2
Tmax Tmin
2
4
d 1 6 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm r1 0.5 d 1 r1 35 mm
32
4
d 2 5 4
J2 J2 2.513 10 mm r2 0.5 d 2 r2 20 mm
32
Tm r2 Ta r2
2m 2m 6.19 MPa 2a 2a 6.19 MPa
J2 J2
'm 3 2m 'm 10.72 MPa 'a 3 2a 'a 10.72 MPa
Tm L1 Tm L2 3
m m 8.632 10 deg
J 1 G J 2 G
Ta L1 Ta L2 3
a a 8.632 10 deg
J1 G J2 G
0.097
d2
mm
0.265
S ut
MPa
d1
Doverd Doverd 1.750
d2
2 Doverd
A ( 0.84897 0.86331 ) 0.86331 A 0.8580
2 1.33
2 Doverd
b ( 0.23161 0.23865 ) 0.23865 b 0.2360
2 1.33
b
Kts A r
Kts 2.41
2
d
3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
a ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10
3.94116 10 ksi
ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
q S ut
1
Notch sensitivity
a S ut 20 ksi
1
r
15. (b) Using equation 10.8, solve for the minimum required ultimate tensile strength. Guess S ut 200 MPa
1
3
3
3
4
Given d2 =
S e S ut S ut
PROBLEM 10-27 _____

Statement: An impulsive impact load of 500 N is applied tangentially to the dial rim 20 times per dial
revolution. If the motor speed is 30 rpm, find the worst-case stress-time and deflection-time
functions for the shaft. Choose a shaft material to give a safety factor of at least 1.5 against
failure.
Given: Dial diameter D 500 mm

Motor speed n m 30 rpm Impact load F 500 N
Design safety factor Nd 1.5 Number of tools Nt 20

1. Calculate the mean and alternating torque components on the dial shaft. Assume that the impact load causes
a reaction in the dial shaft that is 3 times the applied load. (See discussion of force impact loads in Section
3.8).
D
Maximum torque Tmax 3 F Tmax 375.0 N m
2
Tmax Tmin
2
Tmax Tmin
2
4
d 1 6 4
J1 J1 2.357 10 mm r1 0.5 d 1 r1 35 mm
32
4
d 2 5 4
J2 J2 2.513 10 mm r2 0.5 d 2 r2 20 mm
32
Tm r2 Ta r2
2m 2m 14.92 MPa 2a 2a 14.92 MPa
J2 J2
'm 3 2m 'm 25.84 MPa 'a 3 2a 'a 25.84 MPa
Tm L1 Tm L2
m m 0.021 deg
J 1 G J 2 G
Ta L1 Ta L2
a a 0.021 deg
J1 G J2 G
0.097
d2
mm
0.265
S ut
MPa
d1
Doverd Doverd 1.750
d2
2 Doverd
A ( 0.84897 0.86331 ) 0.86331 A 0.8580
2 1.33
2 Doverd
b ( 0.23161 0.23865 ) 0.23865 b 0.2360
2 1.33
b
Kts A
r
Kts 2.41

d 2
3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
a ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10
3.94116 10
ksi ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
q S ut
1
Notch sensitivity
a S ut 20 ksi
1
r
7. Using equation 10.8, solve for the minimum required ultimate tensile strength. Guess S ut 200 MPa
1
3
3
3
4
Given d2 =
S e S ut S ut
PROBLEM 10-28 _____

Statement: For the dial assembly of Problem 10-21 and Figure P10-7, size a square key to couple the 40-mm-d
dial shaft to the coupling.
Given: Shaft stall torque Tss 1065 N m Shaft diameter d 40 mm
Design choices:
Shaft material: SAE 1050, normalized steel S y1 427 MPa S ut1 745 MPa
Key material: SAE 1020, cold-rolled steel S y2 393 MPa S ut2 469 MPa
Design safety factor Nd 1, let the key shear at stall torque to protect the
motor.
Key is machined, reliability is 90%, and the dial operates at room temperature.
Maximum torque Tmax Tss
1. As recommended in Table 10-2, for a shaft diameter of d 40.0 mm, use a square key of width
Key width w 12 mm

force components Fa Fa 26625 N
2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 26625 N
2 0.5 d
stress.
Key shear area as

w L w L

w L w L
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e
Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 1.189 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 1.189
w
Cs 0.931
0.0766 mm
0.0485
Csize = 0.931 L
0.265
S ut2
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
0.0485

3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce
L
Fm

RHS( L)
mm
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L

mm
Tentatively, let L 35 mm
7. Check the realized factor of safety against fatigue failure.
0.0485
S e Ce L
mm
S e S ut2
Realized factor Nf Nf 1.0
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L

1 2
2
Maximum force Fmax Fa Fm Fmax 53.3 kN

on key max max 254 MPa
Abear

max
9. Design Summary
Key width w 12 mm (12 x 12 mm)

Key length L 35 mm
PROBLEM 10-29 _____

Given: Shaft torque Tdial 106.5 N m Shaft diameter d 40 mm
Design choices:
Maximum torque Tmax Tdial
Key width w 12 mm

2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 2663 N
2 0.5 d
stress.
Key shear area as

w L w L

w L w L
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e
Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 1.189 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 1.189
w
Cs 0.931
0.0766 mm
0.0485
Csize = 0.931 L
0.265
S ut2
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
0.0485

3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce
L
Fm

RHS( L)
mm
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L

mm
0.0485
S e Ce L
mm
S e S ut2
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L

1 2
2

Abear

max
9. Design Summary

Key length L 10 mm
PROBLEM 10-30 _____

Given: Shaft torque Tdial 375 N m Shaft diameter d 40 mm
Design choices:
Maximum torque Tmax Tdial

Key width w 12 mm

2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 9375 N
2 0.5 d
stress.
Key shear area as

w L w L

w L w L
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e
Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 1.189 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 1.189
w
Cs 0.931
0.0766 mm
0.0485
Csize = 0.931 L
0.265
S ut2
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
0.0485
3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce L
Fm
RHS( L)

mm
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L

mm
0.0485
S e Ce
L

mm
S e S ut2
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L

1 2
2

Abear

max
9. Design Summary

Key length L 38 mm
PROBLEM 10-31a _____

Statement: A simply supported shaft with overhanging load is shown in Figure P10-1. A constant
magnitude transverse force P is applied as the shaft rotates. The shaft is also subject to a
steady torque of Tmax. For the data in the row(s) assigned from Table P10-1 (ignoring Tmin), find
the diameter of shaft required to obtain a safety factor of 2.5 in fatigue loading if the shaft is
steel of S ut = 118 kpsi and S y = 102 kpsi. The dimensions are in inches, the force in pounds, and
the torque is in lb-in. Assume no stress concentrations are present, the shaft is machined, the
required reliability is 90%, and the shaft operates at room temperature.
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Yield strength S y 102 ksi
Solution: See Figure P10-1, Table P10-1, and Mathcad file P1031a.
1. The maximum moment in the shaft occurs at the right bearing as seen in the moment diagram in Figure B-3(a) in
Appendix B (note that in the figure a is the distance to the load and b is the distance between bearings). Using
the equation given in the figure, calculate the alternating bending moment (the mean is zero).

S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 59.0 ksi
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 0.869
d
Size
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.763
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

5. Use equation 10.6a with unity for all stress concentration factors as a design equation to find d.
Guess d 1.00 in 1
3
1
2
32 Nd Ma 2 3 Tmax 2
d= 4 S d Find ( d )
Given

S e( d ) y
d 1.153 in

account.
Maximum torque Tmax 2000 lbf in Yield strength S y 102 ksi
2. The notch radius in the keyway is r 0.015 in
exercise.
1. There is no stress concentration at the point on the shaft where the bending moment is a maximum. On the
other hand, at the gear where there is a stress concentration, the bending moment is zero. The question is:
which point requires the larger diameter in order to meet the safety factor requirement? To answer this
question, find the diameter required at each point and choose the larger. Start with the point where the
bending moment is maximum.
Using the equation given in the figure, calculate the alternating bending moment (the mean is zero).

Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 0.869
d
Size
in
b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.763
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

Guess d 1.00 in
1
3
1
2
32 Nd Ma 2 3 Tmax 2
d= 4 S
Given

S e( d ) y
d 1 Find ( d ) d 1 1.153 in
7. At the gear the bending moment is zero but the steady torque is the same as above. Also, there is a stress
concentration due to the keyway that must be applied to the mean shear stress present at the gear. First, set the
moment equal to zero: Ma 0 lbf in, then determine the values of the alternating and mean fatigue stress
8. Determine the geometric stress concentration factor from the upper curve in Figure 10-16 using a curve-fit
equation.
0.230
Kts( d ) 1.251
r

d
9. Determine the notch sensitivity of the material. Note from Figure 6-36, part 1, that a value of 20 ksi should be
added to S ut to obtain a 1/2 from Table 6-6. Using a curve-fit to Table 6-6,
3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
a ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10
3.94116 10 ksi
ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
a a S ut 20 ksi
0.5
Neuber constant a 0.040 in
Notch radius r 0.015 in

1
a
1
r
Alternating factor Kfs( d ) 1 q Kts( d ) 1
11. Repeat step 6 using these stress concentration factors with the torsional stresses.
1
Given
3
1
2
32 Nd Ma 2 3 2
Tmax
d= Kfsm( d )
S y
S e( d ) 4
Diameter required at point of gear attachment: d 2 Find ( d ) d 2 1.061 in
d1
Putting the two calculated diameters into a vector trial_dia
d2
12. The larger of the two must be used as the minimum shaft diameter. Thus, d max( trial_dia ). d 1.153 in
13. The factor of safety at the point of maximum bending moment is Nd 2.500 . The factor of safety at the gear
is equal to the ratio of the two diameters cubed times Nd. Thus,
3
d1
Nfgear Nd Nfgear 3.2
d2

Statement: A simply supported shaft is shown in Figure P10-2. A constant magnitude distributed unit load
p is applied as the shaft rotates. The shaft is also subject to a steady torque of Tmax. For the
data in the row(s) assigned from Table P10-1 (ignoring Tmin), find the diameter of shaft required
to obtain a safety factor of 2.5 in fatigue loading if the shaft is steel of S ut = 814 MPa and S y =
703 MPa. The dimensions are in cm, the distributed force in N/cm, and the torque is in N-m.
Assume no stress concentrations are present, the shaft is machined, the required reliability is
90%, and the shaft operates at room temperature.
Given: Distance between bearings L 20 cm Distance to start of p a 16 cm
1
Ma 48.45 N m
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 407.0 MPa
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189
d
Size

mm
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.764
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

Guess d 20 mm
1
3
1
2
32 Nfd Ma 2 3 Tmax 2
d= 4 S d Find ( d ) d 39.8 mm
Given

Se( d) y
q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1

V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0

M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 300.000 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 1700 N

S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
p 2 p 2
2 2

500 50
0
35
V ( x) 500 M ( x)
N 20
1000 Nm
1500 5
2000
0 5 10 15 20 10
0 5 10 15 20
x
x
cm
cm
FIGURE 10-33a
V is zero, which is x = c. From the shear diagram,
ca bc a R2 b R1
= c c 16.300 cm
R1 R2 R1 R2

Statement: Repeat Problem 10-33 taking the stress concentration at the keyways shown in Figure P10-4 into
account.
Given: Distance between bearings L 20 cm Distance to start of p a 16 cm
1
2. The ratio of notch radius to shaft diameter in the keyway is roverd 0.021
exercise.
1. There is no stress concentration at the point on the shaft where the bending moment is a maximum, which is
at x = 16.3 cm (see the appendix to this problem, below). The keys are at a 16 cm and b 18 cm. On the
other hand, the key at a 16 cm looks as if it extends into the section where the moment is a maximum so,
use the maximum moment as the alternating bending moment.
Ma 48.45 N m
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 407.0 MPa
Load Cload 1
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189
d
Size
mm
b'
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.764
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

6. Determine the geometric stress concentration factors from Figure 10-16 using curve-fit equations.
0.4115
0.230

3.10030 10 7 S in
2 3
aN ( S ) 8.69657 10
2 3 S 5 S
2.75956 10 3.94116 10
ksi
ksi ksi
4 5 6
1.38322 10 3.28018 10 3.21209 10
9 S 12 S 15 S

ksi ksi ksi
a N aN S ut
0.5
Neuber constant a N 0.050 in
1
aN
1
roverd d
a N aN S ut 20 ksi
0.5
Neuber constant a N 0.040 in
1
aN
1
roverd d
8. Determine the fatigue stress concentration factors from equation 6.11b.
Kf ( d ) 1 q ( d ) Kt 1 Kfm( d ) Kf ( d )
Kfs( d ) 1 q ( d ) Kts 1 Kfsm( d ) Kfs( d )
9. Use equation 10.6a as a design equation to find d.

Guess d 1.00 in
1
3
1
2
Given
32 Nfd Kf ( d ) Ma 2 3 Kfsm( d) Tmax 2
d= 4

S e( d ) Sy
d 1 Find ( d ) d 1 55.0 mm

q(x) = R1<x - 0>-1 - p<x - a>0 + p<x - b>0 + R2<x - L>-1

V(x) = R1<x - 0>0 - p<x - a>1 + p<x - b>1 + R2<x - L>0

M(x) = R1<x - 0>1 - p<x - a>2/2 + p<x - b>2/2 + R2<x - L>1
At x = L+, V = M = 0
V = R1 p ( L a ) p ( L b ) R2 = 0
p 2 p 2
M = R 1 L ( L a) ( L b) = 0
2 2
( L a ) ( L b )
p 2 2
R1 R1 300.000 N
2 L
R2 p ( b a ) R1 R2 1700 N

6. For a Mathcad solution, define a step function S. This function will have a value of zero when x is less
than z, and a value of one when it is greater than or equal to z.
S ( x z) if ( x z 1 0 )
p 2 p 2
2 2

500 50
0 40
30
V ( x) 500 M ( x)
N 20
1000 Nm
10
1500
0
2000
0 5 10 15 20 10
0 5 10 15 20
x
x
cm
cm
FIGURE 10-34a
ca bc a R2 b R1
= c c 16.300 cm
R1 R2 R1 R2
PROBLEM 10-35
Statement: Figure P10-8 shows the last stage in a gearbox with dual output. The gear is manufactured
integrally with the shaft. The shaft is supported by two self-aligning ball bearings. Crank arms
are connected to each end of the shaft. The load on the cranks produces equal fluctuating
transverse forces on the shaft ends as well as equal fluctuating torques. The torque is
transmitted through end-milled keyways in the crank and shaft and a parallel key that fits snugly
in each keyway. The crank is located axially by a shoulder that is 50-mm from the plane in which
the transverse load acts. The fillet radius to shaft diameter is r/d = 0.05 and the shoulder to shaft
diameter ratio is D/d = 1.2. The shaft/gear material is SAE 4130 steel Q&T @ 1200F. The
transverse force fluctuates from 8 kN to 16.5 kN and the torque fluctuates from 1.1 kN-m to 2.2
kN-m. For a factor of safety of 2.5 against an infinite-life fatigue failure, determine a suitable
shaft diameter, d.
Given: Tensile strength S ut 814 MPa Ratios: Doverd 1.2 roverd 0.05
Loads: Pmin 8 kN Pmax 16.5 kN Tmin 1.1 kN m Tmax 2.2 kN m
Distance from center of crank to shoulder l 50 mm Safety factor Nf 2.5
1. Calculate the mean and alternating components of the loads.
Pmin Pmax
Mean Pm Pm 12.3 kN
2
Tmin Tmax
Tm Tm 1.65 kN m
2
Pmax Pmin
Alternating Pa Pa 4.3 kN
2
Tmax Tmin
Ta Ta 0.55 kN m
2
2. Calculate the mean and alternating bending moment at the shoulder.

Mean Mm Pm l Mm 0.61 kN m
Alternating Ma Pa l Ma 0.21 kN m
3. Using Appendix C, determine the geometric stress concentration factors for the bending and torsional stresses
at the shoulder.
Bending (Fig. C-2): For Doverd 1.2 roverd 0.05 A 0.97098 b 0.21796
b
Kt A ( roverd) Kt 1.865
Torsion (Fig. C-3): A 0.83425 b 0.21649
b
Kts A ( roverd) Kts 1.596
4. Calculate the notch sensitivity of the material for bending and torsion using Table 6-6. Assume a value for the
notch radius and iterate the solution if necessary. Assume d 50 mm r roverd d r 2.500 mm
P1035.xmcd
Bending:
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 814 MPa) a 0.050 in
1
Notch sensitivity q b q b 0.863
a
1
r
Torsion:
2
Neuber constant (for S ut 20 MPa 834 MPa) a 0.040 in
1
a
1
r
5. Calculate the fatigue stress concentration factors for bending and torsion using equation 6.11b.
Bending Kf 1 q b Kt 1 Kf 1.746
Torsion Kfs 1 q s Kts 1 Kfs 1.528
6. Assume that the stresses are such that the conditions of equation 6.17 will result in
Kfm Kf and Kfsm Kfs
7. Calculate the unmodified endurance limit (equation 6.5a). S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 407 MPa
8. Calculate the endurance limit modification factors for a rotating round beam.
Load Cload 1 Combined bending and torsion
0.097
Csize( d ) 1.189 d
Size

mm
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.764
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

10. Use equation (10.8) to solve for the diameter at the shoulder.
Given
1
3
2
32 Nf Kf Ma 4 Kfs Ta Kfm Mm Kfsm Tm
2 3 2 2 3

4
d=
S e( d ) S ut
P1035.xmcd
d Find ( d ) d 54.177 mm Say d 56 mm
10. Calculate the minimum, maximum, mean, and alternating bending stresses to check the assumption regarding th
mean stress concentration factors.
32 Pmin l
xmin xmin 23.2 MPa
3
d
32 Pmax l
xmax xmax 47.851 MPa
3
d
32 Pm l
xm xm 35.526 MPa
3
d
32 Pa l
xa xa 12.325 MPa
3
d
Yield strength SAE 4130 Q&T @ 1200F S y 703 MPa

S 2 Kf xmax xmin
S y Kf xa
xm
0 otherwise
Kfm 1.746 Kf 1.746
Which checks with the assumption made in step 6 above.
11. DESIGN SUMMARY
Shaft diameter d 56 mm
Shoulder dia D Doverd d D 67.2 mm
Fillet radius r roverd d r 2.8 mm
P1035.xmcd
PROBLEM 10-36
bearing failure for the crank/shaft connection of Problem 10-35. Assume a shaft diameter of 58
mm and a key made from SAE 1040 CR steel.
Given: Shaft diameter d 58 mm Shaft properties: S ut1 814 MPa

Maximum torque Tmax 2.2 kN m S y1 703 MPa
Minimum torque Tmin 1.1 kN m Key properties: S ut2 586 MPa
Design safety factor Nd 2 S y2 490 MPa
1. As recommended in Table 10-2, for a shaft diameter of d 58 mm

Key width w 16 mm

force components Fa Fa 18.97 kN
2 0.5 d
1 Tmax Tmin
Fm Fm 56.90 kN
2 0.5 d
stress.
Key shear area as

w L w L

w L w L
S e S ut S e S ut
Nd = =
ut a e m
w L
3 Nd S ut Fa S e Fm
Solving for L L=
w S ut S e

Correction factors:
Load Cload 1
w L
0.0766
0.097
Csize = 1.189 d eq
0.5 0.097
Cs 1.189
w
Cs 0.918
0.0766 mm
0.0485
Csize = 0.805 L
0.265
S ut2
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
0.0485 0.0485
where Ce Cs Csurf Creliab S'e Ce 224 MPa
0.0485
L=
0.0485
w S ut Ce L
0.0485
3 Nd S ut2 Fa Ce
L
Fm
RHS( L)
in
0.0485
w S ut2 Ce
L

in
0.0485
S e Ce
L
in
S e S ut2
3 S F S F
ut2 a e m
of safety

w L
1 2
2

on key max max 237.07 MPa
Abear

max
9. Design Summary
Key width w 16 mm (16 x 10)

Key length L 40 mm
PROBLEM 10-37
Statement: As an alternative to the keyed connection in Problem 10-35 determine the amount of diametral
interference needed to provide a suitable interference fit for the crank of Figure P10-8 using a
shaft diameter of 58 mm, such that the stresses in the hub and shaft will be safe and the
maximum torque can be transmitted through the interference fit. The crank material is the same
as the shaft and its length along the shaft is 64 mm. The effective outside diameter of the crank
is 150 mm.
Given: Gear hub diameter d hub 150 mm Shaft diameter: d shaft 58 mm
Gear hub length L 64 mm Young's modulus E 209 GPa
Peak shaft torque Tp 2.2 kN m Poisson's ratio 0.28
Material properties are: S ut 814 MPa, and S y 703 MPa.
Assumptions: The coefficient of friction between the hub and shaft is 0.15.
Hub radius ro 0.5 d hub ro 75 mm
Nominal interface radius r 0.5 d shaft r 29 mm
Shaft inside diameter ri 0 mm
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque capacity T=
Nd 2
2 ro
2
2 ro Nd Tp
Solving for min min min 0.057 mm
L r E ro r
2 2
Let the minimum diametral interference be min 0.06 mm
E ro r
2 2
2
4 r ro
Stress in shaft
Radial ri( ) p ( )
Stress in hub
2 2
ro r
2 2
ro r
Radial ro( ) p ( )
Mises stress.
0.5
E
3 ro r
4 4
von Mises 'o( )
2
4 r ro
5. There is no bending stress in the shaft at the crank, therefore Kt 1

Guess min
S y
Shaft Given Nd =
Kt ti ( )
smax Find ( ) smax 0.23 mm
Sy
Hub Given Nd =
Kt 'o( )
hmax Find( ) hmax 0.11 mm
Using the smaller of the two, max hmax max 0.11 mm
Minimum diametral interference min 0.06 mm
Minimum diametral interference max 0.12 mm
specifications are:
Tolerance on shaft or hub t 0.5 max min t 0.03 mm
Hub bore diameter: Dmin d shaft Dmin 58.00 mm
Dmax Dmin t Dmax 58.03 mm
Shaft diameter: d max d shaft max d max 58.12 mm
d min d max t d min 58.09 mm
Maximum interference max d max Dmin max 0.12 mm
Minimum interference min d min Dmax min 0.06 mm
L r min E ro r
2 2
Tp 2
2 ro
Sy
Kt 'o max
PROBLEM 10-38
Statement: An electric motor-driven shaft that has a fluctuating load torque turns at an average speed of
1600 rpm. The load torque varies sinusoidally once per revolution of the shaft with a peak
torque of 29500 in-lb. The shaft diameter is 2.0 in. Design a suitable flywheel for this system
that will provide a coefficient of fluctuation of 0.05 and an overspeed safety factor of at least 4.
The flywheel is to be a hollow circular disc of constant thickness made from SAE 1020 CR steel.
3
Given: Yield strength of SAE 1020 CR steel S y 57 ksi 0.28 0.28 lbf in
Average shaft speed avg 1600 rpm Coeff. of fluct. Cf 0.05
Shaft diameter d i 2.000 in Peak torque Tpeak 29500 in lbf
1. Plot the load torque over one revolution of the shaft.
Tl( ) Tpeak sin( ) 0 0.1 2
4
4 10
4
2 10
Load Torque
T l( )
0
in lbf
4
2 10
4
4 10
0 60 120 180 240 300 360

deg
Shaft Position
The average load torque is Tavg 0 in lbf
The minimum shaft speed occurs at min 180 deg
The maximum shaft speed occurs at max 360 deg
2. Calculate the required change in kinetic energy by integrating the left-hand side of equation 10.18d.

max
Energy variation Ek Tl( ) d Ek 59000 in lbf

min
3. Calculate the required system moment of inertia using equation 10.22.
Ek 2
System moment Is Is 42.032 lbf in sec
of inertia 2
Cf avg
Let Im Is
4. As a design choice, let the disc thickness be t 0.4 d i , t 0.800 in (this value of t was repeatedly changed
to arrive at a value of 4.0 for Nos). Calculate the outside radius required for this thickness using equation
10.17d.
P1038.xmcd
0.25
2 Im g d i 4
Outside radius ro ro 14.655 in
t 2
5. Let the maximum tangential stress (at r = ri) be equal to the yield stress and solve equation 10.23a for the yield
speed.
0.5
S y g
Yield speed yield
3 di 2 2
1 3 i
2 ro
2 d

8 2 3 2
yield 6376 rpm
yield
Factor of safety against overspeeding Nos Nos 4.0
avg
6. DESIGN SUMMARY
Inside radius ri 0.5 d i ri 1 in
Outside radius ro 14.655 in
Tickness t 0.800 in
P1038.xmcd
PROBLEM 10-39
Statement: Repeat Problem 10-38 for a peak load torque of 40500 in-lb and a torque vs shaft position
function of Tl = Tpeak (sin + sin 2).
3
Given: Yield strength of SAE 1020 CR steel S y 57 ksi 0.28 0.28 lbf in
Shaft diameter d i 2.000 in Peak torque Tpeak 40500 in lbf

1. Plot the load torque over one revolution of the shaft.
Tl( ) Tpeak ( sin( ) sin( 2 ) ) 0 0.1 2
5
1 10
4
5 10
Load Torque
T l( )
0
in lbf
4
5 10
5
1 10
0 60 120 180 240 300 360

deg
Shaft Position
The average load torque is Tavg 0 in lbf
The minimum shaft speed occurs at min 120 deg (and again at 240 deg)
2. Calculate the required change in kinetic energy by integrating the left-hand side of equation 10.18d.

max
Energy variation Ek Tl( ) d Ek 91125 in lbf

min
Ek 2
System moment Is Is 64.919 lbf in sec
of inertia 2
Cf avg
Let Im Is
4. As a design choice, let the disc thickness be t 0.6 d i , t 1.200 in (this value of t was repeatedly changed to
arrive at a value of 4.0 for Nos). Calculate the outside radius required for this thickness using equation 10.17d.
0.25
2 Im g d i 4

Outside radius ro ro 14.762 in
t 2
P1039.xmcd
speed.
0.5
S y g
Yield speed yield
3
2 1 3 di
2 2
d i

2 2 ro
8 3 2
yield 6330 rpm
yield
Factor of safety against overspeeding Nos Nos 4.0
avg
6. DESIGN SUMMARY
Inside radius ri 0.5 d i ri 1.000 in
Outside radius ro 14.762 in
Tickness t 1.200 in
P1039.xmcd
PROBLEM 10-40a
Statement: As an alternative to the keyed connection in Problem 10-6 determine the amount of diametral
interference needed to provide a suitable interference fit for the gear of Figure P10-3 using the
data of Problem 10-6 and row a in Table P10-1. The gear hub diameter is 3.50 in, its length along
the shaft is 2.00 in, and it has the same properties as the shaft material.
6
Material properties are: S ut 108 ksi, and S y 62 ksi.
Hub radius ro 0.5 d hub ro 1.75 in
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque capacity T=
Nd 2
2 ro
2
2 ro Nd Tp
L r E ro r
2 2
E ro r
2 2
2
4 r ro
Stress in shaft
Radial ri( ) p ( )
Stress in hub
2 2
ro r
2 2
ro r
Radial ro( ) p ( )
Mises stress.
0.5
E
3 ro r
4 4
von Mises 'o( )
2
4 r ro
5. There is no bending stress in the shaft at the gear, therefore Kt 1

Guess min
S y
Shaft Given Nd =
Kt ti ( )
Sy
Hub Given Nd =
Kt 'o( )
Minimum diametral interference max 0.0021 in

specifications are:
L r min E ro r
2 2
Tp 2
2 ro
Sy
Kt 'o max
PROBLEM 10-41
Statement: Figure P10-6 shows a shaft, running at 400 rpm, with two attached gears. The right-hand gear (2)
furnishes the load torque and the left-hand gear (1) furnishes an equal but opposite direction
input torque. The torque varies between 2.2 kN-m and 6.2 kN-m. Determine the minimum,
maximum, and average power transmitted by the shaft.
rad
sec
Minimum torque Tmin 2.2 kN m
Maximum torque Tmax 6.2 kN m
Tmax Tmin
Average torque Tavg Tavg 4 kN m
2
PROBLEM 10-42
Statement: Figure P10-6 shows a shaft, running at 750 rpm, with two attached gears. The right-hand gear (2)
furnishes the load torque and the left-hand gear (1) furnishes an equal but opposite direction
input torque. The forces on a gear act at the pitch diameter and have a radial (P in the figure)
and a tangential component (not shown). If the pitch diameter of gear 1 is 250 mm and the
tangential force varies between 15 kN and 60 kN, determine the minimum, maximum, and average
power transmitted by the shaft.
rad
sec
Pitch diameter d 250 mm
Minimum tangential force Fmin 15 kN
Maximum tangential force Fmax 60 kN

1. Determine the minimum and maximum torque.
Minimum torque Tmin 0.5 d Fmin Tmin 1.875 kN m
Maximum torque Tmax 0.5 d Fmax Tmax 7.5 kN m
Tmax Tmin
Average torque Tavg Tavg 5 kN m
2
PROBLEM 10-43
Statement: Determine the amount of diametral interference needed to provide a suitable interference fit
(instead of the keyed attachment shown) for the 5-in diameter by 1.5-in thick gear (1) of Figure
P10-6 using a shaft diameter of 1.5 in, such that the stresses in the hub and shaft will be safe and
the input torque of 1500 lbf-in can be transmitted through the interference fit. Both parts are SAE
4130 steel normalized @ 1650F.
6
Material properties are: S ut 97 ksi S y 63 ksi
Hub radius ro 0.5 d hub ro 2.5 in
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque capacity T=
Nd 2
2 ro
2
2 ro Nd Tp
L r E ro r
2 2
E ro r
2 2
2
4 r ro
Stress in shaft
Radial ri( ) p ( )
Stress in hub
2 2
ro r
2 2
ro r
Radial ro( ) p ( )
Mises stress.
0.5
E
3 ro r
4 4
von Mises 'o( )
2
4 r ro
5. There is very little bending stress in the shaft at the gear, therefore Kt 1
Guess min
S y
Shaft Given Nd =
Kt ti ( )
Sy
Hub Given Nd =
Kt 'o( )
Maximum diametral interference max 0.0018 in
specifications are:
L r min E ro r
2 2
Tp 2
2 ro
Sy
Kt 'o max
PROBLEM 10-44
Statement: Determine the amount of diametral interference needed to provide a suitable interference fit
(instead of the keyed attachment shown) for the 125-mm diameter by 75-mm thick gear (1) of
Figure P10-6 using a shaft diameter of 80 mm, such that the stresses in the hub and shaft will be
safe and the input torque of 170 N-m can be transmitted through the interference fit. Both parts
are SAE 4140 steel normalized @ 1650F.
Given: Gear hub diameter d hub 125 mm Shaft diameter: d shaft 80 mm

Gear hub length L 75 mm Young's modulus E 209 GPa
Peak shaft torque Tp 170 N m Poisson's ratio 0.28
Material properties are: S ut 1020 MPa S y 655 MPa
Hub radius ro 0.5 d hub ro 62.5 mm
Nominal interface radius r 0.5 d shaft r 40 mm
Shaft inside diameter ri 0 mm
L r min E ro r
2 2
Torque capacity T=
Nd 2
2 ro
2
2 ro Nd Tp
Solving for min min min 0.0039 mm
L r E ro r
2 2
Let the minimum diametral interference be min 0.004 mm
Note that it is not practical to specify a dimension in milimeters that has more than 3 decimal places.
E ro r
2 2
2
4 r ro
Stress in shaft
Radial ri( ) p ( )
Stress in hub
2 2
ro r
2 2
ro r
Radial ro( ) p ( )
Mises stress.
0.5
E
3 ro r
4 4
von Mises 'o( )
2
4 r ro
5. There is very little bending stress in the shaft at the gear, therefore Kt 1
Guess min
S y
Shaft Given Nd =
Kt ti ( )
smax Find ( ) smax 0.425 mm
Sy
Hub Given Nd =
Kt 'o( )
hmax Find( ) hmax 0.141 mm
Using the smaller of the two, max hmax max 0.140 mm
Minimum diametral interference min 0.004 mm
Maximum diametral interference max 0.140 mm
specifications are:
Tolerance on shaft or hub t 0.5 max min t 0.0680 mm
Hub bore diameter: Dmin d shaft Dmin 80.000 mm
Dmax Dmin t Dmax 80.068 mm
Shaft diameter: d max d shaft max d max 80.140 mm
d min d max t d min 80.072 mm
Maximum interference max d max Dmin max 0.140 mm
Minimum interference min d min Dmax min 0.004 mm
L r min E ro r
2 2
Tp 2
2 ro
Sy
Kt 'o max
PROBLEM 10-45
Statement: Table P10-2 shows the energy pulses delivered to (positive) and from (negative) a rotating system
along with the shaft angles at which the torque function crosses the average torque line in a
torque-time function. Using this data, determine the shaft angles at which minimum and maximum
shaft speed occur and the total change in energy from the shaft position at which maximum speed
occurs to the position at which minimum speed occurs.
Given: Range E
0 0 deg to 1 75 deg E1 1040 N m
1 75 deg to 2 195 deg E2 2260 N m
2 195 deg to 3 330 deg E3 2950 N m
3 330 deg to 4 360 deg E4 1740 N m
1. The minimum shaft speed occurs at the shaft angle at the end of the largest positive energy pulse. In this case,
it is at 2 195 deg.
2. The maximum shaft speed occurs at the shaft angle at the end of the largest negative energy pulse. In this case,
it is at 3 330 deg.
3. The total energy change is the algebraic difference between the accumulated energy between the maximum and
minimum shaft speeds.
E1 E1 E1 1040 N m
E2 E1 E2 E2 1220 N m
E3 E2 E3 E3 1730 N m
E4 E3 E4 E4 10 N m
Energy E3 E2 Energy 2950 N m
P1045.xmcd
PROBLEM 10-46
Statement: An electric motor-driven shaft that has a fluctuating load torque turns at an average speed of
1950 rpm. The energy pulses to (positive) and from (negative) the driven system are given in
Table P10-2. The shaft diameter is 50 mm. Design a suitable flywheel for this system that will
provide a coefficient of fluctuation of 0.05 and an overspeed safety factor of at least 5. The
flywheel is to be a hollow circular disc of constant thickness made from SAE 1040 CR steel.
3
Given: Yield strength of SAE 1040 CR steel S y 490 MPa 7800 kg m
Shaft diameter d i 50 mm 0.28
1. Calculate the change in kinetic energy from the data in Table P10-2.
The minimum shaft speed occurs at min 195 deg
The change in kinetic energy between the maximum and minimum speeds is Ek 2950 N m
Ek 2
System moment Is Is 1.415 kg m
of inertia 2
Cf avg
Let Im Is
3. As a design choice, let the disc thickness be t 0.4 d i , t 20.0 mm (this value of t was repeatedly changed to
arrive at a value of 5.0 for Nos). Calculate the outside radius required for this thickness using equation 10.17d.
0.25
2 Im d i 4
Outside radius ro ro 276 mm
t 2
speed.
0.5
Sy
Yield speed yield
3 2 2
d i 2 1 3 di
2 2 ro 3 2
8
yield 9580 rpm
yield
Factor of safety against overspeeding Nos Nos 5
avg
5. DESIGN SUMMARY
Inside radius ri 0.5 d i ri 25 mm

Outside radius ro 276 mm Tickness t 20 mm
P1046.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-1
Statement: A 20-deg pressure angle, 27-tooth spur gear has a diametral pitch of 5. Find the pitch diameter,
addendum, dedendum, outside diameter, and circular pitch.
1
Given: Diametral pitch p d 5 in Number of teeth N 27
Pressure angle 20 deg
N
Pitch diameter d d 5.400 in
pd
1.0
Addendum a a 0.200 in
pd
1.25
Dedendum b b 0.250 in
pd
Outside diameter Do d 2 a Do 5.800 in

Circular pitch p c p c 0.628 in
pd
PROBLEM 12-2
1
Given: Diametral pitch p d 8 in Number of teeth N 43
N
pd
1.0
pd
1.25
pd

pd
PROBLEM 12-3
Statement: A 57-tooth spur gear is in mesh with a 23-tooth pinion. For the diametral pitch and pressure angle
given below, find the contact ratio.
Given: Tooth numbers:

1
pinion Np 23 Diametral pitch p d 6 in
gear Ng 57 Pressure angle 25 deg

pd
Base pitch p b p c cos( ) p b 0.475 in
Pinion:
Np
Pitch dia d p d p 3.833 in
pd
Pitch rad rp 0.5 d p rp 1.917 in
Gear:
Ng
Pitch dia d g d g 9.500 in
pd
Pitch rad rg 0.5 d g rg 4.750 in
1.0
pd
Np Ng
Center distance C C 6.667 in
2 pd
Length of action
Z rp a 2 rp cos( ) 2 rg a 2 rg cos( ) 2 C sin( )

Z 0.708 in
Z
Contact ratio mp mp 1.491
pb
PROBLEM 12-4
Statement: A 78-tooth spur gear is in mesh with a 27-tooth pinion. For the diametral pitch and pressure angle
given below, find the contact ratio.

1
pinion Np 27 Diametral pitch p d 6 in
gear Ng 78 Pressure angle 20 deg

pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action

Z 0.849 in
Z
pb
MACHINE DESIGN - An 12-5-1
PROBLEM 12-5
Statement: What will the pressure angle be if the center distance of the spur gearset in Problem 12-3 is
increased by 5%?
Given: Tooth numbers: new Base Circle
pinion Np 23 Old Pitch Circle
New Pitch Circle
gear Ng 57
1
Diametral pitch p d 6 in fc rp
rbp
C + C
Solution: See Figure 12-5 and Mathcad fc r g rbg
file P1205.
1. Define the factor by which the center
distance changes.
C C
Let = fc
C
Dividing numerator and denominator of the left
side by C,
FIGURE 12-5
C
fc = 1 Diagram Showing Center Change for Problem 12-5
C
2. In this case, fc 1 0.05 fc 1.05

3. Determine the pitch diameter and pitch radius of the pinion.
Np
Pitch diameter d p d p 3.833 in
pd
Pitch radius rp 0.5 d p rp 1.917 in
4. When the centers are moved apart the base circle diameters don't change but new pitch circle diameters are
defined by the intersection of the new line of action, which is always tangent to the two base circles, with the
line of centers. The new pitch radii are proportional to fc. Thus, from Figure 12-5, the new pressure angle is
rbp
cos new =
fc rp
Substituting rp cos( ) for rbp and solving for

rp cos( )
new acos new 30.33 deg
fc rp
new,
MACHINE DESIGN - An 12-6-1
PROBLEM 12-6
increased by 7%?
Given: Tooth numbers: new Base Circle
pinion Np 27 Old Pitch Circle
New Pitch Circle
gear Ng 78
1
Diametral pitch p d 6 in fc rp
rbp
C + C
Solution: See Figure 12-6 and Mathcad fc r g rbg
file P1206.
distance changes.
C C
Let = fc
C
side by C,
FIGURE 12-6
C
fc = 1 Diagram Showing Center Change for Problem 12-6
C

3. Determine the pitch diameter and pitch radius of the pinion.
Np
Pitch diameter d p d p 4.500 in
pd
Pitch radius rp 0.5 d p rp 2.250 in
line of centers. The new pitch radii are proportional to fc. Thus, from Figure 12-5, the new pressure angle is
rbp
cos new =
fc rp

rp cos( )
fc rp
new,
PROBLEM 12-7
Statement: If the spur gearsets in Problems 12-3 and 12-4 are compounded as shown in Figure 12-14, what wil
the overall train ratio be?
Given: Tooth numbers N2 57 N3 23
N4 78 N5 27
1. Using equation 12.9b and assuming that gears 2 and 4 are the driver gears, the train (velocity) ratio is
N2 N4
mv mv 7.159
N3 N5
2. On the other hand, if gears 3 and 5 are the driver gears then the train ratio is
N3 N5
mv mv 0.1397
N2 N4
PROBLEM 12-8
hollow, steel shaft with S ut = 400 MPa. Design a 2.5:1 reduction spur gearset to drive this roll
shaft to obtain a minimum dynamic safety factor of 2 for 10-year life if the roll turns at 50 rpm
with 1.2 hp absorbed.
Units: yr 2080 hr
Given: Bending factor of safety Nfb 2 Life (years) Life 10 yr
Surface factor of safety Nfs 2 Gear speed n g 50 rpm
Power to be transmitted H 1.2 hp Gear ratio mg 2.5
Assumptions: 1. If both pinion and gear are the same material, it will only be necessary to determine the pinion
size as it will be governing for the set.
2. If the gears are not surface hardened, it will only be necessary to design to the surface
requirement as it will be governing for both bending and surface stresses.

Design Choices:
Pressure angle 25 deg AGMA Quality level Qv 7
Number of pinion teeth Np 26 Reliability R 0.99
Material: AGMA Grade 2 steel for both pinion and gear, through hardened to
HB 350 S ac ( 27000 364 HB) psi S ac 154400 psi
1. Determine the number of gear teeth, the pinion speed, and the cycle life.
Number of gear teeth Ng Np mg Ng 65
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n p n g mg n p 125 rpm
np 8
Cycle life: N Life N 1.56 10
2
2. Determine the surface geometry factor, I.
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1368
2 p g
3. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitch-line velocity, and transmitted load in terms of the unknown
diametral pitch, pd. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Np Ng
Pitch diameter of pinion (in) d p p d d g p d
pd pd
d p p d n p
Pitch-line velocity (fpm) Vt p d
2
Wt p d
H
Transmitted load (lbf)
Vt p d
4. Set the application factor, Ca Ca 1
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
5. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, C B 0.731
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 65.062
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
6. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Cm (Assume 0 < F < 2 in Cm 1.6

0.5
7. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 (steel on steel). Cp 2300 psi
C a W t p d C m
8. The surface stress equation for the pinion is cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I
9. Determine the endurance strength of the pinion.

0.056
Life factor CL 2.466 N CL 0.857
Reliability CR 0.7 0.15 log( 1 R) CR 1
Temperature factor CT 1
Material surface strength (psi)
S ac 154400 psi
Grade 2, 350 HB
S ac CL
Endurance strength S fcp S fcp 132381 psi
CT CR
10. Write the design equations using the range of face-width to diametral-pitch ratio given in the text, and the
bending stress equation, solved for the unknown face width.
2
Limits and safety factor FU p d
Sfc
FL p d
16 8
Nfc =
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Face width F p d Nfs
Cv p d d p p d I S fcp
6 6.5 16
11. Plot F(P) vs p over the range p d
d in in in
3
12. From the graph, choose a standard value of p d
from Table 12-2.
F pd
1 in
p d 10 in 2

FL pd
13. The calculated value of F is
in
F p d 1.393 in

FU pd 1
14. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of a in
common fractional value.
F 1.375 in
0
6 8 10 12 14 16
15. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are:
pd in
d p p d 2.600 in d g p d 6.500 in FIGURE 12-8

Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion
(surface) in Problem 12-8
Vt p d 85 Wt p d 465 lbf cp p d F 94207 psi

ft
min
16. There is a wide range of choice for the number of teeth on the pinion. The total weight of the gears goes down
very slightly with increasing pinion tooth number. The choice of Np 26 was somewhat arbitrary but was
arrived at after trying values from 18 to 26.
PROBLEM 12-9
Statement: Design a two-stage compound spur gear train for an overall ratio of approximately 47:1. Specify
tooth numbers for each gear in the train.
Given: Approximate ratio mG 47 Number of stages n 2
Assumptions: The gears will be cut with a hob and the pressure angle will be 25 deg

1
n
1. For equal stages, the stage ratio is mGs mG mGs 6.856
2. The minimum number of teeth that we can have without interference on a 25-deg gear cut with a hob is 14. Try
pinions with 14, 15, 16, etc. teeth to see if the mating gear will have close to an integral number of teeth.
14 mGs 95.979
15 mGs 102.835
16 mGs 109.69
n
mG 96 mG 47.02
3. The first trial is very close to an integer so try 96 teeth: 14

4. We can get slightly closer by using two 14-tooth pinions with 95 and 97-tooth gears
95 97
mG mG 47.015
14 14
5. However, it may be harder to find the 97-tooth gear and, it may be less expensive to have two gears with the
same number of teeth than to have different numbers of teeth.
PROBLEM 12-10
Statement: Design a three-stage compound spur gear train for an overall ratio of approximately 656:1. Specify
Given: Gear ratio mG 656 Number of stages s 3

1
s
1. The average stage ratio is ravg mG ravg 8.689
2. If the minimum number of teeth is (20 deg pa) Nmin 18

then the number of teeth on the driven gear for each stage is
NG1 floor ravg Nmin NG1 156
or NG2 ceil ravg Nmin NG2 157
3. But, the prime factors of 656 are 2 4 and 41. This suggests that one of the gears have a number of teeth that is a
multiple of 41, say 164
164
18.875 Let N2 18 N3 164
ravg
N2
Then, the remaing 2-stage ratio is mG2 mG mG2 72
N3
N5 N7
Thus, = 72 if N4 18 and N6 18
N4 N6
5 6
then N5 N7 = 72 18 18 = 2 3
4 2 1 4
Try N5 2 3 N7 2 3 then N5 N7 23328
Summarizing, N2 18 N3 164
N4 18 N5 144
N6 18 N7 162
4. Since the driven gears all have less than 180 teeth, no stage ratio is greater than 10.
5. Checking the overall gear ratio
N 3 N 5 N 7
mG mG 656.00
N 2 N 4 N 6
PROBLEM 12-11
Statement: An epicycle spur gear train as shown in Figure 12-16 has a sun gear of 33 teeth and a planet gear
of 21 teeth. Find the required number of teeth in the ring gear and determine the ratio between
the arm and the sun gear if the ring gear is held stationary.
Given: Sun tooth number Ns 33 Arm speed a 1 rpm

Planet tooth number Np 21 Ring speed r 0 rpm

1. From Figure 12-16 we see that the diameter of the ring gear is equal to the sum of the diameter of the sun gear
and two times the diameter of the planet gear. Since sun, planets, and ring gear must have the same diametral
pitch,
Number of teeth on ring: Nr Ns 2 Np Nr 75
2. Choose the sun gear as the first gear and the ring gear as the last. Then, write equation (12.11c).
ra r a Ns
= =
sa s a Nr
Nr a Ns a Nr r
Solving for the sun speed, s s 3.273 rpm
Ns
a
3. The ratio between the arm and sun gear is 0.306
s
PROBLEM 12-12
the arm and the ring gear if the sun gear is held stationary.

Planet tooth number Np 31 Sun speed s 0 rpm

pitch,
ra r a Ns
= =
sa s a Nr
Nr a Ns a Ns s
Solving for the ring speed, r r 1.271 rpm
Nr
a
3. The ratio between the arm and ring gear is 0.787
r
PROBLEM 12-13
the sun and the ring gear if the arm is held stationary.

Planet tooth number Np 31 Sun speed s 1 rpm
pitch,
ra r a Ns
= =
sa s a Nr
Nr a Ns a Ns s
Solving for the ring speed, r r 0.271 rpm
Nr
s
3. The ratio between the sun and ring gear is 3.696
r
PROBLEM 12-14
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-3 transmits 125 HP at 1000 pinion rpm, find the torque on each shaft.

pinion Np 23 Pinion speed p 1000 rpm
gear Ng 57 Transmitted power P 125 hp
Assumptions: There is no loss of power in the gear mesh (100% efficiency).

P
1. For the pinion shaft Tp Tp 7878 in lbf
p
Tp 656.5 ft lbf
2. The gear shaft will rotate at a lower speed, which is determined by the gear ratio. (The speed will be
decreased in proportion to the ratio and the torque will be increased by the reciprocal of the ratio).
Np
3. For the gear shaft g p g 403.509 rpm
Ng
P
Tg Tg 19524 in lbf
g
Tg 1627 ft lbf
4. We could have calculated the torque on the gear shaft directly without finding the gear shaft speed,
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 19524 in lbf
Np
Tg 1627 ft lbf
PROBLEM 12-15
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-4 transmits 33 kW at 1600 pinion rpm, find the torque on each shaft.

pinion Np 27 Pinion speed p 1600 rpm
gear Ng 78 Transmitted power P 33 kW

P
1. For the pinion shaft Tp Tp 197 N m
p
2. The gear shaft will rotate at a lower speed, which is determined by the gear ratio. (The speed will be decreased i
proportion to the ratio and the torque will be increased by the reciprocal of the ratio).
Np
Ng
P
Tg Tg 569 N m
g
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 569 N m
Np
PROBLEM 12-16
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-14 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2 assuming a steady
torque, 25 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, quality index of 9, an AISI 4140 steel pinion, and a
class 40 cast iron gear.
Given: Factor of safety Nfb 2 Number of gear teeth Ng 57

Power to be transmitted (hp) H 125 hp Reliability R 0.99
Rotational speed of pinion n 1000 rpm AGMA Quality level Qv 9
7
Number of pinion teeth Np 23 Life (cycles) N 10

Pinion
1. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Table 12-13) Jp 0.42
Np
Pitch diameter of pinion (in) d p d
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
3. Set the application factor, Ka Ka 1

B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
4. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, K B 0.52
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
5. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Km (Assume 2 < F < 6 in) Km 1.7
Ka Wt p d p d Km
6. The bending stress equation for the pinion is bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
Life factor KL 1.6831 N KL 1
Reliability KR 0.7 0.15 log( 1 R) KR 1
Temperature factor KT 1
Material bending strength (psi)
S atp 40000 psi
AISI 4140 Nitrided steel
S atp KL
Endurance strength S fbp S fbp 40001 psi
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Ka Wt p d p d Km Nfb
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 6
9. Plot F(P) vs. p over the range p d
d in in in
4

from Table 12-2.
F pd
1 3
p d 4 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 2.743 in
in

FU pd
12. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of a
in 1
F 2.750 in
13. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 0
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
d p d 5.750 in Kv p d 0.809 pd in
Vt p d 1505 Wt p d 2740 lbf

ft FIGURE 12-16A
min Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion in
Problem 12-16
bp p d F 19952 psi
The assumption made in step 5 is correct so no further iteration is required.
Gear
14. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Table 12-13) Jg 0.49
Ka Wt p d p d Km
15. The bending stress equation for the gear is bg p d F
Kv p d F Jg

S atg 13000 psi
Class 40 cast iron
S atg KL
Endurance strength S fbg S fbg 13000 psi
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 6
d in in in

from Table 12-2. 6
1
p d 3 in

F pd
4.5
20. The calculated value of F is in
F p d 4.178 in
FL pd
3
FU pd
F 4.250 in in 1.5
22. Then, the parameters that depend on P and F are:
d p d 7.667 in Kv p d 0.788 0
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
pd in
ft
min FIGURE 12-16B
Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear in
bg p d F 6391 psi Problem 12-16
23. The gear dimensions are larger (smaller diametral pitch means bigger teeth) than for the pinion. This means
that we will accept the gear requirements for the pinion, thus, for the set
1
Diametral pitch p d 3 in
Face width F 4.250 in

24. Determine the realized factor of safety for the gear using the above values for F and p d.
S fbg
Gear factor of safety Nfbg Nfbg 2.0
bg p d F
25. Check the factor of safety on the pinion:

S fbp
Pinion factor of safety Nfbp Nfbp 5.4
bp p d F
PROBLEM 12-17
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-15 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.5 assuming a
steady torque, 20 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, quality index of 11, an AISI 4340 steel
pinion, and an A-7-d nodular iron gear.
Given: Factor of safety Nfb 2.5 Number of gear teeth Ng 78

Power to be transmitted (hp) H 33 kW Reliability R 0.99
7

Pinion
diametral pitch, p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Np
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 10
d in in in
4

from Table 12-2.
F pd
1 3
p d 6 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 1.318 in
in

FU pd
in 1
F 1.375 in
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
d p d 4.500 in Kv p d 0.908 pd in

ft FIGURE 12-17A
Problem 12-17
bp p d F 16103 psi
Gear
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

S atg 34000 psi
A-7-d nodular iron
S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 10
d in in in

from Table 12-2. 6
1
p d 6 in

F pd
4.5
F p d 1.434 in
FL pd
3
FU pd
F 1.500 in in 1.5
d p d 4.500 in Kv p d 0.908 0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
pd in
ft
min FIGURE 12-17B
23. The gear dimensions are larger than those for the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements
for the pinion, thus, for the set
1

S fbg
bg p d F

S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 12-18
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-14 for a surface factor of safety of at least 2 assuming a steady
torque, 25 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, quality index of 9, an AISI 4140 steel pinion, and
a class 40 cast iron gear.
Given: Factor of safety Nfs 2 Number of gear teeth Ng 57

7
Pinion
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1365
2 p g
Np
Pitch diameter of pinion (in) d p p d
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. (Steel on cast-iron) Cp 2100 psi
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
Life factor CL 2.466 N CL 1

S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
surface stress equation, solved for the unknown face width.
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.5 6
d in in in
10. From the graph, choose a standard value of p d 4

from Table 12-2.
1 F pd
p d 4 in 3
in
FL pd
F p d 2.379 in in 2

FU pd
common fractional value. in 1
F 2.375 in
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
d p p d 5.750 in Cv p d 0.809
pd in

ft
FIGURE 12-18A
cp p d F 116767 psi Problem 12-18
Gear
Ng
14. Write the equation for the gear pitch diameter d g p d
pd
C a W t p d C m
15. The surface stress equation for the gear is cg p d F Cp
Cv p d F d g p d I

Material bending strength (psi) S acg 80000 psi
Class 40 cast iron
Hp
Hardness factor Hp 230 Hg 200 1.2
Hg
From equation 12.26, A 0

Ng
Gear ratio mg mg 2.478
Np
Hardness ratio factor CH 1 A mg 1 CH 1
S acg CL CH
Endurance strength S fcg S fcg 79999 psi
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Cv p d d g p d I S fcg
1 1.5 6
d in in in
6

from Table 12-2.
F pd
1 4.5
p d 4 in in
20. The calculated value of F is FL pd

3
F p d 4.083 in
in
FU pd
in 1.5
F 4.125 in
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
d g p d 14.250 in Cv p d 0.809 pd in
FIGURE 12-18B
ft
min Problem 12-18
cg p d F 56282 psi
23. The gear face width is larger than for the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements for the
pinion thus, for the set
1

2
Sfcg
Gear factor of safety Nfsg p F Nfsg 2.0
cg d
2
Sfcp
Pinion factor of safety Nfsp Nfsp 3.5
cp pd F
PROBLEM 12-19
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-15 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.2 assuming a
Given: Factor of safety Nfs 1.2 Number of gear teeth Ng 78

7
Pinion
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1194
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. (Steel on nodular-iron) Cp 2160 psi
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056

S acp 162000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.5 16
d in in in
10. From the graph, choose a standard value of p d 2

from Table 12-2.
1 F pd
p d 10 in 1.5
in
FL pd
F p d 1.478 in in 1

FU pd
common fractional value. in 0.5
F 1.500 in
6 8 10 12 14 16
d p p d 2.700 in Cv p d 0.925
pd in

ft
FIGURE 12-19A
cp p d F 146808 psi Problem 12-19
Gear
Ng
pd
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d g p d I

Material bending strength (psi) S acg 97000 psi
A-7-d nodular iron
Hp
Hg

Ng
Np
S acg CL CH
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.5 16
d in in in
3

from Table 12-2.
F pd
1
p d 10 in in
2
20. The calculated value of F is FL pd
F p d 1.427 in
in

FU pd 1
common fractional value. in
F 1.500 in
6 8 10 12 14 16
d g p d 7.800 in Cv p d 0.925 pd in
FIGURE 12-19B
ft
min Problem 12-19
cg p d F 86374 psi
23. The gear face width is the same as that for the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements for
the set
1

2
Sfcg
cg d
2
Sfcp
cp pd F
PROBLEM 12-20
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-11 transmits 83 kW at 1200 arm rpm, find the torque on each shaft.
Given: Sun tooth number Ns 33 Transmitted power P 83 kW

Planet tooth number Np 21 Arm speed a 1200 rpm
Ring gear speed r 0 rpm
1. Determine the number of teeth on the ring: Nr Ns 2 Np Nr 75
ra r a Ns
= =
sa s a Nr
Nr a Ns a Nr r
Solving for the planet speed, s s 3927 rpm
Ns
3. Calculate the torque on the sun and arm shafts.

P
Arm shaft Ta Ta 660 N m
a
P
Sun shaft Ts Ts 202 N m
s
PROBLEM 12-21
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-12 transmits 39 HP at 2600 arm rpm, find the torque on each shaft.
Given: Tooth numbers: sun Ns 23 planet Np 31

Arm speed a 2600 rpm Sun speed s 0 rpm
Transmitted power P 39 hp

P
1. For the arm shaft Ta Ta 945 in lbf
a
2. The ring gear will rotate at a higher speed, which is determined by the gear ratio.
3. For the ring gear (see Problem 12-12)
Nr a Ns a Ns s
r r 3303.529 rpm
Nr
P
Tr Tr 744 in lbf
r
PROBLEM 12-22
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-13 transmits 23 kW at 4800 sun rpm, find the torque on each shaft.

sun Ns 23 Arm speed a 0 rpm
planet Np 31 Sun speed s 4800 rpm
Transmitted power P 23 kW

P
1. For the sun shaft Ts Ts 45.8 N m
s
2. The ring gear will rotate at a lower speed, which is determined by the gear ratio.
3. For the ring gear (see Problem 12-13)
Nr a Ns a Ns s
r r 1298.8 rpm
Nr
P
Tr Tr 169 N m
r
PROBLEM 12-23
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-20 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.8 assuming a
pinion, and a class 40 cast iron gear.

Power to be transmitted H 83 kW Reliability R 0.99
7

Pinion
Np Ng
Pitch diameter of pinion and gear (in) d p p d d g p d
pd pd
d g p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 6
d in in in
6

from Table 12-2. 5
F pd
1
p d 4 in in
4
FL pd
3
F p d 2.196 in
in

FU pd 2
1
F 2.375 in
2 3 4 5 6
d p p d 5.250 in Kv p d 0.768 pd in

ft FIGURE 12-23A
Problem 12-23
bp p d F 13212 psi
Gear
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

S atg 13000 psi
Class 40 cast iron
S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.25 6
d in in in

from Table 12-2. 6
1
p d 3 in

F pd
5
F p d 3.486 in
FL pd
4
FU pd
F 3.500 in in 3
d g p d 11.000 in Kv p d 0.744 2
2 3 4
pd in
ft
min FIGURE 12-23B
23. The gear dimensions are larger (smaller diametral pitch means bigger teeth) than for the pinion. This means that
we will accept the gear requirements for the pinion, thus, for the set
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 12-24
Statement: Size the spur gears in Problem 12-21 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.4 assuming a
Given: Factor of safety Nfb 2.4

Number of pinion (sun) teeth Np 23 AGMA Quality level Qv 11
7
Number of gear (planet) teeth Ng 31 Life (cycles) N 10

Take the sun as the pinion and the planet as the gear, which is also an idler. With a stationary sun, the planet
gear will have one point (where it meshes with the sun) that has an instantaneous zero velocity. All other
points on the planet will have a linear velocity that is proportional to its distance from this instant center. The
point that meshes with the ring gear has maximum velocity. The pitchline velocity at the ring gear is a
function of the tooth numbers and the diametral pitch of the set. But the absolute planet velocity depends
only on the tooth numbers and the arm velocity. For the data of Problem 12-21, the absolute planet (gear)
rotational velocity is
For a 2600 rpm r 3303.53 rpm
Np 2 Ng
g r g 9058.1 rpm
Ng
The sun (pinion) is stationary and, therefore, has a zero pitchline velocity. However, the planet (gear) mesh
point rotates about the pitch circle of the sun at the rotational velocity of the arm. Therefore, take the pinion
pitchline velocity to be
Np
Vtp = rp a = a
2 pd
The maximum pitchline velocity of the planet (gear) is at the point where it meshes with the ring gear, which is
also the pitchline velocity of the ring gear. Thus, for the gear, the pitchline velocity is
Np 2 Ng
Vtg = rr r = r
2 pd
The torques on the arm and ring were determined in Problem 12-21 to be Ta 945.38 in lbf and
Tr 744.05 in lbf . Load analysis of the gearset reveals that the transmitted load on the sun, planet, and ring
gear teeth is
2 p d Tr
Wt =
Np 2 Ng
Pinion
Np
pd
Np
Pitch-line velocity (fpm) Vtp p d a
2 pd
2 p d Tr
Transmitted load (lbf) Wt p d
Np 2 Ng
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Kvp p d A

A Vtp pd
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kvp p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kvp p d Jp S fbp
10 11.5 20
d in in in
10. From the graph, choose a standard value of p d from Table 12-2.
1
p d 14 in 2

F pd
F p d 0.997 in 1.5
in
FL pd
common fractional value. 1
in
F 1.000 in

FU pd
in 0.5
d p d 1.643 in Kvp p d 0.925
Vtp p d 1118 Wt p d 245 lbf

ft
0
min 10 12 14 16 18 20
pd in
bp p d F 17449 psi
FIGURE 12-24A
The assumption made in step 5 is correct so no Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion in
further iteration is required. Problem 12-24
Gear
15. Write the equations for pitch diameter and pitchline velocity for the gear in terms of the unknown diametral pitc
p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Ng
Pitch diameter of pinion (in) dg p d
pd
Np Ng
Pitchline velocity (fpm) Vtg p d r
2 pd
B
Kvg p d A
16. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, K
A Vtg pd
min
v

ft
17. Account for the fact that the gear is an idler by setting the idler factor KI 1.42
Ka Wt p d p d Km KI
Kvg p d F Jg

A-7-d nodular iron S atg 34000 psi
S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Ka Wt p d p d Km KI Nfb
Face width F p d
Kvg p d Jg S fbg
6 6.5 16
17. Plot F(P) vs. p d over the range p d
in in in
2
18. From the graph, choose a standard value of
p d from Table 12-2. F pd
1.5
1 in
p d 12 in

FL pd
19. The calculated value of F is 1
in
F p d 1.244 in
FU pd
20. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of a in 0.5
F 1.250 in
0
6 8 10 12 14 16
pd in
FIGURE 12-24B
dg p d 2.583 in Kvg p d 0.879 Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear in
Problem 12-24
Vtg p d 3892 Wt p d 210 lbf

ft
min
bg p d F 14095 psi
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 12-25
Statement: Size the spur gears in problem 12-20 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.7 assuming a
Given: Factor of safety Nfs 1.7 Number of gear teeth Ng 33

Rotational speed of pinion n g 1200 rpm AGMA Quality level Qv 9
7
Pinion
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1170
2 p g
2. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitchline velocity, and transmitted load in terms of the unknown
Np Ng
Pitch diameters of pinion and gear (in) d p p d d g p d
pd pd
d g p d n g
pitchline velocity (fpm) Vt p d
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. (Steel on cast iron). Cp 2100 psi
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.5 6
10. Plot F(P) vs. p d over the p d
range in in in
4

p d from Table 12-2.
F pd
3
in
1
p d 5 in

FL pd
in
F p d 2.149 in
FU pd
in 1
F 2.250 in 0
2 3 4 5 6
14. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: pd in
FIGURE 12-25A
d p p d 4.200 in Cv p d 0.785
Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion in
Problem 12-25

ft
min
cp p d F 123671 psi
Gear
Ng
pd
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d g p d I

Class 40 cast iron S acg 80000 psi
Hp
Hg
Ng
Np
S acg CL CH
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.5 6
range in in in
6
F pd
4.5
1 in
p d 4 in

FL pd
in
F p d 3.807 in
FU pd
F 4.000 in
0
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
pd in
FIGURE 12-25B
d g p d 8.250 in Cv p d 0.768 Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear in
Problem 12-25
Vt p d 2592 Wt p d 1417 lbf cg p d F 59858 psi

ft
min
24. The gear dimensions are larger (smaller diametral pitch means bigger teeth) than for the pinion. This means
that we will accept the gear requirements for the pinion, thus for the set
1

2
Sfcg
cg d
2
Sfcp
cp pd F
PROBLEM 12-26
Statement: Size the spur gears in Problem 12-21 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.3 assuming a
Given: Factor of safety Nfs 1.3 Pressure angle 20 deg

Number of pinion (sun) teeth Np 23 AGMA Quality level Qv 11
7
Number of gear (planet) teeth Ng 31 Life (cycles) N 10

Take the sun as the pinion and the planet as the gear, which is also an idler. With a stationary sun, the planet
gear will have one point (where it meshes with the sun) that has an instantaneous zero velocity. All other
points on the planet will have a linear velocity that is proportional to its distance from this instant center. The
point that meshes with the ring gear has maximum velocity. The pitchline velocity at the ring gear is a
function of the tooth numbers and the diametral pitch of the set. But the absolute planet velocity depends
only on the tooth numbers and the arm velocity. For the data of Problem 12-21, the absolute planet (gear)
rotational velocity is
For a 2600 rpm r 3303.53 rpm
Np 2 Ng
g r g 9058.1 rpm
Ng
The sun (pinion) is stationary and, therefore, has a zero pitchline velocity. However, the planet (gear) mesh
point rotates about the pitch circle of the sun at the rotational velocity of the arm. Therefore, take the pinion
pitchline velocity to be
Np
Vtp = rp a = a
2 pd
The maximum pitchline velocity of the planet (gear) is at the point where it meshes with the ring gear, which is
also the pitchline velocity of the ring gear. Thus, for the gear, the pitchline velocity is
Np 2 Ng
Vtg = rr r = r
2 pd
The torques on the arm and ring were determined in Problem 12-21 to be Ta 945.38 in lbf and
Tr 744.05 in lbf . Load analysis of the gearset reveals that the transmitted load on the sun, planet, and ring
gear teeth is
2 p d Tr
Wt =
Np 2 Ng
Pinion
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.0923
2 p g
2. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitchline velocity, and transmitted load in terms of the unknown diametr
pitch, p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Np
pd
Np
pitchline velocity (fpm) Vtp p d a
2 pd
2 p d Tr
Np 2 Ng
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Cvp p d A

A Vtp pd
min

ft
5. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Cm (Assume 0 < F < 2 in) Cm 1.6
0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. Cp 2100 psi
Ca Wt p d Cm
Cvp p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 162000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Cvp p d d p p d I S fcp
6 6.5 16
d in in in
11. From the graph, choose a standard value of 2

p d 14 in
1
F pd
1.5
in

FL pd
F p d 0.611 in 1
in
FU pd
in 0.5
F 0.625 in

6 8 10 12 14 16
d p p d 1.643 in Cvp p d 0.925 pd in
FIGURE 12-26A
Vtp p d 1118 Wt p d 245 lbf
ft
Problem 12-26
min
cp p d F 140460 psi

Gear
15. Write the equations for pitch diameter and pitchline velocity for the gear in terms of the unknown diametral pitc
p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Ng
Pitch diameter of pinion (in) d g p d
pd
Np Ng
pitchline velocity (fpm) Vtg p d r
2 pd
B
Cvg p d
A
16. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, C
A Vtg pd
min
v

ft
Ca Wt p d Cm
Cvg p d F d g p d I
A-7-d nodular iron S acg 97000 psi
Hp
Hg
Ng
Np
S acg CL CH
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Cvg p d d g p d I S fcg
6 6.5 16
range in in in

1
F pd 2.5
p d 12 in
in
2
FL pd
F p d 0.978 in in 1.5

FU pd 1
0.5
F 1.000 in
24. Then, the parameters that depend on P and F are: 0

6 8 10 12 14 16
d g p d 2.583 in Cvg p d 0.879 pd in
Vtg p d 3892 Wt p d 210 lbf

ft FIGURE 12-26B
min Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear in
Problem 12-26
cg p d F 84140 psi
25. The gear dimensions are larger than that for the pinion. Thus, for the set
1
2
Sfcg
cg d
2
Sfcp
cp pd F
PROBLEM 12-27
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-10 transmits 190 kW at 1800 input pinion rpm, find the torque on each
of the four shafts.
Given: Transmitted power P 190 kW Input speed p1 1800 rpm
Assumptions: Tooth numbers:

Stage 1 Np1 18 Ng1 164
1. Confirm that the gear ratio is correct.
Ng1 Ng2 Ng3

mG mG 656.000
Np1 Np2 Np3
2. Calculate the gear speeds.
Np1
Stage 1 p1 1800 rpm g1 p1 g1 197.561 rpm
Ng1
Np2
Stage 2 p2 g1 g2 p2 g2 24.695 rpm
Ng2
Np3
Stage 3 p3 g2 g3 p3 g3 2.744 rpm
Ng3
3. Calculate the shaft torque.

P
Shaft 1 T1 T1 1008 N m Input
p1
P
Shaft 2 T2 T2 9184 N m
g1
P
Shaft 3 T3 T3 73471 N m
g2
P
Shaft 4 T4 T4 661236 N m Output
g3
PROBLEM 12-28
Statement: Size the first-stage spur gears in problem 12-27 for a bending factor of safety of at least 3.2 and
a surface factor of safety of at least 1.7 assuming a steady torque, 25 deg pressure angle, full
depth teeth, Qv = 8, and AISI 4140 steel for all gears.
Given: Pressure angle 25 deg

Bending factor of safety Nfb 3.2 Reliability R 0.99
Surface factor of safety Nfs 1.7 AGMA Quality level Qv 8
7
Power to be transmitted (hp) H 190 kW Life (cycles) N 10
Number of pinion teeth Np 18 Number of gear teeth Ng 164
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 1800 rpm
Assumptions: Since both pinion and gear from each stage are the same material, it will only be necessary to
determine the pinion size as it will be governing for the set.
Stage 1 Pinion - Bending

Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
4. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, Kv
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
6. The bending stress equation for the pinion is
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323

S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.1 5
d in in in

p d 3 in
1
F pd
6
in

FL pd
F p d 4.546 in 4
in
12. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of
FU pd
a common fractional value.
in 2
F 4.500 in

2 2.5 3 3.5 4
pd in
d p p d 6.000 in d g p d 54.667 in
FIGURE 12-28A
ft Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 1
min Pinion (bending) in Problem 12-28
bp p d F 12627 psi Kv p d 0.702
Stage 1 Pinion - Surface Fatigue

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1726
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
4. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, Cv
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Cv p d
B 0.63 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. (Steel on steel). Cp 2300 psi
7. The surface stress equation for the pinion is
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.1 6
d in in in
6

F pd
1
p d 4 in in
4
FL pd
F p d 3.933 in
in

FU pd 2
a common fractional value. in
F 4.000 in
0
14. The bending requirement is governing in 2 3 4 5 6
this case. The diametral pitch and face pd in
width for the stage 2 gearset are:
FIGURE 12-28B
1
p d 3 in F 4.500 in Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 1
Pinion (surface) in Problem 12-28
PROBLEM 12-29
Statement: Size the second-stage spur gears in problem 12-27 for a bending factor of safety of at least 3.2
and a surface factor of safety of at least 1.7 assuming a steady torque, 25 deg pressure angle,
full depth teeth, quality index of 8, and AISI 4140 steel for all gears.

7
Power to be transmitted H 190 kW Life (cycles) N 10
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 197.561 rpm
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp
0.0323

S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.1 3
d in in in

20
1
p d 1.5 in

F pd
in
F p d 9.313 in

FL pd
12. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of 10
in

FU pd
F 9.375 in
in 5
0
d p p d 12.000 in d g p d 96.000 in 1 1.5 2 2.5
pd in

ft
FIGURE 12-29A
min Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 2
bp p d F 12417 psi Kv p d 0.827 Pinion (bending) in Problem 12-29

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1702
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Cv p d
B 0.63 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
9. Write the design equations using the range of face-width to diametral-pitch ratio given on page 740 of the text,
and the bending stress equation, solved for the unknown face width.
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.1 3
d in in in
20

F pd
1 15
p d 2 in in

FL pd
10
F p d 8.290 in
in

FU pd
in 5
F 8.250 in
0
14. The bending requirement is governing in 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
width for the stage 2 gearset are:
FIGURE 12-29B
1 Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 2
p d 1.5 in F 9.375 in Pinion (surface) in Problem 12-29
PROBLEM 12-30
Statement: Size the third-stage spur gears in problem 12-27 for a bending factor of safety of at least 3.2 and a
surface factor of safety of at least 1.7 assuming a steady torque, 25 deg pressure angle, full depth
teeth, quality index of 8, and AISI 4140 steel for all gears.

7
Power to be transmitted H 190 kW Life (cycles) N 10
Rotational speed of pinion n 24.695 rpm
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323

S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
0.5 0.6 2
d in in in

p d 0.75 in
1
F pd
30
in

FL pd
F p d 18.954 in 20
in
FU pd
in 10
F 19.000 in

0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
pd in
d p p d 24.000 in d g p d 216.000 in
FIGURE 12-30A
ft Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 3
min Pinion (bending) in Problem 12-30
bp p d F 12470 psi Kv p d 0.903

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1724
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
0.5 0.6 2
d in in in
40

F pd
1 30
p d 1 in in

FL pd
20
F p d 16.825 in
in
FU pd
in 10
F 16.875 in
0
14. The bending requirement is governing in 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
width for the stage 2 gearset are: FIGURE 12-30B
Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage 3
1
p d 0.75 in F 19.000 in Pinion (surface) in Problem 12-30
PROBLEM 12-31
1. For equal stages, the stage ratio is
1
n
mGs mG mGs 8.832
12 mGs 105.981 15 mGs 132.476
13 mGs 114.813 16 mGs 141.308
14 mGs 123.645 17 mGs 150.14
3. The first trial is very close to an integer so try 106 teeth:

n
106
mG 12 mG 78.028

4. We can get the exact ratio by using 12-tooth and 16-tooth pinions with 104- and 144-tooth gears
Let Stage 1 Np1 12 Ng1 104
Ng1 Ng2
Then, the gear ratio is mG mG 78.000
Np1 Np2
PROBLEM 12-32
Statement: Figure P12-1 shows the same paper machine that was analyzed in Problem 6-46 and in other
problems in previous chapters. Using the data of Problem 4-46, design a suitable spur-gear set
for this application for a 10-yr life against surface failure. State all assumptions.
Units: yr 2080 hr
Given: Gear ratio mg 2 Life (years) Life 10 yr

Torque on gear Tg 74240 in lbf
3. Pinion speed is n p 3 rpm (5 seconds for a 90-deg rotation).
Design Choices:
Number of pinion teeth Np 26 Reliability R 0.99
Surface factor of safety Nfs 2 Number of shifts shifts 3

1. Determine the number of gear teeth and the cycle life.
np 7
Cycle life: N Life shifts N 1.123 10
2
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1277
2 p g
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
2 Tg
d g p d

B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Cv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d p p d I
0.056
S ac 136200 psi
Grade 2, 300 HB
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Limits and safety factor FU p d
Sfc
FL p d
16 8
Nfc =
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.5 10
range in in in
8

F pd
6
in
1
p d 2.5 in

FL pd
in
F p d 5.414 in
FU pd
in 2
F 5.500 in 0
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
pd in

Vt p d 8 Wt p d 7138 lbf cp p d F 94935 psi

ft
min
14. There is a wide range of choice for the number of teeth on the pinion. The total weight of the gears goes down
very slightly with increasing pinion tooth number. The choice of Np 26 was somewhat arbitrary but was
arrived at after trying values from 18 to 26.
PROBLEM 12-33
Statement: Design a non reverted compound transmission based on the arrangement shown in Figure
12-14a for an overall train ratio of approximately 90:1. It should be capable of transmitting 50
hp at 1000 rpm input shaft speed. State all assumptions.
Given: Power to be transmitted H 50 hp Approximate gear ratio mv 90

Input speed (rpm) n in 1000 rpm Number of stages n 2
Assumptions: 1. If both pinion and gear from each stage are the same material, it will only be necessary to
Design Choices:
Surface factor of safety Nfs 1.7 Reliability R 0.99
7
Life (cycles) N 10
Material: AGMA Grade 2 steel for both pinion and gear, both stages, through hardened to
1. For equal stage ratios, the stage ratio is
1
n
mvs mv mvs 9.487
14 mvs 132.816 20 mvs 189.737 26 mvs 246.658 32 mvs 303.579
15 mvs 142.302 21 mvs 199.223 27 mvs 256.144 33 mvs 313.065
16 mvs 151.789 22 mvs 208.71 28 mvs 265.631 34 mvs 322.552
17 mvs 161.276 23 mvs 218.197 29 mvs 275.118 35 mvs 332.039
18 mvs 170.763 24 mvs 227.684 30 mvs 284.605 36 mvs 341.526
19 mvs 180.25 25 mvs 237.171 31 mvs 294.092 37 mvs 351.013
3. The last trial is very close to an integer so try 351 teeth:

n
351
mv 37 mv 89.993

4. For each stage let Np 37 Ng 351

Stage 1 Pinion
Given: Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 1 n in n 1 1000 rpm
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1732
2 p g
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n 1
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63 Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S ac 136200 psi
S ac CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.5 16
d in in in
11. From the graph, choose a standard

value of p d from Table 12-2.
3
1
p d 8 in

F pd
in
F p d 1.697 in
2

FL pd
13. Round this up to the decimal in
equivalent of a common fractional value.

FU pd 1
F 1.750 in
in
d p p d 4.625 in d g p d 43.875 in 0
6 8 10 12 14 16
pd in

ft
min FIGURE 12-33A
cp p d F 102877 psi Pinion (surface) in Problem 12-33
Stage 2 Pinion
Np
Given: Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 2 n in n 2 105.413 rpm
Ng
Np
pd
d p p d n 2
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d

B
Cv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.5 12
d in in in
8
F pd
1 in
p d 4 in 5.333

FL pd
in
F p d 3.779 in

FU pd 2.667
9. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of in
F 3.750 in
0
10. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
pd in
d p p d 9.250 in d g p d 87.750 in
FIGURE 12-33B
ft
min
cp p d F 104866 psi
PROBLEM 12-34
Statement: Design a reverted compound transmission based on the arrangement shown in Figure 12-14b
for an overall train ratio of approximately 80:1. It should be capable of transmitting 30 hp at
1500 rpm input shaft speed. State all assumptions.
Given: Power to be transmitted H 30 hp Approximate gear ratio mv 80

Input speed (rpm) n in 1500 rpm Number of stages n 2
Assumptions: 1. If both pinion and gear from each stage are the same material, it will only be necessary to
3. If both stages have the same tooth numbers, then both must have the same diametral pitch in
order that the center distances be the same. In this case, the dimensions of the second stage will
govern the design.
Design Choices:
Surface factor of safety Nfs 1.7 Reliability R 0.99
7
Life (cycles) N 10
Material: AGMA Grade 2 steel for both pinion and gear, both stages, through hardened to

1. For equal stage ratios, the stage ratio is
1
n
mvs mv mvs 8.944
2. The minimum number of teeth that we can have without interference on a 25-deg gear cut with a hob is 14.
Try pinions with 14, 15, 16, etc. teeth to see if the mating gear will have close to an integral number of teeth.
14 mvs 125.22 20 mvs 178.885 26 mvs 232.551 32 mvs 286.217
15 mvs 134.164 21 mvs 187.83 27 mvs 241.495 33 mvs 295.161
16 mvs 143.108 22 mvs 196.774 28 mvs 250.44 34 mvs 304.105
17 mvs 152.053 23 mvs 205.718 29 mvs 259.384 35 mvs 313.05
18 mvs 160.997 24 mvs 214.663 30 mvs 268.328 36 mvs 321.994
19 mvs 169.941 25 mvs 223.607 31 mvs 277.272 37 mvs 330.938
3. The next to last trial is very close to an integer so try 322 teeth:
n
322
mv 36 mv 80.003

4. For each stage let Np 36 Ng 322
Stage 2 Pinion
Np
Given: Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 2 n in n 2 167.702 rpm
Ng
I sin( ) cos( ) Ng I 0.1723

N N
2 p g
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n 2
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
B 0.63 Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S ac 136200 psi
S ac CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.1 12
d in in in

1
F pd
p d 5 in 3
in
FL pd
F p d 2.397 in in 2
13. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of FU pd

a common fractional value. in 1
F 2.375 in

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
pd in
d p p d 7.200 in d g p d 64.400 in
FIGURE 12-34A
ft
min
cp p d F 104942 psi
15. This diametral pitch and face width should be used for both stages in the gearset.
PROBLEM 12-35 _____
Statement: If the 23-tooth pinion in the gearset in Problem 12-3 is on the input shaft, find the velocity ratio,
torque ratio, and gear ratio for the gearset.
Given: Input tooth number Nin 23 Output tooth number Nout 57
1. Calculate the velocity ratio using equation 12.1a. Note that, for a given diametral pitch, the pitch radius of a
gear is directly proportional to the number of teeth on the gear.
Nin
mV mV 0.404
Nout
2. Calculate the torque ratio using equation 12.1b.
1
mA mA 2.478
mV
3. Calculate the gear ratio using equation 12.1c.
mG mA mG 2.478
PROBLEM 12-36 _____
Statement: If the 78-tooth gear in the gearset in Problem 12-4 is on the input shaft, find the velocity ratio,
torque ratio, and gear ratio for the gearset.
Given: Input tooth number Nin 78 Output tooth number Nout 27
1. Calculate the velocity ratio using equation 12.1a. Note that, for a given diametral pitch, the pitch radius of a
gear is directly proportional to the number of teeth on the gear.
Nin
mV mV 2.889
Nout
2. Calculate the torque ratio using equation 12.1b.
1
mA mA 0.346
mV
3. Calculate the gear ratio using equation 12.1c.
mG mV mG 2.889
PROBLEM 12-37 _____
Statement: Figure P12-2 shows an involute of a circle that starts at point A(0, rb) and continues to point P(x,y)
The angle is known as the roll angle and is the involute pressure angle. Derive expressions for
the x,y coordinates of P in terms of the base circle radius rb and the involute pressure angle only.
Plot y vs. x over the range 0 < < 40 deg for rb = 2 in.
Given: Base circle radius rb 2.00 in
1. From the definition of the involute, the distance from P to Q is the arc-length along the base circle subtended
by the angle . Thus,
PQ rb
2. The distance OP = rp is then
2 2 2 2
rp rb rb rp rb 1
3. Looking at triangle OPQ, we see that
rb
tan ( ) tan( )
rb
4. Writing the x and y coordinates of P in terms of the above relationships, we have
2
x( ) rb 1 tan ( ) sin( tan ( ) )
2
y ( ) rb 1 tan( ) cos( tan( ) )
5. Plot y vs. x over the range 0 deg 1 deg 40 deg
2.6
2.4
y ( )
in
2.2
2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
x( )
in
PROBLEM 12-38 _____
Statement: Derive equation 12.2 using Figure 12-5.
1. Label points on Figure 12-5 as follows:
Center of pinion, Op
Center of gear, Og
Beginning of contact, E
Pitch point, P
Leaving contact, F
Extend line of action to tangency with pinion base circle, A (not shown on figure)
Extend line of action to tangency with gear base circle, B (not shown on figure).
2. The length of action, Z, is equal to the distance EF = EP + PF.
3. The distance PF = AF - AP and EP = BE - BP. Thus, Z = AF + BE - (AP + BP).
4. The distance OpF = rp + a p, and OgE = rg + a g, where a p is the pinion addendum and a g is the gear addendum .
5. Since the line of action is tangent to both base circles, angle AOpP = angle BOgP = , the gear pressure angle.
Also, the distance OpA = rbp = rpcos() and OgB = rbg = rgcos().
6. From the relationships above,
AF rp ap2 rp cos( ) 2 BE rg ag2 rg cos( ) 2
AP rp sin( ) BP rg sin( )
7. Substituting the equations in step 6 into the equation for Z in step 3,
Z rp ap2 rp cos( ) 2 rg ag 2 rg cos( ) 2 rp rg sin( )

But, rp + rg = C, the center distance. So,
Z rp ap2 rp cos( ) 2 rg ag 2 rg cos( ) 2 C sin( )

which is equations 12-2.
PROBLEM 12-39 _____
Statement: A 39-tooth spur gear is in mesh with an 18-tooth pinion. The p d = 8 and = 25 deg. Find the
contact ratio.
Given: Tooth numbers: Pinion Np 18 Gear Ng 39

1
Diametral pitch p d 8 in Pressure angle 25 deg

pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action
Z 0.516 in
Z
pb
PROBLEM 12-40 _____
Statement: A 79-tooth spur gear is in mesh with a 20-tooth pinion. The p d = 8 and = 20 deg. Find the
contact ratio.

1

pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action
Z 0.624 in
Z
pb
PROBLEM 12-41 _____

increased by 6%?

1

distance changes.
new Base Circle
C C Old Pitch Circle
Let = fc
C New Pitch Circle
side by C, rbp
fc rp
C
fc = 1
C
C + C
2. In this case, fc 1 0.06 fc 1.060 fc r g rbg
3. Determine the pitch diameter and pitch radius of

the pinion.
Np
Pitch diameter d p
pd
d p 2.250 in
FIGURE 12-41
Pitch radius rp 0.5 d p Diagram Showing Center Change for Problem 12-41
rp 1.125 in
line of centers. The new pitch radii are proportional to f c. Thus, from Figure 12-41, the new pressure angle is
rbp
cos new =
fc rp
new,
rp cos( )
fc rp
PROBLEM 12-42 _____

increased by 5%?

1

distance changes. new Base Circle
Old Pitch Circle
C C New Pitch Circle
Let = fc
C
Dividing numerator and denominator of the left rbp
fc rp
side by C,
C
fc = 1 C + C
C
fc r g rbg
3. Determine the pitch diameter and pitch radius of

the pinion.
Np
Pitch diameter d p
pd
d p 2.500 in FIGURE 12-42

Diagram Showing Center Change for Problem 12-42
Pitch radius rp 0.5 d p
rp 1.250 in
line of centers. The new pitch radii are proportional to f c. Thus, from Figure 12-41, the new pressure angle is
rbp
cos new =
fc rp
new,
rp cos( )
fc rp
PROBLEM 12-43
Statement: If the spur gearsets in Problems 12-39 and 12-40 are compounded as shown in Figure 12-14,
what will the overall train ratio be?
Given: Tooth numbers N2 18 N3 39
N4 20 N5 79
1. Using equation 12.9b and assuming that gears 2 and 4 are the driver gears, the train (velocity) ratio is
N2 N4
mv mv 0.117
N3 N5
2. On the other hand, if gears 3 and 5 are the driver gears then the train ratio is
N3 N5
mv mv 8.5583
N2 N4
PROBLEM 12-44 _____

Given: Number of teeth N 23 Pressure angle 20 deg
1
N
pd
1.0
pd
1.25
pd

pd
PROBLEM 12-45 _____

Given: Number of teeth N 32 Pressure angle 20 deg
1
N
pd
1.0
pd
1.25
pd

pd
PROBLEM 12-46 _____
1. For equal stage ratios, the stage ratio is approximately

1
n
mGs mG mGs 7.280
2. The minimum number of teeth that we can have without interference on a 25-deg gear cut with a hob is 14.
Try pinions with 14, 15, 16, etc. teeth to see if the mating gear will have close to an integral number of teeth.
14 mGs 101.922
15 mGs 109.202
16 mGs 116.482
3. The first trial is very close to an integer so try 102 teeth:

n
102
mG 14 mG 53.082

4. We can get slightly closer by using two 14-tooth pinions with 101 and 103-tooth gears
101 103
mG mG 53.077
14 14
5. However, it may be harder to find the 101 and 103-tooth gears and, it may be less expensive to have two gears
with the same number of teeth than to have different numbers of teeth.
PROBLEM 12-47 _____
Statement: Design a three-stage compound spur gear train for an overall ratio of approximately 592:1.
Specify tooth numbers for each gear in the train.
Given: Approximate ratio mG 592 Number of stages s 3

1
s
1. The average stage ratio is ravg mG ravg 8.397
2. If the minimum number of teeth is (for a 20 deg pressure angle) Nmin 18 then the number of teeth on the
driven gear for each stage is
NG1 floor ravg Nmin NG1 151
or NG2 ceil ravg Nmin NG2 152
3. But, the prime factors of 592 are 2 4 and 37. This suggests that one of the gears have a number of teeth that is
a multiple of 37, say 148.
148
17.626 Let N2 18 N3 148
ravg
N5 N7
Thus, = 72 if N4 18 and N6 18
N4 N6
5 6
then N5 N7 = 72 18 18 = 2 3
4 2 1 4
Try N5 2 3 N7 2 3 then N5 N7 23328
Summarizing, N2 18 N3 148
N4 18 N5 144
N6 18 N7 162
4. Since the driven gears all have less than 180 teeth, no stage ratio is greater than 10.
5. Checking the overall gear ratio
N 3 N 5 N 7
mG mG 592.00
N 2 N 4 N 6
PROBLEM 12-48 _____
Statement: Design a planetary gear train similar to that shown in Figure 12-16 for an overall velocity ratio of
exactly 0.2 if the sun gear is the input, the arm is the output, and the ring gear is stationary.
Given: Exact ratio mv 0.2
1. Let the first gear be the sun gear (gear 2) and the last be the ring gear (gear 4). Then, equation 12.11c can be
written as
4 arm N2

2 arm N4
2. Taking 4 = 0 and solving for out/in, we have
out arm N2
= = = mv
in 2 N2 N4
3. Let the sun gear have tooth number N2 20 , then the number of teeth required for the ring gear is
1 mv
N4 N2 N4 80
mv
4. In order to mesh properly, the number of teeth on the ring gear must be equal to the sum of the number of
teeth on the sun gear plus two times the number of teeth on the planet gear(s). Thus,
N4 N2
N3 N3 30
2
5. Check the overall velocity ratio and summarize the tooth numbers.
N2
Overall velocity ratio mv mv 0.200
N2 N4
Sun gear N2 20
Planet gear(s) N3 30
Ring gear N4 80
PROBLEM 12-49 _____
Statement: Design a planetary gear train similar to that shown in Figure 12-16 for an overall velocity ratio
of exactly 4/3 if the sun gear is stationary, the arm is the input, and the ring gear is the output.
4
Given: Exact ratio mv
3
written as
4 arm N2

2 arm N4
out 4 N4 N2
= = = mv
in arm N4
N2
N4 N4 60
mv 1
N4 N2
N3 N3 20
2
N4 N2
Overall velocity ratio mv mv 1.333
N4
Sun gear N2 20
Ring gear N4 60
PROBLEM 12-50 _____

Statement: A 21-tooth pinion rotating at 1800 rpm meshes with a 33-tooth gear in a spur gear reducer. Both
pinion and gear are manufactured to a quality level of 9. A reliability of 0.9 has been specified,
and the transmitted tangential load is 2800 lb. Conditions are such that Km = 1.7. It is proposed
that standard 25-degree, full-depth teeth be used, with both pinion and gear hobbed from an
AISI 4140 nitrided steel. The diametral pitch is 6, and the face width 2.000 in. Estimate the
number of cycles of bending stress (using the AGMA equations) that the gearset can
withstand.
Given: Tooth numbers Np 21 Ng 33

Pinion speed n 1800 rpm Mounting factor Km 1.7
1
Diametral pitch p d 6 in Quality index Qv 9
Face width F 2.000 in Pressure angle 25 deg
Tangential load Wt 2800 lbf Reliability R 0.90
Assumptions: The life of the pinion will be less than that of the gear.
1. Calculate the pitch diameter of the pinion using equation 12.4a and the pitch-line velocity of the gearset.
Np d n ft
d d 3.500 in V V 1649
pd 2 min
2. Calculate the dynamic factor Kv using equations 12.16 and 12.17.
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
B 0.520 A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv A Kv 0.802
V min

A
ft
3. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Table 12-13) J 0.40
4. Assume an application factor, Ka Ka 1
5. Calculate the bending stress using equation 12.15.

Ka Wt p d Km
b b 44.51 ksi
Kv F J
6. Determine the material bending fatigue strength from Table 12-20 using the average value. S'fb 39.5 ksi
7. Determine the reliability factor for R 0.90 from Table 12-19. KR 0.85
8. Assume a temperature factor, KT KT 1
9. Set the bending stress equal to the corrected bending-fatigue strength in equation 12.24 and solve for the life
factor, KL .
KT KR b
KL KL 0.958
S'fb
10. Assume that the fatigue life is over 10 6 cycles and use the lower curve in Figure 12-24 to solve for the cycle life
1
0.0323 0.0323
KL = 1.6831 N
N 1.6831 N 3.80 10
7
K
L
PROBLEM 12-51 _____

Statement: A 21-tooth pinion rotating at 1800 rpm meshes with a 33-tooth gear in a spur gear reducer.
Both pinion and gear are manufactured to a quality level of 9. A reliability of 0.9 has been
specified, and the transmitted tangential load is 2800 lb. Conditions are such that Km = 1.7. It
is proposed that standard 25-degree, full-depth teeth be used, with both pinion and gear
hobbed from an AISI 4140 nitrided steel. The diametral pitch is 6, and the face width 2.000 in.
Estimate the number of cycles of contact (surface) stress (using the AGMA equations) that the
gearset can withstand.

Pinion speed n 1800 rpm Mounting factor Cm 1.7
1
Np d n ft
d d 3.500 in V V 1649
pd 2 min
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
B 0.520 A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv A Cv 0.802

A
V min

ft
3. Calculate the geometry factor, I
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.117
2 p g
0.5
4. Determine the elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. Cp 2300 psi
5. Assume an application factor, Ca Ca 1
6. Calculate the contact stress using equation 12.21.

1
2
Ca Wt 1 Cm
c Cp c 195.76 ksi
Cv F d I
7. Determine the material surface-fatigue strength from Table 12-21 using the average value. S'fc 167.5 ksi
8. Determine the reliability factor for R 0.90 from Table 12-19. CR 0.85
9. Assume a temperature factor, CT CT 1
10. Set the contact stress equal to the corrected surface-fatigue strength in equation 12.25 and solve for the life
factor, CL .
CT CR c
CL CL 0.993
S'fc
11. Use the lower curve in Figure 12-26 to solve for the cycle life.
1
0.056
CL = 2.466 N
0.056
N 2.466 N 1.13 10
7
C
L
PROBLEM 12-52
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-46 transmits 7.5 kW at 1750 input pinion rpm, find the torque on
each of the three shafts.
Given: Transmitted power P 7.5 kW Input speed p1 1750 rpm

Ng1 Ng2
mG mG 53.077
Np1 Np2
Np1
Stage 1 p1 1750 rpm g1 p1 g1 242.574 rpm
Ng1
Np2
Stage 2 p2 g1 g2 p2 g2 32.971 rpm
Ng2
3. Calculate the shaft torque

P
Shaft 1 T1 T1 40.9 N m Input
p1
P
g1
P
g2
PROBLEM 12-53
a surface factor of safety of at least 1.8 assuming a steady torque, 25-deg pressure angle, full

7
Power to be transmitted (hp) H 10 hp Life (cycles) N 10
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
B 0.52
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 41500 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
5 5.1 10
d in in in

p d 8 in
1
F pd
3
in

FL pd
F p d 1.195 in 2
in
FU pd
in 1
F 1.250 in

5 6 7 8 9 10
pd in
d p p d 1.750 in d g p d 12.625 in
FIGURE 12-53A
ft
Pinion (bending) in Problem 12-53
bp p d F 14175 psi Kv p d 0.850

I sin( ) cos( ) Ng I 0.1682

N N
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d
B 0.52 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 162500 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
5 5.1 10
d in in in

1
F pd
p d 8 in 3
in
FL pd
F p d 0.950 in in 2

FU pd
F 1.000 in
14. The bending requirement is governing in 0

5 6 7 8 9 10
this case. The diametral pitch and face
width for the stage 1 gearset are: pd in
FIGURE 12-53B
1
p d 8 in F 1.250 in
PROBLEM 12-54
and a surface factor of safety of at least 1.8 assuming a steady torque, 25-deg pressure angle,
full depth teeth, Qv = 9, and AISI 4340 steel for all gears.

7
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n 242.574 rpm

Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
B 0.52
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
5. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Km (Assume 1.99 < F < 6 in) Km 1.7
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323

S atp 41500 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
2 2.1 6
d in in in

p d 4 in
1
F pd
in

FL pd
F p d 2.134 in
in
FU pd 2
in
F 2.250 in

1 2 3 4 5 6
pd in
d p p d 3.500 in d g p d 25.750 in
FIGURE 12-54A
ft
bp p d F 14058 psi Kv p d 0.912

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1686
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d
B 0.52 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
5. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Cm (Assume 1.99 < F < 6 in) Cm 1.7
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 162500 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
9. Write the design equations using the range of face-width to diametral-pitch ratio given in of the text, and the
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.1 6
d in in in

1
F pd
p d 4 in 3
in
FL pd
F p d 1.691 in in 2

F 1.750 in

1 2 3 4 5 6
FIGURE 12-54B
1
p d 4 in F 2.250 in
PROBLEM 12-55
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 12-47 transmits 18.5 kW at 1184 input pinion rpm, find the torque on
each of the four shafts.
Given: Transmitted power P 18.5 kW Input speed p1 1184 rpm

Ng1 Ng2 Ng3

mG mG 592.000
Np1 Np2 Np3
Np1
Stage 1 p1 1184 rpm g1 p1 g1 144 rpm
Ng1
Np2
Stage 2 p2 g1 g2 p2 g2 18 rpm
Ng2
Np3
Stage 3 p3 g2 g3 p3 g3 2 rpm
Ng3
3. Calculate the shaft torque.

P
Shaft 1 T1 T1 149.2 N m Input
p1
P
g1
P
g2
P
g3
PROBLEM 12-56

7

Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
B 0.397
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323

S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
5 5.1 10
d in in in

p d 6 in
1
F pd
3
in

FL pd
F p d 1.575 in 2
in
FU pd
in 1
F 1.750 in

5 6 7 8 9 10
pd in
d p p d 3.000 in d g p d 24.667 in
FIGURE 12-56A
ft
bp p d F 14997 psi Kv p d 0.884

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1707
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
Cv p d
B 0.397 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
5 5.1 10
d in in in

1
F pd
p d 6 in 3
in
FL pd
F p d 1.294 in in 2

F 1.375 in

5 6 7 8 9 10
FIGURE 12-56B
1
p d 6 in F 1.750 in
PROBLEM 12-57
and a surface factor of safety of at least 2.0 assuming a steady torque, 25-deg pressure angle,
full depth teeth, Qv = 10, and AISI 4140 steel for all gears.

7
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
B 0.397
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.1 6
d in in in

p d 3 in
1
F pd
in

FL pd
F p d 3.055 in
in
FU pd 2
in
F 3.250 in

1 2 3 4 5 6
pd in
d p p d 6.000 in d g p d 48.000 in
FIGURE 12-57A
ft
min Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Stage
2 Pinion (bending) in Problem 12-57
bp p d F 15669 psi Kv p d 0.937

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1702
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
B 0.397
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.1 6
d in in in

1
F pd
p d 3 in
in
4
FL pd
F p d 2.519 in in

FU pd 2
F 2.750 in

1 2 3 4 5 6
FIGURE 12-57B
1
p d 3 in F 3.250 in
PROBLEM 12-58
Statement: Size the third-stage spur gears in problem 12-55 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.4 and

7

Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
B 0.397
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
bp p d F
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323

S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.1 6
d in in in

p d 1.5 in
1
F pd 8
in

FL pd 6
F p d 6.27 in
in

4
in
2
F 6.500 in

1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3
pd in
d p p d 12.000 in d g p d 108.000 in
FIGURE 12-58A
ft
bp p d F 16078 psi Kv p d 0.966

sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.1724
2 p g
Np
pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
Cv p d
B 0.397 A

A Vt p d
min

ft
0.5
C a W t p d C m
cp p d F Cp
Cv p d F d p p d I

0.056
S acp 165000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
1 1.1 6
d in in in

1
F pd 8
p d 1.5 in
in
FL pd 6
F p d 5.105 in in

4
2
F 5.250 in

1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3
FIGURE 12-58B
1
p d 1.5 in F 6.500 in
PROBLEM 12-59
Statement: The pinion of an external gearset has pitch radius rp = 40 mm and the gear has pitch radius rg =
160 mm. If the pinion is the input member of the set, determine the velocity ratio, the torque
ratio, and the gear ratio of the set.
Given: Pitch radii rp 40 mm rg 160 mm
1. Equate the pinion pitch radius to rin and the gear pitch radius to rout (in this case).
rin rp rin 40 mm rout rg rout 160 mm
2. Using equation 12.1a, calculate the velocity ratio using the minus sign because this is an external set.
rin
Velocity ratio mV mV 0.25
rout
3. Using equation 12.1b, calculate the torque ratio using the minus sign because this is an external set.
1
Torque ratio mA mA 4
mV
4. Using equation 12.1c, calculate the gear ratio using the torque ratio since it is greater than 1.
Gear ratio mG mA mG 4
This is usually stated as being 4:1.
P1259.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-60
Statement: A pinion having 20 teeth and a diametral pitch of 8 (in -1) is in mesh with a rack. If the pinion
rotates one revolution, how far will the rack move?
1
Given: Number of teeth Np 20 Diametral pitch p d 8 in
1. Calculate the pitch diameter using equation 12-4a.
Np
pd
2. The rack and pinion can be modeled as a cylinder, with diameter equal to the pitch diameter of the gear, in
contact with a plane along the pitch line of the rack. When the gear is rotated one revolution, the rack will
move a distance equal to the circumference of the cylinder.
Distance moved s d s 7.854 in
P1260.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-61
Statement: A gearset with full-depth teeth is designed to have a pinion with 24 teeth, a gear with 54 teeth,
and a diametral pitch of 6. Compare the contact ratio for this set for pressure angles of 14.5, 20,
and 25 degrees.
Given: Number of teeth Np 24 Ng 54

1
1. Calculate the pitch radus and addendum for each gear, and the nominal center distamce.
1 Np
Pitch radius: rp rp 2.000 in
2 pd
1 Ng
rg rg 4.500 in
2 pd
1
Addendum: a p a p 0.167 in
pd
a g a p a g 0.167 in
Center distance C rp rg C 6.500 in
2. Write the equation for the length of action as a function of pressure angle using equation 12.2.
Z ( ) rp ap 2 rp cos( ) 2 rg ag2 rg cos( ) 2 C sin( )

3. Write the equation for the contact ratio as a function of pressure angle using equation 12.7b.
p d Z ( )
mp( )
cos( )
4. Evaluate the contact ratio for the three pressure angles.
14.5 degrees mp( 14.5 deg) 2.007
20 degrees mp( 20 deg) 1.685
25 degrees mp( 25 deg) 1.492
P1261.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-62 _____
of exactly 5 if the ring gear is stationary, the arm is the input, and the sun gear is the output.
Given: Exact ratio mV 5

written as
4 arm N2
=
2 arm N4
out 2 N4
= = 1 = mv
in a N2
N4 N2 mV 1 N4 80
N4 N2
N3 N3 30
2
N4
Overall velocity ratio mV 1 mV 5.000
N2
Sun gear N2 20
Ring gear N4 80
PROBLEM 12-63 _____

Statement: A 22-tooth pinion rotating at 1650 rpm meshes with a 66-tooth gear in a spur gear reducer. Both
pinion and gear are manufactured to a quality level of 10. A reliability of 0.9 has been specified,
and the transmitted tangential load is 5000 lb. Conditions are such that Km = 1.7. It is proposed
that standard 25-degree, full-depth teeth be used, with both pinion and gear hobbed from an
AISI 4340 nitrided steel. The diametral pitch is 5, and the face width 2.500 in. Estimate the
number of cycles of bending stress (using the AGMA equations) that the gearset can
withstand.

Pinion speed n 1650 rpm Mounting factor Km 1.7
1
Np d n ft
d d 4.400 in V V 1901
pd 2 min
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
B 0.397 A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
Kv A Kv 0.847
V min

A
ft
3. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Table 12-13) J 0.42
4. Assume an application factor, Ka Ka 1
5. Calculate the bending stress using equation 12.15.

Ka Wt p d Km
b b 47.80 ksi
Kv F J
6. Determine the material bending fatigue strength from Table 12-20 using the average value. S'fb 41.5 ksi
7. Determine the reliability factor for R 0.90 from Table 12-19. KR 0.85
8. Assume a temperature factor, KT KT 1
9. Set the bending stress equal to the corrected bending-fatigue strength in equation 12.24 and solve for the life
factor, KL .
KT KR b
KL KL 0.979
S'fb
10. Assume that the fatigue life is over 10 6 cycles and use the lower curve in Figure 12-24 to solve for the cycle life
1
0.0323 0.0323
KL = 1.6831 N
N 1.6831 N 1.93 10
7
K
L
PROBLEM 12-64 _____

Statement: A 22-tooth pinion rotating at 1650 rpm meshes with a 66-tooth gear in a spur gear reducer.
Both pinion and gear are manufactured to a quality level of 10. A reliability of 0.9 has been
specified, and the transmitted tangential load is 5000 lb. Conditions are such that Km = 1.7. It
is proposed that standard 25-degree, full-depth teeth be used, with both pinion and gear
hobbed from an AISI 4340 nitrided steel. The diametral pitch is 5, and the face width 2.500 in.
Estimate the number of cycles of contact (surface) stress (using the AGMA equations) that the
gearset can withstand.

Pinion speed n 1650 rpm Mounting factor Cm 1.7
1
Np d n ft
d d 4.400 in V V 1901
pd 2 min
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
B 0.397 A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 83.776
B
Cv A Cv 0.847

A
V min

ft
3. Calculate the geometry factor, I
sin( ) cos( ) Ng
I N N I 0.144
2 p g
0.5
4. Determine the elastic coefficient from Table 12-18. Cp 2300 psi
5. Assume an application factor, Ca Ca 1
6. Calculate the contact stress using equation 12.21.

1
2
Ca Wt 1 Cm
c Cp c 183.32 ksi
Cv F d I
7. Determine the material surface-fatigue strength from Table 12-21 using the average value. S'fc 162.5 ksi
8. Determine the reliability factor for R 0.90 from Table 12-19. CR 0.85
9. Assume a temperature factor, CT CT 1
10. Set the contact stress equal to the corrected surface-fatigue strength in equation 12.25 and solve for the life
factor, CL .
CT CR c
CL CL 0.959
S'fc
11. Use the lower curve in Figure 12-26 to solve for the cycle life.
1
0.056
CL = 2.466 N
0.056
N 2.466 N 2.11 10
7
C
L
PROBLEM 12-65
Statement: The pinion of an internal gearset has pitch radius rp = 30 mm and the gear has pitch radius rg =
150 mm. If the pinion is the input member of the set, determine the velocity ratio, the torque
ratio, and the gear ratio of the set.
Given: Pitch radii rp 30 mm rg 150 mm
1. Equate the pinion pitch radius to rin and the gear pitch radius to rout (in this case).
rin rp rin 30 mm rout rg rout 150 mm
2. Using equation 12.1a, calculate the velocity ratio using the plus sign because this is an internal set.
rin
Velocity ratio mV r mV 0.2
out
3. Using equation 12.1b, calculate the torque ratio using the minus sign because this is an external set.
1
Torque ratio mA mA 5
mV
4. Using equation 12.1c, calculate the gear ratio using the torque ratio since it is greater than 1.
Gear ratio mG mA mG 5
This is usually stated as being 5:1.
P1265.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-66
Statement: A pinion having 18 teeth and a diametral pitch of 10 (in -1) is in mesh with a rack. If the rack
moves 1 in, how many degrees will the pinion rotate?
1
Given: Number of teeth Np 18 Diametral pitch p d 10 in
1. Calculate the pitch diameter using equation 12-4a.
Np
pd
2. The rack and pinion can be modeled as a cylinder, with diameter equal to the pitch diameter of the gear, in
contact with a plane along the pitch line of the rack. When the rack is moved 1 in, the pinion will rotate
through an angle = d/2s, where d is the diameter of the cylinder and s is the distance that the rack moves.
Distance moved s 1 in
d
Pinion rotation 51.566 deg
2 s
P1266.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-67
Statement: A gearset with 25 deg, full-depth teeth is designed to have a pinion with 24 teeth, a gear with 54
teeth, and a diametral pitch of 6. Compare the contact ratio for this set for a range of center
distances from 0.90C to 1.10C.
Given: Number of teeth Np 24 Ng 54

1
1. Calculate the pitch radus, base radius, and addendum for each gear, and the nominal center distamce.
1 Np
Pitch radius: rp rp 2.000 in
2 pd
1 Ng
rg rg 4.500 in
2 pd
Base circle radius: rbp rp cos( ) rbp 1.813 in
1
Addendum: a p a p 0.167 in
pd
a g a p a g 0.167 in
Center distance C rp rg C 6.500 in
2. Write the equation for the pressure angle as a function of variation in center distance. Let f be a factor which,
when multiplied by C gives the actual center distance C'. Then, the actual pitch radius of the pinion will be rp'
frp and the actual pressure angle will be = acos(rbp/frp).
rbp Note that '( 1 ) 25 deg

'( f ) acos
f rp
3. Write the equation for the length of action as a function of actual pressure angle and center distance using
equation 12.2.
Z ( f ) rp ap2 rp cos( '( f ) ) 2 rg ag2 rg cos( '( f ) ) 2 f C sin( '( f ) )

4. Write the equation for the contact ratio as a function of pressure angle using equation 12.7b.
pd Z ( f )
mp( f )
cos( '( f ) )
5. Evaluate the contact ratio for the range of center distance. Let f 0.90 0.905 1.10
See the graph on the next page.
P1267.xmcd
CONTACT RATIO vs CHANGE IN CENTER DISANCE

4
3
Contact Ratio
m p( f ) 2
0
0.9 0.95 1 1.05 1.1
f
Change in Center Distance Factor
P1267.xmcd
PROBLEM 12-68 _____
of exactly 1.25 if the sun gear is stationary, the arm is the input, and the ring gear is the output.
Given: Exact ratio mV 1.25

written as
4 arm N2
=
2 arm N4
out 4 N2
= = 1 = mv
in a N4
N2
N4 N4 80
mV 1
N4 N2
N3 N3 30
2
N2
Overall velocity ratio mV 1 mV 1.250
N4
Sun gear N2 20
Ring gear N4 80
PROBLEM 13-1
Statement: A 20-deg pressure angle, 30-deg helix angle, 27-tooth helical gear has a diametral pitch p d = 5.
Find the pitch diameter, addendum, dedendum, outside diameter, normal, transverse, and axial
pitch.
Given: Pressure angle 20 deg Helix angle 30 deg
1
Number of teeth N 27 Diametral pitch p d 5 in
1. Use equations 13.1 to find the pitch diameter, transverse pitch, normal pitch, and axial pitch.
N
pd

Transverse pitch p t p t 0.628 in
pd
Normal pitch p n p t cos( ) p n 0.544 in
pn
Axial pitch p x p x 1.088 in
sin( )
2. Use the equations in Table 12-1 to calculate the addendum, dedendum, and outside diameter.
1
pd
1.25
pd
Outside diameter D d 2 a D 5.800 in
PROBLEM 13-2
Statement: A 25-deg pressure angle, 20-deg helix angle, 43-tooth helical gear has a diametral pitch p d = 8.
Find the pitch diameter, addendum, dedendum, outside diameter, normal, transverse, and axial
pitch.
1
Number of teeth N 43 Diametral pitch p d 8 in
N
pd

pd
pn
sin( )
2. Use the equations in Table 12-1 to calculate the addendum, dedendum, and outside diameter.
1
pd
1.25
pd
PROBLEM 13-3
Statement: A 57-tooth, 10-deg helix angle, helical gear is in mesh with a 23-tooth pinion. The p d = 6 and =
25 deg. Find the transverse and axial contact ratios.
1
Number of pinion teeth Np 23 Diametral pitch p d 6 in
Number of gear teeth Ng 57
Assumptions: The face width factor is fwf 10.

1. Use equation 12.7 to find the transverse contact ratio.

pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action

Z 0.708 in
Z
Transverse contact ratio mp mp 1.491
pb
2. Use equation 13.5 to find the axial contact ratio.

fwf
Face width F F 1.667 in
pd
F p d tan ( )
Axial contact ratio mF mF 0.561

PROBLEM 13-4
Statement: A 78-tooth, 30-deg helix angle, helical gear is in mesh with a 27-tooth pinion. The p d = 6 and =
20 deg. Find the transverse and axial contact ratios.
1
Number of pinion teeth Np 27 Diametral pitch p d 6 in
Number of gear teeth Ng 78
Assumptions: The face width factor is fwf 12.


pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action

Z 0.849 in
Z
pb

fwf
pd
F p d tan ( )

PROBLEM 13-5
Statement: A 90-deg straight bevel gearset is needed to give a 9:1 reduction. Determine the pitch cone
angles, pitch diameters, and gear forces if the 25-deg pressure angle pinion has 14 teeth of p d =
6, and the transmitted power is 746 W at 1000 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 746 W Gear ratio mG 9
1
Pinion speed p 1000 rpm Diametral pitch p d 6 in
Teeth on pinion Np 14 Pressure angle 25 deg
1. Use equation 13.7b to calculate number of teeth on the gear. Ng mG Np Ng 126

2. Use equation 12.4a to calculate the pitch diameters.
Np
Pinion d p d p 2.333 in
pd
Ng
Gear d g d g 21.000 in
pd
3. Use equation 13.7b to calculate the pitch cone angles.
p atan
1
Pinion p 6.340 deg
mG
Gear g atan mG g 83.660 deg
Note that p g 90 deg
4. Determine the torque on the pinion shaft and the transmitted force.
H
Pinion Tp Tp 63.051 in lbf
p
2 Tp
Transmitted force Wt Wt 54.043 lbf
dp
5. Use equations 13.8a to calculate the pinion and gear forces.
Pinion Wap Wt tan ( ) sin p Wap 2.78 lbf
Wrp Wt tan( ) cos p Wrp 25.05 lbf
Gear Wag Wt tan ( ) sin g Wag 25.05 lbf
Wrg Wt tan( ) cos g Wrg 2.78 lbf

1
Total force W Wt ( cos( ) ) W 59.63 lbf
PROBLEM 13-6
Statement: A 90-deg straight bevel gearset is needed to give a 4.5:1 reduction. Determine the pitch cone
5, and the transmitted power is 7460 W at 800 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 7460 W Gear ratio mG 4.5
1

Np
pd
Ng
pd
p atan
1
Pinion p 12.529 deg
mG
H
p
2 Tp
dp

1
PROBLEM 13-7
7, and the transmitted power is 3 hp at 600 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 3 hp Gear ratio mG 5

1
Assumptions: The spiral angle is 35 deg

Np
pd
Ng
pd
p atan
1
Pinion p 11.310 deg
mG
H
p
2 Tp
dp
5. Use equations 13.2 to calculate the pressure angle in the normal plane.
n atan( tan( ) cos( ) ) n 16.602 deg
6. Use equations 13.8b to calculate the pinion and gear forces.

Pinion
Wt
Wap tan n sin p sin( ) cos p Wap 169.64 lbf
cos( )
Wt
Wrp tan n cos p sin( ) sin p Wrp 136.28 lbf
cos( )
Gear
Wt
Wag tan n sin g sin( ) cos g Wag 60.55 lbf
cos( )
Wt
Wrg tan n cos g sin( ) sin g Wrg 209.01 lbf
cos( )
1
PROBLEM 13-8
hollow, steel shaft with S ut = 400 MPa. Design a 2.5:1 reduction helical gearset to drive this roll
shaft to obtain a minimum dynamic safety factor of 2 for 10-year life if the roll turns at 50 rpm
with 1.2 hp absorbed.
Given: Surface factor of safety Nfc 2 Life (years) Life 10 yr
Power to be transmitted H 1.2 hp Gear speed n g 50 rpm
Gear ratio mg 2.5
Design Choices:
Number of pinion teeth Np 14 Relibility R 0.99
Helix angle 20 deg

1. Determine the number of gear teeth, the pinion speed, and the cycle life.
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n p n g mg n p 125 rpm
np 8
Cycle life: N Life N 6.574 10
2
a p d
1
Addendum
pd
Np Ng
Pitch radii rp p d rg p d
2 pd 2 pd
Center distance C p d rp p d rg p d
Radii of curvature
p p d 0.5 rp p d C pd rg pd rp p d cos( )
2 2
g p d C p d sin( ) p p d
Normal plane pressure angle n atan( tan( ) cos( ) ) n 23.662 deg
cos n
Base helix angle b acos cos( ) b 18.256 deg
cos( )
Length of action
Z p d
r p a p 2 r p cos( ) 2
p d d p d
r p a p 2 r p cos( ) 2 C p sin( )
g d d g d d
Z pd
Transverse contact ratio mp p d

cos( )
pd
F p d tan( )
Axial contact ratio mF p d F

Fractional parts of mp and mF n r p d mp p d floor mp p d
n a p d F mF p d F floor mF p d F
p t p d p n p d p t p d cos( )

Axial pitch
pd
pn pd
p x p d
sin( )
Minimum length of lines of contact
mp pd F napd F nrpd pxpd

Lmin p d F return if n a p d F 1 n r p d
cos b
mp pd F 1 na p d F 1 nr pd px p d
return if n a p d F 1 n r p d
cos b
mN p d F
F
Load sharing ratio
Lmin p d F
I p d F
cos( )
Geometry factor
1 1 2 r p m p F
p p p d N d
p d g d
3. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitchline velocity, and transmitted load in terms of the unknown diametr
pitch, p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92.000
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d p p d I p d F
0.056
Reliability CR 0.7 0.15 log( 1 R) CR 1.000
S ac 101210 psi
Grade 1, 230 HB
S ac CL
CT CR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
2
Sfc
Safety factor Nfc =
c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Face width F' p d F Nfc
Cv p d d p p d I p d F S fcp
Guess value for F F 2.35 in Found by iteration with value in step 11.
2 2.5 12
range in in in
4

F' pd F
3
in
1
p d 5 in

FL pd
in
F' p d F 2.355 in FU pd
in 1
F 2.375 in 0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
pd in

ft
min
cp p d F 56448 psi mp p d 1.420 mF p d F 1.376 n r p d 0.420
n a p d F 0.376 mN p d F 0.728 Lmin p d F 3.264 in I p d F 0.188
14. The realized factor of safety against surface failure in the pinion is
2
Sfcp
Nf p d F p F Nf p d F 2.0
cp d
PROBLEM 13-9
Statement: A 2-start wormset has the dimensions given below. Find the lead, lead angle, worm gear
diameter, and center distance. Will it self-lock? The input speed is 2200 rpm.
Given: Worm pitch diameter d 50 mm Gear ratio mG 22

Axial pitch p x 10 mm Input (worm) speed n w 2200 rpm
Threads on worm Nw 2

1. Use equation 13.13 to calculate the lead. L p x Nw L 20 mm
atan
L
2. Use equation 13.12 to calculate the lead angle. 7.256 deg
d
3. Calculate the number of teeth on the gear Ng mG Nw Ng 44
4. Use equation 13.13 to calculate gear diameter. p c p x
p c Ng
d g d g 140.06 mm

d dg
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. C C 95.03 mm
2
6. If the lead angle per worm tooth is less than 6 deg, the set is self-locking. The lead angle per tooth is

t t 3.628 deg Self-locking
Nw
PROBLEM 13-10
Given: Worm pitch diameter d 1.750 in Gear ratio mG 17

Axial pitch p x 0.200 in Input (worm) speed n w 1400 rpm

1. Use equation 13.13 to calculate the lead. L p x Nw L 0.600 in
atan
L
d
p c Ng
d g d g 3.247 in

d dg
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. C C 2.498 in
2

Nw
PROBLEM 13-11
Given: Worm pitch diameter d 40 mm Gear ratio mG 82

atan
L
d
p c Ng
d g d g 130.51 mm

d dg
2

Nw
PROBLEM 13-12
Statement: Determine the power transmitted and the torques and forces in the mesh for the wormset in Problem
13-9 if it turns at 1000 worm rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min
Given: Worm pitch diameter d w 50 mm Gear ratio mG 22

Threads on worm Nw 2 Pressure angle 20 deg

atan
L
d w

p c Ng
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. d g d g 140.06 mm

dw dg
C C 95.03 mm
2
6. Find the maximum recommended face width from equation 13.19.
Fmax 0.67 d w Fmax 33.5 mm
7. Find the materials factor Cs from equation 13.24. Since C < 203 mm, Cs 1000.
8. Find the ratio correction factor Cm from equations 13.25. Based on mG 22 , the second of the
expressions in that equation set will be used.
2
Cm 0.0107 mG 56 mG 5145 Cm 0.821
9. Find the tangential velocity Vt from equation 13.27.

nw dw
Vt Vt 519.5 fpm
2 cos( )
10. Use this velocity to find the velocity factor Cv from equations 13.26. For this value of Vt, the first of these
equations is appropriate.
Vt
0.0011
fpm
Cv 0.659 e Cv 0.372
11. Find the tangential load Wt from equation 13.23.

0.8
dg N
Wtg Cs Cm Cv Fmax Wtg 7028 N
mm 75.948 mm
12. Find the coefficient of friction from the third expression in equation 13.29.
0.450
Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.028
13. Find the friction force Wf from equation 13.28.
Wtg
Wf Wf 214.5 N
cos( ) cos( )
14. Find the rated output power from equation 13.21.
nw dg
o Wtg o 2.34 kW
mG 2
15. Find the power lost in the mesh from equation 13.22.
l Vt Wf l 0.57 kW
16. Find the rated input power from equation 13.20.
o l 2.91 kW
17. The efficiency of the gearset is

o
e e 80.5 %

18. Find the rated output torque from equation 13.31.
dg
Tg Wtg Tg 492 N m
2
PROBLEM 13-13
Statement: Determine the power transmitted and the torques and forces in the mesh for the wormset in
Problem 13-10 if it turns at 500 worm rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min
Given: Worm pitch diameter d w 1.75 in Gear ratio mG 17

atan
L
d w

p c Ng
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. d g d g 3.247 in

dw dg
C C 2.498 in
2
Fmax 0.67 d w Fmax 1.173 in
7. Find the materials factor Cs from equation 13.24. Since C < 8 in, Cs 1000.
8. Find the ratio correction factor Cm from equations 13.25. Based on mG 17 , the first of the expressions in
that equation set will be used.
2
Cm 0.0200 mG 40 mG 76 0.46 Cm 0.815
nw dw
Vt Vt 230.4 fpm
2 cos( )
Vt
0.0011
fpm
Cv 0.659 e Cv 0.511

0.8
dg lbf
Wtg Cs Cm Cv Fmax Wtg 1254 lbf
in in
0.450

Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.041
Wtg
Wf Wf 54.8 lbf
cos( ) cos( )
nw dg
o Wtg o 0.95 hp
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 0.38 hp
o l 1.33 hp

o
e e 71.3 %

dg
Tg Wtg Tg 2035 in lbf
2
PROBLEM 13-14
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 13-3 transmits 125 HP at 1000 pinion rpm, find the torque on each shaft.

Number of pinion teeth Np 23 Pinion speed p 1000 rpm
Number of gear teeth Ng 57 Transmitted power P 125 hp

Solution: See Mathcad file P1214. P
1. For the pinion shaft Tp Tp 7878 in lbf Tp 656.5 ft lbf
p
Np
Ng
P
Tg Tg 19524 in lbf Tg 1627 ft lbf
g
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 19524 in lbf Tg 1627 ft lbf
Np
PROBLEM 13-15

Number of gear teeth Ng 78 Transmitted power P 33 kW

P
p
Np
Ng
P
Tg Tg 569 N m
g
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 569 N m
Np
PROBLEM 13-16
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-14 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2 assuming a
steady torque, 25 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, a face width factor of 10, quality index of
9, an AISI 4140 steel pinion, and a class 40 cast iron gear.

Power to be transmitted H 125 hp Reliability R 0.99
7
Pressure angle 25 deg Helix angle 10 deg
Pinion
Np
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 6
range in in in
4

F pd
1 3
p d 5 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 3.100 in
in

FU pd
in 1
F 3.125 in
0
13. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
pd in
d p d 4.600 in Kv p d 0.824
FIGURE 13-16A
ft
Problem 13-16
min
bp p d F 19839 psi

Gear

Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

Class 40 cast iron S atg 13000 psi
S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 6
in in in

p d 3 in
1
F pd
4.5
in

FL pd
F p d 3.250 in 3
in
FU pd
in 1.5
F 3.250 in

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
d p d 7.667 in Kv p d 0.788 pd in
FIGURE 13-16B
ft
Problem 13-16
min
bg p d F 6500 psi
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 13-17
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-15 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.5 assuming a
11, an AISI 4340 steel pinion, and an A-7-d nodular 40 iron gear.

7
Pinion
Np
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 10
range in in in
4

F pd
1 3
p d 8 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 1.898 in
in

FU pd
in 1
F 2.000 in
0
pd in
d p d 3.375 in Kv p d 0.918
FIGURE 13-17A
ft
Problem 13-17
min
bp p d F 15943 psi

Gear
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 10
in in in

1
F pd
p d 8 in 4.5
in
FL pd
F p d 2.207 in in 3

FU pd
F 2.250 in

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
pd in
d p d 3.375 in Kv p d 0.918
FIGURE 13-17B
ft
Problem 13-17
min
bg p d F 13338 psi
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 13-18
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-14 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.6 assuming a
9, an AISI 4140 steel pinion, and a class 40 cast iron gear.
Given: Factor of safety Nfc 1.6 Number of gear teeth Ng 57

7
Pinion
a p d
1
Addendum
pd
Np Ng
2 pd 2 pd
Radii of curvature
2 2
cos n
cos( )
Length of action
Z p d
p d d p d
g d d g d d
Z pd

cos( )
pd
F p d tan( )


Axial pitch
pd
pn pd
p x p d
sin( )

cos b
cos b
mN p d F
F
Load sharing ratio
Lmin p d F
I p d F
cos( )
Geometry factor
1 1 2 r p m p F
p p p d N d
p d g d
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 (steel on CI). Cp 2100 psi
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 165000 psi
AISI 4140 steel
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
Limits, safety factor Nfc =
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.5 12
in in in

1
F' pd F
p d 5 in 3
in
FL pd
F' p d F 2.347 in in 2
13. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of a FU pd

F 2.375 in
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d p p d 4.600 in d g p d 11.400 in pd in
FIGURE 13-18A
ft Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion
min (surface) in Problem 13-18
Gear
C a W t p d C m
Cv p d F d g p d I p d F
16. Determine the endurance strength of the gear.

0.056
S ac 80000 psi
Class 40 CI
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
Cv p d d g p d I p d F S fcg
2 2.5 12
in in in
8
F' pd F
6
1 in
p d 4 in

FL pd
in
F' p d F 2.746 in
FU pd
21. Round this up to the decimal equivalent of a in 2
F 2.750 in
0
22. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7
pd in
d p p d 5.750 in d g p d 14.250 in
FIGURE 13-18B
Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear
ft
min
23. The gear teeth are larger than for the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements for the
1
2
Sfcg
Gear factor of safety Nfsg Nfsg 1.6
cg pd F
2
Sfcp
Pinion factor of safety Nfsp p F Nfsp 2.8
cp d
PROBLEM 13-19
11, an AISI 4340 steel pinion, and an A-7-d nodular iron gear.

7
Pinion
a p d
1
Addendum
pd
Np Ng
2 pd 2 pd
Radii of curvature
2 2
cos n
cos( )
Length of action
Z p d
p d d p d
g d d g d d
Z pd

cos( )
pd
F p d tan( )


Axial pitch
pd
pn pd
p x p d
sin( )

cos b
cos b
mN p d F
F
Load sharing ratio
Lmin p d F
I p d F
cos( )
Geometry factor

p p 2 rp pd mN p d F
1 1
p d g d
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 11-18 (steel on NI). Cp 2160 psi
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 160000 psi
AISI 4340 steel
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.1 16
in in in

1
F' pd F
p d 12 in 1.5
in
FL pd
F' p d F 1.140 in in 1

F 1.250 in
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FIGURE 13-19A
Gear
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 100000 psi
A-7-d nodular iron
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.1 16
in in in
2
F' pd F
1.5
1 in
p d 12 in

FL pd
in
F' p d F 1.030 in
FU pd
F 1.125 in
0
22. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pd in
d p p d 2.250 in d g p d 6.500 in
FIGURE 13-19B
ft
min
23. The gear teeth are the same size as the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements for the
1
2
Sfcg
cg pd F
2
Sfcp
cp d
PROBLEM 13-20
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-5 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2 assuming a 5-year,
1-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 9, an AISI 4140 steel pinion and gear.
Power to be transmitted (hp) H 746 W Reliability R 0.99
Rotational speed of pinion (rpm) n p 1000 rpm AGMA Quality level Qv 9
Number of pinion teeth Np 14 Life (years) Life 5 yr

Pinion
1. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Figure 13-5) Jp 0.285
2. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitchline velocity, and transmitted torque in terms of the unknown
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
H
Transmitted torque (in-lbf) Tp Tp 63.051 in lbf
np
3. Set the application, size, and type factors. Ka 1 Ks 1 Kx 1
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
4. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, Kv B 0.52
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
d p p d F Jp Kv p d Kx

np 9
Cycle life N Life N 2.63 10
2
0.0323
Life factor KL 1.6831 N KL 0.835
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
8. Write the design equations using the face-width to pitch-cone length ratio given in the text, and the bending
stress equation, solved for the unknown face width.
Np
Upper limit, F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
2 Tp p d Ka Km Ks Nfb
Face width F p d
d p p d Jp Kv p d Kx S fbp
16 16.5 26
range in in in
2

1.5
F pd
1
p d 18 in in
1
11. The calculated value of F is FLover3 pd
F p d 1.071 in in
0.5
12. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a
0
F 1.125 in 16 18 20 22 24 26
pd in
FIGURE 13-20A
d p p d 0.778 in Kv p d 0.915
Problem 13-20
Vt p d 204
ft
min
bp p d F 15912 psi

GEAR
14. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Figure 13-5) Jg 0.220
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
d g p d F Jg Kv p d Kx
Np
F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
d g p d Jg Kv p d Kx S fbp
30 30.5 40
in in in
2

1.5
F pd
1
p d 36 in in
1
F p d 0.602 in in
0.5
0
F 0.625 in 30 32 34 36 38 40
pd in
FIGURE 13-20B
d g p d 3.500 in Kv p d 0.938
Problem 13-20
Vt p d 102 bg p d F 16093 psi

ft
min
22. The gear dimensions are smaller (larger diametral pitch means smaller teeth) than for the pinion. This means
that we will accept the pinion requirements for the gear, thus, for the set
1
Np
Pitch cone angle p atan p 6.34 deg
Ng
d p p d L
Pitch-cone length L L 3.522 in 1.174 in
2 sin p 3
23. Determine the realized factor of safety for the pinion using the above values for F and p d.
S fbp
bp p d F
25. Check the factor of safety on the gear:

S fbp
bg p d F
PROBLEM 13-21
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-6 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.5 assuming a
15-year, 3-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 11, an AISI 4340 steel pinion and gear.
Units: yr 2080 hr

Pinion
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
H
np
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks

np 9
Cycle life shifts 3 N Life shifts N 1.498 10
2
0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
Np
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
2 2.5 12
range in in in

1

p d 6 in 3
F pd
F p d 1.404 in FLover3 pd 2
in
12. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a 1
F 1.500 in
0
2 4 6 8 10 12
pd in
d p p d 3.000 in Kv p d 0.942 FIGURE 13-21A

Vt p d 628
ft
Problem 13-21
min
bp p d F 13376 psi

GEAR
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
Np
F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
6 6.5 16
in in in

1

p d 10 in 1.5
F pd
1
F p d 1.034 in FLover3 pd
in
20. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a 0.5
F 1.125 in
0
6 8 10 12 14 16
pd in
d g p d 8.100 in Kv p d 0.953 FIGURE 13-21B


ft Problem 13-21
min
22. The gear dimensions are smaller (larger diametral pitch means smaller teeth) than for the pinion. This means th
we will accept the pinion requirements for the gear, thus, for the set
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
S fbp
bp p d F

S fbp
bg p d F
PROBLEM 13-22
Statement: Size the spiral gears in problem 13-7 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.2 assuming a
Units: yr 2080 hr
Rotational speed of pinion n p 600 rpm AGMA Quality level Qv 8

Pinion
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
H
np
3. Set the application, size, and type factors. Ka 1 Ks 1 Kx 1.15
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
np 9
2
0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
Np
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
2 2.5 12
range in in in

1
p d 10 in
3
F pd
12. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a in
F 1.375 in
0
13. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 2 4 6 8 10 12
pd in
d p p d 1.600 in Kv p d 0.880
FIGURE 13-21A
Vt p d 251
ft
Problem 13-21
min
bp p d F 14844 psi
Gear
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
Np
F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
10 11.5 20
in in in

1

p d 16 in 1.5
F pd
1
F p d 0.642 in FLover3 pd
in
20. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a 0.5
F 0.750 in
0
10 12 14 16 18 20
pd in
d g p d 5.000 in Kv p d 0.902
FIGURE 13-21B
ft
Problem 13-21
min
22. The gear dimensions are smaller (larger diametral pitch means smaller teeth) than for the pinion. This means tha
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
S fbp
bp p d F

S fbp
bg p d F
PROBLEM 13-23
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-5 for a minimum safety factor of 1.4 for any mode of failure of
pinion or gear assuming a 5-year, 1-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 9, an AISI 4140 steel
pinion and gear.
Units: yr 2080 hr


1. Determine the surface geometry factor, I, from Figure 13-6. I 0.092
Np Ng
pd pd
Np
pitchline velocity (fpm) Vtp p d np
2 pd
H
Transmitted load (lbf) Tp Tp 63.051 in lbf
np
3. Set the application factor, Ca Ca 1 Cs 1 Cf 1
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cvp p d A

A Vtp pd
min

ft
5. Tentatively choose the mounting factor, Cmd Cmd 3.0 Cxc 1
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 11-18 0.5

(steel on steel) and a stress adjustment constant. Cp 2100 psi Cb 0.634

np 8
2
0.056
Hardness CH 1
S acp 167500 psi
S acp CL
CT CR
8. Write the equation for the design pinion torque.
I Cvp p d Sacp d p pd 0.774 CH

2
TD p d F
F

2 Cs Cmd Cf Ca Cxc Cp Cb CT CR
9. Define the exponent z. z p d F return 0.667 if Tp TD p d F

1 otherwise

z pd F
2 TD pd F Tp Ca Cmd
cp p d F Cp Cb Cs Cf Cxc
F d p pd 2 I TD p d F Cvp p d

2
Np Sfc
Upper limit, F = L/3 FLover3 p d Nfc =
Np c
6 p d sin atan
Face width
Ng

z pd F
2 TD p d F Tp
2
Cp Cb Ca Cmd
F' p d F Cs Cf Cxc Nfc
S fcp d p pd 2 I TD pd F Cvp p d

12 12.5 22
12. Plot F(P) vs. p d over the range p d Guess value for F F 0.955 in
in in in
2
13. From the graph, choose a standard value of p d from
Table 12-2.

1 1.5
p d 16 in F' pd F
in
1
FLover3 pd
F' p d F 0.956 in
in
15. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a common 0.5
fractional value.
F 1.000 in 0
12 14 16 18 20 22
pd in

Graph of Face Width and Limits for for Problem 13-23
Vtp p d 229 Cvp p d 0.911 cp p d F 1 10 psi TD p d F 101 in lbf

ft 5
min
17. When both pinion and gear are of the same material, the stress in the gear will always be lower than in the pinion
Therefore, the face width and diametral pitch found for the pinion should also be used for the gear.
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
2
Sfcp
Pinion factor of safety Nfcp Nfcp 1.4
cp pd F
PROBLEM 13-24
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-6 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.3 assuming a
15-year, 3-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 11 an AISI 4340 steel pinion and gear.
Units: yr 2080 hr
Np Ng
pd pd
Np
2 pd
H
np
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Cvp p d A

A Vtp pd
min

ft
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 0.5


np 9
2
0.056
Hardness CH 1
S acp 162000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR

2
TD p d F
F


1 otherwise

z pd F
2 TD pd F Tp Ca Cmd

2
Np Sfc
Np c
6 p d sin atan
Face width
Ng

z pd F
2 TD p d F Tp
2
Cp Cb Ca Cmd

2 2.5 12
in in in
4
Table 12-2.

1 3
p d 6 in F' pd F
in
FLover3 pd 2
F' p d F 1.325 in
in
15. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a common 1
fractional value.
F 1.375 in 0
2 4 6 8 10 12
pd in
Vtp p d 628 Cvp p d 0.942 cp p d F 99697 psi TD p d F 1567 in lbf

ft
min
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
2
Sfcp
cp pd F
PROBLEM 13-25
Statement: Size the spiral gears in problem 13-7 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.4 assuming a
Units: yr 2080 hr
Rotational speed of pinion n p 600 rpm AGMA Quality level Qv 8

Pinion
Np Ng
pd pd
Np
2 pd
H
np
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Cvp p d
A

A Vtp pd
min

ft
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 11-18

0.5

np 9
2
0.056
Hardness CH 1
S acp 162000 psi
S acp CL
CT CR

2
TD p d F
F


1 otherwise

z pd F
2 TD pd F Tp Ca Cmd

2
Np Sfc
Np c
6 p d sin atan
Face width
Ng

z pd F
2 TD p d F Tp
2
Cp Cb Ca Cmd

2 2.5 12
in in in
4

3
F' pd F
1
p d 10 in in
14. The calculated value of F is FLover3 pd 2

F' p d F 1.141 in in
1
0
F 1.250 in 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
pd in
FIGURE 13-25
d p p d 1.600 in d g p d 8.000 in Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Pinion in
Problem 13-25

ft
min
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
2
Sfcp
cp pd F
PROBLEM 13-26
Statement: Find the rated power and rated output torque of the wormset in Problem 13-9 with an input speed o
2200 rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min


atan
L
d w

p c Ng
d g d g 140.056 mm

dw dg
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. C
2

2
Cm 0.0107 mG 56 mG 5145 Cm 0.821
nw dw
Vt Vt 1143 fpm
2 cos( )
10. Use this velocity to find the velocity factor Cv from equations 13.26. For this value of Vt, the second of
these equations is appropriate.
0.571
Vt
Cv 13.31 Cv 0.239
fpm
0.8
dg N
mm 75.948 mm
0.450

Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.020
Wtg
Wf Wf 94.5 N
cos( ) cos( )

nw dg
o Wtg o 3.31 kW
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 0.55 kW
o l 3.86 kW

o
e e 85.8 %

dg
Tg Wtg Tg 316 N m
2
PROBLEM 13-27
Statement: Find the rated power and rated output torque of the wormset in Problem 13-10 with an input
speed of 1400 rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min
Given: Worm pitch diameter d w 1.75 in Gear ratio mG 17
atan
L
d w

p c Ng
d g d g 3.247 in

dw dg
5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance. C C 2.498 in
2

8. Find the ratio correction factor Cm from equations 13.25. Based on mG 17 , the first of the expressions
in that equation set will be used.
2
Cm 0.0200 mG 40 mG 76 0.46 Cm 0.815
nw dw
Vt Vt 645 fpm
2 cos( )
Vt
0.0011
fpm
Cv 0.659 e Cv 0.324

0.8
dg N
mm 75.948 mm
0.450
Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.026
Wtg
Wf Wf 21.8 lbf
cos( ) cos( )

nw dg
o Wtg o 1.69 hp
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 0.43 hp
o l 2.11 hp

o
e e 79.8 %

dg
2
PROBLEM 13-28
Statement: Find the rated power and rated output torque of the wormset in Problem 13-11 with an input speed
of 4500 rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min

atan
L
d w

p c Ng
d g d g 130.51 mm

dw dg
2

8. Find the ratio correction factor Cm from equations 13.25. Based on mG 82 , the third of the expressions
in that equation set will be used.
Cm 1.1483 0.00658 mG Cm 0.609

nw dw
Vt Vt 1857 fpm
2 cos( )
10. Use this velocity to find the velocity factor Cv from equations 13.26. For this value of Vt, the second of these
0.571
Vt
Cv 13.31 Cv 0.181
fpm
0.8
dg N
mm 75.948 mm
0.450

Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.016
Wtg
Wf Wf 32.6 N
cos( ) cos( )

nw dg
o Wtg o 718 W
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 307 W
o l 1026 W

o
e e 70.0 %

dg
Tg Wtg Tg 125 N m
2
PROBLEM 13-29 _____
Statement: A 23-tooth helical gear is cut with a 20-degree-pressure-angle hob at a helix angle of 25 deg.
The hob has a standard diametral pitch of 5. The resulting teeth have standard spur-gear
dimensions in the normal plane. Find the pitch diameter, addendum, dedendum, outside
diameter, normal, transverse, and axial pitch, and the transverse pressure angle.
Given: Normal plane data:

1
Pressure angle n 20 deg Diametral pitch p nd 5 in
Other data:
Number of teeth N 23 Helix angle 25 deg
1. Use equation 13.1d to calculate the transverse diametral pitch.

1
p d p nd cos( ) p d 4.532 in
N
pd

pd
pn
sin( )
3. Use the equations in Table 12-1 with the normal diametral pitch to calculate the addendum, dedendum, and
outside diameter.
1
p nd
1.25
p nd
4. Use equation 13.2 to find the pressure angle in the transverse plane.
tan n
t atan t 21.880 deg
cos( )
PROBLEM 13-30 _____
Statement: A 38-tooth helical gear is cut with a 25-degree-pressure-angle hob at a helix angle of 30 deg.
The hob has a standard diametral pitch of 4. The resulting teeth have standard spur-gear
dimensions in the normal plane. Find the pitch diameter, addendum, dedendum, outside
diameter, normal, transverse, and axial pitch, and the transverse pressure angle.
Given: Normal plane data:

1
Pressure angle n 25 deg Diametral pitch p nd 4 in
Other data:
Number of teeth N 38 Helix angle 30 deg
1. Use equation 13.1d to calculate the transverse diametral pitch.

1
p d p nd cos( ) p d 3.464 in
N
pd

pd
pn
sin( )
3. Use the equations in Table 12-1 with the normal diametral pitch to calculate the addendum, dedendum, and
outside diameter.
1
p nd
1.25
p nd
4. Use equation 13.2 to find the pressure angle in the transverse plane.
tan n
t atan t 28.300 deg
cos( )
PROBLEM 13-31 _____

Statement: A 39-tooth, 20-deg helix angle, helical gear is in mesh with an 18-tooth pinion. The p d = 8 and
= 25 deg. Find the transverse and axial contact ratios.
Given: Tooth numbers: Ng 39 Np 18

1
Assumptions: The face width factor is fwf 12


pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action

Z 0.516 in
Z
pb

fwf
pd
F p d tan ( )

PROBLEM 13-32 _____

Statement: A 79-tooth, 30-deg helix angle, helical gear is in mesh with an 20-tooth pinion. The p d = 6 and
= 20 deg. Find the transverse and axial contact ratios.

1
Assumptions: The face width factor is fwf 12


pd
Pinion:
Np
pd
Gear:
Ng
pd
1.0
pd
Np Ng
2 pd
Length of action

Z 0.832 in
Z
pb

fwf
pd
F p d tan ( )

PROBLEM 13-33 _____
Statement: If the gearset in Problem 13-31 transmits 135 HP at 1200 pinion rpm, find the torque on each shaft

Pinion speed p 1200 rpm Transmitted power P 135 hp
1. For the pinion shaft

P
Tp Tp 7090 in lbf Tp 590.9 ft lbf
p
3. For the gear shaft
Np
g p g 553.846 rpm
Ng
P
Tg Tg 15362 in lbf Tg 1280 ft lbf
g
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 15362 in lbf Tg 1280 ft lbf
Np
P1333.xmcd
PROBLEM 13-34

Number of gear teeth Ng 79Transmitted power P 30 kW

P
p
Np
Ng
P
Tg Tg 943 N m
g
Ng
Tg Tp Tg 943 N m
Np
PROBLEM 13-35
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-33 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2 assuming a
7
Pinion
Np
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 6
range in in in
4

F pd
1 3
p d 3 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 1.335 in
in

FU pd
in 1
F 1.375 in
0
pd in
d p d 6.000 in Kv p d 0.792
FIGURE 13-35A
ft
Problem 13-35
min
bp p d F 19411 psi

Gear
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

Class 40 cast iron S atg 13000 psi
S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 6
in in in

p d 3 in
1
F pd
4.5
in

FL pd
F p d 3.657 in 3
in
FU pd
in 1.5
F 3.750 in

2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
d p d 6.000 in Kv p d 0.792 pd in
FIGURE 13-35B
ft
Problem 13-35
min
bg p d F 6339 psi
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 13-36
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-34 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.5 assuming a
steady torque, 20 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, quality index of 11, an AISI 4340 steel pinio
and an A-7-d nodular 40 iron gear.

7
Pinion
Np
pd
dpd n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jp

0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jp S fbp
1 1.5 10
range in in in
4

F pd
1 3
p d 6 in in

FL pd
2
F p d 1.804 in
in

FU pd
in 1
F 1.875 in
0
pd in
d p d 3.333 in Kv p d 0.927
FIGURE 13-36A
ft
Problem 13-36
min
bp p d F 16166 psi

Gear
Ka Wt p d p d Km
Kv p d F Jg

S atg KL
KT KR
FU p d
16
Upper limit
pd
FL p d
8
Lower limit
pd
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
Kv p d Jg S fbg
1 1.5 10
in in in

1
F pd
p d 6 in 4.5
in
FL pd
F p d 2.050 in in 3

FU pd
F 2.125 in

4 5 6 7 8 9 10
pd in
d p d 3.333 in Kv p d 0.927
FIGURE 13-36B
ft
Problem 13-36
min
bg p d F 13123 psi
1

S fbg
bg p d F
S fbp
bp p d F
PROBLEM 13-37

7
Pinion
a p d
1
Addendum
pd
Np Ng
2 pd 2 pd
Radii of curvature
2 2
cos n
cos( )
Length of action
Z p d
p d d p d
g d d g d d
Z pd

cos( )
pd
F p d tan( )


Axial pitch
pd
pn pd
p x p d
sin( )

cos b
cos b
mN p d F
F
Load sharing ratio
Lmin p d F
I p d F
cos( )
Geometry factor

p p 2 rp pd mN p d F
1 1
p d g d
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 76.878
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 (steel on CI). Cp 2100 psi
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 165000 psi
AISI 4140 steel
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.5 12
in in in

1
F' pd F
p d 5 in 3
in
FL pd
F' p d F 3.059 in in 2

F 3.125 in
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FIGURE 13-37A
Gear
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 80000 psi
Class 40 CI
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
2 2.5 12
in in in
6
F' pd F
4.5
1 in
p d 4 in

FL pd
in
F' p d F 3.887 in
FU pd
F 3.875 in
0
pd in
d p p d 4.500 in d g p d 9.750 in
FIGURE 13-37B
ft
min
23. The gear teeth are larger than for the pinion. This means that we will accept the gear requirements for the pinion
thus, for the set
1
2
Sfcg
cg pd F
2
Sfcp
cp d
PROBLEM 13-38
Statement: Size the helical gears in problem 13-34 for a surface factor of safety of at least 1.2 assuming a stead
torque, 20 deg pressure angle, full depth teeth, quality index of 11, an AISI 4340 steel pinion, and
A-7-d nodular iron gear.

7
Pinion
a p d
1
Addendum
pd
Np Ng
2 pd 2 pd
Radii of curvature
2 2
cos n
cos( )
Length of action
Z p d
p d d p d
g d d g d d
Z pd

cos( )
pd
F p d tan( )


Axial pitch
pd
pn pd
p x p d
sin( )

cos b
cos b
mN p d F
F
Load sharing ratio
Lmin p d F
I p d F
cos( )
Geometry factor
1 1 2 r p m p F
p p p d N d
p d g d
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n
2
Wt p d
H
Vt p d
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
v
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 92
B
Cv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 (steel on NI). Cp 2160 psi
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 160000 psi
AISI 4340 steel
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.5 16
in in in

1
F' pd F
p d 10 in 1.5
in
FL pd
F' p d F 1.598 in in 1

F 1.625 in
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FIGURE 13-38A
Gear
C a W t p d C m

0.056
S ac 100000 psi
A-7-d nodular iron
S ac CL
CT CR
2
Sfc
FU p d FL p d
16 8
pd pd c
C a W t p d C m
2
Cp
6 6.5 16
in in in
2
F' pd F
1.5
1 in
p d 10 in

FL pd
in
F' p d F 1.041 in
FU pd
F 1.125 in
0
22. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pd in
d p p d 2.000 in d g p d 7.900 in
FIGURE 13-38B
ft
min
cg p d F 88013 psi mp p d 1.69 mF p d F 2.067 n r p d 0.69
23. The gear teeth are smaller than for the pinion. This means that we will accept the pinnion requirements for the
gear thus, for the set
1
2
Sfcg
cg pd F
2
Sfcp
cp d
PROBLEM 13-39 _____
angles, pitch diameters, and gear forces if the 25-deg pressure angle pinion has 15 teeth of p d
= 4, and the transmitted power is 8 hp at 550 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 8 hp Gear ratio mG 3
1
Np
pd
Ng
pd
p atan
1
Pinion p 18.435 deg
mG
Note that p g 90.000 deg
H
p
2 Tp
dp

1
PROBLEM 13-40 _____
angles, pitch diameters, and gear forces if the 20-deg pressure angle pinion has 20 teeth of p d
= 8, and the transmitted power is 3 kW at 900 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 3 kW Gear ratio mG 6

1
Np
pd
Ng
pd
p atan
1
Pinion p 9.462 deg
mG
H
p
2 Tp
dp

1
PROBLEM 13-41 _____
Statement: A 90-deg spiral bevel gearset is needed to give an 8:1 reduction. Determine the pitch cone
10, and the transmitted power is 2.5 kW at 1100 pinion rpm.
Given: Power transmitted H 2.5 kW Gear ratio mG 8

1
Assumptions: The spiral angle is 35 deg.

Np
pd
Ng
pd
p atan
1
Pinion p 7.125 deg
mG
H
p
2 Tp
dp
5. Use equations 13.2 to calculate the pressure angle in the normal plane.
n atan( tan( ) cos( ) ) n 16.602 deg
6. Use equations 13.8b to calculate the pinion and gear forces.

Pinion
Wt
Wap tan n sin p sin( ) cos p Wap 118.85 lbf
cos( )
Wt
Wrp tan n cos p sin( ) sin p Wrp 81.96 lbf
cos( )
Gear
Wt
Wag tan n sin g sin( ) cos g Wag 50.18 lbf
cos( )
Wt
Wrg tan n cos g sin( ) sin g Wrg 135.37 lbf
cos( )
1
PROBLEM 13-42 _____
Statement: A 1-start wormset has d = 2.00 in, p x = 0.25 in, mG = 40. Find the lead, lead angle, worm gear
Given: Threads on worm Nw 1

Worm pitch diameter d 2.00 in Gear ratio mG 40
1. Use equation 13.13 to calculate the lead.
L p x Nw L 0.250 in
2. Use equation 13.12 to calculate the lead angle.
atan
L
2.279 deg
d
3. Calculate the number of teeth on the gear
Ng mG Nw Ng 40
4. Use equation 13.13 to calculate gear diameter.
p c Ng
p c p x d g d g 3.183 in

5. Use equation 13.17 to calculate the center distance.
d dg
C C 2.592 in
2

Nw
PROBLEM 13-43 _____
Statement: A 2-start wormset has d = 2.50 in, p x = 0.30 in, mG = 50. Find the lead, lead angle, worm gear

Worm pitch diameter d 2.50 in Gear ratio mG 50
L p x Nw L 0.600 in
atan
L
4.369 deg
d
Ng mG Nw Ng 100
p c Ng

d dg
C C 6.025 in
2

Nw
PROBLEM 13-44 _____
Statement: A 3-start wormset has d = 60 mm, p x = 12 mm, mG = 60. Find the lead, lead angle, worm gear

Worm pitch diameter d 60 mm Gear ratio mG 60
L p x Nw L 36.000 mm
atan
L
10.812 deg
d
Ng mG Nw Ng 180
p c Ng
p c p x d g d g 687.55 mm

d dg
C C 373.77 mm
2

Nw
PROBLEM 13-45 _____

13-42 if it runs at 800 worm rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min
Given: Threads on worm Nw 1 Pressure angle 20 deg
Worm pitch diameter d w 2.00 in Gear ratio mG 40
L p x Nw L 0.250 in
atan
L
2.279 deg
d w
Ng mG Nw Ng 40

p c Ng

dw dg
C C 2.592 in
2
2
Cm 0.0107 mG 56 mG 5145 Cm 0.814
nw dw
Vt Vt 419.2 fpm
2 cos( )
Vt
0.0011
fpm
Cv 0.659 e Cv 0.416
0.8
dg lbf
in in
0.450
Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.031
Wtg
Wf Wf 38.4 lbf
cos( ) cos( )
nw dg
o Wtg o 0.58 hp
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 0.49 hp
o l 1.07 hp
o
e e 54.2 %

dg
2
PROBLEM 13-46 _____

13-43 if it runs at 1200 worm rpm.
1
Units: fpm ft min
Given: Threads on worm Nw 2 Pressure angle 20 deg
Worm pitch diameter d w 2.50 in Gear ratio mG 50
L p x Nw L 0.600 in
atan
L
4.369 deg
d w
Ng mG Nw Ng 100
p c Ng

dw dg
C C 6.025 in
2
2
Cm 0.0107 mG 56 mG 5145 Cm 0.790
nw dw
Vt Vt 787.7 fpm
2 cos( )
10. Use this velocity to find the velocity factor Cv from equations 13.26. For this value of Vt, the second of these
0.571
Vt
Cv 13.31 Cv 0.295
fpm
0.8
dg lbf
in in
0.450

Vt
0.110
0.103 e fpm 0.012 0.023
Wtg
Wf Wf 59.0 lbf
cos( ) cos( )
nw dg
o Wtg o 4.32 hp
mG 2
l Vt Wf l 1.41 hp
o l 5.73 hp
o
e e 75.4 %

dg
2
PROBLEM 13-47 _____
Statement: A 2-start wormset has L = 2.00 in, C = 9.00 in, mG = 20, and the angle between the shafts is 90
deg. Find the pitch diameters of the worm and worm gear, the lead angle, and the axial pitch.
Given: Threads on worm Nw 2 Center distance C 9.00 in

Worm lead L 2.00 in Gear ratio mG 20
1. Determine the pitch diameter of the worm gear using equation 13.13.
L d g Nw d g
= L = d g =
Nw Ng Ng mG
Solving for d g,
mG L
d g d g 12.732 in

2. Determine the pitch diameter of the worm using equation 13.17 solved for d w.
d w 2 C d g d w 5.268 in
3. Calculate the lead angle using equation 13.12.
atan
L
6.891 deg
d w
4. Calculate the axial pitch using equation 13.13.
L
p x p x 1.000 in
Nw
PROBLEM 13-48 _____
Statement: A 5-start wormset has = 20 deg, C = 2.75 in, Ng = 33, and the angle between the shafts is 90
deg. Find the pitch diameters of the worm and worm gear, the lead, and the axial pitch.
Given: Threads on worm Nw 5 Center distance C 2.75 in

Worm lead angle 20 deg Teeth on worm gear Ng 33
1. Determine the pitch diameter of the worm gear using equations 13.12, 13.13, and 13.17.
L
tan ( ) = L = d w tan ( )
d w
L d g Nw
= L = d g
Nw Ng Ng
Eliminating L and solving for d w,
Nw
dw = dg
Ng tan ( )
Substitute into equation 13.17 and solve for d g,
Nw 2 C
dg = 2 C dg d g d g 3.883 in
Ng tan ( ) Nw
1
Ng tan ( )
2. Determine the pitch diameter of the worm using equation 13.17 solved for d w.
d w 2 C d g d w 1.617 in
3. Calculate the lead using equation 13.12.
L d w tan( ) L 1.848 in
4. Calculate the axial pitch using equation 13.13.
L
p x p x 0.370 in
Nw
PROBLEM 13-49
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-40 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.5 assuming a
5-year, 2-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 8, and an AISI 4140 steel pinion and gear.
Units: yr 2080 hr

Pinion
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
H
np
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Kv p d A

A Vt p d
min

ft
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks

np 9
2
0.0323
S atp 40000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
Np
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
8 8.5 18
range in in in

p d from Table 12-2. 4
1
p d 10 in
3
F pd
in
F p d 1.295 in
FLover3 pd 2
F 1.375 in

8 10 12 14 16 18
pd in
d p p d 2.000 in Kv p d 0.845
Vt p d 471
ft FIGURE 13-49A
Problem 13-49
bp p d F 12935 psi
GEAR
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
Np
F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
14 14.5 24
in in in

1
p d 20 in
1.5
F pd

common fractional value. 0.5
F 1.000 in
0
21. Then, the parameters that depend on p d and F are: 14 16 18 20 22 24
pd in
d g p d 6.000 in Kv p d 0.884
FIGURE 13-49B
ft Graph of Face Width and Limits for the Gear in
min Problem 13-49
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
S fbp
bp p d F

S fbp
bg p d F
PROBLEM 13-50
Statement: Size the bevel gears in problem 13-40 for a minimum safety factor of 1.8 for any mode of failure
of pinion or gear assuming a 5-year, 2-shift life, steady torque, quality index of 8, and an AISI
4140 steel pinion and gear.
Units: yr 2080 hr
Assumptions: 1. If both pinion and gear are the same material, it will only be necessary to determine the
pinion size as it will be governing for the set.

Np Ng
pd pd
Np
2 pd
H
np
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
4. Write the equation for the dynamic load factor, Cv B 0.63
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Cvp p d
A

A Vtp pd
min

ft

0.5
6. Choose an elastic coefficient from Table 12-18 (steel Cp 2100 psi Cb 0.634
on steel) and a stress adjustment constant.
np 9
2
0.056
Hardness CH 1
S acp 167500 psi
S acp CL
CT CR

2
TD p d F
F


1 otherwise

z pd F
2 TD pd F Tp Ca Cmd

2
Np Sfc
Np c
6 p d sin atan
Face width
Ng

z pd F
2 TD p d F Tp
2
Cp Cb Ca Cmd

8 8.5 18
in in in
4
Table 12-2.

1 3
p d 10 in F' pd F
in
FLover3 pd 2
F' p d F 1.217 in
in
15. Round this to the decimal equivalent of a common 1
fractional value.
F 1.250 in 0
8 10 12 14 16 18
pd in
d p p d 2.000 in d g p d 12.000 in
FIGURE 13-50

ft
min
17. When both pinion and gear are of the same material, the stress in the gear will always be lower than in the
pinion. Therefore, the face width and diametral pitch found for the pinion should also be used for the gear.
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
2
Sfcp
Pinion factor of safety Nfcp p F Nfcp 1.8
cp d
PROBLEM 13-51
Statement: Size the spiral gears in problem 13-41 for a bending factor of safety of at least 2.0 assuming a
Units: yr 2080 hr
Power to be transmitted (kW) H 3 kW Reliability R 0.99
Pinion
1. Determine the bending geometry factor, J (Figure 13-8) Jp 0.360 (assumed)
2. Write the equations for pitch diameter, pitchline velocity, and transmitted torque in terms of the
unknown diametral pitch, p d. Note that, in Mathcad, unit conversion factors are not included.
Np Ng
pd pd
d p p d n p
2
H
np
3. Set the application, size, and type factors. Ka 1 Ks 1 Kx 1.15
B 0.25 12 Qv
0.6667
A 50 56 ( 1 B) A 70.721
B
Kv p d
A

A Vt p d
min

ft
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks

np 9
2
0.0323
S atp 42000 psi
S atp KL
KT KR
Np
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
2 2.5 20
range in in in
4

3
F pd
1
p d 16 in in
11. The calculated value of F is FLover3 pd 2

F p d 1.447 in in
1
0
F 1.500 in 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
pd in
FIGURE 13-51A
d p p d 1.313 in Kv p d 0.858
Problem 13-51
Vt p d 378
ft
min
bp p d F 16874 psi
GEAR
2 Tp pd Ka Km Ks
Np
F = L/3 FLover3 p d
Np
6 p d sin atan
Ng
S fb
Safety factor Nfb =
b
Face width F p d
10 11.5 50
in in in
2


1.5
F pd
1
p d 32 in in
1
F p d 0.694 in in
0.5
0
F 0.750 in 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
pd in
FIGURE 13-51B
d g p d 5.250 in Kv p d 0.894
Problem 13-51

ft
min
1
Np
Ng
d p p d L
2 sin p 3
S fbp
bp p d F

S fbp
bg p d F
PROBLEM 14-1
Statement: A linear spring is to give 200 N at its maximum deflection of 150 mm and 40 N at its minimum
deflection of 50 mm. What is the spring rate?
Given: Working force Fwork 200 N Initial force Finit 40 N

Working deflection ywork 150 mm Initial deflection yinit 50 mm
1. Spring rate is the slope of the load vs. deflection function. Thus, for a linear spring
Fwork Finit N
Spring rate k k 1.60
ywork yinit mm
PROBLEM 14-2
Statement: Find the ultimate tensile strength, the ultimate shear strength, and the torsional yield strength
of a 1.8-mm-dia, A229 oil-tempered steel wire.
Given: Wire diameter d 1.8 mm

1. From Table 14-4, for A229
A 1831.2 MPa b 0.1833
2. Using equation 14.3,
b
S ut A d

mm
3. From Table 14-6, with a factor of 0.50,

Maximum torsional
yield strength S ys 0.50 S ut S ys 822 MPa
Ultimate shear
strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 1102 MPa
PROBLEM 14-3
Statement: Find the torsional yield and ultimate shear strength of an 0.105-in-dia, unset A230 wire to be
used in a helical compression spring.
Given: Wire diameter d 0.105 in d 2.667 mm

1. ASTM A230 is not listed in Table 14-4, but it is shown in Figure 14-3. At the wire diameter given, it has a
tensile strength that is approximately the same as that for A229. From Table 14-4, for A229
A 146.78 ksi b 0.1833

b
S ut A
d
in
Maximum torsional
yield strength S ys 0.50 S ut S ys 111 ksi
Ultimate shear
strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 149 ksi
PROBLEM 14-4
Statement: What is the torsional fatigue strength of the wire in Problem 14-3 at N = 5E6 cycles?

6
Cycle life N 5 10

A 146.78 ksi b 0.1833

b
S ut A
d
in
3. The required life falls between the values given in Table 14-7 for 1E6 and 1E7 cycles. We will use an
exponential fit to the data for interpolation. Using equation 6.10
6
b
At 1E6 cycles 0.40 S ut = a 10
= a 10
b
7
At 1E7 cycles 0.38 S ut
4. Solving both equations for a, equating the results and solving for b
0.40 S ut 0.38 S ut
=
106 107
b b
b
107
b log( 10) = log
= 0.38 0.38

106 0.40 0.40

b log
0.38 1
b 0.022
0.40 log( 10)
0.40 S ut
a a 120.726 ksi
106
b
5. Interpolating,
Fatigue strength b
at 5E6 cycles S fs a N S fs 85.6 ksi
PROBLEM 14-5
Statement: Draw the Modified Goodman diagram for the wire of Problem 14-3.
6
Cycle life N 5 10

A 146.78 ksi b 0.1833

b
S ut A
d
Tensile strength S ut 221.9 ksi
in
Maximum torsional
yield strength S ys 0.50 S ut S ys 110.9 ksi

Ultimate shear
strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 148.6 ksi
5. Using Table 14-7 and a cycle life of 1E6, for unpeened wire
Torsional fatigue
strength (R=0) S fw .40 S ut S fw 88.7 ksi
6. From equation (d) in Example 14-2,
S fw S us
S fs 0.5 S fs 63.3 ksi
S us 0.5 S fw
S fs
7. Now, the equation for the Goodman line is a m m S fs
S us
8. Plotting this over the range m 0 ksi 10 ksi 150 ksi
100
Alternating shear stress
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150
Mean shear stress
PROBLEM 14-6
Statement: What are the spring rate and spring index of a squared and ground compression spring with the
data given below?
Given: Wire diameter d 1 mm Total coils Nt 12
Mean coil dia D 10 mm
Assumptions: The spring wire is steel so that G 80.8 GPa.

1. From Figure 14-9, the number of active coils is Na Nt 2 Na 10

4
d G N
3 mm
8 D Na

D
Spring Index C C 10
d
PROBLEM 14-7
Statement: Find the natural frequency of the spring in Problem 14-6.
Given: Wire diameter d 1 mm Total coils Nt 12
Mean coil dia D 10 mm
3 3
Assumptions: The spring wire is steel so that G 80.8 GPa and 0.28 lbf in , 76005 N m

4
d G N
3 mm
8 D Na

D
Spring Index C C 10
d
4. Calculate the natural frequency using equation 14.11c.
2 d G g
Natural frequency fn fn 363.4 Hz
N a 2 32
D
PROBLEM 14-8
outside dia (OD) by 0.22 m inside dia (ID) by 3.23 m long and is on a simply supported, hollow,
steel shaft with 22-cm OD x 20-cm ID and as long as the paper roll. Find the spring rate of the
shaft and the fundamental natural frequency of the shaft-roll assembly.
kg
Given: Paper density 984 Roll dimensions:
3
m
Shaft outside dia od 220 mm Outside diameter OD 1.50 m
Shaft inside dia id 200 mm Inside diameter ID 0.22 m
Young's modulus E 207 GPa Length L 3.23 m
Assumptions: The shaft (beam) supporting the paper roll is simply-supported at the ends and is the same
length as the paper roll. The paper acts as a distributed load over the length of the shaft.
1. The mass of the paper roll is equal to its volume times the paper density.
mroll

4
2
OD ID L
2 mroll 5495.74 kg
2. The area moment of inertia of the shaft is I

4
od id
4 7
I 3.645 10 mm
4
64
3. The spring rate (stiffness) of the shaft can be found from the deflection equation in Figure B-2(b) in Appendix B
When the distributed load covers the entire span, the maximum deflection is
4 3
5 w L 5 W L W 384 E I
ymax = = k= =
384 E I 384 E I y 3
5 L
384 E I 4 N
Solving for k, k k 1.720 10
3 mm
5 L
4. Use equations 3.4 to find the natural frequency of the system.
k
n rad
mroll n 55.9
sec
n
fn
2 fn 8.90 Hz
PROBLEM 14-9
Statement: Determine the minimum allowable bending radius for an 50 HRC strip steel spring of 1-mm
thickness.
Given: Thickness t 1 mm
1. From Table 14-5, the bend factor for spring steel with a 50 HRC is bf 5
2. Use the bend factor definition given in the text to calculate the minimum bend radius.
bf t
rmin rmin 2.5 mm
2
PROBLEM 14-10
Statement: An over-hung diving board is shown in Figure P14-1a. A 100-kg person is standing at the free end
Assume cross-section dimensions of 305 mm x 32 mm and a material E = 10.3 GPa. What is the
spring rate and fundamental natural frequency of the diver-board combination?
2000 = L
Given: Weight of person W 100 kgf R1 P

Board dimensions:
Distance to support a 0.7 m
Length of board L 2 m
R2
t 32 mm 700 = a
Young's modulus E 10.3 GPa
Assumptions: The weight of the board is negligible

FIGURE 14-10
be ignored. Free Body Diagram for Problem 14-10

3
w t 5 4
1. The area moment of inertia of the board is I I 8.329 10 mm
12
2. The spring rate (stiffness) of the board can be found from the deflection equation in Figure B-3(a) in Appendix
B. When the load is at the end of the beam, the maximum deflection is
F L 2 F 3 E I
ymax = ( L a) k= =
3 E I y 2
L ( L a )
3 E I N
Solving for k, k k 7.614
2 mm
L ( L a )
k g
n rad
W n 8.73
sec
n
fn
2 fn 1.39 Hz
PROBLEM 14-11
Statement: Design a helical compression spring for a static load of 45 lb at a deflection of 1.25 in with a
safety factor of 2.5. Use C = 7.5. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture the
spring.
6
Given: Working force Fwork 45 lbf Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi
Working deflection ywork 1.25 in Safety factor Ns 2.5
Spring index C 7.5
Design choices:
Clash allowance 0.15 Set removed Km 0.65
ASTM A228 wire A 184.649 ksi
b 0.1625
Fwork lbf
1. Determine the desired spring rate. k k 36
ywork in
2. Use the design equation from Example 14-3A (Mathcad Supplement) to determine the wire diameter.
1
2 b
8 Ns ( C 0.5) Fwork ( 1 )
d in
Km A in
2

Wire diameter d 0.125 in Let d 0.125 in
3. Calculate the mean coil diameter and number of active coils.

Mean coil dia D C d D 0.938 in
4
Number of active d G
coils Na Na 11.831
3
8 D k Na 11.75
Note that we round it to the nearest 1/4 coil as the manufacturing tolerance cannot achieve better than that
accuracy. We must now calculate the actual (corrected) spring rate:
4
Corrected spring d G lbf
rate k k 36.249
3 in
8 D Na
4. Assume squared and ground ends making the total number of coils, from Figure 14-9:
Total coils Nt Na 2 Nt 13.75
5. The shut height can now be determined.

Shut height Ls d Nt Ls 1.719 in
6. The free length (see Figure 14-8) can now be found from
Deflection
to shut height yshut ywork ywork yshut 1.438 in
Free length Lf Ls yshut Lf 3.156 in
7. To check for buckling, two ratios need to be calculated, Lf/D and y max/Lf.
Lf
Slenderness ratio sr sr 3.367
D
ywork
Deflection ratio y' y' 0.396
Lf
Take these two values to Figure 14-14 and find that their coordinates are safely within the zones that are stable
against buckling for either end-condition case.
8. The inside and outside coil diameters are
Inside coil dia Di D d Di 0.813 in
Outside coil dia Do D d Do 1.063 in
9. The smallest hole and largest pin that should be used with this spring are
Smallest hole holemin Do 0.05 D holemin 1.11 in
Largest pin pin max Di 0.05 D pin max 0.77 in

10. The total weight of the spring is
3
Weight density 0.28 lbf in
2 2
d D Nt
Weight Wt Wt 0.14 lbf
4
11. We now have a complete design specification for this A228 wire spring:
Wire diameter d 0.125 in

Outside diameter Do 1.063 in
Total coils Nt 13.75 ends squared and ground
Free length Lf 3.156 in
PROBLEM 14-12
2000
1300 = L
Given: Weight at free end P 100 kgf
Board dimensions: P
Length of board L 1.3 m
t 32 mm M1
R1
Young's modulus E 10.3 GPa
700
Assumptions: The weight of the board is negligible
compared to the applied load and so can FIGURE 14-12
be ignored. Free Body Diagram for Problem 14-12

3
w t 5 4
1. The area moment of inertia of the board is I I 8.329 10 mm
12
2. The spring rate (stiffness) of the board can be found from the deflection equation in Figure B-1(a) in Appendix
B. When the load is at the end of the beam, the maximum deflection is
3
F L F 3 E I
ymax = k= =
3 E I y 3
L
3 E I N
Solving for k, k k 11.71
3 mm
L
k g rad
n n 10.82
P sec
n
fn fn 1.72 Hz
2
PROBLEM 14-13
Statement: For the data given below, find Na, D, Lf, Lshut, yinitial, and the minimum hole diameter for the
spring. Infinite life is desired with a safety factor of 1.4. Choose an acceptable spring index.
Setting will be done.

Given: Minimum force Fmin 50 lbf Chrome-vanadium wire properties:
Maximum force Fmax 250 lbf Diameter d 0.312 in
Working deflection y 0.75 in Unpeened
Clash allowance 0.15 Set after winding
6
Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi Squared ends

1. Find the the mean and alternating forces from equation 14.15a:
Fmax Fmin
Alternating force Fa Fa 100.0 lbf
2
Fmax Fmin
Mean force Fm Fm 150.0 lbf
2
2. Assume a spring index (found by trial and error to get the correct safety factor) and calculate the mean coil
diameter D from equation 14.5.
Spring index C 4.4
Mean coil diameter D C d D 1.373 in
3. Find the direct shear factor Ks and use it to calculate the shear stress i at the initial deflection (lowest defined
force), and the mean stress m.
0.5
Direct shear factor Ks 1 Ks 1.114
C
8 Fmin D
Stress at Fmin i Ks i 6.4 ksi
3
d
8 Fm D
Stress at Fm m Ks m 19.2 ksi
3
d
4. Find the Wahl factor Kw and use it to calculate the alternating shear stress a in the coil.
4 C 1 0.615
Wahl factor Kw Kw 1.36
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
Alternating stress a Kw a 15.7 ksi
3
d
5. Find the ultimate tensile strength of this wire material from equation 14.3 and Table 14-4 and use it to find the
ultimate shear strength from equation 14.4 and the torsional yield strength from Table 14-6, assuming that the
set has been removed and using the low end of the recommended range.
From Table 14-4, for A228 music wire A 173.128 ksi b 0.1453
b
S ut A
Ultimate tensile d
strength S ut 205.1 ksi

in
Shear yield
strength S ys 0.65 S ut S ys 133.3 ksi
Ultimate shear
strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 137.4 ksi
6. Find the wire endurance limit for unpeened springs in repeated loading from equation 14.12 and convert it to fu
reversed endurance strength with equation 14.16c.
Wire endurance limit S ew 45 ksi
S ew S us
Fully reversed S es 0.5 S es 26.91 ksi
endurance limit S us 0.5 S ew
7. The safety factor is calculated from equation 14.16b.
Fatigue factor S es S us i
Nfs Nfs 1.41
of safety S es m i S us a
8. The spring rate is defined from the two specified forces at their relative deflection.
Fmax Fmin lbf

y in
9. To get the defined spring rate, the number of active coils must satisfy equation 14.7, solving for Na yields:
4
coils Na Na 19.744 Na 19.75
3
8 D k
accuracy. Having rounded the number of active coils, we must now calculate the spring rate using equation 14.
4
Corrected d G lbf
spring rate k k 266.59
3 in
8 D Na
10. For squared ends the total number of coils, from Figure 14-9:

Shut height Lshut d Nt Lshut 6.786 in
12. The initial deflection to reach the smaller of the two loads is
Fmin
Initial deflection yinit yinit 0.188 in
k
13. For the given clash allowance of 15% of the working deflection:
Clash allowance yclash y yclash 0.112 in
Lf Lshut yclash y yinit Lf 7.836 in
15. The deflection to the shut height is

yshut Lf Lshut yshut 1.05 in
16. The force at this shut height is

Fshut k yshut Fshut 279.9 lbf
17. The shut-height stress and safety factor are

8 Fshut D
Stress at Fshut shut Ks shut 35.9 ksi
3
d
Safety factor at S ys
working deflection Ns Ns 3.71
shut
which is acceptable.
18. To check for buckling, two ratios need to be calculated, Lf/D and ymax /Lf.
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf
19. The inside and outside coil diameters and minimum hole dia are
Minimum hole dia d hole Do 0.05 D d hole 1.753 in
20. Summarizing the results:

Number of active coils Nt 21.75
Mean coil diameter D 1.373 in
Shut length Lshut 6.786 in
Deflection to Fmin yinit 0.188 in
Minimum hole dia d hole 1.753 in
PROBLEM 14-14
Assume a 60-lb child and a spring constant of 100 lb/in. Design the helical compression spring to
survive jumping 2 in off the ground with a dynamic safety factor of 2 for a finite life of 5E4 cycles
Determine the fundamental natural frequency of the system.
1
Given: Weight of child W 60 lbf Spring constant k 100 lbf in
4 6
Spring life Ncycles 5 10 Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi
Design Choices:
Clash allowance 0.15 Music wire properties:
Spring index C 7 Strength A 184.65 ksi b 0.1625
Squared and ground ends Set after winding, unpeened
Design safety factor Nfsd 1.5

1. From Problem 3-14, Maximum force Fmax 224.2 lbf
2. Let the force of holding the pads against the feet be Minimum force Fmin 20 lbf
Fmax Fmin
3. Then, the working deflection is y y 2.042 in
k
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2
5. Calculate the factors necessary to find the wire diameter.
0.5
Direct shear Ks 1 Ks 1.071
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
factor Kys 0.60 (Table 14-6, set removed)
Fatigue strength
factor Kfw 0.37 (Table 14-7, unpeened)
Ultimate shear
strength factor KU 0.67 (equation 14.4)
6. Solving for the wire diameter using an equation similar to equation g in Example 14-4A (Mathcad Supplement)
where S fw is used in equation 14.16b instead of S es and S fw = Kfw S ut.
1
2 b
8 C Nfsd Nfsd 1
d K s Fm Ks Fmin in
KU A in2 Nfsd
U Kfw
2 K
K w Fa
Kfw
d 0.281 in Let the wire diameter be d 0.281 in
7. Calculate the ultimate tensile strength, ultimate shear strength, and the fatigue strength at 5E4 cycles.
b
S ut A
d
Ultimate tensile strength S ut 227 ksi

in
Ultimate shear strength S us KU S ut S us 152 ksi
Wire fatigue strength S fw Kfw S ut S fw 84.0 ksi
Shear yield strength S ys Kys S ut S ys 136 ksi
S fw S us
Fatigue strength S fs 0.5 S fs 58.0 ksi
S us 0.5 S fw
8. Calculate the mean coil diameter D from equation 14.5.

9. Calculate the shear stress i at the initial deflection (lowest defined force), and the mean stress m.
8 Fmin D
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
10. Calculate the alternating shear stress a in the coil.
8 F a D
3
d
Fatigue factor S fs S us i
Nfs Nfs 1.50
of safety S fs m i S us a
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G lbf
3 in
8 D Na
13. For squared and ground ends the total number of coils, from Figure 14-9:

Fmin
k
16. For the given clash allowance factor:




8 Fshut D
3
d
shut height Ns Ns 2.20
shut
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf
Maximum pin dia d pin Di 0.05 D d pin 1.588 in

Number of active coils Nt 13.75 Deflection to Fmin yinit 0.2 in
Mean coil diameter D 1.967 in Maximum pin dia d pin 1.588 in
Free length Lf 6.412 in Shut length Lshut 3.864 in
PROBLEM 14-15
Statement: Draw the Modified Goodman diagram for the spring data below and find its safety factor.
Given: Fatigue strength (R=0) S fw 40 ksi Alternating shear stress a 12 ksi
Ultimate shear strength S us 200 ksi Mean shear stress m 95 ksi
Initial shear stress i 75 ksi

1. From equation (d) in Example 14-2,
S fw S us
S fs 0.5 S fs 22.2 ksi
S us 0.5 S fw
S fs
2. Now, the equation for the Goodman line is 'a 'm 'm S fs
S us
a
Equation for load line aL 'm 'm
m
3. Plotting this over the range 'm 0 ksi 10 ksi 200 ksi
25
m
20 ksi
15
a
10 ksi
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
Mean shear stress
4. Use equation 14.16b to calculate the safety factor.
S fs S us i
Nfs Nfs 0.98
S fs m i S us a
PROBLEM 14-16
Statement: Problem 6-16 describes a track for bowling balls that are 4.5-in dia and 2.5-lb weight. Design a
spring-loaded launcher that will allow quadriplegic bowlers to launch the balls down the
bowling alley from the point where the track of Problem 6-16 drops them with only a switch
closure that releases the launcher. The launcher's plunger will be cocked by an assistant and
the energy stored in the helical compression spring, which you will design, will drive the
plunger into the ball and roll it down the bowling alley.
6
Given: Ball weight Wball 2.5 lbf Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi
Design Choices:
Clash allowance 0.10 Music wire properties:
Spring index C 12 Strength A 184.65 ksi b 0.1625
Design safety factor Nfsd 2 Set after winding, unpeened
1
Ball initial velocity vi 150 in sec Squared and ground ends
Deflection to Fmax y 5.000 in

1. Determine the required spring rate by equating the spring potential energy with the ball's initial velocity when
the spring force reaches zero.
1 2 1 2
PE = KE k y = mball vi
2 2
2
Wball 3 lbf sec
mball mball 6.475 10
g in
2
vi lbf
k mball k 5.828
y in
2. Determine the maximum spring force and set the minimum force to zero.
Fmin 0 lbf Fmax k y Fmax 29.138 lbf

Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
endurance limit S ew 45 ksi (unpeened)
5. Solve for the wire diameter using equation g in Example 14-4A (Mathcad Supplement).
Guess d 0.2 in
Given
1
2 b
8 C Nfsd Nfsd 1
d= Ks Fm Ks Fmin in
2 Nfsd
0.67 A in
d
b
0.67 in
A

1 Kw Fa
0.50 S ew
d Find ( d ) d 0.209 in Let the wire diameter be d 0.207 in
6. Calculate the ultimate tensile strength, ultimate shear strength, and the shear endurance limit.
b
S ut A
d
in
S ew S us
Fatigue strength S es 0.5 S es 26.2 ksi
S us 0.5 S ew

8 Fmin D
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 2.0
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G lbf
3 in
8 D Na

Fmin
k

8 Fshut D
3
d
shut
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf
Take these two values to Figure 14-14 and find that their coordinates are safely within the zone that is stable
against buckling for parallel ends.
Maximum pin dia d pin Di 0.05 D d pin 2.153 in

Number of active coils Nt 31.50
Mean coil diameter D 2.484 in
Shut length Lshut 6.520 in
Deflection to Fmin yinit 0 in
Maximum pin dia d pin 2.153 in
PROBLEM 14-17
Statement: Design a helical extension spring to handle a dynamic load that varies from 175 N to 225 N
over 8.5 mm working deflection. Use music wire and standard hooks. The forcing frequency
is 1500 rpm. Infinite life is desired. Minimize the package size. Choose appropriate safety
factors against fatigue, yielding, and surging.
Given: Minimum force Fmin 175 N Life L

Maximum force Fmax 225 N Shear modulus G 80.8 GPa
Working deflection y 8.5 mm Forcing freq f 1500 rpm
Design Choices:
Fatigue safety factor Nfb 1.5 Spring index C 8
Wire endurance limit S ew 310 MPa Wire strength A 2153.5 MPa
b 0.1625

1. Find the mean and alternating loads.
Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 25.0 N
2
Fmax Fmin
Fm Fm 200.0 N
2
2. Calculate the hook bending factor.

2
4 C C 1
Kb Kb 1.103
4 C ( C 1)
3. Solve for d by iteration using an equation derived from the safety factor equation for bending in the hooks.
1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
d= Nfb Fm Nfb 1 Fmin
A
0.577 0.67 A db 0.5 S ew

Nfb Fa 0.5 0.67 S ew

1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
RHS( d ) Nfb Fm Nfb 1 Fmin mm
A mm2 b

0.577 0.67 A
d
0.5 S ew

Nfb Fa
mm
0.5 0.67 S ew

d 1.000 mm RHS( d ) 3.561 mm

d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.329 mm
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.340 mm
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.339 mm d 3.5 mm
4. Calculate the mean coil diameter.
Mean coil diameter D C d D 28 mm
5. Use the assumed value of C to find an appropiate value of initial coil stress i from equations 14.21:
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 75.8 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 126.9 MPa
i1 i2
i i 101.3 MPa
2
6. Find the direct shear factor Ks :
0.5
C
7. Use the value of i from (c) in equation 14.8 to find the corresponding initial coil-tension force Fi:
3
d i
Fi Fi 57.3 N
8 K s D
Check that this force is less than the required minimum applied force Fmin, which in this case, it is. Any applied
force smaller than Fi will not deflect the spring.
8. Use the direct shear factor Ks and previously assumed values to find the mean stress m:
8 Fm D
Stress at Fm m Ks m 353.4 MPa
3
d
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
Alternating stress a Kw a 49.2 MPa
3
d
ultimate shear strength from equation 14.4 and the torsional yield strength for the coil body from Table 14-10,
assuming no set removal.
b
S ut A d
Ultimate tensile strength S ut 1756.8 MPa

mm
Shear yield strength S ys 0.45 S ut S ys 790.6 MPa
Ultimate shear strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 1177.1 MPa
11. Find the wire endurance limit for unpeened springs from equation 14.13 and convert it to fully reversed
endurance strength with equation 14.16c.
S ew S us
Fully reversed S es 0.5 S es 178.51 MPa
12. The fatigue safety factor for the coils in torsion is calculated from equation 14.16b.
Minimum stress min m a min 304.2 MPa
S es S us min
Fatigue safety factor Nfs Nfs 2.34
S es m min S us a
Note that the minimum stress due to force Fmin is used in this calculation, not the coil-winding stress from step 5
13. The stresses in the end hooks also need to be determined. The bending stresses in the hook are found from
equation 14.23:
2 R1 2 D
C1 = = =C C1 C C1 8.00
d 2 d
2
4 C1 C1 1
Kb Kb 1.103
4 C1 C1 1
16 D Fa 4 Fa
a Kb a 94.29 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fm 4 Fm
m Kb m 754.3 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fmin 4 Fmin
min Kb min 660.01 MPa
3 2
d d
14. Convert the torsional endurance strength to a tensile endurance strength with the von Mises relationship and
use it and the ultimate tensile strength in equation 14.16 to find a fatigue safety factor for the hook in bending:
S es
S e S e 309.37 MPa
0.577
S e S ut min
Nfb Nfb 1.74
S e m min S ut a
15. The torsional stresses in the hook are found from equation 14.24 using an assumed value of C2 5.
C2 d
R2 R2 8.75 mm
2
4 C2 1
Kw2 Kw2 1.188
4 C2 4
8 Fa D
Ba Kw2 Ba 49.4 MPa
3
d
8 Fm D
Bm Kw2 Bm 395.0 MPa
3
d
8 Fmin D
Bmin Kw2 Bmin 345.6 MPa
3
d
16. The fatigue safety factor for the hook in torsion is calculated from equation 14.16b.
S es S us Bmin
Nfs Nfs 2.22
S es Bm Bmin S us Ba
Fmax Fmin N
y m
4
d G
Number of active coils Na Na 11.737 Na 11.75
3
8 D k
Corrected spring rate 4
d G N
k k 5876.0
3 m
8 D Na
19. The total number of coils in the body and the body length are
Body length Lb Nt d Lb 44.6 mm
20. The free length can now be determined. The length of a standard hook is equal to the coil inside diameter:
Hook length Lhook D d Lhook 24.5 mm
Free length Lf Lb 2 Lhook Lf 93.6 mm
21. The initial coil tension force must be found again in order to obtain the deflection to reach the larger of the two
loads.
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 75.8 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 126.9 MPa
i1 i2
i i 101.3 MPa
2
3
d i
Fi Fi 57.3 N
8 K s D
Fmax Fi
ymax ymax 28.53 mm
k

Inside coil dia Di D d Di 24.50 mm
Outside coil dia Do D d Do 31.50 mm
23. The weight of the spring's active coils is found from equation 14.11b and is
3
2 2
d D Na
Weight Wa Wa 0.756 N
4
24. The natural frequency of this spring is found from equation 14.11a and is:
Natural frequency 1 k g
fn fn 138.1 Hz
2 Wa
25. The ratio between the natural frequency and the forcing frequency is
f
Forcing frequency ff ff 25 Hz
2
fn
Frequency ratio 5.5 which could be higher.
ff
26. We now have a complete design specification for this A228-wire spring:
Wire diameter d 3.50 mm Total coils Nt 12.75
Outside diameter Do 31.50 mm Free length Lf 93.63 mm
Standard hooks
PROBLEM 14-18
Statement: Design a helical extension spring with standard hooks to handle a dynamic load that varies from
300 lb to 500 lb over 2 in working deflection. Use chrome-vanadium wire. The forcing
frequency is 1000 rpm. Infinite life is desired. Minimize the package size. Choose appropriate
safety factors against fatigue, yielding, and surging.
Given: Minimum force Fmin 300 lbf Life L

6
Maximum force Fmax 500 lbf Shear modulus G 11.7 10 psi
Working deflection y 2.00 in Forcing freq. f 1000 rpm
Design Choices:
Fatigue safety factor Nfb 1.28 Spring index C 5.5
Wire endurance limit S ew 45 ksi Wire strength A 173.13 ksi
b 0.1453
Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 100.0 lbf
2
Fmax Fmin
Fm Fm 400.0 lbf
2
2
4 C C 1
Kb Kb 1.157
4 C ( C 1)
1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
A
0.577 0.67 A db 0.5 S ew


1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
RHS( d ) Nfb Fm Nfb 1 Fmin in
A in2
b
0.577 0.67 A 0.5 S ew

d

in
Nfb Fa
0.5 0.67 S ew

d 0.1 in RHS( d ) 0.438 in

d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.404 in
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.406 in
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.406 in d 0.406 in
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 14.8 ksi
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 23.3 ksi
i1 i2
i i 19.0 ksi
2
0.5
C
3
d i
Fi Fi 205.4 lbf
8 K s D
Check that this force is less than the required minimum applied force Fmin, which in this case, it is. Any
applied force smaller than Fi will not deflect the spring.
8 Fm D
3
d
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
3
d
b
S ut A
d
Ultimate tensile strength S ut 197.4 ksi
in
Shear yield strength S ys 0.50 S ut S ys 98.7 ksi
Ultimate shear strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 132.2 ksi
S ew S us
Minimum stress min m a min 26.214 ksi
S es S us min
S es m min S us a
Note that the minimum stress due to force Fmin is used in this calculation, not the coil-winding stress from
step 5.
equation 14.23:
2 R1 2 D
C1 = = =C C1 C C1 5.50
d 2 d
2
4 C1 C1 1
Kb Kb 1.157
4 C1 C1 1
16 D Fa 4 Fa
a Kb a 20.43 ksi
3 2
d d
16 D Fm 4 Fm
m Kb m 81.7 ksi
3 2
d d
16 D Fmin 4 Fmin
min Kb min 61.28 ksi
3 2
d d
S es
S e S e 46.99 ksi
0.577
S e S ut min
Nfb Nfb 1.28
S e m min S ut a
C2 d
R2 R2 1.015 in
2
4 C2 1
Kw2 Kw2 1.188
4 C2 4
8 Fa D
Ba Kw2 Ba 10.1 ksi
3
d
8 Fm D
Bm Kw2 Bm 40.4 ksi
3
d
8 Fmin D
Bmin Kw2 Bmin 30.3 ksi
3
d
S es S us Bmin
Nfs Nfs 1.72
Fmax Fmin lbf

y in
4
d G
3
8 D k
4
d G lbf
Corrected spring rate k k 99.8
3 in
8 D Na
Body length Lb Nt d Lb 14.92 in
Hook length Lhook D d Lhook 1.827 in
Free length Lf Lb 2 Lhook Lf 18.57 in
21. The initial coil tension force must be found again in order to obtain the deflection to reach the larger of the
two loads.
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 14.8 ksi
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 23.3 ksi
i1 i2
i i 19.0 ksi
2
3
d i
Fi Fi 205.4 lbf
8 K s D
Fmax Fi
ymax ymax 2.95 in
k
3
2 2
d D Na
Weight Wa Wa 9.091 lbf
4
fn fn 32.6 Hz
2 Wa
f
Forcing frequency ff ff 16.667 Hz
2
fn
ff
Wire diameter d 0.41 in Total coils Nt 36.75
Outside diameter Do 2.64 in Free length Lf 18.57 in
Standard hooks
PROBLEM 14-19
Statement: Design a helical compression spring to handle a dynamic load that varies from 780 N to 1000 N
over a 22-mm working deflection. Use squared and ground, unpeened music wire and a 10%
clash allowance. The forcing frequency is 500 rpm. Infinite life is desired. Minimize the
package size. Choose appropriate safety factors against fatigue, yielding, and surging.
Given: Minimum force Fmin 780 N Forcing freq. f 500 rpm

Working deflection y 22 mm Clash factor 0.10
Music wire properties:
Strength A 2153.5 MPa b 0.1625
Set after winding, unpeened
Design Choices:
Design safety factor Nfsd 1.1 Spring index C 9

Fmax Fmin
Alternating force Fa Fa 110.0 N
2
Fmax Fmin
Mean force Fm Fm 890.0 N
2

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
endurance limit S ew 310 MPa (unpeened)
Guess d 5 mm
Given
1
2 b
8 C Nfsd Nfsd 1
d= Ks Fm Ks Fmin mm
2 Nfsd
0.67 A mm
d
b

0.67 mm
A
1 Kw Fa
0.50 S ew
d Find ( d ) d 6.172 mm Let the wire diameter be d 6.5 mm

b
S ut A d
Ultimate tensile strength S ut 1589 MPa

mm
Ultimate shear strength S us KU S ut S us 1064 MPa
Shear yield strength S ys Kys S ut S ys 953 MPa
S ew S us
Fatigue strength S es 0.5 S es 181.4 MPa
S us 0.5 S ew

Mean coil diameter D C d D 58.5 mm
8 Fmin D
Stress at Fmin i Ks i 446.6 MPa
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 1.3
9. The spring rate is defined in this problem because of the two specified forces at a particular relative deflection.
Fmax Fmin N
y mm
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G N
3 mm
8 D Na
Shut height Lshut d Nt Lshut 69.9 mm
Fmin
Initial deflection yinit yinit 76.9 mm
k

Clash allowance yclash y yclash 2.2 mm
Lf Lshut yclash y yinit Lf 171.0 mm

yshut Lf Lshut yshut 101.1 mm

Fshut k yshut Fshut 1025 N

8 Fshut D
Stress at Fshut shut Ks shut 587.1 MPa
3
d
shut
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf
against buckling for both cases.

Inside coil dia Di D d Di 52 mm
Outside coil dia Do D d Do 65 mm
Smallest hole holemin Do 0.05 D holemin 67.9 mm
Largest pin pin max Di 0.05 D pin max 49.1 mm
23. The weight of the springs active coils is found from equation 14.11b
3
2 2
d D Na
Weight Wa Wa 4.13 N
4
1 k g
2 Wa
f
2
fn
Frequency ratio 9.3
ff
which is sufficiently high.
Wire diameter d 6.5 mm

Outside diameter Do 65.0 mm
Free length Lf 171 mm
25. The initial and working forces are

Initial force Finit k yinit Finit 780 N
Working force Fwork k yinit y Fwork 1003 N
26. Safety factors:
S ys
Yielding Nys Nys 1.6
shut
S es S us i
Fatigue Nfs Nfs 1.32
S es m i S us a
fn
Surging Nsurge Nsurge 9.3
ff
PROBLEM 14-20
Statement: Design a helical compression spring to handle a dynamic load that varies from 135 N to 220 N
over a 32-mm working deflection. Use squared, peened chrome-vanadium wire and a 15% clash
allowance. The forcing frequency is 250 rpm. Infinite life is desired. Minimize the package size.
Choose appropriate safety factors against fatigue, yielding, and surging.

Chrome-vanadium wire properties:
Strength A 1909.9 MPa b 0.1453
Set after winding, unpeened
Design Choices:
Design safety factor Nfsd 1.1 Spring index C 10.5

Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
endurance limit S ew 465 MPa (peened)
Guess d 5 mm
Given
1
2 b
8 C Nfsd Nfsd 1
d= Ks Fm Ks Fmin mm
2 Nfsd
0.67 A mm
d
b

0.67 mm
A

1 Kw Fa
0.50 S ew
d Find ( d ) d 3.081 mm Let the wire diameter be d 3.5 mm
b
S ut A
d
mm
S ew S us
S us 0.5 S ew

8 Fmin D
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 1.6
Fmax Fmin N
y mm
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G N
3 mm
8 D Na
Fmin
k

Lf Lshut yclash y yinit Lf 121.7 mm


Fshut k yshut Fshut 248.5 N

8 Fshut D
3
d
shut
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf


3
2 2
d D Na
4
1 k g
2 Wa
f
2
fn
Frequency ratio 22.8
ff
which is sufficiently high.

Total coils Nt 11.75 ends squared

26. Safety factors:
S ys
shut
S es S us i
Fatigue Nfs Nfs 1.6
S es m i S us a
fn
Surging Nsurge Nsurge 23
ff
PROBLEM 14-21
Statement: Design a helical compression spring for a static load of 400 N at a deflection of 45 mm with a
safety factor of 2.5. Use C = 8. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture the spring.
Given: Working force Fwork 400 N Shear modulus G 80.8 GPa
Working deflection ywork 45 mm Safety factor Ns 2.5
Spring index C 8
Design choices:
ASTM A228 wire A 2153.5 MPa
b 0.1625
Fwork N
1. Determine the desired spring rate. k k 8.889
ywork mm
1
2 b
8 Ns ( C 0.5) Fwork ( 1 )
d mm
Km A mm
2

Wire diameter d 4.789 mm Let d 5 mm
3. Calculate the mean coil diameter and number of active coils.

Mean coil dia D C d D 40 mm
4
coils Na Na 11.096
3
8 D k Na 11
4
Corrected spring d G N
rate k k 8.967
3 mm
8 D Na

Shut height Ls d Nt Ls 65 mm
Deflection
to shut height yshut ywork ywork yshut 51.75 mm
Free length Lf Ls yshut Lf 116.75 mm
Lf
D
ywork
Lf
Take these two values to Figure 14-14 and find that their coordinates are safely within the zones that are
stable against buckling for either end-condition case.

3
2 2
d D Nt
Weight Wt Wt 2.44 N
4
Wire diameter d 5 mm
Outside diameter Do 45 mm
Free length Lf 116.75 mm
PROBLEM 14-22
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a static load 200 N-m at a deflection of 45 deg
with a safety factor of 1.8. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture the spring. State all
assumptions.
Given: Applied moment M 200 N m Bending modulus E 206.8 GPa
Deflection at load 45 deg 0.125 rev
Design Choices:
Use unpeened oil tempered wire with 40-mm-long, straight ends. The coil is loaded to close it.
Design safety factor Nyd 1.8 Spring index C 11
Yield strength factor Ks 0.85 (from Table 14-13)
Length of ends L1 40 mm L2 40 mm
Material strength factors A 1831.2 MPa b 0.1833 (ASTM A229 wire)

1. Calculate the Wahl bending factors for inside surface.
2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.073
4 C ( C 1 )
2. Solve for d using the static yield criterion.

1
3 b
32 Kbi Nyd M
d mm d 16.144 mm
Ks A mm3

3. Use a wire diameter from the available sizes in Table 14-2. Calculate the mean coil diameter D from equation
14.5.
Spring index C 11
4. Calculate the maximum compressive stress in the coil at the inner surface.
32 M
imax Kbi imax 533.5 MPa
3
d
5. Find the ultimate tensile strength of this oil tempered material from equation 14.3 and Table 14-4 and use it to
find the bending yield strength from Table 14-13, assuming stress relieving.
b
S ut A
Ultimate tensile d
strength S ut 1102 MPa

mm
Bending yield
strength S y Ks S ut S y 936 MPa
Sy
6. The realized static safety factor against yielding is Nyb Nyb 1.8
imax
7. The spring rate is defined from the two specified moments at their relative deflection.
M N m
Spring rate k k 1600
rev
4
Number of active d E
coils Na Na 4.46
10.8 D k rev
Note that to force k to be in units of N-m per rev we must multiply k by rev.
9. The ends contribute to the active coils from equation 14.26a as
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.05
3 D
and, from equation 14.26b, the number of body coils in the spring are Nb Na Ne Nb 4.4
10. Check the angular deflection at the specified load from equation 14.27c.
M D Na
10.8 rev 45.0 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-23
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a static load 300 in-lb at a deflection of 75 deg
with a safety factor of 2. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture the spring. State all
assumptions.
6
Given: Applied moment M 300 in lbf Bending modulus E 30 10 psi
Design Choices:
Use unpeened music wire with 2-in-long, straight ends. The coil is loaded to close it.
Design safety factor Nyd 2 Spring index C 7.5
Yield strength factor Ks 1 (from Table 14-13)
Length of ends L1 2 in L2 2 in
Material strength factors A 184.65 ksi b 0.1625 (ASTM A228 wire)

2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.110
4 C ( C 1 )

1
3 b
32 Kbi Nyd M
d in d 0.312 in
Ks A in3

3. Use a wire diameter from the available sizes in Table 14-2. Calculate the mean coil diameter D from
equation 14.5.
Spring index C 7.5
32 M
imax Kbi imax 111.7 ksi
3
d
b
S ut A
Ultimate tensile d
strength S ut 223 ksi

in
Bending yield
strength S y Ks S ut S y 223 ksi
Sy
imax
M in lbf
rev
4
coils Na Na 7.81
10.8 D k rev
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.18
3 D
M D Na
10.8 rev 75.0 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-24
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a dynamic load 50-105 N-m at a deflection of
80 deg with a safety factor of 2. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture the spring.
State all assumptions.
Given: Minimum moment Mmin 50 N m Bending modulus E 206.8 GPa
Maximum moment Mmax 105 N m Deflection at load 80 deg
Design Choices:
Wire endurance limit S ewb 537 MPa Spring index C 8.3
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 27.5 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 77.5 N m
2
2. Calculate the Wahl bending factors for inside and outside surfaces.
2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.099
4 C ( C 1 )
2
4 C C 1
Kbo Kbo 0.916
4 C ( C 1 )
3. Solve for d using the static yield criterion. Use this value of d for starting the iteration in the next step.
1
3 b
32 Kbi Nd Mmax
d mm d 13.739 mm
Ks A mm3

4. Solve for d by iteration using the fatigue criterion.
1
3 b
b
A
d

N M mm M
32 Kbo fb a 0.5 S ewb min
d=

A
1
3 b
b
A
d

32 Kbo Nd Ma mm Mmin
0.5 S ewb
RHS( d )
mm
3

A mm
d RHS( d ) d 14.120 mm
d RHS( d ) d 14.099 mm
d RHS( d ) d 14.100 mm
Since this results in a slightly larger wire diameter, the fatigue criterion is governing and the spring must be
designed for fatigue.
3. Use a wire diameter from the available sizes in Table 14-2. Calculate the mean coil diameter D from equation 14
Spring index C 8.3
32 Mmax
3
d
5. Calculate the maximum, minimum, alternating, and mean tensile stresses in the coil at the outer surface.
32 Mmin
omin Kbo omin 138.2 MPa
3
d
32 Mmax
omax Kbo omax 290.3 MPa
3
d
omax omin
m m 214.3 MPa
2
omax omin
a a 76.0 MPa
2
6. Find the ultimate tensile strength of this oil tempered material from equation 14.3 and Table 14-4 and use it
to find the bending yield strength from Table 14-13, assuming stress relieving.
b
S ut A d

in
Bending yield strength S y Ks S ut S y 2017 MPa

7. Convert the wire bending endurance limit for unpeened springs from equation 14.33 to fully reversed
endurance strength with equation 14.34b.
S ewb S ut
Fully reversed S e 0.5 S e 309.74 MPa
endurance limit S ut 0.5 S ewb
8. The fatigue safety factor for the coils in bending is calculated from equation 14.34a.
Fatigue factor S e S ut omin

Nfb Nfb 3.3
of safety S e m omin S ut a
9. The static safety factor against yielding is

Static factor Sy
of safety Nyb Nyb 5.8
imax
These are both acceptable safety factors.
Mmax Mmin N m
rev
4
coils Na Na 31.46
10.8 D k rev
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.07
3 D
and, from equation 14.26b, the number of body coils in the spring are Nb Na Ne Nb 31
13. The angular deflections at the specified loads from equation 14.27c are
Mmin D Na
min 10.8 rev min 73 deg
4
d E
Mmax D Na
max 10.8 rev max 153 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-25
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a dynamic load 150-350 in-lb over a
deflection of 50 deg with a safety factor of 1.4. Specify all parameters necessary to
manufacture the spring. State all assumptions.
6
Given: Minimum moment Mmin 150 in lbf Bending modulus E 30 10 psi
Maximum moment Mmax 350 in lbf Deflection at load 50 deg
Design Choices:
Wire endurance limit S ewb 77.99 ksi Spring index C 4.5

Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 100.0 in lbf
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 250.0 in lbf
2
2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.198
4 C ( C 1 )
2
4 C C 1
Kbo Kbo 0.854
4 C ( C 1 )
1
3 b
32 Kbi Nd Mmax
d in d 0.323 in
Ks A in3

4. Solve for d by iteration using the fatigue criterion.
1
3 b
b
A
d

N M mm M
32 Kbo d a 0.5 S ewb min
d=

A
1
3 b
b
A
d

32 Kbo Nd Ma in Mmin
0.5 S ewb
RHS( d )
in
3

A in
d RHS( d ) d 0.334 in
d RHS( d ) d 0.334 in
Since this results in a slightly larger wire diameter, the fatigue criterion is governing and the spring must be
designed for fatigue.
3. Use a wire diameter from the available sizes in Table 14-2. Calculate the mean coil diameter D from equation 14
Spring index C 4.5
32 Mmax
3
d
32 Mmin
omin Kbo omin 32.3 ksi
3
d
32 Mmax
omax Kbo omax 75.4 ksi
3
d
omax omin
m m 53.9 ksi
2
omax omin
a a 21.5 ksi
2
b
S ut A
d

in
Bending yield strength S y Ks S ut S y 176 ksi
S ewb S ut
Fully reversed S e 0.5 S e 47.41 ksi
8. The realized fatigue safety factor for the coils in bending is calculated from equation 14.34a.

Nfb Nfb 1.5
9. The static safety factor against yielding is
Static factor Sy
of safety Nyb Nyb 1.7
imax
These are both acceptable safety factors.
Mmax Mmin in lbf

rev
4
coils Na Na 17.30
10.8 D k rev
Note that to force k to be in units of in-lb per rev we must multiply k by rev.
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.27
3 D
13. The angular deflections at the specified loads from equation 14.27c are
Mmin D Na
min 10.8 rev min 38 deg
4
d E
Mmax D Na
max 10.8 rev max 88 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-26
Statement: Design a Belleville spring to give a constant 400 N 10% force over a 1-mm deflection.
Given: Nominal force Fflat 400 N Working deflection ywork 1 mm
Design Choices:
6
The diameter ratio is Rd 2. Use unset carbon spring steel 50HRC. Properties, E 30 10 psi ,
0.28 . The outside diameter of the spring is Do 39.55 mm
1. Since a constant force spring is needed, the h/t ratio (see Figure 14-30) is
h/t ratio hovert 1.414
2. The required force variation of not more than 10% can be met by choosing an appropriate deflection range to
operate in from Figure 14-31. If the deflection is kept between about 53% and 146% of the flat deflection, this
tolerance will be achieved. The nominal force will then occur at the flat position and the spring must operate
on both sides, so must be mounted in similar fashion to that shown in Figure 14-33.
3. Use the above assumptions and the specified nominal force in equation 14.37a to find an appropriate spring
thickness t:
1
4
Fflat Do
2
1
t t 0.760 mm Let t 0.760 mm
10 132.4 MPa hovert
4. The height h can now be found: h hovert t h 1.075 mm

5. Based on the choices in step 2, find the minimum and maximum deflections:
ymin 0.53 h ymin 0.57 mm
ymax 1.46 h ymax 1.57 mm
The difference between these distances is equal to the required deflection range, so the force tolerance can be
met over that range.
6. Figure 14-34 shows that the worst stress state will occur at the largest deflection ymax, so solve equations 14.36
for stresses at that deflection:
Rd 1 2

6
K1 K1 0.689
ln Rd R2
d
6 Rd 1
K2 1 K2 1.22
ln Rd ln Rd
6 Rd 1
K3 K3 1.378
ln Rd 2
Rd ln Rd Rd 1 Rd
K4 ln Rd
K4 1.115
Rd 1 2
Rd
K5 K5 1
2 Rd 1
4 E ymax ymax
c K2 h K3 t c 1831 MPa
2
K1 Do 1
2 2
4 E ymax ymax
ti K2 h K3 t ti 906.1 MPa

K1 Do2 1 2

2
4 E ymax ymax
to K4 h K5 t to 1416 MPa

K1 Do2 1 2

2
7. Table 14-5 gives S ut 246 ksi for this material. Table 14-15 indicates that 120% of this value can be used
for an unset spring. The safety factor for static loading is then
1.20 S ut
Ns Ns 1.1
c
8. A summary of the spring design is
Do
Inside diameter Di Di 19.77 mm
Rd
Thickness t 0.76 mm
Height h 1.07 mm
PROBLEM 14-27
Statement: Design a Belleville spring for bimodal operation between 50 N.
Given: Nominal force Fflat 50 N
Design Choices:
The diameter ratio is Rd 2. Use unset carbon spring steel 50HRC. Properties:
6
E 30 10 psi, 0.28 . The outside diameter of the spring is Do 24.50 mm

1. Since a bimodal force spring is needed, the h/t ratio (see Figure 14-30) is
2. The required force variation of not more than 100% can be met by choosing an appropriate deflection range
to operate in from Figure 14-30. If the deflection is kept between about 0% and 200% of the flat deflection,
this will be achieved. A zero force will then occur at the flat position and the spring must operate on both
sides, so must be mounted in similar fashion to that shown in Figure 14-32.
thickness t:
1
4
Do
2
t
Fflat
t 0.299 mm Let t 0.30 mm
7 hovert
19.2 10 psi
4. The height h can now be found: h hovert t h 0.848 mm
5. Based on the choices in step 2, find the minimum and maximum deflections:
ymin 0 h ymin 0 mm
ymax 2.00 h ymax 1.70 mm
The difference between these distances is equal to the required deflection range, so
Working deflection ywork ymax ywork 1.70 mm
6. Figure 14-34 shows that the worst stress state will occur at the largest deflection ymax, so solve equations
14.36 for stresses at that deflection:
R 1 2

6 d
K1 K1 0.689
ln Rd R2
d
6 Rd 1
K2 1 K2 1.22
ln Rd ln Rd
6 Rd 1
K3 K3 1.378
ln Rd 2
Rd ln Rd Rd 1 Rd
K4 ln Rd
K4 1.115
Rd 1 2

Rd
K5 K5 1
2 Rd 1
4 E ymax ymax
c K2 h K3 t c 1523 MPa
2
K1 Do 1
2 2
4 E ymax ymax
ti K2 h K3 t ti 1523 MPa

K1 Do2 1 2

2
4 E ymax ymax
to K4 h K5 t to 1105 MPa

K1 Do2 1 2

2
for
an unset spring. The safety factor for static loading is then
1.20 S ut
Ns Ns 1.3
c
Do
Inside diameter Di Di 12.25 mm
Rd
Thickness t 0.3 mm
Height h 0.85 mm
PROBLEM 14-28
Statement: Given the data below for a helical compression spring loaded in fatigue, design the spring for
infinite life. State all assumptions and empirical data used.
Music wire properties: Spring index C 8.5
Strength A 2153.5 MPa b 0.1625 Set after winding, unpeened
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2
2. Calculate the factors necessary to find the fatigue factor of safety.

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
endurance limit S ew 310 MPa (unpeened)
b
S ut A d

mm
S ew S us
S us 0.5 S ew

8 Fmin D
3
d
P1428.xmcd
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 3.3
Fmax Fmin N
y mm
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G N
3 mm
8 D Na

Shut height Lshut d Nt Lshut 108 mm
Fmin
k
Lf Lshut yclash y yinit Lf 151 mm


Fshut k yshut Fshut 483.3 N
P1428.xmcd

8 Fshut D
3
d
shut
Lf
D
yinit y
Lf

3
2 2
d D Na
Weight Wa Wa 9.6 N
4
1 k g
2 Wa
f
2
fn
Frequency ratio 5.2
ff
which is a little low.
P1428.xmcd
Total coils Nt 13.50 ends squared

26. Safety factors:
S ys
shut
S es S us i
Fatigue Nfs Nfs 3.3
S es m i S us a
fn
Surging Nsurge Nsurge 5.2
ff
P1428.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-29
Statement: A helical extension spring, loaded in fatigue, has been designed for infinite life with the data
given below. Find the safety factors for failure in the standard hooks. State all assumptions
and sources of empirical data.

Working deflection y 2.00 in Spring index C 9
Wire diameter d 8 mm (Chrome-silicon) b 0.0934
Number active coils Na 13.75

Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 135.0 N
2
Fmax Fmin
Fm Fm 800.0 N
2

2
4 C C 1
Kb Kb 1.090
4 C ( C 1)

4. Use the value of C to find an appropiate value of initial coil stress i from equations 14.21:
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 67.4 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 115.1 MPa
i1 i2
i i 91.3 MPa
2

0.5
C
8 Fm D
3
d
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
3
d
b
S ut A
d
mm
S ew S us
equation 14.23:
2 R1 2 D
C1 = = =C C1 C C1 9.00
d 2 d
2
4 C1 C1 1
Kb Kb 1.09
4 C1 C1 1
16 D Fa 4 Fa
a Kb a 108.1 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fm 4 Fm
m Kb m 640.6 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fmin 4 Fmin
3 2
d d
S es
S e S e 311.1 MPa
0.577
S e S ut min
Nfb Nfb 1.67
S e m min S ut a
C2 d
R2 R2 20 mm
2
4 C2 1
Kw2 Kw2 1.188
4 C2 4
8 Fa D
Ba Kw2 Ba 57.4 MPa
3
d
8 Fm D
Bm Kw2 Bm 340.2 MPa
3
d
8 Fmin D
3
d
S es S us Bmin
Nfs Nfs 2.0
PROBLEM 14-30
Statement: Given the following data for a helical torsion spring, loaded in fatigue, find the spring index,
unloaded coil diameter, minimum loaded coil diameter, and safety factor in fatigue. State all
assumptions and sources of empirical data used.
6
Given: Minimum deflection min 0.25 rev Bending modulus E 30 10 psi
1
Maximum deflection max 0.75 rev Spring rate k 60 in lbf rev
Number active coils Na 20 Wire dia. d 0.192 in
Design Choices:
Wire endurance limit S ewb 77.99 ksi

1. Find the minimum, maximum, mean, and alternating loads.
Mmin k min Mmin 15 in lbf
Mmax k max Mmax 45 in lbf
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 15.0 in lbf
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 30.0 in lbf
2
3
d E
2. Use equation 14.28 to calculate the spring index. k=
10.8 C Na
3
d E
C C 16.38
10.8 k rev Na
2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.048
4 C ( C 1 )
2
4 C C 1
Kbo Kbo 0.956
4 C ( C 1 )

32 Mmax
3
d
32 Mmin
omin Kbo omin 20.6 ksi
3
d
32 Mmax
omax Kbo omax 61.9 ksi
3
d
omax omin
m m 41.3 ksi
2
omax omin
a a 20.6 ksi
2
b
S ut A
d

in
Bending yield strength S y Ks S ut S y 193 ksi
S ewb S ut
Fully reversed S e 0.5 S e 46.51 ksi

Nfb Nfb 1.7
L1 L2
10. The ends contribute to the active coils from equation 14.26a as Ne Ne 0.13
3 D
11. The unloaded coil diameter and minimum loaded coil diameters are:
Unloaded coil diameter Di D d Di 2.954 in
D Nb
Loaded coil diameter Dimin d Dimin 2.839 in
max
Nb
rev
PROBLEM 14-31
Statement: A helical compression spring is required to provide a minimum force of 150 lb at installation and
have a working deflection of 1 in. The spring rate is 75 lb/in. The coil must fit in a 2.1-in-dia hole
with 0.1-in clearance. Use 0.250-in diameter, unpeened, music wire and squared/ground ends.
Using a 15% clash allowance, find:
(a) The stresses and safety factor for infinte life in fatigue.
(b) The shut height.
(c) The stress and safety factor at shut height.
(d) The total number of coils.
(e) The free length.
(f) The natural frequency in Hz.
(g) Draw a Goodman diagram and show the safety factor from (a) on it.
1
Given: Minimum force Fmin 150 lbf Spring rate k 75 lbf in
6
Spring OD OD 2.000 in Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi
Working deflection y 1.000 in Clash factor 0.15
Music wire properties: Wire diameter d 0.250 in
Strength A 184.65 ksi b 0.1625 Set after winding, unpeened
1. From the given information, find the maximum force and the spring index.
Maximum force Fmax Fmin k y Fmax 225 lbf
OD d
Spring index C C7
d
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
b
S ut A
d

in
S ew S us
S us 0.5 S ew

8 Fmin D
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 1.2
4
coils Na Na 13.97 Na 14
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G lbf
3 in
8 D Na

Shut height Lshut d Nt Lshut 4 in
Fmin
k



8 Fshut D
3
d
shut
Outside coil dia Do D d Do 2 in
3
2 2
d D Na
4
1 k g
2 Wa
22. We now have results for questions (a) through (f):
(a) Fatigue stresses i 45.8 ksi a 13 ksi m 57.3 ksi

and safety factor Nfs 1.2
(b) Shut height Lshut 4.000 in
(c) Stress at shut height shut 72.1 ksi
and safety factor Ns 1.9
(d) Total coils Nt 16.00 ends squared and ground
(e) Free length Lf 7.154 in
(f) Natural frequency fn 81.91 Hz
23. (g) Plot the Goodman diagram.
S es
The equation for the Goodman line is 'a 'm 'm S es
S us
a
Equation for load line aL 'm 'm
m
Plotting this over the range 'm 0 ksi 10 ksi 200 ksi
30
m
25 ksi
20
15 a
ksi
10
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
Mean shear stress

The Goodman boundary is the solid line with negative slope. The stress state is at the intersection of the
vertical and horizontal dashed lines. The safety margin is the distance along the load line from the stress
state point to the intersection of the load line with the Goodman boundary.
PROBLEM 14-32
Statement: A helical compression spring is required to provide a time-varying force that ranges from a
mimimum of 100 lb to a maximum of 300 lb over a deflection of 1 in. It needs to work freely over
shaft of 1.25-in dia. Use a cold-drawn carbon steel wire having an S ut = 250 ksi. A spring index
of 6, a clash allowance of 15%, and squared and ground ends are desired.
1
Given: Minimum force Fmin 100 lbf Spring rate k 75 lbf in
6
Working deflection y 1.000 in Clash factor 0.15
Wire strength S ut 250 ksi Spring index C 6
Unset after winding, unpeened Shaft OD ODshaft 1.250 in

1. From the given information, find a trial wire diameter.
Maximum shaft dia ODshaft = IDspring 0.05 D = ( D d ) 0.05 D = C d d 0.05 C d
ODshaft
Trial wire diameter d d 0.266 in
0.95 C 1
Standard wire size d 0.343 in (Found by iteration, see note in step 8)
Fmax Fmin
2
Fmax Fmin
2

0.5
factor C
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
Yield strength
Ultimate shear
Torsional
S ew S us
S us 0.5 S ew

8 Fmin D
3
d
8 Fm D
3
d
8 F a D
3
d
Nfs Nfs 1.3
This was originally too low. The wire diameter in step 1 was repeatedly changed to get a satisfactory safety
factor.
Fmax Fmin lbf

y in
4
3
8 D k
4
Corrected d G lbf
3 in
8 D Na

Fmin
k




8 Fshut D
3
d
shut
3
2 2
d D Na
4
1 k g
2 Wa
23. We now have a complete design specification for this cold-drawn wire spring:

PROBLEM 14-33 _____
Statement: Find the ultimate tensile strength and the ultimate shear strength of ASTM A228 music wire in the
following preferred diameters: 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 2.0 mm, 4.0 mm, and 6.0 mm.
Given: Wire diameters: i 1 2 5
d 0.5 mm d 1.0 mm d 2.0 mm d 4.0 mm d 6.0 mm
1 2 3 4 5
1. Calculate the ultimate tensile strength using equation 14.3 and the coefficient and exponent from Table 14-4.
For ASTM A228 music wire, A 2153.5 MPa b 0.1625
b
di d
i
S ut
S ut A i

i mm mm GPa
0.5 2.41
1.0 2.15
2.0 1.92
4.0 1.72
6.0 1.61
2. Calculate the ultimate shear strength using equation 14.4.
d S us
i i
S us 0.67 S ut
i i mm GPa
0.5 1.61
1.0 1.44
2.0 1.29
4.0 1.15
6.0 1.08
PROBLEM 14-34 _____

Statement: Find the ultimate tensile strength and the ultimate shear strength of ASTM A228 music wire in
the following preferred diameters: 0.020 in, 0.038 in, 0.081 in, 0.162 in, and 0.250 in.
Given: Wire diameters: i 1 2 5
d 0.020 in d 0.038 in d 0.081 in d 0.162 in d 0.250 in
1 2 3 4 5
1. Calculate the ultimate tensile strength using equation 14.3 and the coefficient and exponent from Table 14-4.
For ASTM A228 music wire, A 184.649 ksi b 0.1625
b
di d
i
S ut
S ut A
i

i in in ksi
0.020 348.7
0.038 314.1
0.081 277.8
0.162 248.2
0.250 231.3
2. Calculate the ultimate shear strength using equation 14.4.
d S us
i i
S us 0.67 S ut
i i in ksi
0.020 234
0.038 210
0.081 186
0.162 166
0.250 155
PROBLEM 14-35 _____
Statement: Select the preferred diameter for an ASTM A227 cold-drawn wire that will have an ultimate
tensile strength as close to, but not less than, 180 kpsi.
Given: Minimum tensile strength: S ut 180 ksi
1. Calculate the maximum wire diameter using equation 14.3 and the coefficient and exponent from Table 14-4.
For ASTM A227 cold-drawn wire, A 141.04 ksi b 0.1822
1
b
S ut
d trial in d trial 0.262 in
A
2. Choose the next lower diameter from Table 14-2 as it will have a higher ultimate strength than the next higher
diameter.
d 0.250 in
3. Verify that the strength of a wire of this diameter is greater than the minimum required value.
b
S ut A d
S ut 182 ksi

in
PROBLEM 14-36 _____
Statement: Select the preferred diameter for an ASTM A229 oil-tempered wire that will have an ultimate
tensile strength as close to, but not less than, 1430 MPa.
Given: Minimum tensile strength: S ut 1430 MPa
1. Calculate the maximum wire diameter using equation 14.3 and the coefficient and exponent from Table 14-4.
For ASTM A229 oil-tempered wire, A 1831.2 MPa b 0.1833
1
b
S ut
d trial mm d trial 3.85 mm
A
2. Choose the next lower diameter from Table 14-2 as it will have a higher ultimate strength than the next higher
diameter.
d 3.5 mm
3. Verify that the strength of a wire of this diameter is greater than the minimum required value.
b
S ut A d
S ut 1455 MPa

mm
PROBLEM 14-37
Statement: Design a helical extension spring to handle a dynamic load that varies from 275 N to 325 N over
10 mm working deflection. Use chrome silicon wire and standard hooks. The forcing frequency
is 800 rpm. Infinite life is desired. Minimize the package size. Choose appropriate safety
factors against fatigue, yielding, and surging.
Working deflection y 10.0 mm Forcing freq. f 800 rpm
Design Choices:
b 0.0934

Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 25.0 N
2
Fmax Fmin
Fm Fm 300.0 N
2

2
4 C C 1
Kb Kb 1.090
4 C ( C 1)
1
2 b
4 4 K b C 1
A
0.577 0.67 A db 0.5 S ew

Nfb Fa
0.5 0.67 S ew
1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
RHS( d ) Nfb Fm Nfb 1 Fmin mm
A mm2 b

0.577 0.67 A
d
0.5 S ew
mm

d 1.000 mm RHS( d ) 4.011 mm

d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.879 mm
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.882 mm
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 3.882 mm d 4.0 mm

3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 67.4 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 115.1 MPa
i1 i2
i i 91.3 MPa
2

0.5
C
3
d i
Fi Fi 60.4 N
8 K s D
8 Fm D
3
d
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
3
d
b
S ut A
d
mm
S ew S us
Minimum stress min m a min 412.0 MPa
S es S us min
S es m min S us a
step 5.
equation 14.23:
2 R1 2 D
C1 = = =C C1 C C1 9.00
d 2 d
2
4 C1 C1 1
Kb Kb 1.09
4 C1 C1 1
16 D Fa 4 Fa
a Kb a 80.07 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fm 4 Fm
m Kb m 960.9 MPa
3 2
d d
16 D Fmin 4 Fmin
3 2
d d
S es
S e S e 308.02 MPa
0.577
S e S ut min
Nfb Nfb 1.7
S e m min S ut a
C2 d
R2 R2 10 mm
2
4 C2 1
Kw2 Kw2 1.188
4 C2 4
8 Fa D
Ba Kw2 Ba 42.5 MPa
3
d
8 Fm D
Bm Kw2 Bm 510.3 MPa
3
d
8 Fmin D
3
d
S es S us Bmin
Nfs Nfs 2.2
Fmax Fmin N
y m
4
d G
3
8 D k
Corrected spring rate 4
d G N
k k 5038.0
3 m
8 D Na
Body length Lb Nt d Lb 48.0 mm
Hook length Lhook D d Lhook 32.0 mm
Free length Lf Lb 2 Lhook Lf 112.0 mm
loads.
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 67.4 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 115.1 MPa
i1 i2
i i 91.3 MPa
2
3
d i
Fi Fi 60.4 N
8 K s D
Fmax Fi
ymax ymax 52.53 mm
k
3
2 2
d D Na
Weight Wa Wa 1.188 N
4
fn fn 102 Hz
2 Wa
f
2
fn
ff
Wire diameter d 4.00 mm Total coils Nt 12.00
Outside diameter Do 40.00 mm Free length Lf 112.00 mm
Standard hooks
PROBLEM 14-38
Statement: Design a helical extension spring with standard hooks to handle a dynamic load that varies from
60 lb to 75 lb over 0.5 in working deflection. Use music wire. The forcing frequency is 1200 rpm.
Infinite life is desired. Minimize the package size. Choose appropriate safety factors against
fatigue, yielding, and surging.
Given: Minimum force Fmin 60 lbf Life L

6
Working deflection y 0.50 in Forcing freq. f 1200 rpm
Design Choices:
Wire endurance limit S ew 45 ksi Wire strength A 184.649 ksi
b 0.1625
Fmax Fmin
Fa Fa 7.5 lbf
2
Fmax Fmin
Fm Fm 67.5 lbf
2

2
4 C C 1
Kb Kb 1.090
4 C ( C 1)
1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
A
0.577 0.67 A db 0.5 S ew


1
2 b
4 4 Kb C 1
RHS( d ) Nfb Fm Nfb 1 Fmin in
A in2
b
0.577 0.67 A 0.5 S ew

d

in
Nfb Fa
0.5 0.67 S ew

d 1.00 in RHS( d ) 0.153 in

d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.167 in
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.166 in
d RHS( d ) RHS( d ) 0.166 in d 0.177 in
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 9.77 ksi
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 16.70 ksi
i1 i2
i i 13.2 ksi
2

0.5
C
3
d i
Fi Fi 17.1 lbf
8 K s D
8 Fm D
3
d
4 C 1 0.615
4 C 4 C
8 F a D
3
d
b
S ut A d
Ultimate tensile strength S ut 244.7 ksi

in
Shear yield strength S ys 0.50 S ut S ys 122.3 ksi
Ultimate shear strength S us 0.67 S ut S us 163.9 ksi
S ew S us
Minimum stress min m a min 45.75 ksi
S es S us min
S es m min S us a
step 5.
equation 14.23:
2 R1 2 D
C1 = = =C C1 C C1 9.00
d 2 d
2
4 C1 C1 1
Kb Kb 1.09
4 C1 C1 1
16 D Fa 4 Fa
a Kb a 12.27 ksi
3 2
d d
16 D Fm 4 Fm
m Kb m 110.4 ksi
3 2
d d
16 D Fmin 4 Fmin
min Kb min 98.15 ksi
3 2
d d
S es
S e S e 45.20 ksi
0.577
S e S ut min
Nfb Nfb 1.9
S e m min S ut a
C2 d
R2 R2 0.442 in
2
4 C2 1
Kw2 Kw2 1.188
4 C2 4
8 Fa D
Ba Kw2 Ba 6.5 ksi
3
d
8 Fm D
Bm Kw2 Bm 58.6 ksi
3
d
8 Fmin D
Bmin Kw2 Bmin 52.1 ksi
3
d
S es S us Bmin
Nfs Nfs 2.4
Fmax Fmin lbf

y in
4
d G
3
8 D k
4
d G lbf
Corrected spring rate k k 30.2
3 in
8 D Na
Body length Lb Nt d Lb 2.3 in
Hook length Lhook D d Lhook 1.42 in
Free length Lf Lb 2 Lhook Lf 5.09 in
loads.
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 9.8 ksi
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 16.7 ksi
i1 i2
i i 13.2 ksi
2
3
d i
Fi Fi 17.1 lbf
8 K s D
Fmax Fi
ymax ymax 1.91 in
k
3
2 2
d D Na
4
fn fn 84.9 Hz
2 Wa
f
Forcing frequency ff ff 20 Hz
2
fn
ff
Wire diameter d 0.177 in Total coils Nt 12.75
Outside diameter Do 1.770 in Free length Lf 5.089 in
Standard hooks
PROBLEM 14-39
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a static load 50 N-m at a deflection of 60 deg
assumptions.
Given: Applied moment M 50 N m Bending modulus E 206.8 GPa
Design Choices:
Design safety factor Nyd 2 Spring index C 10

2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.081
4 C ( C 1 )

1
3 b
32 Kbi Nyd M
d mm d 10.272 mm
Ks A mm3

14.5.
Spring index C 10
32 M
3
d
b
S ut A
Ultimate tensile d
strength S ut 1180 MPa

mm
Bending yield
strength S y Ks S ut S y 1003 MPa
Sy
imax
M N m
Spring rate k k 300
rev
4
coils Na Na 8.50
10.8 D k rev
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.08
3 D
M D Na
10.8 rev 60.0 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-40
Statement: Design a straight-ended helical torsion spring for a static load 430 in-lb at a deflection of 55 deg
assumptions.
6
Given: Applied moment M 430 in lbf Bending modulus E 30 10 psi
Design Choices:
Design safety factor Nyd 2 Spring index C 9

2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.090
4 C ( C 1 )

1
3 b
32 Kbi Nyd M
d in d 0.352 in
Ks A in3

14.5.
Spring index C9
32 M
3
d
b
S ut A
Ultimate tensile d
strength S ut 218 ksi
in
Bending yield
strength S y Ks S ut S y 218 ksi
Sy
imax
M in lbf
rev
4
coils Na Na 5.20
10.8 D k rev
L1 L2
Ne Ne 0.13
3 D
M D Na
10.8 rev 55.0 deg
4
d E
PROBLEM 14-41
Statement: Given the following data for a helical torsion spring, loaded in fatigue, find the spring index,
unloaded coil diameter, minimum loaded coil diameter, and safety factor in fatigue. State all
assumptions and sources of empirical data used. Deflection at assembly = 0.15 rev, working
deflection = 0.35 rev, k = 10 N-m/rev, Na = 25, 4.50 mm oil-tempered wire, unpeened.
Given: Minimum deflection min 0.15 rev Bending modulus E 206.8 GPa
1
Maximum deflection max 0.50 rev Spring rate k 10 N m rev
Number active coils Na 25 Wire diameter d 4.50 mm
Design Choices:
Use unpeened oil-tempered wire with 40-mm-long, straight ends. The coil is loaded to close it.
Wire endurance limit S ewb 537 MPa

1. Find the minimum, maximum, mean, and alternating loads.
Mmin k min Mmin 1.50 N m
Mmax k max Mmax 5.00 N m
Mmax Mmin
Ma Ma 1.75 N m
2
Mmax Mmin
Mm Mm 3.25 N m
2
3
d E
2. Use equation 14.28 to calculate the spring index. k=
10.8 C Na
3
d E
C C 6.98
10.8 k rev Na
2
4 C C 1
Kbi Kbi 1.119
4 C ( C 1 )
2
4 C C 1
Kbo Kbo 0.902
4 C ( C 1 )

32 Mmax
3
d
32 Mmin
omin Kbo omin 151.2 MPa
3
d
32 Mmax
omax Kbo omax 503.9 MPa
3
d
omax omin
m m 327.5 MPa
2
omax omin
a a 176.4 MPa
2
b
S ut A d

mm
Bending yield strength S y Ks S ut S y 1181 MPa
S ewb S ut
Fully reversed S e 0.5 S e 332.78 MPa

Nfb Nfb 1.4
L1 L2
10. The ends contribute to the active coils from equation 14.26a as Ne Ne 0.27
3 D
Nb Na Ne
and, from equation 14.26b, the number of body coils in the spring are Nb 25
11. The unloaded coil diameter and minimum loaded coil diameters are:
Unloaded coil diameter Di D d Di 26.9 mm
D Nb
Loaded coil diameter Dimin d Dimin 26.3 mm
max
Nb
rev
PROBLEM 14-42
Statement: Design a Belleville spring to give a static force of approximately 2000 lb at a maximum deflection
of 0.05 in with a nearly constant spring rate.
Given: Maximum force Fflat 2000 lbf Maximum deflection ymax 0.05 in
6
Assumptions: The diameter ratio is Rd 2. Use unset carbon spring steel 50HRC. Properties, E 30 10 psi ,
0.28 .
1. Since a constant rate spring is needed, the h/t ratio (see Figure 14-30) is
2. Use the above choice and the specified maximum deflection to find the spring thickness t:
h
h ymax t t 0.125 in
hovert
3. Use equation 14.37 to find the force at maximum deflection. This must be done by iterating on the outside
diameter, Do.
Guess: Do 3.0 in
7 4
19.2 10 psi hovert t
Fflat Fflat 2083.33 lbf
2
Do
Rd 1 2

6
K1 K1 0.689
ln Rd 2
Rd
6 Rd 1
K2 1 K2 1.220
ln Rd ln Rd
6 Rd 1
K3 K3 1.378
ln Rd 2
Rd ln Rd Rd 1 Rd
K4 ln Rd
K4 1.115
Rd 1 2
Rd
K5 K5 1
2 Rd 1
4 E ymax ymax
c K2 h K3 t c 213 ksi
2
K1 Do 1
2 2

4 E ymax ymax
ti K2 h K3 t ti 148.8 ksi

K1 Do2 1 2
2
4 E ymax ymax
to K4 h K5 t to 161 ksi

K1 Do2 1 2

2
1.20 S ut
Ns Ns 1.4
c
Do
Inside diameter Di Di 1.500 in
Rd
Thickness t 0.125 in
Height h 0.050 in
PROBLEM 14-43
Statement: Design a Belleville spring to give a static force of 400 lb at 50% deflection to flat and 200 lb at fla
Given: Force at flat Fflat 200 lbf
6
Assumptions: The diameter ratio is Rd 2. Use unset carbon spring steel 50HRC. Properties, E 30 10 psi ,
0.28 . The outside diameter of the spring is Do 4.00 in
1. Since a spring with 200% force to flat at 50% deflection to flat is needed, the h/t ratio (see Figure 14-30) is
thickness t:
1
4
Do
2
t
Fflat
t 0.049 in
7 hovert
19.2 10 psi
3. The height h can now be found: h hovert t h 0.139 in
ymax h
Rd 1 2

6
K1 K1 0.689
ln Rd R2
d
6 Rd 1
K2 1 K2 1.220
ln Rd ln Rd
6 Rd 1
K3 K3 1.378
ln Rd 2
Rd ln Rd Rd 1 Rd
K4 ln Rd
K4 1.115
Rd 1 2
Rd
K5 K5 1
2 Rd 1
4 E ymax ymax
c K2 h K3 t c 252 ksi
2
K1 Do 1
2 2
4 E ymax ymax
ti K2 h K3 t ti 28.2 ksi
K1 Do2 1 2

2

4 E ymax ymax
to K4 h K5 t to 209 ksi

K1 Do2 1 2
2
1.20 S ut
Ns Ns 1.2
c
Do
Inside diameter Di Di 2.000 in
Rd
Thickness t 0.049 in
Height h 0.139 in
PROBLEM 14-44
Statement: Design a helical compression spring for a static load of 60 lb at a deflection of 1.50 in with a
safety factor of 2.0 to work in a 1.06-in hole. Specify all parameters necessary to
manufacture the spring.
6
Given: Working force Fwork 60 lbf Shear modulus G 11.5 10 psi
Working deflection ywork 1.50 in Safety factor Ns 2.0
Design choices:
ASTM A228 wire A 184.649 ksi Spring index C 7.0
b 0.1625 (found by trial-and-error)
Fwork lbf
1. Determine the desired spring rate. k k 40
ywork in
1
2 b
8 Ns ( C 0.5) Fwork ( 1 )
d in
Km A in
2

Wire diameter d 0.125 in Let d 0.125 in
3. Calculate the mean and outside coil diameters and number of active coils.
Mean coil dia D C d D 0.875 in
4
coils Na Na 13.097
3
8 D k Na 13.0
4
Corrected spring d G lbf
rate k k 40.298
3 in
8 D Na

Shut height Ls d Nt Ls 1.875 in
Deflection
to shut height yshut ywork ywork yshut 1.725 in
Free length Lf Ls yshut Lf 3.600 in
Lf
D
ywork
Lf

3
2 2
d D Nt
Weight Wt Wt 0.14 lbf
4

PROBLEM 14-45
Statement: Design a helical compression spring for a static load of 200 N at a deflection of 40 mm with a
safety factor of 1.8 to work in a 25-mm hole. Specify all parameters necessary to manufacture
the spring.
Given: Working force Fwork 200 N Shear modulus G 80.8 GPa

Working deflection ywork 40 mm Safety factor Ns 1.8
Design choices:
ASTM A228 wire A 2153.5 MPa Spring index C 7.5
b 0.1625 (found by trial-and-error)
Fwork N
1. Determine the desired spring rate. k k 5.000
ywork mm
1
2 b
8 Ns ( C 0.5) Fwork ( 1 )
d mm
Km A mm
2

Wire diameter d 2.658 mm Let d 2.8 mm
3. Calculate the mean and outside coil diameters and number of active coils.
Mean coil dia D C d D 21.000 mm
4
coils Na Na 13.407
3
8 D k Na 13.5
4
Corrected spring d G N
rate k k 4.965
3 mm
8 D Na

Shut height Ls d Nt Ls 43.4 mm
Deflection
to shut height yshut ywork ywork yshut 46.0 mm
Free length Lf Ls yshut Lf 89.4 mm
Lf
D
ywork
Lf

3
2 2
d D Nt
Weight Wt Wt 0.48 N
4

PROBLEM 14-46
Statement: Three springs are arranged in series similar to the configuration shown in Figure 3-1(a). They
have spring rates k1 = 50 N/mm, k2 = 150 N/mm, and k3 = 500 N/mm, respectively. Determine
the total spring rate, the deflection of each spring, and the overall deflection if a load of F =
600 N is applied.
N N N
Given: Spring rates: k1 50 k2 150 k3 500
mm mm mm
Load: F 600 N
1. Using equation 14.1, calculate the deflection of each spring.
F
y1 y1 12 mm
k1
F
y2 y2 4 mm
k2
F
y3 y3 1.2 mm
k3
2. The sum of the three is the overall deflection.
ytotal y1 y2 y3 ytotal 17.2 mm
3. Alternatively, use equation 14.2b to calculate the total spring rate and use it to determine the total deflection.
k1 k2 k3 N
ktotal ktotal 34.884
k2 k3 k1 k3 k1 k2 mm
F
ytotal ytotal 17.2 mm
ktotal
P1446.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-47
Statement: Three springs are arranged in parallel similar to the configuration shown in Figure 3-1(b).
They have spring rates k1 = 50 N/mm, k2 = 150 N/mm, and k3 = 500 N/mm, respectively.
Determine the total spring rate, the force carried by each spring, and the overall deflection if a
load of F = 600 N is applied.
N N N
Given: Spring rates: k1 50 k2 150 k3 500
mm mm mm
Load: F 600 N

1. Using equation 14.2a, calculate the total spring rate.
N
ktotal k1 k2 k3 ktotal 700
mm
2. Calculate the deflection, which is the same for each spring (assuming that the plate that carries the load does
not rotate).
F
y y 0.857 mm
ktotal
3. Calculate the force carried by each of the three springs using equation 14.1
F1 y k1 F1 42.857 N
F2 y k2 F2 128.571 N
F3 y k3 F3 428.571 N
4. The sum of the three is the total load carried by the plate.
Ftotal F1 F2 F3 Ftotal 600 N
P1447.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-48
Statement: A spring made from ASTM A228 wire with ends squared and ground, wire diameter d = 3 mm,
outside diameter Do = 27 mm, 14 total coils, and free length Lf = 80 mm has been chosen for an
application. Determine the static safety factor if the spring is subjected to a static load of 175
N.
Given: Working force Fwork 175 N Shear modulus G 80 GPa
Outside diameter Do 27 mm Total coils Nt 14
Free length Lf 80 mm ASTM A228 wire A 2153.5 MPa
Ends squared and ground Ne 2 b 0.1625
Assumption: Set removed

1. Determine the mean diameter, spring index, shear factor, number of active coils, and spring rate.
Mean diameter D Do d D 24 mm
D
Spring index C C8
d
0.5
Shear factor Ks 1 Na Ks 1.063
C
Number of active coils Na Nt Ne Na 12
4
d G N
3 mm
8 D Na
2. Calculate the ultimate tensile strength of the wire material from equation 14.3 and Table 14-4 and use it to find
the torsional yield strength from Table 14-6.
b
S ut A d
mm
Shear yield strength S ys 0.60 S ut S ys 1081 MPa
3. Calculate the shear stress in the coil at the working load and the factor of safety against yielding under the
working load.
8 Fwork D
Working shear stress work Ks work 420.9 MPa
3
d
S ys
Factor of safety Nswork Nswork 2.6
work
4. Calculate the shear stress in the coil at shut height and the factor of safety against yielding at shut height.
Deflection to shut height yshut Lf Ls yshut 38 mm
Force at shut height Fs k yshut Fs 185.547 N
8 Fs D
Shut height stress s Ks s 446.2 MPa
3
d
S ys
Factor of safety Nss Nss 2.4
s
P1448.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-49
Statement: A spring with ends squared and ground, wire diameter d = 4 mm, outside diameter Do = 40
mm, 18 total coils, and free length Lf = 140 mm has been chosen for an application where the
initial deflection is 15 mm and the working deflection is 50 mm. Determine minimum working
length, shut height, clash allowance, spring index, and spring rate for this spring.
Given: Working deflection ywork 50 mm Initial deflection yinit 15 mm

Wire diameter d 4 mm Shear modulus G 80 GPa
Outside diameter Do 40 mm Total coils Nt 18
Ends squared and ground Ne 2

1. Determine the mean diameter, spring index, number of active coils, and spring rate.
D
Spring index C C9
d
Number of active coils Na Nt Ne Na 16
4
d G N
3 mm
8 D Na
2. Calculate the minimum working length, shut height, and clash allowance.
Minimum work length Lmin Lf yinit ywork Lmin 75 mm
Lmin Ls
Clash allowance 6 %
ywork
P1449.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-50
Statement: An extension spring has wire diameter d = 3 mm and outside diameter Do = 27 mm. Determine
the preferred preload for this spring.
Given: Wire diameter d 3 mm Outside diameter Do 27 mm

1. Determine the mean diameter, spring index, and shear factor.
D
Spring index C C8
d
0.5
Shear factor Ks 1 Na Ks 1.063
C
2. Use the value of C to find an appropiate value of initial coil stress i from equations 14.21:
3 2
i1 4.231 C 181.5 C 3387 C 28640 psi i1 75.8 MPa
2.987 C 139.7 C 3427 C 38404 psi

3 2
i2 i2 126.9 MPa
i1 i2
i i 101.3 MPa
2
3. Use the value of i from step 2 in equation 14.8b to find the corresponding initial coil-tension force Fi:
3
d i
Fi Fi 42.1 N
8 K s D
P1450.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-51
Statement: A series-stack of Belleville springs is required for more deflection in a design. The stack will
be guided by an internal pin as shown in Figure 14-35(b). The minimum inside diameter of the
individual springs in the stack is Di = 25 mm. Determine the recommended surface conditions
for the pin and the maximum pin diamter. (Hint: go to Spirol.com on the internet and look up
disc springs, stacking).
Given: Inside diameter Di 25 mm

1. The Spirol recommended surface conditions are "case hardened to a depth not less than 0.6 mm and a hardness
of 58 HRC. A surface finish of less than or equal to 4 microns is also recommended."
2. From the table of recommended clearances c 0.4 mm.
Maximum pin dia. d pin Di c d pin 24.6 mm
P1451.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-52
Statement: Equation 14.9a defines a combined direct shear and stress concentration factor, Kw, to be used
with helical springs that are made with round wire. Equation 14.11 defines a similar factor, Krw,
that is to be used to calculate shear stress when the spring is made with rectangular wire.
Determine and plot the ratio Krw/Kw for square wire with values of spring index, C, ranging from
1.2 to 10.
Given: Constant values from Table 14-6 for b/h = 1/1:
S 0 1.6844 S 1 2.8219 S 2 2.4577 S 3 1.0591 S 4 0.1721
1. The Wahl factor for round wire is, from equation 14.9a:
4 C 1 0.615
Kw( C)
4 C 4 C
2. The stress concentration factor for rectangular wire is, from equation 14.11:
s( C) ln( C)
Krw ( C) e
S S s( C) S s( C) S s( C) S s( C)
0 1 2
2
3
3
4
4
3. Plot the ratio of these two factors over the range: C 1.2 1.21 10
STRESS CONCENTRATION FACTOR RATIO FOR SQUARE vs. ROUND WIRE

1
Stress Concentration Factor Ratio, Square/Round
0.9
Krw ( C)
0.8
Kw( C)
0.7
0.6
0 2 4 6 8
C
Spring Index, C
P1452.xmcd
PROBLEM 14-53
Statement: Repeat Problem 14-6 with 1-mm square wire instead of round wire.
Given: Wire dimension b 1 mm h 1 mm
Mean coil dia D 10 mm Total coils Nt 12
Assumptions: The spring wire is steel so that G 80.8 GPa.

2. Using equation 14.11d and Table 14-7,
Shape factor K1 0.180
3
b h G N
Spring rate k K1 k 1.454
3 mm
D Na

D
Spring Index C C 10
b
PROBLEM 14-54
Statement: A helical compression spring is required to provide a minimum force of 650 N at installation and
have a working deflection of 25 mm. The spring rate is 13 N/mm. The coil must fit in a 53-mm-dia
hole with 3-mm clearance. Use 6-mm square, music wire with squared/ground ends. Using a 15%
clash allowance, find:
(a) The stress at the working deflection.
(c) The stress at the shut height.
1
Given: Minimum force Fmin 650 N Spring rate k 13 N mm
Spring OD OD 50 mm Shear modulus G 80.8 GPa
Music wire dims: b 6 mm h 6 mm
Constant values from Table 14-6 for b/h = 1/1:
S 0 1.6844 S 1 2.8219 S 2 2.4577 S 3 1.0591 S 4 0.1721
Maximum force Fmax Fmin k y Fmax 975 N
OD b
Spring index C C 7.333
b
2. Calculate the stress concentration factor from equation 14.11a.
s ln( C)
Krw e
S S s S s S s S s
0 1 2
2
3
3
4
4
Krw 1.166
Mean coil diameter D C b D 44.0 mm

4. Calculate the shear stress w at the working deflection using the shape factor from Table 14-7 and equation
14.11b.
Shape factors K1 0.180 K2 2.41
K2 Fmax D
Stress at Fmax w Krw w 558.2 MPa
2
b h
5. To get the defined spring rate, the number of active coils must satisfy equation 14.11d, solving for Na yields:
3
b h G
Number of active Na K1 Na 17.021 Na 17
coils 3
D k
accuracy. Having rounded the number of active coils, we must now calculate the spring rate using equation
14.11d:
3
Corrected b h G N
spring rate k K1 k 13.02
3 mm
D Na

Shut height Lshut h Nt Lshut 114 mm
Fmin
k

yshut Lf Lshut yshut 79 mm

13. The shut-height stress is

K2 Fshut D
Stress at Fshut shut Krw shut 586.3 MPa
2
b h

Inside coil dia Di D b Di 38 mm
Outside coil dia Do D b Do 50 mm
16. The weight of the spring's active coils is found from equation 14.11b
3
Weight Wa b h D Na Wa 6.545 N
1 k g
2 Wa
PROBLEM 14-54
Statement: A helical compression spring is required to provide a minimum force of 650 N at installation and
have a working deflection of 25 mm. The spring rate is 13 N/mm. The coil must fit in a 53-mm-dia
hole with 3-mm clearance. Use 6-mm square, music wire with squared/ground ends. Using a 15%
clash allowance, find:
(a) The stress at the working deflection.
(c) The stress at the shut height.
1
Given: Minimum force Fmin 650 N Spring rate k 13 N mm
Spring OD OD 50 mm Shear modulus G 80.8 GPa
Music wire dims: b 6 mm h 6 mm
Constant values from Table 14-6 for b/h = 1/1:
S 0 1.6844 S 1 2.8219 S 2 2.4577 S 3 1.0591 S 4 0.1721
Maximum force Fmax Fmin k y Fmax 975 N
OD b
Spring index C C 7.333
b
2. Calculate the stress concentration factor from equation 14.11a.
s ln( C)
Krw e
S S s S s S s S s
0 1 2
2
3
3
4
4
Krw 1.166
Mean coil diameter D C b D 44.0 mm

4. Calculate the shear stress w at the working deflection using the shape factor from Table 14-7 and equation
14.11b.
Shape factors K1 0.180 K2 2.41
K2 Fmax D
Stress at Fmax w Krw w 558.2 MPa
2
b h
5. To get the defined spring rate, the number of active coils must satisfy equation 14.11d, solving for Na yields:
3
b h G
Number of active Na K1 Na 17.021 Na 17
coils 3
D k
accuracy. Having rounded the number of active coils, we must now calculate the spring rate using equation
14.11d:
3
Corrected b h G N
spring rate k K1 k 13.02
3 mm
D Na

Shut height Lshut h Nt Lshut 114 mm
Fmin
k

yshut Lf Lshut yshut 79 mm

13. The shut-height stress is

K2 Fshut D
Stress at Fshut shut Krw shut 586.3 MPa
2
b h

Inside coil dia Di D b Di 38 mm
Outside coil dia Do D b Do 50 mm
16. The weight of the spring's active coils is found from equation 14.11b
3
Weight Wa b h D Na Wa 6.545 N
1 k g
2 Wa
PROBLEM 15-1
Statement: Compare the tensile load capacity of a 5/16-18 UNC thread and a 5/16-24 UNF thread made of the
same material. Which is stronger? Make the same comparison for M8 x 1.25 and M8 x 1 ISO
threads. Compare them all to the strength of a 5/16-14 Acme thread.
Assumptions: The material strength for all threads is S 100 ksi.

1. Get the tensile stress area for each thread specification from Tables 15-1 (for Unified National Standard sizes),
15-2 (for metric sizes), and 15-3 (for Acme threads).
Thread specification Tensile Stress Area
2
5/16-18 UNC a tUNC 0.0524 in
2
5/16-24 UNF a tUNF 0.0581 in
2
M8 x 1.25 a tMC 36.61 mm
2
M8 x 1 a tMF 39.17 mm
2
5/16-14 Acme a tAcme 0.053 in
2. Using the assumed strength, determine the allowable load for each thread specification.
Thread specification Equation Allowable Load

5/16-18 UNC FUNC a tUNC S FUNC 5240 lbf
5/16-24 UNF FUNF a tUNF S FUNF 5810 lbf
M8 x 1.25 FMC a tMC S FMC 25.24 kN
M8 x 1 FMF a tMF S FMF 27.01 kN
5/16-14 Acme FAcme a tAcme S FAcme 5300 lbf
FAcme 23.58 kN
3. State the conclusions.
1. The fine thread has a higher capacity than the coarse thread for both the UNS and ISO
threads.
2. The Acme thread has a higher capacity than the UNS coarse thread, but has a lower
cpacity than the fine UNS thread.
3. The Acme thread has a lower capacity than either of the metric threads.
PROBLEM 15-2
Statement: A 3/4-6 Acme thraed screw is used to lift a 2-kN load. The mean collar diameter is 40 mm. Find
the torque to lift and to lower the load using a ball-bearing thrust washer. What are the
efficiencies? Is it sel-locking?
Given: Screw diameter d 0.750 in Applied load P 2 kN

Collar diameter d c 40 mm Radial thread angle 14.5 deg
1
Threads per inch Nt 6 in
Assumptions: 1. The thread coefficient of friction is 0.15.

2. The collar coefficient of friction is c 0.02.
Solution: See and Mathcad file P1502.
1. Get the thread pitch diameter from Table 15-3. d p 0.667 in

1
2. Determine the thread pitch and lead. p p 0.167 in
Nt
L p L 0.167 in
3. Use equations 15.5 to determine the lifting (up) and lowering (down) torques.
P d p dp L cos( ) dc
Tu c P Tu 42.68 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
Td c P Td 18.25 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
4. Use equation 15.7c to determine the lifting (up) and lowering (down) efficiencies.
P L
eu eu 27.9 %
2 Tu
P L
ed ed 65.4 %
2 Td
5. Use equation 15.6a to determine if the screw is self-locking.
L
self_locking return "yes" if cos( )
d p
"no" otherwise
self_locking "yes"
PROBLEM 15-3
Statement: A 1 3/8-4 Acme thraed screw is used to lift a 1-ton load. The mean collar diameter is 2 in. Find
the torque to lift and to lower the load using a ball-bearing thrust washer. What are the
efficiencies? Is it sel-locking?
Given: Screw diameter d 1.375 in Applied load P 2000 lbf

Collar diameter d c 2.00 in Radial thread angle 14.5 deg
1
Threads per inch Nt 4 in
Assumptions: 1. The thread coefficient of friction is 0.15.

Solution: See and Mathcad file P1503.
1. Get the thread pitch diameter from Table 15-3. d p 1.250 in

1
Nt
L p L 0.250 in
Tu c P Tu 316.0 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
Td c P Td 153.0 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
P L
eu eu 25.2 %
2 Tu
P L
ed ed 52.0 %
2 Td
L
d p
"no" otherwise
self_locking "yes"
PROBLEM 15-4
Statement: The trailer hitch from Figure 1-1 (p. 12) has loads applied as shown in Figure P3-2. The tongue
weight of 100 kg acts downward and the pull force of 4905 N acts horizontally. Using the
dimensions of the ball bracket in Figure 1-5 (p. 15), draw a free-body diagram of the ball bracket
and find the tensile and shear loads applied to the two bolts that attach the bracket to the
channel in Figure 1-1. Size and specify the bolts and their preload for a safety factor of at least
1.7.
Given: Hitch dimensions: a 40 mm Tongue weight Mtongue 100 kg
b 31 mm Pull force Fpull 4.905 kN
c 70 mm Number of bolts Nbolts 2
d 20 mm Young's modulus E 206.8 GPa
t 19 mm Design safety factor Nd 1.7
Bolt modulus Ebolt E
Member modulus Ememb E
Assumptions: The shear load will be taken by friction between the hitch and the support.
Design Choices:
Use M12 x 1.75 , class 8.8 bolts.
Material properties for class 8.8: Bolt diameter d b 12 mm
Proof strength S p 600 MPa Clamp length l 30 mm
Yield strength S y 660 MPa Preload fraction fp 0.59
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A 2
B 19 = t B
31 = b Fc2x
C C
20 = d
D
D Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE S15-4
Solution: See Figure S15-4 and Mathcad file P1504.

Fc2x Fc2x 30.41 kN (4)
d


Axial force on two bolts Fc2x 30.4 kN Ptot Fc2x
Shear force taken by friction Fc2y 0.98 kN
Ptot
8. Determine the load per bolt. P P 15.20 kN
Nbolts
2
9. Get the tensile stress area from Table 15-2. At 84.27 mm
10. Calculate the preload. Fi fp S p At Fi 29.83 kN
11. Determine the relevant ratios for this joint from equations 15-18a and b.
db
Joint aspect ratio: j j 0.400
l
Ememb
Plate to bolt modulus: r r1
Ebolt
12. Calculate Cr = C using equation 15.19 and the coefficients p i from Table 15-8 for j 0.4 .
Coefficients from Table 15-8: p 0 0.7351
p 1 1.2612
p 2 1.1111
p 3 0.3779
3 2
Joint stiffness constant: C p 3 r p 2 r p 1 r p 0 C 0.207
13. The portions of the applied load P felt by the bolt and the material can now be found from equations 15.13.
Pb C P Pb 3.15 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 12.1 kN
14. Find the resulting loads in bolt and material after the load P is applied.
Fb Fi Pb Fb 32.98 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 17.78 kN
15. The maximum tensile stress in the bolt is

Fb
b b 391.4 MPa
At
16. This is a uniaxial stress situation, so the principal stress and von Mises stress are identical to the applied tensile
stress. The safety factor against yielding for class 8.8 with S y 660 MPa is then
Sy
Ny Ny 1.7
b
17. The load required to separate the joint and the safety factor against joint separation are found from equations
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 37.6 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 2.5
P
PROBLEM 15-5
Statement: For the hitch of Problem 3-4, determine the horizontal force that will result on the ball from
accelerating a 2000-kg trailer to 60 m/sec in 20 sec. Size and specify the bolts and their preload
for a safety factor of at least 1.7.
b 31 mm Pull force Fpull 6 kN
Design Choices:
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A 2
B 19 = t B
31 = b Fc2x
C C
20 = d
D
D Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 15-5

Fc2x Fc2x 36.43 kN (4)
d


Ptot
Nbolts
2
11. Determine the relevent ratios for this joint from equations 15-18a and b.
db
l
Ememb
Ebolt
Coeficients from Table 15-8: p 0 0.7351
p 1 1.2612
p 2 1.1111
p 3 0.3779
3 2
Pb C P Pb 3.77 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 14.4 kN

Fb
b b 392.8 MPa
At
16. This is a uniaxial stress situation, so the principal stress and von Mises stress are identical to the applied tensile
stress. The safety factor against yielding for class 8.8 with S y 660 MPa is then
Sy
Ny Ny 1.7
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 37.0 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 2.0
P
PROBLEM 15-6
an impact between the ball and the tongue of the 2000-kg trailer if the hitch deflects 2.8 mm
dynamically on impact. Size and specify the bolts and their preload for a safety factor of at least
1.7.

b 31 mm Pull force Fpull 55.1 kN
Design Choices:
Use M24 x 3 , class 12.9 bolts.
W tongue
70 = c
1 F pull 1
40 = a
2 A 2
B 19 = t B
31 = b Fc2x
C C
20 = d
D
D Fd2
F c2y
FIGURE 15-6

Fc2x Fc2x 306.48 kN (4)
d


Ptot
Nbolts
2
db
l
Ememb
Ebolt
p 1 1.2503
p 2 1.0672
p 3 0.3571
3 2
Pb C P Pb 36.75 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 116.5 kN

Fb
b b 637.7 MPa
At
16. This is a uniaxial stress situation, so the principal stress and von Mises stress are identical to the
3
applied tensile stress. The safety factor against yielding for class 8.8 with S y 1.1 10 MPa is then
Sy
Ny Ny 1.7
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 247.4 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 1.6
P
PROBLEM 15-7
Statement: A 1/2-in dia UNC, class 7 bolt with rolled threads is preloaded to 80% of its proof strength when
clamping a 3-in-thick sandwich of solid steel. Find the safety factors against static yielding and
joint separation when a static 1000-lb external load is applied. Use 99% reliability.
Given: Bolt diameter d 0.500 in Material properties for class 7:

Preload fraction fp 0.80 Proof strength S p 105 ksi
Clamp length l 3 in Yield strength S y 115 ksi
Number of bolts Nbolts 1 Ultimate strength S ut 133 ksi
6
Applied load Ptot 1000 lbf Young's modulus E 30 10 psi
Bolt modulus Ebolt E Member modulus Ememb E

Ptot
1. Determine the load per bolt. P P 1000 lbf
Nbolts
2
2. Get the tensile stress area from Table 15-1. At 0.1419 in
3. Calculate the preload. Fi fp S p At Fi 11920 lbf
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
5. Calculate Cr = C using equation 15.18 and the coefficients p i from Table 15-8 for j 0.167 . Use linear
interpolation between ja 0.1 and jb 0.2
pb pa
Interpolation equation: p p a p b j ja p a
jb ja
p 0 p ( 0.4389 0.6118)
p 1 p ( 0.9197 1.1715)
p 1 1.0876
p 2 p ( 0.8901 1.0875)
p 2 1.0217
p 3 p ( 0.3187 0.3806)
p 3 0.3600
3 2
Pb C P Pb 128.3 lbf
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 871.7 lbf
7 Find the resulting loads in bolt and material after the load P is applied.
Fb Fi Pb Fb 12048 lbf
Fm Fi Pm Fm 11048 lbf
8 The maximum tensile stress in the bolt is
Fb
b b 84.9 ksi
At
9. This is a uniaxial stress situation, so the principal stress and von Mises stress are identical to the applied
tensile stress. The safety factor against yielding for Grade 7 with S y 115 ksi is then
Sy
Ny Ny 1.4
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 13674 lbf
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 13.7
P
PROBLEM 15-8
Statement: An M14 x 2, class 8.8 bolt with rolled threads is preloaded to 75% of its proof strength when
clamping a 30-mm-thick sandwich of solid aluminum. Find the safety factors against static
yielding and joint separation when a static 5-kN external load is applied.
Given: Bolt diameter d 14 mm Material properties for class 8.8:
Preload fraction fp 0.75 Proof strength S p 600 MPa
Clamp length l 30 mm Yield strength S y 660 MPa
Number of bolts Nbolts 1 Ultimate strength S ut 830 MPa
Applied load Ptot 5 kN Young's modulus Ememb 71.7 GPa
Young's modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Ptot
1. Determine the load per bolt. P P 5 kN
Nbolts
2
3. Calculate the preload. Fi fp S p At Fi 52 kN
d
l
Ememb
Plate to bolt modulus: r r 0.347
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
Coefficients from Table 15-8: p 0 p ( 0.7351 0.7580) p 0 0.7504
p 1 p ( 1.2612 1.2632) p 1 1.2625
p 2 p ( 1.1111 1.0979) p 2 1.1023
p 3 p ( 0.3779 0.3708) p 3 0.3732
3 2
Pb C P Pb 2.1 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 2.9 kN
Fb Fi Pb Fb 54.1 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 49.1 kN
Fb
b b 468.6 MPa
At
tensile stress. The safety factor against yielding for Grade 8.8 with S y 660 MPa is then
Sy
Ny Ny 1.4
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 91.1 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 18.2
P
PROBLEM 15-9
Statement: A 7/16-in dia UNC, Grade 7 bolt with rolled threads is preloaded to 70% of its proof strength
when clamping a 2.75-in-thick sandwich of solid steel. Find the safety factors against fatigue
failure, yielding, and joint separation when a 1000-lb (peak) fluctuating external load is applied.
Use 99% reliability.
Given: Bolt diameter d 0.4375 in Material properties for Grade 7:

Clamp length l 2.75 in Yield strength S y 115 ksi
Number of bolts Nbolts 1 Ultimate strength S ut 133 ksi
6
Applied load Ptot 1000 lbf Young's modulus E 30 10 psi

Ptot
1. Determine the load per bolt. Pmax Pmax 1000 lbf Pmin 0 lbf
Nbolts
2

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 0.9197 1.1715) p 1 1.0685
p 2 p ( 0.8901 1.0875) p 2 1.0067
p 3 p ( 0.3187 0.3806) p 3 0.3553
3 2
Pb C Pmax Pb 124.0 lbf
Pm ( 1 C) Pmax Pm 876.0 lbf
8. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the fluctuating bolt load.
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 62.0 lbf
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 7875 lbf
2
9. The nominal mean and alternating stresses in the bolt are:
Fmean
Nominal mean stress mnom mnom 74.083 ksi
At
Falt
Nominal alternating stress anom anom 583 psi
At
10. The fatigue stress-concentration factor for this thread is found from equation 15.15c and the mean
stress-concentration factor factor Kfm is found from equation 6.17.
0.6812 d
Fatigue factor Kf 5.7 Kf 6.00
in
Nominal maximum stress maxnom mnom anom maxnom 74.667 ksi
Nominal minimum stress minnom mnom anom minnom 73.5 ksi
Kfm return Kf if Kf maxnom S y

S y Kf anom
return if Kf maxnom S y Kfm 1.505
mnom
return 0 if Kf maxnom minnom 2 S y
Falt
alt Kf alt 3.50 ksi
At
Fmean
mean Kfm mean 111.50 ksi
At
11. The stress at the initial preload is
Fi
init Kfm init 110.62 ksi
At
12. An endurance strength must be found for this material. Using the methods of Section 6.6 we find for
S ut 133 ksi
13. From the tables and formulas in Section 6.6 we have:

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.739
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1
and the endurance limit is

14. The corrected endurance strength and the ultimate tensile strength are used in equation 15.16 to find the safety
factor from the Goodman line.
S e S ut init
Nf
S e mean init S ut alt Nf 1.3
15. Calculate the maximum bolt stress and the safety factor against yielding for S y 115 ksi.
Fb
b b 74.667 ksi
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 8.9
Pmax ( 1 C)
PROBLEM 15-10
Statement: An M12 x 1.25, class 9.8 bolt with rolled threads is preloaded to 85% of its proof strength when
clamping a 5-cm-thick sandwich of aluminum. Find the safety factors against fatigue failure,
yielding, and joint separation when a 2.5-kN (peak) fluctuating external load is applied. Use 99%
reliability.
Given: Bolt diameter d 12 mm Material properties for class 9.8 bolt:

Applied load Ptot 2.5 kN Young's modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Member modulus Ememb 71.7 GPa

Ptot
1. Determine the load per bolt. Pmax Pmax 3 kN Pmin 0 kN
Nbolts
2
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.1999
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.0996
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3822
3 2
Pb C Pmax Pb 0.9 kN
Pm ( 1 C) Pmax Pm 1.6 kN
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.43 kN
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 51.3 kN
2
Fmean
Nominal mean stress mnom mnom 557.2 MPa
At
Falt
Nominal alternating stress anom anom 4.68 MPa
At
0.02682 d
Fatigue factor Kf 5.7 Kf 6
mm
Nominal maximum stress maxnom mnom anom maxnom 561.9 MPa
Nominal minimum stress minnom mnom anom minnom 552.5 MPa

S y Kf anom
mnom
11. The local mean and alternating stresses in the bolt are then:
Local mean stress m Kfm mnom m 691.8 MPa
Local alternating stress a Kf anom a 28.2 MPa
Fi
init Kfm init 686.02 MPa
At
S ut 130.534 ksi
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 450.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.744
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

15. The corrected endurance strength and the ultimate tensile strength are used in equation 15.16 to find the
safety factor from the Goodman line.
S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.5
S e m init S ut a
16. Calculate the maximum bolt stress and the safety factor against yielding for S y 720 MPa.
Fb
b b 561.9 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.3
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 31.0
Pmax ( 1 C)
PROBLEM 15-11
Statement: Find the tightening torque required for the bolt in Problem 15-7.

Applied load Ptot 1000 lbf Number of bolts Nbolts 1
Ptot
Nbolts
2
4. Calculate the tightening torque required for each bolt using equation 15.23.
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 1252 in lbf
PROBLEM 15-12

Applied load Ptot 5 kN Number of bolts Nbolts 1
Ptot
Nbolts
2
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 153 N m
PROBLEM 15-13

Applied load Ptot 5000 lbf Number of bolts Nbolts 1
Ptot
Nbolts
2
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 718 in lbf
PROBLEM 15-14
Applied load Ptot 20 kN Number of bolts Nbolts 1
Ptot
Nbolts
2
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 128 N m
PROBLEM 15-15
Statement: An automobile manufacturer would like a feasibility study of the concept of building-in electric,
motor-powered, screw jacks at each end of the car to automatically jack the car wheels off the
ground for service. Assuming a 2-ton vehicle with a 60/40 front/rear weight distribution,
design a self locking screw jack capable of lifting either end of the car. The jack body will be
attached to the car frame and the screw will extend downward to engage the ground. Assume a
minimum installed clearance of 8 in under the retracted screw in the up position. It must lift the
car frame at least an additional 8 in. Use rolling element thrust bearings. Determine a minimu
screw size, safe against column buckling. Determine its required lifting torque and efficiency,
and the power required to lift it to full height in 45 sec. What is your recommendation as to the
feasibility of this idea?
Given: Weight of car Wcar 2000 lbf Front weight factor ffront 0.6
Noload extension xnoload 8 in Loaded extension xload 8 in
Time to rertract tup 45 sec
Design Choices:
1. The thread coefficient of friction is 0.15.
6
3. Use AISI 1050 steel, Q&T @ 400F, with S y 117 ksi, and E 30 10 psi.
4. The column is fixed-free with end condition constant C 2.
5. Use the pitch diameter of the screw to compute the column radius of gyration.
6. Use a buckling design safety factor of Nbd 4.
7. Use a mean collar diameter of d c 2.00 in.
8. The length of engagement of the nut on the screw is Lnut 0.75 in.

1. Using the buckling critera (see Problem 4-53), find the minimum pitch diameter for the screw.
Column load P ffront Wcar P 1200 lbf
Effective column length Leff C xload xnoload Leff 32 in
and Euler regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 71.143
Sy
to Nbd*P. From equation 4.38b,
2 2
E A k 2 I
Pcr = and k =
2 A
L
2
E I
Substituting for k2 Pcr = = Nbd P
2
L
2
Leff Nbd P
Solving for I I
2
E
4
The required moment of inertia, assuming an Euler column is I 0.0166 in
4. Using the equation for the moment of inertia of a solid, round rod, solve for the pich diameter of the screw.
1
4 4
d 64 I
I= d p d p 0.763 in
64
5. Using this diameter, calculate the slenderness ratio and compare to S rD. If it is greater than S rD the assumption
of an Euler column is correct, if not, recalculate using the Johnson equation.
2 2
Area Ar dp Ar 0.457 in
4
I
Radius of gyration kr kr 0.191 in
Ar
Leff
kr
Since this is greater than S rD, the assumption of an Euler column is correct.
6. Enter Table 15-3 with this minimum pitch diameter and chose a tentative screw size of 7/8-6.
1
Screw diameter d 0.875 in Threads per inch Nt 6 in
Radial thread angle 14.5 deg Pich daimeter d p 0.792 in
1
Nt
L p L 0.167 in
8. Use equations 15.5 to determine the extending and retracting torques.
Text c P Text 130.6 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
Tret c P Tret 65.4 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
P L
eext eext 24.4 %
2 Text
P L
eret eret 48.7 %
2 Tret
L
d p
"no" otherwise
self_locking "yes"
11. Check the safety factor against thread shear by stripping using equations 15.8. The area factor for thread
stripping is given in Table 15-5 as wi 0.77 for the minor diameter of an Acme thread.
Minor diameter d r 0.708 in

2
Total shear area As d r L Lnut Nt As 1.668 in
P
Shear stress s s 719.3 psi
As
0.577 S y
Factor of safety Ns Ns 94
s
12. Determine the power required to lift the car.
xload xnoload rad

Rotational speed 2.133
tup L sec
Power required H Text H 0.042 hp
PROBLEM 15-16
Statement: Design a manual screw jack similar to that shown in Figure 15-4 for a 20-ton lift capacity and a
100-mm lift stroke. Assume that the operator can apply a 400-N force at the tip of its bar handle
to turn either the screw or the nut, depending on your design. Design the cylindrical bar handle
to fail in bending at the design load before the jackscrew fails so that one cannot lift an overload
and fail the screw. Use rolling element thrust bearings. Seek a safety factor of 3 for thread or
column failure. State all assumptions.
Given: Design jack load P 40000 lbf Design handle load Fhandle 400 N
Lift stroke stroke 100 mm Design safety factor Nd 3
6
Design Choices:
1. The thread coefficient of friction is 0.15.
3. For the screw, use AISI 1050 steel, Q&T @ 400F, with S yscrew 117 ksi.
4. For the handle, use AISI 1020 cold rolled steel, with S yhandle 57 ksi.
5. The column is fixed-free with end condition constant C 2.
6. Use the pitch diameter of the screw to compute the column radius of gyration.
7. Use a mean collar diameter of d c 2.00 in.
8. The length of engagement of the nut on the screw is Lnut 2.00 in.
9. The length of the handle from its base to midpoint of grip is Lhandle 10 in

1. Using the buckling critera (see Problem 4-53), find the minimum pitch diameter for the screw.
Effective column length Leff C stroke Leff 7.874 in
and Euler regions.
2 E
S rD S rD 71.143
S yscrew
3. To start the iterative process, assume that the final design will be a Johnson column with the critical load
equal to Nbd*P. From equation 4.38b,
2 2 4 2
Sy d d

A L 2 I
Pcr = S y A k = I= A=
E 2 k A 64 4
2
Sy A 2 L2
1
Substituting for k 2 Pcr = S y A = Nd P
E 2 I 1
2
4 Nd P 16 S yscrew Leff
2
d p
Syscrew
Solving for d p
E 2
The minimum required pitch diameter, assuming a Johnson column is d p 1.185 in
5. Using this diameter, calculate the slenderness ratio and compare to S rD. If it is less than S rD the assumption of
a Johnson column is correct, if not, recalculate using the Euler equation.
2 2
Area Ar dp Ar 1.103 in
4
4 4
Moment of inertia I dp I 0.097 in
64
I
Radius of gyration kr kr 0.296 in
Ar
Leff
kr
Since this is less than S rD, the assumption of a Johnson column is correct.
6. Enter Table 15-3 with this minimum pitch diameter and chose a tentative screw size of 1 3/8-5.
1
Screw diameter d 1.375 in Threads per inch Nt 4 in
Radial thread angle 14.5 deg Pich daimeter d p 1.250 in
1
Nt
L p L 0.250 in
Tu c P Tu 6319 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
Td c P Td 3060 in lbf
2 dp cos( ) L 2
P L
eu eu 25.2 %
2 Tu
P L
ed ed 52.0 %
2 Td
L
d p
"no" otherwise
self_locking "yes"
11. Check the safety factor against thread shear by stripping using equations 15.8. The area factor for thread
stripping is given in Table 15-5 as wi 0.77 for the minor diameter of an Acme thread.
Minor diameter d r 0.708 in

2
Total shear area As d r L Lnut Nt As 4.448 in
P
Shear stress s s 8.99 ksi
As
0.577 S yscrew
Factor of safety Ns Ns 7.5
s
12. Find a suitable length and diameter for the handle using a safety factor against yielding of one at the handle
design load.
Bending moment M Tu M 6319 in lbf
M
Handle length Lhandle Lhandle 70.3 in
Fhandle
M 3
Section modulus Z Z 0.1109 in
S yhandle
1
3
32 Z
Handle diameter d d 1.041 in

Use a handle with diameter d 1.00 in

However, the length is unrealistic (nearly 6 feet).
PROBLEM 15-17a
Statement: Determine the effective spring constant of an aluminum, copper-asbestos, steel sandwich under
compressive load. It is uniformly loaded over its 10-cm2 area. The first and third members are
each 10 mm thick and the middle member is 1 mm thick, making a total thickness of 21 mm.
Which material dominates the calculation?
Given: Thicknesses t1 10 mm Modulus E1 71.7 GPa
t2 1 mm E2 93 GPa
t3 10 mm E3 206.8 GPa
2
Area A 10 cm
1. Member stiffnesses
A E1 9 N
Aluminum (1) k1 k1 7.170 10
t1 m
A E2 10 N
Copper-asbestos (2) k2 k2 9.300 10
t2 m
A E3 10 N
Steel (3) k3 k3 2.068 10
t3 m
2. Sandwich stiffness:
1 9 N
ktot ktot 5.04 10
1 1 1 m
k1 k2 k3
3. The aluminum dominates the calculation.
PROBLEM 15-18a
Statement: Determine the effective spring constant of an aluminum, copper-asbestos, steel sandwich under
compressive load. It is uniformly loaded over its 1.5-in 2 area. The first and third members are
each 0.4 in thick and the middle member is 0.04 in thick, making a total thickness of 0.84 in.
Which material dominates the calculation?
6
Given: Thicknesses t1 0.40 in Modulus E1 10.4 10 psi
6
t2 0.04 in E2 13.5 10 psi
6
t3 0.40 in E3 30 10 psi
2
Area A 1.5 in

1. Member stiffnesses
A E1 7 lbf
Aluminum (1) k1 k1 3.900 10
t1 in
A E2 8 lbf
Copper-asbestos (2) k2 k2 5.063 10
t2 in
A E3 8 lbf
Steel (3) k3 k3 1.125 10
t3 in
2. Sandwich stiffness:
1 7 lbf
ktot ktot 2.74 10
1 1 1 in
k1 k2 k3
3. The aluminum dominates the calculation.
Statement: A preloaded steel bolt similar to that shown in Figure 15-31(a) clamps two flanges of total
thickness l. Using the data given in the row(s) assigned in Table P15-1, find the joint stiffness
constant.
Given: Bolt specification: M8 x 1
Bolt diameter d 8 mm Clamped length l 30 mm
Member material matl "steel" Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Member modulus of elasticity function: Ememb return 206.8 GPa if matl = "steel"
return 71.0 GPa if matl = "alum"
Solution: See Figure 15-31(a), Table P15-1, Table P15-8, and Mathcad file P1519a.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.2189
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.1076
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3832
3 2
P1519a.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-20
Statement: A single-cylinder air compressor head sees forces that range from 0 to 18.5 kN each cycle. The
head is 80-mm-thick aluminum, the unconfined gasket is 1-mm-thick Teflon, and the block is
aluminum. The effective clamp length of the cap screw is 120 mm. The piston is 75 mm dia and
the cylinder is 140 mm outside dia. Specify a suitable number, class, preload, and bolt circle for
the cylinder head cap screws to give a minimum safety factor of 1.2 for any possible failure
mode.
Given: Total load Ptot 18.5 kN Gasket thickness tg 1 mm
Clamp length l 120 mm Member mod. Ememb 71.8 GPa
Piston diameter id 75 mm Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Cylinder diameter od 140 mm Teflon mod. Eg 240 MPa
Design Choices: Use 10 M12 x 1.75 , class 8.8 cap screws.

Material properties for class 8.8: Bolt diameter d 12 mm
Proof strength S p 600 MPa Number of bolts Nbolts 8
Ultimate strength S ut 830 MPa Bolt circle diameter d bc 107.5 mm

Ptot
1. Determine the load per bolt. P P 2313 N
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2

4. Determine the relevant ratios for the joint without the gasket from equations 15-18a and b.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt

p 1 0.9197
p 2 0.8901
p 3 0.3187
3 2
6. We can estimate the stiffness of the bolt kb' from equation 15.17 using its tensile stress area from Table 15-1 and
then estimate the material stiffness km for the no gasket case by using the expression for C in equation 15.13c,
given kb' and C.
At Ebolt 1
1
d kN
Estimated bolt stiffness kb' kb' 132.0
l l mm
( 1 C) kN
Estimated member stiffness km kb' km 486
C mm
7. Now we will address the unconfined gasket. The bolt stiffness is not affected by the gasket but the material
stiffness is. We now have two springs in series, the metal, whose stiffness is calculated above, and the
gasket. These combine according to equation 14.2b. The portion of the unconfined gasket subjected to the
clamp force can be assumed to be from the outside diameter of the flange shown in Figure 15-33 to the inside
diameter of the vessel. The bolt hole should be subtracted from the gasket area. The area of the clamped
gasket around one bolt is:
od id Nbolts d
2 2 2 2
Gasket area per bolt Ag Ag 1259 mm
4 Nbolts
8. The stiffness of this piece of gasket material is found from equation 15.11c,
Ag Eg kN
Gasket stiffness per bolt kg kg 302.1
tg mm
9. The combined stiffness of the gasketed joint (from equation 14.2b) is
Let the aluminum and gasket stiffnesses be km1 km and km2 kg
Combined gasket and cover 1 kN

stiffness km km 186.3
1 1 mm

km1 km2
10. The joint constant with the unconfined gasket is now
Joint constant with kb'

unconfined gasket C C 0.415
km kb'
and ( 1 C) 0.585
Pb C P Pb 958.97 N
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 1353.5 N
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.479 kN
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 45.99 kN
2
14. Because these loads are fluctuating, we need to calculate the mean and alternating components of the force felt
in the bolt. The mean and alternating forces are
Fb Fi
Mean force Fmean Fmean 46.0 kN
2
Fb Fi
Alternating force Falt Falt 479 N
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.02682 d
mm

S y Kf anom
mnom
Fi
At
S ut 830 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 415.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.76
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.3
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 551.38 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.2
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 34
Pmax ( 1 C)
24. Check the screw spacing, comparing it to the rules given in the text.
d bc
Bolt spacing space bolt space bolt 42.2 mm
Nbolts
space bolt
Space/dia ratio ratio ratio 3.5 which is OK
d
PROBLEM 15-21
Statement: A single-cylinder engine head sees forces that range from 0 to 4000 lb each cycle. The head is
2.5-in-thick cast iron, the unconfined gasket is 0.125-in-thick copper-asbestos, and the block is
cast iron. The effective clamp length of the cap screw is 3.125 in. The piston is 3 in dia and the
cylinder is 5.5 in outside dia. Specify a suitable number, class, preload, and bolt circle for the
cylinder head cap screws to give a minimum safety factor of 1.2 for any possible failure mode.
Given: Total load Ptot 4000 lbf Gasket thickness tg 0.125 in

6
Clamp length l 3.125 in Member mod. Ememb 15 10 psi
6
Piston diameter id 3.00 in Bolt modulus Ebolt 30 10 psi
6
Cylinder dia. od 5.50 in Gasket modulus Eg 13.5 10 psi
Design Choices:
Use 8 5/16-18 UNC , grade 5 cap screws.
Material properties for grade 5: Bolt diameter d 0.3125 in
Proof strength S p 85 ksi Number of bolts Nbolts 8
Yield strength S y 92 ksi Preload fraction fp 0.90
Ultimate strength S ut 120 ksi Bolt circle diameter d bc 4.250 in
Ptot
Nbolts
Pmin 0 lbf Pmax P
2
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt

p 1 0.9197
p 2 0.8901
p 3 0.3187
3 2
given kb' and C.
At Ebolt 1
1
d kip
l l in
( 1 C) kip
C in
7. Now we will address the unconfined gasket. The bolt stiffness is not affected by the gasket but the material
stiffness is. We now have two springs in series, the metal, whose stiffness is calculated above, and the
gasket. These combine according to equation 14.2b. The portion of the unconfined gasket subjected to the
clamp force can be assumed to be from the outside diameter of the flange shown in Figure 15-33 to the inside
diameter of the vessel. The bolt hole should be subtracted from the gasket area. The area of the clamped
gasket around one bolt is:
od id Nbolts d
2 2 2 2
Gasket area per bolt Ag Ag 2.01 in
4 Nbolts
8. The stiffness of this piece of gasket material is found from equation 15.11c,
Ag Eg kip
Gasket stiffness per bolt kg kg 217028
tg in
Let the cast iron and gasket stiffnesses be km1 km and km2 kg
Combined gasket and head 1 kip

stiffness km km 2345
1 1 in

km1 km2

km kb'
Pb C P Pb 81.61 lbf
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 418.4 lbf
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 40.80 lbf
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 4.05 kip
2
Fmean
Nominal mean stress mnom mnom 77.3 ksi
At
Falt
Nominal alternating stress anom anom 779 psi
At
0.02682 d
mm

S y Kf anom
mnom

Fi
init Kfm init 86.51 ksi
At
S ut 120 ksi

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
S ut
Csurf A Csurf 0.759
ksi
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.5
S e m init S ut a
21. Calculate the maximum bolt stress and the safety factor against yielding for S y 92 ksi.
Fb
b b 78.06 ksi
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.2
b
22. The load required to separate the joint and the safety factor against joint separation are found from
equations 15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 10
Pmax ( 1 C)
23. Check the screw spacing, comparing it to the rules given in the text.
d bc
Bolt spacing space bolt space bolt 1.67 in
Nbolts
space bolt
d
PROBLEM 15-22
Statement: The forged steel connecting rod for the engine of problem 15-21 is split around the 38-mm-dia
crankpin and fastened with two bolts and nuts that hold its two halves together. The total load
on the two bolts varies from 0 to 8.5 kN each cycle. Design these bolts for infinite life. Specify
their size, class, and preload.
Given: Total force Ptot 8.5 kN Member mod. Ememb 206.8 GPa
Number of bolts Nbolts 2 Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Design Choices:
Proof strength S p 650 MPa Preload fraction fp 0.70
Yield strength S y 720 MPa Design safety factor Nd 1.5
Ultimate strength S ut 900 MPa Clamp length l 2.5 d

1. Determine the load per bolt.
Ptot
P P 4.25 kN
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
p 1 1.2612
p 2 1.1111
p 3 0.3779
3 2
Pb C P Pb 0.88 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 3.4 kN
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.440 kN
2
Fb Fi
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.02682 d
mm
Nominal maximum stress maxnom mnom anom maxnom 67.379 ksi
Nominal minimum stress minnom mnom anom minnom 65.992 ksi

S y Kf anom
mnom

Fi
At
S ut 900 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 450.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.744
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.5
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 464.6 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 12.4
Pmax ( 1 C)
PROBLEM 15-23a
Statement: (See also Problem 4-33.) The bracket in Figure P15-2 is fastened to the wall by 4 cap screws
equispaced on a 10-cm-dia bolt circle and arranged as shown. The wall is the same material as
the bracket. The bracket is subjected to a static force F, where F and the beam's other data are
given in row a in Table P15-1. Find the forces acting on each of the 4 cap screws due to this
loading and choose a suitable cap screw diameter, length, and preload that will give a minimum
safety factor of 2 for any possible mode of failure.

Arm length a 400 mm Modulus of elasticity E 207 GPa
Wall plate thickness t 10 mm Number of bolts Nbolts 2
Bolt circle diameter d bc 100 mm (top or bottom)
Clamp length l 2 t
Assumptions: 1. The cap screws and wall provide the couple shown in the FBD of Figure 15-23. This is an
idealization, but is conservative.
2. The torsion reaction and the vertical reaction at the wall are provided by frictional forces
between the wall and the wall plate on the bracket and the screws are subjected to the horizontal
forces only.
Design Choices:
Use M5 X 0.8 , class 4.6 cap screws.
Material properties for class 4.6: Cap screw diameter d 5 mm
Proof strength S p 225 MPa
y
dbc F
Ptot
d T T x
Ptot
L
R
FIGURE 15-23
Free Body Diagram of Tube and Wall Plate for Problem 15-23

1. Calculate the magnitude of the couple in Figure 15-23 by summing moments. Ptot d' F L = 0
Distance d' d' d bc sin( 45 deg) d' 70.711 mm

L
Total screw force Ptot F Ptot 70.71 N
d'
Ptot
2. Determine the load per screw. P P 35.36 N
Nbolts
2

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.2070
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.1026
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3825

3 2
7. The portions of the applied load P felt by the screw and the material can now be found from equations 15.13.
Pb C P Pb 5.85 N
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 29.5 N
8. Find the resulting loads in screw and material after the load P is applied.
Fb Fi Pb Fb 1.73 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 1.69 kN
9. The maximum tensile stress in the screw is
Fb
b b 121.9 MPa
At
tensile stress. The safety factor against yielding for class 4.6 with S y 240 MPa is then
Sy
Ny Ny 2.0
b
Fi
P0 P0 2.1 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 58
P
PROBLEM 15-24a
the bracket. The bracket is subjected to a sinusoidal force time function with Fmax = F, and Fmin
= -F, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a in Table P15-1. Find the forces
acting on each of the 4 cap screws due to this loading and choose a suitable cap screw
diameter, length, and preload that will give a minimum safety factor of 1.5 for any possible mode
of failure for N = 5E8 cycles.

Arm length a 400 mm Modulus Ememb 207 GPa
forces only.
Design Choices:
Use M4 x 0.7 , class 4.8 cap screws.
Ultimate strength S ut 420 MPa Modulus Ebolt 207 GPa
y
dbc F
Ptot
d T T x
Ptot
L
R
FIGURE 15-24

1. Calculate the magnitude of the couple in Figure 15-24 by summing moments. Ptot d' F L = 0

L
d'
Ptot
Nbolts
Pmin P Pmax P
2

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.2070
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.1026
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3825
3 2
Pb C P Pb 5.85 N
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 29.5 N
Fb Fi Pb Fb 2.05 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 2.01 kN
9. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the fluctuating screw load.
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 2.926 N
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 2.04 kN
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.6812 d
in

S y Kf anom
mnom
Fi
At
S ut 420 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 210.0 MPa
Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.91
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut init
Nf Nf 10
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 233.166 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
Fi
Nsep Nsep 69
Pmax ( 1 C)
PROBLEM 15-25a
the bracket. The bracket is subjected to a sinusoidal force time function with Fmax = F, and
Fmin = 0, where F and the beam's other data are given in row a in Table P15-1. Find the forces
acting on each of the 4 cap screws due to this loading and choose a suitable cap screw
diameter, length, and preload that will give a minimum safety factor of 1.5 for any possible
mode of failure for N = 5E8 cycles.
Arm length a 400 mm Modulus Ememb 207 GPa
forces only.
Design Choices:
Use M4 x 0.7 , class 4.8 cap screws.
Ultimate strength S ut 420 MPa Modulus Ebolt 207 GPa
y
dbc F
Ptot
d T T x
Ptot
L
R
FIGURE 15-25

1. Calculate the magnitude of the couple in Figure 15-25 by summing moments. Ptot d F L = 0

L
d'
Ptot
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.2070
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.1026
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3825
3 2
Pb C P Pb 5.85 N
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 29.5 N
Fb Fi Pb Fb 2.05 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 2.01 kN
9. Calculate the alternating and mean components of the fluctuating screw load.
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 2.926 N
2
Fb Fi
Fmean Fmean 2.04 kN
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.6812 d
in

S y Kf anom
mnom
Fi
At
S ut 420 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 210.0 MPa
Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.91
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut init
Nf Nf 10
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 233.2 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
Fi
Nsep Nsep 69
Pmax ( 1 C)
PROBLEM 15-26
Statement: (See also Problem 6-42.) A cylindrical tank with hemispherical ends is required to hold 425 kPa
of pressurized air at room temperature. The pressure cycles from zero to maximum. The tank
diameter is 0.5 m and its length is 1 m. The hemispherical ends are attached by some number of
bolts through mating flanges on each part of the tank. A 0.5-mm-thick, compressed asbestos,
unconfined gasket is used between the 10-mm-thick steel flanges. Determine a suitable number,
class, preload for, and size of bolts to fasten the ends of the tank. Specify the bolt circle and
outside diameter of the flange needed to prevent leakage. A minimum safety factor of 2 is
desired against leakage and a safety factor of 1.5 against bolt failure for infinite life.
Given: Maximum pressure p max 425 kPa Gasket thickness tg 0.5 mm
Flange thickness tf 10 mm Member mod. Ememb 206.8 GPa
Tank diameter id 500 mm Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Leakage safety factor Nsep 2 Asbestos mod. Eg 480 MPa
Bolt safety factor Nb 1.5
Design Choices:
Use 40 M16 x 1.5 , class 12.9 bolts.

2
id
1. Determine the load per bolt. Ptot p max Ptot 83.4 kN
4
Ptot
P P 2086 N
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2
4. Calculate the clamp length.

Clamp length l 2 t f tg l 20.5 mm
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja

p 1 p ( 1.2543 1.2503) p 1 1.2511
p 2 p ( 1.0735 1.0672) p 2 1.0684
p 3 p ( 0.3595 0.3571) p 3 0.3576
3 2
given kb' and C.
At Ebolt 1
1
d kN
l l mm
( 1 C) kN
C mm
8. Now we will address the unconfined gasket case. The bolt stiffness is not affected by the gasket but the
material stiffness is. We now have two springs in series, the metal, whose stiffness is calculated above, and
the gasket. These combine according to equation 14.2b. The portion of the unconfined gasket subjected to
the clamp force can be assumed to be from the outside diameter of the flange shown in Figure 15-33 to the
inside diameter of the vessel. The bolt hole should be subtracted from the gasket area. The area of the
clamped gasket around one bolt is:
Flange OD od id 6 d od 596 mm
od id Nbolts d
2 2 2 2
Gasket area per bolt Ag Ag 1865 mm
4 Nbolts
9. The stiffness of this piece of gasket material is found from equation 15.11c, where, from Table 15-10.
Ag Eg kN
Gasket stiffness per bolt kg kg 1790.3
tg mm
Let the steel and gasket stiffnesses be km1 km and km2 kg
Combined gasket and cover 1 kN

stiffness km km 1123.0
1 1 mm

km1 km2

km kb'
and ( 1 C) 0.542
Pb C P Pb 0.95 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 1131.5 N
14. Because these loads are fluctuating, we need to calculate the mean and alternating components of the force felt
in the bolt. The mean and alternating forces are
Fb Fi
Mean force Fmean Fmean 122.2 kN
2
Fb Fi
Alternating force Falt Falt 477 N
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.02682 d
mm

S y Kf anom
mnom
Fi 3
init Kfm init 1.08 10 MPa
At
S ut 1220 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 610.0 MPa
Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.686
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.5
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 733.2 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
Fi
Nsep Nsep 108
Pmax ( 1 C)
24. Check the bolt spacing, comparing it to the rule given in the text.
Bolt circle dia d bc 0.5 ( od id) d bc 548 mm
d bc
Bolt spacing space bolt space bolt 43 mm
Nbolts
space bolt
d
PROBLEM 15-27
Statement: (See also Problem 6-42.) A cylindrical tank with hemispherical ends is required to hold 250 kPa
of pressurized air at room temperature. The pressure cycles from zero to maximum. The tank
diameter is 0.5 m and its length is 1 m. The hemispherical ends are attached by some number of
bolts through mating flanges on each part of the tank. A confined o-ring gasket is used
between the 10-mm-thick steel flanges. Determine a suitable number, class, preload for, and size
of bolts to fasten the ends of the tank. Specify the bolt circle and outside diameter of the flange
needed to prevent leakage. A minimum safety factor of 2 is desired against leakage and a
safety factor of 1.5 against bolt failure for infinite life.
Given: Maximum pressure p max 250 kPa Bolt safety factor Nb 1.5
Flange thickness tf 10 mm Member mod. Ememb 206.8 GPa
Tank diameter id 500 mm Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Leakage safety factor Nsep 2
Design Choices:
Use 24 M12 x 1.25 , class 10.9 cap screws.

2
id
1. Determine the load per screw. Ptot p max Ptot 49.1 kN
4
Ptot
P P 2045.31 N
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2

4. Calculate the clamp length.
Clamp length l 2 t f l 20 mm
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
p 1 1.2600
p 2 1.0851
p 3 0.3647
3 2
Pb C P Pb 0.47 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 1.6 kN
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.237 kN
2
Fb Fi
2
Fmean
At
Falt
At
0.02682 d
mm

S y Kf anom
mnom

Fi
At
S ut 1040 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 520.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1
b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.716
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.5
S e m init S ut a
Fb
b b 627.6 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
Fi
Nsep Nsep 36
Pmax ( 1 C)
19. Check the bolt spacing, comparing it to the rules given in the text.
Flange OD od id 6 d od 572 mm
Bolt circle dia d bc 0.5 ( od id) d bc 536 mm
d bc
Bolt spacing space bolt space bolt 70.2 mm
Nbolts
space bolt
d
PROBLEM 15-28
Statement: Calculate the proof loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the proof strength) for 1/2-13
UNC bolts in each SAE grade listed in Table 15-6.
Given: Bolt specification: 1/2-13 UNC
2
Bolt diameter d 0.500 in Tensile stress area At 0.1419 in
1. There are eight grade numbers in Table 15-6 that are applicable to the bolt size specified. The grade numbers an
proof strength values are:
Grade S p
i 1 2 8 i i
"1" 33 ksi
"2" 55 ksi
"4" 65 ksi
"5" 85 ksi
"5.2" 85 ksi
"7" 105 ksi
"8" 120 ksi
"8.2" 120 ksi
2. Use equation 15.2 to calculate the proof load.
Fp
Fp At S p i
i i
lbf
"1"
"2" 4683
7805
"4" 9224
"5" 12062
Grade
i
"5.2" 12062
"7" 14900
"8" 17028

"8.2" 17028
P1528.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-29
Statement: Calculate the proof loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the proof strength) for M20 x
2.50 bolts in each class listed in Table 15-7.
Given: Bolt specification: M20 x 2.50
2
Bolt diameter d 20 mm Tensile stress area At 244.79 mm
1. There are seven grade numbers in Table 15-7. The grade numbers and proof strength values are:
Class S p
i 1 2 7 i i
"4.6" 225 MPa

"4.8" 310 MPa
"5.8" 380 MPa
"8.8" 600 MPa
"9.8" 650 MPa
"10.9" 830 MPa
"12.9" 970 MPa
Fp
Fp At S p i
i i
kN
"4.6"
55
"4.8" 76
"5.8" 93
Class "8.8" 147
i
"9.8" 159
"10.9" 203
"12.9" 237

P1529.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-30 _____

Statement: Determine the joint stiffness constant for the bolt and members in Problem 15-7.
2
Bolt diameter d 0.500 in Tensile area At 0.1419 in Grip l 3 in
6
Member material matl "steel" Bolt modulus Ebolt 30 10 psi
6
Member modulus of elasticity function: Ememb return 30 10 psi if matl = "steel"
6
Member stiffness parameters: return 10.4 10 psi if matl = "alum"
Solution: See Problem 15-9, Table 15-8, and Mathcad file P1530.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 0.9197 1.1715) p 1 1.0876
p 2 p ( 0.8901 1.0875) p 2 1.0217
p 3 p ( 0.3187 0.3806) p 3 0.3600
3 2
PROBLEM 15-31 _____
Given: Bolt specification: M14 x 2
Member material matl "alum" Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Solution: See problem 15-8, Table P15-8, and Mathcad file P1531.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.2612 1.2632) p 1 1.2625
p 2 p ( 1.1111 1.0979) p 2 1.1023
p 3 p ( 0.3779 0.3708) p 3 0.3732
3 2
PROBLEM 15-32 _____

Bolt diameter d 0.4375 in Clamped length l 2.75 in
6
Member material matl "steel" Bolt modulus Ebolt 30 10 psi
6
Member modulus of elasticity function: Ememb return 30 10 psi if matl = "steel"
6
return 10.4 10 psi if matl = "alum"
Solution: See Problem 15-9, Table 15-8, and Mathcad file P1532.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 0.9197 1.1715) p 1 1.0685
p 2 p ( 0.8901 1.0875) p 2 1.0067
p 3 p ( 0.3187 0.3806) p 3 0.3553
3 2
PROBLEM 15-33 _____
Member material matl "alum" Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa
Solution: See problem 15-10, Table 15-8, and Mathcad file P1533.
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.1999
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.0996
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3822
3 2
Statement: Figure P15-3 shows a bolted joint eccentrically loaded in shear. The shear loads are taken by the
dowel pins, the number and size of which are given in Table P15-3. Although the figure shows 5
dowel pins, that is not the case for every row in the table. For a = 4 in, b = 4 in, l = 10 in, P = 2500
lb, and the data in the row(s) assigned from Table P15-3, find the magnitude and direction of the
total shear force on each dowel.
Given: Dimensions: a 4 in b 4 in l 10 in Eccentric load P 2500 lbf
Dowel diameters and position coordinates with respect to position C: i 1 2 5
A: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
1 1 1 1 1
B: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
2 2 2 2 2
C: d 0.250 in x 0 in y 0 in x 0.000 in y 0.000 in
3 3 3 3 3
D: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
4 4 4 4 4
E: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
5 5 5 5 5
Number of dowels in group: n 5
1. Calculate the cross-sectional (shear) area of each dowel.
i
2
A d
i 4
2. Use equations 15.24 to find the centroid of the dowel group with respect to position C.
A ixi A iy i
i i
xbar xbar 0.000 in ybar ybar 0.000 in
A
i A
i
i i
3. Determine the radial distance from the group centroid to each dowel.

i y i ybar
2 2
r if d 0 in x xbar 0 in
i i
4. Calculate the direct shear at each dowel due to the force P acting through the centroid using equation 15.25a.
F1 if d 0 in 0 lbf
P
F1 500.0 lbf
i i n 1
5. Calculate the magnitude of the moment acting on the group.

M P ( l xbar) M 25000 in lbf
6. Calculate the magnitude of the indirect shear at each dowel due to the moment acting on the group using
equation 15.25b.
M r
i
j 1 2 5 F2
rj
i 2
7. Calculate the angle that the vector F2i makes with the positive x axis.
s if ( M 0 in lbf 1 1 )
i
if x xbar 0 in y ybar 0 in atan2 x xbar y ybar 0 deg s 90 deg
i i i i
i
if d 0 in 0 deg
i i
8. Calculate the vector components of F2i.
F2x F2 cos
i i i F2y F2 sin
i i i
9. Determine the total shear force at each dowel.
F F
2 2
F 2x 1 F2y
i i i i
10. Calculate the angle that Fi makes with the positive x axis.
i i
F if d 0 in atan2 F2x F1 F2y 0 i i i
11. Summarize results (magnitude and direction in the last two columns):
A
i r F2x F2y F F
i i i i i i
2
in in deg lbf lbf lbf deg
0.0491 2.828 45.0 1563 1563 1890 34.2 A
0.0491 2.828 -45.0 1563 -1563 2588 -52.9 B
0.0491 0.000 -90.0 0 0 500 -90.0 C
0.0491 2.828 -225.0 -1563 1563 1890 145.8 D
0.0491 2.828 -135.0 -1563 -1563 2588 -127.1 E
Statement: Figure P15-3 shows a bolted and doweled joint eccentrically loaded in shear. The shear loads are
taken by dowel pins, the number and size of which are given in Table P15-3. Although the figure
shows 5 dowels, that is not the case for every row in the table. For a = 4 in, b = 4 in, l = 10 in, P =
2500 lb, and the data in the row(s) assigned from Table P15-3, find the total shear stress in each
dowel.
A: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
1 1 1 1 1
B: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
D: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
4 4 4 4 4
E: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
5 5 5 5 5
Number of dowels in group: n 5
i
2
A d
i 4
A ixi A iy i
i i
A
i A
i
i i

i y i ybar
2 2
i i
F1 if d 0 in 0 lbf
P
F1 500.0 lbf
i i n 1

equation 15.25b.
M r
i
j 1 2 5 F2
rj
i 2
s if ( M 0 in lbf 1 1 )
i
i i i i
i
if d 0 in 0 deg
i i
F2x F2 cos
i i i F2y F2 sin
i i i
F F
2 2
F 2x 1 F2y
i i i i
10. Calculate the total shear stress at each dowel.
F
if d 0 in 0 ksi
i
i i A
i
11. Summarize results (the shear stress is in the last column):
A
i r F2x F2y F
i i i i i i
2
in in deg lbf lbf lbf ksi
0.0491 2.828 45.0 1563 1563 1890 38.5 A
0.0491 2.828 -45.0 1563 -1563 2588 52.7 B
0.0491 0.000 -90.0 0 0 500 10.2 C
0.0491 2.828 -225.0 -1563 1563 1890 38.5 D
0.0491 2.828 -135.0 -1563 -1563 2588 52.7 E
Statement: Figure P15-3 shows a bolted and doweled joint eccentrically loaded in shear. The shear loads are
taken by alloy steel dowel pins, the number and size of which are given in Table P15-3.
Although the figure shows 5 dowel pins, that is not the case for every row in the table. For a = 4
in, b = 4 in, l = 10 in, P = 2500 lb, SAE grade 8 bolts, and the data in the row(s) assigned from
Table P15-3, find the factor of safety against yielding in shear for each dowel pin. See Table
15-12 for strength data.

A: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
1 1 1 1 1
B: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
D: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
4 4 4 4 4
E: d 0.250 in x 0.5 a y 0.5 b x 2.000 in y 2.000 in
5 5 5 5 5
Number of dowels in group: n 5 Shear strength S ys 117 ksi

i
2
A d
i 4
A ixi A iy i
i i
A
i A
i
i i

i y i ybar
2 2
i i
F1 if d 0 in 0 lbf
P
F1 500.0 lbf
i i n 1

equation 15.25b.
M r
i
j 1 2 5 F2
rj
i 2
j
s if ( M 0 in lbf 1 1 )
i i i i
i
i
if d 0 in 0 deg
i i
F2x F2 cos
i i i F2y F2 sin
i i i
F F
2 2
F 2x 1 F2y
i i i i
10. Calculate the total shear stress at each dowel.
F
if d 0 in 0 ksi
i
i i A
i
11. Using equation 5.9a, calculate the factor of safety against yielding in shear.
S ys
Ny if d 0 in 0
i i
i
12. Summarize results (the safety factor is in the last column):
A
i r F2x F2y F
i i i i i i
2 Ny
in in deg lbf lbf lbf ksi i
0.0491 2.828 45.0 1563 1563 1890 38.5 3.0 A
0.0491 2.828 -45.0 1563 -1563 2588 52.7 2.2 B
0.0491 0.000 -90.0 0 0 500 10.2 11.5 C
0.0491 2.828 -225.0 -1563 1563 1890 38.5 3.0 D
0.0491 2.828 -135.0 -1563 -1563 2588 52.7 2.2 E
PROBLEM 15-37
Statement: The coefficient of friction for an oil-lubricated, single-start, power screw thread-nut combination
is 0.10. Which of the American Standard Acme Threads in Table 15-3 will be self-locking for this
thread-nut combination? Which will be the least likely to back down in the presence of dynamic
loading? Which will be the most likely to back down in the presence of a dynamic load?
Given: Screw-nut coefficient of friction 0.10 Thread angle 14.5 deg
1. There are 23 entries in Table 15-3. Establish an index variable with range 1 .. 23: i 1 2 23
2. Input the values of the major diameter, d; thread pitch, p; and pitch diameter, d p. Note that for a single-start
thread L = p.
Major Thread Pitch

Diameter Pitch Diameter
d L d p
i i i
0.250 0.063 0.219

0.313 0.071 0.277
0.375 0.083 0.333
0.438 0.083 0.396
0.500 0.100 0.450
0.625 0.125 0.563
0.750 0.167 0.667
0.875 0.167 0.792
1.000 0.200 0.900
1.125 0.200 1.025
1.250 0.200 1.150
1.375 0.250 1.250
1.500 0.250 1.375
1.750 0.250 1.625
2.000 0.250 1.875
2.250 0.333 2.083
2.500 0.333 2.333
2.750 0.333 2.583
3.000 0.500 2.750
3.500 0.500 3.250
4.000 0.500 3.750
4.500 0.500 4.250
5.000 0.500 4.750
3. Calculate the right-hand side of inequality 15.6a.
L
i
selflock cos( )
i d p
i
P1537.xmcd
4. Display the selflock calculations. If the result is less than the thread will be self locking if not, it will back dow
under a static load.
d selflock
i i
0.250 0.089
0.313 0.079
0.375 0.077
0.438 0.065
0.500 0.068
0.625 0.068
0.750 0.077
0.875 0.065
1.000 0.068
1.125 0.060
1.250 0.054
1.375 0.062
1.500 0.056
1.750 0.047
2.000 0.041
2.250 0.049
2.500 0.044
2.750 0.040
3.000 0.056
3.500 0.047
4.000 0.041
4.500 0.036
5.000 0.032
5. All of the selflock values are less than so all threads will be selflocking under a static load. The 5.000-inch
major diameter thread has the lowest selflock value and will, therefore, be the least likely to back down in the
presence of a dynamic load. The 0.250-inch major diameter thread has the highest selflock value and is,
therefore, the most likely to back down in the presence of a dynamic load.
P1537.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-38
Statement: The coefficient of friction for an oil-lubricated, single-start, power screw thread-nut combination
is 0.20. Which of the American Standard Acme Threads in Table 15-3 will have the greatest
efficiency (neglecting thrust-collar friction)?
Given: Screw-nut coefficient of friction 0.20 Thread angle 14.5 deg
1. There are 23 entries in Table 15-3. Establish an index variable with range 1 .. 23: i 1 2 23
2. Input the values of the major diameter, d; thread pitch, p; and pitch diameter, d p. Note that for a single-start
thread L = p.
Major Thread Pitch

Diameter Pitch Diameter
d L d p
i i i
0.250 0.063 0.219

0.313 0.071 0.277
0.375 0.083 0.333
0.438 0.083 0.396
0.500 0.100 0.450
0.625 0.125 0.563
0.750 0.167 0.667
0.875 0.167 0.792
1.000 0.200 0.900
1.125 0.200 1.025
1.250 0.200 1.150
1.375 0.250 1.250
1.500 0.250 1.375
1.750 0.250 1.625
2.000 0.250 1.875
2.250 0.333 2.083
2.500 0.333 2.333
2.750 0.333 2.583
3.000 0.500 2.750
3.500 0.500 3.250
4.000 0.500 3.750
4.500 0.500 4.250
5.000 0.500 4.750
3. Calculate the efficiency using equation 15.7d.
L d p cos( ) L
i i i
e
i d p d p L cos( )
i i i
P1538.xmcd
4. Display the efficiency calculations.
d e
i i
0.250 0.301
0.313 0.278
0.375 0.273
0.438 0.241
0.500 0.251
0.625 0.251
0.750 0.274
0.875 0.242
1.000 0.251
1.125 0.228
1.250 0.209
1.375 0.232
1.500 0.216
1.750 0.190
2.000 0.169
2.250 0.196
2.500 0.179
2.750 0.164
3.000 0.216
3.500 0.190
4.000 0.169
4.500 0.152
5.000 0.139
5. Determine the maximum efficiency and its corresponding major diameter.
emax max( e) emax 0.301
The major diameter of the Acme thread with the greatest efficiency is 0.250 in. As a general rule, the greater the
major diameter the less efficient the screw thread is. However, as can be seen from the table above, this is not
always the case.
P1538.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-39
Statement: Determine the number of engaged screw threads required to make the total stripping-shear area
of the engaged threads equal to twice the tensile stress area for each of the fine pitch screw
threads in Table 15-2.
Solution: See Table 15-2, Table 15-5, and Mathcad file P1539.
1. There are 14 entries in the fine-thread columns Table 15-2. Establish an index variable with range 1 .. 14:
i 1 2 14
2. Input the values of the major diameter, d; the pitch, p; the minor diameter, d r; and tensile stress area, At.
Major Minor Tensile

Diameter, Pitch, Diameter, Stress
mm mm mm Area, mm2
d p d r At
i i i i
8 1.00 6.77 39.17

10 1.25 8.47 61.20
12 1.25 10.47 92.07
14 1.50 12.16 124.55
16 1.50 14.16 167.25
18 1.50 16.16 216.23
20 1.50 18.16 271.50
22 1.50 20.16 333.06
24 2.00 21.55 384.42
27 2.00 24.55 495.74
30 2.00 27.55 621.2
33 2.00 30.55 760.80
36 3.00 32.32 864.94
39 3.00 35.32 1028.39
3. Determine the number of threads required to make the total stripping-shear area equal to twice the tensile stress
area.
n As = 2 At
where n is the number of threads and As is given by equation 15.8a. Solving for n,
2 At
i
n
i 0.8 d r p
i i
where the factor, 0.8, is taken from Table 15-5.
P1539.xmcd
4. Display the values of n:
d n
i i
8 4.6
10 4.6
12 5.6
14 5.4
16 6.3
18 7.1
20 7.9
22 8.8
24 7.1
27 8.0
30 9.0
33 9.9
36 7.1
39 7.7
P1539.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-40
Statement: Calculate the ultimate tensile loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the tensile strength)
for 1/2-13 UNC bolts in each SAE grade listed in Table 15-6.
2
Bolt diameter d 0.500 in Tensile stress area At 0.1419 in
1. There are eight grade numbers in Table 15-6 that are applicable to the bolt size specified. The grade numbers an
tensile strength values are:
Grade S ut
i 1 2 8 i i
"1" 60 ksi
"2" 74 ksi
"4" 115 ksi
"5" 120 ksi
"5.2" 120 ksi
"7" 133 ksi
"8" 150 ksi
"8.2" 150 ksi
Fut
Fut At S ut i
i i
lbf
"1"
"2" 8514
10501
"4" 16319
"5" 17028
Grade
i
"5.2" 17028
"7" 18873
"8" 21285

"8.2" 21285
P1540.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-41
Statement: Calculate the ultimate tensile loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the tensile strength)
for M20 x 2.50 bolts in each class listed in Table 15-7.
2
1. There are seven grade numbers in Table 15-7. The grade numbers and tensile strength values are:
Class S ut
i 1 2 7 i i
"4.6" 400 MPa

"4.8" 420 MPa
"5.8" 520 MPa
"8.8" 830 MPa
"9.8" 900 MPa
"10.9" 1040 MPa
"12.9" 1220 MPa
2. Use equation 15.2 to calculate the ultimate tensile load.
Fut
Fut At S ut i
i i
kN
"4.6"
98
"4.8" 103
"5.8" 127
Class "8.8" 203
i
"9.8" 220
"10.9" 255
"12.9" 299

P1541.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-42
Statement: 3/8-in dia UNC bolts and nuts clamp a 0.75-in-thick aluminum cover plate to a 0.50-in-thick steel
flange. Determine the stiffness factor of the joints.
6
Given: Bolt diameter d 0.375 in Bolt modulus Ebolt 30 10 psi
6
Cover plate lc 0.75 in Cover plate Ec 10.4 10 psi
6
Flange lf 0.50 in Flange Ef 30 10 psi
1. Determine the relevant ratios for this joint from equations 15-18.
Clamped length: l lc lf l 1.25 in
d
l
Ef
Plate to bolt modulus: rH rH 1
Ebolt
Ec
rL rL 0.347
Ebolt
Low and high modulus

plate thicknesses: TL lc TL 0.75 in
TH lf TH 0.5 in
TL
Plate thickness ratio: t t 0.6
TL TH
Ec
Material modulus ratio: m m 0.347
Ef
2. Calculate the Cr terms CH and CL for rH and rL , respectively, using equation 15.19 and the coefficients p i from
Table 15-8 for j 0.3 .
Coefficients from Table 15-8: p 0 0.6932 p 1 1.2426 p 2 1.1177

p 3 0.3845
3 2
CL p 3 rL p 2 rL p 1 rL p 0 CL 0.381
3 2
CH p 3 rH p 2 rH p 1 rH p 0 CH 0.184
3. Use equation 15.20 to calculate Ct. taking the coefficients from Table 15-9 for j 0.3 .
Coeficients from Table 15-9: q 0 0.0861 q 1 8.2344 q 2 22.274

q 3 13.963
3 2
Ct q 3 t q 2 t q 1 t q 0 Ct 0.024
4. Calculate a correction factor to linearize the result from the previous step using equation 15.21.
Correction factor: a e
0.0598 ln( j ) 30.1385 ln( j ) 20.4350 ln( j ) 2.3516
a 0.177
5. Using equation 15.22, calculate the joint stiffness factor C.
Joint stiffness factor: C CH t a Ct CL CH C 0.303
PROBLEM 15-43
Statement: M14 x 2 bolts and nuts clamp a 16-mm-thick aluminum cover plate to a 12-mm-thick steel flange.
Determine the stiffness factor of the joints.
Given: Bolt diameter d 14 mm Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa

Cover plate lc 16 mm Cover plate Ec 71.7 GPa
Flange lf 12 mm Flange Ef 206.8 GPa
Clamped length: l lc lf l 28 mm
d
l
Ef
Ebolt
Ec
rL rL 0.347
Ebolt

plate thicknesses: TL lc TL 16 mm
TH lf TH 12 mm
TL
TL TH
Ec
Material modulus ratio: m m 0.347
Ef
2. Calculate the Cr terms CH and CL for rH and rL , respectively, using equation 15.19 and the coefficients p i from
Table 15-8 for j 0.5 .

p 3 0.3708
3 2
CL p 3 rL p 2 rL p 1 rL p 0 CL 0.437
3 2
CH p 3 rH p 2 rH p 1 rH p 0 CH 0.222

q 3 11.457
3 2
Ct q 3 t q 2 t q 1 t q 0 Ct 0.366
0.0598 ln( j ) 30.1385 ln( j ) 20.4350 ln( j ) 2.3516
a 0.135
PROBLEM 15-44
Statement: M16 x 2.0 bolts with nuts clamp a 50-mm-thick aluminum cover plate to a 30-mm-thick steel
flange. Determine the stiffness factor of the joints.

d
l
Ef
Ebolt
Ec
rL rL 0.347
Ebolt

TH lf TH 30 mm
TL
TL TH
2. Calculate the Cr terms CH and CL for rH and rL , respectively, using equation 15.19 and the coefficients
p i from Table 15-8 for j 0.2 .

p 3 0.3806
3 2
CL p 3 rL p 2 rL p 1 rL p 0 CL 0.320
3 2
CH p 3 rH p 2 rH p 1 rH p 0 CH 0.147

q 3 15.497
3 2
Ct q 3 t q 2 t q 1 t q 0 Ct 0.214
0.0598 ln( j ) 30.1385 ln( j ) 20.4350 ln( j ) 2.3516
a 0.214

PROBLEM 15-45
Statement: 5/16-18 UNC bolts with nuts clamp a 1.625-in-thick gray cast iron cover plate to a 1.5-in-thick
steel flange. Determine the stiffness factor of the joints.
Given: Bolt diameter d 0.3125 in Bolt modulus Ebolt 30000 ksi
Cover plate lc 1.625 in Cover plate Ec 15000 ksi
Flange lf 1.500 in Flange Ef 30000 ksi

Clamped length: l lc lf l 3.125 in
d
l
Ef
Ebolt
Ec
rL rL 0.5
Ebolt

plate thicknesses: TL lc TL 1.625 in
TH lf TH 1.5 in
TL
TL TH
p i from Table 15-8 for j 0.1 .

p 3 0.3187
3 2
CL p 3 rL p 2 rL p 1 rL p 0 CL 0.162
3 2
CH p 3 rH p 2 rH p 1 rH p 0 CH 0.091

q 3 202.44 q 4 209.38 q 5 82.726
5 4 3 2
Ct q 5 t q 4 t q 3 t q 2 t q 1 t q 0 Ct 0.068
0.0598 ln( j ) 30.1385 ln( j ) 20.4350 ln( j ) 2.3516
a 0.260

PROBLEM 15-46
Statement: M16 x 1.5 bolts with nuts clamp a 8-mm-thick titanium cover plate to a 8-mm-thick stainless
steel flange. Determine the stiffness factor of the joints.

d
Joint aspect ratio: j j 1
l
Ef
Plate to bolt modulus: rH rH 0.917
Ebolt
Ec
rL rL 0.55
Ebolt

TH lf TH 8 mm
TL
TL TH
p i from Table 15-8 for j 1 .

p 3 0.3187
3 2
CL p 3 rL p 2 rL p 1 rL p 0 CL 0.149
3 2
CH p 3 rH p 2 rH p 1 rH p 0 CH 0.098
3. Use equation 15.20 to calculate Ct. taking the coefficients from Table 15-9 for j 1 .

q 3 202.44 q 4 209.38 q 5 82.726
5 4 3 2
Ct q 5 t q 4 t q 3 t q 2 t q 1 t q 0 Ct 0.124
0.0598 ln( j ) 30.1385 ln( j ) 20.4350 ln( j ) 2.3516
a 0.095

PROBLEM 15-47
Statement: An M12 X 1.25 soft steel nut is assembled with a hardened steel bolt. The nut is 11 mm thick
and has a shear yield-strength of 120 MPa. Determine the axial force that will cause stripping
failure of the nut if the nut threads fail before the bolt fails.
Given: Major dia. of bolt d 12 mm Pitch p 1.25 mm

Nut thickness h 11 mm
Shear strength S ys 120 MPa
Assumptions: The nut major diameter is equal to the bolt major diameter.
Solution: See Table 15-2, Table 15-5, and Mathcad file P1547.
1. Calculate the approximate number of threads in the nut.
h
Number of threads n n 8.8
p
2. Determine the area factor for nut thread stripping from Table 15-5.
Area factor wo 0.88
3. Calculate the shear area in the nut using equation 15.8b and the number of threads from step 1.
2
Shear area As n d wo p As 364.9 mm
4. Using equation 15.8c, calculate the tensile force that will cause the nut threads to fail in shear.
Failure load Ffail As S ys Ffail 43.8 kN
P1547.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-48
Statement: Compare the yield loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the yield strength) to the proof
loads (load that causes a tensile stress equal to the proof strength) for M12 x 1.25 bolts in each
class listed in Table 15-7.
2
Solution: See Tables 15-2 and 15-7 and Mathcad file P1548.
1. There are seven grade numbers in Table 15-7. The grade numbers, proof strength, and yield strength values are:
Class S p S y
i 1 2 7 i i i
"4.6" 225 MPa 240 MPa

"4.8" 310 MPa 340 MPa
"5.8" 380 MPa 420 MPa
"8.8" 600 MPa 660 MPa
"9.8" 650 MPa 720 MPa
"10.9" 830 MPa 940 MPa
"12.9" 970 MPa 1100 MPa
2. Use equation 15.2 to calculate the proof load and the yield load. The percent difference is in the last column.
Fp At S p Fy At S y
i i i i
Fy Fp
Fp Fy i i 1
i i
Fp %
kN kN i
"4.6"
21 22 6.7
"4.8" 29 31 9.7
"5.8" 35 39 10.5
Class "8.8" 55 61 10.0
i
"9.8" 60
66 10.8
"10.9" 76
87 13.3
"12.9" 89
101 13.4
P1548.xmcd
PROBLEM 15-49
Statement: An M16 x 1.50, class 4.8 bolt with cut threads is preloaded to 85% of its proof strength when
clamping a 20-mm-thick sandwich of solid steel. Find the safety factors against static yielding
and joint separation when a static 3-kN external load is applied.
Applied load Ptot 3 kN Young's modulus E 206.8 GPa
Ptot
Nbolts
2
3. Calculate the preload. Fi fp S p At Fi 44 kN

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
p 1 1.2503
p 2 1.0672
p 3 0.3571
3 2
Pb C P Pb 0.7 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 2.3 kN
Fb Fi Pb Fb 44.8 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 41.8 kN
Fb
b b 38.8 ksi
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.3
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 58.0 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 19.3
P
PROBLEM 15-50
Statement: A 15-mm-thick steel cap is to be fastened to a 15-mm-thick steel flange with 6 bolts and nuts.
The external load on the cap is 30 kN. Size and specify the bolts for a safety factor of at least
1.5 and specify the torque required on each bolt to obtain the preload if the threads are
lubricated.
Given: Clamp length l 30 mm Number of bolts Nbolts 6
Bolt modulus Ebolt 206.8 GPa Member mod. Ememb 206.8 GPa
Applied load Ptot 30 kN
Design Choices:
Proof strength S p 380 MPa
Ptot
Nbolts
2

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.2426 1.2612) p 1 1.2488
p 2 p ( 1.1177 1.1111) p 2 1.1155
p 3 p ( 0.3845 0.3779) p 3 0.3823
3 2
Pb C P Pb 1.0 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 4.0 kN
Fb Fi Pb Fb 16.4 kN
Fm Fi Pm Fm 11.4 kN
Fb
b b 282.5 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
P0 P0 19.1 kN
1C
P0
Nsep Nsep 3.8
P
11. Use equation 15.23d to calculate the tightening torque.
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 32.4 N m
PROBLEM 15-51
Statement: Repeat Problem 15-50 with a total external load on the six bolts that varies from 0 to 30 kN per
cycle. Design these bolts for infinite life with a factor of safety of at least 1.5. Specify their
size, class, preload, and tightening torque.
Given: Total force Ptot 30 kN Member mod. Ememb 206.8 GPa

Design Choices:
Use M10 x 1.5 , class 5.8 bolts with rolled threads.
Ultimate strength S ut 520 MPa Clamp length l 30 mm

Ptot
P P 5 kN
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2
d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.2426 1.2612) p 1 1.2488
p 2 p ( 1.1177 1.1111) p 2 1.1155
p 3 p ( 0.3845 0.3779) p 3 0.3823
3 2
Pb C P Pb 0.96 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 4.0 kN
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.479 kN
2
Fb Fi
2
9. The fatigue stress-concentration factor Kf 2.2 for rolled threads is taken from Table 15-8. The mean
stress-concentration factor is taken as Kfm 1 in this case. The mean and alternating stresses in the bolt are:
Falt
alt Kf alt 18.17 MPa
At
Fmean
mean Kfm mean 274.26 MPa
At
Fi
At
S ut 520 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 260.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.86
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1
S e S ut init
Nf Nf 3.1
S e mean init S ut alt
Fb
b b 282.5 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 3.8
Pmax ( 1 C)
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 32.4 N m
PROBLEM 15-52
Statement: A 20-mm-thick aluminum cap is to be fastened to a 20-mm-thick aluminum flange with 8 bolts
and nuts. The external load on the cap varies from 0 to 40 kN per cycle. Size and specify the
bolts for infinite life and a safety factor of at least 1.5 and specify the torque required on each
bolt to obtain the preload if the threads are lubricated.
Given: Total force Ptot 40 kN Member mod. Ememb 71.7 GPa

Design Choices:
Use M10 x 1.5 , class 8.8 bolts with rolled threads.
Ultimate strength S ut 830 MPa Clamp length l 40 mm

Ptot
P P 5 kN
Nbolts
Pmin 0 N Pmax P
2

d
l
Ememb
Ebolt
pb pa
jb ja
p 1 p ( 1.1715 1.2426) p 1 1.2070
p 2 p ( 1.0875 1.1177) p 2 1.1026
p 3 p ( 0.3806 0.3845) p 3 0.3825
3 2
Pb C P Pb 1.75 kN
Pm ( 1 C) P Pm 3.2 kN
Fb Fi
Falt Falt 0.877 kN
2
Fb Fi
2
9. The fatigue stress-concentration factor Kf 3.0 for rolled threads is taken from Table 15-8. The mean
stress-concentration factor is taken as Kfm 1 in this case. The mean and alternating stresses in the bolt are:
Falt
alt Kf alt 45.34 MPa
At
Fmean
mean Kfm mean 435.11 MPa
At
Fi
At
S ut 830 MPa
S'e 0.5 S ut S'e 415.0 MPa

Load Cload 0.70
Size Csize 1

b
Sut
Csurf A Csurf 0.76
MPa
Temperature Ctemp 1

S e S ut init
Nf Nf 1.8
S e mean init S ut alt
Fb
b b 450.2 MPa
At
Sy
Ny Ny 1.5
b
15.14c and 15.14d.
Fi
Nsep Nsep 7.5
Pmax ( 1 C)
Ti 0.21 Fi d Ti 51.1 N m
PROBLEM 16-1
Statement: A submerged-arc complete joint penetration (CJP) butt weld was made between two sections of
A36 hot-rolled steel plate. The plate is 10-in wide by 1/2-in-thick. E70 electrode was used. How
much tensile load can the assembly withstand across the weld without yielding in either base
metal or weld?
Given: Plate: L 10 in T 0.5 in S y 36 ksi

Electrode: S ut 70 ksi
Assumptions: There are no stress concentrations or residual stresses. The yield strength of the electrode material
is
S ey 0.75 S ut S ey 52.5 ksi
1. Calculate the cross-sectional area of both the plate and the weld.
2
A L T A 5 in
2. Both the plate and weld are in pure tension so the tensile stress is the only nonzero principle stress and is
also the von Mises stress. Calculate the load that will cause failure in the weld and in the plate. The lesser of
the two is the maximum load that can be applied to the joint.
Weld Pweld A S ey Pweld 262.5 kip
Plate Pplate A S y Pplate 180 kip
The maximum load that can be applied to the joint without yielding is Pplate 180 kip
P1601.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-2
Statement: The plate of Problem 16-1 has partial joint penetration (PJP) welds applied from each side. If each
weld has a throat dimension of 1/4 in, determine the maximum allowable tensile load across the
weld.
Given: Plate: L 10 in T 0.5 in S y 36 ksi

Electrode: S ut 70 ksi
Weld: t 0.25 in two places
Assumptions: The weld will fail in shear along the weld throat and, from equation 16-1, the maximum allowable
shear stress is max 0.3 S ut , max 21 ksi
1. Calculate the cross-sectional areas of the weld and the plate.

2
Aweld L 2 t Aweld 5 in
2
Aplate L T Aplate 5 in
2. Calculate the load that will cause failure in the weld and in the plate.
Weld: Pweld Aweld max Pweld 105 kip
Plate: Pplate Aplate S y Pplate 180 kip
The limiting load is Pweld 105 kip
P1602.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-3
Statement: A tee bracket similar to that shown in Figure 16-11 is to have 1/2-in-thick A572 Grade 42 steel
welded with 3/16-in fillet welds along both inside corners using an E70 electrode. If it will be
subjected to a 20-kip tensile load on the leg of the tee, determine the minimum required length,
L, of the bracket based on full-length welds.
Given: Plates: T 0.5 in S put 70.3 ksi

Electrode: Exx 70 ksi
Weld: w 0.1875 in two places
Load: P 20 kip
shear stress is max 0.3 Exx , max 21 ksi
Solution: See Figure 16-11, Table 16-3, and Mathcad file P1603.
1. Determine the throat dimension of the welds.
t 0.707 w t 0.133 in
2. Determine the shear area in the throats of the welds as a function of L and then solve for L using equation 4.9.
Ashear P
Ashear = L 2 t L= and xy = max =
2 t Ashear
P
Solving for L, L L 3.592 in
2 t max
3. Check whether this value for L gives an acceptable safety factor against yielding in the fused base metal.
The shear area on the leg along the width of the welds is Afusion 2 L w , and, from Table 16-3 the yield
strength of the base metal is S y 42 ksi. The shear yield strength of the base metal is S sy 0.577 S y . The
factor of safety against yielding in the fused base metal is:
S sy Afusion Afusion
Nyield = = S sy Nyield S sy Nyield 1.63
xy P P
2
where Afusion 1.347 in and S sy 24.2 ksi
P1603.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-4
Statement: Figure P16-1 shows a bar welded to a base on three sides with 3/16-in fillet welds using an E70
electrode. Material is A572 Grafde 50 hot-rolled steel. What is your recommended maximum
static load P that can safely be applied?
Given: Bar dims: a 6 in b 3 in d 2 in T 0.25 in

Weld: w 0.1875 in three places
Material: S y 50 ksi S ut 65 ksi
shear stress is max 0.3 Exx , max 21 ksi. Consider the weld as a line. The weld pattern
matches that of part 5 of Figure 16-15. The weld will limit the load as Category F.
Solution: See Figure P16-1, Figure 16-15, and Mathcad file P1604.
t 0.707 w t 0.133 in
2. Determine the shear area in the throats of the welds as a line function.
2
in
Aw d 2 b Aw 8
in
3. Find the centroid of the weld pattern with the equation given in part 5 of Figure 16-5.
2
b
xbar xbar 1.125 in
2 b d
4. Find the moment arm from the applied load to the centroid.
r a b xbar r 7.875 in
5. Find the unit load due to direct shear and the applied torque as functions of P.
P
fs ( P) T ( P) P r
Aw
6. From part 5 of Figure 16-15 the torsional geometry factor is:
3 2 2 4
( 2 b d) b ( b d) in
Jw Jw 14.542
12 2 b d in
7. The unit load due to torsional shear is a vector that is perpendicular to a line from the centroid to any point
on the weld. It is a maximum at a point furthest from the centroid. In this case, it is the furtherest point to the
right on either the top or bottom of the bar. In either case, it will have horizontal and vertical components.
The vertical component will add to the direct shear and that total will add vectorially to the horizontal
component. The moment arm for the horizontal component is d/2, and for the vertical component it is b -
xbar.
T ( P) d
Horizontal unit load: fth ( P)
2 Jw
T ( P) ( b xbar)
Vertical unit load: ftv ( P)
Jw
fth ( P) fs ( P) f tv ( P)
2 2
Total unit load: FR( P)
P1604.xmcd
8. Solve for P setting the shear stress equal to the maximum allowable stress, which is (0.3)E70.
Guess P 3 kip
Given FR( P)
t= P Find ( P)
max
Recommended maximum static load: P 2.2 kip

kip
Primary shear: fs ( P) 0.276
in
Shear due to moment:
kip
Horizontal component: fth ( P) 1.194
in
kip
Vertical component: ftv ( P) 2.239
in
kip
Total unit load: FR( P) 2.784
in
P1604.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-5
Statement: Figure P16-1 shows a bar welded to a base on three sides with 3/16-in fillet welds using an E70
electrode. Material is A572 Grade 50 hot-rolled steel. What is your recommended maximum
dynamic repeated load, zero to Pmax that can be applied for 10E8 cycles with a safety factor of
1.6?
Given: Bar dims: a 6 in b 3 in d 2 in T 0.25 in

Weld: w 0.1875 in three places Nfr 1.6
Assumptions: The weld will fail in shear along the weld throat. Consider the weld as a line. The weld pattern
t 0.707 w t 0.133 in
2. Determine the shear area in the throats of the welds as a line function.
2
in
Aw d 2 b Aw 8
in
3. Find the centroid of the weld pattern with the equation given in part 5 of Figure 16-5.
2
b
xbar xbar 1.125 in
2 b d
4. Find the moment arm from the applied load to the centroid.
r a b xbar r 7.875 in
5. Find the unit load due to direct shear and the applied torque as functions of P.
P
fs ( P) T ( P) P r
Aw
6. From part 5 of Figure 16-15 the torsional geometry factor is:
3 2 2 4
( 2 b d) b ( b d) in
Jw Jw 14.542
12 2 b d in
7. The unit load due to torsional shear is a vector that is perpendicular to a line from the centroid to any point
on the weld. It is a maximum at a point furthest from the centroid. In this case, it is the furtherest point to the
right on either the top or bottom of the bar. In either case, it will have horizontal and vertical components.
The vertical component will add to the direct shear and that total will add vectorially to the horizontal
component. The moment arm for the horizontal component is d/2, and for the vertical component it is b -
xbar.
T ( P) d
Horizontal unit load: fth ( P)
2 Jw
T ( P) ( b xbar)
Vertical unit load: ftv ( P)
Jw
fth ( P) fs ( P) f tv ( P)
2 2
Total unit load: FR( P)
8. From Table 16-5a, a Category F joint has a shear stress-range endurance strength of S ers 8 ksi. Using the
given safety factor, the allowable shear stress is
P1605.xmcd
S ers
Allowable shear stress: allow allow 5 ksi
Nfr
9. Solve for P setting the shear stress equal to the maximum allowable stress.
Guess P 1 kip
Given FR( P)
t= Pmax Find ( P)
allow
Recommended maximum dynamic load: Pmax 525 lbf
fs Pmax 65.6
lbf
Primary shear:
in
Shear due to moment:
fth Pmax 284.3

lbf
Horizontal component:
in
ftv Pmax 533.1

lbf
Vertical component:
in
FR Pmax 662.8
lbf
Total unit load:
in
P1605.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-6a
Statement: Figure P16-2 shows a bracket welded to a wall with a fillet weld using an E70 electrode. For the
row a in Table P16-1, determine the fillet weld size needed between the tube and the wall for a
static load F. The pipe and wall material is A36 steel.
Given: Bracket dims: OD 3.5 in ID 3.068 in a 2 OD l 2.5 OD

Load: F 2.5 kip
shear stress is max 0.3 Exx , max 21 ksi. Consider the weld as a line. The weld pattern
Solution: See Figure P16-2, Figure 16-15, and Mathcad file P1606a.
1. Determine the shear area, bending factor, and torsion factor in the throats of the welds as line functions from
Figure 16-15, part 9.
2
in
Aw OD Aw 10.996
in
2 3
OD in
S w S w 9.621
4 in
3 4
OD in
Jw Jw 33.674
4 in
2. The weld has a combined bending and torsion load. The maximum stress will occur at the top, center of the
pipe at the wall. There will be a direct shear component, a bending component, and a torsional moment
component.
3. Find the unit load due to direct shear.

F lbf
fs fs 227.364
Aw in
4. Find the unit load due to bending at the critical point.
M kip
M F l fb fb 2.274
Sw in
5. Find the unit load due to the torsional moment.

T OD kip
T F a ft ft 0.909
2 Jw in
6. Find the magnitude of the resultant unit load at the critical point ( fs is in the negative y-direction, f b is in the
positive x-direction, and ft is in the negative z-direction).
2 2 2 kip
Total unit load: FR fs fb ft FR 2.459
in
7. Using equation 16.1, solve for the minimum required weld size.
FR
t w 1.414 t
max
t 0.117 in w 0.166 in Say w = 3/16 in
P1606a.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-7a
Statement: Figure P16-2 shows a bracket welded to a wall with a fillet weld using an E70 electrode. For the
row a in Table P16-1, determine the fillet weld size needed between the tube and the wall for a
dynamic load that varies from - 0.1F to +0.2F using a safety factor of 1.5. The pipe and wall
material is A36 steel.
Given: Bracket dims: OD 3.5 in ID 3.068 in a 2 OD l 2.5 OD

Load: F 2.5 kip Nfr 1.5
Solution: See Figure P16-2, Figure 16-15, and Mathcad file P1607a.
1. Determine the dynamic load range.
F 0.2 F ( 0.1F ) F 750 lbf
2. Determine the shear area, bending factor, and torsion factor in the throats of the welds as line functions from
Figure 16-15, part 9.
2
in
Aw OD Aw 10.996
in
2 3
OD in
S w S w 9.621
4 in
3 4
OD in
Jw Jw 33.674
4 in
3. The weld has a combined bending and torsion load. The maximum stress will occur at the top, center of the
pipe at the wall. There will be a direct shear component, a bending component, and a torsional moment
component.
F lbf
fs fs 68.209
Aw in
M kip
M F l fb fb 0.682
Sw in
6. Find the unit load due to the torsional moment.

T OD kip
T F a ft ft 0.273
2 Jw in
7. Find the magnitude of the resultant unit load at the critical point ( fs is in the negative y-direction, f b is in the
positive x-direction, and ft is in the negative z-direction).
2 2 2 kip
Total unit load: FR fs fb ft FR 0.738
in
8. From Table 16-5a, a Category F joint has a shear stress-range endurance strength of S ers 8 ksi. Using the
given safety factor, the allowable shear stress is
P1607a.xmcd
S ers
Allowable shear stress: allow allow 5.333 ksi
Nfr
FR
t w 1.414 t
allow
t 0.138 in w 0.196 in Say w = 1/4 in
P1607a.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-8
Statement: Figure P16-3 shows a bracket machined from 12-mm-thick A572 Grade 50 hot-rolled steel flat
stock. It is welded to a support with a fillet weld all around using an E80 electrode. Determine
the fillet weld size needed between the bracket and the support for a static load of P = 12 kN.
Given: Distance from support to point D a 200 mm

Bracket dims: d 75 mm b 12 mm
Electrode: Exx 80 ksi Exx 552 MPa
Load: P 12 kN
shear stress is max 0.3 Exx , max 165 MPa. Consider the weld as a line. The weld pattern
1. Determine the shear area and bending factor, in the throats of the welds as line functions from Figure 16-15,
part 7.
2
mm
Aw 2 b 2 d Aw 174
mm
2 3
d mm
S w b d S w 2775
3 mm
2. The weld has a combined bending and shear load. The maximum stress will occur at the top, center of the
bracket at the support. There will be a direct shear component and a bending component.
P kN
fs fs 0.069
Aw mm
M kN
M P a fb fb 0.865
Sw mm
5. Find the magnitude of the resultant unit load at the critical point.
2 2 kN
Total unit load: FR fs fb FR 0.868
mm
FR
t w 1.414 t
max
t 5.24 mm w 7.41 mm Say w = 8 mm
P1608.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-9
Statement: Figure P16-3 shows a bracket machined from 12-mm-thick A572 Grade 50 hot-rolled steel flat
stock. It is welded to a support with a fillet weld all around using an E90 electrode. Determine
the fillet weld size needed between the bracket and the support for a dynamic load that varies
from 0 to +3 kN using a safety factor of 1.8.
Given: Distance from support to point D a 200 mm

Bracket dims: d 75 mm b 12 mm
Load: F 3 kN Nfr 1.8
1. Determine the dynamic load range.
F F 0 kN F 3 kN
2. Determine the shear area and bending factor, in the throats of the welds as line functions from Figure 16-15,
part 7.
2
mm
Aw 2 b 2 d Aw 174
mm
2 3
d mm
S w b d S w 2775
3 mm
3. The weld has a combined bending and shear load. The maximum stress will occur at the top, center of the
bracket at the support. There will be a direct shear component and a bending component.
F kN
fs fs 0.017
Aw mm

M kN
M F a fb fb 0.216
Sw mm
6. Find the magnitude of the resultant unit load at the critical point.
2 2 kN
Total unit load: FR fs fb FR 0.217
mm
8. From Table 16-5b, a Category F joint has a shear stress-range endurance strength of S ers 55 MPa. Using
the given safety factor, the allowable shear stress is
S ers
Allowable shear stress: allow allow 30.6 MPa
Nfr
FR
t w 1.414 t
allow
t 7.099 mm w 10.037 mm Say w = 10 mm
P1609.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-10
Statement: Two 8-mm-thick by 50-mm-wide, A572 Grade 42 steel straps are welded together with fillet
welds in a lap joint using an E70 electrode. The tensile load on the straps is 45 kN. What is
your recommended weld size for the two full-length welds?
Given: Straps: T 8 mm W 50 mm S y 345 MPa

Load: P 45 kN
Assumptions: Each weld will carry half the load and will fail in shear along the weld throat and, from equation
16-1, the maximum allowable shear stress is max 0.3 Exx , max 145 MPa
Solution: See Figures 16-2 and 16-3, Table 16-1, and Mathcad file P1610.
1. Determine the transverse load carried by each weld.
P
Transverse load on weld Pt Pt 22.5 kN
2
2. Determine the shear area in the throats of the welds as a function of t and then solve for t using equation 16.1.
Ashear Pt
Ashear = W t t= and xy = max =
W Ashear
Pt
Solving for t, t t 3.1 mm
W max
3. Convert this throat dimension to a leg width w assuming an equal-leg fillet.

t
Leg width w w 4.4 mm
cos( 45 deg)
4. Check this against the recommended minimum weld size for this thickness strap. Table 16-2 indicates that a
8-mm-thick part needs at least a 5-mm weld leg width, so increase the weld leg width to 5 mm. Set w 5 mm
5. Check whether this value for w gives an acceptable safety factor against yielding in the fused base metal.
The shear area on the leg along the width of the welds is Afusion W w , and, from Table 16-3 the yield
strength of the base metal is S y 290 MPa. The shear yield strength of the base metal is S sy 0.577 S y .
The factor of safety against yielding in the fused base metal is:
S sy Afusion Afusion
Nyield = = S sy Nyield S sy Nyield 1.9
xy Pt Pt
2
where Afusion 250 mm and S sy 167 MPa
This is slightly less than the safety factor against static failure in the weld (see Table 16-1) but is acceptable.
P1610.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-11
Statement: Two 8-mm-thick by 50-mm-wide, A572 Grade 42 steel straps are welded together with fillet welds
in a lap joint using an E70 electrode. Determine the fillet weld size needed for a dynamic load
that varies from 0 to +12 kN using a safety factor of 1.5 for an infinite life of the two full-length
welds.
Given: Straps: T 8 mm W 50 mm S ut 485 MPa

Load: Fmin 0 kN Fmax 12 kN Nfrs 1.5
Assumptions: Each weld will carry half the load and will fail in shear along the weld throat. Since the weld
takes the load directly this is a Category F weldment.
1. Determine the dynamic load range per weld.
Fmax Fmin
F F 6 kN
2
2. From Table 16-5b, a Category F joint has a shear stress-range endurance strength of S ers 55 MPa.
Using the given safety factor, the allowable shear stress is
S ers
Nfrs
3. Using equation 4.9, solve for the allowable shear area and the resulting minimum value of the throat
dimension t.
Allowable shear area F 2
on each throat Ashear Ashear 163.6 mm
allow
Minimum throat Ashear

dimension t t 3.273 mm
W

t
cos( 45 deg)
5. Check this against the recommended minimum weld size for this thickness strap. Table 16-2 indicates that a
8-mm-thick part needs at least a 5-mm weld leg width, so increase the weld leg width to 5 mm. Set w 5 mm
6. Check whether this value for w gives an acceptable safety factor against fatigue failure in the fused base
metal by assuming that this is a Category C weldment. The most likely point of failure is at the weld toe.
The weld leg area is Afusion W w , and, from Table 16-5b the endurance strength is S er 69 MPa
Fmax
Max stress at toe of toe toe 24 MPa
each weld 2 Afusion
Factor of safety S er
in base metal Nf Nf 2.9
toe
Since Nf is larger than Nfrs, the initial assumption that this was a Category F weldment was correct.
P1611.xmcd
PROBLEM 16-12
Statement: Two 12-mm-thick by 50-mm-wide, weldable aluminum straps are welded together with fillet
welds in a lap joint using an aluminum electrode. Determine the fillet weld size needed for a
dynamic load that varies from 0 to +5 kN using a safety factor of 2.0 for an infinite life of the two
full-length welds.
Given: Straps: T 12 mm W 50 mm
Load: Fmin 0 kN Fmax 5 kN Nfrs 2.0
Assumptions: Each weld will carry half the load and will fail in shear along the weld throat. Since the weld
takes the load directly this is a Category F weldment.
1. Determine the dynamic load range per weld.
Fmax Fmin
F F 2.5 kN
2
2. From Table 16-5b and the notation in the text that the values in Table 16-5 can be reduced by a factor of
three for aluminum, a Category F joint has a shear stress-range endurance strength of S ers 0.333 55 MPa
S ers 18.3 MPa. Using the given safety factor, the allowable shear stress is
S ers
Nfrs
3. Using equation 4.9, solve for the allowable shear area and the resulting minimum value of the throat
dimension t.
Allowable shear area F 2
on each throat Ashear Ashear 273 mm
allow
Minimum throat Ashear

dimension t t 5.46 mm
W

t
cos( 45 deg)
5. Check this against the recommended minimum weld size for this thickness strap. Table 16-2 indicates that
a 12-mm-thick part needs at least a 5-mm weld leg width. The calculated leg width is adequate but increase
it to the next higher mm integer. Set w 8 mm
6. Check whether this value for w gives an acceptable safety factor against fatigue failure in the fused base
metal by assuming that this is a Category C weldment. The most likely point of failure is at the weld toe.
The weld leg area is Afusion W w , and, from Table 16-5b the endurance strength is
S er 0.333 69 MPa
S er 23.0 MPa
Fmax
Max stress at toe of toe toe 6.25 MPa
each weld 2 Afusion
Factor of safety S er
in base metal Nf Nf 3.7
toe
Since Nf is larger than Nfrs, the initial assumption that this was a Category F weldment was correct.
P1612.xmcd
PROBLEM 17-1
Statement: Find the torque that a 2-surface, dry disk clutch can transmit if the outside and inside lining
diameters are 120 mm and 70 mm, respectively, and the applied axial force is 10 kn. Assume
uniform wear and m = 0.4. Is the pressure on the lining acceptable? What lining materials
would be suitable?
Given: Number of surfaces Ns 2 Clutch dimensions:

Axial force F 10 kN Outside diameter od 120 mm
Friction coefficient 0.4 Inside diameter id 70 mm
Assumptions: Uniform wear model.
1. Calculate the outside and inside radii of the disk.

Outside radius ro 0.5 od ro 60 mm
Inside radius ri 0.5 id ri 35 mm
ro ri
2. Using equation 17.6, calculate the torque capacity. T Ns F T 380 N m
2
3. Calculate the maximum lining pressure using equation 17.5a.
F
Maximum pressure p max
2 ri ro ri
p max 1819 kPa
4. From Table 17-1, we see that either a molded or sintered metal lining are suitable.
PROBLEM 17-2
Statement: Find the torque that a 2-surface, dry disk clutch can transmit if the outside and inside lining
diameters are 120 mm and 70 mm, respectively, and the applied axial force is 10 kn. Assume
uniform pressure and = 0.4. Is the pressure on the lining acceptable? What lining materials
would be suitable?
Given: Number of surfaces Ns 2 Clutch dimensions:

Axial force F 10 kN Outside diameter od 120 mm
Friction coefficient 0.4 Inside diameter id 70 mm
Assumptions: Uniform pressure model.
1. Calculate the outside and inside radii of the disk.

Outside radius ro 0.5 od ro 60 mm
Inside radius ri 0.5 id ri 35 mm
3 3
2 ro ri
2. Using equation 17.3, calculate the torque capacity. T Ns F T 389 N m
3 2 2
ro ri
3. Calculate the lining pressure using equation 17.2c.
3 T
Maximum pressure p p 1340 kPa
Ns ro ri
2 3 3
4. From Table 17-1, we see that either a molded or sintered metal lining are suitable.
PROBLEM 17-3
Statement: Design a single-surface disk clutch to transmit 100 N-m of torque at 750 rpm using a molded
lining with a maximum pressure of 1000 kPa and = 0.25. Assume uniform wear. Find the
outside and inside diameters required if ri = 0.577 ro. What is the power transmitted?
Given: Number of surfaces Ns 1 Torque capacity T 100 N m
Friction coefficient 0.25 Maximum pressure p max 1000 kPa
Disk radius factor fr 0.577 Rotational speed 750 rpm
1. Use equation 17.5b and the disk radius factor to solve for the required outside and inside radii.
T = ri p max ro ri
2 2
ri = fr ro
1
3
ro T ro 69.16 mm
2
fr p max 1 fr
Round this to ro 70 mm
Then, the inside radius is ri fr ro ri 40.39 mm
Round this to ri 40 mm
2. Convert the radii to diameters.
Outside diameter od 2 ro od 140 mm
Inside diameter id 2 ri id 80 mm
3. Calculate the maximum transmitted power.
Transmitted power H T H 7.85 kW
PROBLEM 17-4
Statement: Design a single-surface disk clutch to transmit 100 N-m of torque at 750 rpm using a molded
lining with a maximum pressure of 1000 kPa and = 0.25. Assume uniform pressure. Find the
outside and inside diameters required if ri = 0.577 ro. What is the power transmitted?
Given: Number of surfaces Ns 1 Torque capacity T 100 N m
Friction coefficient 0.25 Maximum pressure p 1000 kPa
Disk radius factor fr 0.577 Rotational speed 750 rpm
1. Use equation 17.2c and the disk radius factor to solve for the required outside and inside radii.
p ro ri
2 3 3
T=
3 Ns ri = fr ro
1
3
3 T
ro ro 61.832 mm
3
2 p N s 1 f r
Round this to ro 62 mm
Then, the inside radius is ri fr ro ri 35.774 mm
Round this to ri 36 mm
PROBLEM 17-5
Statement: How many surfaces are needed in a wet disk clutch to transmit 120 N-m of torque at 1000 rpm
using a sintered lining with a maximum pressure of 1800 kPa and = 0.06. Assume uniform
wear. Find the outside and inside diameters required if ri = 0.577 ro. How many disks are
needed? What is the power transmitted?
Given: Friction coefficient 0.06 Torque capacity T 120 N m
Disk radius factor fr 0.577 Maximum pressure p max 1800 kPa
Rotational speed 1000 rpm
Design Choices:
The number of surfaces depends on the disk dimensions. Let ri 30 mm

ri
1. Calculate the outside radius. ro ro 51.993 mm ro 52 mm
fr

3. Calculate the required axial force using equation 17.5a.
Axial force F 2 ri p max ro ri F 7.464 kN
4. Using equation 17.6, calculate the number of friction surfaces required.

2 T
Number surfaces Ns ceil
Ns 7
F ro ri
PROBLEM 17-6
Statement: How many surfaces are needed in a wet disk clutch to transmit 120 N-m of torque at 1000 rpm
using a sintered lining with a maximum pressure of 1800 kPa and = 0.06. Assume uniform
pressure. Find the outside and inside diameters required if ri = 0.577 ro. How many disks are
needed? What is the power transmitted?
Given: Friction coefficient 0.06 Torque capacity T 120 N m
Disk radius factor fr 0.577 Pressure p 1800 kPa
Rotational speed 1000 rpm
Design Choices:
The number of surfaces depends on the disk dimensions. Let ri 30 mm

ri
1. Calculate the outside radius. ro ro 51.993 mm ro 52 mm
fr

3. Calculate the required axial force using equation 17.1b.
F p ro ri
2 2
Axial force F 10.201 kN
4. Using equation 17.3, calculate the number of friction surfaces required.
3 T ro2 ri2
Number surfaces Ns ceil
Ns 5
F r 3 r 3
2 o i
PROBLEM 17-7
Statement: Figure P17-1 shows a single short-shoe drum brake. Find its torque capacity and required
actuating force for the dimensions given below. What value of c will make it self-locking?
Given: Pivot to load a 100mm Drum radius r 30 mm
Pivot to y-axis b 70 mm Drum width w 50 mm
Pivot to x-axis e 20 mm Shoe angle 35 deg
Maximum pressure p max 1300 kPa Friction coeff. 0.3
Assumptions: Short-shoe theory is appropriate. The drum rotates CCW.

1. Determine the normal force on the drum from equation 17.8.
Normal force Fn p max r w Fn 1.191 kN
2. Use equation 17.10 to calculate the torque capacity.

Torque capacity T Fn r T 10.7 N m
3. Determine the required actuating force from equation 17.11b and the brake geometry.
Distance c c r e c 10 mm
b c
Actuation force Fa Fn Fa 798 N
a
4. Check to see if the brake is self-locking using the relationship given in the text.
self_locking return "yes" if c b

"no" otherwise
self_locking "no"
5. Calculate the value of c that would make the brake self-locking use the above relationship.
b
Value of c to self-lock clock clock 233.3 mm

PROBLEM 17-8
Maximum pressure p max 1300 kPa Friction coefficient 0.3
Assumptions: Short-shoe theory is appropriate. The drum rotates CW.

Normal force Fn p max r w Fn 1.191 kN

Torque capacity T Fn r T 10.7 N m
3. Determine the required actuating force from equation 17.11b and the brake geometry modified for CW rotation.
b c
Actuation force Fa Fn Fa 870 N
a
4. Since the brake is not self-energizing with CW rotation, it cannot be self-locking for any value of c.
PROBLEM 17-9
Given: Pivot to load a 8.00 in Drum radius r 5.00 in

Pivot to y-axis b 6.00 in Drum width w 1.50 in
Pivot to x-axis e 4.00 in Shoe angle 30 deg
Maximum pressure p max 250 psi Friction coeff. 0.35

Normal force Fn p max r w Fn 981.7 lbf

Torque capacity T Fn r T 1718 in lbf
Distance c c r e c 1.000 in
b c
Actuation force Fa Fn Fa 693 lbf
a
4. Check to see if the brake is self-locking using the relationship given in the text.
self_locking return "yes" if c b

"no" otherwise
self_locking "no"
5. Calculate the value of c that would make the brake self-locking use the above relationship.
b
Value of c to self-lock clock clock 17.1 in

PROBLEM 17-10
Given: Pivot to load a 8.00 in Drum radius r 5.00 in

Pivot to y-axis b 6.00 in Drum width w 1.50 in
Pivot to x-axis e 4.00 in Shoe angle 30 deg
Maximum pressure p max 250 psi Friction coeff. 0.35
Assumptions: Short-shoe theory is appropriate. The drum rotates CW.

Normal force Fn p max r w Fn 981.7 lbf

Torque capacity T Fn r T 1718 in lbf
3. Determine the required actuating force from equation 17.11b and the brake geometry modified for CW rotation.
Distance c c r e c 1.000 in
b c
Actuation force Fa Fn Fa 779 lbf
a
4. Since the brake is not self-energizing with CW rotation, it cannot be self-locking for any value of c.
PROBLEM 17-11
Statement: Figure P17-2 shows a double short-shoe drum brake. Find its torque capacity and required
actuating force for the dimensions given below. What value of c will make it self-locking? Hint:
Calculate the effects of each shoe separately and superpose them.

Maximum pressure p max 1500 kPa Friction coefficient 0.25

Top shoe - self energizing
Normal force Fn1 p max r w Fn1 1.571 kN

Torque capacity T1 Fn1 r T1 15.71 N m
b c
Actuation force Fa Fn1 Fa 1353

Machine Design Solution Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Design Solution Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MACHINE DESIGN - An Integrated Approach, 4th Ed.

Goal Statement: Create a mouse-free environment.

1. Cost less than $1.00 per use or application.

Goal Statement: Create a means to allow a quadriplegic to bowl.

1. Cost no more than $2 000.

1. Cost no more than $1 000.

Given: Mass M := 1000

Solution: See Mathcad file P0104.

Slugs M = 31.081 slug

Blobs M = 2.59 blob

Solution: See Mathcad file P0105.

Convert mass to slugs: M = 7.770 slug

Assumptions: The mass is at sea-level and the gravitational acceleration is

Solution: See Mathcad file P0106.

The mass, in slugs, is M 6.85 slug

The mass, in blobs, is M 0.571 blob

The mass, in lbm, is M 220.5 lb

Note: Mathcad uses lbf for pound-force, and lb for pound-mass.

The weight, in lbf, is W M g W 220.5 lbf

The weight, in N, is W M g W 980.7 N

3. Hollow circle, let:

Moment about x-axis Ix

Moment about y-axis Iy

Polar moment of inertia Jz

4. Solid semicircle, let:

Distances to centroid a 0.4244 R a 0.637 in

5. Right triangle, let:

Moment about x-axis Ix

Moment about y-axis Iy

Moment about z-axis Iz

Moment about y-axis Iy

Moment about z-axis Iz

3. Hollow cylinder, let:

Moment about x-axis Ix

Moment about y-axis Iy

Moment about z-axis Iz

4. Right circular cone, let:

Moment about y-axis Iy M

Moment about z-axis Iz M

Solution: See inside front cover and Mathcad file P0109.

3. Hollow circle: Area A ( D d )

Moment about x-axis Ix( D d )

Moment about y-axis Iy( D d )

Moment about x-axis Ix( a b c )

Moment about y-axis Iy( a b c )

Moment about z-axis Iz( a b c )

Moment about y-axis Iy( r L )

Moment about z-axis Iz( r L )

Moment about x-axis Ix( a b L )

Moment about y-axis Iy( a b L )

Moment about z-axis Iz( a b L )

Moment about y-axis I ( r h ) M ( r h )

Moment about z-axis Iz( r h ) M ( r h )

Solution: See Figure P2-1 and Mathcad file P0201.

P2-1 (a) has the largest modulus of resilience

Solution: See Figure P2-1 and Mathcad file P0202.

Given: Young's modulus for steel E 207 GPa

Steel Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain

Given: Young's modulus for aluminum E 71.7 GPa

Alum Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain

Solution: See Figure 2-22 and Mathcad file P0205.

Plastic Yield Strength Ultimate Strength Fracture Strain Mod of Elasticity

Given: Elastic limit: Strength S el 414 MPa Strain el 0.002

Test specimen: Diameter d o 12.8 mm Length Lo 50 mm